MPL Theoretical KnowledgeTraining Curriculum June 2022
Uploaded by
surafel amareMPL Theoretical KnowledgeTraining Curriculum June 2022
Uploaded by
surafel amareETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM
Fourth Revision
June 2022
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY (EAA)
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM
JUNE 2022
Ethiopian Airlines
Ethiopian Aviation Academy
P.O. Box 1755
Addis Ababa
Ethiopia
Telephone: +251-11-517-8127/237
Fax +251-11-661-14-74
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
Approval Page
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 General ii | x x i i
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
Table of Contents
0. GENERAL ............................................................................................................ 1
0.1. Manual Control .................................................................................................... 1
0.1.1. Manual Control page ...................................................................................... 1
0.1.2. List of Effective Pages ..................................................................................... 2
0.1.3. Distribution List ............................................................................................. 3
0.1.4. Amendment Records ...................................................................................... 4
0.1.5. Amendment and Revision process .................................................................... 6
0.1.6. Amendment Proposal Form ............................................................................. 7
0.1.7. Revision Transmission .................................................................................... 8
0.1.8. Revision Transmittal Sheet .............................................................................. 9
0.1.9. Revision Cycle ............................................................................................. 10
0.1.10. Effective Date ........................................................................................... 10
0.2. Introduction ...................................................................................................... 11
0.2.1. Preface ....................................................................................................... 11
0.2.2. Major Changes Made to this Curriculum .......................................................... 11
0.2.3. Program Structure ....................................................................................... 12
1. GROUND TRAINING PHASE I ............................................................................... xv
1.1. PTS/PL101: INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS ....................................................................................................... 1
1.2. PTS/PL102: RULES OF THE AIR ............................................................................. 3
1.3. PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION ....................................................... 8
1.4. PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS............................................................... 19
1.5. PTS/PL222: PROPELLERS .................................................................................... 29
1.6. PTS/PL223: FLIGHT MECHANICS ......................................................................... 32
1.7. PTS/PL111: System design ,loads ,stresses, maintenance ...................................... 36
1.8. PTS/PL112: AIRFRAME ....................................................................................... 38
1.1. PTS/PL113: HYDRAULICS ................................................................................... 42
1.2. PTS/PL114: LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES .......................................... 45
1.3. PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS ........................................................................... 49
1.4. PTS/PL116: ANTI-ICING AND DE-ICING SYSTEMS ................................................. 55
1.5. PTS/PL117: FUEL SYSTEM .................................................................................. 56
1.6. PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics ............................................................................... 59
1.7. PTS/PL119: PISTON ENGINE ............................................................................... 69
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 General iii | x x i i
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
1.8. PTS/PL121: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS ........................................................ 77
1.9. PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS ......................................... 82
1.10. PTS/PL123: MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS AND FLUX VALVE ......... 89
1.11. PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS ........................................................ 92
1.12. PTS/PL181: THE ATMOSPHERE ...................................................................... 97
1.13. PTS/PL182: WIND ...................................................................................... 102
1.14. PTS/PL183: THERMODYNAMICS ................................................................... 106
1.15. PTS/PL184: CLOUDS AND FOG .................................................................... 108
1.16. PTS/PL185: PRECIPITATION ........................................................................ 110
1.17. PTS/PL191: BASICS OF NAVIGATION ........................................................... 111
1.18. PTS/PL192: CHARTS................................................................................... 115
1.19. PTS/PL193: VISUAL FLIGHT RULE (VFR) NAVIGATION .................................... 117
1.20. PTS/PL193: Triangle of velocity (TOV) .......................................................... 119
1.21. PTS/PL131: C-172 AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING ........................................... 122
1.22. PTS/PL132: DIAMOND DA-40 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING....................... 124
1.23. PTS/PL241: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS I ............................................. 126
2. GROUND TRAINING PHASE II............................................................................ 130
2.1. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS .................................... 132
2.2. PTS/PL 105: AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS) ................................. 137
2.3. PTS/PL 106: AIRCRAFT SEARCH AND RESCUE & ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION .......... 140
2.4. PTS/PL 224: STABILITY .................................................................................... 144
2.5. PTS/PL 225: CONTROL ..................................................................................... 150
2.6. PTS/PL 226: LIMITATIONS ................................................................................ 154
2.7. PTS/PL121: AUTOPILOT INTRODUCTION ............................................................ 157
2.8. PTS/PL122: AUTOPILOT SYSTEM ....................................................................... 159
2.9. PTS/PL123: Flight director: design and operation ................................................ 163
2.10. PTS/PL124: Aeroplane: flight mode annunciator (FMA) ................................... 165
2.11. PTS/PL125: Auto land ................................................................................. 166
2.12. PTS/PL186: AIR MASS AND FRONTS ............................................................ 169
2.6 PTS/PL187: PRESSURE SYSTEMS ...................................................................... 172
2.7 PTS/PL188: CLIMATOLOGY ............................................................................... 174
2.13. PTS/PL251: BASIC PRINCIPLE OF RADIO NAVIGATION ................................... 177
2.14. PTS/PL252: ANTENNAS ............................................................................... 180
2.15. PTS/PL253: WAVE PROPAGATION ................................................................ 181
2.16. PTS/PL254: RADIO NAVIGATIONAL AIDS ...................................................... 183
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 General iv | x x i i
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
2.17. PTS/PL281: HUMAN FACTORS (BASIC CONCEPTS) ......................................... 189
2.18. PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY ................................................ 191
2.19. PTS/PL133: DIAMOND DA-42 NG AIRCRAFT TYPE TRAINING .......................... 201
2.20. PTS/PL242 : AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS II ............................................ 203
2.21. PTS/PL291: Fundamentals of radio communication......................................... 205
2.22. PTS/PL292: Departure Communication ......................................................... 208
2.23. PTS/PL293: Enroute Communications ........................................................... 212
2.24. PTS/PL294: Arrival Communications ............................................................. 214
2.25. PTS/PL295: Abnormal and Emergency Communication ................................... 216
3. GROUND TRAINING PHASE III .......................................................................... 218
3.1. PTS/PL107: AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES AND AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT .................... 220
3.2. PTS/PL227: SPEEDS ........................................................................................ 233
3.3. PTS/PL228: Shock waves ................................................................................. 235
3.4. PTS/PL229: Critical Mach number (MCRIT) ......................................................... 236
3.5. PTS/PL2211: High speed stall ............................................................................ 238
3.6. PTS/PL2212: Shock stall ................................................................................... 241
3.7. PTS/PL261 PURPOSE OF MASS-AND-BALANCE CONSIDERATIONS ......................... 243
3.8. PTS/PL262 LOADING ........................................................................................ 244
3.9. PTS/PL263 MASS-AND-BALANCE DETAILS OF AIRCRAFT ...................................... 246
3.10. PTS/PL263 Determination of CG position .................................................... 248
3.11. PTS/PL265 CARGO HANDLING ..................................................................... 251
3.12. PTS/PL271 AEROPLANES General Performance legislation .............................. 252
3.13. PTS/PL272 CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — THEORY ...................... 256
3.14. PTS/PL1110: TURBINE ENGINES .................................................................. 269
3.15. PTS/PL123: ADVANCED FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS ............................................. 277
3.16. PTS/PL 189: FLIGHT HAZARDS .................................................................... 296
3.7 PTS/PL1810: METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION .................................................. 301
3.17. PTS/PL251: Instrument landing system (ILS) ................................................ 305
3.18. PTS/PL252: Microwave landing system (MLS) ................................................ 309
3.19. PTS/PL253: RADAR .................................................................................... 311
3.20. PTS/PL254: GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSSs) .................... 315
3.21. PTS/PL255: PERFORMANCE-BASED NAVIGATION (PBN) .................................. 320
3.22. PTS/PL256: AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS – PANS-OPS FLIGHT PROCEDURES ........... 325
3.23. PTS/PL283: BASIC AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY .................................................. 335
3.24. PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING for VFR ......................................................... 344
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 General v|xxii
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
3.25. PTS/PL302: FLIGHT PLANNING FOR IFR FLIGHTS........................................... 346
3.26. PTS/PL303: Fuel planning ........................................................................... 350
3.27. PTS/PL30: FLIGHT MONITORING AND IN-FLIGHT REPLANNING ....................... 354
3.28. PTS/PL311: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES ................ 356
3.29. PTS/PL312: Long-range flights .................................................................... 371
3.30. PTS/PL313: SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND HAZARDS — GENERAL
ASPECTS ............................................................................................................... 379
3.31. PTS/PL314: Security (unlawful events) ......................................................... 387
3.32. PTS/PL315: Transport of dangerous goods by air ........................................... 390
3.33. PTS/PL108: AVIATION SECURITY ................................................................. 394
3.34. PTS/PL243: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS III ............................................ 397
4. GROUND TRAINING PHASE IV (Optional) ............................................................ 399
4.1. PTS/PL555: B 737 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS ......................................................... 400
4.2. PTS/PL556: BOMBARDIER Q-400 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS .................................... 403
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 General vi | x x i i
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
0. GENERAL
0.1. Manual Control
0.1.1. Manual Control page
Copy No: _____________________
Held by: ______________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
0.1.2. List of Effective Pages
Part Phase Stages Page No. Rev. No
0 General - 0-1 to 0-18 4
I - 1-1 to 1-129 4
I II - 2-1 to 2-83 4
(Ground Training) III - 3-1 to 3-139 4
IV - 4-1 to 4-6 4
1 1-1 to 1-31 4
2 2-1 to 2-42 4
I (Common) 3 3-1 to 3-47 4
4 4-1 to 4-123 4
5 5-1 to 5-40 4
6 6-1 to 6-44 4
II
7 7-1 to 7-45 4
(Flight Training) II (B-737NG)
8A 8-1 to 8-44 4
8B 8-45 to 8-81 4
6 6-1 to 6-46 4
7 7-1 to 7-46 4
II (Q-400)
8A 8-1 to 8A-40 4
8B 8-41 to 8B-75 4
Table 0-1: List of Effective Pages
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
0.1.3. Distribution List
Control and distribution of all copies of this Curriculum Manual is placed with Head Training
Standards & Development.
Hard copy of this manual is held as per the following distribution list. However, all other
stakeholders can access an approved soft (electronic) copy of this curriculum on Ethiopian
Aviation Academy portal under the Head Training Standards & Development section, in the
folder “Approved Curriculums.”
Copy
Holder File type
Nº
01 Ethiopian Civil Aviation Authority Original
Table 0-2: Copy Holder’s List
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
0.1.4. Amendment Records
The following Table shows the latest revision status of the contents in this curriculum manual.
Rev. No. Date Reason for Change Signature
0 September 2011
1 October 2014
2 September 2016 1. The Curriculum for Q-
1. Inclusion of Q-400 MPL
400 is incorporated
Training
similar to the B-737
2. To streamline the ground
NG
training in accordance with
2. The theoretical
EASA theoretical
knowledge training
Knowledge training
has been revised in
syllabus and detailed
accordance with EASA
learning objectives
Annex II to ED
Decision 2016/008/R
3. Theoretical
knowledge courses
have been rearranged
to be covered before
starting flight training
4. Manual control section
is reordered, and
additional columns for
reasons of change and
changes made are
added
5. Tables are labeled
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
3 March 2019 1. To include C-172 aircraft 1. C-172 aircraft has
as training equipment for been incorporated as
MPL Training training equipment
for MPL Training
2. To revise learning lessons
to make the training more 2. learning lessons have
effective been revised for flight
training stages 6 and
3. To make the curriculum
7 to make it more
current
effective
3. Theoretical training
courses are
rearranged for
effective logical flow
and ease of
navigation
4 1. Lesson plans have
1. To revise learning
been rearranged
lessons to make the
to enhance
training more effective
effectiveness.
2. To enhance safety and
2. Safety and quality
quality of training
are enhanced by
adding additional
lesson and by
rearranging the
flight hours.
Table 0-3: List of Effective Pages
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.1.1. Amendment and Revision process
i. The curriculum revision may be initiated by instructors, trainees, Pilot Training school
Management, Training Standards & development Section and other stakeholders.
ii. Head Pilot Training shall compile comments for the revision of the curriculum as
observed by instructors, trainees and any other stakeholders affected by the training.
iii. Head Pilot Training shall send compiled comments and suggestions to the Training
Standards and Development Section as soon as received.
iv. Upon receipt of the request for curriculum revision, the Training Standards &
Development Section shall determine the need and scope of the revision.
v. The Training Standards & Development Section shall retain these comments and
suggestions to be used as inputs for revision
vi. Once the need for revision of the curriculum is evident, Head Training Standards &
Development shall establish curriculum revision team.
vii. The Team shall work on revising content, training duration, learning objectives, mode
of instruction, learning teaching strategies, evaluation methods, etc. as appropriate.
viii. The draft curriculum shall be sent to training sections and other stakeholders (if
required), for their review and approval.
ix. Curriculum approval will include at minimum the involvement and approval of the
Head of Training. Once the curriculum is approved, a copy shall be transmitted to the
respective training sections for implementation.
x. The curriculum shall be strictly implemented starting from the effective date indicated
in the curriculum.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.1.2. Amendment Proposal Form
Proposed amendment: (continue on separate sheet if necessary)
Reasons for amendment:
Signature of proposer:
Position: __________________
Authorized by:
_______________
________________
Guidelines on the completion of this form:
1. Proposed amendments to this curriculum will only be considered if submitted on this form.
2. This form shall be completed and signed by the concerned stake holder and submitted to
respective training section head for comments and approval.
3. The training section head then hands the proposal to Head Training Standards & Development
for revision.
4. The final decision on amendments to this Manual rests with Head Training Standards & Dev’t.
The Academy reserves the right to amend any proposal.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.1.3. Revision Transmission
1. Head Training Standards * Development (TS&D) shall transmit revisions to all manual holders.
Acknowledgment of receipt and insertion of revision by all Manual holders shall also be followed
up and record kept by Head Training Standards & Development.
2. All such amendments or revisions shall be issued to all personnel that are required to use this
curriculum.
3. This revision reflects the most current information available to the PTS through the subject
revision date. The following revision highlights explain changes in this revision:
a. Temporary revision - Temporary revisions shall be issued pending final revisions per
the distribution list to all manual holders. Temporary revision record shall be filed
between the list of effective pages and contents of the affected chapter.
b. Emergency revision - This method is used for revisions that are urgent and need to be
immediately circulated pending revision or incorporation in the relevant section of the
manual. Emergency revisions shall be transmitted to all manual holders electronically,
by fax or by any other means of fast communication.
c. Identification and location of revisions-Temporary revisions printed on yellow papers
shall be issued pending final revisions. The temporary revision record shall be filed
between the list of effective pages and contents of the affected chapter. Current
revisions and copy revisions can be obtained from the Training Standards &
Development office.
d. Pages containing revised material have revision bars associated with the changed text
or illustration. Editorial revisions (for example, spelling corrections) may have revision
bars with no associated highlight.
e. Retain this record in manual. Up on receipt of revision, insert revised pages in manual
and enters the revision number, revision date and filed date in the appropriate block.
f. Revision markers/identifiers are not placed mainly because every page has been
affected by the revision.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.1.4. Revision Transmittal Sheet
Transmittal Chapter/ Effective Cancel/supersedes Date Entered by
No. Section date (insert old effective date inserted (name & initial)
if any)
Table 0-4: Amendment Records
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.1.5. Revision Cycle
This curriculum is subject to revision every two years. However, it can be revised
earlier if there is a change in the regulatory requirements, other industry developments
and urgent need from the user department, as deemed necessary based on the
training needs analysis.
2.1.6. Effective Date
The effective date of this curriculum is July, 2022
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.2. Introduction
2.2.1. Preface
The Pilot Training School of Ethiopian Airlines is long known for producing
competent and professional pilots renowned for their professionalism and excellent
safety culture and high skill.
It is to be recalled that EAA has been undergoing MPL training program since 2011.
The MPL training started with training pilots rated on B737NG. At the later stage,
following the acquisition of DHC-8 (Q-400) by the airline, the training has
incorporated the Q-400 rating into the MPL training following the acquisition of
simulator for the training.
Ethiopian always believes that quality training is the basis for quality service. By
evaluating and analyzing the existing training program, by researching new
developments in the industry and observing changes in the regulatory body
requirements, benchmarking best industry practices, Ethiopian Aviation Academy
(EAA) has been revising the training curricula from time to time. To meet the
increasing demand for pilots in the industry, it is paramount to make the training
more effective and efficient by implementing different technologies and methods.
Every effort has been made to fulfill ECAA, ICAO and EASA requirements for MPL
training. The theoretical knowledge (Ground) training fulfills the ATPL requirements
of ECAA and all other regulatory bodies.
2.2.2. Major Changes Made to this Curriculum
The curriculum revision was initiated by both Manager MPL and Head PTS.
The acquisition of sufficient number of C-172 aircraft necessitated the need to incorporate
such aircraft in MPL training for stages 1-5 to make the training more efficient.
In addition, some critical skills of the flight training have been identified and needed to be
revised in stages 6 and 7 of flight training.
Subject matter experts from PTS and Manager MPL and Cadet Training of Flight Ops have
been actively involved in the revision of the curriculum.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
2.2.3. Program Structure
The EAA MPL Training Program is consisting of:
Theoretical Knowledge 870 Hours
FTD/Simulator training 300 Hours
MPL Flight training 96.5 Hours
The Theoretical Knowledge (Ground) Training can be covered before flight training and is
divided in to four phases for ease of instruction starting from basics followed by more
advanced courses.
PTS/PL- Pilot Training School Pilot License.
Training Time
Corse Code Corse Name
Phase I Phase II Phase III Phase IV Total
PTS/PL 010 Air Law 35 21 35 91
PTS/PL 011 Airframe, Electrics, Power 56 0 21 77
plant and Systems
PTS/PL 012 Instrumentation 14 21 28 63
Type Training (C172 or DA- **20
PTS/PL 013 21 21 0 42
40)
PTS/PL 014 Mass and Balance 0 0 35 35
PTS/ PL 015 Aero plane Performance 0 0 49 49
PTS/PL 016 Flight Planning and Monitoring 0 0 35 35
Human Performance and
PTS/PL017 0 28 28 56
Limitations
PTS /PL018 Meteorology 28 21 28 77
PTS/PL 019 General Navigation 56 0 0 56
PTS/PL 020 Radio navigation 0 28 63 91
PTS/PL 021 Operational Procedures 0 0 28 28
PTS/PL 022 Principles of Flight 28 21 14 63
PTS/PL 023 Communications 0 56 0 56
PTS/PL 024 Aviation English 40 40 40 120
Total 278 341 404 1023
Table 0-5: Summary of Ground Training Courses
*The total Theoretical Knowledge training time, excluding Aviation English, is 903 hours.,
which is above the 750 hrs EASA ATPL theoretical Knowledge requirements.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
**The Type Training in Phase IV is to be done for MPL training on CBT for 20 hrs for either
B737 NG or Bombardier Q-400 based on the type rating sought, and is not to be added on
the ground training time.
Phase I: Core
Phase II: Basic
Phase III: Intermediate
Phase IV: Advanced
There are 9 stages of the training program for the flight training. The stages are distributed
along the four phases as indicated in the table 0-5.
This syllabus is logically structured by incorporating the two categories of MPL Training for
which separate licence is sought, namely:
B 737 Type Rating
Q 400 Type Rating
1. Flight Training (Common)
Duration (Hrs.)
Phase Stage Stage Title FTD
Aeroplane Total
PF PNF
1 Flight Basics 15 - 0 15
I (Core) 2 Flying Fundamentals 10 - 14 24
3 Core Flying Skills 15 - 17 32
4 Basic Instrument 40 - 52.5 92.5
II (Basic)
5 Multi Engine Procedures 20 - 13 33
Total 100 0 96.5 196.5
2. Flight Training - B 737 Type Rating
Duration (Hrs.)
Phase Stage Stage Title FTD
Aeroplane Total
PF PNF
6 Multi Crew 20 20 0 40
II (Basic)
7 Multi-crew Instrument 20 20 0 40
Multi-crew Commercial
8A 20 20 0 40
III Operations-FTD
(Intermediate) Multi-crew Commercial
8B 20 20 0 40
Operations-SIM
IV (Advanced) 9 B 737 Type Rating* 20 20 0 40
Total 100 100 0 200
3. Flight Training - Q400 Type Rating
Duration (Hrs.)
Phase Stage Stage Title FTD
Aeroplane Total
PF PNF
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL)TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Part 0: General
II (Basic) 6 Multi Crew 20 20 0 40
7 Multi-crew Instrument 20 20 0 40
III Multi-crew Commercial
8A 20 20 0 40
Operations-FTD
(Intermediate) Multi-crew Commercial
8B 20 20 0 40
Operations-SIM
IV (Advanced) 9 Q400 Type Rating* 20 20 0 40
Total 100 100 0 200
4. Overall Summary - Flight Training
B 737 Type Rating–Flight
Q400 Type Rating- Flight Training
Training
FTD Airplane FTD Airplane
Stages
PF PNF PF PNF PF PNF PF PNF
1-5 100 0 96.5 0 100 0 96.5 0
6-9 100 100 0 0 100 100 0 0
Sum 200 100 96.5 0 200 100 96.5 0
Total 300 96.5 300 96.5
Grand Total 396.5 396.5
Table 0-5: Summary of MPL Phases and Stages
The ground and flight training from stage 1upto 5 are the same for both categories. Hence
the syllabus is the same. The training from stage 6-9 is treated separately for each category
even though the ground training stages are generic and similar except the type training on
B 737 or Q-400.
* The phase IV (advanced) stage -9 training curriculum is a complement to this
curriculum and being prepared by Flight Operations as part of type rating training
certification separately approved by ECAA.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Part 0: General 0-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM JAN.2022
0. Ground Training - Phase I
1. GROUND TRAINING PHASE I
The theoretical knowledge lessons in this phase cover the fundamental aeronautical
knowledge required for pilots.
Total time allotted for the theoretical knowledge courses in phase I is 278 hours.
The following table summarizes the theoretical courses to be offered in this phase.
Corse Code Module Phase I
Module
Course Title Module Name Duration Duration
Code
(Hrs.)
International Conventions,
PTS/PL101 3.5
PTS/PL Agreements and Organizations
Air Law 35
010 PTS/PL102 Rules of the Air 17.5
PTS/PL103 Aerodromes and Facilitation 14
PTS/PL221 Subsonic Aerodynamics 15
PTS/PL Principles of PTS/PL222 Propellers 5
28
022 Flight
PTS/PL223 Flight Mechanics 8
System design, Loads, Stresses,
PTS/PL111 4
Maintenance
PTS/PL112 Airframe 4
PTS/PL113 Hydraulics 6
PTS/PL114 Landing gear, Wheels, Tires,
Airframe, 6
Brakes
Electrics, Power
PTS/PL011 PTS/PL115 Flight controls 4 56
plant and
Systems PTS/PL116 Anti-Icing and De-Icing system 2
PTS/PL117 Fuel system 2
PTS/PL118 Aircraft Electrics 14
PTS/PL119 Piston Engine 14
PTS/PL122 Basic Aircraft Instruments 1
PTS/PL123 Instrumentation 2
PTS/PL124 MEASURING OF AIRDATA PARAMETERS 3
PTS/PL012 Instrumentation 14
MAGNETISM DIRECT READING COMPASS
PTS/PL125 3
& FLUX VALVE
PTS/PL126 Gyroscopic instrument 5
PTS/PL181 The Atmosphere 8
PTS/PL182 Wind 5
PTS/PL018 Meteorology PTS/PL183 Thermodynamics 5 28
PTS/PL184 Clouds, Fog 5
PTS/PL185 Precipitation 5
General PTS/PL191 Basic Navigation 16
PTS/PL019 56
Navigation PTS/PL192 CHARTS 16
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I xv | xxii
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM JAN.2022
0. Ground Training - Phase I
PTS/PL193 Visual Flight Rule(VFR) Navigation 8
PTS/PL194 TRIANGLE OF VELOCITY 16
Aircraft Type PTS/PL131 C-172 Aircraft Systems Training 14
PTS/PL013 Specific System Diamond DA-40 NG Aircraft 21
PTS/PL132 7
Training Systems Training
PTS/PL024 Aviation English PTS/PL241 Aviation English for Pilots I 40 40
Phase I Total 278 278
Table 1-1: Summary of Phase I Ground Training
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I xvi | xxii
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL101: INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
1.1. PTS/PL101: INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 00 00 00 AIR LAW
3.5
010 01 00 00 INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND ORGANISATIONS
The Convention on International Civil Aviation (Chicago) — ICAO Doc 7300/9
010 01 01 00
Convention on the High Seas (Geneva, 29 April 1958)
The establishment of the Convention on International Civil
010 01 01 01
Aviation, Chicago, 7 December 1944
Explain the circumstances that led to the establishment of the Convention on
LO X International Civil Aviation, Chicago, 7 December 1944.
010 01 01 02 Part I — Air navigation
LO Recall the general contents of relevant parts of the following chapters:
general principles and application of the Convention;
flight over territory of Contracting States;
nationality of aircraft;
X
international standards and recommended practices (SARPs), especially notification
of differences and validity of endorsed certificates and licences.
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9 Part 1, Articles 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 16,
17, 18, 19, 20, 37, 38, 39, 40
LO General principles
Describe the application of the following terms in civil aviation:
sovereignty;
X
territory and high seas according to the UN Convention on the High Seas.
Source: Convention on the High Seas (Geneva, 29 April 1958) Articles 1, 2;
ICAO Doc 7300/9 Part 1, Articles 1, 2
LO Explain the following terms and how they apply to international air
traffic:
right of non-scheduled flight (including the two technical freedoms of the
air);
scheduled air services;
cabotage;
landing at customs airports;
Rules of the Air;
LO search of aircraft.
X
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Articles 5, 6, 7, 10, 12, 16
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 1 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL101: INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
Explain the duties of Contracting States in relation to:
documents carried on board the aircraft:
certificate of registration;
certificates of airworthiness;
licences of personnel;
recognition of certificates and licences;
cargo restrictions;
photographic apparatus.
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Articles 29, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36
010 01 01 03 Part II — The International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
Describe the objectives of ICAO.
LO X
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Article 44
Recognise the organisation and duties of the ICAO Assembly, Council
LO X and Air Navigation Commission (ANC). Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Articles 48, 49,
50, 54, 56, 57
Describe the annexes to the Convention.
LO X
Source: ICAO Doc 7300/9, Articles 54, 90, 94, 95
010 01 02 00 Other conventions and agreements
010 01 02 01 The International Air Services Transit Agreement (ICAO Doc 7500)
Explain the two technical freedoms of the air.
LO
Source: ICAO Doc 7500
010 01 02 02 The International Air Transport Agreement (ICAO Doc 9626)
Explain the three commercial freedoms of the air.
LO
Source: ICAO Doc 9626
Suppression of Unlawful Acts Against the Safety of Civil
010 01 02 03
Aviation — The Montreal Convention of 1988
Describe the measures and actions to be taken by the pilot- in-command (PIC) of an
aircraft in order to suppress unlawful acts against the safety of the aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 9518 — Protocol supplementary to the Convention for the
LO
Suppression of Unlawful Acts Against the Safety of Civil Aviation, done at
Montreal on 23 September 1971, and signed at Montreal on 24
February 1988
010 01 02 04 Intentionally left blank
010 01 02 05 International private law
LO Explain the legal significance of the issue of a passenger ticket or of
baggage/cargo documents (that the issue is a form of contract).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 2 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL101: INTERNATIONAL LAW: CONVENTIONS, AGREEMENTS AND
ORGANISATIONS
LO Describe the consequences for an airline or the PIC when a passenger ticket is not
issued (that the contract is unaffected).
LO Explain the consequences for an airline operator of Regulation (EC) No
261/2004 on passenger rights in the event of delay, cancellation or denial of
X
boarding.
Source: Regulation (EC) No 261/2004
Explain the liability limit in relation to destruction, loss, damage or delay of
LO
baggage.
010 01 03 00 World organisations
010 01 03 01 The International Air Transport Association (IATA)
Describe the objectives of IATA.
LO
Source: http://www.iata.org/about/pages/mission.aspx
010 01 04 00 European organisations
010 01 04 01 European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA) Regulation (EC) No 216/2008
LO X Describe the objectives of EASA.
LO Describe the role of EASA in European civil aviation.
LO State that the structure of the regulatory material related to EASA involves:
hard law (regulations, implementing rules);
soft law (certification specifications, acceptable means of compliance, guidance
material).
LO State the meaning of the terminology associated with the EASA regulations’ structure,
specifically: regulations; implementing rules; certification specifications; acceptable
means of compliance; guidance material.
010 01 04 02 EUROCONTROL
LO X Describe the Single European Sky (SES) regulations.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
ICAO Doc.7300/9: Convention on International Civil Aviation
ICAO Doc 9295: INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON AIR LAW; Rome 1973
ICAO Doc 7500: International Air Transit Agreement
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 3 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL102: PTS/PL102: RULES OF THE AIR
1.2. PTS/PL102: RULES OF THE AIR
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 05 00 00 RULES OF THE AIR ACCORDING TO ICAO ANNEX 2 AND SERA 17.5
Overview of ICAO Annex 2 and SERA (Commission Implementing Regulation (EU)
010 05 01 00
No 923/2012 and its references and subsequent amendments )
010 05 01 01 ICAO Annex 2 and SERA — Relationship and content
LO Explain the scope and purpose of ICAO Annex 2.
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Foreword, Applicability
LO Explain the main content of SERA.
Source: SERA, Article 1 Subject matter and scope
010 05 02 00 Rules of the Air
010 05 02 01 Applicability of the Rules of the Air
LO Explain the principle of territorial application of the various
LO Rules of the Air, e.g. ICAO, SERA, national rules.
Source:
ICAO Annex 2, Chapter 2, 2.1 Territorial application of the rules of the air;
SERA.1001 and SERA.2001
LO Explain the necessity to comply with the Rules of the Air.
Source: SERA.2005 Compliance with the rules of the air
LO State the responsibilities of the PIC.
Source: SERA.2010 Responsibilities
LO Identify under what circumstances departure from the Rules of the Air may be
allowed.
Source: SERA.2010 Responsibilities
LO Explain the duties of the PIC concerning pre -flight actions in case of an
instrument flight rule (IFR) flight.
Source: SERA.2010 Responsibilities
LO State that the PIC of an aircraft has final authority as to the disposition of the
aircraft while in command.
Source: SERA.2015 Authority of pilot-in-command of an aircraft
LO Explain when the use of psychoactive substances, taking into consideration their effects,
by flight crew members is prohibited.
Source: SERA.2020 Problematic use of psychoactive substances
010 05 03 00 General rules
010 05 03 01 General rules — Collision avoidance — SERA
LO Describe the rules for the avoidance of collisions.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 4 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL102: PTS/PL102: RULES OF THE AIR
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: SERA Chapter 2 Avoidance of collisions (except water operations)
LO Describe the lights, including their angles, to be displayed by aircraft.
Source: SERA.3215 Lights to be displayed by aircraft
LO Interpret marshalling signals.
Source: SERA Appendix 1, Chapter 4 Marshalling signals
LO State the basic requirements for minimum height (HGT) for the flight over congested
areas of cities, towns or settlements, or over an open-air assembly of persons.
Source: SERA.3105 Minimum heights
LO Define when the cruising levels shall be expressed in terms of flight levels (FLs).
Source: SERA.3110 Cruising levels
LO Define under what circumstances cruising levels shall be expressed in terms of
altitude (ALT).
Source: SERA.3110 Cruising levels
LO Explain the limitation for proximity to other aircraft and the right-of-way rules, including
holding at runway (RWY) holding positions and lighted stop bars.
Source:
SERA.3205 Proximity; SERA.3210 Right-of-way
LO Describe the meaning of light signals displayed to aircraft and by aircraft.
Source:
SERA.3215 Lights to be displayed by aircraft;
SERA, Appendix 1, Chapter 3 Signals for aerodrome traffic
LO Describe the requirements when carrying out simulated instrument flights.
Source: SERA.3220 Simulated instrument flights
LO Explain the basic rules for an aircraft operating on and in the vicinity of an aerodrome
(AD).
Source: SERA.3225 Operation on and in the vicinity of an aerodrome
LO Explain the requirements for the submission of an air traffic service (ATS) flight plan.
Source: SERA.4001 Submission of a flight plan
LO Explain the actions to be taken in case of flight plan change or delay.
Source:
SERA.4015 Changes to a flight plan; SERA.8020 Adherence to flight plan
LO State the actions to be taken in case of inadvertent changes to track, true airspeed
(TAS) and time estimate affecting the current flight plan.
Source: SERA.8020 Adherence to flight plan
LO Explain the procedures for closing a flight plan.
Source: SERA.4020 Closing a flight plan
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 5 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL102: PTS/PL102: RULES OF THE AIR
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO State for which flights an air traffic control (ATC) clearance shall be obtained.
Source: SERA.8015 Air traffic control clearances
LO State how a pilot may request ATC clearance.
Source: SERA.8015 Air traffic control clearances
LO State the action to be taken if an ATC clearance is not satisfactory to a PIC.
LO Source: SERA.8015 Air traffic control clearances
LO Describe the required actions to be carried out if the continuation of a controlled visual
flight rule (VFR) flight in visual meteorological conditions (VMC) is not practicable any
more.
Source: SERA.8020 Adherence to flight plan
LO Describe the provisions for transmitting a position report to the appropriate ATS unit
including time of transmission and normal content of the message.
Source: SERA.8025 Position reports
LO Describe the necessary action when an aircraft experiences a communication (COM)
failure.
Source: SERA.8035 Communications
LO State what information an aircraft being subjected to unlawful interference
shall give to the appropriate ATS unit. Source: SERA.11001 Unlawful interference
010 05 04 00 Visual flight rules (VFRs)
010 05 04 01 Visual flight rules (VFRs) — SERA
Describe the VFRs as contained in Commission Implementing
Regulation (EU) No 923/2012.
Source:
LO
SERA.5001 VMC visibility and distance from cloud minima; SERA.5005 Visual flight
rules;
SERA.5010 Special VFR in control zones
010 05 05 00 Instrument flight rules (IFRs)
010 05 05 01 Instrument flight rules (IFRs) — SERA
Describe the IFRs as contained in Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No
923/2012.
Source:
LO
SERA.5015 Instrument flight rules (IFR) — Rules applicable to all IFR flights;
SERA.5020 IFR — Rules applicable to IFR flights within controlled airspace;
SERA.5025 IFR — Rules applicable to IFR flights outside controlled airspace
010 05 06 00 Interception of civil aircraft
010 05 06 01 Interception of civil aircraft — SERA
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 6 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL102: PTS/PL102: RULES OF THE AIR
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO List the possible reasons for intercepting a civil aircraft.
Source: SERA.11015 Interception
LO State what primary action should be carried out by an intercepted aircraft.
Source: SERA.11015 Interception
LO State which frequency should primarily be tried in order to contact an intercepting
aircraft.
Source: SERA.11015 Interception
LO State on which mode and code a transponder on board the intercepted aircraft
should be operated.
Source: SERA.11015 Interception
LO Recall the interception signals and phrases.
Source: SERA.11015 Interception, Tables S11-1, S11-2, S11-3
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. ICAO Annex 2
B. JAR-OPS
C. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
D. Jeppesen, Flight Planning: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 7 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
1.3. PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
AERODROMES
010 09 00 00 (ICAO Annex 14, Volume I — Aerodrome Design and Operations, and 14
Regulation (EU) No 139/2014)
010 09 01 00 General
010 09 01 01 General — AD reference code
Describe the intent of the AD reference code and state the functions of the two
LO code elements.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 1, 1.6 Reference Code
010 09 02 00 Aerodrome (AD) data
010 09 02 01 Aerodrome (AD) reference point
Describe where the AD reference point shall be located and where it shall
normally remain.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.2 Aerodrome
reference point
010 09 02 02 Pavement strengths
Explain the terms: ‘pavement classification number (PCN)’ and ‘aircraft
classification number (ACN)’, and describe their mutual dependence.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.6 Strength of
pavements
Describe how the bearing strength for an aircraft with an apron mass equal to
LO or less than 5 700 kg shall be reported. Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume
1, Chapter 2, 2.6 Strength of pavements
010 09 02 03 Declared distances
State that ICAO Annex 14 provides guidance on the calculation of
LO
declared distances (TORA, TODA, ASDA, LDA).
Recall the definitions for the four main declared distances.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 1, 1.1 Definitions
010 09 02 04 Condition of the movement area and related facilities
State the purpose of informing AIS and ATS units about the condition of the
movement area and related facilities.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2,
2.9 Condition of the movement area and related facilities
List the matters of operational significance or affecting aircraft performance
LO which should be reported to AIS and ATS units to be transmitted to aircraft
involved.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 8 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.9 Condition of the
movement area and related facilities
Describe the three different types of water deposit on RWYs.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.9 Condition of the
movement area and related facilities
Explain the different types of frozen water on the RWY and their impact on
aircraft braking performance.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 2, 2.9 Condition of the
movement area and related facilities
Describe the five levels of braking action including the associated
coefficients and codes.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Annex A, 6. Assessing the
surface friction characteristics of snow -, slush-, ice- and frost-covered paved
surfaces
010 09 03 00 Physical characteristics
010 09 03 01 Runways (RWYs)
LO Describe where a THR should normally be located.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.1.5 and
3.1.6 Location of threshold
LO Describe the general considerations concerning RWYs associated with a
stopway (SWY) or clearway (CWY).
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.1.9 Runways with
stopways or clearways
010 09 03 02 Runway (RWY) strips
Explain the term ‘runway strip’.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.4 General, 3.4.1
010 09 03 03 Runway-end safety area
Explain the term ‘runway-end safety area’.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.5 Runway end safety area
3.5.1 and 3.5.2
010 09 03 04 Clearway (CWY)
Explain the term ‘clearway’.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.6 Clearways
010 09 03 05 Stopway (SWY)
Explain the term ‘stopway’.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.7 Stopways
010 09 03 06 Intentionally left blank
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 9 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 09 03 07 Taxiways (TWYs)
LO Describe the reasons and the requirements for rapid-exit
LO TWYs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.9 Taxiways –
Rapid-exit taxiways
LO Explain TWY widening in curves.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.9.5 Taxiways
curves
LO Explain when and where holding bays should be provided.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.12
LO Describe where RWY holding positions shall be established.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.12
LO Describe the term ‘road holding position’.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.12
LO Describe where intermediate TWY holding positions should be established.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 3, 3.12
010 09 04 00 Visual aids for navigation
010 09 04 01 Indicators and signalling devices
Describe the wind-direction indicators with which ADs shall be equipped.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.1.1 Wind direction indicator
(Application, Location and Characteristics)
Describe a landing-direction indicator.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.1.2 Landing
direction indicator
LO Explain the capabilities of a signalling lamp.
X State which characteristics a signal area should have.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.1.4 Signal panels
and signal area, 5.1.4.1 to 5.1.4.3
X Interpret all indications and signals that may be used in a signal area.
LO Source: Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 923/2012
(SERA) — Appendix 1 Signals, 3.2 Visual ground signals
010 09 04 02 Markings
Name the colours used for the various markings (RWY, TWY, aircraft stands, apron
LO safety lines).
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.2 Markings
State where a RWY designation marking shall be provided and describe the
LO
different layouts (excluding dimensions).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 10 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.2 Markings
Describe the application and general characteristics
(excluding dimensions) of:
RWY-centre-line markings;
THR markings;
touchdown-zone (TDZ) markings;
RWY-side-stripe markings;
TWY-centre-line markings;
LO RWY holding position markings;
intermediate holding position markings;
aircraft-stand markings;
apron safety lines;
road holding position markings;
mandatory instruction markings;
information markings.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.2 Markings
010 09 04 03 Lights
LO Describe the mechanical safety considerations regarding elevated approach lights
and elevated RWY, SWY and TWY lights.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.1.4 to 5.3.1.8
(Elevated approach lights, elevated lights and surface lights)
LO List the conditions for the installation of an aerodrome beacon (ABN) and
describe its general characteristics.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.3 Aeronautical beacons
LO Describe the different kinds of operations for which a simple approach lighting
system shall be used.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4 Approach
lighting systems
LO Describe the basic installations of a simple approach lighting system including the
dimensions and distances normally used.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.2
LO Describe the principle of a precision approach category I lighting system including
information such as location and characteristics.
Source:
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.10;
LO ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.14
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 11 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the principle of a precision approach category II and III lighting system
including information such as location and characteristics, especially the inner 300
m of the system.
Source:
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.22; ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter
5, 5.3.4.30; ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.4.31
Describe the wing bars of the precision approach path indicator (PAPI) and the
abbreviated precision approach path indicator (APAPI). Interpret what the pilot will
LO
see during the approach using PAPI.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5, 5.3.5.24 to 5.3.5.27 PAPA and APAPI
Interpret what the pilot will see during an approach using a helicopter approach
path indicator (HAPI).
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume II, Chapter 5, 5.3.6 Visual
approach slope indicator
Explain the application and characteristics (as applicable, but limited to colour,
intensity, direction and whether fixed or flashing) of:
— RWY-edge lights;
— RWY-THR and wing-bar lights;
— RWY-end lights;
— RWY-centre-line lights;
— RWY-lead-in lights;
— RWY-TDZ lights;
LO
— SWY lights;
— TWY-centre-line lights;
— TWY-edge lights;
— stop bars;
— intermediate holding position lights;
— RWY guard lights;
— road holding position lights.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5
State the timescale within which aeronautical ground lights shall be made
LO available to arriving aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Section 7.15 Aeronautical ground lights
010 09 04 04 Signs
Explain which signs are the only ones on the movement area utilising red.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO List the provisions for illuminating signs.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 12 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Name the kinds of signs which shall be included in mandatory
instruction signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Name the colours used for mandatory instruction signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Describe by which sign a pattern ‘A’ RWY holding position (i.e. at an intersection
of a TWY and a non-instrument, non- precision approach or take-off RWY) marking
shall be supplemented.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Describe by which sign a pattern ‘B’ RWY holding position (i.e. at an intersection
of a TWY and a precision approach RWY) marking shall be supplemented.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Describe the location of:
a RWY designation sign at a TWY/RWY intersection;
a ‘NO ENTRY’ sign;
a RWY holding position sign.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO State which sign indicates that a taxiing aircraft is about to infringe an obstacle
limitation surface or interfere with the operation of radio navigation aids (e.g.
ILS/MLS critical/sensitive area).
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Describe the various possible inscriptions on RWY designation signs and
on holding position signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Describe the colours used in connection with information signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Describe the possible inscriptions on information signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Explain the application, location and characteristics of aircraft stand
identification signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
LO Explain the application, location and characteristics of road holding position
signs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.4 Signs
010 09 04 05 Markers
LO Explain why markers located near a RWY or TWY shall be HGT limited.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 13 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.5 Markers
Explain the application and characteristics (excluding dimensions) of:
unpaved RWY-edge markers;
TWY-edge markers;
TWY-centre-line markers;
LO
unpaved TWY-edge markers;
boundary markers;
SWY-edge markers.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 5.5 Markers
010 09 05 00 Visual aids for denoting obstacles
010 09 05 01 Marking of objects
LO State how fixed or mobile objects shall be marked if colouring is not
practicable.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.3.1 Marking
LO Describe marking by colours (fixed or mobile objects).
Source:
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.2 Mobile objects: 6.2.2.1,
6.2.2.2; 6.2.2.3; 6.2.2.4 ;
ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.3 Fixed objects: 6.2.3.1; 6.2.3.2;
6.2.3.3
LO Explain the use of markers for the marking of objects, overhead wires,
cables, etc.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.5 Overhead
wires, cables, etc., and supporting towers
LO Explain the use of flags for the marking of objects.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2.3 Fixed objects:
6.2.3.5; 6.2.3.6; 6.2.3.7
010 09 05 02 Lighting of objects
LO Name the different types of lights to indicate the presence of objects which must
be lighted.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2 Marking and/or
lighting of objects : 6.2.1.1
LO Describe (in general terms) the location of obstacle lights.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6, 6.2 Marking and/or
lighting of objects : 6.2.1.3
LO Describe (in general and for normal circumstances) the colour and sequence of
low-intensity obstacle lights, medium-intensity obstacle lights and high-
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 14 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
intensity obstacle lights.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 6: Table 6-1. Characteristics of
obstacle lights
State that information about lights to be displayed by aircraft is provided in both
LO
ICAO Annex 2 (Rules of the Air) and SERA.
010 09 06 00 Visual aids for denoting restricted use of areas
010 09 06 01 Visual aids for denoting restricted use of areas on RWYs and TWYs
LO Describe the colours and meaning of ‘closed markings’ on RWYs and TWYs.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 7, 7.1 Closed runways
and taxiways, or parts thereof
LO State how the pilot of an aircraft moving on the surface of a TWY, holding bay or
apron shall be warned that the shoulders of these surfaces are ‘non-load-bearing
’.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 7, 7.2 Non-load-bearing surfaces
LO Describe the pre-THR marking (including colours) when the surface before the
THR is not suitable for normal use by aircraft.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 7, 7.3 Pre-threshold area
010 09 07 00 Aerodrome (AD) operational services, equipment and installations
010 09 07 01 Rescue and firefighting (RFF)
LO State the principal objective of RFF services.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.2 Rescue and firefighting
LO Explain the basic information the AD category (for RFF) depends upon.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.2 Rescue and firefighting
LO Describe what is meant by the term ‘response time’, and state its normal and
maximum limits.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.2 Rescue and firefighting
010 09 07 02 Apron management service
State who has a right-of-way against vehicles operating on an apron.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.5 Apron management service
010 09 07 03 Ground-servicing of aircraft
Describe the necessary actions during the ground- servicing of an aircraft
LO with regard to the possible event of a fuel fire.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Chapter 9, 9.6 Ground servicing of aircraft
010 09 08 00 Attachment A to ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1— Supplementary Guidance
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 15 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Material
010 09 08 01 Declared distances
List the four types of ‘declared distances’ on a RWY and also the appropriate
abbreviations.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Attachment A ,
3. Calculation of declared distances : 3.1
Explain the circumstances which lead to the situation that the four declared
distances on a RWY are equal to the length of the RWY.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Attachment A,3. Calculation of declared
distances: 3.2
Describe the influence of a CWY, SWY or displaced THR upon the four ‘declared
distances’.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Attachment A, 3. Calculation of
declared distances: 3.3; 3.4; 3.5
010 09 08 02 Intentionally left blank
010 09 08 03 Approach lighting systems
LO Name the two main groups of approach lighting systems.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, Attachment A, 12.1 Types and
characteristics
LO Describe the two different versions of a simple approach lighting system.
LO Describe the two different basic versions of precision approach lighting
systems for CAT I.
LO Describe the diagram of the inner 300 m of the precision approach lighting
system in the case of CAT II and III.
LO Describe how the arrangement of an approach lighting system and the location
of the appropriate THR are interrelated.
010 10 00 00 FACILITATION (ICAO Annex 9)
010 10 01 00 Intentionally left blank
010 10 02 00 Entry and departure of aircraft
010 10 02 01 General declaration
Describe the purpose and use of aircraft documents as regards a ‘general
declaration’.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 2 Entry and departure of aircraft, Section B:
Documents — requirements and use, and Section D: Disinsection of aircraft
010 10 02 02 Entry and departure of crew
Explain entry requirements for crew.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, K. Entry procedures and responsibilities; N.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 16 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Syllabus BK Duration
Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Identification and entry of crew and other aircraft operators’ personnel
LO Explain the reasons for the use of crew member certificates (CMC) for crew
members engaged in international air transport.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, N. Identification and entry of crew and other
aircraft operators’ personnel
LO Explain in which cases Contracting States should accept the CMC as an identity
document instead of a passport or visa. Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, N.
Identification and entry of crew and other aircraft operators’ personnel
010 10 02 03 Entry and departure of passengers and baggage
LO Explain the entry requirements for passengers and their baggage.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3 Entry and departure of persons and their
baggage:
A. General;
B. Documents required for travel;
F. Entry/re-entry visas;
P. Emergency assistance/entry visas in cases of force majeure
LO Explain the requirements and documentation for unaccompanied
baggage.
Source:
ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3, M. Disposition of baggage separated from its
owner;
ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 4, C. Release and clearance of export and import
cargo
LO Identify the documentation required for the departure and entry of passengers
and their baggage.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 3. Entry and departure of persons and their
baggage
LO Explain the arrangements in the event of a passenger being declared an
inadmissible person.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 5, INADMISSIBLE PERSONS AND
DEPORTEES: A. General; B. Inadmissible persons
LO Describe the pilot’s authority towards unruly passengers.
Source: ICAO Annex 9, Chapter 6, E. Unruly passengers
010 10 02 04 Entry and departure of cargo
LO Explain the entry requirements for cargo.
LO Be familiar with the documentation required for the entry and departure of cargo.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 17 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL103: AERODROMES AND FACILITATION
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. ICAO ANNEX 14
B. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
C. ICAO Doc 9643:Manual on Simultaneous Operations on Parallel or Near-Parallel Runways
D. CAP 637: Visual Aids Handbook
E. COSCAP: Aerodrome Standards
F. Airside Safety Operating Procedures
G. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
H. ACI: Apron Markings and Signs Manual Second Edition
I. ICAO Annex 9
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 18 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
1.4. PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
080 00 00 00 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT
15
081 00 00 00 PRINCIPLES OF FLIGHT — AEROPLANES
081 01 00 00 SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
081 01 01 00 Basics, laws and definitions
081 01 01 01 Laws and definitions
LO List the international system of units of measurement (SI) for mass, acceleration,
weight, velocity, energy, density, temperature, pressure, force, wing loading, and
power.
LO X Define ‘mass’, ‘force’, ‘acceleration’, and ‘weight’.
LO State and interpret Newton’s three laws of motion.
LO X Explain air density.
LO X List the atmospheric properties that effect air density.
LO Explain how temperature and pressure changes affect air density.
LO X Define ‘static pressure’.
LO X Define ‘dynamic pressure’.
LO X State the formula for ‘dynamic pressure’.
LO Describe dynamic pressure in terms of an indication of the energy in the system,
and how it is related to indicated airspeed (IAS) and air density for a given altitude
and speed.
LO State Bernoulli’s equation for incompressible flow.
LO Define ‘total pressure’ and explain that the total pressure differs in different
systems.
LO Apply Bernoulli’s equation to flow through a venturi stream tube for
incompressible flow.
LO Describe how IAS is acquired from the pitot static system.
LO Describe the relationship between density, temperature, and pressure for air.
LO Explain the equation of continuity and its application to the flow through a
stream tube.
LO X Define ‘IAS’, ‘CAS’, ‘EAS’, and ‘TAS’.
081 01 01 02 Basics of airflow
LO X Describe steady and unsteady airflow.
LO X Explain the concept of a streamline and a stream tube.
LO X Describe and explain airflow through a stream tube.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 19 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO X Explain the difference between two- and three-dimensional airflow.
081 01 01 03 Shape of an aerofoil section
LO X Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
leading edge.
LO X Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
trailing edge.
LO Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
chord line.
LO Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
thickness-to-chord ratio or relative thickness.
LO Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
location of maximum thickness.
LO Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
camber line.
LO Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
camber.
LO X Describe the following parameter of an aerofoil section:
nose radius.
LO X Describe a symmetrical and an asymmetrical aerofoil section.
081 01 01 04 Aerodynamic forces on aerofoils
LO Describe the originating point and direction of the resultant force caused by
the pressure distribution around an aerofoil.
LO X Resolve the resultant force into the components ‘lift’ and ‘drag’.
LO Describe the direction of lift and drag.
LO X Define the ‘aerodynamic moment’.
LO X List the factors that affect the aerodynamic moment.
LO Describe the aerodynamic moment for a symmetrical aerofoil.
LO Describe the aerodynamic moment for a positively and negatively
cambered aerofoil.
LO X Define ‘angle of attack’ ().
081 01 01 05 Wing shape
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: span.
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: tip and root chord.
LO Describe the following parameter of a wing: taper ratio.
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: wing area.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 20 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO Describe the following parameter of a wing: wing planform.
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: mean geometric chord.
LO Describe the following parameter of a wing: mean aerodynamic chord (MAC).
LO Describe the following parameter of a wing: aspect ratio.
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: dihedral angle.
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: sweep angle.
LO X Describe the following parameter of a wing: wing twist, geometric and
aerodynamic.
LO Describe the following parameter of a wing: angle of incidence. Remark: In certain
textbooks, angle of incidence is used as angle of attack (α). For Part-FCL theoretical
knowledge examination purposes, this use is discontinued, and the angle of incidence
is defined as the angle between the aeroplane longitudinal axis and the wing-
root chord line.
081 01 02 00 Two-dimensional airflow around an aerofoil
081 01 02 01 Streamline pattern
LO X Describe the streamline pattern around an aerofoil.
LO Describe converging and diverging streamlines, and their effect on static pressure
and velocity.
LO X Describe upwash and downwash.
081 01 02 02 Stagnation point
LO Describe the stagnation point.
LO Describe the movement of the stagnation point as the α changes.
081 01 02 03 Pressure distribution
LO Describe pressure distribution and local speeds around an aerofoil including
effects of camber and α.
LO Describe where the minimum local static pressure is typically situated on an
aerofoil.
081 01 02 04 Centre of pressure (CP) and aerodynamic centre (AC)
LO Explain CP and AC.
081 01 02 05 Intentionally left blank
081 01 02 06 Drag and wake
LO X List two physical phenomena that cause drag.
LO Describe skin friction drag.
LO Describe form (pressure) drag.
LO X Explain why drag and wake cause loss of energy (momentum).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 21 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
081 01 02 07 Influence of angle of attack (α)
LO Explain the influence of α on lift.
081 01 02 08 Intentionally left blank
081 01 02 09 The lift coefficient (CL) – angle of attack () graph
LO Describe the CL–α graph.
LO Explain the significant points:
point where the curve crosses the horizontal axis (zero lift);
point where the curve crosses the vertical axis ( = 0);
point where the curve reaches its maximum (C LMAX).
081 01 03 00 Coefficients
081 01 03 01 General use of coefficients
LO X Explain why coefficients are used in general.
LO The lift coefficient (CL)
LO Explain the lift formula, the factors that affect lift, and perform simple
calculations.
LO Describe the effect of camber on the CL– graph (symmetrical and
positively/negatively cambered aerofoils).
LO Describe the typical difference in the CL– graph for fast and slow aerofoil
design.
LO X Define ‘CLMAX’ (maximum lift coefficient) and ‘CRIT’ (stalling ) on the graph.
LO Describe CL and explain the variables that affect it in low subsonic flight.
081 01 03 03 Drag
LO Describe the two-dimensional drag formula and perform simple calculations.
LO Discuss the effect of the shape of a body, cross-sectional area, and surface
roughness on the drag coefficient.
081 01 04 00 Three-dimensional airflow around an aeroplane
081 01 04 01 Angle of attack (α)
LO X Define ‘angle of attack’ (α).
Remark: For theoretical knowledge examination purposes, the angle-of-attack
definition requires a reference line. This reference line for 3D has been chosen to be
the longitudinal axis and for 2D the chord line.
LO Explain the difference between the α and the attitude of an aeroplane.
081 01 04 02 Streamline pattern
LO Describe the general streamline pattern around the wing, tail section, and
fuselage.
LO Explain and describe the causes of spanwise flow over top and bottom surfaces.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 22 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO Describe wing tip vortices and their contribution to downwash behind the wing.
LO Explain why wing tip vortices vary with α.
LO Describe spanwise lift distribution including the effect of wing planform.
LO Describe the causes, distribution and duration of the wake turbulence behind
an aeroplane.
LO Describe the influence of flap deflection on the wing tip vortex.
LO Describe the parameters that influence wake turbulence.
081 01 04 03 Induced drag
LO Explain the factors that cause induced drag.
LO Describe the approximate formula for the induced drag coefficient
(including variables but excluding constants).
LO Describe the relationship between induced drag and total drag in straight and
level flight with variable speed.
LO Describe the effect of mass on induced drag at a given IAS.
LO Describe the means to reduce induced drag:
aspect ratio;
winglets;
tip tanks;
wing twist;
camber change.
LO Describe the influence of lift distribution on induced drag.
LO Describe the influence of downwash on the effective airflow.
LO Explain induced and effective local α.
LO Explain the influence of the induced α on the direction of the lift vector.
LO Explain the relationship between induced drag and:
speed;
aspect ratio;
wing planform;
bank angle in a horizontal coordinated turn.
LO Explain the induced drag coefficient and its relationship with the lift coefficient
and aspect ratio.
LO Explain the influence of induced drag on:
the C L–α graph, and show the effect on the graph when
comparing high- and low-aspect ratio wings;
the CL–CD (aeroplane polar), and show the effect on the graph when comparing
high- and low-aspect ratio wings;
the parabolic aeroplane polar in a graph and as a formula [CD = CPD +
2
kCL ], where CD = coefficient of drag and CPD = coefficient of parasite drag.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 23 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO Describe the CL–CD graph (polar).
LO Indicate minimum drag on the graph.
LO Explain why the CL–CD ratio is important as a measure of performance.
LO X State the normal values of CL–CD.
081 01 05 00 Total drag
081 01 05 01 Total drag in relation to parasite drag and induced drag
LO X State that total drag consists of parasite drag and induced drag.
LO Parasite drag
LO Describe the types of drag that are included in parasite drag.
LO Describe form (pressure) drag and the factors which affect its magnitude.
LO Describe interference drag and the factors which affect its magnitude.
LO Describe friction drag and the factors which affect its magnitude.
081 01 05 03 Parasite drag and speed
LO Describe the relationship between parasite drag and speed.
LO Induced drag and speed
(Refer to 081 01 04 03)
081 01 05 05 Total drag
LO Explain the total drag–speed graph and the constituent drag components.
LO Indicate the speed for minimum drag.
081 01 05 06 Intentionally left blank
081 01 05 07 Variables affecting the total drag–speed graph
LO Describe the effect of aeroplane gross mass on the graph.
LO Describe the effect of pressure altitude on:
drag–IAS graph;
drag–TAS graph.
LO Describe speed stability from the graph.
LO Describe non-stable, neutral, and stable IAS regions.
LO Explain what happens to the IAS and drag in the non-stable region if speed
suddenly decreases and why this could occur.
081 01 06 00 Ground effect
081 01 06 01 Influence of ground effect
LO Explain the influence of ground effect on wing tip vortices, downwash, airflow
pattern, lift, and drag.
LO Describe the influence of ground effect on induced and the coefficient of
induced drag (CDi).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 24 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO Explain the effects of entering and leaving ground effect.
LO Effect on stalling angle of attack (αCRIT)
LO Describe the influence of ground effect on αCRIT.
LO Effect on lift coefficient (CL)
LO Describe the influence of ground effect on the effective and CL.
LO Effect on take-off and landing characteristics of an aeroplane
LO Describe the influence of ground effect on take-off and landing characteristics and
performance of an aeroplane.
LO Describe the difference in take-off and landing characteristics of high- and low-
wing aeroplanes.
081 01 07 00 The relationship between lift coefficient and speed in steady, straight, and level
flight
081 01 07 01 Represented by an equation
LO Explain the effect on CL during speed increase/decrease in steady, straight, and level
flight, and perform simple calculations.
LO Represented by a graph
LO Explain, by using a graph, the effect on speed of CL changes at a given weight.
LO Intentionally left blank
081 01 09 00 CLMAX augmentation
081 01 09 01 Trailing-edge flaps and the reasons for their use in take-off and landing
LO From the given relevant diagrams, describe or identify the following types of
trailing-edge flaps:
split flaps;
plain flaps;
slotted flaps;
Fowler flaps.
LO Describe how the wing’s effective camber increases the CL and CD, and the
reasons why this can be beneficial.
LO Describe their effect on:
the location of CP;
pitching moments (due to wing CP movement);
stall speed.
LO Compare their influence on the CL– graph:
indicate the variation in C L at any given ;
indicate their effect on C LMAX;
indicate their effect on critical ;
indicate their effect on the at a given C L.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 25 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO Compare their influence on the CL–CD graph:
indicate how the (C L/CD)MAX differs from that of a clean wing.
LO Explain the influence of trailing-edge flap deflection on the glide angle.
LO Describe flap asymmetry:
explain the effect on aeroplane controllability.
LO Describe trailing-edge flap effect on take-off and landing:
explain the advantages of lower-nose attitudes;
explain why take-off and landing speeds/distances are reduced.
LO Explain the effects of flap-setting errors, such as mis-selection and
premature/late extension or retraction of flaps, on:
take-off and landing distance and speeds;
climb and descent performance;
stall buffet margins.
081 01 09 02 Leading-edge devices and the reasons for their use in take-off and landing
LO From the given relevant diagrams, describe or identify the different types of
leading-edge high-lift devices:
Krueger flaps;
variable camber flaps;
slats.
LO Describe the function of the slot.
LO Describe how the wing’s effective camber increases with a leading-edge flap.
LO Explain the effect of leading-edge flaps on the stall speed, also in comparison with
trailing-edge flaps.
LO Compare their influence on the CL– graph, compared with trailing-edge flaps
and a clean wing:
indicate the effect of leading-edge devices on CLMAX;
explain how the CL curve differs from that of a clean wing;
indicate the effect of leading-edge devices on αCRIT.
LO Compare their influence on the CL–CD graph.
LO Describe slat asymmetry:
describe the effect on aeroplane controllability.
LO Explain the reasons for using leading-edge high-lift devices on take-off and
landing:
explain the disadvantage of increased nose-up attitudes;
explain why take-off and landing speeds/distances are reduced.
081 01 09 03 Vortex generators
LO Explain the purpose of vortex generators.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 26 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO Describe the basic operating principle of vortex generators.
LO State their advantages and disadvantages.
081 01 10 00 Means to reduce the CL–CD ratio
081 01 10 01 Spoilers and the reasons for their use in the different phases of flight
LO Describe the aerodynamic functioning of spoilers:
roll spoilers;
flight spoilers (speed brakes);
ground spoilers (lift dumpers).
LO Describe the effect of spoilers on the CL– graph and stall speed.
LO Describe the influence of spoilers on the CL–CD graph and lift–drag ratio.
LO Speed brakes and the reasons for their use in the different phases of flight
LO Describe speed brakes and the reasons for using them in the different phases of
flight.
LO State their influence on the CL–CD graph and lift–drag ratio.
LO Explain how speed brakes increase parasite drag.
LO Describe how speed brakes affect the minimum drag speed.
LO Describe their effect on rate and angle of descent.
081 01 11 00 Intentionally left blank
081 01 12 00 Aerodynamic degradation
081 01 12 01 Ice and other contaminants
LO Describe the locations on an aeroplane where ice build-up will occur during flight.
LO Explain the aerodynamic effects of ice and other contaminants on:
lift (maximum CL);
drag;
stall speed;
CRIT;
stability and controllability.
LO Explain the aerodynamic effects of icing during take-off.
081 01 12 02 Deformation and modification of airframe, ageing aeroplanes
LO Describe the effect of airframe deformation and modification of an ageing
aeroplane on aeroplane performance.
LO Explain the effect on boundary layer condition of an ageing aeroplane.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 27 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL221: SUBSONIC AERODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
B. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
C. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
D. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 28 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL222: PROPELLERS
1.5. PTS/PL222: PROPELLERS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
81 07 00 00 PROPELLERS 5
081 07 01 00 Conversion of engine torque to thrust
081 07 01 01 Explain conversion of aerodynamic force on a propeller blade
LO Explain the resolution of aerodynamic force on a propeller blade element into
lift and drag or into thrust and torque.
LO Describe how propeller thrust and aerodynamic torque vary with IAS.
081 07 01 02 Relevant propeller parameters
LO Describe the geometry of a typical propeller blade element at the reference
section:
blade chord line;
propeller rotational velocity vector;
true airspeed vector;
blade angle of attack;
pitch or blade angle;
advance or helix angle.
Define ‘geometric pitch’, ‘effective pitch’, and ‘propeller slip’. Remark: For
theoretical knowledge examination purposes, the following definition is used for
geometric pitch: the theoretical distance a propeller would advance in one
revolution at zero
blade angle of attack.
LO Describe how the terms ‘fine pitch’ and ‘coarse pitch’ can be used to express
blade angle.
081 07 01 03 Blade twist
LO X Define ‘blade twist’.
LO Explain why blade twist is necessary.
081 07 01 04 Fixed pitch and variable pitch/constant speed
LO X List the different types of propellers:
fixed pitch;
adjustable pitch or variable pitch (non-governing);
variable pitch (governing)/constant speed.
LO Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of fixed-pitch and constant-speed
propellers.
LO Discuss climb and cruise propellers.
LO Explain the relationship between blade angle, blade angle of attack, and
airspeed for fixed and variable pitch propellers.
LO Describe and explain the forces that act on a rotating blade element in normal,
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 29 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL222: PROPELLERS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
feathered, windmilling, and reverse operation.
LO Explain the effects of changing propeller pitch at constant IAS.
LO Propeller efficiency versus speed
LO Define ‘propeller efficiency’.
LO Explain and describe the relationship between propeller efficiency and
speed (TAS) for different types of propellers.
(03) Explain the relationship between blade angle and thrust.
081 07 01 06 Effects of ice on propeller
LO Describe the effects and hazards of ice on a propeller.
LO Engine failure
081 07 02 01 Windmilling drag
LO Describe the effects of an inoperative engine on the performance and
controllability of an aeroplane:
thrust loss/drag increase;
influence on yaw moment during asymmetric power.
LO Feathering
LO Explain the reasons for feathering a propeller, including the effect on the yaw
moment, performance and controllability.
081 07 03 00 Design features for power absorption
081 07 03 01 Propeller design characteristics that increase power absorption
LO X Name the propeller design characteristics that increase power absorption.
081 07 03 02 Diameter of propeller
(LO Explain the reasons for restricting propeller diameter.
081 07 03 03 Number of blades
LO X Define ‘solidity’.
LO
LO Describe the advantages and disadvantages of increasing the number of blades.
081 07 03 04 Propeller noise
LO X Describe how propeller noise can be minimised.
081 07 04 00 Secondary effects of propellers
081 07 04 01 Torque reaction
LO Describe the effects of engine/propeller torque.
LO Describe the following methods for counteracting engine/propeller torque:
counter-rotating propellers;
contra-rotating propellers.
081 07 04 02 Gyroscopic precession
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 30 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL222: PROPELLERS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
LO X Describe what causes gyroscopic precession.
LO X Describe the effect on the aeroplane due to the gyroscopic effect.
081 07 04 03 Slipstream effect
LO Describe the possible effects of the rotating propeller slipstream.
081 07 04 04 Asymmetric blade effect
LO Explain the asymmetric blade effect (also called P factor).
LO Explain the influence of direction of rotation on the critical engine on twin-
engine aeroplanes.
081 07 04 05 Hazards and management of propeller effects
LO Describe, given direction of propeller rotation, the propeller effects during take-off
run, rotation and initial climb, and their consequence on controllability.
LO Describe, given the direction of propeller rotation, the propeller effects
during a go-around and their consequence on controllability.
LO Explain how the hazards associated with propeller effects during go-around
can be aggravated by:
high engine performance conditions and their effect on the VMC speeds;
loss of the critical engine;
crosswind;
high flap setting;
engine failure at the moment of the go-around.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-Discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
F. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
G. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
H. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 31 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: Flight mechanics
1.6. PTS/PL223: FLIGHT MECHANICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
081 08 00 00 FLIGHT MECHANICS 8
081 08 01 00 Forces acting on an aeroplane
081 08 01 01 Straight, horizontal, steady flight
LO X Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in straight, horizontal, and
steady flight.
LO X List the four forces and state where they act on.
LO Explain how the four forces are balanced, including the function of the
tailplane.
081 08 01 02 Straight, steady climb
LO X Define ‘flight-path angle’ ().
LO Describe the relationship between pitch attitude, and α for zero-wind and
zero-bank conditions.
LO X Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in a straight, steady climb.
LO Name the forces parallel and perpendicular to the direction of flight.
Apply the formula relating to the parallel forces (T = D + W sin ).
Apply the formula relating to the perpendicular forces (L = W cos ).
LO Explain why thrust is greater than drag.
LO Explain why lift is less than weight.
LO Explain the formula (for small angles) that gives the relationship between
, thrust, weight, and lift–drag ratio, and use this formula for simple calculations.
LO Explain how IAS, α, and change in a climb performed with constant vertical
speed and constant thrust setting.
081 08 01 03 Straight, steady descent
LO X Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in a straight, steady descent.
LO Name the forces parallel and perpendicular to the direction of flight.
Apply the formula for forces parallel to the direction of flight (T = D – W sin ).
Apply the formula relating to the perpendicular forces (L = W cos ).
LO Explain why lift is less than weight.
LO Explain why thrust is less than drag.
081 08 01 04 Straight, steady glide
LO X Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in a straight, steady glide.
LO Name the forces parallel and perpendicular to the direction of flight.
Apply the formula for forces parallel to the direction of
LO flight (D = W sin ).
Apply the formula for forces perpendicular to the direction of flight (L = W
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 32 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: Flight mechanics
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
cos ).
LO Describe the relationship between the glide gradient and the lift–drag ratio, and
calculate glide range given:
initial height;
L–D ratio;
glide speed and wind speed.
LO Explain the relationship between α, VMD and the best lift–drag ratio.
LO Explain the effect of wind component on glide angle, duration, and distance.
LO Explain the effect of mass change on glide angle, duration, and distance, given that
the aeroplane remains at either the same airspeed or at VMD.
LO Explain the effect of configuration change on glide angle and duration.
LO Describe the relation between TAS, gradient of descent, and rate of descent.
LO Describe that the minimum rate of descent in the glide will be at VMP, and explain
the relationship of this speed to the optimum speed for minimum glide angle.
LO Discuss when a pilot could elect to fly for minimum glide rate of descent or minimum
glide angle, and why speed stability or headwinds/tailwinds may favour a speed
that is faster or slower than the optimum airspeed in still air.
081 08 01 05 Steady, coordinated turn
LO Describe the forces that act on an aeroplane in a steady, coordinated turn.
LO Resolve the forces that act horizontally and vertically during a coordinated turn
𝑣2
tan 𝜑 =
𝑔𝑅
LO Describe the difference between a coordinated and an uncoordinated turn, and
describe how to correct an uncoordinated turn using turn and slip indicator or turn
coordinator.
LO Explain why the angle of bank is independent of mass, and that it only depends on
TAS and radius of turn.
LO Resolve the forces to show that for a given angle of bank the
2
radius of turn is determined solely by airspeed
𝑣2
tan 𝜑 =
𝑔𝑅
LO Calculate the turn radius of a steady turn given TAS and angle of bank.
LO Explain the effects of bank angle on:
load factor (LF = 1/cos );
α;
thrust;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 33 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: Flight mechanics
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
drag.
LO X Define ‘angular velocity’.
LO X Define ‘rate of turn’ and ‘rate-1 turn’.
LO Explain the influence of TAS on rate of turn at a given bank angle.
LO Calculate the load factor and stall speed in a turn given angle of
LO bank and 1g stall speed.
LO Explain situations in which turn radius is relevant for safety, such as maximum
speed limits on departure or arrival plates, or outbound speed categories on
approach plates, and the implications/hazards of exceeding given speeds.
LO Describe the hazards of excessive use of rudder to tighten a turn in a swept-
wing aeroplane.
081 08 02 00 Asymmetric thrust
081 08 02 01 Jet-engined and propeller-driven aeroplanes
LO Describe the effects on the aeroplane of asymmetric thrust during flight, for both
jet-engined and propeller-driven aeroplanes.
LO Explain critical engine, including the effect of crosswind when on the ground, and
explain, for a propeller-driven aeroplane, the direction of propeller rotation.
LO X Explain the effect of steady, asymmetric flight on a conventional (ball)
slip indicator/turn indicator.
081 08 02 02 Balanced moments about the normal axis
LO Explain the yaw moments about the CG.
LO Explain the change to the yaw moment caused by the effect of air density on
thrust.
LO Describe the changes to the yaw moment caused by engine distance from CG.
LO Describe the methods to achieve directional balance following engine loss.
081 08 02 03 Forces parallel to the lateral axis
LO Explain:
the force on the vertical fin;
the fuselage side force due to sideslip (using wing-level method);
the use of bank angle to tilt the lift vector (in wing-down method).
LO Explain why the required small bank angle is limited by:
increased overall lift required, and increase in drag in banked attitude;
fin stalling angle.
LO Explain the effect on fin α due to sideslip.
081 08 02 04 Influence of aeroplane mass
LO Explain why controllability with one-engine-inoperative is a typical problem arising
from the low speeds associated with low aeroplane mass.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 34 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: Flight mechanics
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives (Hrs.)
Reference
081 08 02 05 Intentionally left blank
081 08 02 06 Intentionally left blank
081 08 02 07 Intentionally left blank
081 08 02 08 Minimum control speed (VMC)
LO Define ‘VMC’.
LO Describe how VMC is determined.
LO Explain the influence of the CG location.
081 08 02 09 Minimum control speed during approach and landing (VMCL)
LO Define ‘VMCL’.
LO Describe how VMCL is determined.
LO Explain the influence of the CG location.
081 08 02 10 Minimum control speed on the ground (VMCG)
LO Define ‘VMCG’.
LO Describe how VMCG is determined.
LO Explain the influence of the CG location.
081 08 02 11 Influence of density
LO Describe the influence of density.
LO Explain why VMC, VMCL and VMCG reduce with an increase in altitude and
temperature.
081 08 03 00 Significant points on a polar curve
081 08 03 01 Identify and explain
LO Identify and explain the significant points on a polar curve.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-Discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
J. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
K. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
L. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 35 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL111: System design ,loads ,stresses, maintenance
1.7. PTS/PL111: System design ,loads ,stresses, maintenance
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
020 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE
4
021 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — AIRFRAME, SYSTEMS AND POWER PLANT
021 01 00 00 SYSTEM DESIGN, LOADS, STRESSES, MAINTENANCE
021 01 01 00 System design
021 01 01 01 Design concepts
LO Describe the following structural design philosophy:
safe life;
X
fail-safe (multiple load paths);
damage-tolerant.
LO Explain the purpose of redundancy in aircraft design.
021 01 01 02 Level of certification
LO X Explain why some systems are duplicated or triplicated.
LO Explain that all aircraft are certified according to specifications determined by the
X competent authority, and that these certification specifications cover aspects
such as design, material quality and build quality.
State that the certification specifications for aeroplanes issued by EASA are:
LO X CS-23 for Normal, Utility, Aerobatic and Commuter Aeroplanes;
CS-25 for Large Aeroplanes.
021 01 02 00 Loads and stresses
021 01 02 01 Stress, strain and loads
LO Explain how stress and strain are always present in an aircraft structure both when
parked and during manoeuvring.
Remark: Stress is the internal force per unit area inside a structural part as a
result of external loads. Strain is the deformation caused by the action of stress
on a material.
LO Describe the following types of loads that an aircraft may be subjected to, when
they occur, and how a pilot may affect their magnitude:
static loads;
dynamic loads;
cyclic loads.
LO Describe the areas typically prone to stress that should be given particular
attention during a pre-flight inspection, and highlight the limited visual cues of
any deformation that may be evident.
021 01 03 00 Fatigue and corrosion
021 01 03 01 Describe and explain fatigue and corrosion
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 36 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL111: System design ,loads ,stresses, maintenance
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the effects of corrosion and how it can be visually identified by a
pilot during the pre-flight inspection.
LO Describe the operating environments where the risk of corrosion is
increased and how to minimise the effects of the environmental factors.
LO Explain that aircraft have highly corrosive fluids on board as part of their
systems and equipment.
LO Explain fatigue, how it affects the useful life of an aircraft, and the effect of
the following factors on the development of fatigue:
corrosion;
number of cycles;
type of flight manoeuvres;
stress level;
level and quality of maintenance.
021 01 04 00 Intentionally left blank
021 01 05 00 Maintenance
021 01 05 01 Maintenance methods: hard-time and on-condition monitoring
LO Explain the following terms:
hard-time or fixed-time maintenance;
on-condition maintenance;
condition monitoring.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
B. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 37 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: AIRFRAME
1.8. PTS/PL112: AIRFRAME
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 02 00 00 AIRFRAME 6
021 02 01 00 Attachment methods
021 02 01 01 Attachment methods and detecting the development of faulty attachments
LO Describe the following attachment methods used for aircraft parts and
components:
riveting;
welding;
bolting;
pinning;
adhesives (bonding);
screwing.
LO Explain how the development of a faulty attachment between aircraft parts or
components can be detected by a pilot during the pre-flight inspection.
021 02 02 00 Materials
021 02 02 01 Composite and other materials
LO Explain the principle of a composite material , and give examples of typical non-
metallic materials used on aircraft:
carbon;
X
glass;
Kevlar aramid;
resin or filler.
LO State the advantages and disadvantages of composite materials compared with
metal alloys by considering the following:
strength-to-weight ratio;
capability to tailor the strength to the direction of the load;
X stiffness;
electrical conductivity (lightning);
resistance to fatigue and corrosion;
resistance to cost;
discovering damage during a pre-flight inspection.
LO State that several types of materials are used on aircraft and that they are
chosen based on type of structure or component and the required/desired
material properties.
021 02 03 00 Aeroplane: wings, tail surfaces and control surfaces
021 02 03 01 Design
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 38 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: AIRFRAME
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the following types of design and explain their advantages
and disadvantages:
high-mounted wing;
low-mounted wing;
low- or mid-set tailplane;
T-tail.
021 02 03 02 Structural components
LO Describe the function of the following structural components:
spar and its components (web and girder or cap);
rib;
stringer;
skin;
torsion box.
021 02 03 03 Loads, stresses and aeroelastic vibrations (flutter)
LO Describe the vertical and horizontal loads on the ground and during normal
flight.
LO Describe the vertical and horizontal loads during asymmetric flight following
an engine failure for a multi-engine aeroplane,
LO and how a pilot may potentially overstress the structure during
the failure scenario.
LO Explain the principle of flutter and resonance for the wing and control
surfaces.
LO Explain the following countermeasures used to achieve stress relief and
reduce resonance:
chord-wise and span-wise position of masses (e.g. engines, fuel, balance masses
for wing and control balance masses);
torsional stiffness;
bending flexibility;
fuel-balancing procedures during flight (automatic or applied by the pilot).
021 02 04 00 Fuselage, landing gear, doors, floor, windscreen and windows
021 02 04 01 Construction, functions, loads
LO Describe the following types of fuselage construction:
X monocoque,
semi-monocoque.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 39 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: AIRFRAME
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the construction and the function of the following structural
components of a fuselage:
frames;
bulkhead;
pressure bulkhead;
stiffeners, stringers, longerons;
skin, doublers;
floor suspension (crossbeams);
floor panels;
firewall.
LO Describe the loads on the fuselage due to pressurisation.
LO Describe the following loads on a main landing gear:
touch-down loads (vertical and horizontal);
taxi loads on bogie gear (turns).
LO Describe the structural danger of a nose-wheel landing with respect to:
fuselage loads;
nose-wheel strut loads.
LO Describe the structural danger of a tail strike with respect to:
fuselage and aft bulkhead damage (pressurisation).
LO Describe the door and hatch construction for pressurised and unpressurised
aeroplanes including:
door and frame (plug type);
hinge location;
locking mechanism.
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of the following fuselage cross
sections:
circular;
X
double bubble;
oval;
rectangular.
LO Explain why flight-deck windows are constructed with different layers.
LO Explain the function of window heating for structural purposes.
LO Explain the implication of a direct-vision window (see CS 25.773(b)(3)).
LO Explain the need for an eye-reference position.
LO Explain the function of floor venting (blow-out panels).
021 02 06 00 Structural limitations
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 40 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: AIRFRAME
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 02 06 01 Maximum structural masses
LO Define and explain the following maximum structural masses:
maximum ramp mass;
maximum take-off mass;
maximum zero fuel mass;
maximum landing mass.
Remark: These limitations may also be found in the relevant part of Subjects 031
‘Mass and balance’, 032 ‘Performance (aeroplane)’ and 034 ‘Performance
(helicopter)’.
LO Explain that airframe life is limited by fatigue, created by alternating
stress and the number of load cycles.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-Discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
C. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
D. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 41 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: HYDRAULICS
1.9. PTS/PL113: HYDRAULICS
021 03 00 00 HYDRAULICS 6
021 03 01 00 Hydromechanics: basic principles
021 03 01 01 Concepts and basic principles
LO Explain the concept and basic principles of hydromechanics including:
hydrostatic pressure;
X Pascal’s law;
the relationship between pressure, force and area;
transmission of power: multiplication of force, decrease of displacement.
021 03 02 00 Hydraulic systems
021 03 02 01 Hydraulic fluids: types, characteristics, limitations
LO List and explain the desirable properties of a hydraulic fluid with regard to:
thermal stability;
corrosiveness;
X
flashpoint and flammability;
volatility;
viscosity.
LO X State that hydraulic fluids are irritating to skin and eyes.
LO List the two different types of hydraulic fluids:
synthetic;
mineral.
LO State that different types of hydraulic fluids cannot be mixed.
LO State that at the pressures being considered, hydraulic fluid is considered
X
incompressible.
021 03 02 02 System components: design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
indications and warnings
LO Explain the working principle of a hydraulic system.
LO Describe the difference in the principle of operation between a constant pressure
system and a system pressurised only on specific demand.
LO State the differences in the principle of operation between a passive hydraulic
system (without a pressure pump) and an active hydraulic system (with a pressure
pump).
LO List the main advantages and disadvantages of system actuation by hydraulic or
purely mechanical means with respect to:
X weight;
size;
force.
LO List the main uses of hydraulic systems.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 42 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: HYDRAULICS
LO State that hydraulic systems can be classified as either high pressure (typically
3000 psi or higher) or low pressure (typically up to 2000 psi).
LO State that a high-pressure hydraulic system is typically operating at 3000 psi but
on some aircraft a hydraulic pressure of 4000 to 5000 psi may also be used.
LO Explain the working principle of a low-pressure (0–2000 psi) system.
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a high-pressure system over a
low-pressure system.
LO Describe the working principle and functions of pressure pumps including:
constant pressure pump (swash plate or cam plate);
pressure pump whose output is dependent on pump revolutions per minute
(rpm) (gear type).
LO Explain the following different sources of hydraulic pressure, their typical
application and potential operational limitations:
manual;
engine gearbox;
electrical;
air (pneumatic and ram-air turbine);
hydraulic (power transfer unit) or reversible motor pumps;
accessory.
LO Describe the working principle and functions of the following hydraulic
system components:
reservoir (pressurised and unpressurised);
accumulators;
case drain lines and fluid cooler return lines;
piston actuators (single- and double-acting);
hydraulic motors;
filters;
non-return (check) valves;
relief valves;
restrictor valves;
elector valves (linear and basic rotary selectors, two and four ports);
bypass valves;
shuttle valves;
fire shut-off valves;
priority valves;
fuse valves;
pressure and return pipes.
LO Explain the function of the demand pump installed on many transport
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 43 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: HYDRAULICS
aeroplanes.
LO Explain how redundancy is obtained by giving examples.
LO Interpret a typical hydraulic system schematic to the level of detail as found
in an aircraft flight crew operating manual (FCOM).
LO Explain the implication of a high system demand.
LO List and describe the instruments and alerts for monitoring a hydraulic
system.
LO State the indications and explain the implications of the following malfunctions:
system leak or low level;
low pressure;
high temperature.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-Discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
F. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 44 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL114: LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES
1.10. PTS/PL114: LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 04 00 00 LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES 6
021 04 01 00 Landing gear
021 04 01 01 Types
LO Name, for an aeroplane, the following different landing-gear configurations:
X nose wheel;
tail wheel.
021 04 01 02 System components, design, operation, indications and warnings, on-ground/in-
flight protections, emergency extension systems
LO Explain the function of the following components of a landing gear:
oleo leg/shock strut;
axles;
bogies and bogie beam;
drag struts;
side stays/struts;
torsion links;
locks (over centre);
gear doors.
LO Name the different components of a landing gear, using the diagram
appended to these LOs (021).
LO Describe the sequence of events during normal operation of the landing gear.
LO State how landing-gear position indication and alerting is implemented.
LO Describe the various protection devices to avoid inadvertent gear retraction on the
ground and explain the implications of taking off with one or more protection devices
in place:
ground lock (pins);
protection devices in the gear retraction mechanism.
LO Explain the speed limitations for gear operation (VLO (maximum landing gear
operating speed) and VLE (maximum landing gear extended speed)).
LO Describe the sequence for emergency gear extension:
unlocking;
operating;
down-locking.
LO Describe some methods for emergency gear extension including:
gravity/free fall;
air or nitrogen pressure;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 45 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL114: LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
manually/mechanically.
021 04 02 00 Nose-wheel steering
021 04 02 01 Design, operation
LO Explain the operating principle of nose-wheel steering.
LO Explain, for a helicopter, the functioning of differential braking with free-castoring
nose wheel.
LO Describe, for an aeroplane, the functioning of the following systems:
differential braking with free-castoring nose wheel;
tiller or hand wheel steering;
rudder pedal nose-wheel steering.
LO Explain the centring mechanism of the nose wheel.
LO Define the term ‘shimmy’ and the possible consequences of shimmy for the
nose- and the main-wheel system and explain the purpose of a shimmy damper to
reduce the severity of shimmy.
LO Explain the purpose of main-wheel (body) steering.
021 04 03 00 Brakes
021 04 03 01 Types and materials
LO Describe the basic operating principle of a disc brake.
LO State the different materials used in a disc brake (steel, carbon).
LO Describe the characteristics, advantages and disadvantages of steel and
carbon brake discs with regard to:
weight;
temperature limits;
internal-friction coefficient;
wear.
021 04 03 02 System components, design, operation, indications and warnings
LO Explain the limitation of brake energy and describe the operational consequences.
LO Explain how brakes are actuated:
hydraulically,
electrically.
LO Explain the purpose of an in-flight wheel brake system.
LO Describe the function of a brake accumulator.
LO Describe the function of the parking brake.
LO Explain the function of brake-wear indicators.
LO Explain the reason for the brake-temperature indicator.
021 04 03 03 Anti-skid
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 46 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL114: LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the operating principle of anti-skid where excessive brake pressure applied
is automatically reduced for optimum breaking performance.
LO Explain that the anti-skid computer compares wheel speed to aeroplane
reference speed to provide the following:
slip ratio for maximum braking performance;
locked-wheel prevention (protection against deep skid on one wheel);
touchdown protection (protection against brake-pressure application during
touchdown);
hydroplane protection.
LO Give examples of the impact of an anti-skid system on performance, and
explain the implications of anti-skid system failure.
021 04 03 04 Autobrake
LO Describe the operating principle of an autobrake system.
LO Explain why the anti-skid system must be available when using autobrakes.
LO Explain the difference between the three modes of operation of an autobrake
system:
OFF (system off or reset);
Armed (the system is ready to operate under certain conditions);
Activated/Deactivated (application of pressure on brakes).
LO Describe how an autobrake system setting will either apply maximum braking (RTO
or MAX) or result in a given rate of deceleration, where the amount of braking
applied may be affected by:
the use of reverse thrust;
slippery runway.
021 04 04 00 Wheels, rims and tyres
021 04 04 01 Types, structural components and materials, operational limitations,
thermal plugs
LO Describe the different types of tyres such as:
X tubeless;
diagonal (cross ply);
LO radial (circumferential bias).
LO Define the following terms:
ply rating;
X tyre tread;
tyre creep;
retread (cover).
LO Explain the function of thermal/fusible plugs.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 47 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL114: LANDING GEAR, WHEELS, TYRES, BRAKES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the implications of and how to identify tread separation and wear or
damage with associated increased risk of tyre burst.
LO Explain why the ground speed of tyres is limited.
LO Describe the following tyre checks a pilot will perform during the pre-flight
inspection and identify probable causes:
cuts and damages;
flat spots.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
H. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 48 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
1.11. PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 05 00 00 FLIGHT CONTROLS 4
021 05 01 00 Aeroplane: primary flight controls
021 05 01 01 Definition and control surfaces
LO Define a ‘primary flight control’.
LO List the following primary flight control surfaces:
elevator;
aileron, roll spoilers, flaperon;
rudder.
LO List the various means of control surface actuation including:
manual;
fully powered (irreversible);
partially powered (reversible).
021 05 01 02 Manual controls
LO Explain the basic principle of a fully manual control system.
021 05 01 03 Fully powered controls (irreversible)
LO Explain the basic principle of a fully powered control system.
LO Explain the concept of irreversibility in a flight control system.
LO Explain the need for a ‘feel system’ in a fully powered control
system.
LO Explain the operating principle of a stabiliser trim system in a fully powered
control system.
LO Explain the operating principle of rudder and aileron trim in a fully powered
control system.
021 05 01 04 Partially powered controls (reversible)
LO Explain the basic principle of a partially powered control system.
LO Explain why a ‘feel system’ is not necessary in a partially powered
control system.
021 05 01 05 System components, design, operation, indications and warnings, degraded
modes of operation, jamming
LO List and describe the function of the following components of a flight control
system:
actuators;
control valves;
cables;
electrical wiring;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 49 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
control surface position sensors.
LO Explain how redundancy is obtained in primary flight control systems of
large transport aeroplanes.
LO Explain the danger of control jamming and the means of retaining sufficient
control capability.
LO Explain the methods of locking the controls on the ground and describe ‘gust
or control lock’ warnings.
LO Explain the concept of a rudder deflection limitation (rudder limiter) system and
the various means of implementation (rudder ratio changer, variable stops, blow-
back).
021 05 02 00 Aeroplane: secondary flight controls
021 05 02 01 System components, design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
indications and warnings
LO Define a ‘secondary flight control’.
LO List the following secondary flight control surfaces:
LO lift-augmentation devices (flaps and slats);
speed brakes;
flight and ground spoilers;
trimming devices such as trim tabs, trimmable horizontal stabiliser.
LO Describe secondary flight control actuation methods and sources of actuating
power.
LO Explain the function of a mechanical lock when using hydraulic motors driving
a screw jack.
LO Describe the requirement for limiting flight speeds for the various secondary
flight control surfaces.
LO For lift-augmentation devices, explain the load-limiting (relief) protection devices
and the functioning of an auto-retraction system.
LO Explain how a flap/slat asymmetry protection device functions, and describe
the implications of a flap/slat asymmetry situation.
LO Describe the function of an auto-slat system.
LO Explain the concept of control surface blow-back (aerodynamic forces
overruling hydraulic forces).
021 05 04 00 Aeroplane: fly-by-wire (FBW) control systems
021 05 04 01 Composition, explanation of operation, modes of operation
LO Explain that an FBW flight control system is composed of the following:
pilot’s input command (control column/sidestick/rudder pedals);
electrical signalling paths, including:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 50 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
pilot input to computer;
computer to flight control surfaces;
feedback from aircraft response to computer;
flight control computers;
actuators;
flight control surfaces.
LO State the advantages and disadvantages of an FBW system in comparison
with a conventional flight control system including:
weight;
pilot workload;
flight-envelope protection.
LO Explain why an FBW system is always irreversible.
LO Explain the different modes of operation:
normal operation (e.g. normal law or normal mode);
downgraded operation (e.g. alternate law or secondary mode);
direct law.
LO Describe the implications of mode degradation in relation to pilot workload
and flight-envelope protection.
LO Describe the implications for pilot workload during flight in normal operation
(normal law/normal mode) during the following scenarios:
an undetected system error activates the envelope protection;
aircraft departs from intended flight path;
aircraft does not respond as expected to control inputs.
LO For aircraft using sidestick for manual control, describe the implications of:
dual control input made by the pilot;
the control takeover facility available to the pilot.
LO Describe solutions or actions to regain control.
021 06 00 00 PNEUMATICS — PRESSURISATION AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
021 06 01 00 Pneumatic/bleed-air supply
021 06 01 01 Piston-engine air supply
LO Describe the following means of supplying air for the pneumatic systems for
piston-engine aircraft:
compressor;
vacuum pump.
LO State that an air supply is required for the following systems:
instrumentation;
heating;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 51 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
de-icing.
LO Gas turbine engine: bleed-air supply
LO State that the possible bleed-air sources for gas turbine engine aircraft are the
following:
engine;
auxiliary power unit (APU);
ground supply.
LO State that for an aeroplane a bleed-air supply can be used for the following
systems or components:
ice protection;
engine air starter;
pressurisation of a hydraulic reservoir;
air-driven hydraulic pumps;
pressurisation and air conditioning.
LO State that the bleed-air supply system can comprise the following:
pneumatic ducts;
isolation valve;
pressure-regulating valve;
engine bleed valve (HP/IP valves);
fan-air pre-cooler;
temperature and pressure sensors.
LO Interpret a basic pneumatic system schematic to the level of detail as found in an
FCOM.
LO Describe the cockpit indications for bleed-air systems.
LO Explain how the bleed-air supply system is controlled and monitored.
LO State the following bleed-air malfunctions:
over-temperature;
over-pressure;
low pressure;
overheat/duct leak;
and describe the potential consequences.
021 06 03 00 Aeroplane: pressurisation and air-conditioning system
021 06 03 01 System components, design, operation, degraded modes of operation,
indications and warnings
LO Explain that a pressurisation and an air-conditioning system of an aeroplane
controls:
ventilation;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 52 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
temperature;
pressure.
LO Explain how humidity is controlled.
LO Explain that the following components constitute a pressurisation system:
pneumatic system as the power source;
outflow valve;
outflow valve actuator;
pressure controller;
excessive differential pressure-relief valve;
negative differential pressure-relief valve.
LO Explain that the following components constitute an air-conditioning
system and describe their operating principles and function:
air-cycle machine (pack, bootstrap system);
pack-cooling fan;
water separator;
mixing valves;
flow-control valves (outflow valve);
isolation valves;
ram-air valve;
recirculation fans;
filters for recirculated air;
temperature sensors.
Remark: The bootstrap system is the only air-conditioning system considered for
Part-FCL aeroplane examinations.
LO Describe the use of hot trim air.
LO Define the following terms:
cabin altitude;
cabin vertical speed;
differential pressure;
ground pressurisation.
LO Describe the operating principle of a pressurisation system.
LO Describe the emergency operation by manual setting of the outflow valve
position.
LO Describe the working principle of an electronic cabin-pressure controller.
LO State how the maximum operating altitude is determined.
LO Explain:
why the maximum allowed value of cabin altitude is limited;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 53 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL115: FLIGHT CONTROLS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
a typical value of maximum differential pressure for large transport aeroplanes;
the relation between cabin altitude, the maximum differential pressure and
maximum aeroplane operating altitude.
LO Explain the typical warning on a transport category aircraft when cabin altitude
exceeds 10 000 ft.
LO List and interpret typical indications of the pressurisation system.
LO Describe the main operational differences between a bleed-air- driven air-
conditioning system and an electrically driven air- conditioning system as found on
aircraft without engine bleed-air system.
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-Discussion
10. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
J. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 54 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL116: ANTI-ICING AND DE-ICING SYSTEMS
1.12. PTS/PL116: ANTI-ICING AND DE-ICING SYSTEMS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 07 00 00 ANTI-ICING AND DE-ICING SYSTEMS 4
021 07 01 00 Types, operation, indications
021 07 01 01 Types, design, operation, indications and warnings, operational limitations
LO Explain the concepts of anti-icing and de-icing.
LO Name the components of an aircraft which can be protected from ice accretion.
LO State that on some aeroplanes the tail does not have an ice- protection
system.
LO State the different types of anti-icing/de-icing systems and describe their
operating principle:
hot air;
electrical;
fluid.
LO Describe the operating principle of the inflatable boot de-icing system.
021 07 02 00 Ice warning systems
021 07 02 01 Types, operation, and indications
(01) Describe the different operating principles of the following ice detectors:
mechanical systems using air pressure;
electromechanical systems using resonance frequencies.
(02) Describe the principle of operation of ice warning systems.
Learning-Teaching Methods
11. Lecture-Discussion
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
6. Written Test
Reference Materials
K. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
L. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 55 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL117: FUEL SYSTEM
1.13. PTS/PL117: FUEL SYSTEM
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 08 00 00 FUEL SYSTEM 4
021 08 01 00 Piston engine
021 08 01 01 Fuel: types, characteristics, limitations
(01) State the types of fuel used by a piston engine and their associated limitations:
diesel;
JET-A1 (for high-compression engines);
AVGAS;
MOGAS.
(02) State the main characteristics of these fuels and give typical values regarding their
flash points, freezing points and density.
021 08 01 02 Design, operation, system components, indications
LO State the tasks of the fuel system.
LO Name the following main components of a fuel system, and state their location
and their function:
lines;
boost pump;
pressure valves;
filter, strainer;
tanks (wing, tip, fuselage);
vent system;
sump;
drain;
fuel-quantity sensor;
fuel-temperature sensor.
LO Describe a gravity fuel feed system and a pressure feed fuel system.
LO Describe the construction of the different types of fuel tanks and state their
advantages and disadvantages:
drum tank;
bladder tank;
integral tank.
LO Explain the function of cross-feed.
LO Define the term ‘unusable fuel’.
LO List the following parameters that are monitored for the fuel system:
fuel quantity (low-level warning);
fuel temperature.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 56 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL117: FUEL SYSTEM
LO Turbine engine
LO Fuel: types, characteristics, limitations
LO State the types of fuel used by a gas turbine engine:
JET-A;
JET-A1;
JET-B.
LO State the main characteristics of these fuels and give typical values regarding their
flash points, freezing points and density.
LO State the existence of additives for freezing.
021 08 02 02 Design, operation, system components, indications
(01) Explain the function of the fuel system:
lines;
centrifugal boost pump;
pressure valves;
fuel shut-off valve;
filter, strainer;
tanks (wing, tip, fuselage, tail);
bafflers/baffles;
sump;
vent system;
drain;
fuel-quantity sensor;
fuel-temperature sensor;
refuelling/defueling system;
fuel dump/jettison system.
LO Name the main components of the fuel system and state their location and
their function:
trim fuel tanks;
bafflers;
refuelling/defueling system;
fuel dump/jettison system.
LO Remark: For completion of list, please see 021 08 01 02 (02).
LO Interpret a typical fuel system schematic to the level of detail as found in an
aircraft FCOM.
LO Explain the limitations in the event of loss of booster pump fuel pressure.
LO Describe the use and purpose of drip sticks (manual magnetic indicators)
(may also be known as dip stick or drop stick).
LO Explain the considerations for fitting a fuel dump/jettison system and, if fitted, its
function.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 57 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL117: FUEL SYSTEM
LO
Assessment Methods
7. Written Test
Reference Materials
M. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
N. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 58 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
1.14. PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 09 00 00 ELECTRICS 11
Remark: For any reference to the direction of current flow, the conventional
current flow shall be used, i.e. from positive to negative.
021 09 01 00 General, definitions, basic applications: circuit breakers, logic circuits
021 09 01 01 Static electricity
LO Explain static electricity and describe the flying conditions where aircraft are
most susceptible to build-up of static electricity.
LO Describe a static discharger and explain the following:
its purpose;
typical locations;
pilot’s role of observing it during pre-flight inspection.
LO Explain why an aircraft must first be grounded before
refuelling/defueling.
LO Explain the reason for electrical bonding.
LO Direct current (DC)
LO Explain the term ‘direct current’ (DC), and state that current can only flow in a
closed circuit.
LO X Explain the basic principles of conductivity and give examples of conductors,
semiconductors and insulators.
LO Describe the difference in use of the following mechanical switches and explain
the difference in observing their state (e.g. ON/OFF), and why some switches are
guarded:
toggle switch;
rocker switch;
pushbutton switch;
rotary switch.
Explain the difference in observing their state (e.g. ON/OFF) and why some
switches are guarded.
LO Define voltage and current, and state their unit of measurement.
LO X Explain Ohm’s law in qualitative terms.
LO X Explain the effect on total resistance when resistors are connected in series or in
parallel.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 59 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
LO X State that resistances can have a positive or a negative temperature
coefficient (PTC/NTC) and state their use.
LO Define electrical power and state the unit of measurement.
021 09 01 03 Alternating current (AC)
LO X Explain the term ‘alternating current’ (AC), and compare its use to
DC with regard to complexity.
LO Define the term ‘phase’, and explain the basic principle of single- phase and
three-phase AC.
LO State that aircraft can use single-phase or three-phase AC.
LO Define frequency and state the unit of measurement.
LO X Define ‘phase shift’ in qualitative terms.
021 09 01 04 Intentionally left blank
021 09 01 05 Intentionally left blank
021 09 01 06 Electromagnetism
LO State that an electrical current produces a magnetic field.
LO Describe how the strength of the magnetic field changes with the magnitude of
the current.
LO Explain the purpose and the working principle of a solenoid.
LO Explain the purpose and the working principle of a relay.
LO Explain the principle of electromagnetic induction and how two electrical
components or systems may affect each other through this principle.
021 09 01 07 Circuit protection
LO Explain the working principle of a fuse and a circuit breaker.
LO Explain how a fuse is rated.
LO Describe the principal difference between the following types of circuit
breakers:
thermal circuit breaker sensing magnitude of current;
magnetic circuit breaker sensing direction of current.
LO Describe how circuit breakers may be used to reset aircraft systems/computers in
the event of system failure (when part of a described procedure).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 60 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
LO Explain a short circuit in practical terms using Ohm’s Law, power and energy
expressions highlighting the risk of fire due to power transfer and extreme energy
dissipation.
LO Explain the risk of fire resulting from excessive heat in a circuit subjected to
overcurrent.
LO Explain that overcurrent situations may be transient.
LO Explain the hazards of multiple resets of a circuit b reaker or the use of
incorrect fuse rating when replacing blown fuses.
021 09 01 08 Semiconductors and logic circuits
LO Describe the effect of temperature on semiconductors with regard to function and
longevity of the component.
LO Describe the following five basic logic functions, as used in aircraft FCOM
documentation, and recognise their schematic symbols according to the ANSI/MIL
standard:
AND;
OR;
NOT;
NOR;
NAND.
LO Interpret a typical logic circuit schematic to the level of detail as found in an
aircraft FCOM.
021 09 02 00 Batteries
021 09 02 01 Types, characteristics and limitations
LO State the function of an aircraft battery.
LO Name the types of rechargeable batteries used in aircraft:
lead-acid;
nickel-cadmium;
lithium-ion;
lithium-polymer.
LO Compare the different battery types with respect to:
load behaviour;
charging characteristics;
risk of thermal runaway.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 61 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
LO Explain the term ‘cell voltage’ and describe how a battery may consist of several cells
that combined provide the desirable voltage and capacity.
LO Explain the difference between battery voltage and charging voltage.
LO Define the term ‘capacity of batteries’ and state the unit of
measurement used.
LO State the effect of temperature on battery capacity and performance.
LO State that in the case of loss of all generated power (battery power only) the
remaining electrical power is time-limited.
LO Explain how lithium-type batteries pose a threat to aircraft safety and
what affects this risk:
LO numbers of batteries on board an aircraft including those brought on board by
passengers;
temperature, of both battery and environment;
physical condition of the battery;
battery charging.
LO Describe how to contain a battery thermal runaway highlighting the following:
how one cell can affect the neighbouring cells;
challenges if it happens in an aircraft during flight.
021 09 03 00 Generation
Remark: For standardisation purposes, the following standard expressions are
used:
DC generator: produces DC output;
DC alternator: produces AC, rectified by integrated rectifying unit, the output is DC;
DC alternator: producing a DC output by using a rectifier;
AC generator: produces AC output;
starter generator: integrated combination of a generator and a starter motor;
permanent magnet alternator/ generator: self-exciting AC generator.
021 09 03 01 DC generation
LO Describe the basic working principle of a simple DC generator or
DC alternator.
LO Explain the principle of voltage control and why it is required.
LO Explain the purpose of reverse current protection from the battery/busbar
to the alternator.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 62 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
LO Describe the basic operating principle of a starter generator and state its
purpose.
021 09 03 02 AC generation
LO Describe the working principle of a brushless three-phase AC
generator.
LO State that the generator field current is used to control voltage.
LO State the relationship between output frequency and the rpm of a three-phase AC
generator.
LO Explain the term ‘frequency wild generator’.
LO List the following different power sources that can be used for an aeroplane to
drive an AC generator:
engine;
APU;
RAT;
hydraulic.
Constant speed drive (CSD) and integrated drive generator (IDG)
021 09 03 03
systems
LO Describe the function of a CSD.
LO Explain the parameters of a CSD that are monitored.
LO Describe the function of an IDG.
LO Explain the consequences of a mechanical disconnection during flight for a CSD
and an IDG.
LO Explain that a CSD/IDG has its own, independent oil system and how a leak
from this may appear as an engine oil leak .
021 09 03 04 Transformers, transformer rectifier units (TRUs), static inverters
LO State the function of a transformer.
LO State the function of a TRU and its purpose, including type of output.
LO State the function of a static inverter and its purpose, including type of output.
021 09 04 00 Distribution
021 09 04 01 General
LO Explain the function of a busbar.
LO Describe the function of the following buses:
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 63 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
AC bus;
DC bus;
emergency AC or DC bus;
essential AC or DC bus;
battery bus;
hot bus, ground servicing or maintenance bus.
LO State that the aircraft structure can be used as a part of the
LO electrical circuit (common earth) and explain the implications for
electrical bonding.
LO Explain the function of external power.
LO State that a priority sequence exists between the different sources of electrical
power on ground and in flight.
LO Explain the term ‘load sharing’.
LO Explain the term ‘load shedding’.
LO Describe typical systems that can be shed in the event of a supply failure,
such as passenger entertainment system and galley power.
LO Interpret a typical electrical system schematic to the level of detail as found
in an aircraft FCOM.
LO Explain the difference between a supply (e.g. generator) failure and a bus
failure, and the operating consequences of either.
021 09 04 02 DC distribution
LO Describe a simple DC electrical system of a single-engine aircraft.
LO Describe a DC electrical system of a multi-engine aircraft (CS-23/CS-27)
including the distribution consequences of loss of generator(s) or bus failure.
LO Describe the DC part of an electrical system of a transport aircraft (CS-25/CS-29)
including the distribution consequences of loss of DC supply or bus failure.
LO Give examples of DC consumers.
021 09 04 03 AC distribution
LO Explain the difference in the principle of operation for a split AC
electrical system and a parallel AC electrical system.
LO Describe the following distribution consequences:
power transfer between different power supplies;
power transfer in the event of a supply failure;
loss of all normal AC supplies.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 64 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
LO Give examples of AC consumers.
LO Explain the conditions to be met for paralleling AC generators.
LO State that volt-ampere (VA) is the unit for total power consumed in an AC system.
Electrical load management and monitoring systems: automatic generators and
021 09 04 04 bus switching during normal and failure operation, indications and warnings
LO Give examples of system control, monitoring and annunciators using the
following terms:
generator control unit (GCU) for monitoring generator output and providing
network protection;
exciter contactor/breaker/relay for control of generator exciter field;
generator contactor/breaker/relay for connecting the generator to the
network;
bus-tie contactor/breaker/relay for connecting busbars together;
generator switch on the flight deck for manual control of exciter contactor;
IDG/CSD disconnect switch on the flight deck for mechanical disconnection of the
generator;
bus-tie switch on the flight deck with AUTO and OFF positions only.
LO Describe, for normal and degraded modes of operation, the following functions of
an electrical load management system on ground and in flight using the terms in 021
09 04 04 (01):
distribution;
monitoring;
protection in the event of incorrect voltage;
protection in the event of incorrect frequency;
protection in the event of a differential fault.
LO Describe the requirement for monitoring the aircraft batteries.
LO Explain the importance of monitoring the temperature of nickel- cadmium and
lithium-type batteries.
LO Interpret various different ammeter indications of an ammeter which monitors
the charge current of the battery.
021 09 05 00 Electrical motors
021 09 05 01 General
LO X State that the purpose of an electrical motor is to convert electrical energy into
mechanical energy.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 65 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
LO State that because of the similarity in design, a generator and an electrical motor
may be combined into a starter generator.
LO Explain that the size of the engine determines how much energy is required for
starting, and state the following:
small turbine engines may be able to use the battery for a very limited number of
start attempts;
large turbine engines require one or more power sources, either external or on-
board.
021 09 05 02 Operating principle
LO Describe how the torque of an electrical motor is determined by the supplied
voltage and current, and the resulting magnetic fields within the engine.
LO X State that electrical motors can be either AC or DC.
LO Explain the consequences of the following:
rotor seizure;
rotor runaway.
021 09 05 03 Components
X Name the following components of an electrical motor:
(LO rotor (rotating part of an electrical motor);
stator (stationary part of an electrical motor).
021 12 00 00 PROTECTION AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
021 12 01 00 Smoke detection
Types, design, operation, indications and warnings
021 12 01 01
LO Explain the operating principle of the following types of smoke detection sensors:
optical;
ionising.
LO Give an example of warnings, indications and function tests.
021 12 02 00 Fire-protection systems
021 12 02 01 Fire extinguishing (engine and cargo compartments)
Explain the operating principle of a built-in fire-extinguishing system and
LO describe its components.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 66 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
State that two discharges must be provided for each engine
LO (see CS 25.1195(c) Fire-extinguisher systems).
021 12 02 02 Fire detection
Explain the following principles of fire detection:
LO resistance and capacitance;
gas pressure.
Explain fire-detection applications such as:
bimetallic;
LO continuous loop;
gaseous loop (gas-filled detectors).
LO Explain why generally double-loop systems are used.
Give an example of warnings, indications and function tests of a fire-protection
LO system.
021 12 03 00 Rain-protection system
021 12 03 01 Principle and method of operation
Explain the principle and method of operation of the following windshield rain-
protection systems for an aeroplane:
LO wipers;
liquids (rain-repellent);
coating.
021 13 00 00 OXYGEN SYSTEMS
021 13 01 00 Cockpit, portable and chemical oxygen systems
021 13 01 01 Operating principles, actuation methods, comparison
Describe the basic operating principle of a cockpit oxygen system and describe the
following different modes of operation:
LO normal (diluter demand);
100 %;
emergency.
Describe the operating principle and the purposes of the following two portable
oxygen systems:
LO smoke hood;
portable bottle.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 67 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL118: Aircraft Electrics
Describe the following two oxygen systems that can be used to supply oxygen to
passengers:
LO fixed system (chemical oxygen generator or gaseous system);
portable.
LO Describe the actuation methods (automatic and manual) and the functioning of a
passenger oxygen mask.
LO Compare chemical oxygen generators to gaseous systems with respect to:
capacity;
flow regulation.
LO State the dangers of grease or oil related to the use of oxygen systems.
Learning-Teaching Methods
13. Lecture-Discussion
14. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
8. Written Test
Reference Materials
O. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
P. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 68 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
1.15. PTS/PL119: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 10 00 00 PISTON ENGINES 11
Remark: This topic includes diesel and petrol engines.
021 10 01 00 General
021 10 01 01 Types of internal-combustion engines: basic principles, definitions
Define the following terms and expressions:
rpm;
torque;
manifold absolute pressure (MAP);
LO
power output;
specific fuel consumption;
compression ratio, clearance volume, swept (displaced) volume, total
volume.
021 10 01 02 Engine: design, operation, components
Describe the basic operating principle of a piston engine:
crankcase;
crankshaft;
connecting rod;
piston;
piston pin;
piston rings;
cylinder;
LO
cylinder head;
valves;
valve springs;
push rod;
camshaft;
rocker arm;
camshaft gear;
bearings.
Name and identify the various types of engine design with regard to cylinder
arrangement and their advantages/disadvantages:
horizontally opposed;
LO in line;
radial;
and working cycle (four stroke: petrol and diesel).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 69 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Describe the differences between petrol and diesel engines with respect to:
means of ignition;
LO maximum compression ratio;
regulating air or mixture supply to the cylinder;
pollution from the exhaust.
021 10 02 00 Fuel
021 10 02 01 Types, grades, characteristics, limitations
LO Name the type of fuel used for petrol engines including its colour (AVGAS);
100 (green);
100LL (blue).
LO Name the type of fuel normally used for aviation diesel engines (JET-A1).
LO X Define the term ‘octane rating’.
LO Define the term ‘detonation’ and describe the causes and effects of detonation
for both petrol and diesel engines.
LO Define the term ‘pre-ignition’ and describe the causes and effects of pre-
ignition for both petrol and diesel engines.
LO Identify the conditions and power settings that promote detonation
for petrol engines.
LO Describe how detonation in petrol engines is recognised.
LO Describe the method and occasions for checking the fuel for water content.
LO State the typical value of fuel density for aviation gasoline and diesel fuel.
LO Explain volatility, viscosity and vapour locking for petrol and diesel fuels.
021 10 03 00 Engine fuel pumps
021 10 03 01 Engine-driven fuel pump
LO Explain the need for a separate engine-driven fuel pump.
021 10 04 00 Carburettor/injection system
Carburettor: design, operation, degraded modes of operation, indications
021 10 04 01
and warnings
LO State the purpose of a carburettor.
LO Describe the operating principle of the simple float chamber carburettor.
LO Describe the methods of obtaining mixture control over the whole operating
engine power setting range (compensation jet, diffuser).
LO Describe the methods of obtaining mixture control over the whole operating
altitude range.
LO Explain the purpose and the operating principle of an accelerator pump.
LO Explain the purpose of power enrichment.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 70 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the function of the carburettor heat system.
LO Explain the effect of carburettor heat on mixture ratio and power output.
LO Explain the purpose and the operating principle of a primer pump.
LO Discuss other methods for priming an engine (acceleration pumps).
LO Explain the danger of carburettor fire, including corrective measures.
Injection: design, operation, degraded modes of operation, indications
021 10 04 02
and warnings
Explain the advantages and difference in operation of an injection system
LO
compared with a carburettor system.
021 10 04 03 Icing
LO Describe the causes and effects of carburettor icing and the action to be taken if
carburettor icing is suspected.
LO Name the meteorological conditions under which carburettor icing may occur.
LO Describe the indications of the presence of carburettor icing for both a fixed
pitch and a constant speed propeller.
LO Describe the indications of the presence of carburettor icing for a helicopter.
LO Describe the indications that will occur upon selection of carburettor
heat depending on whether ice is present or not.
LO Explain the reason for the use of alternate air on fuel injection systems and
describe its operating principle.
LO State the meteorological conditions under which induction system icing may
occur.
021 10 05 00 Cooling systems
021 10 05 01 Design, operation, indications and warnings
LO Specify the reasons for cooling a piston engine.
LO Describe the design features to enhance cylinder air cooling for aeroplanes.
LO Describe the design features to enhance cylinder air cooling for helicopters (e.g.
engine-driven impeller and scroll assembly, baffles).
LO Compare the differences between liquid- and air-cooling systems.
LO Identify the cylinder head temperature indication to monitor engine
cooling.
LO Describe the function and the operation of cowl flaps.
021 10 06 00 Lubrication systems
021 10 06 01 Lubricants: characteristics, limitations
LO Describe the term ‘viscosity’ including the effect of temperature.
LO Describe the viscosity grade numbering system used in aviation.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 71 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 10 06 02 Design, operation, indications and warnings
LO State the functions of a piston-engine lubrication system.
LO Describe the working principle of a dry-sump lubrication system and describe
the functions of the following components:
oil tank (reservoir) and its internal components: hot well, de- aerator, vent,
expansion space;
check valve (non-return valve);
pressure pump and pressure-relief valve;
scavenge pump;
filters (suction, pressure and scavenge);
oil cooler;
oil cooler bypass valve (anti-surge and thermostatic);
pressure and temperature sensors;
lines.
LO Describe a wet-sump lubrication system.
LO State the differences between a wet- and a dry-sump lubrication system and
their advantages and disadvantages.
LO List the following factors that influence oil consumption:
oil grade;
cylinder and piston wear;
condition of piston rings.
LO Describe the interaction between oil pressure, oil temperature and oil quantity.
021 10 07 00 Ignition circuits
021 10 07 01 Design, operation
LO Describe the working principle of a magneto-ignition system and the functions
of the following components:
magneto;
contact-breaker points;
capacitor (condenser);
coils or windings;
ignition switches;
LO distributor;
spark plug;
high-tension (HT) cable.
LO State why piston engines are equipped with two electrically independent
ignition systems.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 72 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO State the function and operating principle of the following methods of
spark augmentation:
starter vibrator (booster coil);
impulse-start coupling.
LO State the function and operating principle of the following methods of
spark augmentation:
starter vibrator (booster coil);
both magnetos live.
LO Explain the function of the magneto check.
LO Explain how combustion is initiated in diesel engines.
021 10 08 00 Mixture
Definition, characteristic mixtures, control instruments, associated
021 10 08 01
control levers, indications
LO Define the following terms:
mixture;
chemically correct ratio (stoichiometric);
best power ratio;
lean (weak) mixture (lean or rich side of the exhaust gas temperature (EGT)
top);
rich mixture.
LO State the typical fuel-to-air ratio values or range of values for the above
mixtures.
LO Describe the advantages and disadvantages of weak and rich mixtures.
LO Describe the relation between engine-specific fuel consumption and mixture
ratio.
LO Describe the use of the exhaust gas temperature as an aid to mixture-
setting.
LO Explain the relation between mixture ratio, cylinder head temperature,
detonation and pre-ignition.
LO Explain the absence of mixture control in diesel engines.
021 10 09 00 Aeroplane: propellers
021 10 09 01 Definitions, general
Remark: Definitions and aerodynamic concepts are detailed in Subject 081
‘Principles of flight (aeroplane)’, Topic 07 (Propellers), but need to be appreciated
for this Subject as well.
021 10 09 02 Constant-speed propeller: design, operation, system components
LO Describe the operating principle of a constant-speed propeller system under
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 73 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
normal flight operations with the aid of a schematic.
LO Explain the need for a MAP indicator to control the power setting with a
constant-speed propeller.
LO State the purpose of a torque-meter.
LO State the purpose and describe the operation of a low-pitch stop
(centrifugal latch).
LO Describe the operating principle of a single-acting and a double- acting variable
pitch propeller for single- and multi-engine aeroplanes.
LO Describe the function and the basic operating principle of synchronising
and synchro-phasing systems.
Explain the purpose and the basic operating principle of an auto- feathering
LO
system and unfeathering.
021 10 09 03 Reduction gearing: design
LO State the purpose of reduction gearing.
Propeller handling: associated control levers, degraded modes of operation,
021 10 09 04
indications and warnings
LO Describe the checks to be carried out on a constant-speed propeller
system after engine start.
LO Describe the operation of a constant-speed propeller system during flight at
different true airspeeds (TAS) and rpm including an overspeeding propeller.
LO Describe the operating principle of a variable pitch propeller when feathering and
unfeathering, including the operation of cockpit controls.
LO Describe the operating principle of a variable pitch propeller when reverse pitch
is selected, including the operation of cockpit controls.
Describe the operation of the propeller levers during different phases of
LO
flight.
021 10 10 00 Performance and engine handling
021 10 10 01 Performance
LO Describe the effect on power output of a petrol and diesel engine taking into
consideration the following parameters:
ambient pressure, exhaust back pressure;
temperature;
density altitude;
humidity.
LO Explain the term ‘normally aspirated engine’.
LO Power-augmentation devices: explain the requirement for power
augmentation (turbocharging) of a piston engine.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 74 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the function and the principle of operation of the following
main components of a turbocharger:
turbine;
compressor;
waste gate;
waste-gate actuator.
LO Explain the difference between an altitude-boosted turbocharger and a
ground-boosted turbocharger.
LO Explain turbo lag.
LO Define the term ‘critical altitude’.
LO Explain the function of an intercooler.
LO Define the terms ‘full-throttle height’ and ‘rated altitude’.
021 10 10 02 Engine handling
LO State the correct procedures for setting the engine controls when increasing or
decreasing power.
LO Define the following terms:
take-off power;
maximum continuous power.
LO Describe the start problems associated with extreme cold weather.
LO Describe the principal difference between a full-authority digital engine control
(FADEC) system-controlled engine and traditional manual engine controls.
LO Describe the engine controls available on the flight deck for a
FADEC-controlled engine.
LO Explain that the FADEC has full authority of the control of all engine
parameters ensuring efficient and correct running of the engine, including
protection in the event of failure.
LO Explain the need for FADEC redundancy with regard to power supply and
data input and output.
Learning-Teaching Methods
15. Lecture-Discussion
16. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
9. Written Test
Reference Materials
Q. Jeppesen- Airframe and Systems
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 75 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: PISTON ENGINE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
R. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 76 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
1.16. PTS/PL121: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
020 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE
3
022 00 00 00 AIRCRAFT GENERAL KNOWLEDGE — INSTRUMENTATION
022 01 00 00 SENSORS AND INSTRUMENTS
022 01 01 00 Pressure gauge
022 01 01 01 Units for pressure, sensor types, measurements
LO X Define ‘pressure’, ‘absolute pressure’ and ‘differential pressure’.
LO List the following units used for pressure measurement:
Pascal;
X bar;
inches of mercury (in Hg);
pounds per square inch (psi).
LO X State the relationship between the different units.
LO List and describe the following different types of sensors used according to the
pressure to be measured:
aneroid capsules;
bellows;
diaphragms;
bourdon tube.
LO Identify pressure measurements that are applicable to an aircraft:
liquid-pressure measurement (fuel, oil, hydraulic);
air-pressure measurement (bleed-air systems, air- conditioning systems);
engine-pressure measurement manifold pressure (MAP), engine pressure ratio
(EPR)).
LO Identify and read pressure measurement indications both for engine indications
and other systems.
Explain the implications of the following pressure measurement errors both for
engine indications and other systems:
LO loss of pressure sensing;
incorrect pressure indications.
022 01 02 00 Temperature sensing
022 01 02 01 Units for temperature, measurements
LO X Explain temperature.
LO List the following units that can be used for temperature measurement:
X
Kelvin;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 77 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Celsius;
Fahrenheit.
LO X State the relationship between these units and convert between them.
LO Identify temperature measurements that are applicable to an aircraft:
LO gas temperature measurement (ambient air, bleed-air systems, air-conditioning
systems, air inlet, exhaust gas, gas turbine outlets);
liquid-temperature measurement (fuel, oil, hydraulic);
component-temperature measurement (generator, transformer rectifier unit
(TRU), pumps (fuel, hydraulic), power transfer unit (PTU).
Identify and read temperature measurement indications for both engine
LO
indications and other systems.
022 01 03 00 Fuel gauge
022 01 03 01 Units for fuel, measurements, fuel gauges
LO State that the quantity of fuel can be measured by volume or mass.
LO State that the quantity of fuel can be measured by volume or mass:
kilogramme;
pound;
litres;
gallons (US and imperial).
LO Convert between the various units.
LO Explain the parameters that can affect the measurement of the volume or mass
of the fuel in a fuel tank:
temperature;
aircraft accelerations and attitudes;
and explain how the fuel-gauge system design compensates for these changes.
LO Describe and explain the operating principles of the following types of fuel
gauges:
float system;
capacitance-type of fuel-gauge system.
ultrasound-type of fuel-gauge system: to be introduced at a later date.
Describe and complete a typical post-refuelling procedure for a pilot:
recording the volume that was filled;
LO converting to the appropriate unit used by the aircraft fuel gauge(s) to compare
the actual indicated fuel content to the calculated fuel content;
assess appropriate action if the numbers does not compare.
022 01 04 00 Fuel flowmeters
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 78 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 01 04 01 Fuel flow, units for fuel flow, total fuel consumption
LO Define ‘fuel flow’ and where it is measured.
LO State that fuel flow may be measured by volume or mass per unit of time.
LO List the following units used for fuel flow when measured by mass per hour:
kilogrammes/hour;
pounds/hour.
LO List the following units used for fuel flow when measured by volume per hour:
LO litres/hour;
imperial gallons/hour;
US gallons/hour.
LO Explain how total fuel consumption is obtained.
022 01 05 00 Tachometer
022 01 05 01 Types, operating principles, units for engine speed
LO List the following types of tachometers, describe their basic operating principle
and give examples of use:
mechanical (rotating magnet);
X electrical (three-phase tacho-generator);
electronic (impulse measurement with speed probe and phonic wheel);
and describe the operating principle of each type.
LO Explain the typical units for engine speed:
rpm for piston-engine aircraft;
percentage for turbine-engine aircraft.
LO Explain that some types of rpm indicators require electrical power to
provide an indication.
022 01 06 00 Thrust measurement
022 01 06 01 Parameters, operating principle
LO List and describe the following two parameters used to represent thrust:
N1;
EPR.
LO Explain the operating principle of using an engine with EPR indication and explain
the consequences of incorrect or missing EPR to the operation of the engine,
including reverting to N1 mode.
LO Give examples of display for N1 and EPR.
022 01 07 00 Engine torquemeter
022 01 07 01 Torque, torquemeters
LO Define ‘torque’.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 79 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the relationship between power, torque and rpm.
LO List the following units used for torque:
Newton meters;
inch or foot pounds.
LO State that engine torque can be displayed as a percentage.
LO List and describe the following different types of torquemeters, and
explain their operating principles:
X mechanical;
electronic.
LO X Compare the two systems with regard to design and weight.
LO Give examples of display.
022 01 08 00 Synchroscope
022 01 08 01 Purpose, operating principle, display
LO State the purpose of a synchroscope.
LO X Explain the operating principle of a synchroscope.
LO Give examples of display.
022 01 09 00 Engine-vibration monitoring
022 01 09 01 Purpose, operating principle of a vibration-monitoring system, display
LO State the purpose of a vibration-monitoring system for a jet engine.
LO Describe the operating principle of a vibration-monitoring system using the
following two types of sensors:
X piezoelectric crystal;
magnet.
LO Explain that there is no specific unit for vibration monitoring, i.e. it is determined by
specified numeric threshold values.
LO Give examples of display.
022 01 10 00 Time measurement
022 01 10 01 On-board clock
Explain that the on-board aircraft clock provides a time reference for several of the
LO on-board systems including aircraft communications addressing and reporting
system (ACARS) and engine and systems maintenance.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Demonstration
3. Self-reading
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 80 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL112: BASIC AIRCRAFT INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
B. Private Pilots Handbook
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 81 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
1.17. PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 02 00 00 MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS 3
022 02 01 00 Pressure measurement
022 02 01 01 Definitions
Define the following pressure measurements and state the relationship between
them:
LO static pressure;
dynamic pressure;
total pressure.
022 02 01 02 Pitot/static system: design and errors
LO Describe the design and the operating principle of a:
static port/source;
pitot tube;
combined pitot/static probe.
LO For each of these indicate the various locations and describe the following
associated errors and how to correct, minimise the effect of or compensate for
them:
position errors;
instrument errors;
errors due to a non-longitudinal axial flow (including manoeuvre-induced errors).
LO Describe a typical pitot/static system and list the possible outputs.
LO Explain the redundancy and the interconnections that typically exist in
complex pitot/static systems found in
LO large aircraft.
LO Explain the purpose of pitot/static system heating.
LO Describe alternate static sources and their effects when used, particularly in
unpressurised aircraft.
LO Describe a modern pitot static system using solid-state sensors near the pitot probe
or static port converting the air data to numerical data (electrical signals) before
being sent to the air-data computer(s).
022 02 02 00 Temperature measurement
022 02 02 01 Definitions
Define the following and explain the relationship between them:
outside air temperature (OAT);
LO
total air temperature (TAT);
static air temperature (SAT).
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 82 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
LO Explain the term ‘ram rise’ and convert TAT to SAT.
LO Explain why TAT is often displayed and that TAT is the temperature input to
the air-data computer.
022 02 02 02 Design and operation
LO Indicate typical locations for both direct-reading and remote-reading temperature
probes, and describe the following errors:
position error;
instrument error.
LO Explain the purpose of temperature probe heating and interpret the effect of heating
on sensed temperature unless automatically compensated for.
022 02 03 00 Angle-of-attack (AoA) measurement
Sensor types, operating principles, ice protection, displays, incorrect
022 02 03 01
indications
LO Describe the following two types of AoA sensors:
null-seeking (slotted) probe;
vane detector.
LO For each type, explain the operating principles.
LO Explain how both types are protected against ice.
LO Give examples of systems that use the AoA as an input, such as:
air-data computer;
stall warning systems;
flight-envelope protection systems.
LO Give examples of and interpret different types of AoA displays:
simple light arrays of green, amber and red lights;
gauges showing a numerical scale.
LO Explain the implications for the pilot if the AoA indication becomes incorrect but still
provides data, e.g. if the sensor is frozen in a fixed position.
LO Explain how an incorrect AoA measurement can affect the controllability of an
aircraft with flight-envelope protection.
022 02 04 00 Altimeter
022 02 04 01 Units, terms, types, operating principles, displays, errors, corrections
List the following two units used for altimeters and state the relationship
between them:
LO feet;
metres.
LO Define the following terms:
X height, altitude;
indicated altitude, true altitude;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 83 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
pressure altitude, density altitude.
LO X Define the following barometric references: ‘QNH’, ‘QFE’, ‘1013,25’.
LO Explain the operating principles of an altimeter.
LO Describe and compare the following three types of altimeters and reason(s) why
particular designs may be required in certain airspace:
X simple altimeter (single capsule);
sensitive altimeter (multi-capsule);
servo-assisted altimeter.
LO Give examples of associated displays: pointer, multi- pointer, drum, vertical
X
straight scale.
LO Describe the following errors:
static system error;
instrument error;
barometric error;
temperature error (air column not at ISA conditions);
lag (altimeter response to change of height).
LO Demonstrate the use of an altimeter correction table for the following errors:
temperature corrections;
aircraft position errors.
LO Describe the effects of a blockage or a leakage on the static pressure line.
LO Describe the use of GPS altitude as an alternative means of checking erroneous
altimeter indications, and highlight the limitations of the GPS altitude indication.
022 02 05 00 Vertical speed indicator (VSI)
022 02 05 01 VSI and instantaneous vertical speed indicator (IVSI)
LO List the two units used for VSIs and state the relationship between them:
metres per second;
feet per minute.
LO Explain the operating principles of a VSI and an IVSI.
LO Describe and compare the following types of VSIs:
barometric type (VSI);
instantaneous barometric type (IVSI);
inertial type (inertial information provided by an inertial reference unit).
LO Describe the following VSI errors:
static system errors;
instrument errors;
time lag.
LO Describe the effects on a VSI of a blockage or a leakage on the static pressure line.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 84 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
LO Give examples of a VSI display.
LO Compare the indications of a VSI and an IVSI during flight in turbulence and
appropriate pilot technique during manoeuvring using either type.
022 02 06 00 Airspeed indicator (ASI)
Units, errors, operating principles, displays, position errors, unreliable
022 02 06 01
airspeed indications
LO List the following three units used for airspeed and state the relationship
between them:
nautical miles/hour (kt);
statute miles/hour (mph);
kilometres/hour (km/h).
LO Describe the following ASI errors and state when they must be considered:
pitot/static system errors;
instrument errors;
position errors;
compressibility errors;
density errors.
LO Explain the operating principles of an ASI (as appropriate to aeroplanes or
helicopters).
LO Give examples of an ASI display: pointer, vertical straight scale, and digital (HUD
display).
LO Demonstrate the use of an ASI correction table for position error.
LO Define and explain the following colour codes that can be used on an ASI:
white arc (flap operating speed range);
green arc (normal operating speed range);
yellow arc (caution speed range);
red line (VNE) or barber’s pole (VMO);
blue line (best rate of climb speed, one-engine-out for multi-engine piston light
aeroplanes).
LO Define and explain the following colour codes that can be used on an ASI:
green arc (normal operating speed range);
red line (VNE);
blue line (maximum airspeed during autorotation).
LO Describe the effects on an ASI of a blockage or a leakage in the static or total
pressure line(s).
LO Define the term ‘unreliable airspeed’ and describe the means by which it can
be recognised such as:
different airspeed indications between ASIs;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 85 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
unexpected aircraft behaviour;
buffeting;
aircraft systems warning;
aircraft attitude.
LO Describe the appropriate procedures available to the pilot in the event of
unreliable airspeed indications:
combination of a pitch attitude and power setting;
ambient wind noise inside the aircraft;
use of GPS speed indications and the associated limitations.
022 02 07 00 Machmeter
022 02 07 01 Operating principle, display, CAS, TAS and Mach number
LO Define ‘Mach number’ and ‘local speed sound’ (LSS).
Calculate between LSS, TAS and Mach number.
LO X Describe the operating principle of a Machmeter.
LO X Explain why a Machmeter does not suffer from compressibility error.
LO Give examples of a Machmeter display: pointer, drum, vertical straight scale,
digital.
LO Describe the effects on a Machmeter of a blockage or a leakage in the static or
total pressure line(s).
LO Explain the relationship between CAS, TAS and Mach number.
LO Explain how CAS, TAS and Mach number vary in relation
to each other during a climb, a descent, or in level flight in different temperature
conditions.
LO State the existence of maximum operating limit speed (VMO) and maximum
operating Mach number (MMO).
LO Describe typical indications of M MO and VMO on analogue and digital instruments.
LO Describe the relationship between MMO and VMO with change in altitude and the
implications of climbing at constant IAS and descending at constant Mach number
with respect to the margin to MMO and VMO.
LO Describe the implications of climbing or descending at constant Mach number or
constant IAS with respect to the margin to the stall speed or maximum speed.
022 02 08 00 Air-data computer (ADC)
022 02 08 01 Operating principle, data, errors, air-data inertial reference unit
LO Explain the operating principle of an ADC.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 86 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
LO List the following possible input data:
TAT;
static pressure;
total pressure;
X measured temperature;
AoA;
flaps position;
landing gear position;
stored aircraft data.
LO List the following possible output data, as applicable to aeroplanes or
helicopters:
IAS;
TAS;
SAT;
X TAT;
Mach number;
AoA;
altitude;
vertical speed;
VMO/MMO pointer.
LO Explain how position, instrument, compressibility and density errors can be
compensated/corrected to achieve a TAS calculation.
LO Give examples of instruments or systems which may use ADC output data.
LO Explain that an air-data inertial reference unit (ADIRU) is an ADC integrated with
an inertial reference unit (IRU), that there will be separate controls for the ADC
part and inertial reference (IR) part, and that incorrect selection during failure
scenarios may lead to unintended and potentially irreversible consequences.
LO Explain the ADC architecture for air-data measurement including sensors,
X processing units and displays, as opposed to stand-alone air-data
measurement instruments
LO Describe the consequences of the loss of an ADC compared to the failure
of individual instruments.
Learning-Teaching Methods
4. Lecture-discussion
5. Demonstration
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 87 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL122: MEASUREMENT OF AIR-DATA PARAMETERS
Reference Materials
C. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
D. Private Pilots Handbook
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 88 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS AND FLUX
VALVE
1.18.
PTS/PL123: MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS
AND FLUX VALVE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 03 00 00 MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS AND FLUX VALVE 3
022 03 01 00 Earth’s magnetic field
022 03 01 01 Magnetic field, variation, dip
LO Describe the magnetic field of the Earth.
LO X Explain the properties of a magnet.
LO Define the following terms:
magnetic variation;
magnetic dip (inclination).
LO Describe that a magnetic compass will align itself to both the horizontal (azimuth)
and vertical (dip) components of the Earth’s magnetic field, thus will not function in
the vicinity of the magnetic poles.
LO Demonstrate the use of variation values (given as East/West (E/W) or +/–)
to calculate:
true heading to magnetic heading;
magnetic heading to true heading.
022 03 02 00 Aircraft magnetic field
022 03 02 01 Permanent magnetism, electromagnetism, deviation
LO Explain the following differences between permanent magnetism and
electromagnetism:
X when they are present;
what affects their magnitude.
LO Explain the principles of and the reasons for:
compass swinging (determination of initial deviations);
X compass compensation (correction of deviations found);
compass calibration (determination of residual deviations).
LO Explain how permanent magnetism within the aircraft structure and
electromagnetism from the aircraft systems affect the accuracy of a compass.
LO Describe the purpose and the use of a deviation correction card.
LO Demonstrate the use of deviation values (either given as E/W or +/–) from a
compass deviation card to calculate:
compass heading to magnetic heading;
magnetic heading to compass heading.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 89 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS AND FLUX
VALVE
022 03 03 00 Direct-reading magnetic compass
022 03 03 01 Purpose, errors, timed turns, serviceability
LO Explain the purpose of a direct-reading magnetic compass.
LO Describe how the direct-reading magnetic compass will only show correct
indications during straight, level and unaccelerated flight, and that an error will
occur during the following flight manoeuvres (no numerical examples):
acceleration and deceleration;
turning;
during pitch-up or pitch-down manoeuvres.
LO Explain how the use of timed turns eliminates the problem of the turning
errors of a direct-reading magnetic compass, and calculate the duration of a rate-1
turn for a given change of heading.
LO Describe the serviceability check for a direct-reading magnetic compass prior
to flight, such as:
the physical appearance of the device;
comparing the indication to another known direction such as a different compass
or runway direction.
022 03 04 00 Flux valve
022 03 04 01 Purpose, operating principle, location, errors
LO Explain the purpose of a flux valve.
LO X Explain its operating principle.
LO Indicate typical locations of the flux valve(s).
LO Give the remote-reading compass system as example of application for a flux
valve.
LO Explain that deviation is compensated for and , therefore, eliminates
the need for a deviation correction card.
LO Explain that a flux valve does not suffer from the same magnitude of errors as a
direct-reading magnetic compass when turning, accelerating or decelerating and
during pitch-up or pitch-down manoeuvres.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-discussion
8. Demonstration
9. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 90 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: MAGNETISM — DIRECT-READING COMPASS AND FLUX
VALVE
E. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
F. Private Pilots Handbook
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 91 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
1.19. PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 04 00 00 GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS 5
022 04 01 00 Gyroscope: basic principles
022 04 01 01 Gyroscopic forces, degrees of freedom, gyro wander, driving gyroscopes
LO X Define a ‘gyro’.
LO X Explain the fundamentals of the theory of gyroscopic forces.
LO Define the ‘degrees of freedom’ of a gyro.
X Remark: As a convention, the degrees of freedom of a gyroscope do not include
its own axis of rotation (the spin axis).
LO Explain the following terms:
rigidity;
X precession;
wander (drift/topple).
LO Explain the three types of gyro wander:
real wander;
apparent wander;
transport wander.
LO Describe the two ways of driving gyroscopes and any associated indications:
air/vacuum;
electrically.
022 04 02 00 Rate-of-turn indicator — Turn coordinator — Balance (slip) indicator
022 04 02 01 Indications, relation between bank angle, rate of turn and TAS
LO Explain the purpose of a rate-of-turn and balance (slip) indicator.
LO Define a ‘rate-1 turn’.
LO Describe the indications given by a rate-of-turn indicator.
LO Explain the relation between bank angle, rate of turn and TAS, and how bank
angle becomes the limiting factor at high speed (no calculations).
LO Explain the purpose of a balance (slip) indicator and its principle of operation.
LO Describe the indications of a rate-of-turn and balance
(slip) indicator during a balanced, slip or skid turn.
LO Describe the indications given by a turn coordinator (or turn-and-bank
indicator).
LO Compare the indications on the rate-of-turn indicator and the turn
coordinator.
022 04 03 00 Attitude indicator (artificial horizon)
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 92 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
022 04 03 01 Purpose, types, effect of aircraft acceleration, display
LO Explain the purpose of the attitude indicator.
LO Identify the two types of attitude indicators:
attitude indicator;
attitude and director indicator (ADI).
LO X State the degrees of freedom.
LO Describe the effects of the aircraft’s acceleration and turns on instrument
indications.
LO Describe a typical attitude display and instrument markings.
022 04 04 00 Directional gyroscope
022 04 04 01 Purpose, types, drift, alignment to compass heading
LO Explain the purpose of the directional gyroscope.
LO Identify the two types of gyro-driven direction indicators:
direction indicator;
horizontal situation indicator (HSI).
LO Explain how the directional gyroscope will drift over time due to the
following:
rotation of the Earth;
aircraft manoeuvring;
aircraft movement over the Earth’s surface/direction of travel.
LO Describe the procedure for the pilot to align the directional gyroscope
to the correct compass heading.
022 04 05 00 Remote-reading compass systems
Operating principles, components, comparison with a direct-reading magnetic
022 04 05 01
compass
LO Describe the principles of operation of a remote-reading compass system.
LO Using a block diagram, list and explain the function of the following components of
a remote-reading compass system:
flux detection unit;
gyro unit;
transducers, precession amplifiers, annunciator;
display unit (compass card, synchronising and set- heading knob,
DG/compass/slave/free switch).
LO State the advantages and disadvantages of a remote- reading compass system
compared to a direct-reading magnetic compass with regard to:
design (power source, weight and volume);
deviation due to aircraft magnetism;
turning and acceleration errors;
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 93 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
attitude errors;
accuracy and stability of the information displayed;
availability of the information for several systems (compass card, RMI, automatic
flight control system (AFCS)).
022 04 06 00 Solid-state systems — attitude and heading reference system (AHRS)
022 04 06 01 Components, indications
LO Explain that the AHRS is a replacement for traditional gyros using solid-state
technology with no moving parts and is a single unit consisting of:
solid-state accelerometers;
solid-state rate sensor gyroscopes;
solid-state magnetometers (measurement of the Earth’s magnetic field).
LO Explain that the AHRS senses rotation and acceleration for all three axes and
senses the direction of the Earth’s magnetic field where the indications are
normally provided on electronic screens (electronic flight instrument system
(EFIS)).
022 05 00 00 INERTIAL NAVIGATION
022 05 01 00 Basic principles
022 05 01 01 Systems
LO State that inertial navigation/reference systems are the main source of attitude
and one of the main sources of navigational data in commercial air transport
aeroplanes.
LO State that inertial systems require no external input, except TAS, to determine
aircraft attitude and navigational data.
LO State that earlier gyro mechanically stabilised platforms are (technically
incorrectly but conventionally) referred to as inertial navigation systems
(INSs) and more modern fixed (strap down) platforms are conventionally referred
to as inertial reference systems (IRSs). INSs can be considered to be stand-alone,
whereas IRSs are integrated with the FMS.
LO Explain the basic principles of inertial navigation (including double integration of
measured acceleration and the necessity for north–south, east–west and
vertical components to be measured/extracted).
LO Explain the necessity of applying correction for transport precession, and Earth
rate precession, coriolis and gravity.
LO State that in modern aircraft fitted with inertial reference system (IRS)
and flight management system (FMS), the flight management computer (FMC)
position is normally derived from a mathematical analysis of IRS, global
positioning system (GPS), and distan ce measuring equipment (DME) data,
VHF omnidirectional radio range (VOR) and LOC.
LO List all navigational data that can be determined by a stand-alone inertial
navigation system.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 94 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
LO State that a strap-down system is fixed to the structure of the aircraft and
normally consists of three laser ring gyros and three accelerometers.
LO State the differences between a laser ring gyro and a conventional
mechanical gyro.
022 05 02 00 Alignment and operation
022 05 02 01 Alignment process, incorrect data entry, and control panels
LO State that during the alignment process, the inertial platform is levelled (INS) or
the local vertical is determined (IRS), and true north/aircraft heading is
established.
LO Explain that the aircraft must be stationary during alignment, the aircraft position is
entered during the alignment phase, and that the alignment process takes around
10 to 20 minutes at mid latitudes (longer at high latitudes).
LO State that in-flight realignment is not possible and loss of alignment leads to loss of
navigational data although attitude information may still be available.
LO Explain that the inertial navigation system (INS) platform is maintained level and
north-aligned after alignment is complete and the aircraft is in motion.
LO State that an incorrect entry of latitude may lead to a loss of alignment and is more
critical than the incorrect entry of longitude.
LO State that the positional error of a stand -alone INS varies (a typical value
can be quoted as 1 –2 NM/h) and is dependent on the gyro drift rate, accelerometer
bias, misalignment of the platform, and computational errors.
LO Explain that, on a modern aircraft, there is likely to be an air-data inertial reference
unit (ADIRU), which is an inertial reference unit (IRU) integrated with an air-data
computer (ADC).
LO Identify examples of IRS control panels.
LO Explain the following selections on the IRU mode selector:
NAV (normal operation);
ATT (attitude only).
LO State that the majority of the IRS data can be accessed through the FMS control
and display unit (CDU)/flight management and guidance system (FMGS)
multifunctional control and display unit (MCDU).
LO Describe the procedure available to the pilot for assessing the performance of
individual IRUs after a flight:
reviewing the residual indicated ground speed when the aircraft has parked;
reviewing the drift given as NM/h.
Learning-Teaching Methods
10. Lecture-discussion
11. Demonstration
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 95 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL124: GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENTS
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
H. Private Pilots Handbook
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 96 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
1.20. PTS/PL181: THE ATMOSPHERE
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 00 00 00 METEOROLOGY
8
050 01 00 00 THE ATMOSPHERE
050 01 01 00 Composition, extent, vertical division
050 01 01 01 Structure of the atmosphere
LO Describe the vertical division of the atmosphere up to flight level (FL) 650, based
on the temperature variations with height.
LO List the different layers and their main qualitative characteristics up to FL
650.
050 01 01 02 Troposphere
LO Describe the troposphere.
LO Describe the main characteristics of the tropopause.
LO Describe the proportions of the most important gases in the air in the troposphere.
LO Describe the variations of the FL and temperature of the tropopause from the
poles to the equator.
LO Describe the breaks in the tropopause along the boundaries of the main air
masses.
LO Indicate the variations of the FL of the tropopause with the seasons and the variations
of atmospheric pressure.
050 01 01 03 Stratosphere
LO Describe the stratosphere up to FL 650.
LO Describe that ozone can occur at jet cruise altitudes and that it constitutes a
hazard.
050 01 02 00 Air temperature
050 01 02 01 Definition and units
LO Define ‘air temperature’.
LO List the units of measurement of air temperature used in aviation meteorology
X (Celsius, Fahrenheit, Kelvin).
(Refer to Subject 050 10 01 01)
050 01 02 02 Vertical distribution of temperature
LO Describe the mean vertical distribution of temperature up to FL 650.
LO Mention the general causes of the cooling of the air in the troposphere with
increasing altitude.
LO Calculate the temperature and temperature deviations (in relation to International
Standard Atmosphere (ISA)) at specified levels.
050 01 02 03 Transfer of heat
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 97 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain how local cooling or warming processes result in transfer of heat.
LO Describe radiation.
LO Describe solar radiation reaching the Earth.
LO Describe the filtering effect of the atmosphere on solar
LO radiation.
LO Describe terrestrial radiation.
LO Explain how terrestrial radiation is absorbed by some components of the
atmosphere.
LO Explain the effect of absorption and radiation in connection with clouds.
LO Explain the process of conduction.
LO Explain the role of conduction in the cooling and warming of the atmosphere.
LO Explain the process of convection.
LO Name the situations in which convection occurs.
LO Explain the process of advection.
LO Name the situations in which advection occurs.
LO Describe the transfer of heat by turbulence.
LO Describe the transfer of latent heat.
050 01 02 04 Lapse rates
LO Describe qualitatively and quantitatively the temperature lapse rates of the
troposphere (mean value 0.65 °C/100 m or 2 °C/1 000 ft and actual values).
LO Development of inversions, types of inversions
LO Describe the development and types of inversions.
LO Explain the characteristics of inversions and of an isothermal layer
concerning stability and vertical motions.
LO Explain the reasons for the formation of the following inversions:
ground inversion (nocturnal radiation/advection), subsidence inversion, frontal
inversion, inversion above friction layer, valley inversion.
Temperature near the Earth’s surface, insolation, surface
050 01 02 06
effects, effect of clouds, effect of wind
LO Explain the cooling/warming of the surface of the Earth by radiation.
LO Explain the cooling/warming of the air by molecular or turbulent heat transfer
to/from the earth or sea surfaces.
LO Describe qualitatively the influence of the clouds on the cooling and warming of the
surface and the air near the surface.
LO Explain the influence of the wind on the cooling and warming of the air near
the surfaces.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 98 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 01 03 00 Atmospheric pressure
050 01 03 01 Barometric pressure, isobars
LO Define ‘atmospheric pressure’.
LO List the units of measurement of the atmospheric pressure used in aviation (hPa,
X inches of mercury).
(Refer to Subject 050 10 01 01)
LO X Describe the principle of the barometers (mercury
LO barometer, aneroid barometer).
LO Define isobars and identify them on surface weather charts.
LO Define ‘high’, ‘low’, ‘trough’, ‘ridge’, ‘col’.
050 01 03 02 Pressure variation with height, contours (isohypses)
LO Explain the pressure variation with height.
LO Describe quantitatively the variation of the barometric lapse rate.
Remark: An approximation of the average value for the barometric lapse rate
near mean sea level (MSL) is 30 ft (9 m) per 1 hPa.
LO State that (under conditions of ISA) pressure is approximately 50 % of MSL at 18 000
ft and density is approximately 50 % of MSL at 22 000 ft and 25 % of MSL at 40 000
ft.
050 01 03 03 Reduction of pressure to QFF (MSL)
LO Define ‘QFF’.
LO Explain the reduction of measured pressure (QFE) to QFF (MSL).
LO Mention the use of QFF for surface weather charts.
050 01 03 04 Relationship between surface pressure centres and pressure centres aloft
Illustrate with a vertical cross section of isobaric surfaces the relationship between
(01)
surface pressure systems and upper-air pressure systems.
050 01 04 00 Air density
050 01 04 01 Relationship between pressure, temperature and density
LO Describe the relationship between pressure, temperature and density.
LO Describe the vertical variation of the air density in the atmosphere.
050 01 05 00 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
050 01 05 01 International Standard Atmosphere (ISA)
LO Explain the use of standardised values for the atmosphere.
LO List the main values of the ISA MSL pressure, MSL temperature, the vertical
temperature lapse rate up to FL 650, height and temperature of the tropopause.
050 01 06 00 Altimetry
050 01 06 01 Terminology and definitions
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 99 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Define the following terms and explain how they are related to each other: height,
altitude, pressure altitude, FL, pressure level, true altitude, true height, elevation,
QNH, QFE, and standard altimeter setting.
LO Describe the terms ‘transition altitude’, ‘transition level’, ‘transition layer’, ‘terrain
clearance’, ‘lowest usable flight level’.
050 01 06 02 Altimeter settings
LO Name the altimeter settings associated to height, altitude, pressure altitude and FL.
LO Describe the altimeter-setting procedures.
050 01 06 03 Calculations
LO Calculate the different readings on the altimeter when the pilot uses different
settings (QNH, 1013.25, QFE).
LO Illustrate with a numbered example the changes of altimeter setting and the associated
changes in reading when the pilot climbs through the transition altitude or descends
through the transition level.
LO Derive the reading of the altimeter of an aircraft on the ground when the pilot
uses the different settings.
LO Explain the influence of the air temperature on the distance between the ground
and the level read on the altimeter and between two FLs.
LO Explain the influence of pressure areas on true altitude.
LO Determine the true altitude/height for a given altitude/height and a
given ISA temperature deviation.
LO Calculate the terrain clearance and the lowest usable FL for given atmospheric
temperature and pressure conditions.
LO State that the 4 %-rule can be used to calculate true altitude from indicated
altitude, and also indicated altitude from true altitude (not precise but sufficient due to
the approximation of the 4%-rule.)
LO Remark: The following rules should be considered for altimetry calculations:
a) All calculations are based on rounded pressure values to the nearest lower
hPa.
b) The value for the barometric lapse rate between MSL and 700 hPa to be
used is 30 ft/hPa as an acceptable approximation of the barometric lapse rate.
c) To determine the true altitude/height, the following rule of thumb, called the ‘4
%-rule’, shall be used: the altitude/height changes by 4 % for each 10 °C
temperature deviation from ISA.
d) If no further information is given, the deviation of the outside-air temperature from
ISA is considered to be constantly the same given value in the whole layer.
e) The elevation of the aerodrome has to be taken into account. The temperature
correction has to be considered for the layer between the ground and the position of the
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 100 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
aircraft.
050 01 06 04 Effect of accelerated airflow due to topography
LO Describe qualitatively how the effect of accelerated airflow due to topography (the
Bernoulli effect) affects altimetry.
LO
LO
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
B. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 101 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
1.21. PTS/PL182: WIND
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 02 00 00 WIND 5
050 02 01 00 Definition and measurement of wind
050 02 01 01 Definition and measurement
LO Define ‘wind’ and ‘surface wind’.
LO State the units of wind directions (degrees true in reports; degrees magnetic
from tower) and speed (kt, m/s).
LO Describe that the reported wind is an average wind derived from measurements with
an anemometer at a height of
10 m over 2 min for local routine and special reports and ATS units, and over 10
min for aerodrome routine meteorological reports (METARs) and aerodrome special
meteorological reports (SPECIs).
050 02 02 00 Primary cause of wind
050 02 02 01 Primary cause of wind, pressure gradient, Coriolis force, gradient wind
LO Define the term ‘horizontal pressure gradient’.
LO Explain how the pressure gradient force acts in relation to the pressure gradient.
LO Explain how the Coriolis force acts in relation to the wind.
LO Explain the development of the geostrophic wind.
LO Indicate how the geostrophic wind flows in relation to the isobars/isohypses in the
northern and in the southern hemisphere.
LO Analyse the effect of changing latitude on the geostrophic wind speed.
LO Explain the gradient wind effect and indicate how the gradient wind differs from
the geostrophic wind in cyclonic and anticyclonic circulation.
050 02 02 02 Variation of wind in the friction layer
LO Describe why and how the wind changes direction and speed with height in the friction
layer in the northern and in the southern hemisphere (rule of thumb).
LO State the surface and air-mass conditions that influence the wind in the friction
layer (diurnal variation).
LO Name terrain, wind speed and stability as the main factors that influence the
vertical extent of the friction layer.
LO Explain the relationship between isobars and wind (direction and speed).
Remark: Approximate value for variation of wind in the friction layer (values to be
used in examinations):
Type of landscape Wind speed in The wind in the friction layer
friction layer in % blows across the isobars towards
of the the low pressure. Angle between
geostrophic wind wind direction and isobars.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 102 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
over water ca 70 % ca 10°
over land ca 50 % ca 30°
WMO - No. 266
050 02 02 03 Effects of convergence and divergence
LO Describe atmospheric convergence and divergence.
LO Explain the relationship between convergence and divergence on the following:
pressure systems at the surface and aloft; wind speed; vertical motion and cloud
formation (relationship between upper-air conditions and surface pressure systems).
050 02 03 00 General global circulation
050 02 03 01 General circulation around the globe
LO Describe the general global circulation.
(Refer to Subject 050 08 01 01)
LO Name and sketch or indicate on a map the global distribution of the surface pressure
and the resulting wind pattern for all latitudes at low level in March and July.
LO Sketch or indicate on a map the westerly and easterly tropospheric winds at high
level in March and July.
050 02 04 00 Local winds
Anabatic and katabatic winds, mountain and valley winds, Venturi effects,
050 02 04 01
land and sea breezes
LO Describe and explain anabatic and katabatic winds.
LO Describe mountain and valley winds.
LO Describe the Venturi effect, convergence in valleys and mountain areas.
LO Describe land and sea breezes, and sea-breeze front.
LO Describe that local, low-level jet streams can develop in the evening.
050 02 05 00 Mountain waves (standing waves, lee waves)
050 02 05 01 Origin and characteristics
LO Explain the origin and formation of mountain waves.
LO State the conditions necessary for the formation of mountain waves.
LO Describe the structure and properties of mountain waves.
LO Explain how mountain waves may be identified by their associated meteorological
phenomena.
LO Describe that mountain wave effects can exceed the performance or
structural capability of aircraft.
LO Describe that mountain wave effects can propagate from low to high level, e.g.
over Greenland and elsewhere.
050 02 06 00 Turbulence
050 02 06 01 Description and types of turbulence
LO Describe turbulence and gustiness.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 103 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
LO List the common types of turbulence (convective, mechanical, orographic,
frontal, clear-air turbulence).
LO Formation and location of turbulence
LO Explain the formation of convective turbulence, mechanical and orographic
turbulence, and frontal turbulence.
LO State where turbulence will normally be found (rough- ground surfaces, relief,
inversion layers, cumulonimbus (CB), thunderstorm (TS) zones, unstable layers).
050 02 06 03 Clear-air turbulence (CAT) — description, cause and location
LO Describe CAT.
LO Describe the formation of CAT.
LO State where CAT is found in association with jet streams, in high-level troughs and in
other disturbed high-level air flows.
(Refer to Subject 050 09 02 02)
LO State that remote sensing of CAT from satellites is not possible and that
forecasting is limited.
LO State that pilot reports of turbulence are a very valuable source of
information as remote measurements are not available.
050 02 07 00 Jet streams
050 02 07 01 Description
LO Describe jet streams.
LO State the defined minimum speed of a jet stream (60 kt).
LO State the typical figures for the dimensions of jet streams.
050 02 07 02 Formation and properties of jet streams
LO Explain the formation and state the heights, the speeds, the seasonal variations of
speeds, the geographical positions, the seasonal occurrence and the seasonal
movements of the arctic (front) jet stream, the polar (front) jet stream, the
subtropical jet stream, and the tropical (easterly/equatorial) jet stream.
LO Location of jet streams and associated CAT areas
LO Sketch or describe where polar front and arctic jet streams are found in the troposphere
in relation to the tropopause and to fronts.
LO Describe and indicate the areas of worst wind shear and CAT.
050 02 07 04 Intentionally left blank
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Observation
3. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 104 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
C. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
D. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 105 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
1.22. PTS/PL183: THERMODYNAMICS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 03 00 00 THERMODYNAMICS 5
050 03 01 00 Humidity
050 03 01 01 Water vapour in the atmosphere
LO State that the density of moist air is less than the density of dry air.
LO Describe the significance for meteorology of water vapour in the atmosphere.
LO Indicate the sources of atmospheric humidity.
LO Define ‘saturation of air by water vapour’.
050 03 01 02 Intentionally left blank
050 03 01 03 Temperature/dew point, relative humidity
LO Define ‘dew point’.
LO Define ‘relative humidity’.
LO Explain the factors that influence the relative humidity at constant pressure.
LO Explain the diurnal variation of the relative humidity.
LO Describe the relationship between temperature and dew point.
LO Estimate the relative humidity of the air from the difference between dew
point and temperature.
050 03 02 00 Change of state of water
050 03 02 01 Condensation, evaporation, sublimation, freezing and melting, latent heat
LO Define ‘condensation’, ‘evaporation’, ‘sublimation’, ‘freezing and melting’ and
‘latent heat’.
LO List the conditions for condensation/evaporation.
LO Explain the condensation process.
LO Explain the nature of and the need for condensation nuclei.
LO Explain the effects of condensation on the weather.
LO List the conditions for freezing/melting.
LO Explain the process of freezing.
LO Explain the nature of and the need for freezing nuclei.
LO Define ‘supercooled water’.
(Refer to Subject 050 09 01 01)
LO List the conditions for sublimation.
LO Explain the sublimation process.
LO Explain the nature of and the need for sublimation nuclei.
LO Describe the absorption or release of latent heat in each change of state of water.
LO Illustrate all the changes of state of water with practical examples.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 106 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
LO Adiabatic processes
050 03 03 01 Adiabatic processes, stability of the atmosphere
LO Describe the adiabatic process in an unsaturated rising or descending air particle.
LO Explain the variation of temperature of an unsaturated rising or descending air
particle.
LO Explain the variation of humidity of an unsaturated rising or descending air particle.
LO Describe the adiabatic process in a saturated rising or descending air particle.
LO Explain the variation of temperature of a saturated air particle with changing
altitude.
LO Explain the static stability of the atmosphere using the actual temperature curve with
reference to the adiabatic lapse rates.
LO Define qualitatively and quantitatively the terms ‘stable’,
‘conditionally unstable’, ‘unstable’ and ‘indifferent’.
LO Illustrate with a schematic sketch the formation of Foehn.
LO Explain the effect of the advection of air (warm or cold) on the stability of the air.
Remark: Dry adiabatic lapse rate = 1 °C/100 m or 3 °C/1 000 ft; average
value at lower levels for saturated adiabatic lapse rate = 0.6 °C/100 m or 1.8
°C/1 000 ft (values to be used in examinations).
Learning-Teaching Methods
4. Lecture-discussion
5. Observation
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
F. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 107 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
1.23. PTS/PL184: CLOUDS AND FOG
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 04 00 00 CLOUDS AND FOG 5
050 04 01 00 Cloud formation and description
050 04 01 01 Cloud formation
LO Explain cloud formation by adiabatic cooling, conduction, advection and radiation.
LO Describe cloud formation based on the following lifting processes: unorganised lifting
in thin layers and turbulent mixing; forced lifting at fronts or over mountains; free
convection.
LO List cloud types typical for stable and unstable air conditions.
LO Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of clouds.
050 04 01 02 Cloud types and cloud classification
LO Describe the different cloud types and their classification.
LO Identify by shape cirriform, cumuliform and stratiform clouds.
LO Identify by shape and typical level the 10 cloud types (general).
LO Describe and identify by shape the following species and supplementary features:
castellanus, lenticularis, congestus, calvus, capillatus and virga.
LO Distinguish between low-, medium- and high-level clouds according to the World
Meteorological Organization’s (WMO) ‘cloud etage’.
LO Distinguish between ice clouds, mixed clouds and pure- water clouds.
050 04 01 03 Influence of inversions on cloud development
LO Explain the influence of inversions on vertical movements in the atmosphere.
LO Explain the influence of an inversion on the formation of stratus clouds.
LO Explain the influence of ground inversion on the formation of fog.
LO Describe the role of the tropopause inversion with regard to the vertical
development of clouds.
050 04 01 04 Flying conditions in each cloud type
(01) Assess the 10 cloud types for icing and turbulence.
050 04 02 00 Fog, mist, haze
050 04 02 01 General aspects
LO Define ‘fog’, ‘mist’ and ‘haze’ with reference to the WMO standards of visibility
range.
LO Explain briefly the formation of fog, mist and haze.
LO Name the factors that generally contribute to the formation of fog and mist.
LO Name the factors that contribute to the formation of haze.
LO Describe freezing fog and ice fog.
050 04 02 02 Radiation fog
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 108 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
LO Explain the formation of radiation fog.
LO Describe the significant characteristics of radiation fog, and its vertical extent.
LO Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of radiation fog.
050 04 02 03 Advection fog
LO Explain the formation of advection fog.
LO Describe the different possibilities of advection-fog formation (over land, sea
and coastal regions).
LO Describe the significant characteristics of advection fog.
LO Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of advection fog.
050 04 02 04 Sea smoke
LO Explain the formation of sea smoke.
LO Explain the conditions for the development of sea smoke.
LO Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of sea smoke.
050 04 02 05 Frontal fog
LO Explain the formation of frontal fog.
LO Describe the significant characteristics of frontal fog.
LO Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of frontal fog.
050 04 02 06 Orographic fog (hill fog)
LO Summarise the features of orographic fog.
LO Describe the significant characteristics of orographic fog.
LO Summarise the conditions for the dissipation of orographic fog.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-discussion
8. Observation
9. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
H. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 109 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL181: The Atmosphere, wind, Thermodynamics, Fogs and Precipitation
1.24. PTS/PL185: PRECIPITATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 05 00 00 PRECIPITATION 5
050 05 01 00 Development of precipitation
050 05 01 01 Process of development of precipitation
LO Describe the two basic processes of forming precipitation
(The Wegener–Bergeron–Findeisen process, Coalescence).
LO Summarise the outlines of the ice-crystal process (The Wegener–Bergeron–
Findeisen process).
LO Summarise the outlines of the coalescence process.
LO Explain the development of snow, rain, drizzle and hail.
050 05 02 00 Types of precipitation
050 05 02 01 Types of precipitation, relationship with cloud types
LO List and describe the types of precipitation given in the aerodrome forecast (TAF) and
METAR codes (drizzle, rain, snow, snow grains, ice pellets, hail, small hail, snow pellets,
ice crystals, freezing drizzle, freezing rain).
LO State the ICAO/WMO approximate diameters for cloud, drizzle and rain drops.
LO State that, because of their size, hail stones can cause significant damage to
aircraft.
LO X Explain the mechanism for the formation of freezing precipitation.
LO Describe the weather conditions that give rise to freezing precipitation.
LO Distinguish between the types of precipitation generated in convective and
stratiform clouds.
LO Assign typical precipitation types and intensities to different cloud types.
LO Explain the relationship between moisture content and visibility during different
types of winter precipitation (e.g. large vs small snowflakes).
Learning-Teaching Methods
10. Lecture-discussion
11. Observation
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
J. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 110 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
1.25. PTS/PL191: BASICS OF NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
060 00 00 00 NAVIGATION
16
061 00 00 00 GENERAL NAVIGATION
061 01 00 00 BASICS OF NAVIGATION
061 01 01 00 The Earth
061 01 01 01 Form
LO State that the geoid is an irregular shape based on the surface of the oceans
X
influenced only by gravity and centrifugal force.
LO State that a number of different ellipsoids are used to describe the shape of the
X Earth for mapping but that WGS-84 is the reference ellipsoid required for
geographical coordinates.
LO State that the circumference of the Earth is approximately 40 000 km or
approximately 21 600 NM.
061 01 01 02 Earth rotation
LO Describe the rotation of the Earth around its own spin axis and the plane of the
X
ecliptic (including the relationship of the spin axis to the plane of the ecliptic).
LO Explain the effect that the inclination of the Earth’s spin axis has on insolation
and duration of daylight.
LO Earth rotation
061 01 02 00 Position
061 01 02 01 Position reference system
LO State that geodetic latitude and longitude is used to define a position on the
X
WGS-84 ellipsoid.
LO Define geographic (geodetic) latitude and parallels of latitude.
LO Calculate the difference in latitude between any two given positions.
LO Define geographic (geodetic) longitude and meridians.
LO Calculate the difference in longitude between any two given positions.
061 01 03 00 Time
061 01 03 00 Local Mean Time (LMT)
061 01 03 00 Mean solar day
LO X Explain the concepts of a mean solar day and LMT.
Local Mean Time (LMT) and Universal Time
061 01 03 00
Coordinated (UTC)
LO Perform LMT and UTC calculations.
061 01 03 00 Standard time
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 111 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
061 01 03 00 Standard time and daylight saving time
Explain and apply the concept of standard time and daylight saving time, and
LO
perform standard time and daylight saving time calculations.
061 01 03 00 International Date Line
(LO State the changes when crossing the International Date Line.
061 01 03 00 Sunrise and sunset
061 01 03 00 Sunrise and sunset times
LO Define sunrise, sunset, and civil twilight, and extract times from a suitable
source (e.g. an almanac).
LO Explain the changes to sunrise, sunset, and civil twilight times with date,
latitude and altitude.
LO Explain at which time of the year the duration of daylight changes at the
highest rate.
061 01 04 00 Direction
061 01 04 01 Datums
LO X Define ‘true north’ (TN).
LO Measure a true direction on any given aeronautical chart.
LO X Define ‘magnetic north’ (MN).
LO Define and apply variation.
LO Explain changes of variation with time and position.
LO X Define ‘compass north’ (CN).
LO Apply deviation.
061 01 04 02 Track and heading
Calculate XWC by:
LO trigonometry; and
MDR.
LO Explain and apply the concepts of drift and WCA.
LO Calculate the actual track with appropriate data of heading and drift.
LO Calculate TKE with appropriate data of WCA and drift.
LO Calculate the heading change at an off-course fix to directly reach the next
waypoint using the 1:60 rule.
LO Calculate the average drift angle based upon an off- course fix abservation.
061 01 05 00 Distance
061 01 05 01 WGS-84 ellipsoid
(LO X State that 1 NM is equal to 1 852 km, which is the average distance of 1' of latitude
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 112 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
change on the WGS-84 ellipsoid.
State that 1' of longitude change at the equator on the WGS-84 ellipsoid is
LO
approximately equal to 1 NM.
061 01 05 02 Units
Convert between units of distance (nautical mile (NM), kilometre (km),
LO
statute mile ( SM), feet (ft), inches (in)).
061 01 05 03 Graticule distances
Calculate the distance between positions on the same meridian, on opposite
LO (antipodal) meridians, on the same parallel of latitude, and calculate new
latitude/longitude when given distances north- south and east-west.
061 01 05 04 Air mile
LO Evaluate the effect of wind and altitude on air distance.
Convert between ground distance (NM) and air distance (NAM) using the
(02) formula :
NAM = NM × TAS/GS.
061 01 06 00 Speed
061 01 06 01 True airspeed (TAS)
Calculate TAS from CAS, and CAS from TAS by:
LO mechanical computer; and
rule of thumb (2 % per 1 000 ft).
061 01 06 02 Mach number (M)
LO Calculate TAS from M, and M from TAS.
061 01 06 03 CAS/TAS/M relationship
Deduce the CAS, TAS and M relationship in limb/descent/cruise (flying
LO
at constant CAS or M).
(LO Deduce CAS and TAS in climb/descent/cruise (flying at constant CAS).
061 01 06 04 Ground speed (GS)
Calculate headwind component (HWC) and tailwind component (TWC) by:
LO trigonometry; and
MDR.
LO Apply HWC and TWC to determine GS from TAS and vice versa.
LO X Explain the relationship between GS and TAS with increasing WCA.
LO Calculate GS with:
mechanical computer (TOV solution); and
MDR (given track, TAS and WV).
LO Perform GS, distance and time calculations.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 113 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Calculate revised GS to reach a waypoint at a specific time.
LO Calculate the average GS based on two observed fixes.
061 01 06 06 Gradient versus rate of climb/descent
LO Estimate average climb/descent gradient (%) or glide path degrees according to the
following rule of thumb:
Gradient in degrees = (vertical distance (ft) /100) / ground distance (NM))
Gradient in % = (vertical distance (ft) / 60) /ground distance (NM))
Gradient in degrees = arctan (altitude difference (ft) / ground distance (ft)).
N.B. These rules of thumb approximate 1 NM to 6 000 ft and are based on the 1:60 rule.
LO Calculate rate of descent (ROD) on a given glide-path angle or gradient using the
following rule of thumb formulae:
ROD (ft/min) = GP° × GS (NM/min) × 100
ROD (ft/min) = GP% × GS (kt)
LO Calculate climb/descent gradient (ft/NM, % and degrees), GS or vertical speed
according to the following formula:
Vertical speed (ft/min) = (GS (kt) × gradient (ft/NM)) / 60.
LO State that it is necessary to determine the position of the aircraft accurately before
X
commencing descent in order to ensure safe ground clearance.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Group work
3. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Private Pilot Handbook
B. FAA AC:61-23C: Pilots handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 114 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
1.26. PTS/PL192: CHARTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
061 02 00 00 CHARTS 16
061 02 01 00 Chart requirements
061 02 01 01 ICAO Annex 4 ‘Aeronautical Charts’
State the requirement for conformality and for a straight line to approximate
LO
a great circle.
061 02 01 02 Convergence
LO Explain and calculate the constant of the cone (sine of parallel of origin).
LO Explain the relationship between Earth and chart convergence with respect to
the ICAO requirement for a straight line to approximate a great circle.
061 02 01 03 Scale
LO Recognise methods of representing scale on aeronautical charts.
LO Perform scale calculations based on typical en- route chart scales.
061 02 01 04 Projections
061 02 01 04 Methods of projection
LO X Identify azimuthal, cylindrical and conical projections.
061 02 01 05 Polar stereographic
LO State the properties of a polar stereographic projection.
LO Calculate straight line track changes on a polar stereographic chart.
061 02 01 06 Direct Mercator
LO State the properties of a direct Mercator projection.
LO Given the scale at one latitude, calculate the scale at different latitudes.
LO Given a chart length at one latitude, show that it represents a different Earth
distance at other latitudes.
061 02 01 07 Lambert
LO State the properties of a Lambert projection.
LO Calculate straight line track changes on a Lambert chart.
LO Explain the scale variation throughout the charts as follows:
the scale indicated on the chart will be correct at the standard parallels;
the scale will increase away from the parallel of origin;
the scale within the standard parallels differs by less than 1 % from the scale stated
on the chart.
LO Given appropriate data, calculate initial, final or rhumb-line tracks between two
positions (lat./long.).
LO Given two positions (lat./long.) and information to determine convergency
between the two positions, calculate the parallel of origin.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 115 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
LO Given a Lambert chart, determine the parallel of origin, or constant of cone.
LO Given constant of cone or parallel of origin, great - circle track at one position
and great -circle track at another position, calculate the difference of longitude
between the two positions.
061 02 01 08 Practical use
061 02 01 08 Symbology
LO Recognise ICAO Annex 4 symbology.
Learning-Teaching Methods
4. Lecture-Discussion
5. Group work
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
C. Jeppesen- Private Pilot Handbook
D. FAA AC:61-23C: Pilots handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 116 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
1.27. PTS/PL193: VISUAL FLIGHT RULE (VFR) NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
061 03 00 00 VISUAL FLIGHT RULE (VFR) NAVIGATION 8
061 03 01 00 Ground features
Recognise which elements would make a ground feature suitable for use for
LO
VFR navigation.
061 03 01 01 Visual identification
LO Describe the problems of VFR navigation at lower levels and the causes of
reduced visibility.
LO Describe the problems of VFR navigation at night.
061 03 01 02 VFR navigation techniques
061 03 01 03 Use of visual observations and application to in- flight navigation
LO X Describe what is meant by the term ‘map reading’.
LO X Define the term ‘visual checkpoint’.
LO Discuss the general features of a visual checkpoint and give examples.
LO State that the evaluation of the differences between DR positions and
actual position can refine flight performance and navigation.
LO X Establish fixes on navigational charts by plotting visually derived intersecting
lines of position.
LO X Describe the use of a single observed position line to check flight progress.
LO X Describe how to prepare and align a map/chart for use in visual navigation.
LO Describe visual-navigation techniques including:
use of DR position to locate identifiable landmarks;
identification of charted features/landmarks;
factors affecting the selection of landmarks;
an understanding of seasonal and meteorological effects on the
appearance and visibility of landmarks;
selection of suitable landmarks;
estimation of distance from landmarks from successive bearings;
estimation of the distance from a landmark using an approximation of the
sighting angle and the flight altitude.
LO Describe the action to be taken if there is no visual checkpoint available at a
scheduled turning point.
LO Understand the difficulties and limitations that may be encountered in map
reading in some geographical areas due to the nature of terrain, lack of
distinctive landmarks, or lack of detailed and accurate charted data.
LO X State the function of contour lines on a topographical chart.
LO X Indicate the role of ‘layer tinting’ (colour gradient) in relation to the depiction
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 117 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
of topography on a chart.
LO Using the contours shown on a chart, describe the appearance of a significant
feature.
LO Apply the techniques of DR, map reading, orientation, timing and revision of ETAs
and headings.
061 03 01 04 Unplanned events
Explain what needs to be considered in case of diversion, when unsure of
LO
position and when lost.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Group work
9. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Private Pilot Handbook
F. FAA AC:61-23C: Pilots handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 118 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
1.28. PTS/PL193: Triangle of velocity (TOV)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
061 04 00 00 Triangle of velocities (TOV) 16
061 04 01 01 Construction
(01) Draw and correctly label the TOV.
061 04 01 02 Solutions
Resolve the TOV for:
LO heading and GS (with mechanical computer and MDR);
WV (with mechanical computer); and
track and GS (with mechanical computer and MDR.
061 04 02 00 Dead reckoning (DR)
061 04 02 01 Dead reckoning (DR) technique
LO Determine a DR position.
LO Evaluate the difference between a DR and a fix position.
LO Define ‘speed factor’ (SF).
Speed divided by 60, used for mental flight -path calculations.
LO Calculate wind correction angle (WCA) using the formula:
WCA = XWC (crosswind component)/SF
061 02 04 00 GREAT CIRCLES AND RHUMB LINES
061 02 04 01 Great circles
061 02 04 01 Properties
LO Describe the geometric properties of a great circle (including the vertex) and a
small circle.
LO Describe the geometric properties of a great circle and a small circle, up to
30° difference of longitude.
LO Explain why a great-circle route is the shortest distance between any two
X
positions on the Earth.
LO Name examples of great circles on the surface of the Earth.
061 02 04 02 Convergence
LO Explain why the track direction of a great -circle route (other than following a
X
meridian or the equator) changes.
LO State the formula used to approximate the value of Earth convergence as change
of longitude × sine mean latitude.
LO Calculate the approximate value of Earth convergence between any two positions
, up to 30° difference of longitude.
061 02 04 03 Rhumb lines
061 02 04 03 Properties
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 119 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
LO X Describe the geometric properties of a rhumb line.
LO State that a rhumb-line route is not the shortest distance between any two
X
positions on the Earth (excluding meridians and equator).
061 02 04 04 Relationship
061 02 04 04 Distances
Explain that the variation in distance of the great - circle route and rhumb-line
LO route between any two positions increases with increasing latitude or change in
longitude.
061 02 04 05 Conversion angle
LO Calculate and apply the conversion angle.
061 03 00 00 Navigation in climb and descent
061 03 00 00 Average airspeed
LO Average TAS used for climb problems is calculated at the altitude 2/3 of the cruising
altitude.
LO Average TAS used for descent problems is calculated at the altitude 1/2 of the
descent altitude.
061 03 00 01 Average wind velocity (WV)
LO WV used for climb problems is the WV at the altitude 2/3 of the cruising altitude.
LO WV used for descent problems is the WV at the altitude 1/2 of the descent
altitude.
LO Calculate the average climb/descent GS from given TAS at various altitudes, and
WV at various altitudes and true track.
061 03 00 02 Ground speed (GS)/distance covered during climb or descent
LO State that most aircraft operating handbooks supply graphical material to calculate
X
climb and descent problems.
LO Calculate the flying time and distance during climb/descent from given average rate of
climb/descent and using average GS using the following formulae valid for a 3°-glide
path:
rate of descent = (GS × 10) / 2
rate of descent = speed factor (SF) × glide-path angle × 100
LO Given distance, speed and present altitude, calculate the rate of climb/descent in
order to reach a certain position at a given altitude.
LO Given speed, rate of climb/descent and altitude, calculate the distance
required in order to reach a certain position at a given altitude.
LO Given speed, distance to go and altitude to climb/descent, calculate the
rate of climb/descent.
061 03 00 03 Plotting
LO Measure tracks and distances on VFR and IFR en - route charts.
LO Fix the aircraft position on an en-route chart with information from VOR and
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 120 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.1. PTS/PL191: GENERAL NAVIGATION
DME equipment.
LO Resolve bearings of an NDB station for plotting on an aeronautical chart.
061 03 00 04 Flight log
Enter revised navigational en-route data, for the legs concerned, into the flight plan
LO (e.g. updated wind and GS and correspondingly losses or gains in time and fuel
consumption).
Learning-Teaching Methods
10. Lecture-Discussion
11. Group work
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen- Private Pilot Handbook
H. FAA AC:61-23C: Pilots handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 121 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.2. PTS/PL131: C-172 AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING
1.29. PTS/PL131: C-172 AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING
Lesson Code: PTS/PL131
Lesson Duration: 14 Hrs.
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson, trainees will be able to:
List and describe the aeroplane and engine systems and their operation, under normal and emergency
conditions
Describe the operation of a constant speed VP Propeller, its feathering system, and know the handling,
safety, and feathering limitations for the aeroplane type
List the V speeds for the C-172 airplane, and be able to describe the principles and factors affecting critical/
minimum control and safety speeds
Perform, mass and balance calculations for the aeroplane type correctly
List the systems affected by loss of a single power unit, and explain the subsequent effect on aeroplane
flight performance
Perform correctly, all weight and performance calculations relevant to the aeroplane type
Lesson Contents
Introduction
Airframe
Flight Controls
Instrument Panel
Landing Gear
Seats And Safety Harnesses
Baggage Compartment
Canopy, Rear Door, And Cabin Interior
Power Plant
Engine, General
Operating Controls
Propeller
Engine Instruments
Fuel System
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 122 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.2. PTS/PL131: C-172 AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING
Cooling System
Turbo Charger System
Oil Systems
Electrical System
General
Engine Control Unit / ECU
Warning, Caution And Advisory Messages
Pitot-Static System
Stall Warning System
Pitot-Static System
Stall Warning System
Garmin G1000 Integrated Avionics System
General
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Audio Panel
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
Air Data Computer (ADC)
Avionics
Autopilot System
Automatic Flight Control System Annunciations and Alerts
Learning-Teaching Methods
Lecture-Discussion
Self-reading
Assessment Methods
Written Test
Reference Materials
Diamond C-172Airplane Flying Manual
Jeppesen- Aircraft General Knowledge- Instrumentation
Private Pilots Handbook
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 123 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.8
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.3. PTS/PL232: DIAMOND DA-40 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING
1.30. PTS/PL132: DIAMOND DA-40 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEM
TRAINING
Lesson Code: PTS/PL132
Lesson Duration: 7 Hrs.
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson, trainees will be able to:
List and describe the aeroplane and engine systems and their operation, under normal and emergency
conditions
Describe the operation of a constant speed VP Propeller, its feathering system, and know the handling,
safety, and feathering limitations for the aeroplane type
List the V speeds for the DA 40NG airplane, and be able to describe the principles and factors affecting
critical/ minimum control and safety speeds
Perform, mass and balance calculations for the aeroplane type correctly
List the systems affected by loss of a single power unit, and explain the subsequent effect on aeroplane
flight performance
Perform correctly, all weight and performance calculations relevant to the aeroplane type
Lesson Contents
Introduction
Airframe
Flight Controls
Instrument Panel
Landing Gear
Seats and Safety Harnesses
Baggage Compartment
Canopy, Rear Door, And Cabin Interior
Power Plant
Engine, General
Operating Controls
Propeller
Engine Instruments
Fuel System
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 124 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.8
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.3. PTS/PL232: DIAMOND DA-40 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEM TRAINING
Cooling System
Turbo Charger System
Oil Systems
Electrical System
General
Engine Control Unit / ECU
Warning, Caution and Advisory Messages
Pitot-Static System
Stall Warning System
Pitot-Static System
Stall Warning System
Garmin G1000 Integrated Avionics System
General
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Audio Panel
Attitude And Heading Reference System (AHRS)
Air Data Computer (ADC)
Avionics
Autopilot System
Automatic Flight Control System Annunciations and Alerts
Learning-Teaching Methods
Lecture-Discussion
Self-reading
Assessment Methods
Written Test
Reference Materials
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Airplane Flying Manual
Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
Private Pilots Handbook
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 125 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.4. PTS/PL024: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS I
1.31. PTS/PL241: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS I
Lesson Code: PTS/PL241
Lesson Duration: 40 Hrs.
Lesson Objectives:
At the end of this lesson trainees will be able to:
Explain the importance of English language in Aviation
State the safety factors associated with proficiency in English Language
Describe the six ICAO English language Proficiency test descriptors
Use vocabularies and expressions that are pertinent to briefing
Identify and use words related to airport layout
Use expressions to request departure information and clearance
Read back taxi instructions
Use expressions regarding ground operations and emergencies with understandable pronunciation for the
aviation community
Use appropriate expressions to avoid misunderstanding
Describe actions, positions, procedures, problems and process using appropriate words and expressions
Use words and expressions to discuss aircraft types
Use words and expressions to discuss aircraft maneuvers
Listen to an interview on air race and discuss their understanding
Use appropriate words and expressions to report aircraft instrument failure
Express how things work
Use correct words and expressions to express difficult situations
Use appropriate expressions of words and instructions
Give and receive a variety of orders and instructions
Use expressions to show coordinates
Use words and expressions to explain different uses of flight control systems
Use understandable pronunciation to ask about and report traffic in the vicinity
Use correct language expressions to express emergency situations
Use words and expressions to request and offer help while cursing
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 126 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.4. PTS/PL024: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS I
Lesson Contents
Introduction
Aim of the course
The need of English language in aviation
The safety factors
ICAO standard
Aerodrome Communication
Preflight Communication
Briefing
Airport Layout
Departure Information/ Surface Condition
Clearance delivery
Walk-around inspection
Pushback
Taxi instructions
Read back
following simple and complex taxi instruction
On-ground emergencies
Getting to the runway
Runway Incursion
Departure and Takeoff
Ground Navigation
Takeoff Procedures
Emergencies
Traffic Issues
Language Functions
Asking for Information
Avoiding Miscommunication
Describing Actions and Position
Describing an action in progress
Describing a procedure
Describing aims/precautions
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 127 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.4. PTS/PL024: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS I
Describing the source of a problem
Describing a visual impression
Describing a process
Aerodynamics
Aircraft Types
Maneuvers
Air race
Hydraulic loss
Language Functions
Expressing how something works
Expressing difficulty
Comparing and contrasting
Orders and Instructions
Giving and Receiving orders/instructions
Giving and Receiving amended orders/instructions
Giving and Receiving negative orders/instructions
Giving and Receiving alternative orders/instructions
Giving and Receiving a sequence of orders/instructions
Cancelling Orders/instructions
Announcing compliance with orders/instructions
Announcing non-compliance with orders/instructions
Navigation and Aviation Technology
Coordinates
Flight control systems
In-flight communication
Traffic
Data link
TCAS
Clearances
Route change
Pressurization
Lost Communication
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 128 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.4. PTS/PL024: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS I
Language Functions
Requests and offers
Requesting an action
Offering help
Stating reluctance
Refusing to act
Explaining Purpose
Learning-Teaching Methods
Lecture-Discussion
Group work
Individual Reading Assignment
Video Analysis
CBT
Extensive Listening and Speaking Exercises
Speech Recognition & Voice Record Exercises
Vocabulary Exercises
presentations
Assessment Methods
Written Test
Class participation
Group Project Presentations
Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
Aviation English course book
AES for Pilots
ICAO Manual for Radio Telephony
ICAO Manual for the Implementation of ICAO Language Proficiency Ratings
Fatal Wards: Communication Clashes and Aircraft Crashes.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground training phase I 129 | 404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Ground Training: Phase II
2. GROUND TRAINING PHASE II
The theoretical knowledge lessons covered in this phase are the continuation of those lessons
covered in Phase I. The Total time allotted for these lessons is 341 hours. The following table
summarizes the lessons to be offered in phase-II
Corse Code Module Phase II
Module
Course Title Module Name Duration Duration
Code
(Hrs.)
Certificate and License
PTS/PL 104 7
Requirements
Aeronautical Information
PTS/PL 105 7
PTS/PL 010 Air Law Services 21
Aircraft Search and
PTS/PL 106 Rescue & Accident 7
Investigation
PTS/PL022 PTS/PL 224 Stability 13
Principles of Flight PTS/PL 225 Control 5 21
PTS/PL 226 Limitations 3
Autopilot Systems
PTS/PL121 3
introduction
PTS/PL012 PTS/PL122 Autopilot System 5
PTS/PL123 Flight director: design and
Instrumentation 5 21
operation
PTS/PL124 Aeroplane: flight mode
4
annunciator (FMA)
PTS/PL125 Auto land 4
PTS/PL018 PTS/PL186 Air Mass and Fronts 7
Meteorology PTS/PL187 Pressure Systems 7 21
PTS/PL188 Climatology 7
PTS/PL025 Basic Principles of Radio
PTS/PL251 6
Navigation
PTS/PL252 Antennas 2
PTS/PL253 Wave Propagation 6
PTS/PL254 Radio Navigational Aids 14
Radio Navigation 28
PTS/PL265 CARGO HANDLING 4
CS-23/EU-OPS
PERFORMANCE CLASS B
— USE OF AEROPLANE
PTS/PL274 PERFORMANCE DATA 4
FOR SINGLE- AND
MULTI-ENGINE
AEROPLANES
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 130 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Ground Training: Phase II
CS-25/EU-OPS
PTS/PL275 PERFORMANCE CLASS A 8
— THEORY
PTS/PL276 CS-25/EU-OPS
PERFORMANCE CLASS A
5
— USE OF AEROPLANE
PERFORMANCE DATA
PTS/PL028 Human Factors: Basic
Human PTS/PL281 14
Concepts
Performance and 28
Basics of Flight
Limitations PTS/PL282 14
Physiology
PTS/PL013 Aircraft Type
DA-42 NG Aircraft
Specific System PTS/PL133 21 21
System Training
Training
Fundamental of radio
PTS/PL291 14
Communication
PTS/PL029
PTS/PL292 Departure Communication 11
Communications PTS/PL293 Enroute Communication 10 56
PTS/PL294 Arrival Communication 14
PTS/PL295 Abnormal and emergency
7
Communication
PTS/PL024 Aviation English for
Aviation English PTS/PL242 40 40
Pilots II
Phase I Total 341 341
Table 2-1: Summary of Phase II Ground Training
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 131 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.5. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS
2.1. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
AIRWORTHINESS OF AIRCRAFT, AIRCRAFT NATIONALITY AND REGISTRATION
010 02 00 00 7
MARKS
010 02 01 00 Intentionally left blank
010 02 02 00 Certificate of Airworthiness (C of A)
010 02 02 01 Certificate of Airworthiness (C of A) — Details
LO State the issuing authority of a C of A.
Source: ICAO Annex 8, Chapter 3.2 Issuance and continued validity of a Certificate
of Airworthiness
LO State the necessity to hold a C of A.
Source: ICAO Doc 7300, Article 31
LO Explain the prerequisites for the issue of a C of A according to Commission
X Regulation (EU) No 748/2012 .
Source: Commission Regulation (EU) No 748/2012, SUBPART H
LO State who shall determine an aircraft’s continuing airworthiness.
Source: ICAO Annex 8, Chapter 3.2 Issuance and continued validity of a Certificate
of Airworthiness
LO Describe how a C of A can be renewed or may remain valid.
Source: ICAO Annex 8
Chapter 3.2 Issuance and continued validity of a Certificate of Airworthiness;
Chapter 3.5 Temporary loss of airworthiness; Chapter 3.6 Damage to aircraft
010 02 03 00 ICAO Annex 7 — Aircraft Nationality and Registration Marks
010 02 03 01 ICAO Annex 7 — Definitions
Recall the definition of the following terms:
aircraft;
LO X heavier-than-air aircraft;
State of Registry.
Source: ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 1 Definitions
010 02 04 00 Nationality marks, common marks and registration marks
Nationality marks, common marks and registration marks — assignment and
010 02 04 01 location
Source: ICAO Annex 7
State the location of nationality marks, common marks and registration marks.
Source:
LO
ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 4.3 Heavier-than-air aircraft; ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 9
Identification plate
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 132 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.5. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Explain who is responsible for assigning nationality marks, common marks and
(LO registration marks.
Source: ICAO Annex 7, Chapter 3 Nationality, common and registration marks to
be used
010 03 00 00 Intentionally left blank
010 04 00 00 PERSONNEL LICENSING
010 04 01 00 ICAO Annex 1
Differences between ICAO Annex 1 and Regulation (EU) No 1178/2011
010 04 01 01
(hereinafter: Aircrew Regulation)
Describe the relationship and differences between ICAO Annex 1 and the
LO X
Aircrew Regulation.
Aircrew Regulation — Annex I (Part-FCL)
010 04 02 00
Source: Aircrew Regulation
010 04 02 01 Definitions
LO Define the following:
Category, class and type of aircraft, cross-country, dual instruction time, flight time,
student pilot-in-command (SPIC), instrument time, instrument flight time, instrument
ground time, night, private pilot, proficiency check, renewal,
LO revalidation, skill test, solo flight time.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.010 Definitions
LO Define the following:
multi-crew cooperation (MCC), multi-pilot aircraft, rating.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.010 Definitions
010 04 02 02 Content and structure
LO Explain the structure of Part-FCL.
X
Source: Aircrew Regulation, Article 1 Subject matter
LO Explain the requirements to act as a flight crew member of a civil aircraft registered
in a Member State, and know the general principles of the licensing system (light
aircraft pilot licence (LAPL), private pilot licence (PPL), commercial pilot licence (CPL),
multi-crew pilot licence (MPL), airline transport pilot licence (ATPL)).
LO List the two factors that are relevant to the exercise of the privileges of a licence.
X
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.040 Exercise of the privileges of licences
LO State t he circumstances in which a language proficiency endorsement is
X required.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.055 Language proficiency
LO List the restrictions for licence holders with an age of 60 years or more.
X Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.065 Curtailment of privileges of licence
holders aged 60 years or more in commercial air transport
LO X Explain the term ‘competent authority’.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 133 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.5. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.001 Competent authority
Describe the obligation to carry and present documents (e.g. a flight crew
licence) under Part-FCL.
(LO
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.045 Obligation to carry and present
documents
010 04 02 03 Commercial pilot licence (CPL)
LO State the requirements for the issue of a CPL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation
X point FCL.300 CPL — Minimum age;
Appendix 3, D. CPL integrated course — Aeroplanes, Flying Training (8, a–f);
Appendix 3, E. CPL modular course — Aeroplanes, Experience (12, a–d)
LO State the privileges of a CPL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.305 CPL — Privileges and conditions
010 04 02 04 Airline transport pilot licence (ATPL) and multi-crew pilot licence (MPL)
LO State the requirements for the issue of an ATPL.
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.500 ATPL — Minimum age; Aircrew Regulation,
X point FCL.510.A ATPL(A) — Prerequisites, experience and crediting ((a) and (b));
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.510.H ATPL(H) — Prerequisites, experience and
crediting
LO State the privileges of an ATPL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.505 ATPL — Privileges
LO State the requirements for the issue of an MPL.
Source:
X Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.400.A MPL — Minimum age; Aircrew Regulation,
point FCL.410.A MPL—Training course and theoretical knowledge examinations
and Appendix 5 (items 1 to 8)
LO State the privileges of an MPL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.405.A MPL — Privileges
010 04 02 05 Ratings
LO State the requirements for class ratings, their validity and privileges.
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.740 Validity and renewal of class and type ratings;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.705 Privileges of the holder of a class or type rating;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.720.A Experience requirements and prerequisites for
the issue of class or type ratings — aeroplanes
LO State the requirements for type ratings, their validity and privileges.
Source:
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 134 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.5. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.705 Privileges of the holder of a class or type rating;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.720.A Experience requirements and prerequisites for
the issue of class or type ratings — aeroplanes;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.740 Validity and renewal of class and type ratings
LO State the requirements for instrument ratings, their validity and privileges
(instrument rating (IR), competency - based instrument rating (CB-IR) and en-route
instrument rating (EIR)).
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.610 IR — Prerequisites and crediting;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.605 IR — Privileges;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.625 IR — Validity, revalidation and renewal
LO State the requirements for other ratings, their validity and privileges according to
Part-FCL.
Source:
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.900 Instructor certificates; Aircrew Regulation,
point FCL.915 General prerequisites and requirements for instructors ;
Aircrew Regulation, point FCL.940 Validity of instructor certificates
010 04 03 00 Aircrew Regulation — Annex IV (Part-MED)
010 04 03 01 Aircrew Regulation — Annex IV (Part-MED) — Details
LO Describe the relevant content of Part-MED — Medical requirements (administrative
parts and requirements related to licensing only).
Source:
X Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.001 Competent authority; Aircrew Regulation,
point MED.A.005 Scope;
Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.045 Validity, revalidation
and renewal of medical certificates
LO State the requirements for the issue of a medical certificate.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.040 Issue, revalidation and
renewal of medical certificates
LO Name the class of medical certificate required when exercising the
privileges of a CPL, MPL or ATPL.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.030 Medical certificates
LO State the actions to be taken in case of a decrease in medical fitness.
Source: Aircrew Regulation, point MED.A.020 Decrease in medical fitness
N/A ECARAS Part 2: Personnel Licensing
Describe the similarities and difference between ECARAS part 2, ICAO
LO
Annex 1, and EASA FCL
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 135 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.5. PTS/PL 104: CERTIFICATE AND LICENCE REQUIREMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the obligation to carry and present documents (e.g. a flight
crew licence) under Ethiopian Civil Aviation Rules and standards
LO State ECARAS requirements for language-proficiency endorsement and
carriage of certificates
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
1. ICAO Annex 1
2. ICAO Annex 7
3. ICAO Annex 8
4. EASA Certificate of Airworthiness Manual
5. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
6. ICAO Doc. 9760: Airworthiness Manual
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 136 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 105: AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS)
2.2. PTS/PL 105: AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 08 00 00 AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS) 7
010 08 01 00 Introduction
Introduction to ICAO Annex 15 — Aeronautical Information
010 08 01 01
Service (AIS)
State, in general terms, the objective of an AIS.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 1, Note 1
010 08 02 00 Definitions of ICAO Annex 15
010 08 02 01 Definitions of ICAO Annex 15
LO Recall the following definitions:
aeronautical information circular (AIC), aeronautical
information publication (AIP), AIP amendment, AIP supplement, aeronautical
information regulation and control (AIRAC), danger area, integrated aeronautical
information package, international airport, international NOTAM office (NOF),
manoeuvring area, movement area, NOTAM, pre- flight information bulletin (PIB),
prohibited area, restricted area, SNOWTAM, ASHTAM.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 1, 1.1 Definitions
010 08 03 00 General
010 08 03 01 General — AIS responsibilities and functions
State during which period of time an AIS shall be available with reference to an
aircraft flying in the area of responsibility of an AIS, provided a 24-hour service
LO
is not available.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.2 AIS responsibilities and functions
List, in general, the kind of aeronautical information/data which an AIS service shall
LO make available in a suitable form to flight crew.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.2 AIS responsibilities and functions
Summarise the duties of an AIS concerning aeronautical information data for
the territory of a particular State.
Source:
LO
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.2 AIS responsibilities and functions;
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 2, 2.3 Exchange of aeronautical data and aeronautical
information
010 08 04 00 Integrated aeronautical information package
010 08 04 01 Aeronautical information publication (AIP)
State the primary purpose of the AIP.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, Notes 1 and 2
Name the different parts of the AIP.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.1 Contents
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 137 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 105: AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
State the main parts of the AIP where the following information can be
found:
differences from the ICAO Standards, Recommended Practices and Procedures;
location indicators, AIS, minimum flight ALT, meteorological information
for aircraft in flight (VOLMET) service, SIGMET service;
general rules and procedures (especially general rules, VFR, IFR, ALT-setting
procedure, interception of civil aircraft, unlawful interference, air traffic incidents);
ATS airspace (especially FIR, UIR, TMA);
ATS routes (especially lower ATS routes, upper ATS routes, area navigation
routes);
LO AD data including aprons, taxiways (TWYs) and check locations/positions data;
navigation warnings (especially prohibited, restricted and danger areas);
aircraft instruments, equipment and flight documents;
AD surface movement guidance and control system and markings;
RWY physical characteristics, declared distances, approach (APP) and RWY
lighting;
AD radio navigation and landing aids;
charts related to an AD;
entry, transit and departure of aircraft, passengers, crew and cargo, and the
significance of this information to flight crew.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 1
State how permanent changes to the AIP shall be published.
Source:
LO
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.3 Specifications for AIP Amendments;
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.5 Distribution
Explain what kind of information shall be published in the form of AIP
Supplements.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 4, 4.4 Specifications for
AIP Supplements
010 08 04 02 Notices to airmen (NOTAMs)
Describe how information shall be published which in principle would belong to
LO NOTAMs but includes extensive text or graphics.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 5, 5.1.1 and Notes 1 and 2
Summarise the essential information which leads to the issue of a NOTAM.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 5, 5.1.1.1
State to whom NOTAMs shall be distributed.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 5, 5.3.1
Explain how information regarding snow, ice and standing water on AD
LO pavements shall be reported.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2 Instructions for the
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 138 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 105: AERONAUTICAL INFORMATION SERVICE (AIS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
completion of the SNOWTAM format
Describe the means by which NOTAMs shall be distributed.
Source:
LO
ICAO Annex 15, 5.2 General specifications; ICAO Annex 15, 5.3 Distribution;
ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 5
Define and state which information an ASHTAM may contain.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 3 ASHTAM format
010 08 04 03 Aeronautical information regulation and control (AIRAC)
List the circumstances under which the information concerned shall or
should be distributed as an AIRAC.
LO X Source:
ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 6;
ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 4 Information to be notified by AIRAC
010 08 04 04 Aeronautical information circulars (AICs)
Describe the type of information that may be published in AICs.
(LO X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 7, 7.1 Origination
Explain the organisation of AICs.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 7, 7.2 General specifications
010 08 04 05 Pre-flight and post-flight information/data
Summarise, in addition to the elements of the integrated AIP and maps/charts, the
additional current information relating to the AD of departure that shall be
LO
provided as pre-flight information.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8, 8.1 Pre-flight information
Describe how a recapitulation of current NOTAM and other information of urgent
LO character shall be made available to flight crew.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8, 8.1 Pre-flight information
State which post-flight information from flight crew shall be submitted to AIS for
LO distribution as required by the circumstances.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8, 8.3 Post-flight information
010 08 05 00 ATM service providers
010 08 05 01 ATM
State that Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) No 1035/2011
provides:
general requirements for the provision of air navigation services;
specific requirements for the provision of air traffic services;
LO specific requirements for the provision of meteorological services;
specific requirements for the provision of aeronautical information services;
specific requirements for the provision of communication, navigation or surveillance
services.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 139 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.6. PTS/PL 106: AIRCRAFT SEARCH AND RESCUE & ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. ICAO ANNEX 15
B. AIP ETHIOPIA
C. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 140 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.6. PTS/PL 106: AIRCRAFT SEARCH AND RESCUE & ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION
2.3. PTS/PL 106: AIRCRAFT SEARCH AND RESCUE & ACCIDENT
INVESTIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 11 00 00 SEARCH AND RESCUE (SAR) 7
010 11 01 00 Essential SAR definitions
010 11 01 01 Essential SAR definitions — ICAO Annex 12
Recall the definitions of the following terms:
alert phase, distress phase, emergency phase, operator, PIC, rescue coordination
LO
centre, State of Registry, uncertainty phase.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 1 Definitions
010 11 02 00 SAR — Organisation
010 11 02 01 SAR — Organisation — Establishment and provision
Describe how ICAO Contracting States shall arrange for the establishment and
LO prompt provision of SAR services.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 2
Explain the establishment of SAR by Contracting States.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 2
Describe the areas within which SAR services shall be established by
LO Contracting States.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 2
State the period of time per day within which SAR services shall be available.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 2
Describe for which areas rescue coordination centers shall be established.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 2
010 11 03 00 Operating procedures for non-SAR crews
010 11 03 01 Operating procedures for non-SAR crews — PIC
Explain the SAR operating procedures for the PIC who arrives first at the scene of an
LO accident.
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5, 5.6 Procedures at the scene of an accident
Explain the SAR operating procedures for the PIC intercepting a distress transmission.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5, 5.7 Procedures for a pilot-in-command
intercepting a distress transmission
010 11 04 00 Search and rescue signals
010 11 04 01 Search and rescue signals — Survivors
Explain the ‘ground–air visual signal code’ for use by survivors.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 12, Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue signals and Appendix
LO Recognise the SAR ‘air-to-ground signals’ for use by survivors. Source: ICAO Annex
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 141 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.6. PTS/PL 106: AIRCRAFT SEARCH AND RESCUE & ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
12, Chapter 5.8 Search and rescue signals and Appendix
010 13 00 00 AIRCRAFT ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT INVESTIGATION
010 13 01 00 Essential definitions of ICAO Annex 13
010 13 01 01 Definitions and descriptions
Recall the definitions of the following terms:
accident, aircraft, flight recorder, incident, investigation, maximum mass, operator,
LO serious incident, serious injury, State of Design, State of Manufacture, State of
Occurrence, State of the Operator, State of Registry.
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 1 Definitions
Explain the difference between ‘serious incident’ and ‘accident’.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 1 Definitions and Attachment C ‘List of
examples of serious incidents ’
Determine whether a certain occurrence has to be defined as a serious incident or as
an accident.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 1 Definitions and Attachment C ‘List of
examples of serious incidents’
Recognise the description of an accident or incident.
LO
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 1 Definitions
010 13 02 00 Accident and incident investigation in ICAO Annex 13
010 13 02 01 Objectives and procedures
State the objective(s) of the investigation of an accident or incident according to
LO ICAO Annex 13.
Source: ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 3, 3.1 Objective of the investigation
Describe the general procedures for the investigation of an accident or incident
according to ICAO Annex 13.
LO Source:
ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 4, 4.1;
ICAO Annex 13, Chapter 5, 5.1 to 5.4.1
010 13 03 00 Accident and incident investigation in EU regulations
010 13 03 01 Occurrences
Identify an occurrence as being either an accident, incident or serious incident in
Regulation (EU) No 996/2010 of the European Parliament and of the Council of
20 October 2010 on the investigation and prevention of accidents and incidents in
LO
civil aviation.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 996/2010, Article 2(1), (7) and (16) and Annex ‘List of
examples of serious incidents’
LO Describe the relationship between Regulation (EU) No 996/2010 of the
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 142 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.6. PTS/PL 106: AIRCRAFT SEARCH AND RESCUE & ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
European Parliament and of the Council of 20 October 2010 on the investigation
and prevention of accidents and incidents in civil aviation and Regulation (EU) No
376/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 3 April 2014 on the
reporting, analysis and follow-up of occurrences in civil aviation.
Source:
Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, p. L122/18 (3) and p. L122/21 (28);
Regulation (EU) No 996/2010
LO State the subject matter and scope of Regulation (EU) No 376/2014 (Article
3).
Source: Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Article 3
LO Identify occurrences that must be reported (Regulation (EU) No 376/2014,
Article 4).
Source: Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Article 4
LO Identify occurrences that should be voluntarily reported (Regulation (EU) No
376/2014, Article 5).
Source: Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Article 5
LO Describe how information from occurrences is collected, stored and analysed
(Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Articles 6, 8, 13 and 14).
Source: Regulation (EU) No 376/2014, Articles 6, 8, 13 and 14
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. ICAO ANNEX 12: Search and Rescue
B. AIP ETHIOPIA
C. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
D. ICAO Doc 9731:IAMSARManual Volume I, II and III
E. ICAO ANNEX 13: Aircraft Accident Investigation
F. ICAO DOC 9756: Manual of Aircraft Accident and Incident Investigation Part I and III
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 143 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
2.4. PTS/PL 224: STABILITY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 04 00 00 STABILITY 13
081 04 01 00 Static and dynamic stability
081 04 01 01 Basics and definitions
LO Define ‘static stability’:
describe/identify a statically stable, neutral, and unstable condition (positive,
neutral, and negative static stability).
LO Explain maneuverability.
LO Explain why static stability is the opposite of manoeuvrability, and why CAT
aeroplanes are designed to be statically stable.
LO Define ‘dynamic stability’:
describe/identify a dynamically stable, neutral, and unstable motion (positive,
neutral, and negative dynamic stability);
describe/identify periodic and aperiodic motion.
LO Explain what combinations of static and dynamic stability will return an aeroplane
to the equilibrium state after a disturbance.
081 04 01 02 Precondition for static stability
Explain an equilibrium of forces and moments as the initial condition for the
LO X
concept of static stability.
081 04 01 03 Sum of forces
LO X Identify the forces considered in the equilibrium of forces.
081 04 01 04 Sum of moments
LO Identify the moments about all three axes considered in the equilibrium of
moments.
LO Discuss the effect of sum of moments not being zero.
081 04 02 00 Intentionally left blank
081 04 03 00 Static and dynamic longitudinal stability
081 04 03 01 Methods for achieving balance
LO Explain the stabiliser as the means to satisfy the condition of nullifying the total
X
sum of the moments about the lateral axis.
LO Explain the influence of the location of the wing CP relative to the CG on the
magnitude and direction of the balancing force on the stabiliser.
LO Explain the influence of the indicated airspeed on the magnitude and
direction of the balancing force on the stabiliser.
LO Explain the use of the elevator deflection or stabiliser angle for the generation of the
balancing force and its direction.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 144 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the elevator deflection required to balance thrust changes.
081 04 03 02 Static longitudinal stability
Discuss the effect of the CG location on pitch manoeuvrability and longitudinal
LO
stability.
081 04 03 03 Neutral point
LO X Define ‘neutral point’.
LO Explain why the location of the neutral point is only dependent on the aerodynamic
X
design of the aeroplane.
081 04 03 04 Factors affecting neutral point
Describe the location of the neutral point relative to the locations of the
LO
aerodynamic centre of the wing and tail.
081 04 03 05 Location of centre of gravity (CG)
LO Explain the influence of the CG location on the static longitudinal stability
of the aeroplane.
LO Explain the CG forward and aft limits with respect to:
longitudinal control forces;
elevator effectiveness;
stability.
LO Define ‘static margin’.
081 04 03 06 The Cm– graph
Describe the Cm– graph with respect to the relationship between the slope of
LO X
the graph and static stability.
081 04 03 07 Factors affecting the Cm– graph
Explain:
the effect on the Cm– graph of a shift of CG in the forward and aft direction;
the effect on the Cm– graph when the elevator is moved up or down;
the effect on the Cm– graph when the trim is moved;
LO
the effect of the wing contribution and how it is affected by the CG location;
the effect of the fuselage contribution and how it is affected by the CG location;
the tail contribution;
the effect of aerofoil camber change.
081 04 03 08 Intentionally left blank
081 04 03 09 Intentionally left blank
081 04 03 10 The stick force versus speed graph (IAS)
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 145 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Explain how a pilot perceives stable static longitudinal stick force stability
regarding changes in:
LO speed;
altitude;
mass.
081 04 03 11 Intentionally left blank
081 04 03 12 The manoeuvring stability/stick force per g
LO Define the ‘stick force per g’, and describe that the stick force increases linearly
X
with increase in g.
LO Explain why:
the stick force per g has a prescribed minimum and maximum value;
the stick force per g decreases with pressure altitude at the same indicated airspeed.
081 04 03 13 Intentionally left blank
081 04 03 14 Factors affecting the manoeuvring stability/stick force per g
Explain the influence on stick force per g of:
LO CG location;
trim setting.
081 04 03 15 Intentionally left blank
081 04 03 16 Dynamic longitudinal stability
LO Describe the phugoid and short-period motion in terms of period, damping, variations
(if applicable) in speed, altitude, and α.
LO Explain why the short-period motion is more hazardous than the phugoid.
LO Describe ‘pilot-induced oscillations’.
LO Explain the effect of high altitude on dynamic stability.
LO Describe the influence of the CG location on the dynamic longitudinal stability
of the aeroplane.
081 04 04 00 Static directional stability
081 04 04 01 Definition and effects of static directional stability
LO X Define ‘static directional stability’.
LO Explain the effects of static directional stability being too weak or too strong.
081 04 04 02 Sideslip angle
LO Define ‘sideslip angle’.
LO Identify β as the symbol used for the sideslip angle.
081 04 04 03 Yaw-moment coefficient Cn
LO X Define the ‘yawing-moment coefficient Cn’.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 146 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Define the relationship between Cn and β for an aeroplane with static directional
X
stability.
081 04 04 04 Cn–β graph
LO Explain why:
Cn depends on β;
Cn equals zero for that β that provides static equilibrium
X
about the aeroplane’s normal axis;
if no asymmetric engine thrust, flight control or loading condition prevails, the
equilibrium β equals zero.
LO X Identify how the slope of the Cn–β graph is a measure for static
LO directional stability.
LO X Identify how the slope of the Cn–β graph is affected by altitude.
081 04 04 05 Factors affecting static directional stability
LO Describe how the following aeroplane components contribute to static directional
stability:
wing;
fin;
dorsal fin;
ventral fin;
angle of sweep of the wing;
angle of sweep of the fin;
fuselage at high α;
strakes.
LO Explain why both the fuselage and the fin contribution reduce static directional
stability when the CG moves aft.
081 04 05 00 Static lateral stability
081 04 05 01 Definition and effects of static lateral stability
LO X Define ‘static lateral stability’.
LO Explain the effects of static lateral stability being too weak or too strong.
081 04 05 02 Bank angle Ø
LO X Define ‘bank angle Ø’.
081 04 05 03 The roll-moment coefficient Cl
LO X Define the ‘roll-moment coefficient Cl’.
081 04 05 04 Contribution of sideslip angle (β)
LO Explain how without coordination the bank angle (Ø) creates sideslip angle (β).
081 04 05 05 The Cl–β graph
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 147 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO X Describe the Cl– graph.
LO X Identify the slope of the Cl– graph as a measure for static lateral stability.
LO X Identify how the slope of the Cl–β graph is affected by altitude.
081 04 05 06 Factors affecting static lateral stability
Explain the contribution to the static lateral stability of:
dihedral, anhedral;
high wing, low wing;
LO
sweep angle of the wing;
ventral fin;
vertical tail.
081 04 06 00 Dynamic lateral/directional stability
081 04 06 01 Intentionally left blank
081 04 06 02 Tendency to spiral dive
LO Explain how lateral and directional stability are coupled.
LO Explain how high static directional stability and low static lateral stability may
cause spiral divergence (unstable spiral dive), and under which conditions the spiral
dive mode is neutral or stable.
LO Describe an unstable spiral dive mode with respect to deviations in speed,
bank angle, nose low-pitch attitude, and decreasing altitude.
081 04 06 03 Dutch roll
LO Describe Dutch roll.
LO Explain:
why Dutch roll occurs when the static lateral stability is large compared to static
directional stability;
the condition for a stable, neutral or unstable Dutch roll motion;
the function of the yaw damper;
the actions to be taken when the yaw damper is not available.
LO State the effect of Mach number on Dutch roll.
081 04 06 04 Effects of altitude on dynamic stability
Explain that increased pressure altitude reduces dynamic lateral/directional
LO
stability.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Pen and paper exercises
3. Self-reading
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 148 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
B. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
C. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
D. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 149 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
2.5. PTS/PL 225: CONTROL
81 05 00 00 CONTROL 5
081 05 01 00 General
081 05 01 01 Basics — The three planes and three axes
LO Define:
lateral axis;
X longitudinal axis;
normal axis.
LO Define:
pitch angle;
X bank angle (Ø);
yaw angle.
LO Describe the motion about the three axes.
LO Name and describe the devices that control these motions.
081 05 01 02 Camber change
State that camber is changed by movement of a control surface and explain the
LO
effect.
081 05 01 03 Angle-of-attack (α) change
LO X Explain the influence of local α change by movement of a control surface.
081 05 02 00 Pitch (longitudinal) control
081 05 02 01 Elevator/all-flying tails
LO Explain the working principle of the elevator/all-flying tail and describe its function.
081 05 02 02 Downwash effects
LO Explain the effect of downwash on the tailplane α.
LO Explain in this context the use of a T-tail or stabiliser trim.
081 05 02 03 Intentionally left blank
081 05 02 04 Location of centre of gravity (CG)
LO Explain the relationship between elevator deflection and CG location to produce a
given aeroplane response.
LO Explain the effect of forward CG limit on pitch control.
081 05 02 05 Moments due to engine thrust
Describe the effect of engine thrust on pitching moments for different engine
LO
locations.
081 05 03 00 Yaw (directional) control
081 05 03 01 The rudder
LO Explain the working principle of the rudder and describe its function.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 150 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
State the relationship between rudder deflection and the moment about the
normal axis.
Describe the effect of sideslip on the moment about the normal axis.
081 05 03 02 Rudder limiting
LO Explain why and how rudder deflection is limited on CAT aeroplanes.
081 05 04 00 Roll (lateral) control
081 05 04 01 Ailerons
LO Explain the functioning of ailerons.
LO Describe the adverse effects of aileron deflection.
(Refer to Subjects 081 05 04 04 and 081 06 01 02)
LO Explain why some aeroplanes have inboard and outboard ailerons.
LO State that the outboard ailerons are locked beyond a given speed to prevent:
over-control;
exceeding structural limitations;
aeroelastic phenomena (flutter, divergence and aileron reversal).
LO Describe the use of aileron deflection in normal flight, flight with sideslip, crosswind
landings, horizontal turns, flight with one-engine-inoperative.
LO X Define ‘roll rate’.
LO X List the factors that affect roll rate.
LO Describe flaperons and aileron droop.
081 05 04 02 Intentionally left blank
081 05 04 03 Spoilers
Explain how spoilers can be used to control the rolling movement in
LO
combination with or instead of the ailerons.
081 05 04 04 Adverse yaw
LO Explain why the use of ailerons induces adverse yaw.
081 05 04 05 Means to avoid adverse yaw
Explain how the following reduce adverse yaw:
Frise ailerons;
LO differential aileron deflection;
rudder aileron cross-coupling;
roll spoilers.
081 05 05 00 Roll/yaw interaction
081 05 05 01 Explain roll/yaw interaction
LO Explain the secondary effect of roll.
LO Explain the secondary effect of yaw.
081 05 06 00 Means to reduce control forces
081 05 06 01 Aerodynamic balance
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 151 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
LO Describe the purpose of aerodynamic balance.
LO Describe the working principle of the horn balance.
LO Describe the working principle of the internal balance.
LO Describe the working principle and application of:
balance tab;
anti-balance tab;
spring tab;
servo tab.
081 05 06 02 Artificial means
LO State the differences between fully powered controls and power-assisted
controls.
LO Describe power-assisted controls.
LO Describe the advantages of artificial feel in fully powered control.
081 05 07 00 Intentionally left blank
081 05 08 00 Trimming
081 05 08 01 Reasons to trim
LO State the reasons for using trimming devices.
LO Explain the difference between a trim tab and the various balance tabs.
081 05 08 02 Trim tabs
LO Describe the working principle of a trim tab including cockpit indications.
081 05 08 03 Stabiliser trim
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of a stabiliser trim compared to a trim
tab.
LO Explain elevator deflection when the aeroplane is trimmed in the case of fully
powered and power-assisted pitch controls.
LO Explain the relationship between CG position, take-off trim setting, and stabiliser
trim position.
LO Explain the effect of errors in the take-off stabiliser trim setting on the rotation
characteristics and stick force during take-off rotation.
LO Discuss the effects of jammed and runaway stabiliser.
Explain the consequences of a jammed stabiliser during take- off, landing, and go-
(06)
around.
Learning-Teaching Methods
4. Lecture-Discussion
5. Pen and paper exercises
6. Self-reading
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 152 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
F. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
G. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
H. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 153 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
2.6. PTS/PL 226: LIMITATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 06 00 00 LIMITATIONS 3
081 06 01 00 Operating limitations
081 06 01 01 Flutter
LO Describe the phenomenon of flutter and how IAS and mass distribution affects
the likelihood of flutter occurrence.
LO Describe the use of mass balance to alleviate the flutter problem by adjusting
the mass distribution:
wing-mounted engines on pylons;
control surface mass balance.
LO State how to avoid flutter, and possible actions if flutter occurred.
081 06 01 02 Aileron reversal
Describe the phenomenon of aileron reversal:
at low speeds;
LO
at high speeds.
Describe the aileron reversal speed in relationship to VNE and VNO.
081 06 01 03 Landing gear/flap operating
LO Describe the reason for flap/landing gear limitations.
Define ‘VLO’.
Define ‘VLE’.
LO Explain why there is a difference between VLO and VLE in the case of some
aeroplane types.
LO Define ‘VFE’ and describe flap limiting speeds.
LO Describe flap design features, procedures and warnings to prevent overload.
081 06 01 04 VMO, VNO, and VNE
LO X Define ‘VMO’, ‘VNO’, and ‘VNE’.
LO Describe VMO, VNO and VNE, the relevance of the airspeed on which they are
based, and the differences between the airspeeds.
LO Explain the hazards of flying at speeds close to VNE and VMO.
081 06 01 05 MMO
LO Define ‘MMO’ and state its limiting factors.
081 06 02 00 Manoeuvring envelope
081 06 02 01 Manoeuvring–load diagram
LO Describe the manoeuvring–load diagram.
LO Define limit and ultimate load factor, and explain what can happen if these
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 154 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
values are exceeded.
LO Define ‘VA’, ‘VC’, and ‘VD’.
LO Identify and explain the varying features on the VN diagram:
load factor ‘n’;
speed scale, equivalent airspeed;
equivalent airspeed envelope;
CLMAX boundary;
1g stall speed;
accelerated stall boundary (refer to 081 03 01 02).
LO Describe the relationship between VMO or VNE and VC.
LO State all the manoeuvring load-factors limits applicable to CS-23 and CS-25
aeroplanes.
LO Explain the relationship between VA and VS in a formula, and calculate the values.
LO Explain the significance of VA and the adverse consequences of applying full,
abrupt nose-up elevator deflection when exceeding VA.
081 06 02 02 Factors affecting the manoeuvring–load diagram
LO State the relationship of mass to:
load-factor limits;
accelerated stall speed boundary limit;
VA and explain why if a single value for VA is given, it will be at the aeroplane’s
maximum structural take-off mass and at low altitude.
LO Calculate the change of VA with changing mass.
LO Explain why VA loses significance at higher altitude where compressibility
effects occur.
LO X Define ‘MC’ and ‘MD’ and their relation with ‘VC’ and ‘VD’.
081 06 03 00 Gust envelope
081 06 03 01 Gust–load diagram
LO Recognise a typical gust–load diagram, and state the minimum gust speeds in ft/s, m/s
and kt that the aeroplane must be designed to withstand at VB to VC and VD.
LO Discuss considerations for the selection of VRA.
LO Explain the adverse effects on the aeroplane when flying in turbulence.
081 06 03 02 Factors affecting the gust–load diagram
Describe and explain the relationship between the gust–load factor and the following:
LO lift–curve slope, aspect ratio, angle of sweep, altitude, wing loading, weight, wing area,
equivalent airspeed (EAS), and speed of vertical gust.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Pen and paper exercises
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 155 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.7. PTS/PL 222: STABILITY, CONTROL AND LIMITATIONS
9. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
J. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
K. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
L. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 156 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.7. PTS/PL121: AUTOPILOT INTRODUCTION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 06 00 00 AEROPLANE: AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEMS 3
022 06 01 00 General
022 06 01 01 Definitions and control loops
LO Describe the following purposes of an automatic flight control system (AFCS):
enhancement of flight controls;
reduction of pilot workload.
LO Define and explain the following two functions of an AFCS:
aircraft control: stabilise the aircraft around its centre of gravity (CG);
aircraft guidance: guidance of the aircraft’s flight path.
LO Describe the following two automatic control principles:
closed loop, where a feedback from an action or state is compared to the desired
action or state;
open loop, where there is no feedback loop.
LO List the following elements of a closed-loop control system and explain their
basic function:
input signal;
error detector;
signal processor providing a measured output signal according to set criteria or laws;
control element such as an actuator;
feedback signal to error detector for comparison with input signal.
LO Describe how a closed-loop system may enter a state of self-induced oscillation if
the system overcompensates for deviations from the desired state.
LO Explain how a state of self-induced oscillations may be detected and describe the
effects of self-induced oscillations:
aircraft controllability;
aircraft safety;
timely manual intervention as a way of mitigating loss of control;
techniques that may be used to maintain positive control of the aircraft.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 157 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
B. Private Pilots Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 158 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.8. PTS/PL122: AUTOPILOT SYSTEM
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 06 02 00 Autopilot system 5
022 06 02 01 Design and operation
LO Define the three basic control channels.
LO Define the three different types of autopilots:
single or 1 axis (roll);
2 axes (pith and roll);
3 axes (pitch, roll and yaw);
LO Describe the purpose of the following components of an autopilot system:
flight control unit (FCU), mode control panel (MCP) or equivalent;
flight mode annunciator (FMA) (see Subject 022 06 04 00);
autopilot computer;
actuator.
LO Explain the following lateral modes:
heading (HDG)/track (TRK);
VOR (VOR)/localiser (LOC);
lateral navigation/managed navigation (LNAV or NAV).
LO Describe the purpose of control laws for pitch and roll modes.
LO Explain the following vertical modes:
vertical speed (V/S);
flight path angle (FPA);
level change (LVL CHG)/open climb (OP CLB) or open descent (OP DES);
speed reference system (SRS);
altitude (ALT) hold;
vertical navigation (VNAV)/managed climb (CLB) or descent (DES);
glideslope (G/S).
LO Describe how the autopilot uses speed, aircraft configuration or flight phase as a
measure for the magnitude of control inputs and how this may affect precision and
stability.
LO Explain the following mixed modes:
take-off;
go-around;
approach (APP).
LO Describe the two types of autopilot configurations and explain the implications to
the pilot for either and when comparing the two principles:
flight-deck controls move with the control surface when the autopilot is engaged;
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 159 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
flight-deck controls remain static when the autopilot is engaged
LO Describe the purpose of the following inputs and outputs for an autopilot
system:
attitude information;
flight path/trajectory information;
control surface position information;
airspeed information;
aircraft configuration information;
FCU/MCP selections;
FMAs.
LO Describe the purpose of the synchronisation function when engaging the
autopilot and explain why the autopilot should be engaged when the aircraft is
in trim.
LO Define the control wheel steering (CWS) mode as manual manoeuvring of
the aircraft through the autopilot computer and autopilot servos/actuators
using the control column/control wheel.
LO Describe the following elements of CWS:
CWS as an autopilot mode;
flight phases where CWS cannot be used;
whether the pilot or the autopilot is controlling the flight path;
the availability of flight path/performance protections;
potential different feel and control response compared to manual flight.
LO Describe touch control steering (TCS) and highlight the differences when
compared to CWS:
autopilot remains engaged but autopilot servos/actuators are disconnected
from the control surfaces;
manual control of the aircraft as long as TCS button is depressed;
autopilot servos/actuators reconnect when TCS button is released and the
autopilot returns to previously engaged mode(s).
LO Explain that only one autopilot may be engaged at any time except for when APP
is armed in order to facilitate a fail-operational autoland.
LO Explain the difference between an armed and an engaged mode:
not all modes have an armed state available;
a mode will only become armed if certain criteria are met;
an armed mode will become engaged (replacing the previously engaged mode, if
any) when certain criteria are met.
LO Describe the sequence of events when a mode is engaged and the different
LO phases:
initial phase where attitude is changed to obtain a new trajectory in order to
achieve the new parameter;
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 160 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
the trajectory will be based on rate of closure which is again based on the difference
between the original parameter and the new parameter;
capture phase where the aircraft will follow a predefined rate of change of
trajectory to achieve the new parameter without overshooting/ undershooting;
tracking or hold phase where the aircraft will maintain the set parameter until
a new change has been initiated.
LO Explain automatic mode reversion and typical situations where it may occur:
no suitable data for the current mode such as flight plan discontinuity when in
LNAV/managed NAV;
change of parameter during capture phase for original parameter such as change
of altitude target during ALT ACQ/ALT*;
mismanagement of a mode resulting in engagement of the autopilot envelope
protection, e.g. selecting excessive V/S resulting in a loss of speed control.
LO Explain the dangers of mismanagement of the following modes:
use of V/S and lack of speed protection, i.e. excessive V/S or FPA may be selected with
subsequent uncontrolled loss or gain of airspeed;
arming VOR/LOC or APP outside the protected area of the localiser or ILS.
LO Describe how failure of other systems may influence the availability of the
autopilot and how incorrect data from other systems may result in an
undesirable aircraft state, potentially without any failure indications.
Explain the importance of prompt and a ppropriate pilot intervention during such
events.
LO Explain an appropriate procedure for disengaging the autopilot and why both aural
and visual warnings are used to indicate that the autopilot is being disengaged:
temporary warning for intended disengagement using the design method;
continuous warning for unintended disengagement or using a method other than the
design method.
LO Explain the following regarding autopilot and aircraft with manual trim:
the autopilot may not engage unless the aircraft controls are in trim;
the aircraft will normally be in trim when the autopilot is disconnected;
use of manual trim when the autopilot is engaged will normally lead to autopilot
disconnection and a risk of an out-of-trim situation.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-Discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 161 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
Reference Materials
C. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
D. Private Pilots Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 162 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.9. PTS/PL123: Flight director: design and operation
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 06 03 00 Flight director: design and operation 5
022 06 03 01 Purpose, use, indications, modes, data
LO Explain the purpose of a flight director system.
LO Describe the different types of display:
pitch and roll crossbars;
V-bar.
LO Explain the differences between a flight director and an autopilot and how the flight
director provides a means of cross-checking the control/guidance commands sent
to the autopilot.
LO Explain why the flight director must be followed when engaged/shown, and
describe the appropriate use of the flight director:
flight director only;
autopilot only;
flight director and autopilot;
typical job-share between pilots (pilot flying (PF)/pilot monitoring (PM)) for
selecting the parameters when autopilot is engaged versus disengaged.
LO Give examples of different scenarios and the resulting flight director indications.
LO Explain that the flight director computes and indicates the direction and
magnitude of control inputs required in order to achieve an attitude to follow a
trajectory.
LO Explain how the modes available for the flight director are the same as those
available for the autopilot, and that the same panel (FCU/MCP) is normally used
for selection.
LO Explain the importance of checking the FMC data or selected autopilot modes
through the FMA when using the flight directors. If the flight directors are
showing incorrect guidance, they should not be followed and should be turned
off.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-Discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 163 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
F. Private Pilots Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 164 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.10. PTS/PL124: Aeroplane: flight mode annunciator (FMA)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 06 04 00 Aeroplane: flight mode annunciator (FMA) 4
022 06 04 01 Purpose, modes, display scenarios
LO Explain the purpose of FMAs and their importance being the only indication of
the state of a system rather than a switch position.
LO Describe where the FMAs are normally shown and how the FMAs will be divided
into sections (as applicable to aircraft complexity):
vertical modes;
lateral modes;
autothrust modes;
autopilot and flight director annunciators;
landing capability.
LO Explain why FMAs for engaged or armed modes have different colour or
different font size.
LO Describe the following FMA display scenarios:
engagement of a mode;
mode change from armed to becoming engaged;
mode reversion.
LO Explain the importance of monitoring the FMAs and announcing mode changes at
all times (including when selecting a new mode) and why only certain mode
changes will be accompanied by an aural notification or additional visual cues.
LO Describe the consequences of not understanding what the FMAs imply or missing
mode changes , and how it may lead to an undesirable aircraft state.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
H. Private Pilots Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 165 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.11. PTS/PL125: Auto land
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 06 05 00 Autoland 4
022 06 05 01 Design and operation
LO Explain the purpose of an autoland system.
LO Explain the significance of the following components required for an autoland:
autopilot;
autothrust;
radio altimeter;
ILS receivers.
LO Explain the following terms (reference to CS-AWO ‘All Weather Operations’):
fail-passive automatic landing system;
fail-operational automatic landing system;
fail-operational hybrid landing system;
alert height.
LO Describe the autoland sequence including the following:
FMAs regarding the landing capability of the aircraft;
the significance of monitoring the FMAs to ensure the automatic
arming/engagement of modes triggered by defined radio altitudes or other
thresholds;
in the event of a go-around, that the aircraft performs the go-around
manoeuvre both by reading the FMAs and supporting those readings by raw data;
during the landing phase, that ‘FLARE’ mode engages at the appropriate radio altitude,
including typical time frame and actions if ‘FLARE’ does not engage;
after landing, that ‘ROLL-OUT’ mode engages and the significance of disconnecting the
autopilot prior to vacating the runway.
LO Explain that there are operational limitations in order to legally perform an
autoland beyond the technical capability of the aircraft.
LO Explain the purpose and significance of alert height, describe the indications and
implications , and consider typical pilot actions for a failure situation:
above the alert height;
below the alert height.
LO Describe typical failures that, if occurring below the alert height, will trigger a
warning:
all autopilots disengage;
loss of ILS signal or components thereof;
excessive ILS deviations;
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 166 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
radio-altimeter failure.
LO Describe how the failure of various systems, including systems not directly
involved in the autoland process,
LO can influence the ability to perform an autoland or affect the minima down
to which the approach may be conducted.
LO Describe the fail-operational hybrid landing system as a primary fail-passive
automatic landing system with a secondary independent guidance system such
as a head-up display (HUD) to enable the pilot to complete a manual landing if
the primary system fails.
022 08 00 00 TRIMS — YAW DAMPER — FLIGHT-ENVELOPE PROTECTION
022 08 01 00 Trim systems
022 08 01 01 Design and operation
LO Explain the purpose of the trim system and describe the layout with one trim
system for each control axis, depending on the complexity of the aircraft.
LO Give examples of trim indicators and their function, and explain the significance of
a ‘green band/area’ for the pitch trim.
LO Describe and explain an automatic pitch-trim system for a conventional aeroplane.
LO Describe and explain an automatic pitch-trim system for an FBW aeroplane and
that it is also operating during manual flight; however, during certain phases it may
be automatically disabled to alter the handling characteristics of the aircraft.
LO Describe the consequences of manual operation on the trim wheel when the
automatic pitch-trim system is engaged.
LO Describe and explain the engagement and disengagement conditions of the autopilot
according to trim controls.
LO Define ‘Mach trim’ and state that the Mach-trim system can be independent.
LO Describe the implications for the pilot in the event of a runaway trim or
significant out-of-trim state.
022 08 02 00 Yaw damper
022 08 02 01 Design and operation
LO Explain the purpose of the yaw-damper system.
LO Explain the purpose of the Dutch-roll filter (filtering of the yaw input signal).
LO Explain the operation of a yaw-damper system and state the difference between a
yaw-damper system and a 3-axis autopilot operation on the rudder channel.
022 08 03 00 Flight-envelope protection (FEP)
022 08 03 01 Purpose, input parameters, functions
LO Explain the purpose of the FEP.
LO Explain typical input parameters to the FEP:
AoA;
aircraft configuration;
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 167 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
airspeed information.
LO Explain the following functions of the FEP:
stall protection;
overspeed protection.
LO Explain how the stall-protection function and the overspeed-protection function
apply to both mechanical/conventional and FBW control systems, but other
functions (e.g. pitch or bank limitation) can only apply to FBW control systems.
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-Discussion
10. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
J. Private Pilots Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 168 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.12. PTS/PL186: AIR MASS AND FRONTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 06 00 00 AIR MASSES AND FRONTS 7
050 06 01 00 Air masses
050 06 01 01 Description, classification and source regions of air masses
LO Define the term ‘air mass’.
LO Describe the properties of the source regions.
LO Summarise the classification of air masses by source regions.
LO State the classifications of air masses by temperature and humidity at source.
LO State the characteristic weather in each of the air masses.
LO Name the three main air masses that affect Europe.
LO Classify air masses on a surface weather chart.
Remark: Names and abbreviations of air masses used in examinations:
first letter: humidity
continental (c)
maritime (m)
second letter: type of air mass
arctic (A)
polar (P)
tropical (T)
equatorial (E)
third letter: temperature
cold (c)
warm (w)
050 06 01 02 Modifications of air masses
LO List the environmental factors that affect the final properties of an air
mass.
LO Explain how maritime and continental tracks modify air masses.
LO Explain the effect of passage over cold or warm surfaces.
LO Explain how air-mass weather is affected by the season, the air-mass track and
by orographic and thermal effects over land.
LO Assess the tendencies of the stability of an air mass and describe the typical
resulting air-mass weather including the hazards for aviation.
050 06 02 00 Fronts
050 06 02 01 General aspects
LO Describe the boundaries between air masses (fronts).
LO Define ‘front’ and ‘frontal zone’.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 169 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Name the global frontal systems (polar front, arctic front).
LO State the approximate seasonal latitudes and geographic positions of the polar
front and the arctic front.
050 06 02 02 Warm front, associated clouds and weather
LO Define a ‘warm front’.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards at a warm front
depending on the stability of the warm air.
LO Explain the seasonal differences in the weather at warm fronts.
LO Describe the structure, slope and dimensions of a warm front.
LO Sketch a cross section of a warm front showing weather, cloud and aviation
hazards.
050 06 02 03 Cold front, associated clouds and weather
LO Define a ‘cold front’.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards at a cold front
depending on the stability of the warm air.
LO Explain the seasonal differences in the weather at cold fronts.
LO Describe the structure, slope and dimensions of a cold front.
LO Sketch a cross section of a cold front showing weather, cloud and aviation
hazards.
050 06 02 04 Warm sector, associated clouds and weather
LO Describe fronts and air masses associated with the warm sector.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards in a warm
sector.
LO Explain the seasonal differences in the weather in the warm sector.
LO Sketch a cross section of a warm sector showing weather, cloud and aviation
hazards.
050 06 02 05 Weather behind the cold front
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards behind the
cold front.
LO Explain the seasonal differences in the weather behind the cold front.
050 06 02 06 Occlusions, associated clouds and weather
LO X Define the term ‘occlusion’ and ‘occluded front’.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards in a cold
occlusion.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards in a warm
occlusion.
LO Explain the seasonal differences in the weather at occlusions.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 170 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Sketch a cross section of occlusions showing weather, cloud and aviation
hazards.
LO On a sketch illustrate the development of an occlusion and the movement of the
occlusion point.
050 06 02 07 Stationary front, associated clouds and weather
LO Define a ‘stationary front’.
LO Describe the cloud, weather, ground visibility and aviation hazards in a stationary
front.
050 06 02 08 Movement of fronts and pressure systems, life cycle
LO Describe the movements of fronts and pressure systems and the life cycle of a
mid-latitude depression.
LO State the rules for predicting the direction and the speed of movement of
fronts.
LO State the difference in the speed of movement between cold and warm fronts.
LO State the rules for predicting the direction and the speed of movement of
frontal depressions.
LO Describe, with a sketch if required, the genesis, development and life cycle of a
frontal depression with associated cloud and rain belts.
050 06 02 09 Changes of meteorological elements at a frontal wave
Sketch a plan and a cross section of a frontal wave (warm front, warm sector, and
LO cold front) and illustrate the changes of pressure, temperature, surface wind and
wind in the vertical axis.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-
2. discussion
3. Observation
4. Self-reading
ASSESSMENT METHODS
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 171 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.13. PTS/PL187: PRESSURE SYSTEMS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 07 00 00 PRESSURE SYSTEMS 7
050 07 01 00 The principal pressure areas
050 07 01 01 Location of the principal pressure areas
LO Identify or indicate on a map the principal global high-
pressure and low-pressure areas in March and July.
LO Explain how these pressure areas are formed.
LO Explain how the pressure areas move with the seasons.
050 07 02 00 Anticyclone
Anticyclones, types, general properties, cold and warm anticyclones, ridges
050 07 02 01
and subsidence
LO List the different types of anticyclones.
LO Describe the effect of high-level convergence in producing areas of high pressure
at ground level.
LO Describe air-mass subsidence, its effect on the environmental lapse
rate, and the associated weather.
LO Describe the formation of warm and cold anticyclones.
LO Describe the formation of ridges.
LO Describe the properties of and the weather associated with warm and cold
anticyclones.
LO Describe the properties of and the weather associated with ridges.
LO Describe the blocking anticyclone and its effects.
050 07 03 00 Non-frontal depressions
Thermal, orographic, polar and secondary depressions;
050 07 03 01
troughs
LO Describe the effect of high-level divergence in producing areas of low pressure
at ground level.
LO Describe the formation and properties of thermal, orographic (lee lows),
polar and secondary depressions.
LO Describe the formation, the properties and the associated weather at troughs.
050 07 04 00 Tropical revolving storms
050 07 04 01 Characteristics of tropical revolving storms
(01) State the conditions necessary for the formation of tropical revolving storms.
LO State how a tropical revolving storm generally moves in its area of occurrence.
LO Name the stages of the development of tropical revolving storms (tropical
disturbance, tropical depression, tropical storm, severe tropical storm, tropical
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 172 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
revolving storm).
LO Describe the meteorological conditions in and near a tropical revolving
storm.
LO State the approximate dimensions of a tropical revolving storm.
LO State that the movement of a tropical revolving storm can only rarely be forecast
exactly, and that utmost care is necessary near a tropical revolving storm.
050 07 04 02 Origin and local names, location and period of occurrence
LO List the areas of origin and occurrence of tropical revolving storms, and their
specified names (hurricane, typhoon, tropical cyclone).
LO State the expected times of occurrence of tropical
revolving storms in each of the source areas, and their approximate
frequency.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-
6. discussion
7. Observation
8. Self-reading
ASSESSMENT METHODS
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
B. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 173 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
2.14. PTS/PL188: CLIMATOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 08 00 00 CLIMATOLOGY 7
050 08 01 00 Climatic zones
050 08 01 01 General circulation in the troposphere and lower stratosphere
Describe the general tropospheric and low stratospheric circulation.
LO X
(Refer to Subject 050 02 03 01)
050 08 01 02 Climatic classification
LO Describe the characteristics of the tropical rain climate, the dry climate, the mid-
latitude climate (warm temperate rain climate), the subarctic climate (cold snow
forest climate) and the snow climate (polar climate).
LO Explain how the seasonal movement of the sun generates the transitional
climate zones.
LO State the typical locations of each major climatic zone.
050 08 02 00 Tropical climatology
Cause and development of tropical showers and thunderstorms:
050 08 02 01
humidity, temperature, tropopause
LO State the conditions necessary for the formation of tropical showers and
thunderstorms (mesoscale convective complex, cloud clusters).
LO Describe the characteristics of tropical squall lines.
LO Explain the formation of convective cloud structures caused by convergence
at the boundary of the NE and SE trade winds (Intertropical Convergence Zone
(ITCZ)).
LO State the typical figures for tropical surface air temperatures and humilities,
and for heights of the zero- degree isotherm.
050 08 02 02 Seasonal variations of weather and wind, typical synoptic situations
LO Indicate on a map the trade winds (tropical easterlies) and describe the
associated weather.
LO Indicate on a map the doldrums and describe the associated weather.
LO Indicate on a sketch the latitudes of subtropical high (horse latitudes) and
describe the associated weather.
LO Indicate on a map the major monsoon winds.
Intertropical Convergence Zone (ITCZ), weather in the
050 08 02 03
ITCZ, general seasonal movement
LO Identify or indicate on a map the positions of the ITCZ in March and July.
LO Explain the seasonal movement of the ITCZ.
LO Describe the weather and winds at the ITCZ.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 174 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
LO Explain the flight hazards associated with the ITCZ.
050 08 02 04 Monsoon, sandstorms, cold-air outbreaks
LO Define in general the term ‘monsoon’ and give a general overview of regions of
occurrence.
LO Describe the major monsoon conditions.
(Refer to Subject 050 08 02 02)
LO Explain how trade winds change character after a long track and become
monsoon winds.
LO Explain the weather and the flight hazards associated with a monsoon.
LO Explain the formation of the SW/NE monsoon over West Africa and describe the
weather, stressing the seasonal differences.
LO Explain the formation of the SW/NE monsoon over India and describe the weather,
stressing the seasonal differences.
LO Explain the formation of the monsoon over the Far East and northern Australia
and describe the weather, stressing the seasonal differences.
LO Describe the formation and properties of sandstorms.
LO Indicate when and where outbreaks of cold polar air can enter subtropical
weather systems.
LO Name well-known examples of polar-air outbreaks (Blizzard, Pampero).
050 08 02 05 Easterly waves
LO Explain the effect of easterly waves on tropical weather systems.
050 08 03 00 Typical weather situations in the mid-latitudes
050 08 03 01 Westerly situation (westerlies)
Identify on a weather chart the typical westerly situation with travelling polar
LO
front waves.
050 08 03 02 High-pressure area
LO Describe the high-pressure zones with the associated weather.
LO Identify on a weather chart the high-pressure regions.
050 08 03 03 Intentionally left blank
050 08 03 04 Cold-air drop
LO Define ‘cold-air drop’.
LO Describe the formation of a cold-air drop.
LO Identify cold-air drops on weather charts.
LO Explain the problems and dangers of cold-air drops for aviation.
050 08 04 00 Local winds and associated weather
050 08 04 01 Foehn, Mistral, Bora
LO Describe the mechanism for the development of Foehn winds (including
Chinook).
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 175 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.8. PTS/PL182: AIR MASS, FRONTS, PRESSURE SYSTEMS & CLIMATOLOGY
LO Describe the weather associated with Foehn winds.
LO Describe the formation of, the characteristics of, and the weather associated
with Mistral and Bora.
050 08 04 02 Harmattan
Describe the Harmattan wind and the associated visibility problems as an
LO
example of local winds affecting visibility.
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-
10. discussion
11. Observation
12. Self-reading
ASSESSMENT METHODS
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
C. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 176 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
2.15. PTS/PL251: BASIC PRINCIPLE OF RADIO NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
060 00 00 00 PRINCIPLE OF NAVIGATION 6
062 00 00 00 RADIO NAVIGATION
062 01 00 00 BASIC RADIO PROPAGATION THEORY
062 01 01 00 Basic principles
062 01 01 01 Electromagnetic waves
State that radio waves travel at the speed of light, being approximately 300 000
LO X
km/s.
LO X Define a ‘cycle’: a complete series of values of a periodical process.
062 01 01 02 Frequency, wavelength, amplitude, phase angle
LO Define ‘frequency’: the number of cycles occurring in 1 second expressed in
X
Hertz (Hz).
LO Define ‘wavelength’: the physical distance travelled by a radio wave during one
X
cycle of transmission.
LO X Define ‘amplitude’: the maximum deflection in an oscillation or wave.
LO State that the relationship between wavelength and frequency is: wavelength (λ) =
X
speed of light (c) / frequency (f).
LO Define ‘phase angle’: the fraction of one wavelength expressed in degrees from
X
000° to 360°.
LO Define ‘phase angle difference/shift’: the angular difference between the
X corresponding points of two cycles of equal wavelength, which is measurable in
degrees (°).
062 01 01 03 Frequency bands, sidebands, single sideband
LO List the bands of the frequency spectrum for electromagnetic waves:
very low frequency (VLF): 3–30 kHz;
low frequency (LF): 30–300 kHz;
medium frequency (MF): 300–3 000 kHz;
high frequency (HF): 3–30 MHz;
very high frequency (VHF): 30–300 MHz;
ultra-high frequency (UHF): 300–3 000 MHz;
super high frequency (SHF): 3–30 GHz;
extremely high frequency (EHF): 30–300 GHz.
LO State that when a carrier wave is modulated, the resultant radiation consists
of the carrier frequency plus additional upper and lower sidebands.
LO State that HF meteorological information for aircraft in flight (VOLMET) and HF two-
way communication use a single sideband.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 177 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
State that the following abbreviations (classifications according to International
Telecommunication Union (ITU) regulations) are used for aviation applications:
N0N: carrier without modulation as used by non- directional radio beacons (NDBs);
LO A1A: carrier with keyed Morse code modulation as used by NDBs;
A2A: carrier with amplitude modulated Morse code as used by NDBs;
A3E: carrier with amplitude modulated speech used for communication (VHF-COM).
062 01 01 04 Pulse characteristics
Define the following terms that are associated with a pulse string:
pulse length;
LO
pulse power;
continuous power.
062 01 01 05 Carrier, modulation
LO X Define ‘carrier wave’: the radio wave acting as the carrier or transporter.
LO Define ‘modulation’: the technical term for the process of impressing and
X
transporting information by radio waves.
062 01 01 06 Kinds of modulation (amplitude, frequency, pulse, phase)
LO Define ‘amplitude modulation’: the information that is impressed onto the carrier
X
wave by altering the amplitude of the carrier.
LO Define ‘frequency modulation’: the information that is impressed onto the carrier
X
wave by altering the frequency of the carrier.
LO Describe ‘pulse modulation’: a modulation form used in radar by transmitting
X
short pulses followed by larger interruptions.
LO Describe ‘phase modulation’: a modulation form used in GPS where the phase of
X
the carrier wave is reversed.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
2. Group Project Presentations
3. Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
A. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 178 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
B. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
C. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
D. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 179 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
2.16. PTS/PL252: ANTENNAS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 01 02 00 Antennas 2
062 01 02 01 Characteristics
LO Define ‘antenna’: an antenna or aerial is an electrical device which converts electric
X
power into radio waves, and vice versa.
LO State that the simplest type of antenna is a dipole, which is a wire of length equal to
X
one half of the wavelength.
LO State that an electromagnetic wave always consists of an oscillating electric (E) and an
X
oscillating magnetic (H) field which propagates at the speed of light.
LO State that the E and H fields are perpendicular to each other. The oscillations are
X
perpendicular to the propagation direction and are in-phase.
062 01 02 02 Polarisation
State that the polarisation of an electromagnetic wave describes the orientation of
LO X the plane of oscillation of the electrical component of the wave with regard to its
direction of propagation.
062 01 02 03 Types of antennas
Name the common different types of directional antennas:
loop antenna used in old automatic direction-finding (ADF) receivers;
LO
parabolic antenna used in weather radars;
slotted planar array used in more modern weather radars.
LO Explain ‘antenna shadowing’.
LO Explain the importance of antenna placement on aircraft.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-Discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
5. Group Project Presentations
6. Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
E. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
F. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
G. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
H. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 180 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
2.17. PTS/PL253: WAVE PROPAGATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 01 03 00 Wave propagation 6
062 01 03 01 Structure of the ionosphere and its effect on radio waves
LO State that the ionosphere is the ionised component of the Earth’s upper
X atmosphere from approximately 60 to 400 km above the surface, which
is vertically structured in three regions or layers.
LO State that the layers of the ionosphere are named D, E and F layers, and their
X
depth varies with time.
LO State that electromagnetic waves refracted from the E and F layers of the
X
ionosphere are called sky waves.
LO Explain how the different layers of the ionosphere influence wave
X
propagation.
062 01 03 02 Ground waves
Define ‘ground or surface waves’: the electromagnetic waves travelling along the
LO X
surface of the Earth.
062 01 03 03 Space waves
Define ‘space waves’: the electromagnetic waves travelling through the air directly
LO X
from the transmitter to the receiver.
062 01 03 04 Propagation with the frequency bands
LO State that radio waves in VHF, UHF, SHF and EHF propagate as space waves.
LO State that radio waves in LF, MF and HF propagate as surface/ground waves and
sky waves.
062 01 03 05 Doppler principle
State that the Doppler effect is the phenomenon where the frequency of a wave will
LO X increase or decrease if there is relative motion between the transmitter and the
receiver.
062 01 03 06 Factors affecting propagation
LO Define ‘skip distance’: the distance between the transmitter and the point on the
X
surface of the Earth where the first sky wave return arrives.
LO State that skip zone/dead space is the distance between the limit of the surface
wave and the sky wave.
LO Describe ‘fading’: when a receiver picks up two signals with the same frequency, and
the signals will interfere with each other causing changes in the resultant signal
strength and polarisation.
LO State that radio waves in the VHF band and above are limited in range as they are not
reflected by the ionosphere and do not have a surface wave.
LO X Describe the physical phenomena ‘reflection’, ‘refraction’, ‘diffraction’,
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 181 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
‘absorption’ and ‘interference’.
LO State that multipath is when the signal arrives at the receiver via more than one
path (the signal being reflected from surfaces near the receiver).
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-Discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
7. Written Test
8. Group Project Presentations
9. Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
I. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
J. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
K. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
L. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 182 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
2.18. PTS/PL254: RADIO NAVIGATIONAL AIDS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 02 00 00 RADIO AIDS 14
062 02 01 00 Ground direction finding (DF)
062 02 01 01 Principles
LO X Describe the use of a ground DF.
LO Explain the limitation of range because of the path of the VHF signal.
062 02 01 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO Define the term ‘QDM’: the magnetic bearing to the station.
LO Define the term ‘QDR’: the magnetic bearing from the station.
LO Explain that by using more than one ground station, the position of an aircraft can be
determined and transmitted to the pilot.
062 02 01 03 Coverage and range
Use the formula:
LO 1.23 × √transmitter height in feet + 1.23 × √receiver height in feet
to calculate the range in NM.
062 02 01 04 Errors and accuracy
LO X Explain why synchronous transmissions will cause errors.
LO X Describe the effect of ‘multipath signals’.
LO Explain that VDF information is divided into the following classes according to ICAO
Annex 10:
Class A: accurate to a range within ± 2°;
Class B: accurate to a range within ± 5°;
Class C: accurate to a range within ± 10°;
Class D: accurate to less than Class C.
062 02 02 00 Non-directional radio beacon (NDB)/automatic direction finding (ADF)
062 02 02 01 Principles
LO X Define the acronym ‘NDB’: non-directional radio beacon.
LO X Define the acronym ‘ADF’: automatic direction-finding equipment.
LO X State that the NDB is the ground part of the system.
LO X State that the ADF is the airborne part of the system.
LO State that the NDB operates in the LF and MF frequency bands.
LO State that the frequency band assigned to aeronautical NDBs according to ICAO
Annex 10 is 190–1 750 kHz.
LO Define a ‘locator beacon’: an LF/MF NDB used as an aid to final approach usually with
a range of 10–25 NM.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 183 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
LO State that certain commercial radio stations transmit within the frequency band
X
of the NDB.
LO State that according to ICAO Annex 10, an NDB station has an automatic ground
X
monitoring system.
LO Describe the use of NDBs for navigation.
LO Describe the procedure to identify an NDB station.
LO X Interpret the term ‘cone of confusion’ in respect of an NDB.
LO X State that an NDB station emits a N0N/A1A or a N0N/A2A signal.
LO X State the function of the beat frequency oscillator (BFO).
LO State that in order to identify a N0N/A1A NDB, the BFO circuit of the receiver has
X
to be activated.
LO X State that on modern aircraft, the BFO is activated automatically.
062 02 02 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO Name the types of indicators commonly in use:
electronic display;
X radio magnetic indicator (RMI);
fixed-card ADF (radio compass);
moving-card ADF.
LO Interpret the indications given on RMI, fixed-card and moving-card ADF displays.
LO Given a display, interpret the relevant ADF information.
LO Calculate the true bearing from the compass heading and relative bearing.
LO Convert the compass bearing into magnetic bearing and true bearing.
LO Describe how to fly the following in-flight ADF procedures according to ICAO Doc
8168 Volume 1:
homing and tracking, and explain the influence of wind;
interceptions;
procedural turns;
holding patterns.
062 02 02 03 Coverage and range
LO X State that the power of the transmitter limits the range of an NDB.
LO Explain the relationship between power and range.
LO Describe the propagation path of NDB radio waves with
X
respect to the ionosphere and the Earth’s surface.
LO Explain that the interference between sky waves and
ground waves leads to ‘fading’.
LO Define that the accuracy the pilot has to fly the required bearing in order to be
considered established during approach, according to ICAO Doc 8168, has to be
within ± 5°.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 184 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
LO State that there is no warning indication of NDB failure.
062 02 02 04 Errors and accuracy
LO Explain ‘coastal refraction’: as a radio wave travelling over land crosses the coast,
X
the wave speeds up over water and the wave front bends.
LO Define ‘night/twilight effect’: the influence of sky waves and ground waves arriving
X at the ADF receiver with a difference of phase and polarisation which introduce
bearing errors.
LO State that interference from other NDB stations on the same frequency may occur at
night due to sky-wave contamination.
062 02 02 05 Factors affecting range and accuracy
LO Describe diffraction of radio waves in mountainous terrain (mountain effect).
LO State that static radiation energy from a cumulonimbus cloud may interfere with the
radio wave and influence the ADF bearing indication.
LO Explain that the bank angle of the aircraft causes a dip error.
VHF omnidirectional radio range (VOR): conventional VOR (CVOR) and Doppler
062 02 03 00
VOR (DVOR)
062 02 03 01 Principles
LO Explain the working principle of VOR using the following general terms:
reference phase;
X variable phase;
phase difference.
LO State that the frequency band allocated to VOR according to ICAO Annex 10 is VHF,
and the frequencies used are 108.0–117.975 MHz.
LO State that frequencies within the allocated VOR range 108.0–111.975 MHz, which
have an odd number in the first decimal place, are used by instrument landing
system (ILS).
LO State that the following types of VOR are in operation:
conventional VOR (CVOR): a first-generation VOR station emitting signals by means of
a rotating antenna;
Doppler VOR (DVOR): a second-generation VOR station emitting signals by means
of a combination of fixed antennas utilising the Doppler principle;
en-route VOR for use by IFR traffic;
terminal VOR (TVOR): a station with a shorter range used as part of the approach
and departure structure at major aerodromes;
test VOR (VOT): a VOR station emitting a signal to test VOR indicators in an aircraft.
LO State that automatic terminal information service (ATIS)
information is transmitted on VOR frequencies.
LO List the three main components of VOR airborne equipment:
X
the antenna;
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 185 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
the receiver;
the indicator.
LO Describe the identification of a VOR in terms of Morse- code letters and additional
plain text.
LO State that according to ICAO Annex 10, a VOR station has an automatic ground
X
monitoring system.
LO State that failure of the VOR station to stay within the required limits can cause the
removal of identification and navigation components from the carrier or radiation to
cease.
062 02 03 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO Read off the radial on an RMI.
LO Read off the angular displacement in relation to a preselected radial on a horizontal
situation indicator (HSI) or omnibearing indicator (OBI).
LO Explain the use of the TO/FROM indicator in order to determine aircraft position
relative to the VOR considering also the heading of the aircraft.
LO Interpret VOR information as displayed on HSI, CDI and RMI.
LO Describe the following in-flight VOR procedures according to ICAO Doc 8168 Volume
1:
tracking, and explain the influence of wind when tracking;
interceptions;
procedural turns;
holding patterns.
LO State that when converting a radial into a true bearing, the variation at the VOR
station has to be taken into account
062 02 03 03 Intentionally left blank
062 02 03 04 Errors and accuracy
LO Define that the accuracy the pilot has to fly the required bearing in order to be
considered established on a VOR track when flying approach procedures, according
to ICAO Doc 8168, has to be within the half-full scale deflection of the required track.
LO State that due to reflections from terrain, radials can be bent and lead to wrong or
fluctuating indications, which is called ‘scalloping’.
062 02 04 00 Distance-measuring equipment (DME)
062 02 04 01 Principles
LO State that DME operates in the UHF band.
LO State that the system comprises two basic components:
X the aircraft component: the interrogator;
the ground component: the transponder.
LO Describe the principle of distance measurement using DME in terms of a timed
transmission from the interrogator and reply from the transponder on different
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 186 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
frequencies.
LO Explain that the distance measured by DME is slant range.
LO Illustrate that a position line using DME is a circle with the station at its centre.
LO State that the pairing of VHF and UHF frequencies (VOR/DME) enables the selection
of two items of navigation information from one frequency setting.
LO Describe, in the case of co-location with VOR and ILS, the frequency pairing and
X
identification procedure.
LO State that military UHF tactical air navigation aid (TACAN) stations may be used for
DME information.
062 02 04 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO State that when identifying a DME station co-located with a VOR station, the
X identification signal with the higher- tone frequency is the DME which identifies itself
approximately every 40 seconds.
LO Calculate ground distance from given slant range and altitude.
LO Describe the use of DME to fly a DME arc in accordance with ICAO Doc 8168
Volume 1.
LO State that a DME system may have a ground speed (GS) and time to station read-
X
out combined with the DME read-out.
062 02 04 03 Coverage and range
LO Explain why a ground station can generally respond to a maximum of 100 aircraft.
LO Explain which aircraft will be denied a DME range first when more than 100
interrogations are being made.
062 02 04 04 Intentionally left blank
062 02 04 05 Factors affecting range and accuracy
Explain why the GS read-out from a DME can be less than the actual GS, and is zero
LO
when flying a DME arc.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
10. Written Test
11. Group Project Presentations
12. Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
M. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
N. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
O. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 187 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
1.9. PTS/PL251: BASIC RADIO NAVIGATION
P. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 188 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL281: HUMAN FACTORS (BASIC CONCEPTS)
2.19. PTS/PL281: HUMAN FACTORS (BASIC CONCEPTS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
040 00 00 00 HUMAN PERFORMANCE AND LIMITATIONS
14
040 01 00 00 HUMAN FACTORS: BASIC CONCEPTS
040 01 01 00 Human factors in aviation
040 01 01 01 Becoming a competent pilot
State that competence is based on knowledge, skills and attitudes of the individual
pilot, and list the ICAO eight core competencies:
application of procedures;
communication;
aircraft flight path management, automation;
LO aircraft flight path management, manual control;
leadership and teamwork;
problem-solving and decision-making;
situation awareness;
workload management.
040 01 02 00 Intentionally left blank
040 01 03 00 Flight safety concepts
040 01 03 01 Threat and error management (TEM) model and SHELL model
LO Explain the three components of the TEM model.
LO Explain and give examples of latent threats.
LO Explain and give examples of environmental threats.
LO Explain and give examples of organisational threats.
LO Explain and give a definition of ‘error’ according to the TEM model of ICAO
Doc 9683 (Part II, Chapter 2).
LO Give examples of different countermeasures which may be used in order to manage
threats, errors, and undesired aircraft states.
LO Explain and give examples of procedural error, communication errors, and
aircraft handling errors.
LO Explain and give examples of ‘undesired aircraft states’.
LO State the components of the SHELL model.
LO State the relevance of the SHELL model to the work in the cockpit.
040 01 04 00 Safety culture
040 01 04 01 Safety culture and safety management
LO Distinguish between ‘open cultures’ and ‘closed cultures’.
LO Illustrate how safety culture is reflected in national culture.
LO Discuss the established expression ‘safety first’ in a commercial entity.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 189 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL281: HUMAN FACTORS (BASIC CONCEPTS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain James Reason’s ‘Swiss Cheese Model’.
LO State the important factors that promote a good safety culture.
LO Distinguish between ‘just culture’ and ‘non-punitive culture’.
LO Name the five components which form safety culture (according to James Reason:
informed culture, reporting culture, learning culture, just culture, flexible culture).
LO Name the basic concepts of safety management system (SMS) (including hazard
identification and risk management) and its relationship with safety culture in order
to:
define how the organisation is set up to manage risks;
identify workplace risk and implement suitable controls;
implement effective communication across all levels of the organisation.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading and assignments
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
2. Project presentation
Reference Materials
A. Briefings: A Human Factors Course for Pilots, by Reni Amalberti
B. ICAO Doc. 9683: Human Factors Training Manual
C. Human Performance and Limitation: CAE-Oxford Aviation Academy
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 190 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
2.20. PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
040 02 00 00 Basics of aviation physiology and health maintenance
14
040 02 01 00 Basics of flight physiology
040 02 01 01 The atmosphere
State that the volume percentage of the gases in ambient air will remain constant
LO
at all altitudes at which conventional aircraft operate.
040 02 01 02 Respiratory and circulatory system
LO List the main components of the respiratory system and their function.
LO Identify the different volumes of air in the lungs and state the normal respiratory
rate.
LO Explain the role of carbon dioxide in the control and regulation of respiration.
LO Describe the basic processes of external respiration and internal respiration.
LO List the factors that determine pulse rate.
LO Name the major components of the circulatory system and describe their function.
LO State the values for a normal pulse rate and the average cardiac output (heart
rate × stroke volume) of an adult at rest.
LO Define ‘systolic’ and ‘diastolic’ blood pressure.
LO State the normal blood pressure ranges and units of measurement.
LO List the main constituents of blood and describe their functions.
LO Stress the function of haemoglobin in the circulatory system.
LO Define ‘anaemia’ and state its common causes.
LO Indicate the effect of increasing altitude on haemoglobin oxygen saturation.
LO Hypertension and hypotension
LO Define ‘hypertension’ and ‘hypotension’.
LO List the effects that high and low blood pressure will have on some normal
functions of the human body.
LO State that both hypotension and hypertension may disqualify a pilot from obtaining
medical clearance to fly.
LO List the factors which can lead to hypertension for an individual.
LO State the corrective actions that may be taken to reduce high blood pressure.
LO Stress that hypertension is the major factor of strokes in the general population.
LO Coronary artery disease
LO Differentiate between ‘angina’ and ‘heart attack’.
LO Explain the major risk factors for coronary disease.
LO State the role physical exercise plays in reducing the chances of developing
coronary disease.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 191 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Hypoxia
LO Define the two major forms of hypoxia (hypoxic and anaemic), and the common
causes of both.
LO State the symptoms of hypoxia.
LO State that healthy people are able to compensate for altitudes up to
approximately 10 000–12 000 ft.
LO Name the three physiological thresholds and allocate the corresponding altitudes
for each of them:
reaction threshold (7 000 ft);
disturbance threshold (10–12 000 ft); and
critical threshold (22 000 ft).
LO State the altitude at which short-term memory begins to be affected by hypoxia.
LO Define the terms ‘time of useful consciousness’ (TUC) and ‘effective performance
time’ (EPT).
LO State that TUC varies among individuals, but the approximate values for a
person seated (at rest) are:
20 000 ft 30 min
30 000 ft 1–2 min
35 000 ft 30–90 s
40 000 ft 15–20 s
LO List the factors that determine the severity of hypoxia.
LO State the equivalent altitudes when breathing ambient air and 100 % oxygen at
mean sea level (MSL) and at approximately 10 000, 30 000 and 40 000 ft.
Hyperventilation
LO Describe the role of carbon dioxide in hyperventilation.
LO Define the term ‘hyperventilation’.
LO List the factors that cause hyperventilation.
LO State that hyperventilation may be caused by psychological or
physiological reasons.
LO List the signs and symptoms of hyperventilation.
LO List the measures which may be taken to counteract hyperventilation: breath slowly,
close one opening of the nose, speak loudly, place a paper bag over nose and mouth.
LO Decompression sickness/illness
LO State the normal range of cabin pressure altitude in pressurised commercial air
transport aircraft and describe its protective function for aircrew and passengers.
LO List the vital actions the crew has to perform when cabin pressurisation is lost
(oxygen mask on, emergency descent, land as soon as possible, and no further flight
for the next minimum 24 hours). State that decompression sickness symptoms can
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 192 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
occur up to 24 hours later.
LO Identify the causes of decompression sickness in flight operation.
LO State how decompression sickness can be prevented.
LO List the symptoms of decompression sickness (bends, creeps, chokes, staggers).
LO Indicate how decompression sickness may be treated.
LO Define the hazards of diving and flying, and give the recommendations
associated with these activities.
LO Acceleration
LO Define ‘linear acceleration’ and ‘angular acceleration’.
LO Describe the effects of z-acceleration on the circulation and blood volume
distribution.
LO List magnitude, duration and onset as factors that determine the effects of
acceleration on the human body.
LO List the effects of positive acceleration with respect to type, sequence and
corresponding G-load.
LO Carbon monoxide
LO State how carbon monoxide is produced.
LO State how the presence of carbon monoxide in the blood affects the
distribution of oxygen.
LO List the signs and symptoms of carbon-monoxide poisoning.
LO Explain immediate countermeasures on suspicion of carbon-monoxide poisoning
and how poisoning can be treated later on the ground.
040 02 01 03 High-altitude environment
LO State how an increase in altitude may change the proportion of ozone in the
atmosphere and that aircraft can be equipped with special ozone removers.
LO Radiation
LO State the sources of radiation at high altitude.
LO List the effects of excessive exposure to radiation.
LO Humidity
LO List the factors that affect the relative humidity of both the atmosphere and cabin
air.
LO List the effects of low humidity on human body to be spurious thirst, dry eyes,
skin and mucous membranes, and indicate measures that can be taken:
drinking water, using eye drops and aqueous creams.
040 02 02 00 People and the environment: the sensory system
040 02 02 01 The different senses
LO List the different senses.
LO Central, peripheral and autonomic nervous system
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 193 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Define the term ‘sensory threshold’.
LO Define the term ‘sensitivity’, especially in the context of
vision.
LO Give examples of sensory adaptation.
LO Define the term ‘habituation’ and state its implication for flight safety.
040 02 02 03 Vision
Functional anatomy
LO Name the most important parts of the eye and the
LO pathway to the visual cortex.
LO State the basic functions of the parts of the eye.
LO Define ‘accommodation’.
LO Distinguish between the functions of the rod and cone cells.
LO Describe the distribution of rod and cone cells in the retina and explain their
relevance to vision.
LO The fovea (fovea centralis) and peripheral vision
LO Explain the terms ‘visual acuity’, ‘visual field’, ‘central vision’, ‘peripheral vision’ and
‘the fovea’, and explain their function in the process of vision.
LO List the factors that may degrade visual acuity and the
importance of ‘lookout’.
LO State the limitations of night vision and the different scanning techniques at both
night and day.
LO State the time necessary for the eye to adapt both to dark and bright light.
LO State the effect of hypoxia, smoking and altitude in excess of 5 000 ft on night
vision.
LO Explain the nature of colour blindness.
LO Binocular and monocular vision
LO Distinguish between monocular and binocular vision.
LO Explain the basis of depth perception and its relevance to flight performance.
LO List the possible monocular cues for depth perception.
LO State that for high-energy blue light and UV rays, sunglasses can prevent
damage to the retina.
LO Defective vision
LO Explain long-sightedness, short-sightedness and astigmatism.
LO List the causes of and the precautions that may be taken to reduce the
probability of vision loss due to:
presbyopia;
cataract;
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 194 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
glaucoma.
LO List the types of sunglasses that could cause perceptional problems in
flight.
LO List the measures that may be taken to protect oneself from flash blindness.
LO State the possible problems associated with contact lenses.
LO State the current rules/regulations governing the wearing of corrective spectacles
and contact lenses when operating as a pilot.
LO Explain the significance of the ‘blind spot’ on the retina in detecting other traffic in
flight.
040 02 02 04 Hearing
Descriptive and functional anatomy
LO State the basic parts and functions of the outer, the middle and the inner ear.
LO Differentiate between the functions of the vestibular apparatus and the cochlea
in the inner ear.
LO Hearing loss
LO Define the main causes of the following hearing defects/loss:
‘conductive deafness’;
‘noise-induced hearing loss’ (NIHL);
‘presbycusis’.
LO Summarise the effects of environmental noise on hearing.
LO State the decibel level of received noise that will cause NIHL.
LO Identify the potential occupational risks that may cause hearing loss.
LO List the main sources of hearing loss in the flying environment.
LO List the precautions that may be taken to reduce the probability of onset of
hearing loss.
040 02 02 05 Equilibrium
Functional anatomy
LO List the main elements of the vestibular apparatus.
LO State the functions of the vestibular apparatus on the ground and in flight.
LO Distinguish between the component parts of the vestibular apparatus in the
detection of linear and angular acceleration as well as on gravity.
LO Explain how the semicircular canals are stimulated.
LO Motion sickness
LO Describe air sickness and its accompanying symptoms.
LO List the causes of air sickness.
LO Describe the necessary actions to be taken to counteract the symptoms
of air sickness.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 195 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
040 02 02 06 Integration of sensory inputs
LO State the interaction between vision, equilibrium, proprioception and hearing to
obtain spatial orientation in flight.
LO Define the term ‘illusion’.
LO Give examples of visual illusions based on shape constancy, size constancy, aerial
perspective, atmospheric perspective, the absence of focal or ambient cues,
autokinesis, vectional false horizons, field myopia, and surface planes.
LO Relate these illusions to problems that may be experienced in flight and identify the
danger attached to them.
LO List approach and landing illusions for slope of the runway, black-hole approach, and
terrain around runway, and state the danger involved with
LO recommendations to avoid or counteract the problems with high or low approach
or flare at the wrong time.
LO State the problems associated with flickering lights (strobe lights, anti-collision lights,
propellers and rotors under certain light conditions, etc.).
LO Describe vestibular illusions caused by the angular accelerations (the Leans, Coriolis)
and linear accelerations (somatogravic, G-effect).
LO Relate the above-mentioned vestibular illusions to problems encountered in flight
and state the dangers involved.
LO State that the ‘seat-of-the-pants’ sense is completely unreliable when visual contact
with the ground is lost or when flying in instrument meteorological conditions (IMC)
or with a poor visual horizon.
LO Differentiate between vertigo, Coriolis effect, and spatial disorientation.
LO List the measures to prevent or overcome spatial disorientation.
040 02 03 00 Health and hygiene
040 02 03 01 Intentionally left blank
040 02 03 02 Body rhythm and sleep
LO Name some internal body rhythms and their relevance to sleep. Explain that the most
important of which is body temperature.
LO Explain the term ‘circadian rhythm’.
LO State the approximate duration of a ‘free-running’ rhythm.
LO Explain the significance of the ‘internal clock’ in regulating the normal
circadian rhythm.
LO State the effect of the circadian rhythm of body temperature on an individual’s
performance standard and on an individual’s sleep patterns.
LO List and describe the stages of a sleep cycle.
LO Differentiate between rapid eye movement (REM) and non-REM sleep.
LO Explain the function of sleep and describe the effects of insufficient sleep on
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 196 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
performance.
LO Explain the simple calculations for the sleep/wake credit/debit situation.
LO Explain how sleep debit can become cumulative.
LO State the time formula for the adjustment of body rhythms to the new local time scale
after crossing time zones.
LO State the problems caused by circadian disrhythmia (jet lag) with regard to an
individual’s performance and sleep.
LO Differentiate between the effects of westbound and eastbound travel.
LO Explain the interactive effects of circadian rhythm and vigilance on a pilot’s
performance during flight as the duty day elapses.
LO Describe the main effects of lack of sleep on an individual’s performance.
LO List the possible strategies to cope with jet lag.
040 02 03 03 Problem areas for pilots
Common minor ailments
LO State the role of the Eustachian tube in equalising pressure between the
middle ear and the environment.
LO State that the in-flight environment may increase the severity of symptoms which
may be minor while on the ground.
LO List the negative effects of suffering from colds or flu on flight operations
especially with regard to the middle ear, the sinuses, and the teeth.
LO State when a pilot should seek medical advice from an aeromedical examiner (AME)
or aeromedical centre (AeMC).
LO Describe the measures to prevent or clear problems due to pressure changes
during flight.
LO Entrapped gases and barotrauma
LO Define ‘barotrauma’.
LO Differentiate between otic, sinus, gastrointestinal and aerodontalgia (of the teeth)
barotraumas and explain avoidance strategies.
LO Explain why the effects of otic barotrauma can be worse in the descent.
LO Gastrointestinal upsets
LO State the effects of gastrointestinal upsets that may occur during flight.
LO List the precautions that should be observed to reduce the occurrence of
gastrointestinal upsets.
LO Indicate the major sources of gastrointestinal upsets.
LO Obesity
LO Define ‘obesity’.
LO State the following harmful effects obesity can cause:
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 197 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
possibility of developing coronary problems;
increased chances of developing diabetes;
reduced ability to withstand G-forces;
development of problems with the joints of the limbs;
general circulatory problems;
reduced ability to cope with hypoxia or decompression sickness;
sleep apnoea.
LO Describe the problems associated with Type 2 (mostly adult) diabetes:
risk factors;
insulin resistance;
complications (vascular, neurological) and the consequences for the medical licence;
pilots are not protected from Type 2 diabetes more than other people.
LO Describe the typical back problems (unspecific back pain, slipped disc) that pilots
have.
Explain also the ways of preventing and treating these problems:
good sitting posture;
lumbar support;
good physical condition;
in-flight exercise, if possible;
physiotherapy.
LO Food hygiene
LO Stress the importance of and methods to be adopted by aircrew, especially when
travelling abroad, to avoid contaminated food and liquids.
LO List the major contaminating sources in foodstuffs.
LO State the major constituents of a healthy diet.
LO State the measure to avoid hypoglycaemia.
LO State the importance of adequate hydration.
LO Tropical climates
LO List the problems associated with operating in tropical climates.
LO State the possible causes/sources of incapacitation in tropical countries with
reference to:
standards of hygiene;
quality of water supply;
insectborne diseases;
parasitic worms;
rabies or other diseases that may be spread through contact with animals;
sexually transmitted diseases.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 198 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO State the precautions to be taken to reduce the risks of developing problems in
tropical areas.
LO Infectious diseases
LO State the major infectious diseases that may severely incapacitate or kill
individuals.
LO State the precautions that must be taken to ensure that disease-carrying insects are
not transported between areas.
040 02 03 04 Intoxication
Tobacco
LO State the harmful effects of tobacco on:
the respiratory system;
the cardiovascular system;
the ability to resist hypoxia;
the ability to withstand G-forces;
night vision.
LO Caffeine
LO Indicate the level of caffeine dosage at which performance is degraded.
LO Besides coffee, indicate other beverages containing caffeine.
LO Alcohol
LO State the maximum acceptable limit of alcohol for flight crew according to the
applicable regulations.
LO State the effects of alcohol consumption on:
the ability to reason;
inhibitions and self-control;
vision;
the sense of balance and sensory illusions;
sleep patterns;
hypoxia.
LO State the effects alcohol may have if consumed together with other drugs.
LO List the signs and symptoms of alcoholism.
LO List the factors that may be associated with the development of alcoholism.
LO Define the ‘unit’ of alcohol and state the approximate elimination rate from the
blood.
LO State the maximum daily and weekly intake of units of alcohol which may be
consumed without causing damage to the organs and systems of the human body.
LO Discuss the actions that might be taken if a crew
member is suspected of being an alcoholic.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 199 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL282: BASICS OF FLIGHT PHYSIOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Prescription and non-prescription drugs and self- medication
LO State the dangers associated with the use of non- prescription drugs.
LO State the side effects of common non-prescription drugs used to treat colds, flu,
hay fever and other allergies, especially medicines containing antihistamine
preparations.
LO Interpret the rules relevant to using (prescription or non-prescription) drugs that
the pilot has not used before.
LO Interpret the general rule that ‘if a pilot is so unwell that they require any
medication, then they should consider themselves unfit to fly’.
LO Toxic materials
LO List those materials present in an aircraft which may, when uncontained, cause
severe health problems.
LO List those aircraft-component parts which if burnt may give off toxic fumes.
LO Describe a fume event and the possible incapacitating effects on
those exposed to it.
040 02 03 05 Incapacitation in flight
LO State that incapacitation is most dangerous when its onset is insidious.
LO List the major causes of in-flight incapacitation.
LO State the importance of crew to be able to recognise and promptly react upon
incapacitation of other crew members, should it occur in flight.
LO Explain methods and procedures to cope with incapacitation in flight.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-discussion
4. Self-reading and assignments
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
4. Project presentation
Reference Materials
D. Briefings: A Human Factors Course for Pilots, by Reni Amalberti
E. ICAO Doc. 9683: Human Factors Training Manual
F. Human Performance and Limitation: CAE-Oxford Aviation Academy
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 200 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL133: DIAMOND DA-42 NG AIRCRAFT TYPE TRAINING
2.21. PTS/PL133: DIAMOND DA-42 NG AIRCRAFT TYPE TRAINING
Lesson Code: TYP-02
Lesson Duration: 21 hrs.
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson, trainees will be able to:
List and describe the aeroplane and engine systems and their operation, under normal and emergency
conditions.
Describe the operation of a constant speed VP Propeller, its feathering system, and know the handling,
safety, and feathering limitations for the aeroplane type.
Describe the forces acting on a multi-engine aeroplane, and describe the effects of engine failure.
List the V speeds for the DA 42NG airplane, and be able to describe the principles and factors affecting
critical/ minimum control and safety speeds.
Perform, mass and balance calculations for the aeroplane type correctly
List the systems affected by loss of a single power unit, and explain the subsequent effect on aeroplane flight
performance.
Perform correctly, all weight and performance calculations relevant to the aeroplane type.
Introduction
Airframe
Flight Controls
Instrument Panel
Landing Gear
Seats And Safety Harnesses
Baggage Compartment
Canopy, Rear Door, And Cabin Interior
Power Plant
Engine, General
Operating Controls
Propeller
Engine Instruments
Fuel System
Cooling System
Turbo Charger System
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 201 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL133: DIAMOND DA-42 NG AIRCRAFT TYPE TRAINING
Oil Systems
Electrical System
General
Engine Control Unit / ECU
Warning, Caution And Advisory Messages
Pitot-Static System
Stall Warning System
Pitot-Static System
Stall Warning System
Garmin G1000 Integrated Avionics System
General
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Audio Panel
Attitude And Heading Reference System (AHRS)
Air Data Computer (ADC)
Avionics
Autopilot System
Automatic Flight Control System Annunciations And
Alerts
Learning-Teaching Methods
Lecture-discussion
Self-reading
Assessment Methods
Written Test
Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
Diamond DA-42NG Aeroplane Flying Manual
Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
Private Pilots Handbook
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 202 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL242 : AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS II
2.22. PTS/PL242 : AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS II
Lesson Code: LAN-02
Lesson Duration: 40 hrs.
Lesson Objectives:
At the end of this lesson trainees will be able to:
Use words and expressions to report emergency situations;
Use appropriate terminologies to respond to warnings;
Use correct expressions of cause and effect;
Make suggestions using appropriate words and expressions;
Use understandable pronunciation and words to suggest courses of actions; and,
Obligate, prohibit and permit using correct expressions
Use words accurate structure and vocabulary related to approach and landing;
Use expressions to report traffic on ground at ease;
Use words and expressions to report about animals on the loose;
Use appropriate expressions of preferences;
Explain new words; and,
Speak at length to resolve misunderstandings
Emergency Situations
Weather
microburst
Airport Disruptions
stormy approach
Health
medical Emergency
stress
Fire
fire risk
on-board fire
Engine failure
Decompression
Other non-routine emergencies and issues
Language function
warnings
Expressing cause and effect
making suggestions
Suggest courses of actions
obligation, prohibition, and permission
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 203 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL242 : AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS II
Approach and Landing
Bird strike
Animals on the loose
Traffic
Vectoring and ILS issues
Missed approach
Touch down
Taxi and post flight
Get delays
Medical equipment
Language functions
Expressing preferences
Explaining new words
Saying intensions
Resolving misunderstanding
Learning-Teaching Methods
Lecture-Discussion
Group work
Individual Reading Assignment
Video Analysis
CBT
Extensive Listening and Speaking Exercises
Speech Recognition & Voice Record Exercises
Vocabulary Exercises
Presentations
Assessment Methods
Written Test
Class participation
Group Project Presentations
Individual Assignment presentation
Reference Materials
Aviation English course book
AES for Pilots
ICAO Manual for Radio Telephony
ICAO Manual for the Implementation of ICAO Language Proficiency Ratings
Fatal Wards: Communication Clashes and Aircraft Crashes
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 204 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
2.23. PTS/PL291: Fundamentals of radio communication
Syllabus BK
Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Duration
Reference
090 00 00 00 COMMUNICATIONS 14
090 01 00 00 Introduction to Aviation Communication
090 01 01 00 Discuss the purpose of communications
090 01 01 01 Methods through which messages can be conveyed
LO Discuss the significance of communication in aviation
LO Discus how communication plays vital importance in safe
operation of aircraft.
LO Discuss some of the major aviation accidents that were
presumed to have happened due to miscommunication.
Explain that Radiotelephony (RTF) provides the means by
090 01 01 02 which pilots and ground personnel (ATC) communicate
with each other.
LO Statethe
Define thegiven
importance of using
terms and standard phraseology
definitions
Define acronyms and abbreviations and state when and
where such acronyms and abbreviations are to be used
LO Choosing Appropriate Radio Frequency
LO Describe the range of frequency of radio waves as in the
electromagnetic wave spectrum.
Describe radio frequency spectrum frequency ranges and
the corresponding bands
Describe the facilities/equipment operating within such
ranges
Discuss about VHF frequency separation and how the
frequency designators are used
LO General Radiotelephony Procedures.
LO Explain the phonetic alphabets
LO Explain that some of the abbreviations such as ILS, VOR,
GPS
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 205 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
Discuss the transmission of numbers, separately or in
090 02 00 00 hundreds and thousands related to the type of aeronautical
information to be displayed.
Display the slides and discuss the Morse code for the
090 02 01 00 numbers
Discuss the use of Morse code in aviation communication
Explain that aeronautical stations are identified by the
name of the location followed by a suffix, and the suffix
indicates the type of units or service provided.
List examples of different aeronautical stations with unit of
090 02 01 01
service and call sign suffix.
Explain that there are different ways of designating aircraft
call signs. Discuss the various ways of aircraft
identification.
LO Discuss when and how an aircraft can use its abbreviated
call sign
Discuss also the use of “ALL STATIONS” for broadcast
LO List the standard words and state its meaning.
LO Discuss the general RTF transmitting techniques
LO Discuss procedures for establishing communication.
Order of communication
Discuss when and how a request for a repetition of the
message shall be requested either in full or in part.
Discuss when and how the word “Correction is used.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Demonstrations
3. Listening and Speaking Exercises (Language Lab Self Exercises)
4. Role Plays
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 206 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
2. Simulated Practical ATC-Pilot Communication
Reference Materials
A. ICAODOC 9432:Manual of Radio Telephony
B. CAP 413:Radio Telephony Manual
C. ICAO- Annex 10 Part II: Aeronautical Telecommunications
D. ICAO- DOC 4444
E. Jeppesen: Communications: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 207 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
2.24. PTS/PL292: Departure Communication
Syllabus BK Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Duration
Reference
090 02 01 03 Departure Communication 11
LO Discuss the means of obtaining such information
Discuss the phraseologies used to obtain take-off data, and
use examples of such communication.
LO Discuss the purpose of requesting startup clearance.
Discuss on the information to be provided together with
the startup request
Discuss also expected responses from the ATC
State phraseologies used for start-up clearance both with
ATC and with ground crew. Use examples of such
communication
Describe pushback clearance requirements and associated
phraseologies.
State that if a pilot wishes to stop he can use the phrase
“STOP PUSH BACK”
Use examples of such communication both with ATC and
ground crew
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 208 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
LO Taxi instructions or clearances for both IFR and VFR flights
are similar. Discuss the phraseologies associated with Taxi
instructions.
Emphasize that pilots should get clear with the taxi
instructions and shall always read back. State that usually
the taxi clearance limit is runway holding point.
ATC clearance is not an instruction for takeoff or enter an
active runway.
Tell that the word “take-off” is used only when an aircraft
is cleared for take-off, or when canceling a take-off
clearance
ATC route clearances shall always be read back
Clearances to enter, land on, take-off, cross & back-track
on the runway in use shall always be read back
Discuss on the list of instructions/ information that shall
always be read back.
Discuss on phraseologies used to request and read back ATC
clearances and use examples.
LO X Describe conditional clearances and how it shall be issued.
Discuss the phraseologies used for conditional clearances
and give examples.
LO Display the slide and discuss the procedure and the need
of transfer of communication.
Discuss the phraseologies used for transfer of
communication and give examples.
LO Display the slides and discuss when such clearance shall
be used and stress the consequence of such clearance if
there is misunderstanding between pilots and controller.
Discuss the content of conditional clearance and give
example.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 209 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
LO Explain SID and give examples of such communication.
Discuss contents of essential aerodrome information, and
give examples of such communication
Discuss procedures for obtaining take-off clearance.
Emphasize that Take-off clearance is very critical and shall
always be read back and failure to do so may result in
catastrophic disaster.
Discuss on phraseologies associated with take-off
clearances.
Remind trainees to remember the Tenerife accident
Give examples of Take-off clearance communication
State reasons for cancelling take-off and associated
phraseology and give examples.
State that additional restrictive instructions may be issued
together with take-off clearance and give examples.
Discuss examples of VFR departure communication.
LO Discuss when and to whom departure messages are to be
transmitted for both IFR and VFR flights and give examples
of such communication.
Discuss on the meaning and purpose of TIBA, contents and
time of broadcast by giving examples for each
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
4. Simulated Practical ATC-Pilot Communication
Reference Materials
F. ICAODOC 9432:Manual of Radio Telephony
G. CAP 413:Radio Telephony Manual
H. ICAO- Annex 10 Part II: Aeronautical Telecommunications
I. ICAO- DOC 4444
J. Jeppesen: Communications: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 210 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 211 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
2.25. PTS/PL293: Enroute Communications
Syllabus BK
Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Duration
Reference
LO Enroute Communications 10
LO Discuss level instruction and associated phraseologies.
Give examples of various level instructions
Discuss TIBA broadcast during level change and show
examples
Describe VMC descent procedures and associated
phraseologies. show examples of position reports and let
trainees practice it.
Discuss communication procedures and associated
phraseologies for Flights joining/crossing/leaving airways
and show examples for each.
Discuss communication procedures and associated
phraseologies for Flights holding enroute and show
examples.
LO Discuss the use of Radar in identifying aircraft and
provision of vectoring services
Discuss phraseologies associated with radar service and
show examples.
Describe a SSR transponder and discuss phraseologies
associated transponder selection. Show the associated
examples on PPT and let trainees practice.
LO Discuss TCAS/ACAS maneuvers phraseologies and
associated terms. Show examples on the PPT.
LO Describe SELCAL and associated phraseology. Show
examples on the power.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-Discussion
6. Demonstrations
7. Listening and Speaking Exercises (Language Lab Self Exercises)
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 212 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
8. Role Plays
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
6. Simulated Practical ATC-Pilot Communication
Reference Materials
K. ICAODOC 9432:Manual of Radio Telephony
L. CAP 413:Radio Telephony Manual
M. ICAO- Annex 10 Part II: Aeronautical Telecommunications
N. ICAO- DOC 4444
O. Jeppesen: Communications: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 213 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
2.26. PTS/PL294: Arrival Communications
Syllabus BK
Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Duration
Reference
LO Arrival Communications 14
LO Describe RVR and show example of such communication
LO Describe wake turbulence and associated phraseology.
LO Describe wind shear and associated phraseology.
LO Describe runway surface conditions such as braking actions
and visual conditions
LO Discuss units responsible for descent clearance Describe
Top of Descent (TOD) and why such information is
important to ATC. State phraseology associated with Top
of Descent and show example. Discuss phraseologies
associated with descent clearance and show example
Emphasize the importance of attentiveness while copying
descent clearances
Show examples of TIBA during descent
LO Discuss the phraseologies associated with approach
communication and emphasize the importance of timely
Communication, attentiveness in copying approach
clearances and compliance to the instructions. Show
examples of different approach phraseologies.
Discuss missed approach phraseology and show examples
.
Describe visual approach and discuss the associated
phraseologies. Show example .
LO Display aerodrome traffic circuit diagrams
explain the designators of the aerodrome traffic circuit.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 214 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
LO Describe procedures regarding VFR arrival to a controlled
aerodrome and discuss the associated phraseologies. Show
example
LO Discuss that a pilot may request for direction finding
guidance from air traffic controllers, and discuss procedures
for such communication
LO Discuss phraseologies associated with landing clearance.
LO State that pilots should not expect taxi instructions until
the landing roll is completed except during extraordinary
conditions critical to safety.
Unless otherwise advised, pilots should remain on tower
frequency until the runway is vacated.
Discuss the associated phraseology and show examples
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-Discussion
10. Demonstrations
11. Listening and Speaking Exercises (Language Lab Self Exercises)
12. Role Plays
Assessment Methods
7. Written Test
8. Simulated Practical ATC-Pilot Communication
Reference Materials
P. ICAODOC 9432:Manual of Radio Telephony
Q. CAP 413:Radio Telephony Manual
R. ICAO- Annex 10 Part II: Aeronautical Telecommunications
S. ICAO- DOC 4444
T. Jeppesen: Communications: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 215 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
2.27. PTS/PL295: Abnormal and Emergency Communication
Syllabus BK
Syllabus details and associated Learning Objectives Duration
Reference
LO Abnormal and Emergency Communication 7
LO Provide a brief overview of the module outline.
LO Display the lesson title and inform trainees that performing
effective urgency communication is essential for efficient
handling of the situation.
Define urgency and discuss the associated phraseology and
show examples
Emphasize the importance of calmness while
communicating under urgency situations and responding
to ATC requests to get the required assistance.
Describe the general procedures for urgency communication
LO Define distress and discuss the associated phraseology
LO Emphasize the importance of calmness while
communicating under distress situations and responding to
ATC requests to get the necessary assistance.
State that distress message has priority over any other
messages.
Describe the elements of distress messages.
Discuss the imposition of silence and the need to
adherence to it.
Discuss the phraseology for termination of distress and
silence. Show example .
LO Definegeneral
Discuss emergency descentofand
procedures discuss
distress the contents of
communication
emergency descent message. State the phraseology for
emergency descent and show examples .
State the procedures for emergency descent communication.
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 216 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL291: COMMUNICATIONS
LO Discuss why radio communication breakdown may occur.
Discuss actions to be taken to diagnose breakdown of
radio communications
Discuss radio communication failure general procedures
and associated phraseology. Show example .
Discuss ICAO requirements for an aircraft with RCF.
LO
Assessment Methods
9. Written Test
10. Simulated Practical ATC-Pilot Communication
Reference Materials
U. ICAODOC 9432:Manual of Radio Telephony
V. CAP 413:Radio Telephony Manual
W. ICAO- Annex 10 Part II: Aeronautical Telecommunications
X. ICAO- DOC 4444
Y. Jeppesen: Communications: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase II 217 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Ground Training: Phase III
3. GROUND TRAINING PHASE III
The theoretical knowledge lessons covered in this phase are the continuation of those lessons
covered in Phase II. These lessons are more advanced ones and complete the requirements for
ATPL theoretical knowledge requirements. The Total time allotted for these lessons is 404 hours.
The following table summarizes the modules to be offered in phase-III
Corse Code Module Phase III
Corse Title Module Code Module Name Duration Duration
(Hrs.)
Air Traffic Services and Air
PTS/PL107 21
PTS/PL010 Air Law Traffic Management 35
PTS/PL108 Aviation Security 14
PTS/PL227 Speeds 3
PTS/PL228 Shock wave 3
Principles of
PTS/PL022 PTS/PL229 Critical Mach Number 3 14
Flight III
PTS/PL2210 High speed stall 2
PTS/PL2211 Much Buffet 3
PURPOSE OF MASS-AND-
PTS/PL261 3
BALANCE CONSIDERATIONS
PTS/PL262 LOADING 5
Mass and MASS-AND-BALANCE
PTS/PL263 10 35
PTS/PL026 Balance DETAILS OF AIRCRAFT
DETERMINATION OF CG
PTS/PL264 13
POSITION
PTS/PL265 CARGO HANDLING 4
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance 5
GENERAL Performance
PTS/PL272 19
legislation
CS-23/EU-OPS
PTS/PL273 PERFORMANCE CLASS B — 8
THEORY
CS-23/EU-OPS
PERFORMANCE CLASS B —
USE OF AEROPLANE
PTS/AP027 Aeroplane PTS/PL274 4
PERFORMANCE DATA FOR 49
Performance
SINGLE- AND MULTI-
ENGINE AEROPLANES
CS-25/EU-OPS
PTS/PL275 PERFORMANCE CLASS A — 8
THEORY
CS-25/EU-OPS
PERFORMANCE CLASS A —
PTS/PL276 5
USE OF AEROPLANE
PERFORMANCE DATA
Airframe,
PTS/PL011 Powerplant and PTS/PL1110 Turbine Engines 21 21
System
PTS/PL012 Instrumentation PTS/PL123 Advanced Flight Instruments 28 28
Flight Hazards and
PTS/PL018 Meteorology PTS/PL183 28 28
Meteorological Information
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 218 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Ground Training: Phase III
PTS/PL251 ILS 8
PTS/PL252 MLS 4
PTS/PL253 RADAR 10
Radio PTS/PL254 GNSSs 16
PTS/PL025 63
Navigation Performance Based
PTS/PL255 11
Navigation(PBN)
Aircraft Ops and
PTS/PL256 16
Procedure(PANS)
Human
PTS/PL028 performance PTS/PL283 Basic Aviation Psychology 28 28
and Limitations
PTS/PL301 Flight Planning for VFR 7
PTS/PL302 Flight Planning for IFR 12
Flight Planning
PTS/PL030 PTS/PL303 Fuel Planning 12 35
and Monitoring
Flight Monitoring and inflight re-
PTS/PL304 4
planning
PTS/PL311 General requirment 7
PTS/PL312 Long range flight 7
Operational PTS/PL313
PTS/PL031 Special operational procedure 7 28
Procedures
PTS/PL314 Security 4
PTS/PL315 Transport of dangerous good 3
PTS/PL024 Aviation English PTS/PL243 Aviation English for Pilots III 40 40
Phase III Total 404 404
Table 3-1: Summary of Phase III Ground Training subjects
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 219 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
3.1. PTS/PL107: AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES AND AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 07 00 00 AIR TRAFFIC SERVICES (ATS) AND AIR TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT (ATM) 21
010 07 01 00 ICAO Annex 11 — Air Traffic Services
010 07 01 01 Definitions
LO X Recall the definitions given in ICAO Annex 11.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO General
LO X State the objectives of ATS.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.2 Objectives of ATS
LO X Describe the three basic types of ATS.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.3 Divisions of the air traffic
services
LO X Describe the three basic types of ATC services.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.3 Divisions of the air traffic
services
LO State on which frequencies a pilot can expect ATC to contact them in case of an
emergency.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.25 In-flight contingencies
LO Describe the procedure for the transfer of an aircraft from one ATC unit to
another.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.6.1 Transfer of responsibility for
control
010 07 01 03 Airspace
LO Describe the purpose for establishing flight information regions (FIRs) including
upper flight information regions (UIRs).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2: 2.10; 2.11
LO Describe the various rules and services that apply to the various classes of
airspace.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.6 Classification of airspaces and
Annex 11, Appendix 4
LO Explain which airspace shall be included in an FIR or UIR.
LO State the designation for those portions of the airspace where flight
information service (FIS) and alerting service shall be provided.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.5 Designation of the portions of the
airspace and controlled aerodromes where air traffic services will be provided
LO State the designations for those portions of the airspace where ATC
services shall be provided.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.5 Designation of the portions of the
airspace and controlled aerodromes where air traffic services will be
provided
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 220 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Identify whether or not control areas (CTAs) and control zones (CTRs)
designated within an FIR shall form part of that FIR.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.5 Designation of the portions of the
airspace and controlled aerodromes where air traffic services will be
provided
LO State the lower limit of a CTA as far as ICAO Standards are concerned.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.3 Control areas
LO State whether or not the lower limit of a CTA has to be established
uniformly.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.3 Control areas
LO Explain why a UIR or upper CTA should be delineated to include the upper
airspace within the lateral limits of a number of lower FIRs or CTAs.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.4 Flight information regions or
control areas in the upper airspace
LO Describe in general the lateral limits of CTRs.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.5 Control zones
LO State the minimum extension (in NM) of the lateral limits of a CTR.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.5 Control zones
LO State the upper limits of a CTR located within the lateral limits of a CTA.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.11.5 Control zones
010 07 01 04 Air traffic control (ATC) services
LO Name all classes of airspace in which ATC services shall be provided.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.1 Application
LO Name the ATS units providing ATC services (area control service, approach
control service, aerodrome control service).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.2 Provision of air traffic control service
LO Describe which unit(s) may be assigned with the task to provide specified
services on the apron.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.2 Provision of air traffic control
service
LO State the purpose of clearances issued by an ATC unit.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.3 Operation of air traffic control
service
LO List the various (five possible) parts of an ATC clearance. Source: ICAO Annex
11, Chapter 3, 3.7.1 Contents of clearances
LO Explain why the movement of persons, vehicles and towed aircraft on the
manoeuvring area of an AD shall be controlled by the aerodrome control tower
(TWR) (as necessary). Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.8 Control of
persons and vehicles at aerodromes, 3.8.1
010 07 01 05 Flight information service (FIS)
LO X State for which aircraft FIS shall be provided.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.1 Application
LO X State whether or not FIS shall include the provision of pertinent significant
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 221 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
meteorological information (SIGMET) and air meteorological information report
(AIRMET) information.
LO Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.2 Scope of flight information
service
LO X State which information FIS shall include in addition to SIGMET and
AIRMET information.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.2 Scope of flight information
service
LO X Indicate which other information the FIS shall include in addition to the
special information given in Annex 11.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.2 Scope of flight information
service, 4.2.2 Note 2 and Attachment B
LO X State the meaning of the acronym ‘ATIS’ in plain language. Source: ICAO Annex
11, Chapter 4, 4.3.4 Voice-automatic terminal information service (Voice-
ATIS) broadcasts
LO List the basic information concerning automatic terminal information service
(ATIS) broadcasts (e.g. frequencies used, number of ADs included, updating,
identification, acknowledgment of receipt, language and channels, ALT- setting).
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.4 Voice-automatic terminal
information service (Voice-ATIS) broadcasts
LO State the content of an ATIS message.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.7 ATIS for arriving and departing
aircraft
LO State the reasons and circumstances when an ATIS message shall be updated.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 4, 4.3.6 Automatic terminal
information service (voice and/or data link)
010 07 01 06 Alerting service
LO State who provides the alerting service.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 2, 2.10 Establishment and designation
of the units providing air traffic services
LO State who is responsible for initiating the appropriate emergency phase.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
LO State the aircraft to which alerting service shall be provided.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
LO State which unit shall be notified by the responsible ATS unit immediately when
an aircraft is considered to be in a state of emergency.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
LO Name the three stages of emergency and describe the basic conditions for
each kind of emergency.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
LO X State the meaning of the expressions ‘INCERFA’, ‘ALERFA’ and ‘DETRESFA’.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
LO X State the information to be provided to those aircraft that operate in the
vicinity of an aircraft that is either in a state of emergency or unlawful
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 222 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
interference.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 5 Alerting service
LO Principles governing required navigation performance (RNP) and air
traffic service (ATS) route designators
LO State the meaning of the acronym ‘RNP’.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO State the factors that RNP is based on.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 1 Definitions(Navigation
specification)
LO Describe the reason for establishing a system of route designators and
navigation specifications.
X
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Appendix 1, 1. Designators for ATS routes and
navigation specifications
LO State whether or not a prescribed RNP type is considered an integral part of
the ATS route designator.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Appendix 1, 1. Designators for ATS routes and
navigation specifications
LO Explain the composition of an ATS route designator.
Source: ICAO Annex 11, Appendix 1, 2. Composition of designator (not
to the extent of memorising the codes in 2.2.1)
010 07 02 00 ICAO Doc 4444 — Air Traffic Management
010 07 02 01 Foreword (Scope and purpose)
State which ATS units provide clearances that do, and do not, include the
(01) prevention of collision with terrain.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Foreword, 2 Scope and purpose, 2.1
010 07 02 02 Definitions
LO Recall all definitions given in ICAO Doc 4444 except the following:
accepting unit/controller, AD taxi circuit, aeronautical fixed service (AFS),
aeronautical fixed station, air-taxiing, allocation, approach funnel, assignment,
X
data convention, data processing, discrete code, D-value, flight status, ground
effect, receiving unit/controller, sending unit/controller, transfer of control point,
transferring unit/controller, unmanned free balloon.
LO Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO ATS system capacity and air traffic flow management (ATFM)
LO X Explain when and where ATFM services shall be implemented.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 3, 3.2 Air traffic flow management,
3.2.1 General
010 07 02 04 General provisions for air traffic services (ATS)
LO X Describe who is responsible for the provision of flight information and alerting
services within an FIR, within controlled airspace and at controlled ADs.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.2 Responsibility for the provision of flight
information service and alerting service
LO ATC clearances
LO State which information the issue of an ATC clearance is based on.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 223 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5 Air traffic control clearances, 4.5.1
Scope and purpose
LO Describe what a PIC should do if an ATC clearance is not suitable.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5 Air traffic control clearances, 4.5.1
Scope and purpose
LO State who bears the responsibility for adhering to the applicable rules and
regulations whilst flying under the control of an ATC unit.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5 Air traffic control clearances, 4.5.1 Scope
and purpose
LO X State the two primary purposes of clearances issued by ATC units.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5 Air traffic control clearances, 4.5.1
Scope and purpose
LO State why clearances must be issued ‘early enough’ to aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5 Air traffic control clearances, 4.5.1
Scope and purpose
LO Explain what is meant by the expression ‘clearance limit’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7 Description of air traffic control
clearances, 4.5.7.1 Clearance limit
LO Explain the meaning of the phrases ‘cleared via flight planned route’,
‘cleared via (designation) departure’ and ‘cleared via (designation) arrival’ in
an ATC clearance.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7 Description of air traffic control
clearances, 4.5.7.2 Route of flight
LO List which items of an ATC clearance shall always be read back by the
flight crew.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7.5 Readback of clearances
010 07 02 06 Horizontal speed control instructions
LO Explain the reason for speed control by ATC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.6 Horizontal speed control
instructions, 4.6.1 General
LO X Define the maximum speed changes that ATC may impose.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.6.3 Descending and arriving aircraft
LO State within what distance from the THR the PIC should not expect any kind of
speed control.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.6.3 Descending and arriving aircraft
010 07 02 07 Change from IFR to VFR flight
LO Explain how the change from IFR to VFR can be initiated by the PIC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.8 Change from IFR to VFR flight
LO Describe the expected reaction of the appropriate ATC unit upon a request to
change from IFR to VFR.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.8 Change from IFR to VFR flight
LO Wake turbulence
LO State the wake-turbulence categories of aircraft.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 224 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.9.1 Wake turbulence categories of
aircraft
LO State the wake-turbulence separation minima.
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.8 Time-based wake turbulence longitudinal
separation minima;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.7.3.4 (table of distance-based wake turbulence
separation minima) and 8.7.3.4.1 (appropriate conditions for application)
LO Describe how a ‘heavy’ aircraft shall indicate this in the initial radiotelephony
contact with ATS.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.9.2 Indication of heavy wake turbulence
category
010 07 02 09 Altimeter-setting procedures
LO Define the following terms:
TRL;
transition layer; and
TA.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO Describe how the vertical position of an aircraft in the vicinity of an AD shall
be expressed at or below the TA, at or above the TRL, and while climbing or
descending through the transition layer.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.1 Expression of vertical position of
aircraft
LO Describe when the HGT of an aircraft using QFE during an NDB approach is
referred to the landing THR instead of the AD elevation.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.1 Expression of vertical position of
aircraft
LO State in which margin altimeter settings provided to aircraft shall be rounded
up or down.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.4 Provision of altimeter setting
information
LO Describe the expression ‘lowest usable FL’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.4 Provision of altimeter setting
information
LO Determine how the vertical position of an aircraft on an en- route flight is
expressed at or above the lowest usable FL and below the lowest usable FL.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.1 Expression of vertical position of
aircraft
LO State who establishes the TRL to be used in the vicinity of an AD.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.2 Determination of the transition
level
LO Decide how and when a flight crew member shall be informed about
the TRL.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.4 Provision of altimeter setting
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 225 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
information
LO State whether or not the pilot can request TRL to be included in the approach
clearance.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.10.4 Provision of altimeter setting
information
010 07 02 10 Position reporting
LO Describe when position reports shall be made by an aircraft flying on routes
defined by designated significant points. Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4,
4.11.1 Transmission of position reports, 4.11.1.1
LO List the six items that are normally included in a voice position report.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position reports
LO State the requirements for using a simplified position report with FL, next position
X (and time-over) and ensuing significant points omitted.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position reports
LO State the item of a position report which must be forwarded on to ATC with the
initial call after changing to a new frequency.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position reports
LO Indicate the item of a position report which may be omitted if secondary
surveillance radar (SSR) Mode C is used.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position reports
LO Explain in which circumstances the airspeed should be included in a
position report.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position reports
LO Explain the meaning of the acronym ‘ADS’.
LO Describe which expression shall precede the level figures in a position report
if the level is reported in relation to 1013.2 hPa (standard pressure).
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.5.7.5 Readback of clearances; ICAO Doc
4444, Chapter 4, 4.11.2 Contents of voice position reports
010 07 02 11 Reporting of operational and meteorological information
LO List the occasions when special air-reports shall be made.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 4, 4.12.3 Contents of special air-
reports 4.12.3.1 (a to k inclusive)
LO Separation methods and minima
LO Explain the general provisions for the separation of controlled air
traffic.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.2.1 General and 5.2.2
Degraded aircraft performance
LO X Name the different kinds of separation used in aviation.
Source:
LO ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5; ICAO Annex 11, Chapter 3, 3.5.2
LO State the difference between the type of separation provided within the various
classes of airspace and the various types of flight.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.2 Provisions for the separation of
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 226 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
controlled traffic
LO State who is responsible for the avoidance of collision with other aircraft
when operating in VMC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.9 Clearances to fly maintaining own
separation while in VMC
LO Describe how vertical separation is obtained.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.1 Vertical separation
application
LO State the required vertical separation minimum.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.2 Vertical separation
minimum
LO Describe how the cruising levels of aircraft flying to the same destination and in
the expected approach sequence are correlated with each other.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.3 Assignment of cruising levels for
controlled flights
LO Name the conditions that must be adhered to when two aircraft are cleared
to maintain a specified vertical separation between them during climb or descent.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.3.4 Vertical separation during climb or
descent
LO State the two main methods for horizontal separation.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5
LO Describe how lateral separation of aircraft at the same level may be obtained.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.1 Lateral separation, 5.4.1.1.2
LO Explain the term ‘geographical separation’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.1 Lateral separation
LO Describe track separation between aircraft using the same navigation aid or
method.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.1.2 Lateral separation
criteria and minima, 5.4.1.2.1.2
LO Describe the three basic means for the establishment of longitudinal
separation.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.2
LO State the minimum standard horizontal radar separation in NM.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5
LO Describe the method of the Mach number technique.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.4.2.4 Longitudinal separation minima with
mach number technique based on time
010 07 02 13 Separation in the vicinity of aerodromes (ADs)
LO Describe the expression ‘essential local traffic’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.2 Essential local traffic
LO State which possible decision the PIC may choose to take if they are asked
to accept take-off in a direction which is not ‘into the wind’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.3.3 Departure sequence
LO State the condition to enable ATC to initiate a visual approach for an
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 227 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
IFR flight.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3 Visual approach, 6.5.3.1
LO State whether or not separation shall be provided by ATC between an aircraft
executing a visual approach and other arriving or departing aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3 Visual approach, 6.5.3.4
LO State in which case, when the flight crew are not familiar with the instrument
approach procedure being carried out, only the final approach track has to be
given to them by ATC. Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.4 Instrument
approach
LO Describe which FL should be assigned to an aircraft first arriving over a
holding fix for landing.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.5 Holding
LO State which kinds of priority can be applied to aircraft for a landing.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.6 Approach sequence, 6.5.6.1
General
LO Describe the situation when a pilot of an aircraft in an approach sequence
indicates their intention to hold for weather improvements.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.6 Approach sequence, 6.5.6.1
General
LO Explain the term ‘expected approach time’ and the procedures for its
use.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.7 Expected approach time
LO State the reasons which could probably lead to the decision to use another take-
off or landing direction than the one into the wind.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.2 Selection of runway-in-use
LO State the possible consequences for a PIC if the ‘RWY-in-use’ is not considered
suitable for the operation involved.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7
010 07 02 14 Miscellaneous separation procedures
LO State the minimum separation between departing and arriving aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.7 Separation of departing
aircraft from arriving aircraft
LO State the non-radar wake-turbulence longitudinal separation minima.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5 and 6
LO Describe the consequences of a clearance to ‘maintain own separation’ while
in VMC.
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.8 Time-based wake turbulence
longitudinal separation minima, 5.8.1 ;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.5.3 Visual approach
LO Give a brief description of ‘essential traffic’ and ‘essential traffic
information’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 5, 5.10 Essential traffic information
LO Describe the circumstances under which a reduction in
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 228 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
separation minima may be allowed.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.1 Reduction in separation
minima in the vicinity of aerodromes
010 07 02 15 Arriving and departing aircraft
LO List the elements of information which shall be transmitted to an aircraft as
early as practicable if an approach for landing is intended.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.6 Information for arriving aircraft
LO List the elements of information to be transmitted to an aircraft at the
commencement of final approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.6 Information for arriving aircraft
LO List the elements of information to be transmitted to an aircraft during
final approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.6 Information for arriving aircraft
LO State the prerequisites for operating on parallel or near- parallel RWYs including
the different combinations of parallel arrivals or departures.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.7 Operations on parallel or near-parallel
runways
LO State the sequence of priority between aircraft landing (or in the final stage of an
approach to land) and aircraft intending to depart.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.8 Order of priority for arriving and
departing aircraft
LO State the significant changes in the meteorological conditions in the take-off or
climb-out area that shall be transmitted
LO without delay to a departing aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.4.1 Meteorological conditions
LO State the significant changes that shall be transmitted as early as practicably
possible to an arriving aircraft, particularly changes in the meteorological
conditions.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 6, 6.6 Information for arriving aircraft
010 07 02 16 Procedures for aerodrome (AD) control service
LO Name the operational failure or irregularity of AD equipment which shall be
reported by the TWR immediately.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.1.3 Failure or irregularity of
aids and equipment
LO Explain that, after a given period of time, the TWR shall report to the area
control centre (ACC) or flight information centre (FIC) if an aircraft does not land
as expected.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.1.2 Alerting service provided by
aerodrome control towers
LO Describe the procedures to be observed by the TWR whenever VFR
operations are suspended.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.13 Suspension of visual flight rules
operations
LO Explain the term ‘RWY-in-use’ and its selection.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 229 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.2 Selection of runway-in-use
LO List the information the TWR should give to an aircraft prior to:
taxiing for take-off;
take-off;
entering the traffic circuit.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.4.1.2 Aerodrome and meteorological
information
LO Explain that a report of surface wind direction given to a pilot by the TWR is
magnetic.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 11, 11.4.3.2 Messages containing
meteorological information
LO Explain the exact meaning of the expression ‘RWY vacated’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 7, 7.10.3.4
010 07 02 17 Radar services
LO State the basic identification procedures used with radar. Source: ICAO Doc
4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.2.3 SSR and/or MLAT identification procedures and
Chapter 8, 8.6.2.4 PSR identification procedures
LO Define the term ‘PSR’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO Describe the circumstances under which an aircraft provided with radar service
should be informed of its position.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.4 Position information
LO List the possible forms of position information passed on to the aircraft by
radar services.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.4 Position information
LO Describe the term ‘radar vectoring’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.5 Vectoring
LO State the aims of radar vectoring as shown in ICAO Doc 4444.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.5 Vectoring
LO Describe how radar vectoring shall be achieved.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.5 Vectoring
LO Describe the information which shall be given to an aircraft when radar vectoring
is terminated and the pilot is instructed to resume own navigation.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.6.5 Vectoring
LO Explain the procedures for the conduct of surveillance radar approaches
(SRAs).
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.9.7.1 Surveillance radar approach
LO Describe what kind of action (concerning the transponder) the pilot is expected
to perform in case of emergency if they have previously been directed by ATC to
operate the transponder on a specific code.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 8, 8.8.1 Emergencies
010 07 02 18 Air traffic advisory service
LO Describe the objective and basic principles of the air traffic advisory service.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 230 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 9, 9.1.4.1 Objective and basic principles
LO State to which aircraft air traffic advisory service may be provided.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 9, 9.1.4.1 Objective and basic principles
LO Explain the difference between advisory information and clearances,
stating which ATS units are responsible for their issue.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 9, 9.1.4.1.3
Procedures related to emergencies, communication (COM)
010 07 02 19
failure and contingencies
LO State the mode and code of SSR equipment a pilot might operate in a (general)
state of emergency or (specifically) in case the aircraft is subject to unlawful
interference.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1 Emergency procedures
LO State the special rights an aircraft in a state of emergency can expect from ATC.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1.1 General;
15.1.2 Priority; 15.1.3 Unlawful interference and aircraft bomb threat
LO Describe the expected action of aircraft after receiving a broadcast from ATS
concerning the emergency descent of an aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1.4 Emergency descent
LO State how it can be ascertained, in case of a failure of two- way COM, whether
the aircraft is able to receive transmissions from the ATS unit.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.3 Air-ground communications failure
LO State on which frequencies appropriate information, for an aircraft encountering
two-way COM failure, shall be sent by ATS.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.3.5
LO State what is meant by the expressions ‘strayed aircraft’ and‘unidentified
aircraft’.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.5.1 Strayed or unidentified
aircraft
LO Explain the reasons for fuel-dumping and state the minimum level.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.5.3 Fuel dumping
LO Explain the possible request of ATC to an aircraft to change its radio-
telephone (RTF) call sign.
010 07 02 20 Miscellaneous procedures
LO Explain the meaning of ‘AIRPROX’.
Source:
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 1 Definitions;
ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 16, 16.3 Air traffic incident report
LO Describe the task of an air traffic incident report.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 16, 16.3 Air traffic incident report
LO
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 231 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL107: Air Traffic Services and Air Traffic Management
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Reference Materials
A. ICAO ANNEX 11
B. ICAO Doc 4444: Air Traffic Management
C. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
D. ICAO DOC 9426:ATS Planning Manual
E. ICAO DOC 7030: Regional Supplementary Procedures
F. ICAO DOC 9574:Manual on Implementation of RVSM
G. ICAO DOC 9613: Performance Based Navigation Manual
H. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 232 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
3.2. PTS/PL227: SPEEDS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 02 00 00 HIGH-SPEED AERODYNAMICS 3
081 02 01 00 Speeds
081 02 01 01 Speed of sound
LO X Define ‘speed of sound’.
LO Explain the variation of the speed of sound with altitude.
LO Explain the influence of temperature on the speed of sound.
081 02 01 02 Mach number
LO Define ‘Mach number’ as a function of TAS and speed of sound.
LO Influence of temperature and altitude on Mach number
LO Explain the absence of change of Mach number with varying temperature at
constant flight level and calibrated airspeed.
LO Explain the relationship between Mach number, TAS and IAS during climb and
descent at constant Mach number and IAS, and explain variation of lift coefficient,
α, pitch and flight-path angle.
LO Explain:
risk of exceeding the maximum operation speed (VMO) when descending at
constant Mach number;
risk of exceeding the maximum operating Mach number (MMO) when climbing
at constant IAS;
risk of a low-speed stall at high altitude when climbing at a too low Mach number.
LO Compressibility
LO State that compressibility means that density can change along a streamline, and
that this occurs in the high subsonic, transonic, and supersonic flow.
LO X State that compressibility negatively affects the pressure gradient, leading to
an overall reduction of the CL.
LO X State that Mach number is a measure of compressibility.
LO Describe that compressibility increases low-speed stall speed and decreases αCRIT.
081 02 01 05 Subdivision of aerodynamic flow
LO X List the subdivision of aerodynamic flow:
subsonic flow;
transonic flow;
supersonic flow.
LO Describe the characteristics of the flow regimes listed above.
LO Explain why some transport aeroplanes normally cruise at Mach numbers above
the critical Mach number (MCRIT), but below the divergence Mach number (MDRAG
DIVERGENCE).
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 233 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
B. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
C. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
D. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 234 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
3.3. PTS/PL228: Shock waves
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 02 02 00 Shock waves 3
081 02 02 01 Definition of shock wave
LO X Define a ‘shock wave’.
081 02 02 02 Normal shock waves
LO Describe a normal shock wave with respect to changes in:
static temperature;
static and total pressure;
velocity;
local speed of sound;
Mach number;
density.
LO Describe a normal shock wave with respect to orientation relative to the wing
surface.
LO Explain the influence of increasing Mach number on a normal shock wave, at
positive lift, with respect to:
strength;
length;
position relative to the wing;
second shock wave at the lower surface.
LO Explain the influence of on shock-wave intensity and shock- wave location at
constant Mach number.
081 02 03 00 Effects of exceeding the critical Mach number (MCRIT)
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
F. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
G. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
H. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 235 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
3.4. PTS/PL229: Critical Mach number (MCRIT)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 02 03 01 Critical Mach number (MCRIT) 3
LO Define ‘MCRIT’.
Explain how a change in , aeroplane weight, manoeuvres, and centre-of-gravity
LO
(CG) position influences MCRIT.
081 02 03 02 Effect on lift
LO Describe the behaviour of CL versus Mach number at constant .
LO Explain the consequences of exceeding MCRIT with respect to CL and CLMAX.
LO Explain the change in stall indicated airspeed (IAS) with altitude.
LO Discuss the effect on αCRIT.
Explain the advantages of slightly exceeding MCRIT in aeroplanes with supercritical
aerofoils with respect to:
LO speed versus drag ratio;
specific range;
optimum altitude.
081 02 03 03 Effect on drag
LO Describe wave drag.
LO Describe the behaviour of CD versus Mach number at constant .
LO Explain the effect of Mach number on the CL–CD graph.
Describe the effects and hazards of exceeding MDRAG DIVERGENCE, namely:
drag rise;
LO instability;
Mach tuck;
shock stall.
LO State the relation between MCRIT and MDRAG DIVERGENCE.
081 02 03 04 Effect on pitching moment
LO Discuss the effect of Mach number on the CP location.
LO Describe the overall change in pitching moment from MCRIT to MDRAG DIVERGENCE and
explain the ‘tuck under’ or ‘Mach tuck’ effect.
LO X State the requirement for a Mach trim system to compensate for the effect of the
CP movement and ‘tuck under’ effect.
LO X Discuss the aerodynamic functioning of the Mach trim system.
LO Discuss the corrective measures if the Mach trim fails.
081 02 03 05 Effect on control effectiveness
LO Discuss the effects on the functioning of control surfaces.
081 02 04 00 Intentionally left blank
081 02 05 00 Means to influence critical Mach number (MCRIT)
081 02 05 01 Wing sweep
Explain the influence of the angle of sweep on:
LO MCRIT;
effective thickness/chord change or velocity component perpendicular to the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 236 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
quarter chord line.
LO Describe the influence of the angle of sweepback at subsonic speed on:
CLMAX;
efficiency of and requirement for high-lift devices;
pitch-up stall behaviour.
LO Discuss the effect of wing sweepback on drag.
081 02 05 02 Aerofoil shape
LO Explain the use of thin aerofoils with reduced camber.
LO Explain the main purpose of supercritical aerofoils.
LO X Identify the shape characteristics of a supercritical aerofoil shape.
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of supercritical aerofoils for wing
design.
081 02 05 03 Vortex generators
Explain the use of vortex generators as a means to avoid or restrict flow separation
LO
caused by the presence of a normal shock wave.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
J. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
K. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
L. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 237 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
3.5. PTS/PL2211: High speed stall
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 03 00 00 Stall, shock stall, and upset prevention and recovery 2
081 03 01 00 The stall
081 03 01 01 Flow separation at increasing α
LO X Define the ‘boundary layer’.
LO X Describe the thickness of a typical laminar and turbulent boundary layer.
LO Describe the properties, advantages and disadvantages of the laminar boundary
layer.
LO Describe the properties, advantages and disadvantages of the turbulent layer.
LO Define the ‘transition point’.
LO Explain why the laminar boundary layer separates easier than the turbulent layer
does.
LO Describe why the airflow over the aft part of a wing slows down as the α
increases.
LO Define the ‘separation point’ and describe its location as a
function of α.
LO X Define αCRIT.
LO Describe in straight and level flight the influence of increasing the α on:
the forward stagnation point;
the pressure distribution;
the CP location (straight and swept-back wing);
CL ;
CD and D (drag);
the pitching moment (straight and swept-back wing).
LO Explain what causes the possible natural buffet on the controls and on the
aeroplane in a pre-stall condition.
LO Describe the effectiveness of the flight controls in a pre-stall condition.
LO Describe and explain the normal post-stall behaviour of a straight-wing
aeroplane.
LO Describe the effect and dangers of using the controls close to the stall.
081 03 01 02 The stall speed
LO Explain VS0, VS1, VSR, and VS1G.
LO Solve VS1G from the lift formula given varying CL.
Describe and explain the influence of the following parameters on stall speed:
CG;
thrust component;
slipstream;
LO wing loading;
mass;
wing contamination;
angle of sweep;
altitude (for compressibility effects, see 081 02 03 02).
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 238 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
LO X Define the ‘load factor n’.
LO Explain why the load factor increases in a turn.
LO Explain why the load factor increases in a pull-up and decreases in a push-over
manoeuvre.
LO Describe and explain the influence of the ‘load factor n’ on stall speed.
LO X Explain the expression ‘accelerated stall’.
Remark: Sometimes, accelerated stall is also erroneously referred to as high-speed
stall. This latter expression will not be used for Subject 081.
LO Calculate the change of stall speed as a function of the load factor.
LO Calculate the increase of stall speed in a horizontal coordinated turn as a function of
bank angle.
LO Calculate the change of stall speed as a function of the gross mass.
081 03 01 03 The initial stall in spanwise direction
LO Explain the initial stall sequence on the following planforms:
elliptical;
rectangular;
moderate and high taper;
sweepback or delta.
LO Explain the purpose of washout.
LO Explain the effect of aileron deflection.
LO Explain the influence of fences, vortilons, saw teeth, vortex generators, and
strakes on engine nacelles.
081 03 01 04 Stall warning
LO X Explain why stall warning is necessary.
LO X Explain when aerodynamic and artificial stall warnings are used.
LO Explain why CS-23 and CS-25 require a margin to stall speed for take-off and landing
speeds.
LO X Describe:
buffet;
stall strip;
flapper switch (leading-edge stall-warning vane);
angle-of-attack vane;
angle-of-attack probe;
stick shaker.
LO Describe the recovery after:
stall warning;
stall;
stick-pusher actuation.
081 03 01 05 Special phenomena of stall
LO X Describe the basic stall requirements for commercial air transport (CAT)
aeroplanes.
LO Explain the difference between power-off and power-on stalls and recovery.
LO Describe stall and recovery in a climbing and descending turn.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 239 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
LO Describe the effect on stall and recovery characteristics of:
wing sweep (backward sweep);
T-tailed aeroplane.
LO Describe super stall or deep stall.
LO Describe the philosophy behind the stick-pusher system.
LO Describe the factors that can lead to the absence of stall warning and explain
the associated risks.
LO Describe the indications and explain the consequences of premature stabiliser stall
due to ice contamination (negative tail stall).
LO Describe when to expect in-flight icing.
LO Explain how the effect is changed when retracting/extending lift-augmentation
devices.
LO Describe how to recover from a stall after a configuration change caused by
in-flight icing.
LO Explain the effect of a contaminated wing on the stall speed and αCRIT.
LO Explain airframe contamination and the aerodynamic effects when parked and
during ground operations in winter conditions.
LO Explain de-icing/anti-icing holdover time and the likely hazards after it has expired.
LO Describe the aerodynamic effects of heavy tropical rain on stall speed and drag, and
the appropriate mitigation in such conditions.
081 03 01 06 The spin
LO Explain how to avoid spins.
LO List the factors that cause a spin to develop.
LO Describe an ‘incipient’, ‘developing’ and ‘developed’ spin, recognition and
recovery.
LO Describe the differences in spin attitude with forward and aft CG.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
M. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
N. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
O. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
P. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 240 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
3.6. PTS/PL2212: Shock stall
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
081 03 02 00 Shock stall 3
081 03 02 01 Definition and relationship with Mach buffet
Explain shock-induced separation, shock stall, and describe its relationship with
LO
Mach buffet.
X Define ‘shock stall’.
Remark: For theoretical knowledge examination purposes, the following description
LO
is used for shock stall: Shock stall occurs when the lift coefficient, as a function of
Mach number, reaches its maximum value (for a given α).
081 03 02 02 Buffet onset
Explain the concept of buffet margin, and describe the influence of the
following parameters on the concept of buffet margin:
α;
Mach number;
LO pressure altitude;
mass;
load factor;
angle of bank;
CG location.
LO Explain how the buffet onset boundary chart can be used to determine:
manoeuvrability;
buffet margin.
LO Describe the effect of exceeding the speed on buffet onset.
LO Explain ‘aerodynamic ceiling’ and ‘coffin corner’.
LO Explain the concept of the ‘1.3g’ buffet margin altitude.
LO Find (using an example graph):
buffet free range;
aerodynamic ceiling at a given mass;
load factor and bank angle at which buffet occurs at a given mass, Mach number,
and pressure altitude.
LO Explain why descent increases the buffet free range.
081 03 03 00 Situations in which buffet or stall could occur
081 03 03 01 Explain why buffet or stall occurs
LO Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following pilot- induced situations,
and the methods to mitigate them:
inappropriate take-off configuration, detailing the consequences of errors
associated with leading-edge devices;
steep turns;
go-around using take-off/go-around (TOGA) setting (underslung engines).
LO Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following environmental conditions at
low altitude, and how to mitigate them:
thunderstorms;
wind shear and microburst;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 241 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL223: High Speed Aerodynamics
turbulence;
wake turbulence;
icing conditions.
LO Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following environmental conditions at
high altitude, and how to mitigate them:
thunderstorms in the intertropical convergence zone(ITCZ);
jet streams;
clear-air turbulence.
LO Explain why buffet or stall could occur in the following situations, and how
to mitigate them:
inappropriate autopilot climb mode;
loss of, or unreliable, airspeed indication.
081 03 04 00 Recognition of stalled condition
081 03 04 01 Recognition and explanation of stalled condition
LO Explain why a stalled condition can occur at any airspeed, or attitude or altitude.
LO Explain that a stall may be recognised by continuous stall- warning activation
accompanied by at least one of the following:
buffet, that can be heavy;
lack of pitch authority;
uncommanded pitch down and uncommanded roll;
inability to arrest the descent rate.
LO Explain that ‘stall warning’ means a natural or synthetic indication provided when
approaching the stall that may include one or more of the following indications:
aerodynamic buffeting;
reduced roll stability and aileron effectiveness;
visual or aural clues and warnings;
reduced elevator (pitch) authority;
inability to maintain altitude or arrest a rate of descent;
stick-shaker activation.
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-discussion
10. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
Q. Jeppesen- Private Pilots Handbook
R. Aerodynamics for Naval Aviators by H.H Hurt Jr.
S. Mechanics of Flight by AC Kermode
T. AC-61-23C: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 242 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
3.7. PTS/PL261 PURPOSE OF MASS-AND-BALANCE CONSIDERATIONS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING
3
031 00 00 00 MASS AND BALANCE — AEROPLANES
031 01 00 00 PURPOSE OF MASS-AND-BALANCE CONSIDERATIONS
031 01 01 00 Mass limitations
031 01 01 01 Importance with regard to structural limitations
LO Describe the relationship between aircraft mass and structural stress.
X
Remark: See also Subject 021 01 01 00.
LO X Describe why mass must be limited to ensure adequate margins of strength.
Importance with regard to performance
031 01 01 02
Remark: See also Subjects 032/034 and 081/082.
LO Describe the relationship between aircraft mass and aircraft performance.
LO Describe why aircraft mass must be limited to ensure adequate aircraft
X
performance.
031 01 02 00 Centre-of-gravity (CG) limitations
Importance with regard to stability and controllability
031 01 02 01
Remark: See also Subjects 081/082.
LO Describe the relationship between CG position and stability/controllability of
X
the aircraft.
LO Describe the consequences if CG is in front of the forward limit.
LO Describe the consequences if CG is behind the aft limit.
Importance with regard to performance
031 01 02 02
Remark: See also Subjects 032/034 and 081/082.
LO X Describe the relationship between CG position and aircraft performance.
LO Describe the effects of CG position on performance parameters
(speeds, altitude, endurance and range).
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Pen and paper exercises
3. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen: Mass and Balance-JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
B. FAA AC-91-23A: Pilots Weight and Balance Handbook
C. FAA-H-8083-1: Aircraft Weight and Balance Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 243 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
3.8. PTS/PL262 LOADING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
031 02 00 00 LOADING 5
031 02 01 00 Terminology
031 02 01 01 Mass terms
Define the following mass terms:
basic empty mass;
dry operating mass;
operating mass;
LO X take-off mass;
landing mass;
ramp/taxi mass;
in-flight mass (gross mass);
zero fuel mass.
Load terms (including fuel terms)
031 02 01 02
Remark: See also Subject 033.
Define the following load terms:
payload/traffic load;
block fuel;
taxi fuel;
LO X
take-off fuel;
trip fuel;
reserve fuel (contingency, alternate, final reserve and additional fuel);
extra fuel.
LO Explain the relationship between the various load-and-mass components
listed in 031 02 01 01 and 031 02 01 02.
LO Calculate the mass of particular components from other given components.
Convert fuel mass, fuel volume and fuel density given in different units used in
LO
aviation.
031 02 02 00 Mass limits
031 02 02 01 Structural limitations
LO X Define the maximum zero fuel mass.
LO X Define the maximum ramp/taxi mass.
LO X Define the maximum take-off mass.
LO X Define the maximum in-flight (gross) mass with external load.
LO X Define the maximum landing mass.
031 02 02 02 Performance and regulated limitations
Describe the following performance and regulated mass limitations:
performance-limited take-off mass;
LO performance-limited landing mass;
regulated take-off mass;
regulated landing mass.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 244 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
031 02 02 03 Cargo compartment limitations
LO X Describe the maximum floor load (maximum load per unit of area).
LO Describe the maximum running load (maximum load per unit of fuselage
X
length).
031 02 03 00 Mass calculations
031 02 03 01 Maximum masses for take-off and landing
LO Calculate the maximum mass for take-off (regulated take-off mass) given mass-
and-load components and structural/ performance limits.
LO Calculate the maximum mass for landing (regulated landing mass) given mass-
and-load components and structural/ performance limits.
LO Calculate the allowed mass for take-off.
031 02 03 02 Allowed traffic load and fuel load
LO Calculate the maximum allowed traffic load and fuel load in order not to
exceed the given allowed take-off mass.
LO Calculate ‘under load’/‘over load’ given the allowed mass for take-off,
operating mass and actual traffic load.
031 02 03 03 Use of standard masses for passengers, baggage and crew
LO Extract the appropriate standard masses for passengers, baggage and crew from
X
relevant documents or operator requirements.
LO Calculate the traffic load by using standard masses.
031 03 00 00 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Learning-Teaching Methods
4. Lecture-Discussion
5. Pen and paper exercises
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
D. Jeppesen: Mass and Balance-JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
E. FAA AC-91-23A: Pilots Weight and Balance Handbook
F. FAA-H-8083-1: Aircraft Weight and Balance Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 245 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
3.9. PTS/PL263 MASS-AND-BALANCE DETAILS OF AIRCRAFT
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
031 04 00 00 MASS-AND-BALANCE DETAILS OF AIRCRAFT 10
031 04 01 00 Contents of mass-and-balance documentation
031 04 01 01 Datum, moment arm
LO X State where the datum and moment arms for aircraft can be found.
LO X Extract the appropriate data from given documents.
LO X Define ‘datum’ (reference point), ‘moment arm’ and ‘moment’.
031 04 01 02 CG position as distance from datum
LO X State where the CG position for an aircraft at basic empty mass can be found.
LO X State where the CG limits for an aircraft can be found.
LO Describe the different forms in presenting CG position as distance from
datum or other references.
LO Explain the meaning of centre of gravity (CG).
CG position as percentage of mean aerodynamic chord (% MAC) Remark:
031 04 01 03
Knowledge of the definition of MAC is covered under Subject 081 01 01 05.
LO Extract MAC information from aircraft documents.
LO Explain the principle of using % MAC for the description of the
CG position.
LO Calculate the CG position as % MAC.
031 04 01 04 Longitudinal CG limits
LO Extract the appropriate data from given sample documents.
031 04 01 05 Lateral CG limits
LO Extract the appropriate data from given sample documents.
031 04 01 06 Details of passenger and cargo compartments
Extract the appropriate data (e.g. seating schemes, compartment dimensions and
LO
limitations) from given sample documents.
031 04 01 07 Details of fuel system relevant to mass-and-balance considerations
LO Extract the appropriate data (e.g. fuel-tank capacities and fuel-
X
tank positions) from given sample documents.
LO Explain and calculate aircraft CG movement as flight progresses given location of
fuel tank (inner wing, outer wing, central, additional aft central, horizontal
stabiliser) and mass of fuel consumed from that tank and aeroplane’s previous CG.
LO Explain advantages and risks associated with fuel tanks in the aeroplane’s fin
or horizontal stabiliser.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Pen and paper exercises
9. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 246 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen: Mass and Balance-JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
H. FAA AC-91-23A: Pilots Weight and Balance Handbook
I. FAA-H-8083-1: Aircraft Weight and Balance Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 247 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
3.10. PTS/PL263 Determination of CG position
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
031 04 02 00 Determination of aircraft empty mass and CG position by weighing 13
031 04 02 01 Weighing of aircraft (general aspects)
LO Describe the general procedure and regulations relating to when an aircraft
should be reweighed or data recalculated.
Remark: See the applicable operational requirements.
LO X Extract and interpret entries from/in ‘mass (weight) report’ of an aircraft.
031 04 02 02 Calculation of mass and CG position of an aircraft using weighing data
Calculate the mass and CG position of an aircraft from given reaction forces
LO
on jacking points.
031 04 03 00 Extraction of basic empty mass (BEM) and CG data from aircraft documentation
031 04 03 01 BEM or dry operating mass (DOM)
(LO X Extract values for BEM or DOM from given documents.
031 04 03 02 CG position or moment at BEM/DOM
Extract values for CG position and moment at BEM or DOM from given
LO
documents.
031 04 03 03 Deviations from standard configuration
Extract values from given documents for deviation from standard configuration as
LO
a result of varying crew, optional equipment, optional fuel tanks, etc.
031 05 00 00 DETERMINATION OF CG POSITION
031 05 01 00 Methods
031 05 01 01 Arithmetic method
Calculate the CG position of an aircraft by using the formula: CG position = sum of
LO
moments / total mass.
031 05 01 02 Graphic method
Determine the CG position of an aircraft by using the loading graphs given in
LO
sample documents.
031 05 01 03 Index method
LO X Explain the principle of the index method.
LO Define the terms ‘index’ and ‘dry operating index’ (DOI), and calculate the
DOI given the relevant formula and data.
LO Explain the advantage(s) of the index method.
031 05 02 00 Load and trim sheet
031 05 02 01 General considerations
LO X Explain the principle and the purpose of load sheets.
LO X Explain the principle and the purpose of trim sheets.
Load sheet/balance schedule and CG envelope for light aeroplanes
031 05 02 02
and for helicopters
LO Add loading data and calculate masses in a sample load sheet/balance
schedule.
LO Calculate moments and CG positions.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 248 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
LO Check CG position at zero fuel mass and take-off mass to be within the CG
envelope including last-minute changes, if applicable.
031 05 02 03 Load sheet for large aeroplanes
LO Complete a sample load sheet to determine the ‘allowed mass for take-off’,
‘allowed traffic load’ and ‘under load’.
LO Explain the purpose of each load sheet section.
LO Explain that the purpose of boxed maximum figures in load sheet sections is to
cross-check the actual and limiting mass values.
LO Complete and cross-check a sample load sheet.
031 05 02 04 Trim sheet for large aeroplanes
LO Explain the purpose of the trim sheet and the methods to determine the
CG position.
LO Check if the zero fuel mass CG or index is within the limits.
LO Determine the fuel index by using the ‘fuel index correction table’ and
determine the CG position as % MAC.
LO Check that the take-off mass CG or index are within the limits.
LO Determine ‘stabiliser trim units’ for take-off.
LO Explain the difference between certified and operational CG limits.
LO Determine the zero fuel mass CG or index.
LO Explain the relationship between pitch and CG position and the operational
significance.
031 05 02 05 Intentionally left blank
031 05 02 06 Other methods to present load and trim information
Describe and extract information from other methods of presenting load and
balance information, e.g. aircraft communications addressing and reporting system
LO X
(ACARS), electronic flight bags (EFBs), and the ‘less paper in the cockpit’ (LPC)
software.
031 05 03 00 Repositioning of CG
031 05 03 01 Repositioning of CG by shifting the load
LO Calculate the mass to be moved over a given distance, or to/from given
compartments, to establish a defined CG position.
LO Calculate the distance to move a given mass to establish a defined CG
position.
LO Describe the methods to check that cargo has been loaded in correct position in
X relation to the loading manifest, including identifying hazard of cargo loaded in
reverse order (visual inspection of one or more unit load devices (ULDs).
LO Determine whether CG remains within limits if cargo has been loaded in
incorrect order or at incorrect location.
Repositioning of CG by additional load or ballast or by load or ballast
031 05 03 02
removal
LO Calculate the amount of additional load or ballast to be loaded at or removed from
a given position or compartment to establish a defined CG position.
LO Calculate the loading position or compartment for a given amount of additional
load or ballast to establish a defined CG position.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 249 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
Learning-Teaching Methods
10. Lecture-Discussion
11. Pen and paper exercises
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
J. Jeppesen: Mass and Balance-JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
K. FAA AC-91-23A: Pilots Weight and Balance Handbook
L. FAA-H-8083-1: Aircraft Weight and Balance Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 250 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL261 Mass and Balance
3.11. PTS/PL265 CARGO HANDLING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
031 06 00 00 CARGO HANDLING 4
031 06 01 00 Types of cargo
031 06 01 01 Types of cargo (general aspects)
Describe the typical types of cargo, e.g. containerised cargo, palletised cargo, bulk
LO
cargo, and the advantages of containerised and palletised cargo.
031 06 02 00 Floor-area load and running-load limitations
031 06 02 01 Floor-area load and running-load limitations in cargo compartments
LO Calculate the required floor-contact area for a given load to avoid exceeding the
maximum permissible floor load of a cargo compartment.
LO Calculate the maximum mass of a container with given floor- contact area to avoid
exceeding the maximum permissible floor load of a cargo compartment.
LO Calculate the linear load distribution of a container to avoid exceeding the
maximum permissible running load.
031 06 03 00 Securement of load
031 06 03 01 Securement of load (reasons and methods)
LO Explain the reasons to restrain or secure cargo and baggage.
LO Describe the basic methods to restrain or secure loads (unit load devices
secured by latches on roller tracks or to tie down points by straps; bulk cargo
restrained by restraining nets attached to attachment points and tie-down points).
Learning-Teaching Methods
13. Lecture-Discussion
14. Pen and paper exercises
15. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
M. Jeppesen: Mass and Balance-JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
N. FAA AC-91-23A: Pilots Weight and Balance Handbook
O. FAA-H-8083-1: Aircraft Weight and Balance Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 251 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
3.12. PTS/PL271 AEROPLANES General Performance legislation
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING
24
032 00 00 00 PERFORMANCE — AEROPLANES
032 01 00 00 GENERAL
032 01 01 00 Performance legislation
032 01 01 01 Applicability of airworthiness requirements of CS-23 and CS-25
LO Describe the application of certification specification (CSs) with regard to the
X
different kinds of aeroplanes.
LO Describe the general differences between aeroplanes certified according to CS-
X
23 (CS 23.1, CS 23.3) and CS-25 (CS 25.1, CS 25.20).
032 01 01 02 Operational regulations and safety
LO Describe the basic concept that the applicable operational requirements
X
differ depending on aeroplane performance.
LO Describe the performance classes for commercial air transport according to the
applicable operational requirements.
032 01 01 03 Performance and safety
LO State that aeroplane performance required for commercial air transport may limit the
X
weight of a dispatched aeroplane in order to achieve a sufficient level of safety.
LO Describe that the minimum level of safety required for commercial air transport is
ensured through the combination of airworthiness requirements and operational
X
limitations, i.e. the more stringent airworthiness requirements of CS-25 enable a wider
range of operating conditions for these aeroplanes.
032 01 01 04 Performance definitions and safety factors
LO X Describe measured performance and explain how it is determined.
LO Describe gross performance.
LO Describe net performance and safety factors.
LO Describe that the size of a safety factor depends on the likelihood of the event and the
X
range of the measured performance data.
LO Describe the relationship between net and gross take-off and landing distances,
and net and gross climb and descent gradients.
032 01 02 00 General performance theory
032 01 02 01 Intentionally left blank
032 01 02 02 Definitions and terms
LO X Define the terms ‘climb angle’ and ‘climb gradient’.
LO X Define the terms ‘flight-path angle’ and ‘flight-path gradient’.
LO X Define the terms ‘descent angle’ and ‘descent gradient’.
LO X Explain the difference between climb/descent angle and flight-path angle.
LO X Define ‘absolute ceiling’.
LO Describe ‘clearway’ and ‘stopway’ according to CS-Definitions.
LO Describe:
take-off run available (TORA);
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 252 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
take-off distance available (TODA);
accelerate-stop distance available (ASDA);
and determine each from given data or appropriate aerodrome charts.
LO Describe ‘screen height’ including its various values.
LO X Define the terms ‘range’ and ‘endurance’.
LO Define an aeroplane’s ‘specific range’ (SR) in terms of nautical air miles (NAM) per unit
of fuel, and ‘specific range over the ground’ (SRG) in terms of nautical ground miles (NGM)
per unit of fuel.
LO Define the power available and power required.
032 01 02 03 Variables influencing performance
LO Name the following factors that affect aeroplane performance: pressure altitude and
temperature, wind, aeroplane weight, aeroplane configuration, aeroplane anti-skid
X
status, aeroplane centre of gravity (CG), aerodrome runway surface, and aerodrome
runway slope.
LO Describe how, for different density altitudes, the thrust and power available vary
X
with speed for a propeller-driven aeroplane.
LO Describe how, for different density altitudes, the thrust and power available vary
X
with speed for a turbojet aeroplane.
LO Describe how, for different density altitudes, the drag and power required vary
with indicated airspeeds (IAS) and true airspeeds (TAS).
LO Describe how, for different aeroplane weights and configurations, the drag and
power required vary with IAS and TAS.
032 01 03 00 Level flight, range and endurance
032 01 03 01 Steady level flight
LO Explain how drag (thrust) and power required vary with speed in straight and level
X
flight.
LO X Explain the effect of excess thrust and power on speed in level flight.
LO Interpret the ‘thrust/power required’ and ‘thrust/power available’ curves in straight
and level flight.
LO Describe how the maximum achievable straight and level flight IAS and TAS vary with
altitude.
LO Describe situations in which a pilot may elect to fly for ‘maximum endurance’ or
‘maximum range’.
032 01 03 02 Range
Define a turbojet aeroplane’s specific fuel consumption (SFC) and describe how it
LO
affects fuel flow and specific range.
LO Define a propeller-driven aeroplane’s SFC and describe how it affects fuel flow and
specific range.
LO Explain the optimum speed for maximum SR for a turbojet aeroplane in
relation to the drag curve.
LO Explain the optimum speed to achieve maximum SR for a propeller-driven aeroplane
in relation to the power required and drag graphs.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 253 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the effect of aeroplane weight and CG position on fuel consumption,
range and the optimum speed for maximum SR.
LO State how a turbojet engine’s SFC varies with temperature and thrust setting.
LO Explain how SR for a turbojet aeroplane varies with altitude and under different
meteorological conditions.
LO Explain how SRG for a propeller-driven aeroplane varies with altitude and under
different meteorological conditions.
LO Explain the effect of weight on the optimum altitude for maximum range.
LO Describe the effect of wind on SRG and the optimum speed for SRG , when compared
to SR, and the optimum speed for SR.
032 01 03 03 Maximum endurance
LO Explain fuel flow in relation to TAS and thrust for a turbojet aeroplane.
LO State the speed for maximum endurance for a turbojet aeroplane.
LO Explain fuel flow in relation to TAS and thrust for a propeller-driven aeroplane.
LO State the speed for maximum endurance for a propeller-driven aeroplane and the
disadvantages of holding at this speed (e.g. high angle of attack (AoA) and lack of speed
stability).
LO Explain the effect of wind and altitude on endurance, and the maximum
endurance speed for a turbojet aeroplane.
LO Explain the effect of wind and altitude on endurance, and the maximum
endurance speed for a propeller-driven aeroplane.
LO Describe the benefits of managing your en-route airspeed to reduce or avoid holding
time, and the operational situations when it could be used (commanded by the pilot or
air traffic control (ATC), when delays at arrival airport occur).
032 01 04 00 Climbing
032 01 04 01 Climbing (climb performance)
LO Resolve the forces during a steady climb.
LO Define and explain the following terms:
critical engine;
speed for best angle of climb (VX);
speed for best rate of climb (VY).
LO Explain climb performance in relation to the thrust available and thrust required (angle
of climb), and power available and power required (rate of climb).
LO Explain the meaning and effect of ‘excess thrust’ and ‘excess power’ in a steady climb.
LO Interpret the ‘thrust/power required’ and ‘thrust/power available’ curves in a steady
climb.
LO State the difference between climb angle and gradient.
LO Explain the effect of weight on the climb angle and rate of climb, and the speed for best
angle and best rate of climb.
LO Explain the effects of pressure altitude and temperature, including an inversion on
climb performance (angle and rate of climb).
LO Explain the effect of configuration on climb performance (angle and rate of climb, and
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 254 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
VX and VY).
LO Describe the effect of engine failure on climb performance (angle and rate of climb,
and VX and VY).
LO Calculate the all-engine-out and one-engine-out climb gradient from given values of
engine thrust and aeroplane drag and weight.
032 01 05 00 Descending
032 01 05 01 Descending (descent performance)
LO Resolve the forces during steady descent and in the glide.
LO Explain descent performance in relation to thrust available and thrust required
(drag), and power available and power required.
LO Explain the meaning of ‘excess thrust required’ (excess drag) and ‘excess power
required’ in a steady descent.
LO Interpret the ‘thrust/power required’ and ‘thrust/power available’ curves in a steady
descent.
LO Explain the effect of mass, altitude, wind, speed and configuration on the glide
descent.
LO Explain the effect of mass, altitude, wind, speed and configuration on the powered
descent.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen: Performance-JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
B. Jeppesen; Private Pilot Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 255 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
3.13. PTS/PL272 CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — THEORY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
032 02 00 00 CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — THEORY 8
032 02 01 00 Airworthiness requirements
032 02 01 01 Airworthiness requirements and definitions
LO Define the following speeds:
stall speeds VS, VS0 and VS1;
X rotation speed VR;
speed at 50 ft above the take-off surface level;
reference landing speed VREF.
LO Describe the limitations on VR, on the speed at 50 ft above the take- off surface and on
VREF, and given the appropriate stall speed, estimate the values based on these
limitations for a single-engine, class B aeroplane.
LO Describe the limitations on VR, on the speed at 50 ft above the take- off surface and on
VREF, and given the appropriate stall speed, estimate the values based on these
limitations for a multi-engine, class B aeroplane.
LO Describe the European Union airworthiness requirements according to CS-23 relating to
X aeroplane performance (CS-23 SUBPART A— GENERAL, PERFORMANCE, CS 23.45 to CS
23.78 inclusive).
LO Define and identify the critical engine of a multi-engine propeller aeroplane.
LO Explain the effect of an engine failure on the power required, the total drag (thrust
required) and climb performance of a multi-engine aeroplane.
LO Explain the effect of engine failure on the minimum control speed of a multi-engine
aeroplane under given conditions (temperature and pressure altitude).
032 02 02 00 Intentionally left blank
032 02 03 00 Take-off and landing
032 02 03 01 Take-off and landing (definitions and effects)
LO Define the following distances and masses:
take-off distance;
landing distance;
X
ground-roll distance;
maximum allowed take-off mass;
maximum allowed landing mass.
LO Explain the effect of flap-setting on the take-off, landing and ground-roll distances.
LO Explain the effects of the following runway (RWY) variables on take-off distances:
RWY slope;
RWY surface conditions: dry, wet and contaminated;
RWY elevation.
LO For both fixed-pitch and constant-speed propeller aeroplanes, explain the effect
of airspeed on thrust during the take-off run.
LO Describe the effects of brake release before take-off power is set on the TOD and ASD.
LO Explain the effect of wind on take-off and landing distances, and determine the actual
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 256 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
headwind/tailwind component given the runway direction, wind speed and direction, by
use of wind component graphs, mathematical calculations, and rule of thumb.
LO Explain why an aeroplane has maximum crosswind limit(s) and determine the crosswind
component given the runway direction, wind speed and direction, by use of wind
component graphs, mathematical calculations, and rule of thumb.
LO Explain the percentage of accountability for headwind and tailwind components
during take-off and landing calculations.
LO Explain the effect of runway conditions on the landing distance.
LO Explain the effects of pressure altitude and temperature on the take-off distance, take-
off climb, landing distance and approach climb.
LO Describe the landing airborne distance and ground-roll distance and estimate the effect
on the landing distance when the aeroplane is too fast or too high at the screen.
LO Describe the net take-off flight path (NTOFP) for a multi-engine, class B aeroplane.
LO Describe the dimensions of the NTOFP accountability area (domain).
032 02 04 00 Climb, cruise and descent
032 02 04 01 Climb, cruise and descent (requirements and calculations)
LO Describe the climb and en-route requirements according to the applicable
operational requirements.
LO For a single-engine aeroplane, calculate the expected obstacle clearance (in visual
meteorological conditions (VMC)) given gross climb performance, obstacle height and
distance from reference zero.
LO For a single-engine aeroplane, calculate the net glide gradient and net glide distance,
given aeroplane altitude, terrain elevation, gross gradient or lift/drag ratio (L/D ratio),
and headwind or tailwind component.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-Discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
C. Jeppesen: Performance-JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
D. Jeppesen; Private Pilot Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 257 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
PTS/PL273 CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — USE OF AEROPLANE
PERFORMANCE DATA FOR SINGLE- AND MULTI-ENGINE AEROPLANES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
CS-23/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS B — USE OF AEROPLANE PERFORMANCE DATA 4
032 03 00 00
FOR SINGLE- AND MULTI-ENGINE AEROPLANES
032 03 01 00 Intentionally left blank
032 03 02 00 Intentionally left blank
032 03 03 00 Use of aeroplane performance data
032 03 03 01 Take-off
LO Determine the field-length-limited take-off mass and take-off speeds given defactored
distance, configuration, pressure altitude, temperature and headwind/tailwind
component.
LO Determine the accelerate-go distance and accelerate-stop distance data.
LO Determine the ground-roll distance and take-off distance from graphs.
LO Determine the all-engine-out and critical-engine-out take-off climb data.
LO Determine NTOFP for a MEP aeroplane of given mass and given airfield conditions,
and calculate the obstacle clearance based on the NTOFP.
LO Determine the minimum headwind or maximum tailwind component required for
take-off for a given mass and given airfield conditions.
LO Given take-off run available (TORA), TODA and ASDA, slope and surface conditions,
calculate the defactored distance to be used for commercial air transport using the
appropriate take-off graphs.
LO Calculate the minimum TORA or TODA for commercial air transport given the defactored
take-off distance or run, runway surface and slope.
032 03 03 02 Climb
LO Determine rate of climb.
LO Calculate obstacle clearance climb data.
LO Determine the still-air and flight-path gradients for given IAS, altitude, temperature,
aeroplane weight and, if relevant, wind component.
032 03 03 03 Intentionally left blank
032 03 03 04 Landing
LO Determine the field-length-limited landing mass and landing speeds given
defactored distance, configuration, pressure altitude, temperature and headwind
or tailwind component.
LO Determine landing climb data in the event of balked landing.
LO Determine landing distance and ground-roll distance for given flap position,
aeroplane weight and airfield data.
LO Calculate, given the landing distance available (LDA), slope and surface type and
condition, the defactored distance to be used for commercial air transport using the
appropriate landing graphs.
LO Calculate the minimum landing distance (LD) that must be available for commercial air
transport given the defactored landing distance, runway surface and slope.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 258 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-Discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen: Performance-JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
F. Jeppesen; Private Pilot Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 259 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
PTS/PL274 CS-25/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS A — THEORY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
032 04 00 00 CS-25/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS A — THEORY 8
032 04 01 00 Take-off
032 04 01 01 Take-off performance, definitions of and relationships between terms
LO X Explain the forces affecting the aeroplane during the take-off run.
LO X State the effects of thrust-to-weight ratio and flap-setting on ground roll.
LO Describe the European Union airworthiness requirements according to CS-25 relating to
large aeroplane performance (General and Take- off) (SUBPART B — FLIGHT
PERFORMANCE: CS 25.101 to CS 25.109 inclusive, and CS 25.113).
LO Describe the terms ‘aircraft classification number’ (ACN) and
‘pavement classification number’ (PCN), and the requirements and hazards of operating
on aerodrome surfaces with PCNs smaller than the ACNs.
LO Define and explain the following speeds in accordance with CS-25 or CS-Definitions:
reference stall speed (VSR);
reference stall speed in a specific configuration (VSR1);
1-g stall speed at which the aeroplane can develop a lift force (normal to the flight path)
equal to its weight (VS1g);
minimum control speed with critical engine inoperative (VMC);
minimum control speed on or near the ground (VMCG);
minimum control speed at take-off climb (VMCA);
engine failure speed (VEF);
take-off decision speed (V1);
rotation speed (VR);
minimum take-off safety speed (V2MIN);
minimum unstick speed (VMU);
lift-off speed (VLOF);
maximum brake energy speed (VMBE);
maximum tyre speed (VMax Tyre).
LO Explain the interdependence between the above-mentioned speeds where relevant.
LO Define the following distances in accordance with CS-25:
take-off run with all engines operating and one-engine- inoperative;
take-off distance with all engines operating and one-engine-inoperative;
accelerate-stop distance with all engines operating and one-engine-inoperative.
LO Explain how loss of TORA due to alignment is accounted for.
LO Explain the effect of the interdependency of relevant speeds in 032 04 01 01
(05) and the situations in which these interdependencies can cause speed
and performance restrictions.
032 04 01 02 Take-off distances
LO Explain the effects of the following runway (RWY) variables on take-off distances:
RWY slope;
RWY surface conditions: dry, wet and contaminated;
RWY elevation.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 260 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
LO Explain the effects of the following aeroplane variables on take-off distance:
aeroplane mass;
take-off configuration;
bleed-air configurations.
LO Explain the effects of the following meteorological variables on take-off distances:
wind;
temperature;
pressure altitude.
LO Explain the consequence of errors in rotation technique on take-off distance:
early and late rotation;
too high and too low rotation angle;
too high and too low rotation rate.
LO Compare the take-off distance for specified conditions and configuration for
all engines operating and one-engine-inoperative.
LO Explain the effect of using clearway on the field-length-limited take-off mass.
LO Explain the influence of aeroplane mass, air density and flap settings on V1 and V2MIN
and thereby on take-off distance.
LO Explain the effect of an error in V1 on the resulting one-engine-out take-off distance.
032 04 01 03 Accelerate-stop distance
LO Explain how the accelerate-stop distance is affected by given conditions and
configuration for all engines operating and one- engine-inoperative.
LO Explain the effect of using a stopway on the field-length-limited take-off mass.
LO Explain the effect of an error in V1 on the resulting accelerate-stop distance.
LO Explain the effect of runway slope or wind component on the accelerate-stop
distance.
LO Explain how the accelerate-stop distance is determined and discuss the deceleration
procedure.
LO Explain how the accelerate-stop distance is affected by the use of brakes, anti-skid,
reverse thrust, ground spoilers (lift dumpers) and by brake energy absorption limits,
delayed temperature rise and brake temperature indication.
LO Explain the hazards of rejecting a take-off from high ground speed or high take-off
X
mass, and how to manage these hazards.
032 04 01 04 Balanced field length concept
LO X Define the term ‘balanced field length’.
LO Describe the relationship between take-off distance and accelerate- stop distance, and
identify on a diagram the balanced field length and balanced V1.
LO X Describe the applicability of a balanced field length.
032 04 01 05 Unbalanced field length concept
LO X Describe the applicability of an unbalanced field length.
LO Explain the effect of additional stopway on the allowed take-off mass and appropriate
V1 when using an unbalanced field.
LO Explain the effect of additional clearway on the allowed take-off mass and
appropriate V1 when using an unbalanced field.
032 04 01 06 Field-length-limited take-off mass (FLLTOM)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 261 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
LO Explain the factors that affect the FLLTOM.
LO Explain the concept of a ‘range of V1’ and explain reasons for the placement of the
designated V1 towards the faster or slower end of the range.
032 04 01
Contaminated runways
07
LO Define a ‘contaminated runway’, ‘wet runway’, and a ‘dry runway’.
LO Describe the different types of contamination: wet or water patches, rime- or frost-
covered, dry snow, wet snow, slush, ice, compacted or rolled snow, frozen ruts or ridges.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2
LO Identify the difference between friction coefficient and estimated surface friction.
X
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2
LO State that when friction coefficient is 0.40 or higher, the expected braking action is
good.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2
LO Define the different types of hydroplaning.
Source: NASA TM-85652, Tire Friction Performance, pp. 6 to 9
LO Explain the difference between the two dynamic hydroplaning speeds and state which
of them is the most limiting for an aircraft operating on a wet runway.
Source: NASA TM-85652, Tire Friction Performance, p. 8
LO State that some wind limitations may apply in case of contaminated runways. Those
limitations are to be found in Part B of the Operations Manual — Limitations.
LO State that the procedures associated with take-off and landing on contaminated runways
are to be found in Part B of the Operations Manual — Normal procedures.
LO State that the performance associated with contaminated runways is to be found in
Part B of the Operations Manual — Performance.
032 04 01 08 Take-off climb
LO Explain the difference between the flat-rated and non-flat-rated part in performance
charts.
LO State the differences in climb-gradient requirements for two-, three- and four-engined
aeroplanes.
LO Explain the effects of aeroplane configuration and meteorological conditions on the
take-off climb.
LO Determine the climb-limited take-off mass.
032 04 01 09 Obstacle-limited take-off
LO Describe the operational regulations for obstacle clearance in the net take-off flight
path (NTOFP).
LO Define the actual and NTOFP with one-engine-inoperative in accordance with
CS-25.
LO Explain the effects of aeroplane configuration and meteorological conditions on the
obstacle-limited take-off mass.
LO Describe the segments of the actual take-off flight path.
LO Describe the changes in the configuration, power, thrust and speed in the NTOFP
climb segments.
LO State the standard maximum bank angle(s) in the first and second segment, and
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 262 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
determine the effect on the stall speed and implication on V2.
LO Explain the influence of airspeed selection, acceleration and turns on the climb
gradient.
LO Describe the European Union airworthiness requirements according to CS-25 relating to
aeroplane performance take-off climb and flight path (SUBPART B — FLIGHT
PERFORMANCE: CS 25.111, CS 25.115, CS 25.117 and CS 25.121)
Performance-limited take-off mass (PLTOM) and regulated take-off mass (RTOM)
032 04 01 10
tables
LO Define PLTOM and RTOM.
LO Describe the use of RTOM tables or similar to find PLTOM and how this can also be
X
done using an EFB.
LO Interpret what take-off limitation (field length, obstacle, climb, structural, etc.) is
restricting a particular RTOM as it is presented in RTOM tables or similar.
LO Describe why data from an EFB can differ from data derived from RTOM tables or
similar.
032 04 01 11 Take-off performance on wet and contaminated runways
LO Explain the differences between the take-off performance determination on a wet or
contaminated runway and on a dry runway.
LO Describe a wet V1 and explain the consequences of using a wet V1.
LO Describe the hazards, effects and management of operating from a contaminated
runway.
LO Describe displacement drag, impingement drag, and the methods to monitor
acceleration.
LO Explain the benefits and implications of using a derated take-off on a contaminated
runway.
032 04 01 12 Use of reduced (flexible or flex) and derated thrust
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of using reduced (flex) and derated
thrust.
LO Explain the difference between and principles behind reduced (flex) and derated
thrust.
LO Explain when reduced (flex) and derated thrust may and may not be used.
LO Explain the effect of using reduced (flex) and derated thrust on take- off performance
including take-off speeds, take-off distance, climb performance and obstacle clearance.
LO Explain the assumed temperature method for determining reduced (flex) thrust
performance.
032 04 01 13 Take-off performance using different take-off flap settings
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of using different take-off flap settings to
optimise the performance-limited take-off mass (PLTOM).
LO Determine the optimum flap position and PLTOM from given figures.
032 04 01 14 Take-off performance using increased V2 speeds (‘improved climb performance’)
LO Explain the advantages and disadvantages of the increased V2 procedure.
LO Explain under what circumstances this procedure can be used.
LO Explain the hazards of the fast V1 and VLOF speeds associated with the increased V2
procedure and how they can be managed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 263 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
032 04 01 15 Brake-energy and tyre-speed limit
LO Explain the effects on take-off performance of brake-energy and tyre-speed limits.
LO Explain under what conditions they are more likely to become limiting.
032 04 02 00 Climb
032 04 02 01 Climb techniques
LO Explain the effect of climbing at constant IAS on:
TAS;
Mach number;
climb gradient;
rate of climb.
LO Explain the effect of climbing at constant Mach number on:
TAS;
IAS;
climb gradient;
rate of climb.
LO Explain the correct sequence of climb speeds for turbojet transport aeroplanes.
LO Determine the effect on TAS when climbing in and above the troposphere at
constant Mach number.
032 04 02 02 Influence of variables on climb performance
LO Explain the effect on the operational speed limit when climbing at constant IAS and
at constant Mach number.
LO Explain the term ‘crossover altitude’ which occurs during the climb speed schedule
(IAS–Mach number).
032 04 03 00 Cruise
032 04 03 01 Intentionally left blank
032 04 03 02 Intentionally left blank
032 04 03 03 Intentionally left blank
032 04 03 04 Long-range cruise
LO Define the term ‘long-range cruise’.
LO Explain the differences between flying at long-range speed and maximum-range
speed with regard to fuel-flow and speed stability.
032 04 03 05 Intentionally left blank
032 04 03 06 Cruise altitudes
LO X Define the term ‘optimum cruise altitude’.
LO Explain the factors that affect optimum cruise altitude.
LO Explain the factors that can affect or limit the maximum operating cruise altitude.
LO Explain the purpose of, and operational reasons for, a step climb and when such a
climb would be initiated for optimum range.
LO Describe the buffet onset boundary (BOB) and determine the high-and low-speed
buffet (speed/Mach number only).
LO Analyse the influence of bank angle, mass and the 1.3g buffet margin on a step
climb.
LO Describe that the high-speed buffet can occur at speeds slower or faster than MMO.
LO Explain the reasons why a step climb may not be used (e.g. for short sectors,
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 264 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
advantageous winds, avoiding turbulence, and due to air traffic restrictions).
032 04 03 07 Cost index (CI)
LO Describe ‘cost index’.
LO Describe the reason for economical cruise speed.
LO Describe the effect of cost index on climb, cruise and descent speeds.
032 04 04 00 En-route one-engine-inoperative
032 04 04 01 Drift-down
LO Describe the determination of en-route flight-path data with one-engine-inoperative
in accordance with CS 25.123.
LO Describe the minimum obstacle-clearance height prescribed in the applicable
operational requirements.
LO Describe the optimum speed that the pilot should select during drift-down.
LO Explain the influence of deceleration on the drift-down profiles.
032 04 04 02 Influence of variables on the en-route one-engine-inoperative performance
LO Describe and explain the factors which affect the en-route net drift-down flight path.
032 04 05 00 Descent
032 04 05 01 Descent techniques
LO Explain the effect of descending at constant Mach number.
LO Explain the effect of descending at constant IAS.
LO Explain the correct sequence of descent speeds for turbojet transport
aeroplanes.
LO Determine the effect on TAS when descending in and above the troposphere at
constant Mach number.
LO Describe the following limiting speeds for descent:
maximum operating speed (V MO);
maximum Mach number (MMO).
LO Explain the effect of a descent at constant Mach number on the margin to low-
and high-speed buffet.
032 04 05 02 Energy management in the descent
LO Explain the advantages and principle of a continuous descent.
LO X Describe energy management in terms of chemical, potential and kinetic energy.
LO Describe the effect of increasing/decreasing headwind and tailwind on profile
management.
LO Describe the effect of the Mach number to IAS transition (speed conversion) on
profile management.
LO Describe situations during the descent and approach in which a pilot could find that an
aeroplane flies high or fast, and explain how the pilot can manage descent angle/excess
energy.
032 04 06 00 Approach and landing
032 04 06 01 Approach requirements
LO Describe the CS-25 requirements for the approach climb (CS 25.121).
LO Describe the CS-25 requirements for the landing climb.
LO Explain the effect of temperature and pressure altitude on approach and landing-climb
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 265 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
performance.
032 04 06 02 Landing-field-length and landing-speed requirements
LO Describe the landing distance determined according to CS 25.125 (‘demonstrated’
X
landing distance).
LO Describe the landing-field-length requirements for dry, wet and contaminated
runways and the applicable operational requirements.
LO X Define the ‘landing distance available’ (LDA).
LO Define and explain the following speeds in accordance with CS-25 or CS-Definitions:
reference stall speed in the landing configuration (VSR0);
reference landing speed (VREF);
minimum control speed, approach and landing (VMCL).
032 04 06 03 Influence of variables on landing performance
LO Explain the effect of runway slope, surface conditions and wind on the maximum
landing mass for a given landing distance available in accordance with the applicable
operational requirements.
LO Explain the effect on landing distance and maximum allowable landing mass of
the following devices affecting deceleration:
reverse;
anti-skid;
ground spoilers or lift dumpers;
autobrakes.
LO Explain the effect of temperature and pressure altitude on the maximum landing
mass for a given landing distance available.
LO Explain the effect of hydroplaning on landing distance required and methods of
managing landing on contaminated or wet runways.
032 04 06 04 Quick turnaround limit
LO Describe how break temperature limits the turnaround times.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-Discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
G. Jeppesen: Performance-JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
H. Jeppesen; Private Pilot Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 266 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
PTS/PL275 CS-25/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS A — USE OF
AEROPLANE PERFORMANCE DATA
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
CS-25/EU-OPS PERFORMANCE CLASS A — USE OF AEROPLANE PERFORMANCE 5
032 05 00 00
DATA
032 05 01 00 Take-off
032 05 01 01 Take-off (performance data)
LO Determine from given graphs the field-lenght-limited take-off mass (FLLTOM) and
describe situations in which this limitation could be most restrictive for take-off.
LO Determine from given graphs the climb-limited take-off mass and describe situations in
which this limitation could be most restrictive for take-off.
LO Determine from given graphs the obstacle-limited mass and describe situations in which
this limitation could be most restrictive for take-off.
LO Determine from given graphs the tyre-speed-limited take-off mass.
LO Determine from given graphs the maximum brake-energy-limited take-off mass.
LO Determine the take-off V speeds for the actual take-off mass.
LO Determine the maximum take-off mass using given RTOM tables.
LO Using RTOM tables, determine the take-off V speeds for the actual take-off weight
using appropriate corrections.
LO Determine the assumed/flex temperature and take-off V speeds using the RTOM
tables.
LO Calculate the break cooling time following a rejected take-off given appropriate data.
032 05 02 00 Drift-down and stabilising altitude
032 05 02 01 Drift-down and stabilising altitude (performance data)
LO Determine the one-engine-out net stabilising altitude (level-off altitude) from
given graphs/tables.
LO Determine the maximum mass at which the net stabilising altitude with one-engine-out
clears the highest relevant obstacle by the required clearance margin.
LO Determine, using drift-down graphs, fuel used, time and distance travelled in a
descent from a cruise flight level to a given altitude.
032 05 03 00 Landing
032 05 03 01 Landing (performance data)
LO Determine the field length required for landing with a given landing mass from the
aeroplane performance data sheets.
LO Determine the landing and approach climb-limited landing mass from the
aeroplane performance data sheets.
LO Calculate the maximum allowable landing mass as the lowest of:
approach-climb- and landing-climb-limited landing mass;
landing-field-length-limited landing mass;
structural-limited landing mass.
LO Determine the brake cooling time for different landing masses using the aeroplane
performance data sheets.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 267 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL271 Aeroplane Performance
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-Discussion
10. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen: Performance-JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
J. Jeppesen; Private Pilot Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 268 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
3.14. PTS/PL1110: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
021 11 00 00 TURBINE ENGINES 21
021 11 01 00 Basic principles
021 11 01 01 Basic generation of thrust and the thrust formula
LO Describe how thrust is produced by a basic gas turbine engine.
LO Describe the simple form of the thrust formula for a basic, straight jet engine
and perform simple calculations (including pressure thrust).
LO State that thrust can be considered to remain approximately
constant over the whole aeroplane subsonic speed range.
021 11 01 02 Design, types and components of turbine engines
LO List the main components of a basic gas turbine engine:
inlet;
compressor;
combustion chamber;
turbine;
outlet.
LO Describe the variation of static pressure, temperature and axial velocity in a gas
turbine engine under normal operating conditions and with the aid of a working
cycle diagram.
LO Describe the differences between absolute, circumferential
(tangential) and axial velocity.
LO List the different types of gas turbine engines:
straight jet;
turbofan;
turboprop.
LO State that a gas turbine engine can have one or more spools.
LO Describe how thrust is produced by turbojet and turbofan engines.
LO Describe how power is produced by turboprop engines.
LO Describe the term ‘equivalent horsepower’ (= thrust horsepower + shaft
horsepower).
LO Explain the principle of a free turbine or free-power turbine.
LO Define the term ‘bypass ratio’ and perform simple calculations to determine
it.
LO Define the terms ‘propulsive power’, ‘propulsive efficiency’,
‘thermal efficiency’ and ‘total efficiency’.
LO Describe the influence of compressor-pressure ratio on thermal efficiency.
LO Explain the variations of propulsive efficiency with forward speed for
turbojet, turbofan and turboprop engines.
LO Define the term ‘specific fuel consumption’ for turbojets and turboprops.
021 11 02 00 Main-engine components
021 11 02 01 Aeroplane: air intake
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 269 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO State the functions of the engine air inlet/air intake.
LO Describe the geometry of a subsonic (pitot-type) air inlet.
LO Explain the gas-parameter changes in a subsonic air inlet at different
flight speeds.
LO Describe the reasons for, and the dangers of, the following
operational problems concerning the engine air inlet:
airflow separation;
inlet icing;
inlet damage;
foreign object damage (FOD);
heavy in-flight turbulence.
021 11 02 02 Compressor and diffuser
LO State the purpose of the compressor.
LO Describe the working principle of a centrifugal and an axial flow
compressor.
LO Name the following main components of a single stage and describe
their function for a centrifugal compressor:
impeller;
diffuser.
LO Name the following main components of a single stage and describe
their function for an axial compressor:
rotor vanes;
stator vanes.
LO Describe the gas-parameter changes in a compressor stage.
LO Define the term ‘pressure ratio’ and state a typical value for one stage of a
centrifugal and an axial flow compressor and for the complete compressor.
LO State the advantages and disadvantages of increasing the number of stages
in a centrifugal compressor.
LO Explain the difference in sensitivity for FOD of a centrifugal
compressor compared with an axial flow type.
LO Explain the convergent air annulus through an axial flow compressor.
LO Describe the reason for twisting the compressor blades.
LO State the tasks of inlet guide vanes (IGVs).
LO State the reason for the clicking noise whilst the compressor slowly rotates on
the ground.
LO State the advantages of increasing the number of spools.
LO Explain the implications of tip losses and describe the design features
to minimise the problem.
LO Explain the problems of blade bending and flapping and describe the design
features to minimise the problem.
LO Explain the following terms:
compressor stall;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 270 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
engine surge.
LO State the conditions that are possible causes of stall and surge.
LO Describe the indications of stall and surge.
LO Describe the design features used to minimise the occurrence of stall and
surge.
LO Describe a compressor map (surge envelope) with rpm lines, stall limit,
steady state line and acceleration line.
LO Describe the function of the diffuser.
021 11 02 03 Combustion chamber
LO Define the purpose of the combustion chamber.
LO List the requirements for combustion.
LO Describe the working principle of a combustion chamber.
LO Explain the reason for reducing the airflow axial velocity at the
combustion chamber inlet (snout).
LO State the function of the swirl vanes (swirler).
LO State the function of the drain valves.
LO Define the terms ‘primary airflow’ and ‘secondary airflow’, and explain
their purpose.
LO Explain the following two mixture ratios:
primary airflow to fuel;
total airflow (within the combustion chamber) to fuel.
LO Describe the gas-parameter changes in the combustion chamber.
LO State a typical maximum value of the outlet temperature of the
combustion chamber.
LO Describe the following types of combustion chambers and state the
differences between them:
can type;
can-annular, cannular or turbo-annular;
annular;
reverse-flow annular.
021 11 02 04 Turbine
LO Explain the purpose of a turbine in different types of gas turbine engines.
LO Describe the principles of operation of impulse, reaction and impulse-
reaction axial flow turbines.
LO Name the main components of a turbine stage and their function.
LO Describe the working principle of a turbine.
LO Describe the gas-parameter changes in a turbine stage.
LO Describe the function and the working principle of active clearance control.
LO Describe the implications of tip losses and the means to minimise them.
LO Explain why the available engine thrust is limited by the turbine inlet
temperature.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 271 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the divergent gas-flow annulus through an axial-flow turbine.
LO Explain the high mechanical thermal stress in the turbine blades and
wheels/discs.
021 11 02 05 Aeroplane: exhaust
LO Name the following main components of the exhaust unit and their
function:
jet pipe;
propelling nozzle;
exhaust cone.
LO Describe the working principle of the exhaust unit.
LO Describe the gas-parameter changes in the exhaust unit.
LO Define the term ‘choked exhaust nozzle’ (not applicable to
turboprops).
LO Explain how jet exhaust noise can be reduced.
021 11 03 00 Additional components and systems
021 11 03 01 Engine fuel system
LO Name the main components of the engine fuel system and state their
function:
filters;
low-pressure (LP) pump;
high-pressure (HP) pump;
fuel manifold;
fuel nozzles;
HP fuel cock;
fuel control; or
hydromechanical unit.
LO Name the two types of engine-driven high-pressure pumps, such as:
LO gear-type;
swash plate-type.
LO State the tasks of the fuel control unit.
LO List the possible input parameters to a fuel control unit to achieve a given
thrust/power setting.
021 11 03 02 Engine control system
LO State the tasks of the engine control system.
LO List the following different types of engine control systems:
hydromechanical;
hydromechanical with a limited authority electronic supervisor;
single-channel FADEC with hydromechanical backup;
dual-channel FADEC with no backup or any other combination.
LO Describe a FADEC as a full-authority dual-channel system including functions
such as an electronic engine control unit, wiring, sensors, variable vanes, active
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 272 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
clearance control, bleed configuration, electrical signalling of thrust lever
angle (TLA) (see also AMC to CS-E-50), and an EGT protection function and
engine overspeed.
LO Explain how redundancy is achieved by using more than one channel in
a FADEC system.
LO State the consequences of a FADEC single input data failure.
LO State that all input and output data is checked by both channels in a FADEC
system.
LO State that a FADEC system uses its own sensors and that, in some
LO cases, also data from aircraft systems is used.
LO State that a FADEC must have its own source of electrical power.
021 11 03 03 Engine lubrication
LO State the tasks of an engine lubrication system.
LO Name the following main components of a lubrication system and state their
function:
oil tank and centrifugal breather;
oil pumps (pressure and scavenge pumps);
oil filters (including the bypass);
oil sumps;
chip detectors;
coolers.
LO Explain that each spool is fitted with at least one ball bearing and two or
more roller bearings.
LO Explain the use of compressor air in oil-sealing systems (e.g. labyrinth
seals).
021 11 03 04 Engine auxiliary gearbox
LO State the tasks of the auxiliary gearbox.
LO Describe how the gearbox is driven and lubricated.
021 11 03 05 Engine ignition
LO State the task of the ignition system.
LO Name the following main components of the ignition system and state their
function:
power sources;
igniters.
LO State why jet turbine engines are equipped with two electrically
independent ignition systems.
LO Explain the different modes of operation of the ignition system.
021 11 03 06 Engine starter
LO Name the main components of the starting system and state their function.
LO Explain the principle of a turbine engine start.
LO Describe the following two types of starters:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 273 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
electric;
pneumatic.
LO Describe a typical start sequence (on ground/in flight) for a turbofan.
LO Define ‘self-sustaining rpm’.
021 11 03 07 Reverse thrust
LO Name the following main components of a reverse-thrust system and state
their function:
reverse-thrust select lever;
power source (pneumatic or hydraulic);
actuators;
doors;
annunciations.
LO Explain the principle of a reverse-thrust system.
LO Identify the advantages and disadvantages of using reverse thrust.
LO Describe and explain the following different types of thrust- reverser
systems:
hot-stream reverser;
clamshell or bucket-door system;
cold-stream reverser (only turbofan engines);
blocker doors;
cascade vanes.
LO Explain the implications of reversing the cold stream (fan reverser) only on a
high bypass ratio engine.
LO Describe the protection features against inadvertent thrust- reverse
deployment in flight as present on most transport aeroplanes.
LO Describe the controls and indications provided for the thrust-reverser
system.
021 11 04 00 Engine operation and monitoring
021 11 04 01 General
LO Explain the following aeroplane engine ratings:
take-off;
go-around;
maximum continuous thrust/power;
maximum climb thrust/power.
LO Explain spool-up time.
LO Explain the reason for the difference between ground and approach
flight idle values (rpm).
LO State the parameters that can be used for setting and monitoring the
thrust/power.
LO Describe the terms ‘alpha range’, ‘beta range’ and ‘reverse thrust’
as applied to a turboprop power lever.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 274 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the dangers of inadvertent beta-range selection in flight for a
turboprop.
LO Explain the purpose of engine trending.
LO Explain how the exhaust gas temperature is used to monitor turbine
stress.
LO Describe the effect of engine acceleration and deceleration on the EGT.
LO Describe the possible effects on engine components when EGT limits are
exceeded.
LO Explain why engine-limit exceedances must be reported.
LO Explain the limitations on the use of the thrust-reverser system at low
forward speed.
LO Explain the term ‘engine seizure’.
LO State the possible causes of engine seizure and explain their
preventative measures.
LO Describe the potential consequences of a leak in the following two
designs of fuel and oil heat exchanger:
oil pressure higher than fuel pressure with oil leaking into the fuel system,
potentially affecting the combustion and running of the engine;
fuel pressure higher than oil pressure with fuel leaking into the oil system,
potentially increasing the risk of a fire due to fuel entering warm parts of the
engine that should be free from fuel.
LO Explain oil-filter clogging (blockage) and the implications for the lubrication
system.
LO Give examples of monitoring instruments of an engine.
LO Describe how to identify and assess engine damage based on
instrument indications.
021 11 04 02 Starting malfunctions
LO Describe the indications and the possible causes of the following aeroplane
starting malfunctions:
false (dry or wet) start;
tailpipe fire (torching);
hot start;
abortive (hung) start;
no N1 rotation;
no FADEC indications.
freewheel failure;
no FADEC indications.
021 11 04 03 Relight envelope
LO Explain the relight envelope.
021 11 05 00 Performance aspects
021 11 05 01 Thrust, performance aspects, and limitations
LO Describe the variation of thrust and specific fuel consumption with altitude at
constant TAS.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 275 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL113: TURBINE ENGINES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the variation of thrust and specific fuel consumption with
TAS at constant altitude.
LO Explain the term ‘flat-rated engine’ by describing the change of take-off thrust,
turbine inlet temperature and engine rpm with outside air temperature
(OAT).
LO Define the term ‘engine pressure ratio’ (EPR).
LO Explain the use of reduced (flexible) and derated thrust for take- off, and
explain the advantages and disadvantages when compared with a full-
rated take-off.
LO Describe the effects of use of bleed air on rpm, EGT, thrust, and specific
fuel consumption.
021 11 06 00 Auxiliary power unit (APU)
021 11 06 01 Design, operation, functions, operational limitations
LO State that an APU is a gas turbine engine and list its tasks.
LO State the difference between the two types of APU inlets.
LO Define ‘maximum operating and maximum starting altitude’.
LO Name the typical APU control and monitoring instruments.
LO Describe the APU’s automatic shutdown protection.
Learning-Teaching Methods
11. Lecture-Discussion
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
6. Written Test
Reference Materials
K. Jeppesen: Performance-JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
L. Jeppesen; Private Pilot Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 276 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
3.15. PTS/PL123: ADVANCED FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 09 00 00 AUTOTHRUST — AUTOMATIC THRUST CONTROL SYSTEM 28
022 09 01 00 Autothrust system
022 09 01 01 Purpose, operation, overcompensation, speed control
LO Describe the purpose of the autothrust system and explain how the FMAs will
be the only indication on active autothrust modes.
LO Explain the operation of an autothrust system with regard to the
following modes:
take-off/go-around (TOGA);
climb or maximum continuous thrust (MCT), N1 or EPR targeted (THR CLB, THR
MCT, N1, THR HOLD, EPR);
speed (SPEED, MCP SPD);
idle thrust (THR IDLE, RETARD/ARM);
landing (RETARD, THR IDLE).
LO Describe the two main variants of autothrust systems:
mode selections available on the FCU/MCP and thrust levers move with
autothrust commands;
mode selections made using the thrust levers which remain static during
autothrust operation.
LO Explain how flight in turbulence/wind shear giving fluctuating airspeed
indications may lead to the autothrust overcompensating in an oscillating
manner and that manual thrust may be required to settle the airspeed.
Airspeed indications/trend vectors may give an indication of appropriate
thrust adjustments but any reaction should not be too aggressive.
LO Explain the threats associated with the use of autothrust resulting in the
pilot losing the sense of energy awareness (e.g. speed, thrust).
LO Explain the relationship between autopilot pitch modes and autothrust modes,
and how the autopilot and autothrust will interact upon selecting modes for
one of the systems.
LO Explain the principles of speed control and how speed can be controlled:
by varying the engine thrust;
by varying the aircraft pitch.
LO Explain the potential implications on speed control when the autothrust
controls speed and the autopilot pitch channel has a fixed pitch target for the
following mode combinations:
MCP SPD/SPEED and ALT HOLD/ALT;
MCP SPD/SPEED and VSP (climb);
MCP SPD/SPEED and VSP (descent).
LO Explain the potential implications on speed control when the autothrust has
a fixed thrust target and the autopilot pitch channel controls speed for the
following mode combinations:
N1/THR CLB and LVL CHG/OP CLB;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 277 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
ARM/THR IDLE and LVL CHG/OP DES.
022 10 00 00 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
022 10 01 00 Voice communication, data-link transmission
022 10 01 01 Definitions and transmission modes
LO Describe the purpose of a data-link transmission system.
LO Compare voice communication versus data-link transmission systems.
LO Describe the communication links that are used in aircraft:
high-frequency (HF) communications;
very high-frequency (VHF) communications;
satellite communications (SATCOM).
LO Consider the properties of the communication links with regard to:
signal quality;
range/area coverage;
range;
line-of-sight limitations;
quality of the signal received;
interference due to ionospheric conditions;
data transmission speed.
LO Define and explain the following terms in relation to aircraft data-link
communications:
message/data uplink;
message/data downlink.
022 10 01 02 Systems: architecture, design and operation
LO Describe the purpose of the ACARS network.
LO Describe the systems using the ACARS network through the air traffic service
unit (ATSU) suite:
LO aeronautical/airline operational control (AOC);
air traffic control (ATC).
LO Explain the purpose of the following parts of the on -board equipment:
ATSU communications computer;
control display unit (CDU)/multifunction control display unit (MCDU);
data communication display unit (DCDU);
ATC message visual annunciator;
printer.
LO Give examples of airline operations communications (AOC) data-link
messages such as:
out of the gate, off the ground, on the ground, into the gate (OOOI);
load sheet;
passenger information (connecting flights);
weather reports (METAR, TAF);
maintenance reports (engine exceedances);
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 278 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
aircraft technical data;
free-text messages.
LO Give examples of ATC data-link messages such as:
departure clearance;
oceanic clearance;
digital ATIS (D-ATIS);
controller–pilot data-link communications (CPDLC).
022 10 02 00 Future air navigation systems (FANSs)
022 10 02 01 Versions, applications, CPDLC messages, ADS contracts
LO Describe the existence of the ICAO communication, navigation, surveillance/air
traffic management (CNS/ATM) concept.
LO Explain the two versions of FANSs:
FANS A/FANS 1 using the ACARS network;
FANS B/FANS 2 using the ACARS network and the aeronautical
telecommunication network (ATN).
LO List and explain the following FANS A/FANS 1 applications:
ATS facility notification (AFN);
automatic dependent surveillance (ADS);
CPDLC.
LO Compare the ADS application with the secondary surveillance radar function,
and the CPDLC application with VHF communication systems.
LO State that an ATCU can use the ADS application only, or the CPDLC application
only, or both of them (not including AFN).
LO Describe the AFN process for logging on with an ATCU
and typical data that will be included in the message.
LO Describe typical types of CPDLC messages and the typical pilot work
practices when requesting or accepting a CPDLC clearance.
LO List and describe the different types of ADS contracts that are controlled by
the ATCU and beyond the control of the pilot:
periodic: data sent at set time intervals;
on demand: data sent when requested;
on event: data sent when an event occurs (e.g. heading change, climb
initiated, etc.);
emergency mode.
LO Describe the purpose of the ADS emergency mode contract and highlight the
difference to the ATCU controlled contracts.
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (FMS)/
022 11 00 00
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT AND GUIDANCE SYSTEM (FMGS)
022 11 01 00 Design
022 11 01 01 Purpose, architecture, failures, functions
LO Explain the purpose of an FMS.
LO Describe a typical dual FMS architecture including the following
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 279 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
components:
flight management computer (FMC);
CDU/MCDU;
cross-talk bus.
LO Describe the following failures of a dual FMS architecture and explain the
potential implications to the pilots:
failure of one FMC;
failure of one CDU/MCDU;
failure of the cross-talk bus.
LO Describe how the FMS integrates with other systems and gathers data in
order to provide outputs depending on its level of complexity.
LO Explain how the FMS may provide the following functions:
navigation;
lateral and vertical flight planning;
performance parameters.
022 11 02 00 FMC databases
022 11 02 01 Navigation database
LO Explain the purpose of, and describe typical content of , the navigation
database.
LO Describe the 28-day aeronautical information regulation and control (AIRAC)
update cycle of the navigation database and explain the reason for having two
navigation databases (one active, one standby) and the implication this has to
the pilot.
LO Explain the purpose of typical user-defined waypoints such as:
latitude/longitude coordinates;
place/bearing/distance (PBD);
place/bearing place/bearing (PBX);
place/distance (PD).
LO Explain that the pilot cannot change or overwrite any of the data in the
navigation database and that any user- defined waypoints, routes and inputted
data will be erased when a different database is activated.
LO Explain the threats and implications to the pilot of changing the database by
error either on the ground or while flying.
022 11 02 02 Aircraft performance database
LO Explain the purpose of, and describe the typical content of, the aircraft
performance database.
LO Explain the importance of verifying that the aircraft performance database is
based on the correct data, such as engine type and aircraft variant.
LO Explain that the contents of the aircraft performance database cannot be
modified by the pilot.
LO Explain the purpose of performance factor and how it influences the
calculations.
LO Explain the purpose of cost index (CI) and how it influences the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 280 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
calculations.
022 11 03 00 Operations, limitations
022 11 03 01 Data, calculations, position inputs, raw data
LO Describe typical data that may be provided by the FMS:
lateral and vertical navigation guidance;
present position;
time predictions;
fuel predictions;
altitude/flight level predictions.
LO Explain how the FMS will use a combination of inputted/database and
measured data in order to calculate projections and provide output data.
LO Explain the issues and threats using inputted/database data and give
examples of consequences of inputting data incorrectly/using incorrect data.
LO Describe fuel consumption calculations during standard operations and explain
typical data that will have an influence on the accuracy of the calculations.
LO Explain the implications on the accuracy of the calculations during flight in
abnormal configurations (such as engine out, gear down, flaps extended,
spoilers extended, etc.) if the FMS is unable to detect the failure.
LO Describe and explain the purpose of an FMS having dedicated radio-navigation
receivers that it will tune automatically.
LO Explain typical position inputs to an FMS:
GPS;
IRS;
DME;
VOR;
LOC;
runway threshold (RWY THR).
LO Explain how the FMS will create its own FMS position fix and that the FMS
calculations will be based on the FMS position. Depending on the type of
system, the FMS position may be calculated from:
a single source of position data where the most accurate data available at a
given time will be used;
multiple sources from which a position will be derived using the combined
inputs.
LO Explain the implications of a reduction in available position inputs to the FMS,
especially GPS in relation to the capability of performing RNP/PBN approaches.
LO Explain the difference between following the FMS data compared to following
raw data from radio-navigation receivers and describe how there may be
limitations for using FMS data as primary source to follow an instrument
approach procedure (IAP) such as LOC, VOR or NDB.
Human–machine interface (control display unit (CDU)/multipurpose control
022 11 04 00
display unit (MCDU))
022 11 04 01 Purpose, scratchpad, data input, set-up process
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 281 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
(01) Describe the purpose of a CDU/MCDU .
LO Describe the typical layout of a CDU/MCDU and the general purpose of the
following:
screen;
line select keys;
menu select keys;
alphanumerical keys.
LO Explain the function of the ‘scratchpad’ part of the screen.
LO Describe how input of some data is compulsory for the function of the FMS and
other data is optional , and that different symbology is used to highlight this:
rectangular boxes = compulsory information;
dashed line = optional information.
LO Describe a typical FMS pre-flight set-up process through the CDU/MCDU to
cover the most basic information (with the aim to create awareness of
required information as this is irrespective of aircraft type and FMS/FMGS
make):
ident page (who am I = aircraft type/variant, engine type/rating and appropriate
navigation database);
position initialisation (where am I = position for aligning the IRS and FMS
position);
route initialisation (where am I going to = place of departure/destination and
alternate(s));
route programming (how will I get there = SIDs, STARS, route (company or
otherwise));
performance initialisation (when will I arrive = weights, flap setting,
FLEX/assumed temperature/derate, take-off speeds).
022 12 00 00 ALERTING SYSTEMS, PROXIMITY SYSTEMS
022 12 01 00 General
022 12 01 01 Alerting systems according to CS-25 and CS-29
LO State definitions, category, criteria and characteristics of alerting systems
according to CS-25/AMC 25.1322 for aeroplanes and CS-29 for helicopters as
appropriate.
022 12 02 00 Flight warning systems (FWSs)
022 12 02 01 Annunciations, master warning, master caution, advisory
LO State the annunciations given by the FWS and typical location for the
annunciator(s):
master warning;
master caution;
advisory.
LO Explain master warning:
colour of annunciator: red;
nature of aural alerts: continuous;
typical failure scenarios triggering the alert.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 282 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain master caution:
colour of the annunciator: amber or yellow;
nature of aural alerts: attention-getter;
typical failure scenarios triggering the alert.
LO Describe a typical procedure following a master warning or master caution
alert:
acknowledging the failure;
silencing the aural warning;
initiating the appropriate response/procedure.
LO Explain advisory:
colour of the annunciator: any other than red, amber, yellow or green;
absence of aural alert;
typical scenarios triggering the advisory.
022 12 03 00 Stall warning systems (SWSs)
022 12 03 01 Function, types, components
LO Describe the function of an SWS and explain why the warning must be
unique.
LO Describe the different types of SWSs.
LO List the main components of an SWS.
LO Explain the difference between the stall warning speed and the actual
stalling speed of the aeroplane.
022 12 04 00 Stall protection
022 12 04 01 Function, types
LO Describe the function of a stall protection system.
LO Describe the different types of stall protection systems including the difference
between mechanical and FBW controls.
LO Explain the difference between an SWS and a stall protection system.
022 12 05 00 Overspeed warning
022 12 05 01 Purpose, aural warning, VMO/MMO pointer
LO Explain the purpose of an overspeed warning system
(VMO/MMO pointer).
LO State that for large aeroplanes, an aural warning must be associated to the
overspeed warning if an electronic display is used (see AMC 25.11,
paragraph 10.b(2), p. 2-GEN-22).
LO Describe and give examples of VMO/MMO pointer: barber ’s/barber pole
pointer, barber ’s/barber pole vertical scale.
022 12 06 00 Take-off warning
022 12 06 01 Purpose
LO Explain the purpose of a take-off warning system and list the typical
abnormal situations which generate a warning (see AMC 25.703, paragraphs 4
and 5).
022 12 07 00 Altitude alert system
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 283 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 12 07 01 Function, displays, alerts
LO Describe the function of an altitude alert system.
LO Describe different types of displays and possible alerts.
022 12 08 00 Radio altimeter
022 12 08 01 Purpose, range, displays, incorrect indications
LO Explain the purpose of a low-altitude radio altimeter.
LO Describe the principle of the distance (height) measurement.
LO Describe the different types of radio-altimeter displays.
LO Describe how the radio altimeter provides input to other systems and how
a radio-altimeter failure may impact on the functioning of these systems.
LO State the range of a radio altimeter.
LO Explain the potential implications of an incorrect radio - altimeter indication
and how this in particular may affect the following systems:
autothrust;
ground-proximity warning systems (GPWSs).
022 12 09 00 Ground-proximity warning systems (GPWSs)
022 12 09 01 GPWSs: design, operation, indications
LO Explain the purpose of GPWSs.
LO Explain inputs and outputs of a GPWS and describe its operating principle.
LO List and describe the different modes of operation of a GPWS.
Terrain-avoidance warning system (TAWS);
022 12 09 02
other name: enhanced GPWS (EGPWS)
LO Explain the purpose of a TAWS for aeroplanes and of a HTAWS for helicopters,
and explain the difference from a GPWS.
LO Explain inputs and outputs of a TAWS/HTAWS and describe its working
principle.
LO Give examples of terrain displays and list the different possible alerts.
LO Give examples of time response left to the pilot according to look-
ahead distance, speed and aircraft performances.
LO Explain why the TAWS/HTAWS must be coupled to a precise-position
sensor.
LO Explain the possibility of triggering spurious TAWS/HTAWS warnings as a result
of mismanaging the flight path in the proximity to obstacles:
high rate of descent;
high airspeed;
a combination of high rate of descent and high airspeed.
022 12 09 03 Intentionally left blank
022 12 10 00 ACAS/TCAS
022 12 10 01 Principles and operations
LO State that ACAS II is an ICAO standard for anti-collision purposes.
LO Explain that ACAS II is an anti-collision system and does not guarantee any
specific separation.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 284 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
(03) Describe the purpose of an ACAS II system as an anti-collision system.
LO Describe the following outputs from a TCAS:
other intruders;
proximate intruders;
traffic advisory (TA);
resolution advisory (RA).
LO State that ACAS II will issue commands in the vertical plane only (climb,
descent or maintain) , and that the commands are complied with as a manual
manoeuvre.
LO Explain that an RA may or may not require any active control input and the
implications of reacting instinctively without awareness of actual control
inputs required to comply with the RA.
LO Explain that if two aircraft are fitted with ACAS II, the RA will be
coordinated.
LO State that ACAS II equipment can take into account several threats
simultaneously.
LO State that a detected aircraft without altitude-reporting can only generate a
TA; describe typical type of traffic and how this can create distractions during
flight in certain areas of significant air traffic activity.
LO Describe the interaction between the TCAS II system and the
transponder, radio altimeter and the air-data computer:
antenna used;
computer and links with radio altimeter, air-data computer and mode-S
transponder.
LO Explain the principle of TCAS II interrogations.
LO State the typical standard detection range for TCAS II:
35–40 NM horizontally;
approximately 2 000 ft above and below (any setting);
extension to approximately 10 000 ft above (ABV selected) or approximately
10 000 ft below (BLW selected).
LO Explain the principle of ‘reduced surveillance’.
LO Explain that in high-density traffic areas the range may automatically be
decreased in order to enable detection of the threats in the proximity of the
aircraft due to a limitation of the maximum number of possible intruders
the system is able to process.
LO Identify the equipment which an intruder must be fitted with in order to be
detected by TCAS II.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 285 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain in the anti-collision process:
the criteria used to trigger an alarm (TA or RA) are the time to reach the closest
point of approach (CPA) (called TAU) and the difference of altitude;
an intruder will be classified as ‘proximate’ when being less than 6 NM and
1 200 ft from the TCAS- equipped aircraft;
the time limit to CPA is different depending on aircraft altitude, is linked to
a sensitivity level (SL), and state that the value to trigger an RA is from 15 to
35 seconds;
in case of an RA, the intended vertical separation varies from 300 to 600 ft (700
ft above FL420), depending on the SL;
below 1 000 ft above ground, no RA can be generated;
below 1 450 ft (radio-altimeter value) ‘increase descent’ RA is inhibited;
at high altitude, performances of the type of aircraft are taken into account to
inhibit ‘climb’ and ‘increase climb’ RA.
LO List and interpret the following information available from TCAS:
the different possible statuses of a detected aircraft:
‘other’, ‘proximate’, ‘intruder’;
the appropriate graphic symbols and their position on the horizontal display;
different aural warnings.
LO Explain the indications of a TA and an RA and how an RA will generate a red
area on the VSI. Some variants will also include a green area. To manoeuvre
the aircraft to comply with the RA, the pilot should ‘avoid the red’ or ‘fly the
green’.
LO Explain that the pilot must not interpret the horizontal track of an intruder
upon the display.
022 12 11 00 Rotor/engine overspeed alert system
022 12 11 01 Design, operation, displays, alarms
LO Describe the basic design principles, operation, displays and warning/alarm
systems fitted to different helicopters.
022 13 00 00 INTEGRATED INSTRUMENTS — ELECTRONIC DISPLAYS
022 13 01 00 Electronic display units
022 13 01 01 Design, limitations
LO List the different technologies used, e.g. CRT and LCD, and the associated
limitations:
cockpit temperature;
glare;
resolution.
022 13 02 00 Mechanical integrated instruments
Attitude and director indicator (ADI)/
022 13 02 01
horizontal situation indicator (HSI)
LO Describe an ADI and an HSI.
LO List all the information that can be displayed on either instrument.
022 13 03 00 Electronic flight instrument systems (EFISs)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 286 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
022 13 03 01 Design, operation
LO List the following parts of an EFIS:
control panel;
display units;
symbol generator;
remote light sensor.
LO Describe the typical layout of the EFIS display units and how there may be a
facility to transfer the information from one display unit on to another if a
display unit fails.
LO Explain the need for standby instruments to supplement the EFIS in the
event of all the display units failing and the challenge of using these standby
instruments, namely their size and position on the flight deck.
LO Explain the difference between a symbol generator failing and a display unit
failing, and the implications if there are redundant symbol generators
available.
LO Describe the purpose of an EFIS control panel and typical selections
that may be available:
altimeter pressure setting;
navigation display (ND) mode selector;
ND range selector;
ND data selector (waypoints, facilities, constraints, data, etc.);
radio-navigation aids selector (VOR 1/2 or ADF 1/2);
decision altitude (DA)/decision height (DH) selection.
022 13 03 02 Primary flight display (PFD), electronic attitude director indicator (EADI)
LO Describe that a PFD (or an EADI) presents a dynamic colour display of all
the parameters necessary to control the aircraft, and that the main layout
conforms with the ‘basic T’ principle:
attitude information in the centre;
airspeed information on the left;
altitude information on the right;
heading/track indication lower centre;
flight mode annunciation;
basic T;
take-off and landing reference speeds;
minimum airspeed;
lower selectable airspeed;
Mach number.
LO Describe the typical design of the attitude information:
artificial horizon with aircraft symbol;
superimposed flight director command bars.
LO Describe the typical design of the speed tape:
rolling speed scale with numerical read-out of current speed;
limiting airspeeds according to configuration;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 287 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
speed trend vector;
bug/indication for selected airspeed.
LO Explain the Mach number indications and how a selected Mach number
is presented with the speed bug on a corresponding IAS on the speed tape
with the Mach number shown as a numerical indication outside the speed
tape.
LO Describe the typical design of the altitude information:
rolling altitude scale with numerical read-out of current altitude;
altimeter pressure setting;
bug/indication for selected altitude;
means of highlighting the altitude if certain criteria are met.
LO Describe the typical design of the heading/track information:
rolling compass scale/rose with numerical read-out of current heading/track;
bug/indication for selected heading/track.
LO Describe the typical design and location of the following information:
flight mode annunciators (FMAs);
vertical speed indicator including TCAS RA command indications;
radio altitude;
ILS localiser/glideslope and RNP/PBN, GBAS or SBAS horizontal/vertical flight
path deviation indicator;
decision altitude/height (DA/H).
022 13 03 03 Navigation display (ND), electronic horizontal situation indicator (EHSI)
LO Describe that an ND (or an EHSI) provides a mode-selectable colour
flight ND.
LO List the following four modes typically available to be displayed on an ND
unit:
MAP (or ARC);
VOR (or ROSE VOR);
APP (or ROSE LS);
PLAN.
LO List and explain the following information that can be displayed with the MAP
(or ARC) mode selected on an ND unit:
aircraft symbol, compass scale and range markers;
current heading and track (either one may be ‘up’ depending on selection), true
or magnetic;
selected heading and track;
TAS/GS;
wind direction and speed (W/V);
raw data radio magnetic indicator (RMI) needles/pointers for
VOR/automatic direction- finding equipment (ADF), if selected, including the
frequency or ident of the selected navigation facility;
route/flight plan data from the FMS;
TO/next waypoint data from the FMS;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 288 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
data from the navigation database such as airports, waypoints or navigation
facilities as selected;
weather radar information;
TCAS traffic information (no TCAS commands);
TAWS (EGPWS) terrain information;
failure flags and messages.
LO List and explain the following information that can be displayed with the VOR
or APP (or ROSE VOR or ROSE LS) mode selected on an ND unit:
aircraft symbol and compass scale;
current heading and track (either one may be ‘up’ depending on selection), true
or magnetic;
selected heading and track;
TAS/ground speed (GS);
wind direction and speed (W/V);
VOR or ILS frequency and identification of the selected navigation aid;
VOR selected course, deviation indicator and a TO/FROM indicator in a
HSI-type display format when in VOR mode;
localiser selected course, deviation indicator and glideslope indicator in a
HSI-type display format when in APP mode.
weather radar information;
TCAS traffic information (no TCAS commands);
TAWS (EGPWS) terrain information;
failure flags and messages.
LO List and explain the following information that can be displayed with the
PLAN mode selected on an ND unit:
north-up compass rose and range markers;
aircraft symbol oriented according to aircraft heading;
TAS/GS;
wind direction and speed (W/V);
route/flight plan data from the FMS;
TO/next waypoint data from the FMS;
data from the navigation database such as airports, waypoints or navigation
facilities as selected;
failure flags and messages.
LO Explain the purpose of PLAN mode and it s characteristics such
as:
no compass information;
north is up on the display unit at all times;
the centre waypoint is the selected waypoint on the FMS CDU;
scrolling through the flight plan on the FMS CDU will shift the map view along
the flight path;
the aircraft symbol will be positioned in the appropriate place along the
flight path;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 289 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
using PLAN mode as the primary mode during flight may lead to disorientation
and loss of situational awareness.
LO Distinguish the difference between the appearance of an EXPANDED or
FULL/ROSE mode and how the displayed range differs between them.
LO Explain the combination of mode and range selection including how selecting
the appropriate range and displayed data can improve situational awareness
for a given phase of flight.
Engine parameters, crew warnings, aircraft systems, procedure and
022 13 04 00
mission display systems
022 13 04 01 Purposes of systems, display systems, checklists
LO State the purpose of the following systems:
engine instruments centralised display unit;
crew alerting system/aircraft display unit;
facility for appropriate on-screen checklists;
that the aircraft systems display unit enables the display of normal and
degraded modes of operation of the aircraft systems;
that the systems/aircraft display unit is able to show pictorial systems
diagrams/schematics and associated parameters.
LO Describe the similarities to EFIS with regard to basic system architecture.
LO Give the following different names by which engine parameters, crew
warnings, aircraft systems and procedures display systems are known:
multifunction display unit (MFDU);
engine indication and crew alerting systems (EICASs);
engine and warning display (EWD);
electronic centralised aircraft monitor (ECAM);
systems display (S/D).
LO Give the names of the following different display systems and
describe their main functions:
vehicle engine monitoring display (VEMD);
integrated instruments display system (IIDS).
LO State the purpose of a mission display unit.
LO Describe the architecture of each system and give examples of display.
LO Explain why awareness of the consequences of the actions commanded by the
automatic checklist is required.
LO Explain the limited ability of the computer to assess a situation other than using
the exceedance of certain thresholds to trigger the main and subsequent
events and programmed actions.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 290 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe an appropriate procedure for following an on - screen checklist
associated with a failure scenario including the following:
confirm the failure with the other flight crew member prior to performing
any of the actions;
seek confirmation prior to manipulating any guarded switches or thrust levers;
follow the checklist slowly and methodically;
assess the possible implications of making certain selections, such as
opening the fuel cross-feed if there is a fuel leak even though the electronic
checklist may ask for the action.
022 13 05 00 Engine first limit indicator
022 13 05 01 Design, operation, information on display
LO Describe the principles of design and operation, and compare the different
indications and displays available.
LO Describe what information can be displayed on the screen, when the screen is
in the limited composite mode.
022 13 06 00 Electronic flight bag (EFB)
022 13 06 01 Purpose, certification, malfunctions
LO Explain the purpose of the EFB and list typical equipment:
computer laptop;
tablet device;
integrated avionics suite in the aircraft.
LO Describe the ‘class’ hardware certification:
portable: portable electronic device (PED) that can be used inside or outside the
aircraft, is not part of the certified aircraft configuration and does not require
tools to remove it from the flight-deck cradle, if one exists;
installed: an electronic device that is considered an aircraft part covered by
the aircraft airworthiness
LO approval, thus is a minimum equipment list (MEL)
item in the event of failure.
LO Describe the ‘type’ software certification:
type A: applications whose misuse or malfunctions have no adverse effect on
flight safety;
type B: applications for which evaluation of the hazards presented by misuse
or malfunctions is required.
LO Explain implications of malfunctions with the EFB installation in a fully
electronic flight-deck environment:
mass and balance calculations;
performance calculations;
access to charts;
access to manuals.
Head-up display (HUD), synthetic vision system (SVS) and enhanced
022 13 07 00
visual system (EVS)
022 13 07 01 Components, benefits, modes of operation
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 291 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO State the components of a typical HUD installation:
HUD projector and stowable combiner;
HUD controls such as declutter and dimmer;
HUD computer.
LO Explain the reasons and benefits of having a n HUD:
increased situational awareness due to reduced need to look inside to view
primary flight information;
lower minima for both departure and landing;
improved accuracy of flying thus reduced susceptibility to enter a
state of aircraft upset.
LO Describe how the HUD replicates the information on the primary flight
display (PFD) by showing the following data:
altitude;
speed, including speed trend;
heading;
flight path vector (track and vertical flight path);
flight mode annunciator (FMA);
CAS, TAWS and wind shear command annunciations.
LO Describe the following modes of operation of a n HUD:
normal display mode that may automatically adapt the information based on
the phase of flight;
declutter function.
LO Describe the principle of SVS:
an enhanced database used as reference to provide terrain and ground features
to be shown on the PFD;
limitations due to being a synthetic image not based on actual sensory
information thus not lowering landing minima;
implications if aircraft position accuracy becomes reduced.
LO Describe the principle of EVS:
includes external sensors such as infrared cameras to generate a real-time
image on the PFD or on the HUD;
limitation of the fact that an infrared camera uses temperature and temperature
difference in order to produce an image;
enables lower minima because of the real-time image, thus enhancing the
visibility as experienced by the pilot.
022 14 00 00 MAINTENANCE, MONITORING AND RECORDING SYSTEMS
022 14 01 00 Cockpit voice recorder (CVR)
022 14 01 01 Purpose, components, parameters
LO Describe the purpose of a CVR, its typical location , and explain the
implications of knowingly erasing or tampering with any information or
equipment.
LO List the main components of a CVR:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 292 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
a shock-resistant tape recorder or digital storage associated with an
underwater locating beacon (ULB);
a cockpit area microphone (CAM);
a control unit with the following controls: auto/on, test and erase, and a headset
jack;
limited flight-deck controls such as erase and test switches.
LO List the following main parameters recorded on the CVR:
voice communications transmitted from or received on the flight deck;
the aural environment of the flight deck;
voice communication of flight crew members using
the aeroplane’s interphone system;
voice or audio signals introduced into a headset or speaker;
voice communication of flight crew members using the public address system, if
installed.
022 14 02 00 Flight data recorder (FDR)
022 14 02 01 Purpose, components, parameters
LO Describe the purpose of an FDR and its typical location.
LO List the main components of an FDR:
a shock-resistant data recorder associated with a ULB;
a data interface and acquisition unit;
a recording system (digital flight data recorder);
two control units (start sequence, event mark setting);
limited flight-deck controls, but includes an event switch.
LO List the following main parameters recorded on the FDR:
time or relative time count;
attitude (pitch and roll);
airspeed;
pressure altitude;
heading;
normal acceleration;
propulsive/thrust power on each engine and flight-deck thrust/power lever
position, if applicable;
flaps/slats configuration or flight-deck selection;
ground spoilers or speed brake selection.
LO State that additional parameters can be recorded according to FDR capacity
and applicable operational requirements.
022 14 03 00 Maintenance and monitoring systems
Helicopter operations monitoring program (HOMP):
022 14 03 01
design, operation, performance
LO Describe the HOMP as a helicopter version of the aeroplane flight data
monitoring (FDM) program.
LO State that the HOMP software consists of three integrated modules:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 293 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
flight data events (FDEs);
flight data measurements (FDMs);
flight data traces (FDTs).
LO Describe and explain the information flow of an HOMP.
LO Describe HOMP operation and management processes.
Integrated health and usage monitoring system
022 14 03 02
(IHUMS): design, operation, performance
LO Describe the main features of an IHUMS:
rotor system health;
cockpit voice recorder (CVR)/flight data recorder (FDR);
gearbox system health;
engine health;
exceedance monitoring;
usage monitoring;
transparent operation;
ground station features;
monitoring;
rotor track and balance;
engine performance trending;
quality controlled to level 2.
LO Describe the ground station features of an IHUMS.
LO Summarise the benefits of an IHUMS including:
reduced risk of catastrophic failure of rotor or gearbox;
improved rotor track and balance giving lower vibration levels;
accurate recording of flight exceedances;
CVR/FDR allows accurate accident/incident investigation and HOMP;
maintenance cost savings.
LO State the benefits of an IHUMS and an HOMP.
022 14 03 03 Aeroplane condition monitoring system (ACMS): general, design, operation
LO State the purpose of an ACMS.
LO Describe the structure of an ACMS including:
inputs: aircraft systems (such as air conditioning, autoflight, flight controls,
fuel, landing gear, navigation, pneumatic, APU, engine), MCDU;
data management unit;
recording unit: digital recorder;
outputs: printer, ACARS or ATSU.
LO State that maintenance messages sent by an ACMS can be transmitted without
crew notification.
LO Explain that data from the ACMS can be used as part of an
FDM and safety programme.
LO Explain that the FDM program collects data anonymously; however, grave
exceedance of parameters may warrant a further investigation of the event by
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 294 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL123: Advanced Flight Instruments
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
the operator.
LO Explain the purpose of FDM as a system for identifying adverse safety trends
and tailoring training programmes in order to enhance the overall safety of the
operation.
022 15 00 00 DIGITAL CIRCUITS AND COMPUTERS
022 15 01 00 Digital circuits and computers
022 15 01 01 General, definitions and design
LO Define a ‘computer’ as a machine for manipulating data according to a list of
instructions.
LO Explain the term ‘bus’ being used as a term for a facility (wiring, optical
fibre, etc.) transferring data between different parts of a computer,
both internally and externally.
LO Define the terms ‘hardware’ and ‘software’.
LO With the help of the relevant 022 references, give examples of airborne
computers and list the possible peripheral equipment for each system, such as:
X ADC with pitot probe(s), static port(s) and indicators;
FMS with GPS, CDU/MCDU and ND;
GPWS with radio altimeter, ADC and ND.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Aircraft general Knowledge- Instrumentation
B. Private Pilots Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 295 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
3.16. PTS/PL 189: FLIGHT HAZARDS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 09 00 00 FLIGHT HAZARDS 14
050 09 01 00 Icing
050 09 01 01 Conditions for ice accretion
LO Summarise the general conditions under which ice accretion occurs on aircraft
(temperatures of outside air; temperature of the airframe; presence of supercooled
water in clouds, fog, rain and drizzle; possibility of sublimation).
LO Explain the general weather conditions under which ice accretion occurs in a
venturi carburettor.
LO Explain the general weather conditions under which ice accretion occurs on
airframe.
LO Explain the formation of supercooled water in clouds, rain and drizzle.
(Refer to Subject 050 03 02 01)
LO Explain qualitatively the relationship between the air temperature and the
amount of supercooled water.
LO Explain qualitatively the relationship between the type of cloud and the size and
number of the droplets in cumuliform and stratiform clouds.
LO Indicate in which circumstances ice can form on an aircraft on the ground: air
temperature, humidity, precipitation.
LO Explain in which circumstances ice can form on an aircraft in flight: inside clouds,
in precipitation, and outside clouds and precipitation.
LO Explain the influence of fuel temperature, radiative cooling of the aircraft
surface and temperature of the aircraft surface (e.g. from previous flight) on ice
formation.
LO Describe the different factors that influence the intensity of icing: air
temperature, amount of supercooled water in a cloud or in precipitation, amount
of ice crystals in the air, speed of the aircraft, shape (thickness) of the airframe
parts (wings, antennas, etc.).
LO Explain the effects of topography on icing.
LO Explain the higher concentration of water drops in stratiform orographic
clouds.
050 09 01 02 Types of ice accretion
LO X Define ‘clear ice’.
LO Describe the conditions for the formation of clear ice.
LO Explain the formation of the structure of clear ice with the release of latent heat
during the freezing process.
LO Describe the aspects of clear ice: appearance, weight, solidity.
LO Define ‘rime ice’.
LO Describe the conditions for the formation of rime ice.
LO Describe the aspects of rime ice: appearance, weight, solidity.
LO Define ‘mixed ice’.
LO Describe the conditions for the formation of mixed ice.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 296 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Describe the aspects of mixed ice: appearance, weight, solidity.
LO Describe the possible process of ice formation in snow conditions.
LO Define ‘hoar frost’.
LO Describe the conditions for the formation of hoar frost.
LO Describe the aspects of hoar frost: appearance, solidity.
050 09 01 03 Hazards of ice accretion, avoidance
LO State the ICAO qualifying terms for the intensity of icing.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Air Traffic
Management’
LO Describe, in general, the hazards of icing.
LO Assess the dangers of the different types of ice accretion.
LO Describe the position of the dangerous zones of icing in fronts, in stratiform and
cumuliform clouds, and in the different precipitation types.
LO Indicate the possibilities of avoiding dangerous zones of icing:
in the flight planning: weather briefing, selection of
track and altitude;
during flight: recognition of the dangerous zones, selection of appropriate track
and altitude.
050 09 01 04 Ice crystal icing
LO Describe ice crystal icing.
LO Describe the atmospheric processes leading to high ice crystal concentration.
Define the variable ice water content (IWC).
LO Identify weather situations and their relevant areas where high concentrations of
ice crystals are likely to occur.
LO Name, in general, the flight hazards associated with high concentrations of ice
crystals.
LO Explain how a pilot may possibly avoid areas with a high concentration of ice
crystals.
050 09 02 00 Turbulence
050 09 02 01 Effects on flight, avoidance
LO State the ICAO qualifying terms for the intensity of turbulence.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Air Traffic
Management’
LO Describe the effects of turbulence on an aircraft in flight.
LO Indicate the possibilities of avoiding turbulence:
in the flight planning: weather briefing, selection of track and altitude;
during flight: selection of appropriate track and altitude.
LO Describe atmospheric turbulence and distinguish between turbulence, gustiness
and wind shear.
LO Describe that forecasts of turbulence are not very reliable and state that pilot
reports of turbulence are very valuable as they help others to prepare for or avoid
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 297 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
turbulence.
050 09 02 02 Clear-air turbulence (CAT): effects on flight, avoidance
LO Describe the effects of CAT on flight.
(Refer to Subject 050 02 06 03)
LO Indicate the possibilities of avoiding CAT in flight:
in the flight planning: weather briefing, selection of track and altitude;
during flight: selection of appropriate track and altitude.
050 09 03 00 Wind shear
050 09 03 01 Definition of wind shear
LO Define ‘wind shear’ (vertical and horizontal).
LO Define ‘low-level wind shear’.
050 09 03 02 Weather conditions for wind shear
LO Describe the conditions, where and how wind shear can form (e.g. thunderstorms,
squall lines, fronts, inversions, land and sea breeze, friction layer, relief).
050 09 03 03 Effects on flight, avoidance
LO Describe the effects of wind shear on flight.
LO Indicate the possibilities of avoiding wind shear in flight:
in the flight planning;
during flight.
050 09 04 00 Thunderstorms
Conditions for and process of development, forecast, location, type
050 09 04 01
specification
LO Name the cloud types which indicate the development of thunderstorms.
LO Describe the different types of thunderstorms, their location, the conditions for
and the process of development, and list their properties (air-mass
thunderstorms, frontal thunderstorms, squall lines, supercell storms, orographic
thunderstorms).
050 09 04 02 Structure of thunderstorms, life cycle
LO Assess the average duration of thunderstorms and their different stages.
LO Describe a supercell storm: initial, supercell, tornado and dissipating stage.
LO Summarise the flight hazards associated with a fully developed
thunderstorm.
LO Indicate on a sketch the most dangerous zones in and around a single-cell
and a multi-cell thunderstorm.
050 09 04 03 Electrical discharges
LO Describe the basic outline of the electric field in the atmosphere.
LO Describe types of lightning, i.e. ground stroke, intra-cloud lightning, cloud-to-
cloud lightning, upward lightning.
LO Describe and assess the ‘St. Elmo’s fire’ weather phenomenon.
LO Describe the development of lightning discharges.
LO Describe the effect of lightning strike on aircraft and flight execution.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 298 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 09 04 04 Development and effects of downbursts
LO Define the term ‘downburst’.
LO Distinguish between macroburst and microburst.
LO State the weather situations leading to the formation of downbursts.
LO Describe the process of development of a downburst.
LO Give the typical duration of a downburst.
LO Describe the effects of downbursts.
050 09 04 05 Thunderstorm avoidance
LO Explain how the pilot can anticipate each type of thunderstorm: through pre-flight
weather briefing, observation in flight, use of specific meteorological information,
use of information given by ground weather radar and by airborne weather radar.
LO (Refer to Subject 050 10 01 04), use of a lightning detector
(stormscope).
(Refer to Subject 050 10 01 04), use of the stormscope (lightning detector).
LO Describe practical examples of flight techniques used to avoid the hazards of
thunderstorms.
050 09 05 00 Tornadoes
050 09 05 01 Properties and occurrence
LO Define ‘tornado’.
LO Describe the formation of a tornado.
LO Describe the typical features of a tornado such as appearance, season, time of day,
stage of development, speed of movement, and wind speed.
LO Compare the occurrence of tornadoes in Europe with the occurrence in other
locations, especially in the United States of America.
LO Compare the dimensions and properties of tornadoes and dust devils.
050 09 06 00 Inversions
050 09 06 01 Influence on aircraft performance
LO Compare the flight hazards during take-off and approach associated with a strong
inversion alone and with a strong inversion combined with marked wind shear.
050 09 07 00 Stratospheric conditions
050 09 07 01 Influence on aircraft performance
LO Summarise the advantages of stratospheric flights.
LO List the influences of the phenomena associated with the lower stratosphere (wind,
temperature, air density, turbulence).
050 09 08 00 Hazards in mountainous areas
050 09 08 01 Influence of terrain on clouds and precipitation, frontal passage
LO Describe the influence of mountainous area on a frontal passage.
Vertical movements, mountain waves, wind shear, turbulence, ice
050 09 08 02
accretion
LO Describe the vertical movements, wind shear and turbulence that are
typical of mountain areas.
LO Indicate on a sketch of a chain of mountains the turbulent zones (mountain
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 299 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
waves, rotors).
LO Explain the influence of relief on ice accretion.
050 09 08 03 Development and effect of valley inversions
LO Describe the formation of a valley inversion due to katabatic winds.
LO Describe the valley inversion formed by warm winds aloft.
LO Describe the effects of a valley inversion for an aircraft in flight.
050 09 09 00 Visibility-reducing phenomena
050 09 09 01 Reduction of visibility caused by precipitation and obscurations
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by precipitation:
drizzle, rain, snow.
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by obscurations:
fog, mist, haze, smoke, volcanic ash.
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by obscurations:
sand (SA), dust (DU).
LO Describe the differences between ground and flight visibility, and slant and vertical
visibility when an aircraft is above or within a layer of haze or fog.
050 09 09 02 Reduction of visibility caused by other phenomena
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by low drifting and blowing snow.
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by low drifting and blowing dust and
sand.
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by dust storm (DS) and sandstorm
(SS).
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by icing (windshield).
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by the position of the sun relative to
the visual direction.
LO Describe the reduction of visibility caused by the reflection of the sun’s rays from
the top of the layers of haze, fog and clouds.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Observation
3. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Tes
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 300 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
3.17. PTS/PL1810: METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
050 10 00 00 METEOROLOGICAL INFORMATION 14
050 10 01 00 Observation
050 10 01 01 Surface observations
LO Define ‘gusts’, as given in METARs.
LO Distinguish wind given in METARs and wind given by the control tower for
take-off and landing.
LO Define ‘visibility’.
LO Describe the meteorological measurement of visibility.
LO Define ‘prevailing visibility’.
LO Define ‘ground visibility’.
LO List the units used for visibility (m, km, statute mile).
LO Define ‘runway visual range’.
LO Describe the meteorological measurement of runway visual range.
LO Indicate where the transmissometers/forward-scatter meters are placed on
the aerodrome.
LO List the units used for runway visual range (m, ft).
LO List the different possibilities to transmit information to pilots about runway
visual range.
LO Compare ground visibility, prevailing visibility, and runway visual range.
LO Indicate the means of observation of present weather.
LO Indicate the means of observing clouds for the purpose of recording: type,
amount, height of base (ceilometers), and top.
LO State the clouds which are indicated in METAR, TAF and SIGMET.
LO Define ‘oktas’.
LO Define ‘cloud base’.
LO Define ‘ceiling’.
LO Name the unit and the reference level used for information about cloud base (ft).
LO Define ‘vertical visibility’.
LO Explain briefly how and when vertical visibility is measured.
LO Name the units used for vertical visibility (ft, m).
LO Indicate the means of observation of air temperature (thermometer).
LO Name the units of relative humidity (%) and dew-point temperature (Celsius,
Fahrenheit).
050 10 01 02 Radiosonde observations
LO Describe the principle of radiosondes.
LO Describe and interpret the sounding by radiosonde given on a simplified
X
temperature–pressure (T–P) diagram.
050 10 01 03 Satellite observations
LO Describe the basic outlines of satellite observations.
LO Name the main uses of satellite pictures in aviation meteorology.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 301 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
LO Describe the different types of satellite imagery.
LO Interpret qualitatively the satellite pictures in order to get useful information for
flights:
location of clouds (distinguish between stratiform and cumuliform clouds).
LO Interpret qualitatively the satellite pictures in order to get useful information for
flights:
location of fronts.
LO Interpret qualitatively the satellite pictures in order to get useful information for
flights using atmospheric motion vector images to locate jet streams.
Weather radar observations
050 10 01 04
(Refer to Subject 050 09 04 05)
LO Describe the basic principle and the type of information given by a ground
weather radar.
LO Interpret ground weather radar images.
LO Describe the basic principle and the type of information given by airborne
weather radar.
LO Describe the limits and the errors of airborne weather radar information.
LO Interpret typical airborne weather radar images.
050 10 01 05 Aircraft observations and reporting
LO Describe routine air-report and special air-report (ARS).
LO State the obligation of a pilot to prepare air-reports.
LO Name the weather phenomena to be stated in an ARS.
050 10 02 00 Weather charts
050 10 02 01 Significant weather charts
LO Decode and interpret significant weather charts (low, medium and high
level).
LO Describe from a significant weather chart the flight conditions at designated
locations or along a defined flight route at a given FL.
050 10 02 02 Surface charts
LO Recognise the following weather systems on a surface weather chart (analysed and
forecast): ridges, cols and troughs; fronts; frontal side, warm sector and rear side of
mid-latitude frontal lows; high- and low-pressure areas.
LO Determine from surface weather charts the wind direction and speed.
050 10 02 03 Upper-air charts
LO Define ‘constant-pressure chart’.
LO Define ‘isohypse (contour line)’.
(Refer to Subject 050 01 03 02)
LO Define ‘isotherm’.
LO Define ‘isotach’.
LO Describe forecast upper-wind and temperature charts.
LO For designated locations or routes determine from forecast upper-wind and
temperature charts, if necessary by interpolation, the spot/average values for
outside-air temperature, temperature deviation from ISA, wind direction, and wind
speed.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 302 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
050 10 02 04 Gridded forecast products
LO State that numerical weather prediction uses a 3D grid of weather data, consisting
of horizontal data (latitude- longitude) and vertical data (height or pressure).
LO Explain that world area forecast centres prepare global sets of gridded
forecasts for flight planning purposes (upper wind, temperature, humidity).
LO State that the WAFCs also produce gridded datasets for Flight Level and
temperature of the tropopause, direction and speed of maximum wind,
cumulonimbus clouds, icing and turbulence.
LO Explain that the data on CB and turbulence can be used in the visualization of
flight hazards.
LO Explain that the gridded forecasts can be merged in information processing
systems with data relayed from aircraft or pilot reports, e.g. of turbulence, to
provide improved situation awareness.
050 10 03 00 Information for flight planning
050 10 03 01 Aviation weather messages
LO Describe, decode and interpret the following aviation weather messages (given in
written or graphical format): METAR, aerodrome special meteorological report
(SPECI), trend forecast (TREND), TAF, information concerning en- route weather
phenomena which may affect the safety of aircraft operations (SIGMET),
information concerning en- route weather phenomena which may affect the safety
of low-level aircraft operations (AIRMET), area forecast for low-level flights
(GAMET), ARS, volcanic ash advisory information.
LO Describe, decode and interpret the tropical cyclone advisory information
in written and graphical form.
LO Describe the general meaning of MET REPORT and SPECIAL REPORT.
LO List, in general, the cases when a SIGMET and an AIRMET are issued.
LO Describe, decode (by using a code table) and interpret the following messages:
runway state message (as written in a METAR).
Remark: For runway state message, refer to ICAO Doc 7754 ‘Air Navigation
Plan — European Region’.
050 10 03 02 Meteorological broadcasts for aviation
LO Describe the meteorological content of broadcasts for aviation:
meteorological information for aircraft in flight (VOLMET);
automatic terminal information service (ATIS).
LO Describe the meteorological content of broadcasts for aviation:
HF-VOLMET.
050 10 03 03 Use of meteorological documents
LO Describe meteorological briefing and advice.
LO List the information that a flight crew can receive from meteorological services
for pre-flight planning and apply the content of this information on a
designated flight route.
LO List the meteorological information that a flight crew can receive from flight
information services during flight and apply the content of this information for the
continuation of the flight.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 303 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL 183: Flight Hazards and Meteorological Information
050 10 03 04 Meteorological warnings
LO Describe and interpret aerodrome warnings and wind- shear warnings and
alerts.
050 10 04 00 Meteorological services
050 10 04 01 World area forecast system and meteorological offices
LO Name the world area forecast centres (WAFCs) as the provider for upper-air
X forecasts: WAFCs prepare upper-air gridded forecasts of upper winds; upper-air
temperature and humidity; direction, speed and flight level of maximum
LO wind; flight level and temperature of tropopause, areas of cumulonimbus clouds,
icing, clear-air and in-cloud turbulence, and geopotential altitude of flight levels.
LO Name the meteorological (MET) offices as the provider for aerodrome
X
forecasts and briefing documents.
LO Name the meteorological watch offices (MWOs) as the provider for SIGMET
X
and AIRMET information.
LO Name the aeronautical meteorological stations as the provider for METAR
X
and MET reports.
LO Name the volcanic ash advisory centres (VAACs) as the provider for forecasts
X
of volcanic ash clouds.
LO Name the tropical cyclone advisory centres (TCACs) as the provider for
X
forecasts of tropical cyclones.
050 10 04 02 International organisations
LO Describe briefly the following organisations and their chief activities in relation to
weather for aviation:
X
International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) (Refer to Subject 010 ‘AIR
LAW’);
World Meteorological Organization (WMO).
Learning-Teaching Methods
4. Lecture-discussion
5. Observation
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Tes
Reference Materials
B. Jeppesen: Aviation Weather, by Peter F. Lester
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 304 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
3.18. PTS/PL251: Instrument landing system (ILS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 02 05 00 Instrument landing system (ILS)
8
062 02 05 01 Principles
LO Name the three main components of an ILS:
the localiser (LOC);
the glide path (GP);
range information (markers or DME).
LO State the site locations of the ILS components:
the LOC antenna should be located on the extension of the runway centre
X line at the stop- end;
the GP antenna should be locate beyond the runway threshold, laterally displaced
to the side of the runway centre line.
LO Explain that marker beacons produce radiation patterns to indicate predetermined
distances from the threshold along the ILS GP.
LO State that marker beacons are sometimes replaced by a
DME paired with the LOC frequency.
LO State that in the ILS LOC frequency assigned band 108.0–111.975 MHz, only
frequencies which have an odd number in the first decimal are ILS LOC frequencies.
LO State that the GP operates in the UHF band.
LO Describe the use of the 90-Hz and the 150-Hz signals in the LOC and GP
X transmitters/receivers, stating how the signals at the receivers vary with angular
deviation.
LO State that the UHF GP frequency is selected automatically by being paired with the
LOC frequency.
LO Explain that both the LOC and the GP antenna radiates side lobes (false beams)
which can give rise to false centre-line and false GP indication.
LO Explain that the back beam from the LOC antenna may be used as a published ‘non-
X
precision approach’.
LO State that the recommended GP is 3°.
LO Name the frequency, modulation and identification assigned to all marker
beacons.
All marker beacons operate on 75-MHz carrier frequency. The modulation
frequencies of the audio are:
outer marker: low;
middle marker: medium;
inner marker: high.
The audio frequency modulation (for identification) is the continuous modulation of
the audio frequency and is keyed as follows:
outer marker: 2 dashes per second continuously;
middle marker: a continuous series of alternate dots and dashes;
inner marker: 6 dots per second continuously.
The outer-marker cockpit indicator is coloured blue, the middle marker amber,
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 305 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
and the inner marker white.
LO State that the final-approach area contains a fix or facility that permits verification
of the ILS GP–altimeter relationship. The outer marker or DME is usually used for
this purpose.
062 02 05 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO Describe the ILS identification regarding frequency and Morse code or plain text.
LO State that an ILS installation has an automatic ground monitoring system.
LO State that the LOC and GP monitoring system monitors any shift in the LOC and
GP mean course line or reduction in signal strength.
LO State that warning flags will appear for both the LOC and the GP if the received
signal strength is below a threshold value.
LO Describe the circumstances in which warning flags will appear for both the LOC
and the GP:
absence of the carrier frequency;
absence of the modulation simultaneously;
the percentage modulation of the navigation signal reduced to 0.
LO Interpret the indications on a CDI and an HSI:
full-scale deflection of the CDI needle corresponds to approximately 2.5°
displacement from the ILS centre line;
full-scale deflection on the GP corresponds to approximately 0.7° from the ILS GP
centre line.
LO Interpret the aircraft’s position in relation to the extended runway centre
line on a back-beam approach.
LO Explain the setting of the course pointer of an HSI and the course selector of an
omnibearing indicator (OBI) for front-beam and back-beam approaches.
062 02 05 03 Coverage and range
LO Sketch the standard coverage area of the LOC and GP with angular sector limits
in degrees and distance limits from the transmitter:
LOC coverage area is 10° on either side of the centre line to a distance of 25
NM from the runway, and 35° on either side of the centre line to a distance of 17
NM from the runway;
GP coverage area is 8° on either side of the centre line to a distance of minimum
10 NM from the runway.
062 02 05 04 Errors and accuracy
LO Explain that ILS approaches are divided into facility performance categories
defined in ICAO Annex 10.
LO Define the following ILS operation categories:
Category I;
Category II;
Category IIIA;
Category IIIB;
Category IIIC.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 306 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain that all Category III ILS operations guidance information is provided
from the coverage limits of the facility to, and along, the surface of the runway.
LO Explain why the accuracy requirements are progressively higher for CAT I, CAT II
and CAT III ILS.
LO Explain the following in accordance with ICAO Doc 8168:
the accuracy the pilot has to fly the ILS LOC to be considered established on an ILS
track is within the half-full scale deflection of the required track;
the aircraft has to be established within the half- scale deflection of the LOC before
starting descent on the GP;
the pilot has to fly the ILS GP to a maximum of half- scale fly-up deflection of the GP
in order to stay in protected airspace.
LO State that if a pilot deviates by more than half-course deflection on the LOC or by
more than half-dot deflection on the GP, an immediate go-around should be
executed because obstacle clearance may no longer be guaranteed.
LO Describe ILS beam bends as deviations from the nominal LOC and GP respectively
which can be assessed by flight test.
LO Explain that multipath interference is caused by reflections from objects
within the ILS coverage area.
062 02 05 05 Factors affecting range and accuracy
LO Define the ‘ILS-critical area’: an area of defined dimensions around the LOC
and GP antennas where vehicles, including aircraft, are excluded during all ILS
operations.
LO Define the ‘ILS-sensitive area’: an area extending beyond the ILS-critical area where
the parking or movement of vehicles, including aircraft, is controlled to prevent the
possibility of unacceptable interference to the ILS signal during ILS operations.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
B. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
C. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
D. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
E. ICAO PANS-OPS Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
F. JAR-OPS-1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
G. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
H. ICAO DOC 9643: Parallel Runway Operations
I. ICAO DOC 9684: Manual on the Secondary Surveillance (SSR) Systems
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 307 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
J. ICAO Doc 9688: Manual on Mode Specific Services
K. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
L. ICAO DOC.9613: Performance Based Navigation Manua
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 308 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
3.19. PTS/PL252: Microwave landing system (MLS)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 02 06 00 Microwave landing system (MLS) 4
062 02 06 01 Principles
LO Explain the principle of operation:
horizontal course guidance during the approach;
vertical guidance during the approach;
horizontal guidance for departure and missed approach;
DME (DME/P) distance;
transmission of special information regarding the system and the approach
conditions.
LO State that MLS operates in the S band on 200 channels.
LO Explain the reason why MLS can be installed at aerodromes where, as a result of the
effects of surrounding buildings or terrain, ILS siting is difficult.
062 02 06 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO Interpret the display of airborne equipment designed to continuously show the
position of the aircraft in relation to a preselected course and glide path,
along with distance information, during approach and departure.
LO Explain that segmented approaches can be carried out with a presentation with two
cross bars directed by a computer which has been programmed with the
approach to be flown.
LO Illustrate that segmented and curved approaches can only be executed with
DME/P installed.
LO Explain why aircraft are equipped with a multimode receiver (MMR) in order to be
able to receive ILS, MLS and GPS.
LO Explain why MLS without DME/P gives an ILS lookalike straight-line approach.
062 02 06 03 Coverage and range
LO Describe the coverage area for the approach direction as being within a sector of ±
40° of the centre line out to a range of 20 NM from the threshold (according to ICAO
Annex 10).
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
M. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
N. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
O. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
P. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 309 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Q. ICAO PANS-OPS Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
R. JAR-OPS-1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
S. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
T. ICAO DOC 9643: Parallel Runway Operations
U. ICAO DOC 9684: Manual on the Secondary Surveillance (SSR) Systems
V. ICAO Doc 9688: Manual on Mode Specific Services
W. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
X. ICAO DOC.9613: Performance Based Navigation Manua
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 310 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
3.20. PTS/PL253: RADAR
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 03 00 00 RADAR 10
062 03 01 00 Pulse techniques
062 03 01 01 Pulse techniques and associated terms
LO Name the different applications of radar with respect to air traffic control (ATC),
weather observations, and airborne weather radar (AWR).
LO Describe the pulse technique and echo principle on which primary radar systems
X
are based.
LO State that the range of a radar depends on pulse repetition frequency (PRF),
X
pulse length, pulse power, height of aircraft, height of antenna and frequency used.
062 03 02 00 Ground radar
062 03 02 01 Principles
LO Explain that primary radar provides bearing and distance of targets.
LO Explain that primary ground radar is used to detect aircraft that are not equipped
X
with a secondary radar transponder.
062 03 02 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO State that modern ATC systems use inputs from various sensors to generate the
display.
062 03 03 00 Airborne weather radar
062 03 03 01 Principles
LO List the two main tasks of the weather radar in respect of weather and navigation.
LO State that modern weather radars employ frequencies that give wavelengths of
about 3 cm that reflect best on wet hailstones.
LO State that the antenna is stabilised in the horizontal plane with signals from the
X
aircraft’s attitude reference system.
LO Describe the cone-shaped pencil beam of about 3 to 5° beam width used for
X
weather detection.
062 03 03 02 Presentation and interpretation
LO Explain the functions of the following different controls on the radar control
panel:
off/on switch;
function switch with WX, WX+T and MAP modes;
gain-control setting (auto/manual);
tilt/autotilt switch.
LO Name, for areas of differing reflection intensity, the colour gradations (green,
yellow, red and magenta) indicating the increasing intensity of precipitation.
LO State the use of azimuth-marker lines and range lines in respect of the relative
X
bearing and the distance to a thunderstorm on the screen.
062 03 03 03 Coverage and range
LO Explain how the radar is used for weather detection and for mapping (range, tilt
and gain, if available).
062 03 03 04 Errors, accuracy, limitations
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 311 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
LO Explain why AWR should be used with extreme caution when on the ground.
062 03 03 05 Factors affecting range and accuracy
LO Explain the danger of the area behind heavy rain (shadow area) where no radar
waves will penetrate.
LO Describe appropriate tilt settings in relation to altitude and thunderstorms.
LO Explain why a thunderstorm may not be detected when the tilt is set too high.
062 03 03 06 Application for navigation
LO Describe the navigation function of the radar in the mapping mode.
LO Describe the use of the weather radar to avoid a thunderstorm (Cb).
LO Explain how turbulence (not CAT) can be detected by a modern weather radar.
LO Explain how wind shear can be detected by a modern weather radar.
062 03 04 00 Secondary surveillance radar and transponder
062 03 04 01 Principles
LO State that the ATC system is based on the replies provided by the airborne
transponders in response to interrogations from the ATC secondary radar.
LO State that the ground ATC secondary radar uses techniques which provide the ATC
X
with information that cannot be acquired by the primary radar.
LO State that an airborne transponder provides coded-reply signals in response to
X interrogation signals from the ground secondary radar and from aircraft equipped
with traffic alert and collision avoidance system (TCAS).
LO State the advantages of secondary surveillance radar (SSR) over a primary radar
regarding range and collected information due to transponder principal information
and active participation of the aircraft.
062 03 04 02 Modes and codes
LO State that the interrogator transmits its interrogations in the form of a series of
X
pulse pairs.
LO Name the interrogation modes:
Mode A and C, and successor Mode S;
Mode S.
LO State that the interrogation frequency and the reply frequency are different.
LO Explain that the decoding of the time interval between the pulse pairs determines
the operating mode of the transponder:
Mode A: transmission of aircraft transponder code;
Mode C: transmission of aircraft pressure altitude;
Mode S: selection of aircraft address and transmission of flight data for the
ground surveillance.
LO State that Mode A designation is a sequence of four digits which can be manually
selected from 4 096 available codes.
LO State that in Mode C reply, the pressure altitude is reported in 100-ft
increments.
LO State that in addition to the information provided, on request from ATC, a special
position identification (SPI) pulse can be transmitted but only as a result of a manual
selection by the pilot (IDENT button).
LO X State the need for compatibility of Mode S with Mode A and C.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 312 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
LO Explain that Mode S transponders receive interrogations from TCAS and SSR
ground stations.
LO State that Mode S interrogation contains either the aircraft address,
X
selective call or all-call address.
LO State that every aircraft is allocated an ICAO aircraft address, which is hard-
X
coded into the Mode S transponder (Mode S address).
LO Explain that a 24-bit address is used in all Mode S transmissions, so that every
interrogation can be directed to a specific aircraft.
LO State that Mode S can provide enhanced vertical tracking, using a 25-ft altitude
increment.
LO State that SSR can be used for automatic dependent surveillance — broadcast
(ADS-B).
062 03 04 03 Presentation and interpretation
LO State that an aircraft can be identified by a unique code.
LO State which information can be presented on the ATC display system:
pressure altitude;
flight level;
flight number or aircraft registration number;
GS.
LO Explain the use and function of the selector modes: OFF, Standby, ON (Mode A),
X
ALT (Mode A, C and S), TEST, and
LO of the reply lamp.
LO State that every aircraft is allocated an ICAO aircraft address which is hard-coded into
the airframe Mode S transponder (Mode S address).
062 04 00 00 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
062 05 00 00 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
Y. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
Z. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
AA. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
BB. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
CC. ICAO PANS-OPS Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
DD. JAR-OPS-1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
EE. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
FF. ICAO DOC 9643: Parallel Runway Operations
GG. ICAO DOC 9684: Manual on the Secondary Surveillance (SSR) Systems
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 313 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
HH. ICAO Doc 9688: Manual on Mode Specific Services
II. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
JJ. ICAO DOC.9613: Performance Based Navigation Manua
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 314 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
3.21. PTS/PL254: GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSSs)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 06 00 00 GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSSs) 14
062 06 01 00 Global navigation satellite systems (GNSSs)
062 06 01 01 General
LO State that there are four main GNSSs. These are:
USA NAVigation System with Timing And Ranging
Global Positioning System (NAVSTAR GPS);
Russian GLObal NAvigation Satellite System (GLONASS);
European Galileo (under construction);
Chinese BeiDou (under construction).
LO State that all four systems (will) consist of a constellation of satellites which can be
X
used by a suitably equipped receiver to determine position.
062 06 01 02 Operation
Global navigation satellite system (GNSS)
LO State that there are currently two modes of operation: standard positioning
service (SPS) for civilian users, and precise positioning service (PPS) for
authorized users.
LO SPS was originally designed to provide civilian users with a less accurate
positioning capability than PPS.
LO Name the three GNSS segments as follows:
space segment;
X control segment;
user segment.
LO Space segment (example: NAVSTAR GPS)
LO State that each satellite broadcasts ranging signals on two UHF frequencies: L1
and L2.
LO State that SPS is a positioning and timing service provided on frequency
L1.
LO State that PPS uses both frequencies L1 and L2.
LO State that the satellites transmit a coded signal used for ranging, identification
X
(satellite individual PRN code), timing and navigation.
LO State that the navigation message contains:
satellite clock correction parameters;
X Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) parameters;
an ionospheric model;
satellite health data.
LO State that an ionospheric model is used to calculate the time delay of the signal
X
travelling through the ionosphere.
LO X State that two codes are transmitted on the L1 frequency,
LO namely a coarse acquisition (C/A) code and a precision (P)
code. The P code is not used for standard positioning service (SPS).
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 315 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
LO State that satellites are equipped with atomic clocks which allow the system to
X
keep very accurate time reference.
LO Control segment
LO State that the control segment comprises:
a master control station;
X a ground antenna;
monitoring stations.
LO State that the control segment provides:
monitoring of the constellation status;
X correction of orbital parameters;
navigation data uploading.
LO User segment
LO State that GNSS supplies three-dimensional position fixes and speed data, plus a
X
precise time reference.
LO State that a GNSS receiver is able to determine the distance to a satellite by
X determining the difference between the time of transmission by the satellite and the
time of reception.
LO State that the initial distance calculated to the satellites is called pseudo-range
X because the difference between the GNSS receiver and the satellite time references
initially creates an erroneous range.
LO X State that each range defines a sphere with its centre at the satellite.
LO State that there are four unknown parameters (x, y, z and
X Δt) (receiver clock error) which require the measurement of ranges to four different
satellites in order to get the position.
LO State that the GNSS receiver is able to synchronise to the correct time reference
X
when receiving four satellites.
LO State that the receiver is able to calculate aircraft ground speed using the space
X
vehicle (SV) Doppler frequency shift or the change in receiver position over time.
LO NAVigation System with Timing And Ranging Global Positioning System
(NAVSTAR GPS) integrity
LO Define ‘receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM)’ as a technique that
ensures the integrity of the provided data by redundant measurements.
LO State that RAIM is achieved by consistency checks among range measurements.
LO State that basic RAIM requires five satellites. A sixth one is for isolating a faulty
satellite from the navigation solution.
LO State that agreements have been concluded between the appropriate agencies for
the compatibility and interoperability by any approved user of NAVSTAR and
GLONASS systems.
LO State that the different GNSSs use different data with respect to reference
X
systems, orbital data, and navigation services.
062 06 01 03 Errors and factors affecting accuracy
LO List the most significant factors that affect accuracy:
ionospheric propagation delay;
dilution of position;
satellite clock error;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 316 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
satellite orbital variations;
multipath.
LO State that a user equivalent range error (UERE) can be computed from all these
factors.
LO State that the error from the ionospheric propagation delay (IPD) can be reduced by
X modelling, using a model of the ionosphere, or can almost be eliminated by using two
frequencies.
LO X State that ionospheric delay is the most significant error.
LO State that dilution of position arises from the geometry and number of satellites in
view. It is called geometric dilution of precision (GDOP).
LO State that the UERE in combination with the geometric dilution of precision (GDOP)
allows for an estimation of position accuracy.
LO State that errors in the satellite orbits are due to:
X solar winds;
gravitation of the Sun and the Moon.
062 06 02 00 Ground-, satellite- and airborne-based augmentation systems
062 06 02 01 Ground-based augmentation systems (GBASs)
LO Explain the principle of a GBAS: to measure on the ground the errors in the
signals transmitted by GNSS satellites and relay the measured errors to the user for
correction.
LO State that the ICAO GBAS standard is based on this technique through the use of a
X
data link in the VHF band of ILS–VOR systems (108–118 MHz).
LO State that for a GBAS station the coverage is about 20 NM.
LO State that GBAS provides information for guidance in the terminal area, and for three-
dimensional guidance in the final approach segment (FAS) by transmitting the FAS
data block.
LO State that one ground station can support all the aircraft subsystems within its
coverage providing the aircraft with approach data, corrections and integrity
information for GNSS satellites in view via a VHF data broadcast (VDB).
LO State that the minimum software designed coverage area is 10° on either side of the
X final approach path to a distance between 15 and 20 NM, and 35° on either side of
the final approach path up to a distance of 15 NM.
LO State that outside this area the FAS data of GBAS is not used.
LO State that GBAS based on GPS is sometimes called local area augmentation
X
system (LAAS).
LO State that a GBAS-based approach is called GLS approach (GLS-GNSS
landing system).
062 06 02 02 Satellite-based augmentation systems (SBASs)
LO Explain the principle of an SBAS: to measure on the ground the errors in the
X signals received from the satellites and transmit differential corrections and integrity
messages for navigation satellites.
LO X State that the frequency band of the data link is identical to that of the GPS signals.
LO Explain that the use of geostationary satellites enables messages to be broadcast
X
over very wide areas.
LO X State that pseudo-range measurements to these geostationary satellites can also be
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 317 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
made, as if they were GPS satellites.
LO State that SBAS consists of two elements:
X ground infrastructure (monitoring and processing stations);
communication satellites.
LO State that SBAS allows the implementation of three- dimensional Type A and
Type B approaches.
LO State the following examples of SBAS:
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) in western Europe
and the Mediterranean;
X wide area augmentation system (WAAS) in the USA;
multi-functional transport satellite (MTSAT)-based
augmentation system (MSAS) in Japan;
GPS and geostationary earth orbit augmented navigation (GAGAN) in India.
LO X State that SBAS is designed to significantly improve accuracy and integrity.
LO Explain that integrity and safety are improved by alerting SBAS users within 6
seconds if a GPS malfunction occurs.
062 06 02 03 Intentionally left blank
062 06 02 04 Airborne-based augmentation systems (ABASs)
LO Explain the principle of ABAS: to use redundant elements within the GPS constellation
(e.g. multiplicity of distance measurements to various satellites) or the combination
of GNSS measurements with those of other navigation sensors (such as inertial
systems) in order to develop integrity control.
LO State that the type of ABAS using only GNSS information is named receiver
autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM).
LO State that a system using information from additional onboard sensors is named
aircraft autonomous integrity monitoring (AAIM).
LO Explain that the typical sensors used are barometric altimeter and inertial
reference system (IRS).
LO Define ‘receiver autonomous integrity monitoring’ (RAIM) as a technique that
ensures the integrity of the provided data by redundant measurements.
LO State that RAIM is achieved by consistency checks among range measurements.
LO State that basic RAIM requires five satellites. A sixth one is for isolating a faulty
satellite from the navigation solution.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
KK. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
LL. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
MM. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 318 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
NN. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
OO. ICAO PANS-OPS Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
PP. JAR-OPS-1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
QQ. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
RR. ICAO DOC 9643: Parallel Runway Operations
SS. ICAO DOC 9684: Manual on the Secondary Surveillance (SSR) Systems
TT. ICAO Doc 9688: Manual on Mode Specific Services
UU. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
VV. ICAO DOC.9613: Performance Based Navigation Manua
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 319 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
3.22. PTS/PL255: PERFORMANCE-BASED NAVIGATION (PBN)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
062 07 00 00 PERFORMANCE-BASED NAVIGATION (PBN) 11
062 07 01 00 Performance-based navigation (PBN) concept (as described in ICAO Doc 9613)
062 07 01 01 PBN principles
LO List the factors used to define area navigation (RNAV) or required navigation
performance (RNP) system performance requirements (accuracy, integrity and
continuity).
LO State that these RNAV and RNP systems are necessary to optimise the utilisation of
X
available airspace.
LO State that it is necessary for flight crew and air traffic controllers to be aware of the
on-board RNAV or RNP system capabilities in order to determine whether the
performance of the RNAV or RNP system is appropriate for the specific airspace
requirements.
LO Define accuracy as the conformance of the true position and the required
position.
LO Define continuity as the capability of the system to perform its function without
unscheduled interruptions during the intended operation.
LO Define integrity as a measure of the trust that can be placed in the correctness
of the information supplied by the total system. Integrity includes the ability of a
system to provide timely and valid alerts to the user.
LO State that, unlike conventional navigation, PBN is not sensor-specific.
LO Explain the difference between raw data and computed data.
LO Define availability as the percentage of time (annually) during which the system
is available for use.
062 07 01 02 PBN components
LO List the components of PBN as navigational aid (NAVAID) infrastructure, navigation
specification and navigation application.
062 07 01 03 PBN scope
LO State that in oceanic/remote, en-route and terminal phases of flight, PBN is limited
to operations with linear lateral performance requirements and time constraints.
LO State that in the approach phases of flight, PBN accommodates both linear and
angular laterally guided operations, and explain the difference between the two.
062 07 02 00 Navigation specifications
062 07 02 01 Area navigation (RNAV) and required navigation performance (RNP)
LO State the difference between RNAV and RNP in terms of the requirement for on-
board performance monitoring and alerting.
062 07 02 02 Navigation functional requirements
LO List the basic functional requirements of the RNAV and RNP specifications
X (continuous indication of lateral deviation, distance/bearing to active waypoint, GS
or time to active waypoint, navigation data storage and failure indication).
062 07 02 03 Designation of RNP and RNAV specifications
LO Interpret X in RNAV X or RNP X as the lateral navigation (LNAV) accuracy (total system
error) in nautical miles, which is expected to be achieved at least 95 % of the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 320 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
flight time by the population of aircraft operating within the given airspace, route or
procedure.
LO State that aircraft approved to the more stringent accuracy requirements may
not necessarily meet some of the functional requirements of the navigation
specification that has a less stringent accuracy requirement.
LO State that RNAV 10 and RNP 4 are used in the oceanic/remote phase of
flight.
LO State that RNAV 5 is used in the en-route and arrival phases of flight.
LO State that RNAV 2 and RNP 2 are also used as navigation specifications.
LO State that RNP 2 is used in the en-route and oceanic/remote phases
of flight.
LO State that RNAV 2 might be used in the en-route continental, arrival and
departure phases of flight.
LO State that RNAV 1 and RNP 1 are used in the arrival and departure phases of
flight.
LO State that required navigation performance approach (RNP APCH) is used in the
approach phase of flight.
LO State that required navigation performance authorisation required approach (RNP AR
APCH) is used in the approach phase of flight.
LO State that RNP 0.3 navigation specification is used in all phases of flight except for
oceanic/remote and final approach, primarily for helicopters.
LO State that RNAV 1, RNP 1 and RNP 0.3 may also be used in en-route phases of low-
level instrument flight rule (IFR) helicopter flights.
062 07 03 00 Use of performance-based navigation (PBN)
062 07 03 01 Intentionally left blank
062 07 03 02 Intentionally left blank
062 07 03 03 Specific RNAV and RNP system functions
LO Recognise the definition of radius to fix (RF) leg.
LO Recognise the definition of a fixed radius transition (FRT).
LO State the importance of respecting the flight director guidance and the speed
constraints associated with an RF procedure.
LO Explain the difference between a fly-by-turn and a fly- over.
LO State that the Aeronautical Radio, Incorporated (ARINC) 424 path terminators set
the standards for coding the SIDs, STARs and instrument approach procedures
(IAPs) from the official published government source documentation into the ARINC
navigation database format.
LO State that the path terminators define a specific type of termination of the
previous flight path.
LO Define the term ‘offset flight path’.
062 07 03 04 Intentionally left blank
062 07 04 00 Performance-based navigation (PBN) operations
062 07 04 01 Performance-based navigation (PBN) principles
LO Define ‘path definition error’ (PDE).
LO Define ‘flight technical error’ (FTE) and state that the FTE is the error in following the
prescribed path, either by the auto-flight system or by the pilot.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 321 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
LO Define ‘navigation system error’ (NSE) and state that the accuracy of a navigation
system may be referred to as NSE.
LO Define ‘total system error’ (TSE) and state that the geometric sum of the
PDE, FTE and NSE equals the TSE.
LO State that navigation accuracy depends on the TSE.
062 07 04 02 On-board performance monitoring and alerting
LO State that on-board performance monitoring and alerting
LO of flight technical errors is managed by on-board systems
or flight crew procedures.
LO State that on-board performance monitoring and alerting of navigation system errors
is a requirement of on-board equipment for RNP.
LO State that, dependent on the navigation sensor, the estimated position error (EPE) is
compared with the required navigation specification.
LO Explain how a navigation system assesses the EPE.
LO Give an example of how the loss of the ability to operate in RNP airspace may be
indicated by the navigation system.
LO State that on-board performance monitoring and alerting of path definition error is
managed by gross reasonableness checks of navigation data.
062 07 04 03 Abnormal situations
LO State that abnormal and contingency procedures are to be used in case of loss of
the PBN capability.
062 07 04 04 Database management
LO State that, unless otherwise specified in the operations documentation or acceptable
means of compliance (AMCs), the navigational database must be valid for the current
aeronautical information regulation and control (AIRAC) cycle.
062 07 05 00 Requirements of specific RNAV and RNP specifications
062 07 05 01 RNAV 10
LO State that RNAV 10 requires that aircraft operating in oceanic and remote areas
be equipped with at least two independent and serviceable long-range navigation
systems (LRNSs) comprising an INS, an inertial reference system (IRS)/flight
management system (FMS) or a GNSS.
LO State that operators may extend their RNAV 10 navigation capability time
by updating.
062 07 05 02 RNAV 5
LO State that manual data entry is acceptable for RNAV 5.
062 07 05 03 RNAV 1/RNAV 2/RNP 1/RNP 2
LO State that pilots must not fly an RNAV 1, RNAV 2, RNP 1 or RNP 2 standard
instrument departure (SID) or standard instrument arrival (STAR) unless it is
retrievable by route name from the on-board navigation database and conforms to
the charted route.
LO State that the route may subsequently be modified through the insertion (from the
database) or deletion of specific waypoints in response to ATC clearances.
LO State that the manual entry, or creation of new waypoints by manual entry,
of either latitude and longitude or place/bearing/distance values is not permitted.
062 07 05 04 Intentionally left blank
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 322 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
062 07 05 05 Required navigation performance approach (RNP APCH)
LO State that pilots must not fly an RNP APCH unless it is retrievable by procedure name
from the on-board navigation database and conforms to the charted procedure.
LO State that an RNP APCH to LNAV minima is a non- precision IAP designed for two-
dimensional approach operations.
LO State that an RNP APCH to lateral navigation (LNAV)/vertical navigation (VNAV)
minima has lateral guidance based on GNSS and vertical guidance based on either
SBAS or barometric vertical navigation (Baro- VNAV).
LO State that an RNP APCH to LNAV/VNAV minima may only be conducted with vertical
guidance certified for the purpose.
LO Explain why an RNP APCH to LNAV/VNAV minima based on Baro-VNAV may only
be conducted when the aerodrome temperature is within a promulgated range if the
barometric input is not automatically temperature- compensated.
LO State that the correct altimeter setting is critical for the safe conduct of an RNP
APCH using Baro-VNAV.
LO State that an RNP APCH to LNAV/VNAV minima is a three-dimensional
operation.
LO State that an RNP APCH to localiser performance with vertical guidance (LPV) minima
is a three-dimensional operation.
LO State that RNP APCH to LPV minima requires a final approach segment (FAS)
data block.
LO State that RNP approaches to LPV minima require SBAS.
LO State that the FAS data block is a standard data format to describe the final
approach path.
062 07 05 06 Required navigation performance authorisation required approach (RNP AR APCH)
LO State that RNP AR APCH requires authorisation.
062 07 05 07 Advanced required navigation performance (A-RNP)
LO State that A-RNP incorporates the navigation specifications RNAV 5, RNAV 2, RNAV
1, RNP 2, RNP 1 and RNP APCH.
062 07 05 08 PBN point-in-space (PinS) departure
LO State that a PinS departure is a departure procedure designed for helicopters
only.
LO State that a PinS departure procedure includes either a
‘proceed VFR’ or a ‘proceed visually’ instruction from the landing location to the
initial departure fix (IDF).
LO Recognise the differences in the instructions ‘proceed VFR’
and ‘proceed visually’.
062 07 05 09 PBN point-in-space (PinS) approach
LO State that a PinS approach procedure is an instrument RNP APCH procedure
designed for helicopters only, and that it may be published with LNAV minima or
LPV minima.
LO State that a PinS approach procedure includes either a
‘proceed VFR’ or a ‘proceed visually’ instruction from the
missed approach point (MAPt) to a landing location.
LO Recognise the differences between ‘proceed VFR’ and
‘proceed visually’.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 323 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-discussion
10. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
WW. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
XX. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
YY. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
ZZ. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
AAA. ICAO PANS-OPS Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
BBB. JAR-OPS-1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
CCC. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
DDD. ICAO DOC 9643: Parallel Runway Operations
EEE. ICAO DOC 9684: Manual on the Secondary Surveillance (SSR) Systems
FFF. ICAO Doc 9688: Manual on Mode Specific Services
GGG. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
HHH. ICAO DOC.9613: Performance Based Navigation Manua
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 324 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
3.23. PTS/PL256: AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS – PANS-OPS FLIGHT
PROCEDURES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 06 00 00 AIRCRAFT OPERATIONS – PANS-OPS FLIGHT PROCEDURES 14
010 06 01 00 Intentionally left blank
Definitions and abbreviations (PANS-OPS Flight Procedures, ICAO Doc 8168,
010 06 02 00
Volume I)
010 06 02 01 Definitions and abbreviations — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume 1
LO Recall all definitions included in ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1,
X Chapter 1.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1, Chapter 1
LO Interpret all abbreviations and acronyms as shown in ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I,
X Part I, Section 1, Chapter 2.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1, Chapter 2
010 06 03 00 Departure procedures — (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
010 06 03 01 General criteria (assuming all engines operating)
LO State the factors dictating the design of instrument departure procedures.
X Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 2, Chapter 1, 1.1
General
LO Explain in which situations the criteria for omnidirectional departures are
applied.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 3, Chapter 1, 1.3
Instrument departure procedure: 1.3.1; 1.3.2;
1.3.3
010 06 03 02 Standard instrument departures (SIDs)
LO Explain the terms ‘straight departure’ and ‘turning departure’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 3, Chapter 2, 2.1
General; 2.2 Straight Departures; 2.3 Turning
(excluding maximum speeds)
010 06 03 03 Omnidirectional departures
LO Explain when the ‘omnidirectional method’ is used for departure.
010 06 03 04 Intentionally left blank
010 06 03 05 Intentionally left blank
010 06 04 00 Approach procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 04 01 General criteria
LO State the general criteria (except ‘Speeds for procedure calculations’) of the
approach procedure design:
instrument approach areas;
accuracy of fixes;
fixes formed by intersections;
intersection fix-tolerance factors;
other fix-tolerance factors;
descent gradient.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 325 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1
LO Name the five possible segments of an instrument approach procedure.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.2.2
Segments of the approach procedure
LO State the reasons for establishing aircraft categories for the approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.3
Categories of aircraft
LO State the maximum angle between the final approach track and the extended RWY
centre line to still consider a non- precision approach as being a ‘straight-in approach’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.2.3 Types of
approach
LO State the minimum obstacle clearance (MOC) provided by the minimum sector
altitudes (MSAs) established for an aerodrome.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 2, 12.3 Minimum
sector altitudes (MSA)/terminal arrival altitudes (TAA)
LO State that a pilot shall apply wind corrections when carrying out an instrument
X
approach procedure.
LO State the most significant factor influencing the conduct of instrument approach
procedures.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.2.1 External
factors influencing the approach procedure
LO Explain why a pilot should not descend below obstacle clearance
altitude/height (OCA/H), which are established for:
precision approach procedures;
non-precision approach procedures;
visual (circling) procedures;
APV approach procedures.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.5 Obstacle
clearance altitude/height (OCA/H)
LO Describe in general terms the relevant factors for the calculation of
operational minima.
LO Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.6
Factors affecting operational minima
LO State the following acronyms in plain language:
DA, DH, OCA, OCH, MDA, MDH, MOC, DA/H, OCA/H, MDA/H.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1
LO Explain the relationship between the terms:
DA, DH, OCA, OCH, MDA, MDH, MOC, DA/H, OCA/H, and
MDA/H.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1
010 06 04 02 Approach procedure design
LO Describe how the vertical cross section for each of the five approach segments is
broken down into the various areas.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1
LO State within which area of the cross section the minimum obstacle clearance (MOC)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 326 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
is provided for the whole width of the area.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 2
LO Define the terms ‘IAF’, ‘IF’, ‘FAF’, ‘FAP’, ‘MAPt’ and ‘TP’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of measurement
LO State the accuracy of facilities providing track (VHF omnidirectional radio range
X (VOR), instrument landing system (ILS), non-directional beacon (NDB)).
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 2,
LO Chapter 2, Table I-2-2-1. System use accuracy (2 SD) of facility providing track
guidance and facility not providing track guidance
LO State the optimum descent gradient (preferred for a precision approach) in
degrees and per cent.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.9 Descent
gradient
010 06 04 03 Arrival and approach segments
LO Name the five standard segments of an instrument approach procedure, and state
the beginning and end for each of them.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 1, 1.2 Instrument
approach procedure
LO Describe where an arrival route normally ends.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 2 Arrival
segment
LO State the main task of the initial approach segment.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 3 Initial
approach segment
LO Describe the maximum angle of interception between the initial approach segment
and the intermediate approach segment (provided at the intermediate fix) for a
precision approach and a non-precision approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 3 Initial approach
segment
LO Describe the main task of the intermediate approach segment.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 4
Intermediate approach segment
LO State the main task of the final approach segment.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 5 Final
approach segment
LO Name the two possible aims of a final approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 5 Final
approach segment
LO Explain the term ‘final approach point’ in case of an ILS approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 5 Final
approach segment
LO State what happens if an ILS glide path (GP) becomes inoperative during the
approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 5 Final
approach segment
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 327 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
010 06 04 04 Missed approach
LO Name the three phases of a missed approach procedure and describe their
geometric limits.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 6 Missed
approach segment
LO State the main task of a missed approach procedure.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 6 Missed
approach segment
LO Define the term ‘missed approach point (MAPt)’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of measurement
LO Describe how an MAPt may be established in an approach procedure.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 6 Missed
approach segment
LO State the pilot’s action if, upon reaching the MAPt, the required visual
reference is not established.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 6 Missed
approach segment
LO Describe what a pilot is expected to do in the event a missed approach is initiated
prior to arriving at the MAPt.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 6 Missed
approach segment
LO State whether the pilot is obliged to cross the MAPt at the height (HGT)/altitude (ALT)
required by the procedure or whether they are allowed to cross the MAPt at a
HGT/ALT greater than that required by the procedure.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 6 Missed approach
segment
010 06 04 05 Visual manoeuvring (circling) in the vicinity of the aerodrome (AD)
LO Describe what is meant by ‘visual manoeuvring (circling)’. Source: ICAO Doc
8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual manoeuvring (circling)
area
LO Describe how a prominent obstacle in the visual manoeuvring (circling) area
outside the final approach and missed approach area has to be considered for the
visual circling.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual
manoeuvring (circling) area
LO State for which category of aircraft the obstacle clearance altitude/height (OCA/H)
within an established visual manoeuvring (circling) area is determined.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual
manoeuvring (circling) area
LO Describe how the minimum descent altitude/height (MDA/H) is specified for visual
manoeuvring (circling) if the OCA/H is known.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual
manoeuvring (circling) area
LO State the conditions to be fulfilled before descending below
MDA/H in a visual manoeuvring (circling) approach.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 328 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual
manoeuvring (circling) area
LO Explain why there can be no single procedure designed that will cater for
conducting a circling approach in every situation.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual
manoeuvring (circling) area
LO State how the pilot is expected to act after initial visual contact during a visual
manoeuvring (circling).
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual
manoeuvring (circling) area
LO Describe what the pilot is expected to do if visual reference is lost while circling to
land from an instrument approach. Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I,
Section 4, Chapter 7 Visual manoeuvring (circling) area
RNAV approach procedures based on VOR/distance- measuring equipment
010 06 04 06
(DME)
LO Describe the provisions that must be fulfilled before carrying out VOR/DME RNAV
approaches.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part II, Section 3, Chapter 3
LO Explain the disadvantages of the VOR/DME RNAV system compared to a
DME/DME RNAV approach.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part II, Section 3, Chapter 3
LO List the factors the navigational accuracy of the VOR/DME RNAV system depends
on.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part II, Section 3, Chapter 3
LO State whether the VOR/DME RNAV approach is a precision or a non-precision
procedure.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part II, Section 3, Chapter 3
010 06 05 00 Holding procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 05 01 Entry and holding
LO Explain why deviations from the in-flight procedures of a holding established in
accordance with ICAO Doc 8168 are dangerous.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6
LO State that if for any reason a pilot is unable to conform to the procedures for normal
conditions laid down for any particular holding pattern, this pilot should advise
ATC as early as possible.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Describe the shape and terminology associated with the holding pattern.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO State the bank angle and rate of turn to be used whilst flying in a holding pattern.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Explain why a pilot in a holding pattern should attempt to maintain tracks and
how this can be achieved.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Describe where outbound timing begins in a holding pattern. Source: ICAO Doc
8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 329 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
LO State where the outbound leg in a holding terminates if the outbound leg is based
on DME.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Describe the three heading entry sectors for entries into a holding pattern.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Describe the terms ‘parallel entry’, ‘offset entry’ and ‘direct entry’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Determine the correct entry procedure for a given holding pattern.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO State the still-air time for flying the outbound entry heading with or without DME.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
LO Describe what the pilot is expected to do when clearance is received specifying the
time of departure from the holding point.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 1
010 06 05 02 Obstacle clearance
LO Describe the layout of the basic holding area, entry area and buffer area of a
X holding pattern.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 2
LO State which obstacle clearance is provided by a minimum permissible holding level
referring to the holding area, the buffer area (general only) and over high terrain or
X in mountainous areas.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 6, Chapter 2
010 06 06 00 Altimeter-setting procedures — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 06 01 Basic requirements and procedures
LO Describe the two main objectives of altimeter settings. Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 1
LO Define the terms ‘QNH’ and ‘QFE’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Describe the different terms for ALT or flight levels (FLs) respectively, which are the
references during climb or descent to change the altimeter settings from QNH
to 1013.2 hPa and vice versa.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Define the term ‘flight level (FL)’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of measurement
LO State where FL zero shall be located.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO State the interval by which consecutive FLs shall be separated.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Describe how FLs are defined.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Define the term ‘transition altitude (TA)’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of measurement
LO State how TAs shall normally be specified.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 330 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1,
Chapter 2
LO Explain how the HGT of the TA is calculated and expressed in practice.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO State where TAs shall be published.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Define the term ‘transition level (TRL)’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of measurement
LO State when the TRL is normally passed on to the aircraft. Source: ICAO Doc 8168,
Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO State how the vertical position of the aircraft shall be expressed at or below
the TA and TRL.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Define the term ‘transition layer’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part I, Section 1
Definitions, abbreviations and acronyms and units of measurement
LO Describe when the vertical position of an aircraft passing through the transition layer
shall be expressed in terms of FLs and when in terms of ALT.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO State when the QNH altimeter setting shall be made available to departing
aircraft.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO Explain when the vertical separation of an aircraft during en- route flight shall be
assessed in terms of ALT and when in terms of FLs.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
LO Explain when, in air–ground communications during an en- route flight, the vertical
position of an aircraft shall be expressed in terms of ALT and when in terms of FLs.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
LO Describe why QNH altimeter-setting reports should be provided from
sufficient locations.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
LO State how a QNH altimeter setting shall be made available to aircraft approaching a
controlled aerodrome (AD) for landing. Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III,
Section 1, Chapter 2
LO State under which circumstances the vertical position of an aircraft above the TRL
may be referenced in ALT.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
010 06 06 02 Procedures for operators and pilots
LO State on which setting at least one altimeter shall be set prior to take-off.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
LO State where during the climb the altimeter setting shall be changed from QNH to
1013.2 hPa.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
LO Describe when a pilot of an aircraft intending to land at an AD shall obtain the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 331 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
TRL.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
LO Describe when a pilot of an aircraft intending to land at an AD shall obtain the
actual QNH altimeter setting.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
LO State where the altimeter settings shall be changed from 1013.2 hPa to QNH
during descent for landing.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 3
010 06 07 00 Parallel or near-parallel instrument RWYs — ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 07 01 Simultaneous operation on parallel or near-parallel instrument RWYs
LO Describe the difference between independent and dependent parallel
X approaches.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
LO Describe the following different operations:
simultaneous instrument departures;
segregated parallel approaches/departures;
semi-mixed and mixed operations.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
LO Describe the terms ‘normal operating zone (NOZ)’ and ‘no transgression zone
(NTZ)’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
LO State the aircraft avionics requirements for conducting parallel instrument
approaches.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
LO State where guidance material may be located for simultaneous operations on parallel
or near-parallel instrument runways.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168
LO State the radar requirements for simultaneous, independent, and parallel instrument
approaches, and how weather conditions effect these.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
LO State the maximum angle of interception for an ILS localiser course (CRS) or
microwave landing system (MLS) final approach track in case of simultaneous,
independent, and parallel instrument approaches.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
LO Describe the special conditions for tracks on missed
approach procedures and departures in case of simultaneous or parallel operations.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1
Secondary surveillance radar (transponder) operating procedures — ICAO
010 06 08 00
Doc 8168, Volume I
010 06 08 01 Operation of transponders
LO State when and where the pilot shall operate the transponder.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
LO State the modes and codes that the pilot shall operate in the absence of any ATC
directions or regional air navigation agreements.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 332 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
LO State when the pilot shall operate Mode C.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
LO State when the pilot shall ‘SQUAWK IDENT’.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
LO State the transponder code to indicate:
a state of emergency;
a COM failure;
unlawful interference.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
LO Describe the consequences of a transponder failure in flight. Source: ICAO Doc
8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
LO State the primary action of the pilot in the case of an unserviceable transponder
before departure when no repair or replacement at the given AD is possible.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
LO State when the pilot shall operate Mode S.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 1
010 06 08 02 Operation of airborne collision avoidance system (ACAS) equipment
LO Describe the main reason for using ACAS.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3 , Chapter 3, 3.1 ACAS
overview
LO State whether the ‘use of ACAS indications’ described in ICAO Doc 8168 is
absolutely mandatory.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of
ACAS indications
LO Explain the pilots’ reaction required to allow ACAS to fulfil its role of assisting pilots
in the avoidance of potential collisions. Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part
III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of ACAS indications
LO Explain why pilots shall not manoeuvre their aircraft in response to traffic
advisories (TAs) only.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of
ACAS indications
LO Explain the significance of TAs in view of possible resolution advisories (RAs).
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of
ACAS indications
LO State why a pilot should follow RAs immediately.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of
ACAS indications
LO List the reasons which may force a pilot to disregard an RA. Source: ICAO Doc
8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of ACAS indications
LO Explain the importance of instructing ATC immediately that an RA has been
followed.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of
ACAS indications
LO Explain the duties of a pilot with regard to ATC when an RA situation is resolved.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 333 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL252: IFR Navigation and Procedures
Source: ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I, Part III, Section 3, Chapter 3, 3.2 Use of
ACAS indications
010 06 09 00 REGULATION (EU) No 965/2012 ON AIR OPERATIONS
010 06 09 01 Regulation structure
LO Describe the subject matter and scope of th at Regulation.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Article 1 Subject matter and scope
LO State that Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 covers all types of commercial and non-
X
commercial operations.
010 06 09 02 Definitions (Annex I)
LO Recall the definitions in the Regulation not already given in ICAO PAN-OPS.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Article 2 Definitions
010 06 09 03 Part-SPA (Annex V), Part-NCC (Annex VI) and Part-NCO (Annex VII)
LO Describe the structure of these Parts.
LO Explain the main content of these Parts, except the operational
X
procedures.
Learning-Teaching Methods
11. Lecture-discussion
12. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
6. Written Test
Reference Materials
III. ICAO- Annex 10-Aeronautical Telecommunications Vol. I
JJJ. Jeppesen- Instrument Commercial: JAA ATPL Training Edition 2
KKK. FAA AC61-27C: Instrument Flying Handbook
LLL. FAA H-8261-1A: Instrument Procedures Handbook
MMM. ICAO PANS-OPS Flight Procedures (ICAO Doc 8168, Volume I)
NNN. JAR-OPS-1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
OOO. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
PPP. ICAO DOC 9643: Parallel Runway Operations
QQQ. ICAO DOC 9684: Manual on the Secondary Surveillance (SSR) Systems
RRR. ICAO Doc 9688: Manual on Mode Specific Services
SSS. FAA-H-8083-75: Pilots Handbook of Aeronautical Knowledge
TTT. ICAO DOC.9613: Performance Based Navigation Manua
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 334 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
3.24. PTS/PL283: BASIC AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
040 03 00 00 BASIC AVIATION PSYCHOLOGY 28
040 03 01 00 Human information processing
040 03 01 01 Attention and vigilance
LO Differentiate between ‘attention’ and ‘vigilance’.
LO Differentiate between ‘selected’ and ‘divided’ attention.
LO Define ‘hypovigilance’.
LO Identify the factors that may affect the state of vigilance.
LO List the factors that may forestall hypovigilance during flight.
LO Indicate the signs of reduced vigilance.
LO List the factors that affect a person’s level of attention.
040 03 01 02 Perception
LO Name the basis of the perceptual process.
LO Describe the mechanism of perception (‘bottom- up’/‘top-down’ process).
LO Illustrate why perception is subjective and state the relevant factors that influence
interpretation of perceived information.
LO Describe some basic perceptual illusions.
LO Illustrate some basic perceptual concepts.
LO Give examples where perception plays a decisive role in flight safety.
LO Stress how persuasive and believable mistaken perception can manifest itself both
for an individual and a group.
040 03 01 03 Memory
LO Explain the link between the types of memory (to include sensory, working/short-
term and long-term memory).
LO Describe the differences between the types of memory in terms of capacity and
retention time.
LO Justify the importance of sensory-store memories in processing information.
LO State the average maximum number of separate items that may be held in
working memory (5 ± 2).
LO Stress how interruption can affect short-term/working memory.
LO Give examples of items that are important for pilots to hold in working memory
during flight.
LO Describe how the capacity of the working-memory store may be increased.
LO State the subdivisions of long-term memory and give examples of their content.
LO Explain that skills are kept primarily in the long-term memory.
LO Describe amnesia and how it affects memory.
LO Name the common problems with both the long- and short-term memories and the
best methods to try to counteract them.
040 03 01 04 Response selection
Learning principles and techniques
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 335 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain and distinguish between the following basic forms of learning:
classic and operant conditioning (behaviouristic approach);
learning by insight (cognitive approach);
learning by imitating (modelling).
LO Recognise pilot-related examples as behaviouristic, cognitive or modelling
forms of learning.
LO State the factors that are necessary for and promote the quality of learning:
intrinsic motivation;
good mental health;
rehearsals for improvement of memory;
LO consciousness;
vigilance;
application in practical exercises.
LO Explain ways to facilitate the memorisation of information with the
following learning techniques:
mnemonics;
mental training.
LO Describe the advantage of planning and anticipation of future actions:
define the term ‘skills’;
state the three phases of learning a skill (Anderson: cognitive, associative
and autonomous phase).
LO Explain the term ‘motor programme’ or ‘mental schema’.
LO Describe the advantages and disadvantages of mental schemas.
LO Explain the Rasmussen model which describes the
guidance of a pilot’s behaviour in different situations.
LO State the possible problems or risks associated with skill-, rule- and knowledge-
based behaviour.
LO Motivation
LO Define ‘motivation’.
LO Explain the relationship between motivation and learning.
LO Explain the problems of over-motivation, especially in the context of the extreme
need to achieve.
040 03 02 00 Human error and reliability
040 03 02 01 Reliability of human behaviour
LO Name and explain the factors that influence human reliability.
040 03 02 02 Mental models and situation awareness
LO Define the term ‘situation awareness’.
LO List the cues that indicate loss of situation awareness and name the steps to
regain it.
LO List the factors that influence one’s situation awareness both positively and
negatively, and stress the importance of situation awareness in the context of flight
safety.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 336 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Define the term ‘mental model’ in relation to a surrounding complex
situation.
LO Describe the advantages/disadvantages of mental models.
LO Explain the relationship between personal ‘mental models’ and the creation
of cognitive illusions.
040 03 02 03 Theory and model of human error
LO Explain the concept of the ‘error chain’.
LO Differentiate between an isolated error and an error chain.
LO Distinguish between the main forms/types of errors
(i.e. slips, faults, omissions and violations).
LO Discuss the above errors and their relevance in flight.
LO Distinguish between an active and a latent error, and give examples.
040 03 02 04 Error generation
LO Distinguish between internal and external factors in error generation.
LO Identify possible sources of internal error generation.
LO Define and discuss the two errors associated with motor programmes (action
slip and environmental capture).
LO List the three main sources of external error generation in the flight crew
compartment.
LO Give examples to illustrate the following factors in external error generation in the
flight crew compartment:
ergonomics;
economics;
social environment.
LO Name the major goals in the design of human-centred human–machine
interfaces.
LO Define the term ‘error tolerance’.
LO List and describe the strategies that are used to reduce human error.
LO Describe the advantage of planning and the anticipation of future
actions.
040 03 03 00 Decision-making
040 03 03 01 Decision-making concepts
LO Define the terms ‘deciding’ and ‘decision-making’.
LO Describe the major factors on which decision-making should be based during
the course of a flight.
LO Describe the main human attributes with regard to decision-making.
LO Discuss the nature of bias and its influence on the decision-making process.
LO Describe the main error sources and limits in an individual’s decision-
making mechanism.
LO State the factors upon which an individual’s risk assessment is based.
LO Explain the relationship between risk assessment, commitment and pressure of time
in decision-making strategies.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 337 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the risks associated with dispersion or channelised attention during the
application of procedures requiring a high workload within a short time frame
(e.g. a go-around).
LO Describe the positive and negative influences exerted by other group members on
an individual’s decision- making process (risky shift).
LO Explain the general idea behind the creation of a model for decision-making based
upon:
definition of the aim;
collection of information;
risk assessment;
development of options;
evaluation of options;
decision;
implementation;
consequences;
review and feedback.
040 03 04 00 Avoiding and managing errors: cockpit management
040 03 04 01 Safety awareness
LO Justify the need for being aware of not only one’s own performance but that of
others before and during a flight and the possible consequences or risks.
040 03 04 02 Coordination (multi-crew concepts)
LO Name the objectives of the multi-crew concept.
LO State and explain the elements of multi-crew concepts.
LO Describe the concepts of ‘standard operating procedures’ (SOPs),
checklists and crew briefings.
LO Describe the purpose of and procedure for crew briefings.
LO Describe the purpose of and procedure for checklists.
LO Describe the function of communication in a coordinated team.
LO Explain the advantages of SOPs.
LO Explain how SOPs contribute to avoiding, reducing and managing threats and
errors.
LO Explain potential threats of SOPs, for example during company or type conversion
(e.g. motor programmes, company culture, hazardous attitudes, developed habits).
040 03 04 03 Cooperation
LO Distinguish between cooperation and coaction.
LO Define the term ‘group’.
LO Illustrate the influence of interdependence in a group.
LO List the advantages and disadvantages of teamwork.
LO Explain the term ‘synergy’.
LO Define the term ‘cohesion’.
LO Define the term ‘groupthink’.
LO State the essential conditions for good teamwork.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 338 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the function of role and norm in a group.
LO Name the different role patterns which occur in a group situation.
LO Explain how behaviour can be affected by the following factors:
persuasion;
conformity;
compliance;
obedience.
LO Distinguish between status and role.
LO Stress the inherent dangers of a situation where there is a mix of role and status
within the flight crew compartment.
LO Explain the terms ‘leadership’ and ‘followership’.
LO Describe the trans-cockpit authority gradient and its affiliated leadership styles (i.e.
autocratic, laissez-faire and synergistic).
LO Name the most important attributes of a positive leadership style.
040 03 04 04 Communication
LO Define the term ‘communication’.
LO List the most basic components of interpersonal communication.
LO Explain the advantages of in-person two-way communication as opposed
to one-way communication.
LO Explain the four elements of a great speech:
a great person;
a noteworthy event;
a compelling message;
a masterful delivery.
LO Name the importance of non-verbal communication.
LO Describe the general aspects of non-verbal communication.
LO Describe the advantages/disadvantages of implicit and explicit communication.
LO Describe the advantages and possible problems of using ‘social’ and
‘professional’ language in high- and low-workload situations.
LO Name and explain the major obstacles to effective communication.
LO Explain the difference between intrapersonal and interpersonal conflict.
LO Describe the escalation process in human conflict.
LO List the typical consequences of conflicts between crew members.
LO Explain the following terms as part of the communication practice with regard to
preventing or resolving conflicts:
inquiry;
active listening;
advocacy;
feedback;
metacommunication;
negotiation.
LO Describe the limitations of communication in situations of high workload in the
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 339 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
flight crew compartment in view of listening, verbal, non-verbal and visual effects.
040 03 05 00 Human behaviour
040 03 05 01 Personality, attitude and behaviour
LO Describe the factors that determine an individual’s behaviour.
LO Define and distinguish between ‘personality’, ‘attitude’ and ‘behaviour’.
LO State the origin of personality and attitude.
LO State that with behaviour good and bad habits can be formed.
LO Explain how behaviour is generally a product of personality, attitude and the
environment to which one was exposed at significant moments (childhood,
schooling and training).
LO State that personality differences and selfish attitude may have effects on flight
crew performance.
040 03 05 02 Individual differences in personality and motivation
LO Describe the individual differences in personality by means of a common trait model
(e.g. Eysenck’s personality factors) and use it to describe today’s ideal pilot.
LO Self-concept
LO Define the term ‘self-concept’ and the role it plays in any change of personality.
LO Explain how a self-concept of underconfidence may lead to an outward show of
aggression and self- assertiveness.
LO Self-discipline
LO Define ‘self-discipline’ and justify its importance for flight safety.
040 03 05 03 Identification of hazardous attitudes (error proneness)
LO Explain dangerous attitudes in aviation:
anti-authority;
macho;
impulsivity;
invulnerability;
complacency;
resignation.
LO Describe the personality, attitude and behaviour patterns of an ideal crew
member.
LO Summarise how a person’s attitude influences their work in the flight crew
compartment.
040 03 06 00 Human overload and underload
040 03 06 01 Arousal
LO Explain the term ‘arousal’.
LO Describe the relationship between arousal and performance.
LO Explain the circumstances under which underload may occur and its possible
dangers.
040 03 06 02 Stress
LO Explain the term ‘stress’ and why stress is a natural human reaction.
LO State that the physiological response to stress is generated by the ‘fight or
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 340 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
flight’ response.
LO Describe the function of the autonomic nervous system (ANS) in stress response.
LO Explain the relationship between arousal and stress.
LO State the relationship between stress and performance.
LO State the basic categories of stressors.
LO List and discuss the major environmental sources of stress in the flight crew
compartment.
LO Discuss the concept of ‘break point’ with regard to stress, overload and
performance.
LO Name the principal causes of domestic stress.
LO State that the stress experienced as a result of particular demands varies
among individuals.
LO Explain the factors that lead to differences in the levels of stress experienced by
individuals.
LO List the factors that influence the tolerance of stressors.
LO State that stress is a result of perceived demands and perceived ability.
LO Explain the relationship between stress and anxiety.
LO Describe the effects of anxiety on human performance.
LO State the general effect of acute stress on people.
LO Describe the relationship between stress, arousal and vigilance.
LO State the general effect of chronic stress and the biological reaction by means of the
three stages of the general adaptation syndrome (Selye): alarm, resistance, and
exhaustion.
LO Explain the differences between psychological, psychosomatic and
somatic stress reactions.
LO Name the typical common physiological and psychological symptoms of
human overload.
LO Describe the effects of stress on human behaviour.
LO Explain how stress is cumulative and how stress from one situation can be
transferred to a different situation.
LO Explain how successful completion of a stressful task will reduce the amount of
stress experienced when a similar situation arises in the future.
LO Describe the effect of human underload/overload on effectiveness in the flight
crew compartment.
LO List sources and symptoms of human underload.
040 03 06 03 Intentionally left blank
040 03 06 04 Intentionally left blank
040 03 06 05 Fatigue and stress management
LO Explain the term ‘fatigue’ and differentiate between the two types of fatigue
(short-term and chronic fatigue).
LO Name the causes of short-term and chronic fatigue.
LO Identify the symptoms and describe the effects of fatigue.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 341 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO List the strategies that prevent or delay the onset of fatigue and hypovigilance.
LO List and describe strategies for coping with stress factors and stress
reactions.
LO Distinguish between short-term and long-term methods of stress
management.
LO Give examples of short-term methods of stress management.
LO Give examples of long-term methods of coping with stress.
LO Describe the fatique risk management system (FRMS) as follows: a data-
driven means of continuously monitoring and managing fatigue - related
safety risks, based upon scientific principles and knowledge as well as
operational experience that aims to ensure relevant personnel are
performing at adequate levels of alertness.
040 03 07 00 Advanced cockpit automation
040 03 07 01 Advantages and disadvantages
LO Compare the two basic concepts of automation:
as per Boeing, where the pilot remains the last operator;
and as per Airbus, where automated systems can correct erroneous pilot action.
LO Explain the fundamental restrictions of autoflight systems to be lack of
creativity in unknown situations, and lack of personal motivation with
regard to safety.
LO List the principal strengths and weaknesses of pilot versus autopilot systems to
be creativity, decision - making, prioritisation of tasks, safety attitude versus
precision, reliability.
LO Explain the ‘ironies of automation’: designers’ errors due to wrong
interpretation of the data , leaving tasks to the pilot that are too complex to
automate, loss of manual and cognitive skills of the pilot.
State the necessity for regular training flights as one possible countermeasure.
LO Describe methods to overcome the drawbacks of autoflight systems to be loss of
manual flying capabilities, additional workload through programming, risk of
slips during programming , and hypovigilance during cruise.
040 03 07 02 Automation complacency
LO State the main weaknesses in the monitoring of automatic systems to be
hypovigilance during flight, and loss of flying skills.
LO Explain some basic flight crew errors and terms that arise with the introduction
of automation:
passive monitoring;
blinkered concentration;
confusion;
mode awareness.
LO Explain how the method of call-outs counteracts ineffective monitoring of
automatic systems.
LO Define ‘complacency’.
040 03 07 03 Working concepts
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 342 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL283: Basic Aviation Psychology
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain that the potential disadvantages of automation on crew communication
are loss of awareness of input errors, flight modes, failure detection, failure
comprehension, status of the aircraft and aircraft position.
LO Explain how the negative effects of automation on pilots may be alleviated by
degrading to a lower level of automation to recover comprehe nsion of the
flight status from VNAV/LNAV to ALT/HDG or even to manual flying.
LO Interpret the role of automation with respect to flight safety regarding the
basic principle of the use of
manual versus autoflight in normal operation s,
frequent changes in the flight profile, and in abnormal situations.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
2. Project presentations
Reference Materials
A. Briefings: A Human Factors Course for Pilots, by Reni Amalberti
B. ICAO Doc. 9683: Human Factors Training ManuaL
C. Human Performance and Limitations: CAE-Oxford Aviation Academy
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 343 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.25. PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING for VFR
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
030 00 00 00 FLIGHT PERFORMANCE AND PLANNING 9
033 00 00 00 FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
FLIGHT PLANNING FOR VFR FLIGHTS
033 01 00 00
Remark: Using the GSPRM VFR charts.
033 01 01 00 VFR navigation plan
033 01 01 01 Airspace, communication, visual and radio-navigation data from VFR charts
LO Select routes taking the following criteria into account:
classification of airspace;
restricted areas;
VFR semicircular rules;
visually conspicuous points;
radio-navigation aids.
LO Find the frequencies or identifiers of radio-navigation aids from charts.
LO Find the communication frequencies and call signs for the following:
control agencies and service facilities;
flight information service (FIS);
weather information stations;
automatic terminal information service (ATIS).
Planning courses, distances and cruising levels with VFR
033 01 01 02
charts
LO Choose visual waypoints in accordance with specified criteria (large, unique,
contrast, vertical extent, etc.).
LO Measure courses and distances from a VFR chart.
LO Find the highest obstacle within a given distance on either side of the course.
LO Find the following data from a VFR chart and transfer them to a navigation plan:
waypoints or turning points;
distances;
true/magnetic courses.
LO Calculate the minimum pressure altitude with a given obstacle clearance or true
altitude from a given altitude or pressure altitude from minimum grid-area altitude
using outside air temperature (OAT) and QNH.
LO Calculate the vertical or horizontal distance and time to climb or descend to/from
a given level or altitude with given data.
LO Explain how to determine the position of a significant VFR point for insertion
into a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) flight plan, using the distance and
bearing
from an existing significant point and using coordinates.
033 01 01 03 Aerodrome charts and aerodrome directory
LO Explain the reasons for studying the visual departure procedures and the
X
available approach procedures.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 344 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Find all visual procedures which can be expected at the departure, destination
and alternate aerodromes.
LO Find all relevant aeronautical and regulatory information required for VFR flight
planning from the aerodrome charts or aerodrome directory.
033 01 01 04 Intentionally left blank
033 01 01 05 Completion of navigation plan
LO Calculate the true airspeed (TAS) from given aircraft performance data,
altitude and OAT.
LO Calculate wind correction angles (WCAs), drift and ground speeds (GS).
LO Calculate individual and accumulated times for each leg to destination and
alternate aerodromes.
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Flight Planning: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
B. ICAO Annex 2: Rules of the Air
C. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft- Part I
D. ICAO DOC 4444: Air Traffic Management
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 345 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.26. PTS/PL302: FLIGHT PLANNING FOR IFR FLIGHTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
FLIGHT PLANNING FOR IFR FLIGHTS 9
033 02 00 00
Remark: Using the GSPRM IFR charts.
033 02 01 00 IFR navigation plan
033 02 01 01 Air traffic service (ATS) routes
LO Identify suitable routings by identifying all relevant aeronautical and regulatory
information (including information published in the national aeronautical
LO information publication (AIP)) required for IFR flight planning.
LO Identify and describe ATS routes (conventional, area navigation (RNAV), required
navigation performance (RNP), conditional routes (CDRs), and direct routes).
033 02 01 02 Courses and distances from en-route charts
LO Determine courses and distances.
LO Determine bearings and distances of waypoints from radio-navigation aids.
033 02 01 03 Altitudes
LO Define the following altitudes:
minimum en-route altitude (MEA);
minimum obstacle clearance altitude (MOCA);
minimum sector altitude (MSA);
minimum off-route altitude (MORA);
grid minimum off-route altitude (Grid MORA);
maximum authorised altitude (MAA);
minimum crossing altitude (MCA);
minimum holding altitude (MHA).
LO Extract the following altitudes from the chart(s):
MEA;
MOCA;
MSA;
MORA;
Grid MORA;
MAA;
MCA;
LO MHA.
LO State who is responsible for terrain separation during IFR flight inside and outside
controlled airspace.
LO State the minimum obstacle clearance requirements for en-route IFR flight inside
and outside controlled airspace.
LO State when a temperature error correction must be applied by either the pilot or
ATC.
LO Identify and explain the use of minimum radar vectoring altitudes.
LO Calculate the minimum pressure altitude required with a given obstacle clearance,
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 346 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
magnetic track, OAT, QNH and reduced vertical separation minimum (RVSM)/non-
RVSM information.
LO Calculate true altitude from a given pressure altitude and obstacle elevation using
OAT and QNH.
Standard instrument departure (SID) and standard instrument arrival
033 02 01 04
(STAR) routes
LO X State the reasons for studying SID and STAR charts.
LO State that SID and STAR charts show procedures only in a pictorial presentation
X
style which may not be true to scale.
LO Interpret all data and information represented on SID and STAR charts, particularly:
routings;
distances;
courses;
radials;
altitudes/levels;
frequencies;
restrictions;
RNAV waypoints and non-RNAV intersection;
fly-over and fly-by waypoints.
LO Identify SID and STAR charts which might be relevant for a planned flight.
LO Define SID and STAR for RNAV only.
LO Describe the difference between SID/STAR, RNAV SID/STAR and RNAV SID/STAR
overlay.
033 02 01 05 Instrument-approach charts
LO State the reasons for being familiar with instrument- approach procedures (IAPs) and
X
appropriate data for departure, destination and alternate aerodromes.
LO Select IAPs appropriate for departure, destination and alternate aerodromes.
LO Interpret all procedures, data and information represented on instrument-approach
charts, particularly:
courses and radials;
distances;
altitudes/levels/heights;
restrictions;
obstructions;
frequencies;
speeds and times;
decision altitudes/heights (DAs/Hs);
(DA/H) and minimum descent altitudes/heights (MDAs/Hs);
visibility and runway visual ranges (RVRs);
approach-light systems.
LO Explain the following IAP terms:
type A and B;
2D and 3D;
CAT I, II and III;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 347 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
precision approach (conventional and ground-based augmentation system (GBAS));
non-precision approach (conventional and required navigation performance
approach (RNP APCH) (lateral navigation (LNAV), LNAV/vertical navigation (VNAV),
localiser performance (LP), localiser performance with vertical guidance (LPV), and
required navigation performance authorisation required approach (RNP AR APCH));
approach procedure with vertical guidance (APV) (APV Baro and APV satellite-based
augmentation system (SBAS)).
033 02 01 06 Communications and radio-navigation planning data
LO Find the communication frequencies and call signs for aeronautical services for
IFR flights from en-route charts.
LO Find the frequency or identifiers of radio-navigation aids for IFR flights from en-route
charts.
033 02 01 07 Completion of a manual navigation plan
LO Complete a navigation plan with the courses, distances and frequencies taken from
charts.
LO Find the SID and STAR routes to be flown or to be expected.
LO Determine the position of top of climb (TOC) and top of descent (TOD) from
given appropriate data.
LO Determine variation and calculate magnetic/true courses.
LO Calculate TAS from given aircraft performance data, altitude and OAT.
LO Calculate wind correction angles (WCAs)/drift and ground speeds (GSs).
LO Calculate individual and accumulated times for each leg to destination and
alternate aerodromes.
LO Describe the advantages of global navigation satellite system/flight management
computer ( GNSS/FMC) equipment regarding:
automatic calculation and display of tracks and leg distances;
additional route information in the database (minimum altitudes, approach
procedures);
time and fuel estimates over waypoints;
ability to adjust speed to arrive over a waypoint at a defined time;
time and fuel revisions based on predicted and actual wind.
LO Describe the limitations of using GNSS/FMC equipment:
pilot-inputted errors (flight levels, wind, temperature, fuel);
the effect of other than predicted wind on fuel and time estimates;
the effect of aircraftʼs non-standard configuration on flight management system
(FMS) predictions.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 348 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Reference Materials
E. Jeppesen- Flight Planning: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
F. ICAO Annex 2: Rules of the Air
G. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft- Part I
H. ICAO DOC 4444: Air Traffic Management
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 349 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.27. PTS/PL303: Fuel planning
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
033 03 00 00 FUEL PLANNING — CAT.OP.MPA.106 and CAT.OP.MPA.150 plus AMC1, 2 and 3 9
033 03 01 00 General
033 03 01 01 Fuel planning (general)
LO Convert to volume, mass and density given in different units which are commonly
used in aviation.
LO Determine relevant data, such as fuel capacity, fuel flow/ consumption at different
power/thrust settings, altitudes and atmospheric conditions, from the flight manual.
LO Calculate the attainable flight time/range from given average fuel
flow/consumption and available amount of fuel.
LO Calculate the required fuel from given average fuel flow/consumption and
required time/range to be flown.
LO Calculate the required fuel for a VFR or IFR flight from given
LO forecast meteorological conditions.
LO State the minimum amount of remaining fuel required on arrival at the destination and
alternate aerodromes/ heliports.
LO Explain and describe how to calculate nautical air miles (NAM) from nautical
ground miles (NGM).
033 03 02 00 Pre-flight fuel planning for commercial flights
033 03 02 01 Taxi fuel
LO Determine the fuel required for engine start and taxiing by consulting the fuel-usage
tables or graphs from the flight manual taking into account all the relevant conditions.
033 03 02 02 Trip fuel
LO Define trip fuel and name the segments of flight for which the trip fuel is relevant.
LO Determine the trip fuel for the flight by using data from the fuel tables or graphs
from the flight manual.
033 03 02 03 Reserve fuel and its components
Contingency fuel
LO Explain the reasons for having contingency fuel.
LO Calculate the contingency fuel according to the applicable operational
requirements.
LO Alternate fuel
LO Explain the reasons and regulations for having alternate fuel
LO and name the segments of flight for which the alternate fuel is relevant.
LO Calculate the alternate fuel in accordance with the applicable operational
requirements and relevant data from the navigation plan and the flight manual.
LO Final reserve fuel
LO Explain the reasons and regulations for having final reserve fuel.
LO Calculate the final reserve fuel for an aircraft in accordance with the applicable
operational requirements and by using relevant data from the flight manual.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 350 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Additional fuel
LO Explain the reasons and regulations for having additional fuel.
LO Calculate the additional fuel for a flight in accordance with the applicable
operational requirements.
033 03 02 04 Extra fuel
LO Explain the reasons and regulations for having extra fuel in accordance with the
applicable operational requirements.
LO Calculate the possible extra fuel under given conditions.
LO Explain the fuel penalty incurred when loading extra fuel (i.e. the additional fuel
consumption due to increased mass).
Calculation of total fuel and completion of the fuel section of the navigation plan
033 03 02 05
(fuel plan)
LO Calculate the total fuel required for a given flight.
LO Complete the fuel plan.
033 03 03 00 Specific fuel-calculation procedures
033 03 03 01 Reduced contingency fuel procedure
LO Explain the reasons and regulations for reduced contingency fuel as stated in the
X
applicable operational requirements.
LO Calculate the contingency fuel and trip fuel required in accordance with the
reduced contingency fuel procedure.
033 03 03 02 Isolated aerodrome or heliport procedure
LO Explain the basic procedures for an isolated aerodrome or heliport as stated in the
X
applicable operational requirements.
LO Calculate the additional fuel for aeroplanes or helicopters according to the isolated
aerodrome or heliport procedures.
033 03 03 03 Predetermined-point procedure
LO Explain the basic idea of the predetermined-point procedure as stated in the
X
applicable operational requirements.
033 03 03 04 Fuel-tankering
LO Explain the basic idea of fuel-tankering procedures.
LO Calculate how much fuel to tank by using given appropriate graphs, tables or data.
033 03 03 05 Intentionally left blank
033 04 00 00 PRE-FLIGHT PREPARATION
033 04 01 00 Notice to airmen (NOTAM) briefing
033 04 01 01 Ground- and satellite-based facilities and services
LO Check that the ground- and satellite-based facilities and services required for the
planned flight are available and adequate.
033 04 01 02 Departure, destination and alternate aerodromes
LO Find and analyse the latest state at the departure, destination and
alternate aerodromes, in particular for:
opening hours;
work in progress (WIP);
special procedures due to WIP;
obstructions;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 351 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
changes of frequencies for communications, navigation aids and facilities.
LO Check that satellite-based facilities are available during the expected time of
use.
LO Check that GBAS/SBAS augmentation is available during the expected time of
use.
033 04 01 03 Airway routings and airspace structure
LO Find and analyse the latest en-route state for:
airway(s) or route(s);
restricted, danger and prohibited areas;
changes of frequencies for communications, navigation aids and facilities.
033 04 01 04 Pre-flight preparation of GNSS achievability
LO Define why it is important to check GNSS achievability.
LO Define receiver autonomous integrity monitoring (RAIM), NOTAM and notice
advisory to NavStar users (NANU) messages.
LO Explain the difference in use of augmented and non- augmented GNSS in
connection with the achievability check.
LO Explain the difference in planned and unplanned outage of GNSS or SBAS.
033 04 02 00 Meteorological briefing
033 04 02 01 Intentionally left blank
033 04 02 02 Update of navigation plan using the latest meteorological information
LO Confirm the most fuel-efficient altitude from given wind, temperature and aircraft
data.
LO Confirm true altitudes from given atmospheric data to ensure that statutory
minimum clearance is attained.
LO Confirm magnetic headings and GSs.
LO Confirm the individual leg times and the total time en route.
LO Confirm the total time en route for the trip to the destination.
LO Confirm the total time from destination to the alternate aerodrome.
033 04 02 03 Intentionally left blank
033 04 02 04 Intentionally left blank
033 04 02 05 Update of fuel plan
LO Calculate the revised fuel data in accordance with the changed conditions.
033 04 03 00 Point of equal time (PET) and point of safe return (PSR)
033 04 03 01 Point of equal time (PET)
LO Define ‘PETʼ.
LO Calculate the position of a PET and the estimated time of arrival (ETA) at the PET
from given relevant data.
033 04 03 02 Point of safe return (PSR)
LO Define ‘PSRʼ.
LO Calculate the position of a PSR and the ETA at the PSR from given relevant data.
033 05 00 00 ICAO FLIGHT PLAN (ATS flight plan (FPL))
033 05 01 00 Individual FPL
033 05 01 01 Format of FPL
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 352 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
(01) X State the reasons for a fixed format of an ICAO ATS FPL.
LO Determine the correct entries to complete an ATS FPL plus decode and interpret
the entries in a completed ATS FPL, particularly for the following:
aircraft identification (Item 7);
flight rules and type of flight (Item 8);
number and type of aircraft and wake-turbulence category (Item 9);
equipment (Item 10);
departure aerodrome and time (Item 13);
route (Item 15);
destination aerodrome, total estimated elapsed time and alternate aerodrome (Item
16);
other information (Item 18);
supplementary information (Item 19).
033 05 01 02 Intentionally left blank
033 05 02 00 Repetitive flight plan (RPL)
033 05 02 01 Repetitive flight plan (RPL)
LO X Explain the difference between an individual FPL and an RPL.
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
I. Jeppesen- Flight Planning: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
J. ICAO Annex 2: Rules of the Air
K. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft- Part I
L. ICAO DOC 4444: Air Traffic Management
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 353 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.28. PTS/PL304: FLIGHT MONITORING AND IN-FLIGHT
REPLANNING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
033 06 00 00 FLIGHT MONITORING AND IN-FLIGHT REPLANNING 8
033 06 01 00 Flight monitoring
033 06 01 01 Monitoring of track and time
LO State the reasons for possible deviations from the planned track and planned
timings.
LO Calculate GS by using actual in-flight parameters.
LO Calculate the expected leg times by using actual in-flight parameters.
LO Enter, in the progress of flight, at the checkpoint or turning point, the ‘actual time-
over’ and the ‘estimated time-over’ for the next checkpoint into the flight plan.
LO State that it is necessary to determine the position of the aircraft accurately before
commencing descent in order to ensure safe ground clearance.
LO Calculate revised ETA based on changes to the pre-flight plan, including changes
of W/V, cruise level, OAT, distances, Mach number and calibrated airspeed (CAS).
033 06 01 02 In-flight fuel management
LO Explain why fuel checks must be carried out in flight at regular intervals and why
relevant fuel data must be recorded.
LO Assess deviations of actual fuel consumption from planned consumption.
LO Calculate fuel quantity used, fuel consumption, and fuel remaining at navigation
checkpoints/waypoints.
LO Compare the actual with the planned fuel consumption by means of calculation.
LO Determine the remaining range and endurance by means of calculation.
LO Calculate the revised fuel consumption based on changes to the pre-flight plan,
including changes of W/V, cruise level, OAT, distances, Mach number and CAS.
033 06 02 00 In-flight replanning
033 06 02 01 Deviation from planned data
LO State that the commander is responsible for ensuring that, even in case of diversion,
the remaining fuel is not less than the fuel required to proceed to an aerodrome where
a safe landing can be made, with final reserve fuel remaining.
LO Explain that, in the case of an in-flight update, the commander has to
check the following:
the suitability of the new destination or alternate aerodrome;
meteorological conditions on revised routing and at revised destination or alternate
aerodrome;
the aircraft must be able to land with the prescribed final reserve fuel.
LO Calculate the revised destination/alternate aerodrome landing mass from given
latest data.
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-discussion
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 354 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
M. Jeppesen- Flight Planning: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
N. ICAO Annex 2: Rules of the Air
O. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft- Part I
P. ICAO DOC 4444: Air Traffic Management
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 355 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.29. PTS/PL311: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OPERATIONAL
PROCEDURES
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
070 00 00 00 OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES 7
071 01 00 00 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
071 01 01 00 ICAO Annex 6
071 01 01 01 Definitions
LO Define the following: alternate aerodrome: flight time (aeroplanes); take-off alternate;
en-route alternate; destination alternate.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 1
LO Define ‘alternate heliport’; ‘flight time (helicopters)’.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 1
071 01 01 02 Applicability
LO State that Part I shall be applicable to the operation of aeroplanes by operators
authorised to conduct international commercial air transport (CAT) operations.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 2
LO State that Part III shall be applicable to all helicopters engaged in international CAT
operations or in international general aviation operations, except helicopters engaged
in aerial work.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part III, Section 1, Chapter 2
071 01 01 03 General
LO Explain the compliance with laws, regulations and procedures.
Source:
ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.1;
ICAO Annex 6, Part III, Section 2, Chapter 1.1
LO State the condition(s) required for the establishment of a flight data analysis
programme, and state what this programme is part of.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.3
LO Explain what is a flight safety documents system.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 3.3
LO Explain what is maintenance release.
Source:
ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Chapter 8.8;
ICAO Annex 6 Part III, Section 2, Chapter 6.7
LO List and describe the lights to be displayed by aircraft.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Part I, Appendix 1: 2. Navigation lights to be displayed in
the air
071 01 02 00 Operational requirements
071 01 02 01 Applicability
LO State the operational regulations applicable to CAT and other activities (e.g.
X specialised operations (SPO)).
Source:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 356 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 on air operations; Regulation (EU) No 1178/2011 on
aircrew requirements
LO State the nature of CAT operations and exceptions.
LO Source:
Regulation (EU) No 965/2012: Articles 1 and 5,
points ORO.GEN.005 ‘Scope’ and CAT.GEN.100 ‘Competent authority’;
Regulation (EC) No 216/ 2008: Article 1
071 01 02 02 General
LO Explain why CAT flights must meet the applicable operational
requirements.
X Source:
Point ORO.GEN.105 ‘Competent authority’ and related AMCs/GM;
Point ORO.GEN.110 ‘Operator responsibilities’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements about language used for crew communication and in
the operations manual.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.120 ‘Common language’
LO Explain which are the operator requirements regarding the
LO management system.
Source:
Point ORO.GEN.200 ‘Management system’;
AMCs/GM to ORO.GEN.205 ‘Contracted activities’ and to ORO.GEN.220 ‘Record-
keeping’
LO Explain which are the operator requirements regarding accident prevention and
the flight safety programme.
Source:
Point ORO.GEN.200 ‘Management system’;
AMCs/GM to ORO.GEN.205 ‘Contracted activities’, to ORO.GEN.220 ‘Record-
keeping’, and to ORO.AOC.130 ‘Flight data monitoring — aeroplanes’
LO Explain which are the regulations concerning the carriage of persons on an aircraft.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.165 ‘Method of carriage of persons’
LO Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibility concerning portable
electronic devices (PEDs).
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.140 ‘Portable electronic devices’
LO Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibility regarding admission in an
aircraft of a person under the influence of drug or alcohol.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.170 ‘Alcohol and drugs’
LO Explain the regulations concerning the endangerment of safety.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.175 ‘Endangering safety’
LO List the documents to be carried on each flight.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.180 ‘Documents, manuals and information to be
carried’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the operator’s responsibility regarding manuals to be carried on board an
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 357 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
aircraft.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.180 ‘Documents, manuals and information to be
carried’ and related AMCs/GM
LO List the additional information and forms to be carried on board an aircraft.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.180 ‘Documents, manuals and information to be carried
on board an aircraft’ and related AMCs/GM
LO List the copies of items of information to be retained on the ground by the operator.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.185 ‘Information to be retained on the ground’
LO Explain what responsibilies the operator and the commander have regarding the
production of and access to records and documents.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.190 ‘Provision of documentation and records’
071 01 02 03 Operator certification and supervision
LO Explain what requirement has to be satisfied for the issue of an air operator
certificate (AOC).
Source:
Point ARO.OPS.100 ‘Issue of the air operator certificate’; Point ORO.GEN.210
‘Personnel requirements’;
Point ORO.AOC.100 ‘Application for an air operator certificate’
LO Explain what the rules applicable to air operator certification are.
Source:
Point ORO.AOC.100 ‘Application for an air operator certificate’;
Point ORO.AOC.105 ‘Operations specifications and privileges of an AOC
holder’
LO Explain the conditions to be met for the issue or revalidation of an AOC.
Source: ARO.GEN.310 ‘Initial certification procedure —organisations’
LO Explain the contents and conditions of the AOC.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 956/2012, Appendix I ‘AIR OPERATOR
CERTIFICATE’
071 01 02 04 Operational procedures (except preparation for long-range flight)
LO Define the terms used for operational procedures.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.106 ‘Use of isolated aerodromes —aeroplanes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.107 ‘Adequate aerodrome’
LO State the operator’s responsibilities regarding the use of air traffic services (ATS).
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.100 ‘Use of air traffic services’
LO State the operator’s responsibilities regarding authorisation of aerodromes/heliports
by the operator.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.105 ‘Use of aerodromes and operating sites’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.106 ‘Use of isolated aerodromes —aeroplanes’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.107 ‘Adequate aerodrome’
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 358 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain which elements must be considered by the operator when specifying
aerodrome/heliport operating minima.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 (a) and (c) ‘Aerodrome operating minima’,
Point CAT.OP.MPA.115 ‘Approach flight technique - aeroplanes’ ,
Point SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’ and related AMCs/GM;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’
LO Explain what the operator’s responsibilities are regarding departure and approach
procedures.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.125 ‘Instrument departure and approach procedures’
LO Explain which parameters should be considered in noise- abatement procedures.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.130 ‘Noise abatement procedures —aeroplanes’;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.130; GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.130
LO Explain which elements should be considered regarding routes and areas of
operation.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.135 ‘Routes and areas of operation —general’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.136 ‘Routes and areas of operation —single-engined
aeroplanes’
LO Explain the requirements for flights in reduced vertical separation minima
(RVSM) airspace.
Source:
Point SPA.RVSM.100 ‘RVSM operations’;
Point SPA.RVSM.105 ‘RVSM operational approval’;
Point SPA.RVSM.110 ‘RVSM equipment requirements’ and AMC1
SPA.RVSM.110(a);
Point SPA.RVSM.115 ‘RVSM height-keeping errors’
LO List the factors to be considered when establishing minimum flight altitude.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.145 ‘Establishment of minimum flight altitudes’ and related
AMCs/GM;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.145(a); AMC1.1 CAT.OP.MPA.145(a)
LO Explain the requirements for carrying persons with reduced mobility.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.155 ‘Carriage of special categories of
passengers (SCPs)’
LO Explain the operator’s responsibilities for the carriage of inadmissible passengers,
deportees or persons in custody.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.155 ‘Carriage of special categories of
passengers (SCPs)’
LO Explain the requirements regarding passenger seating and emergency evacuation.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.165 ‘Passenger seating’ and related AMCs/GM
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 359 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Detail the procedures for passenger briefing in respect of emergency equipment
and exits.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.170 ‘Passenger briefing’; AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.170;
AMC2 CAT.OP.MPA.170
LO State the flight preparation forms to be completed before flight.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.175 ‘Flight preparation’ and related AMCs/GM;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.175(a)
LO State the commander’s responsibilities during flight preparation.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.175 ‘Flight preparation’
LO State the rules for aerodrome/heliport selection.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes — aeroplanes’;
LO Explain the planning minima for instrument flight rule (IFR)
flights.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR flights — aeroplanes’
LO Explain the rules for refuelling/defueling with passengers on board.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.195 ‘Refuelling/defuelling with passengers embarking, on board
or disembarking’ and related AMCs;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.195;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.200 ‘Refuelling/ defuelling with wide- cut fuel’ and related
AMCs;
GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.200
LO Explain the ‘crew members at station’ policy.
Source:
CAT.OP.MPA.210 ‘Crew members at stations’ and related AMCs;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.210(b); GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.210
LO Explain the use of seats, safety belts and harnesses.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.225 ‘Seats, safety belts and restraint systems’
LO Explain the requirements for securing passenger cabin and galley.
LO Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.230 ‘Securing of passenger compartment and
galley(s)’
LO Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding smoking on board.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.240 ‘Smoking on board’
LO State under which conditions a commander can commence or continue a flight
regarding meteorological conditions.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.245 ‘Meteorological conditions — all aircraft’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.246 ‘Meteorological conditions — aeroplanes’;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 360 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Point CAT.OP.MPA.265 ‘Take-off conditions’
LO Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding ice and other contaminants.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.250 ‘Ice and other contaminants — ground procedures’ and
related AMCs/GM;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.255 ‘Ice and other contaminants — flight procedures’ and
related AMCs/GM; GM1 CAT.OP.MPA.250 (a) to (l);
GM2 CAT.OP.MPA.250 (a) to (f); GM3 CAT.OP.MPA.250 (a)(1) to (3); AMC1
CAT.OP.MPA.255 (a)
LO Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding fuel to be
carried and in-flight fuel management.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.260 ‘Fuel and oil supply’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.280 ‘In-flight fuel management —aeroplanes’;
LO Detail the rules regarding carriage and use of supplemental oxygen for passengers
and aircrew.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.285 ‘Use of supplemental oxygen’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.235 ‘Supplemental oxygen — pressurised aeroplanes’ and related
AMCs/GM
Flight preparation
LO Explain the commander’s responsibility regarding approach and landing.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.300 ‘Approach and landing conditions’
and AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.300;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.305 ‘Commencement and continuation of approach’ and
related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the circumstances under which a report shall be submitted.
Source: Point ORO.GEN.160 ‘Occurrence reporting’ and related AMCs/GM
071 01 02 05 All-weather operations
LO Explain the operator’s responsibility regarding aerodrome/heliport
operating minima.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’ and related AMCs/GM;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.115 ‘Approach flight technique —aeroplanes’ and related
AMCs/GM
LO Define the following terms: ‘circling’, ‘low-visibility procedures’, ‘low-
visibility take-off’, ‘visual approach’.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Annex I
LO Define the following terms: ‘flight control system’, ‘fail- passive flight control system’,
‘fail-operational flight control system’, ‘fail-operational hybrid landing system’.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Annex I
LO Explain the general operating requirements for low-visibility operations.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 361 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Source:
Point SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’ and related
AMCs;
Point SPA.LVO.105 ‘LVO approval’;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’; Point SPA.LVO.115
‘Aerodrome related requirements’
LO Define aerodrome/heliport considerations regarding low- visibility operations.
Source: SPA.LVO.115 ‘Aerodrome related requirements’
LO Explain the training and qualification requirements for flight crew to conduct low-
visibility operations.
Source: Point SPA.LVO.120 ‘Flight crew training and qualifications’ and
related AMCs
LO Explain the operating procedures for low-visibility operations.
LO Source: Point SPA.LVO.125 ‘Operating procedures and AMC1 SPA.LVO.125
LO Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibilities regarding minimum
equipment for low-visibility operations. Source: Point SPA.LVO.130 ‘Minimum
equipment’
LO Explain the VFR operating minima.
Source: AMC12 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima — VFR OPERATIONS
WITH OTHER-THAN-COMPLEX MOTOR-POWERED AIRCRAFT’
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain under which conditions the
commander can commence take-off.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’ and related AMCs/GM;
Point SPA.LVO.110 ‘General operating requirements’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain that take-off minima are expressed as
visibility or runway visual range (RVR).
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’; AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.110;
AMC2 CAT.OP.MPA.110
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain the take-off RVR value depending on the
aerodrome facilities.
Source:
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’, Table 1.A;
AMC2 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’, Table 1.H
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain the system minima for non-precision
approach (NPA) (minimum descent altitude/height (MDA/H) and decision
altitude/height (DA/H), not RVR).
Source:
AMC3 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’ (Table 3: ILS/MLS/GLS;
SRA 1NM; VOR; NDB);
AMC6 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 362 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain under which conditions a pilot can continue
the approach below MDA/H or DA/H.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.305 ‘Commencement and continuation of approach’;
AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.305(e)
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain the lowest minima for precision approach
category 1 (including single-pilot operations).
Source: AMC3 SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain the lowest minima for precision approach
category 2 operations.
Source: AMC4 SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain the lowest minima for precision approach
category 3 operations.
Source: AMC5 SPA.LVO.100 ‘Low visibility operations’
LO Aerodrome operating minima: explain the lowest minima for circling and visual
approach.
Source:
AMC7 CAT.OP.MPA.110 ‘Aerodrome operating minima’; AMC9 CAT.OP.MPA.110;
AMC8 CAT.OP.MPA.110
071 01 02 06 Instruments and equipment
LO Explain which items do not require an equipment approval.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.100 ‘Instruments and equipment — general’ and related
GM, and
point CAT.IDE.H.100 ‘Instruments and equipment —general’;
Points CAT.IDE.A.105/CAT.IDE.H.105 ‘Minimum equipment for flight’
LO Explain the requirements regarding availability of spare electrical fuses.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.110 ‘Spare electrical fuses’ and related GM
LO Explain the requirements regarding windshield wipers. Source: Point
CAT.IDE.A.120 ‘Equipment to clear windshield’ and related AMCs
LO List the minimum equipment required for day and night VFR
flights.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.125 ‘Operations under VFR by day’ and related AMCs/GM
LO List the minimum equipment required for IFR flights.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.130 ‘Operations under IFR or at night — flight and
navigational instruments and associated
LO equipment’ and related AMCs/GM;
Point CAT.IDE.H.130 ‘Operations under IFR or at night — flight and navigational
instruments and associated equipment’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the required additional equipment for single-pilot operations under IFR.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.135/CAT.IDE.H.135 ‘Additional equipment for single-
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 363 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
pilot operation under IFR’
LO State the requirements for an altitude alerting system.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.140 ‘Altitude alerting system’
LO State the requirements for ground proximity warning system (GPWS)/terrain
awareness and warning system (TAWS). Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.150 ‘Terrain
awareness warning system (TAWS)’
LO State the requirements for airborne collision avoidance system (ACAS).
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.155 ‘Airborne collision avoidance system (ACAS)’
LO State the conditions under which an aircraft must be fitted with a weather radar.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.160/CAT.IDE.H.160 ‘Airborne weather detecting
equipment’
LO State the circumstances under which a cockpit voice recorder (CVR) is
compulsory (after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.185/CAT.IDE.H.185 ‘Cockpit voice recorder’
LO State the rules regarding the location, construction, installation, and operation of
cockpit voice recorders (CVRs) (after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.185/CAT.IDE.H.185 ‘Cockpit voice recorder’
LO State the circumstances under which a flight data recorder
(FDR) is compulsory (after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.190/CAT.IDE.H.190 ‘Flight data recorder’
LO State the rules regarding the location, construction, installation, and operation of flight
data recorders (FDRs) (after 1998).
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.190/CAT.IDE.A.190 ‘Flight data recorder’ and related
AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements about seats, seat safety belts, harnesses, and child-restraint
devices.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.205/CAT.IDE.H.205 ‘Seats, seat safety belts, restraint systems and
child restraint devices’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements about ‘Fasten seat belt’ and ‘No smoking’ signs.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.210/CAT.IDE.H.210 ‘Fasten seat belt and no smoking
signs’
LO Explain the requirements regarding internal doors and curtains.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.215 ‘Internal doors and curtains’
LO First-aid and emergency equipment
LO Explain the requirements regarding first-aid kits.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.220/CAT.IDE.H.220 ‘First-aid kit’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements regarding emergency medical kits and first-aid oxygen.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.225 ‘Emergency medical kit’; AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.225;
AMC2 CAT.IDE.A.225;
AMC3 CAT.IDE.A.225; AMC4 CAT.IDE.A.225; GM1 CAT.IDE.A.225;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 364 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Point CAT.IDE.A.230 ‘First-aid oxygen’
LO Detail the rules regarding crew protective breathing equipment.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.245 ‘Crew protective breathing equipment’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.245
LO Describe the type and location of handheld fire extinguishers.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.250/CAT.IDE.H.250 ‘Hand fire extinguishers’
and related AMCs/GM
LO Describe the location of crash axes and crowbars.
Source:Point CAT.IDE.A.255 ‘Crash axe and crowbar’; AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.255
LO Specify the colours and markings used to indicate break-in points.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.260/CAT.IDE.H.260 ‘Marking of break-in points’ and
related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements for means of emergency evacuation.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.265 ‘Means for emergency evacuation’
LO Explain the requirements for megaphones.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.270/CAT.IDE.H.270 ‘Megaphones’ and related
AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements for emergency lighting and marking.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.275/CAT.IDE.H.275 ‘Emergency lighting and marking
LO Explain the requirements for an emergency locator transmitter (ELT).
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.280/CAT.IDE.H.280 ‘Emergency locator transmitter (ELT)’ and
related AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirements for life jackets, life rafts, survival kits, and ELTs.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.285 ‘Flight over water’; Point CAT.IDE.A.305 ‘Survival equipment’
Point CAT.IDE.H.280 ‘Emergency locator transmitter (ELT)’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.290 ‘Life-jackets’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.295 ‘Crew survival suits’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.300 ‘Life-rafts, survival ELTs and survival equipment on extended
overwater flights’
LO Explain the requirements for survival equipment.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.305/CAT.IDE.H.305 ‘Survival equipment’
071 01 02 07 Communication and navigation equipment
LO Explain the general requirements for communication and navigation equipment.
Source: Point CAT.IDE.A.325 ‘Headset’ and related AMCs/GM
LO Explain why the radio-communication equipment must be able to send and receive
on 121.5 MHz.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.330/CAT.IDE.H.330 ‘Radio communication
equipment’
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 365 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
LO Explain the requirements regarding the provision of an audio selector panel.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.335/CAT.IDE.H.335 ‘Audio selector panel’
LO List the requirements for radio equipment when flying under VFR by reference to visual
landmarks.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.340/CAT.IDE.H.340 ‘Radio equipment for operations under
VFR over routes navigated by reference to visual landmarks’
LO List the requirements for communication and navigation equipment when
operating under IFR or under VFR over routes not navigated by reference to visual
landmarks. Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.345/CAT.IDE.H.345 ‘Communication and navigation equipment for
operations under IFR or under VFR over routes not navigated by reference to visual
landmarks’
LO Explain what equipment is required to operate in airspace with reduced vertical
separation minima (RVSM).
Source: Point SPA.RVSM.110 ‘RVSM equipment requirements’
LO Explain the conditions under which a crew member interphone system and public
address system are mandatory.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.170/CAT.IDE.H.170 ‘Flight crew interphone system’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.170/CAT.IDE.H.170;
Points CAT.IDE.A.175/CAT.IDE.H.175 ‘Crew member interphone system’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.175/CAT.IDE.H.175;
Points CAT.IDE.A.180/CAT.IDE.H.180 ‘Public address system’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.180/CAT.IDE.H.180
LO Explain the requirements regarding the provision of a transponder.
Source:
Points CAT.IDE.A.350/CAT.IDE.H.350 ‘Transponder’; AMC1
CAT.IDE.A.350/CAT.IDE.H.350
LO Explain the requirements regarding the provision of electronic data management
products.
Source:
Point CAT.IDE.A.355 ‘Electronic navigation data management’;
AMC1 CAT.IDE.A.355 ‘Electronic navigation data management — ELECTRONIC
NAVIGATION DATA PRODUCTS’
071 01 02 08 Intentionally left blank
071 01 02 09 Flight crew
LO Explain the requirement regarding flight crew composition and in-flight relief.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.100 ‘Composition of flight crew; AMC1 ORO.FC.100(c);
Point ORO.FC.105 ‘Designation as pilot-in-
command/commander’; AMC1 ORO.FC.105(b)(2);(c); GM1 ORO.FC.105 (b)(2); AMC1
ORO.FC.105(c);
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 366 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Point ORO.FC.110 ‘Flight engineer’;
Point ORO.FC.115 ‘Crew resource management (CRM)
training’;
Point ORO.FC.200 ‘Composition of flight crew’; AMC1 ORO.FC.200(a);
Point ORO.FC.A.201 ‘In-flight relief of flight crew members’;
Point ORO.FC.202 Single-pilot operations under IFR or at night
LO Explain the requirement for conversion training and checking.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.120 ‘Operator conversion training’; Point ORO.FC.145 ‘Provision of
training’;
Point ORO.FC.220 ‘Operator conversion training and checking’;and related
AMCs/GM
LO Explain the requirement for differences training and familiarisation training.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.125 ‘Differences training and familiarisation training’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.125
LO Explain the conditions for upgrade from co-pilot to commander.
Source: Point ORO.FC.205 ‘Command course’
LO Explain the minimum qualification requirements to operate as a commander.
Source: Point ORO.FC.A.250 ‘Commanders holding a CPL(A)’
LO Explain the requirement for recurrent training and checking.
Source: Point ORO.FC.230 ‘Recurrent training and checking’
LO Explain the requirement for a pilot to operate on either pilot’s seat.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.235 ‘Pilot qualification to operate in either pilot’s seat’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.235(d); GM1 ORO.FC.235(f);(g)
LO Explain the minimum recent experience requirements for the commander and the
co-pilot.
Source:
Point FCL.060 ‘Recent experience’; AMC1 FCL.060(b)(1);
GM1 FCL.060(b)(1)
LO Specify the route and aerodrome/heliport knowledge required for a
PIC/commander.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.105 ‘Designation as pilot-in-command/
commander’;
LO AMC1 ORO.FC.105(b)(2);(c);
GM1 ORO.FC.105(b)(2); AMC1 ORO.FC.105(c)
LO Explain the requirement to operate on more than one aircraft type or variant.
Source:
Point ORO.FC.140 ‘Operation on more than one type or variant’;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 367 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Point ORO.FC.240 ‘Operation on more than one type or variant’;
AMC1 ORO.FC.240(a)(1)
LO Explain that when a flight crew member operates both helicopters and aeroplanes,
the operations are limited to one of each type.
Source: Point ORO.FC.240 ‘Operation on more than one type or variant’
LO Explain the requirement(s) for training records.
Source: Point ORO.MLR.115 ‘Record-keeping’
LO Explain the crew members’ responsibilities in the execution of their duties, and
define the commander’s authority.
Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.100 ‘Crew responsibilities;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.105 ‘Responsibilities of the commander;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.110 ‘Authority of the commander’
LO Explain the operator’s and commander’s responsibilities regarding persons on
board, admission to the flight crew
LO compartment and carriage of unauthorised persons or cargo.
Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.135 ‘Admission to the flight crew compartment;
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.165 ‘Method of carriage of persons; Point CAT.GEN.MPA.105
‘Responsibilities of the commander’
LO Explain the requirements for the initial operator’s crew resource management
(CRM) training.
Source: Point ORO.FC.215 ‘Initial operator’s crew resource management (CRM)
training’
071 01 02 10 Cabin crew/crew members other than flight crew
LO Explain who is regarded as cabin crew member.
Source: Regulation (EU) No 965/2012, Annex I ‘Definitions’
LO Detail the requirements regarding the number and composition of cabin
crew.
Source:
Point ORO.CC.100 ‘Number and composition of cabin crew; AMC1 ORO.CC.100;
GM1 ORO.CC.100;
Point ORO.CC.205 ‘Reduction of the number of cabin crew during ground
operations and in unforeseen circumstances’
LO Explain the conditions and the additional conditions for assignment to duties.
Source:
LO Point ORO.CC.110 ‘Conditions for assignment to duties;
Point ORO.CC.210 ‘Additional conditions for assignment to duties;
GM1 ORO.CC.210(d)
LO Explain the requirements regarding senior cabin crew members.
Source:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 368 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Point ORO.CC.200 ‘Senior cabin crew member; AMC1 ORO.CC.200(c);(d);(e)
LO Explain the conditions for operating on more than one aircraft type or variant.
Source:
Point ORO.CC.250 ‘Operation on more than one aircraft type or variant;
AMC1 ORO.CC.250(b); GM1 ORO.CC.250
LO Explain what is the operator’s responsibility regarding the distinction between cabin
crew members and additional crew members.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.115 ‘Personnel or crew members other than cabin crew
in the passenger compartment’
071 01 02 11 Intentionally left blank
071 01 02 12 Flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements
LO Explain the definitions used for the regulation of flight time limitations.
LO Source:
Point ORO.FTL.100 ‘Scope’;
Point ORO.FTL.105 ‘Definitions’ (values of Table 1 excluded)
LO Explain the flight and duty time limitations.
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.200 ‘Home base’;
Point ORO.FTL.210 ‘Flight times and duty periods’
LO Explain the requirements regarding the maximum daily flight duty period.
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.205 ‘Flight duty period (FDP)’;
Point ORO.FTL.205(b) ‘Basic maximum daily FDP’ (use of the tables but not
memorisation)
LO Explain the requirements regarding rest periods.
Source: Point ORO.FTL.235 ‘Rest periods’
LO Explain the possible extension of flight duty period due to in- flight rest.
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.205 ‘Flight duty period (FDP)’;
Point ORO.FTL.205(e) ‘Maximum daily FDP with the use of extensions due to in-
flight rest’
LO Explain that it is the captain’s discretion to extend flight duty in case of unforeseen
circumstances in actual flight operations.
Source:
Point ORO.FTL.205 ‘Flight duty period (FDP)’;
Point ORO.FTL.205(f) ‘Unforeseen circumstances in flight
operations — commander’s discretion’
LO Explain the requirement regarding standby.
Source: Point ORO.FTL.225 ‘Standby and duties at the airport’
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 369 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. Jeppesen- Operational Procedures: JAA Training, Edition 2
B. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft Part I Commercial Air transport Operations (Aeroplanes)
C. ECARAS Part 8: Operations
D. JAR OPS-1: Commercial Air Transport Aeroplanes
E. ICAO Annex 17-Security
F. ICAO Annex 18- Transport of Dangerous Good by Air
G. FAA-H-8083-3A: Aeroplane Flying Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 370 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.30. PTS/PL312: Long-range flights
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
071 01 03 00 Long-range flights 7
071 01 03 01 Flight management
LO Minimum time routes: define and interpret minimum time route (route that gives
the shortest flight time from departure to destination adhering to all ATC and
airspace restrictions).
Source: N/A
LO State the circumstances in which a take-off alternate must be selected.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —aeroplane
LO State the maximum flight distance of a take-off alternate for:
two-engined aeroplanes;
ETOPS-approved aeroplanes;
three- or four-engined aeroplanes.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —aeroplanes’;
LO State the factors to be considered in the selection of a take- off alternate.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR flights —aeroplanes’;
LO State when a destination alternate need not be selected.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —aeroplanes’;
LO State when two destination alternates must be selected.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —aeroplanes’;
LO State the factors to be considered in the selection of a destination alternate
aerodrome.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR flights —aeroplanes’;
LO State the factors to be considered in the selection of an en- route alternate
aerodrome.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.185 ‘Planning minima for IFR flights — aeroplanes’
Transoceanic and polar flights
071 01 03 02 (ICAO Doc 7030 ‘Regional Supplementary Procedures —North Atlantic
Operations and Airspace Manual’)
LO According to ICAO Doc 7030, explain that special rules apply to the North Atlantic (NAT)
Region, and crews need to be specifically trained before flying in this area.
Source: NAT 007, 1.3.8 Crew Training
LO Describe the possible indications of navigation system degradation, including
any system-generated warning.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 12 Procedures in the event of navigation system
degradation or failure
LO Describe by what emergency means course and inertial navigation system (INS) can be
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 371 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
cross-checked in the case of three navigation systems and two navigation systems.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 12 Procedures in the event of navigation system
degradation or failure
LO Describe the general ICAO procedures applicable in NAT airspace if the aircraft is
unable to continue the flight in accordance with its air traffic control (ATC) clearance.
Source: NAT 007, 13.2 General procedures
LO Describe the ICAO procedures applicable in NAT airspace in case of radio-
communication failure.
LO Source: NAT 007, 6.6 HF Communications failure
LO Describe the recommended initial action if an aircraft is unable to obtain a
revised ATC clearance.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 13 Special procedures for in-flight contingencies
LO Describe the subsequent action for aircraft able to maintain assigned flight level and
for aircraft unable to maintain assigned flight level.
Source: NAT 007, Chapter 13 Special procedures for in-flight contingencies
LO Describe determination of tracks and courses for random routes in NAT airspace.
Source: ICAO Doc 7030, NAT 2.1.9.1 General; NAT 007,2.1.3;
NAT 007, Chapter 4 Flight Planning
LO Specify the method by which planned tracks are defined (by latitude and longitude) in
the NAT airspace: when operating predominately in an east–west direction south of
70°N, and when operating predominately in an east–west direction north of 70°N.
Source: ICAO Doc 7030, NAT 2.1.9 Route; NAT 007, Chapter 4 (Flights Planning
on Random Route Segments in a Predominantly East - West Direction)
LO State the maximum flight time recommended between significant points on random
routes.
Source: ICAO Doc 7030, NAT 2.1.9 Route; NAT 007, Chapter 4 (Flights Planning
on Random Route Segments in a Predominantly East - West Direction and
Predominantly North - South Direction)
LO Specify the method by which planned tracks for random routes are defined for flights
operating predominantly in a north–south direction.
Source: ICAO Doc 7030, NAT 2.1.9 Route; NAT 007, Chapter 4 (Flights Planning
on Random Routes in a Predominantly North - South Direction)
LO Describe how the desired random route must be specified in the ATC flight plan.
Source: NAT 007, 4.2 Flight planning requirements on specific routes
LO Describe what precautions can be taken when operating in the area of compass
unreliability as a contingency against INS failure.
Source:
NAT 007, Chapter 12 Procedures in the event of navigation system degradation or
failure (not including detailed information on route structures and their coordinates);
NAT 007, Chapter 8 (Master document — position plotting)
071 01 03 03 North Atlantic High Level Airspace (NAT HLA)
NAT Region
North Atlantic Operations and Airspace Manual (NAT Doc 007 Version 2017-1 and NAT
Doc 7030)
LO State the lateral dimensions (in general terms) and vertical limits of the NAT HLA.
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 372 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Source: NAT 007, 17.1 GENERAL: 17.1.1 and 17.1.2
LO Define the following acronyms:
LRNS, MASPS, NAT HLA, OCA, OTS, PRM, RVSM, SLOP, and WATRS.
Source: NAT 007, Glossary of Terms
LO State the NAT HLA operations.
Source: NAT 007, 1.1.2; 1.1.3; 1.1.5; 1.1.6; 1.1.7; 1.2.1; 1.2.2; 1.3.1; 1.3.2;
1.3.6; 1.3.7; 1.3.8; 1.3.9; 1.3.10; 1.3.11;
1.3.12
LO Describe the routes for aircraft with only one long-range navigation system
(LRNS).
Source: NAT 007, 1.4.1
LO Describe the routes for aircraft with short-range navigation equipment only.
Source: NAT 007, 1.4.2; 1.4.3
LO Explain why the horizontal (i.e. latitudinal and longitudinal) and vertical navigation
performance of operators within NAT HLA is monitored on a continual basis.
Source: NAT 007, 1.9.1
LO Describe the organised track system (OTS).
Source: NAT 007, 2.1 GENERAL; 2.2 Construction of the organised track system
(OTS)
LO State the OTS changeover periods.
Source: NAT 007, 2.4 OTS Changeover periods
LO Describe the NAT track message.
Source: NAT 007, 2.3 The NAT track message
LO Illustrate routes between northern Europe and the Spain/Canaries/Lisbon flight
information region (FIR) (T9, T13 and T16) within NAT HLA.
LO Source: NAT 007, 3.2 Other routes within the NAT HLA
LO Describe the function of the North American Routes (NARs) and Shannon Oceanic
Transition Area (SOTA) and Northern Oceanic Transition Area (NOTA).
Source: NAT 007, 3.3 Route structures adjacent to the NAT HLA
LO State that all flights should plan to operate on great-circle tracks joining successive
significant waypoints.
Source: NAT 007, 4.1.3
LO State that during the hours of validity of the OTS, operators are encouraged to plan
flights:
in accordance with the OTS;
or along a route to join or leave an outer track of the OTS;
or on a random route to remain clear of the OTS, either laterally or vertically.
Source: NAT 007, 4.1.4
LO State which flight levels are available on OTS tracks during OTS periods.
Source: NAT 007, 4.1.10; 4.1.11 and 4.1.12 (dates not required)
LO State which flight levels are to be planned on random tracks or outside OTS periods.
Source: NAT 007, 4.1.13
LO Selection of cruising altitude.
Specify the appropriate cruising levels for normal long-range IFR flights and for those
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 373 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
operating on the North Atlantic OTS.
Source:
NAT 007, Chapter 4 Flight Planning - Flight Levels; SERA
LO Oceanic ATC clearances
State that it is recommended that pilots should request their oceanic clearance at least
40 minutes prior to the oceanic entry point estimated time of arrival (ETA).
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.2
LO State that pilots should notify the oceanic area control centre (OAC) of the
maximum acceptable flight level possible at the boundary.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.3
LO State that at some aerodromes which are situated close to oceanic boundaries, the
oceanic clearance must be obtained before departure.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.5
LO State that if an aircraft, which would normally be RVSM- or NAT HLA-approved,
encounters, whilst en-route to the NAT Oceanic Airspace, a critical in-flight equipment
failure, or at dispatch is unable to meet the MEL requirements for RVSM or NAT HLA
approval of the flight, then the pilot must advise ATC at initial contact when requesting
oceanic clearance.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.6
LO State that after obtaining and reading back the clearance, the pilot should monitor the
forward estimate for oceanic entry, and if this changes by 3 minutes or more, unless
providing position reports via automatic dependent surveillance — contract (ADS-C),
the pilot must pass a revised estimate on to ATC.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.7
LO State that pilots should pay particular attention when the issued clearance differs from
the flight plan as a significant proportion of navigation errors investigated in the NAT
Region involve aircraft which have followed their flight plan rather than the differing
clearance.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.8
LO State that if the entry point of the oceanic route for which the flight is cleared differs
from that originally requested or the oceanic flight level differs from the current flight
level, the pilot is responsible for requesting and obtaining the necessary domestic
reclearance.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.9
LO State that there are three elements to an oceanic clearance: route, Mach number, and
flight level, and that these elements serve to provide for the three basic elements of
separation: lateral, longitudinal, and vertical.
Source: NAT 007, 5.1.1
LO Communications and position-reporting procedures
State that pilots communicate with OACs via aeradio stations staffed by communicators
who have no executive ATC authority.
Source: NAT 007, 6.1.1
LO State that messages are relayed from the ground station to the air traffic controllers
of the relevant OAC for action. Source: NAT 007, 6.1.1
LO State that frequencies from the lower HF bands tend to be used for communications
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 374 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
during night-time and those from the higher bands during daytime. Generally, in NAT,
frequencies of less than 7 MHz are utilised at night and frequencies greater than
8 MHz are utilised during the day. When initiating contact with an aeradio station,
the pilot should state the HF frequency in use.
Source: NAT 007, 6.1.4 and 6.1.7
LO State that since oceanic traffic typically communicates with ATC through aeradio
facilities, a satellite communication (SATCOM) call, made due to unforeseen inability to
communicate by other means, should be made to such a facility rather than the ATC
centre, unless the urgency of the communication dictates otherwise.
Source: NAT 007, 6.1.17
LO State that an air-to-air VHF frequency has been established for worldwide use when
aircraft are out of range of VHF ground stations which utilise the same or adjacent
frequencies. This frequency, 123.45 MHz, is intended for pilot-to-pilot exchanges of
operationally significant information.
Source: NAT 007, 6.2.2
LO State that any pilot, who provides position reports via data link and encounters
significant meteorological phenomena (such as moderate/severe turbulence or icing,
volcanic ash or thunderstorms), should report this information.
Source: NAT 007, 6.5.2
LO State that all turbine-engined aeroplanes having a maximum
LO certified take-off mass exceeding 5 700 kg or authorised to
carry more than 19 passengers are required to carry and operate airborne collision
avoidance system (ACAS) II in the NAT Region.
Source: NAT 007, 6.9.1
LO State that even with the growing use of data-link communications, a significant volume
of NAT air–ground communications are conducted using voice on single sideband
(SSB) HF frequencies. To support air–ground ATC communications in the North Atlantic
Region, 24 HF frequencies have been allocated, in bands ranging from 2.8 to 18 MHz.
Source: NAT 007, 6.1.3
LO Application of the Mach number technique (NAT HLA)
State that practical experience has shown that when two or more turbojet aircraft,
operating along the same route at the same flight level, maintain the same Mach
number, they are more likely to maintain a constant time interval between each other
than when using other methods.
Source: NAT 007, 7.2.1
LO State that after leaving oceanic airspace, pilots must maintain their assigned
Mach number in domestic controlled airspace unless and until the appropriate ATC unit
authorises a change.
Source: NAT 007, 7.4.1
LO North Atlantic High Level Airspace (NAT HLA) flight operation and
navigation procedures
LO NAT HLA flight operation and navigation procedures
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 375 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
State that the pre-flight procedures for any NAT HLA flight must include a
Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) time check.
Source: NAT 007, 8.2.2
LO Describe the function and use of the master document.
Source: NAT 007, 8.2.5 to 8.2.9
LO State the requirements for position plotting.
Source: NAT 007, 8.2.10 to 8.2.13
LO Describe the pre-flight procedures for:
the alignment of IRS;
the satellite navigation availability prediction programme for flights using
global navigation satellite long-range navigation system (GNSS LRNS);
loading of initial waypoints; and flight plan check.
Source: NAT 007, 8.3.2 to 8.3.5; 8.3.6 to 8.3.8; 8.3.13 to 8.3.17
LO Describe the strategic lateral offset procedure (SLOP) and state that along a route
or track there will be three positions that an aircraft may fly: centre line, or 1 or 2
miles right. Source: NAT 007, 8.5.1 to 8.5.5
LO State that RNAV 10 retains the RNP 10 designation, as specified in the
Performance-based Navigation Manual (ICAO Doc 9613), 1.2.3.5. (ICAO Doc 7030,
NAT Chapter 4).
Source: NAT 007, 1.3.4
LO State that both aircraft and operators must be RNP 10- or RNP 4-approved by the
State of the Operator or the State of Registry, as appropriate.
Source: NAT 007, 1.3.4
LO State that RNP 10 is the minimum navigation specification for the application of 93
km (50 NM) lateral separation. Source: NAT 007, 1.3.4 and 4.1.18
LO Reduced vertical separation minima (RVSM) flight in NAT HLA
State the altimeter cross-check to be performed before entering NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 9.1.10
LO State the altimeter cross-check to be performed when entering and flying in
NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 9.1.12
LO State that pilots not using controller–pilot data-link communications (CPDLC)/ADS-C
always report to ATC immediately on leaving the current cruising level and on reaching
any new cruising level.
Source: NAT 007, 9.1.15
LO State that flight crew should report when a 300-ft deviation or more occurs.
Source: NAT 007, 11.3.4 and 11.3.6
LO Navigation planning procedures
List the factors to be considered by the commander before commencing the flight.
Source: NAT 007, 8.3 Pre-flight procedures
Navigation system degradation
(NAT Doc 007, Chapter 12)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 376 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
LO For this part, consider aircraft equipped with only two operational LRNSs and state the
requirements for the following situations:
one system fails before take-off;
one system fails before the OCA boundary is reached;
one system fails after the OCA boundary is crossed; and
the remaining system fails after entering NAT HLA.
Source: NAT 007, 12.2
LO Special procedures for in-flight contingencies
(NAT Doc 007, Chapter 13)
LO State the general procedures and also state that the general concept of these NAT
in-flight contingency procedures is, whenever operationally feasible, to offset the
assigned route by 15 NM and climb or descend to a level which differs from those
normally used by 500 ft if below FL 410 or by 1 000 ft if above FL 410.
Source: NAT 007, 13.1 and 13.2
LO State all the factors which may affect the direction of turn including:
direction to an alternate aerodrome;
terrain clearance;
levels allocated on adjacent routes or tracks and any known SLOP offsets adopted by
other nearby traffic.
Source: NAT 007, 13.3.2
LO State that if the deviation around severe weather is to be greater than 10 NM,
the assigned flight level must be changed by ± 300 ft depending on the followed
track and the direction of the deviation.
Source: NAT 007, 13.4
071 01 03 04 Extended-range operations with two-engined aeroplanes (ETOPS)
LO State that ETOPS approval is part of an AOC.
Source:
Point SPA.ETOPS.100 ‘ETOPS’;
Point SPA.ETOPS.105 ‘ETOPS operational approval’
LO State that prior to conducting an ETOPS flight, an operator shall ensure that a suitable
ETOPS en-route alternate is available, within either the approved diversion time or a
diversion time based on the MEL-generated serviceability status of the aeroplane,
whichever is shorter.
Source: Point SPA.ETOPS.110 ‘ETOPS en-route alternate aerodrome’
LO State the requirements for take-off alternate.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —aeroplanes’
LO State the planning minima for ETOPS en-route alternate. Source: Point
SPA.ETOPS.115 ‘ETOPS en-route alternate aerodrome planning minima’
LO Navigation-planning procedures.
Describe the operator’s responsibilities concerning ETOPS routes.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.135 ‘Routes and areas of operation —general’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.145 ‘Establishment of minimum flight altitudes’;
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 377 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Point CAT.OP.MPA.150 ‘Fuel policy’
LO Selection of a route.
Describe the limitations on extended-range operations with two-engined aeroplanes
with and without ETOPS approval.
LO Selection of alternate aerodrome.
State the maximum flight distance of a take-off alternate for:
two-engined aeroplanes;
ETOPS-approved aeroplanes;
three- or four-engined aeroplanes.
Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.180 ‘Selection of aerodromes —aeroplanes’
LO State the maximum distance from an adequate aerodrome for two-engined
aeroplanes without an ETOPS approval. Source: Point CAT.OP.MPA.140 ‘Maximum
distance from an adequate aerodrome for two-engined aeroplanes without an
ETOPS approval’
LO State the requirement for alternate aerodrome accessibility check for ETOPS
operations.
Learning-Teaching Methods
3. Lecture-discussion
4. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
2. Written Test
Reference Materials
H. Jeppesen- Operational Procedures: JAA Training, Edition 2
I. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft Part I Commercial Air transport Operations (Aeroplanes)
J. ECARAS Part 8: Operations
K. JAR OPS-1: Commercial Air Transport Aeroplanes
L. ICAO Annex 17-Security
M. ICAO Annex 18- Transport of Dangerous Good by Air
N. FAA-H-8083-3A: Aeroplane Flying Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 378 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
3.31. PTS/PL313: SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
AND HAZARDS — GENERAL ASPECTS
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
071 02 00 00 SPECIAL OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES AND HAZARDS — GENERAL ASPECTS 7
Operations manual
071 02 01 00
(Points ORO.MLR.100, ORO.MLR.101 and related
AMCs/GM)
071 02 01 01 Operating procedures
LO Explain the general rules for the operations manual.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’; AMC1 ORO.MLR.100
LO Explain the structure and subject headings of the operations manual.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual — structure for commercial air
transport’;
GM1 ORO.MLR.100(k) ‘Operations manual — general’
LO Explain the requirements for a journey log or equivalent.
Source: Point ORO.MLR.110 ‘Journey log’; AMC1 ORO.MLR.110
LO Describe the requirements regarding the operational flight plan.
Source: Point ORO.MLR.115 ‘Record-keeping’
LO Explain the requirements for document-storage periods.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.115 ‘Record-keeping’; AMC1 ORO.MLR.115;
GM1 ORO.MLR.115(c);(d)
LO Explain that all non-type-related operational policies, instructions and procedures
required for a safe operation are included in Part A of the operations manual.
LO Source:
Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual — structure for commercial air
transport;
AMC3 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’ (main topics in Part A,
e.g. General/Basic, etc.)
LO State that the following items are included into Part A:
de-icing and anti-icing on the ground;
adverse and potentially hazardous atmospheric conditions;
wake turbulence;
incapacitation of crew members;
use of the minimum equipment list (MEL) and configuration deviation list(s)
(CDL);
security;
handling of accidents and occurrences.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual — structure for commercial air
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 379 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
transport’;
AMC3 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’
LO State that the following items are included into Part A:
altitude alerting system procedures;
ground proximity warning system procedures;
policy and procedures for the use of traffic alert and collision avoidance system
(TCAS)/airborne collision avoidance system (ACAS).
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual — structure for commercial air
transport’;
AMC3 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’
071 02 01 02 Aeroplane/helicopter operating matters — type-related
LO State that all type-related instructions and procedures required for a safe
operation are included in Part B of the operations manual. They take account of
any differences between types, variants or individual aircraft used by an operator.
Source: Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual —structure for commercial
air transport’
LO State that the following items are included into Part B:
abnormal and emergency procedures;
configuration deviation list (CDL);
minimum equipment list (MEL);
emergency evacuation procedures.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.101 ‘Operations manual — structure for commercial air
transport’;
AMC3 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’
071 02 01 03 Minimum equipment list (MEL) and master minimum equipment list (MMEL)
LO Describe the following terms: ‘commencement of flight’, ‘inoperative’, ‘MEL’,
‘MMEL’, ‘rectification interval’.
Source:
GM1 ORO.MLR.105(a) ‘Minimum equipment list’; CS-MMEL;
GM2 ORO.MLR.105(d)(3)
LO Explain the relation between MMEL and MEL.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’; Point ORO.MLR.105 ‘Minimum
equipment list’; AMC1 ORO.MLR.105(j);(g) GM1 ORO.MLR.105(j)
LO Define the ‘extent of the MEL’.
Source: AMC2 ORO.MLR.105(d)(3) ‘Minimum equipment list’
LO Explain the responsibilities of the operator and the competent authority
with regard to MEL and MMEL.
Source:
Point ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual — general’; Point ORO.MLR.105 ‘Minimum
equipment list’; AMC1 ORO.MLR.105(c);
GM1 ORO.MLR.105(d)(3)
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 380 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
LO Explain the responsibilities of the flight crew members with regard to MEL.
Source: Points CAT.IDE.A.105/CAT.IDE.H.105 ‘Minimum equipment for flight’
LO Explain the responsibilities of the commander with regard to MEL.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.175 ‘Flight preparation’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.105/CAT.IDE.H.105 ‘Minimum equipment for flight’
071 02 02 00 Icing conditions
071 02 02 01 On-ground de-icing/anti-icing procedures, types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids
LO Define the following terms:
‘anti-icing’, ‘de-icing’, ‘one-step de-icing/anti-icing’, ‘two- step de-icing/anti-icing’,
‘holdover time’.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing
Operations’, Glossary
LO Describe ‘the clean aircraft concept’ as presented in the relevant chapter of ICAO
Doc 9640.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De-icing/Anti-icing
Operations’, Chapter 2
LO List the types of de-icing/anti-icing fluids available.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing
Operations’, Chapter 4, 4.1
LO Explain the procedure to be followed when an aeroplane has exceeded the holdover
time.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing
Operations’, Chapter 4, 4.9
LO Interpret the guidelines for fluid holdover times and list the factors which can reduce
the fluid protection time.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing Operations’,
Chapter 5: 5.1, 5.2 and Attachment ( 5 tables)
LO Explain how the pre-take-off check, which is the responsibility of the pilot-in-
command, ensures that the critical surfaces of the aircraft are free of ice, snow, slush
or frost just prior to take-off. This check shall be accomplished as close to the time of
take-off as possible and is normally made from within the aeroplane by visually
checking the wings.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing Operations’,
Chapter 6, 6.4
LO Explain why an aircraft has to be treated symmetrically. Source: ICAO Doc 9640
‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 11
LO Explain why an operator shall establish procedures to be followed when ground
de-icing and anti-icing and related inspections of the aircraft are necessary.
LO Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De-
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 1: Introduction 1.1 to 1.6
LO Explain why a commander shall not commence take-off unless the external surfaces
are clear of any deposit which might adversely affect the performance or controllability
of the aircraft except as permitted in the flight manual.
Source:
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 381 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De-icing/Anti-icing Operations’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.250 ‘Ice and other contaminants —ground procedures’
LO Explain the requirements for operations in icing conditions.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.250 ‘Ice and other contaminants —ground procedures’;
Point CAT.OP.MPA.255 ‘Ice and other contaminants —flight procedures’;
Point CAT.IDE.A.165 ‘Additional equipment for operations in icing conditions at
night’;
Point CAT.IDE.H.165 ‘Additional equipment for operations in icing conditions at
night’
LO Explain why safety must come before commercial pressures in relation to de-icing
and anti-icing of aircraft.
(Consider time and financial cost versus direct and indirect effects of an
incident/accident).
Source: N/A
071 02 02 02 Procedure to apply in case of performance deterioration, on ground/in flight
LO Explain that the effects of icing are wide-ranging, unpredictable and dependent upon
individual aircraft design. The magnitude of these effects is dependent upon many
variables, but the effects can be both significant and dangerous.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing Operations’,
Chapter 1
LO Explain that in icing conditions, for a given speed and a given angle of attack, wing lift
can be reduced by as much as 30 % and drag increased by up to 40 %. State that these
changes in lift and drag will significantly increase stall speed, reduce controllability, and
alter flight characteristics.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing Operations’,
Chapter 1
LO Explain that ice on critical surfaces and on the airframe may also break away
during take-off and be ingested into engines, possibly damaging fan and
compressor blades. Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De-
icing/Anti-icing Operations’, Chapter 1
LO Explain that ice forming on pitot tubes and static ports or on angle-of-attack vanes may
give false altitude, airspeed, angle-of-attack and engine-power information for air-
data systems.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing Operations’,
Chapter 1
LO Explain that ice, frost and snow formed on the critical
LO surfaces on the ground can have a totally different effect on aircraft flight
characteristics than ice, frost and snow formed in flight.
Source: ICAO Doc 9640 ‘Manual of Aircraft Ground De- icing/Anti-icing
Operations’, Chapter 1
LO Explain that flight in known icing conditions is subject to limitations that are
contained in Part B of the operations manual.
Source: AMC4 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual —general’
LO Explain where procedures and performances regarding flight in expected or actual
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 382 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
icing conditions can be found.
Source: AMC4 ORO.MLR.100 ‘Operations manual —general’
071 02 03 00 Bird-strike risk
071 02 03 01 Bird-strike risk and avoidance
LO Explain that the presence of birds that constitute a potential hazard to aircraft
operations is part of the pre-flight information.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, 8.1 Pre-flight information
LO Explain how information concerning the presence of birds observed by aircrews is made
available to the aeronautical information service (AIS) for distribution as the
circumstances dictate.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Chapter 8
LO Explain that the Aeronautical Information Publication (AIP) Section En-route (ENR)
5.6 contains information regarding bird migrations.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 1
LO Explain significant data regarding bird strikes contained in ICAO Doc 9137 ‘Airport
Services Manual’.
Source: ICAO Doc 9137 ‘Airport Services Manual’, Chapter 1
LO Explain why birds constitute a hazard to aircraft (damage to probes, sensors, engines,
windscreens, airframes, degradation in vision, etc.).
Source: N/A, though history in ICAO Doc 9137, Chapter 1. For more information,
refer to the EGAST safety promotion leaflet ‘Bird strike, a European risk with local
specificities’,
available at:
www.easa.europa.eu/system/files/dfu/EGAST_GA6-bird- strikes-final.pdf
LO Define the commander’s responsibilities regarding the
reporting of bird hazards and bird strikes.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.105 ‘Responsibilities of the commander’
LO State that birds tend to flock to areas where food is plentiful. Such areas include:
rubbish (garbage) facilities; open sewage treatment works; recently ploughed land; as
well as their natural habitats.
Source: N/A
071 02 04 00 Noise abatement
071 02 04 01 Noise-abatement procedures
LO Define the operator’s responsibilities regarding the establishment of noise-
abatement procedures.
Source:
Point CAT.OP.MPA.130 ‘Noise abatement procedures —aeroplanes’
LO State the main purpose of noise-abatement departure procedure (NADP) 1 and NADP
2.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Aircraft Operations’
(PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part I, Section 7, Appendix to Chapter 3, 1.1
LO State that the PIC/commander has the authority to decide not to execute an NADP
if conditions preclude the safe execution of the procedure.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Aircraft
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 383 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part I, Section 7, Chapter 3, 3.2.1 General
071 02 04 02 Influence of the flight procedure (departure, cruise, approach)
LO List the main parameters for NADP 1 and NADP 2 (i.e. speeds, heights and
configuration).
Source: ICAO Doc 8168 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Aircraft
Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part I, Section 7, Chapter 3, 3.3 and Appendix to
Chapter 3
LO State that a runway lead-in lighting system should be provided where it is desired to
provide visual guidance along a specific approach path for noise-abatement purposes.
Source: ICAO Annex 14, Volume 1, 5.3.7.1/Volume 2, 5.3.4.1
LO State that detailed information about noise-abatement procedures is to be found in
Part ‘Aerodromes’ (AD), Sections 2 and 3 of the AIP.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 1
071 02 04 03 Influence by the pilot (power setting, low drag)
LO List the adverse operating conditions under which noise- abatement procedures in the
form of reduced-power take- off should not be required
Source: ICAO Doc 8168 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Aircraft Operations’
(PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part I, Section 3, Chapter 1, 1.2.3 Reduced power take-off
LO List the adverse operating conditions under which noise- abatement procedures during
approach should not be required.
Source: ICAO Doc 8168 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Aircraft
Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume 1, Part I, Section 7, Chapter 2, 2.1 Noise
preferential runways
LO State the rule regarding the use of reverse thrust on landing. Source: ICAO Doc 8168
‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Aircraft Operations’ (PANS-OPS), Volume
1, Part I, Section 7, Chapter 3, 3.5 Aeroplane operating procedures — landing
071 02 05 00 Fire and smoke
071 02 05 01 Carburettor fire
LO Explain that the actions to be taken in the event of a carburettor fire may be type-
specific and should be known by the pilot.
071 02 05 02 Engine fire
LO Explain that the actions to be taken in the event of an engine fire may be type-specific
and should be known by the pilot.
071 02 05 03 Fire in the cabin, in the flight crew compartment and in the cargo compartment
LO Identify the different types of extinguishants used in handheld fire extinguishers
and the type of fire for which each one may be used.
LO Describe the precautions to be considered when applying fire extinguishants.
LO Identify the appropriate handheld fire extinguishers to be used in the flight crew
compartment, the passenger cabin and lavatories, and in the cargo compartments.
071 02 05 04 Smoke in the flight crew compartment and in the cabin
LO Explain which actions should be taken in the event of smoke in the flight crew
compartment or in the cabin, why these actions may be type-specific, and why they
should be known by the pilot.
071 02 05 05 Actions in case of overheated brakes
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 384 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
LO Describe the problems and safety precautions in the event that brakes overheat after a
heavy-weight landing or a rejected take-off.
LO Explain the difference in the way steel and carbon brakes react to energy absorption
and the operational consequences.
071 02 06 00 Decompression of pressurised cabin
071 02 06 01 Slow decompression
LO Explain what can cause, and how to detect, a slow decompression or an automatic
pressurisation system failure.
LO Describe the actions required following a slow decompression.
071 02 06 02 Rapid and explosive decompression
LO Explain what can cause, and how to detect, a rapid or an explosive
decompression.
071 02 06 03 Dangers and action to be taken
LO Describe the actions required following a rapid or explosive decompression.
LO Describe the effects on aircraft occupants of a slow decompression and of a
rapid or explosive decompression.
071 02 07 00 Wind shear and microburst
071 02 07 01 Effects and recognition during departure and approach
LO Explain how to identify low-level wind shear.
Source: ICAO Circular 186 ‘Wind Shear’
071 02 07 02 Actions to avoid and actions to take when encountering wind shear
LO Describe the effects of wind shear and the actions required when wind shear is
encountered at take-off and approach.
Source: ICAO Circular 186 ‘Wind Shear’
LO Describe the precautions to be taken when wind shear is suspected at take-off
and approach.
Source: ICAO Circular 186 ‘Wind Shear’
LO Describe the effects of wind shear and the actions required following entry into a
strong downdraft wind shear.
Source: ICAO Circular 186 ‘Wind Shear’
LO Describe a microburst and its effects.
Source: ICAO Circular 186 ‘Wind Shear’
071 02 08 00 Wake turbulence
071 02 08 01 Cause
LO Describe the term ‘wake turbulence’.
Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning Manual’, Part II
LO Describe tip vortex circulation.
Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning Manual’, Part II
LO State when vortex generation begins and ends.
Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning Manual’, Part II
LO Describe vortex circulation on the ground with and without crosswind.
Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning Manual’, Part II
071 02 08 02 List of relevant parameters
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 385 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL301: FLIGHT PLANNING AND MONITORING
LO List the three main factors which, when combined, give the strongest vortices
(heavy, clean, slow).
Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning Manual’, Part II
LO Describe the wind conditions which are worst for wake turbulence near the
ground.
Source: ICAO Doc 9426 ‘Air Traffic Services Planning Manual’, Part II
071 02 08 03 Actions to be taken when crossing traffic, during take-off and landing
LO Describe the actions to be taken to avoid wake turbulence, specifically separations.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Air Traffic
Management’ (PANS-ATM), 5.8 Time- based wake turbulence longitudinal separation
minima
Learning-Teaching Methods
5. Lecture-discussion
6. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
3. Written Test
Reference Materials
O. Jeppesen- Operational Procedures: JAA Training, Edition 2
P. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft Part I Commercial Air transport Operations (Aeroplanes)
Q. ECARAS Part 8: Operations
R. JAR OPS-1: Commercial Air Transport Aeroplanes
S. ICAO Annex 17-Security
T. ICAO Annex 18- Transport of Dangerous Good by Air
U. FAA-H-8083-3A: Aeroplane Flying Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 386 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL314: Security (unlawful events)
3.32. PTS/PL314: Security (unlawful events)
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
071 02 09 00 Security (unlawful events) 4
071 02 09 01 ICAO Annex 17 and Regulation (EC) No 300/2008
LO Define the following terms:
‘aircraft security check’, ‘screening’, ‘security’, ‘security-restricted area’,
‘unidentified baggage’.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO State the objectives of security.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, 2.1 Objectives
071 02 09 02 Use of secondary surveillance radar (SSR)
LO Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning notifying the
appropriate ATS unit.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Attachment to Annex 17
LO Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning operation of SSR.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Attachment to Annex 17
LO Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning departing from assigned
track or cruising level.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Attachment to Annex 17
LO Describe the commander’s responsibilities concerning the action required or being
requested by an ATS unit to confirm SSR code and ATS interpretation response.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Attachment to Annex 17
071 02 09 03 Security (Regulation (EC) No 300/2008 and ICAO Annex 17)
LO Describe the relationship between Regulation (EC) No 300/2008 and ICAO
Annex 17.
Source: Regulation (EC) No 300/2008, Articles 1 and 2
LO Explain the requirements regarding training programmes.
Source: Regulation (EC) No 300/2008, Annex: 10 ‘In-flight security measures’ and
11 ‘Staff recruitment and training’; ICAO Annex 17, 13.4 Training programmes
LO State the requirements regarding reporting acts of unlawful
interference.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, 13.5 Reporting acts of unlawful interference
LO State the requirements regarding aircraft search procedures.
Source: ICAO Annex 17:
4.3 Measures relating to aircraft;
5.1 Prevention;
13.3 Aeroplane search procedure checklist
071 02 10 00 Emergency and precautionary landing, and ditching
071 02 10 01 Descriptions
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 387 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL314: Security (unlawful events)
LO Describe the meaning of: ‘ditching’, ‘precautionary landing’,
and ‘emergency landing’.
LO Describe a ditching procedure.
LO Describe a precautionary landing procedure.
LO Describe an emergency landing procedure.
LO Explain the factors to be considered when deciding to conduct a
precautionary/emergency landing or ditching.
071 02 10 02 Cause
LO List some circumstances that may require a ditching, a precautionary landing or
an emergency landing.
071 02 10 03 Passenger information
LO Describe the briefing to be given to passengers before conducting a
precautionary/emergency landing or ditching (including evacuation).
Source: AMC1 CAT.OP.MPA.170 ‘Passenger briefing’
071 02 10 04 Action after a precautionary/emergency landing or ditching
LO Describe the actions and responsibilities of crew members after landing.
071 02 10 05 Evacuation
LO Explain why the aircraft must be stopped and the engine(s) shut down before
launching an emergency evacuation.
LO Explain the CS-25 requirements regarding evacuation procedures.
Source: CS 25.803 and Appendix J
071 02 11 00 Fuel jettisoning
071 02 11 01 Safety aspects
LO Explain why an aircraft may need to jettison fuel so as to reduce its landing mass
in order to make a safe landing.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services—Air Traffic
Management’ (PANS-ATM), 15.5.3 Fuel dumping
LO Explain that when an aircraft that operates within controlled airspace needs to
jettison fuel, the flight crew shall coordinate with ATC the following:
route to be flown which, if possible, should be clear of cities and towns, preferably over
water and away from areas where thunderstorms have been reported or are expected;
the flight level to be used, which should be not less than 1 800 m (6 000 ft); and
the duration of fuel jettisoning.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444 ‘Procedures for Air Navigation Services — Air Traffic
Management’ (PANS-ATM), 15.5.3 Fuel dumping
LO Explain how flaps and slats may adversely affect fuel jettisoning.
Source: CS 25.1001 Fuel jettisoning system
071 02 11 02 Requirements
LO Explain why a fuel-jettisoning system must be capable of jettisoning enough fuel
within 15 minutes.
Source: CS 25.1001 Fuel jettisoning system
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 388 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL314: Security (unlawful events)
Learning-Teaching Methods
7. Lecture-discussion
8. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
4. Written Test
Reference Materials
V. Jeppesen- Operational Procedures: JAA Training, Edition 2
W. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft Part I Commercial Air transport Operations (Aeroplanes)
X. ECARAS Part 8: Operations
Y. JAR OPS-1: Commercial Air Transport Aeroplanes
Z. ICAO Annex 17-Security
AA. ICAO Annex 18- Transport of Dangerous Good by Air
BB. FAA-H-8083-3A: Aeroplane Flying Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 389 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL315: Transport of dangerous goods by air
3.33. PTS/PL315: Transport of dangerous goods by air
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
071 02 12 00 Transport of dangerous goods by air 3
071 02 12 01 ICAO Annex 18 (4th Edition, July 2011)
LO Define the following terms:
‘dangerous goods’, ‘dangerous goods accident’, ‘dangerous goods incident’,
‘exemption’, ‘incompatible’, ‘packaging’, ‘UN number’.
Source: ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 1 Definitions
LO Explain that detailed provisions for the transport of dangerous goods by air are
contained in the Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods
by Air.
Source:
ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’;
LO ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 2, 2.2.1
LO State that in the event of an in-flight emergency, the pilot-in- command must inform
the ATC of the transport of dangerous goods by air.
Source: ICAO Annex 18, Chapter 9, 9.5
Technical Instructions for the Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air (ICAO Doc
071 02 12 02
9284)
LO Explain the principle of dangerous goods compatibility and segregation.
Source: ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’
LO Explain the special requirements for the loading of radioactive materials.
Source: ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’
LO Explain the use of the dangerous goods list.
Source: ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’
LO Identify the labels.
Source: ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’
071 02 12 03 Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 — Annex IV (Part-CAT) and Annex V (Part-SPA)
LO Explain the terminology relevant to dangerous goods.
Source:
Point SPA.DG.100 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’;
Point SPA.DG.105 ‘Approval to transport dangerous goods’;
Point SPA.DG.110 ‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’
LO Explain the scope of that Regulation.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 390 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL315: Transport of dangerous goods by air
LO Explain why the transport of dangerous goods by air is subject to operator
approval.
Source:
Point SPA.DG.100 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’;
AMC1 ARO.OPS.200 ‘Specific approval procedure’
LO Explain the limitations on the transport of dangerous goods by air.
Source:
Point SPA.DG.100 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’;
Point SPA.DG.105 ‘Approval to transport dangerous goods’; Point SPA.DG.110
‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’
LO Explain the requirements for the acceptance of dangerous goods.
Source:
Point SPA.DG.110 ‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’;
AMC1 SPA.DG.110(b) ‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’
LO Explain the requirements regarding inspection for damage, leakage or
contamination.
LO Source:
Point SPA.DG.105 ‘Approval to transport dangerous goods’; AMC1 SPA.DG.110(b)
‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’: (a)(1)
LO Explain the requirement for the provision of information to flight crew.
Source:
Point SPA.DG.110 ‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’;
AMC1 SPA.DG.110(a);(b) ‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’
LO Explain the requirements for dangerous goods incident and accident reports.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’
LO State that some articles and substances, which would otherwise be classed as
dangerous goods, can be exempted if they are part of the aircraft equipment, or
required for use during aeromedical flights. Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’; ICAO Doc 9284
‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’,
2.2 Exceptions for
dangerous goods of the operator
LO Explain why some articles and substances may be forbidden for transport by air.
Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’; ICAO Doc 9284
‘Technical Instructions For The Safe
LO Transport of Dangerous Goods by Air’, 2.1 Dangerous goods
forbidden for transport by air under any circumstance
LO Explain why packing must comply with the specifications of the Technical Instructions.
Source: ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’, Introductory chapter, 2.4 (for packing purposes, etc.)
LO Explain the need for an inspection prior to loading dangerous goods on an
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 391 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL315: Transport of dangerous goods by air
aircraft.
Source:
Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 ‘Transport of dangerous goods’; AMC1 SPA.DG.110(b)
‘Dangerous goods information and documentation’
LO Explain why some dangerous goods are designated for carriage only on cargo aircraft.
Source:
ICAO Annex 18, 8.9 Loading on cargo aircraft;
ICAO Doc 9284 ‘Technical Instructions For The Safe Transport of Dangerous
Goods by Air’, GENERAL PRINCIPLES
LO Explain how misdeclared or undeclared dangerous goods found in baggage are to
be reported.
Source: Point CAT.GEN.MPA.200 and related AMCs/GM
071 02 13 00 Contaminated runways
071 02 13 01 Intentionally left blank
071 02 13 02 Estimated surface friction, friction coefficient
LO Identify the difference between friction coefficient and estimated surface
friction.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2
LO State that when estimated surface friction is 4 or 5, the expected braking action
is good.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2
071 02 13 03 Hydroplaning principles and effects
LO Define the different types of hydroplaning.
Source: NASA TM-85652 — Tire friction performance
LO Compute the two dynamic hydroplaning speeds using the following formulas:
spin-down speed (rotating tire) (kt) = 9 square root (pressure in PSI)
spin-up speed (non-rotating tire) (kt) = 7.7 square root (pressure in PSI).
Source: NASA TM-85652 — Tire friction performance
LO State that it is the spin-up speed rather than the spin-down speed which represents the
actual tire situation for aircraft touchdown on flooded runways.
Source: NASA TM-85652 — Tire friction performance
071 02 13 04 Intentionally left blank
071 02 13 05 SNOWTAM and contamination on the aerodrome
LO Interpret from a SNOWTAM the contamination and braking action on a runway,
taxiways and apron.
Source: ICAO Annex 15, Appendix 2
LO Explain which hazards can be identified from the SNOWTAM/METAR and
how to mitigate them.
SPECIALISED OPERATIONS
071 04 01 00
(Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 on air operations, as amended)
071 04 01 01 Additional requirements for commercial specialised operations and CAT
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 392 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL315: Transport of dangerous goods by air
operations (Annex III (Part-ORO), Subpart FC, Section 3)
LO Explain the requirements related to flight crew recurrent training and checking
and operator proficiency check.
Source: Point ORO.FC.330 ‘Recurrent training and checking — operator proficiency
check’
071 04 01 02 General requirements (Annex VIII (Part-SPO), Subpart A)
LO Explain the task specialist’s responsibilities.
Source: Point SPO.GEN.106 ‘Task specialists responsibilities’
Learning-Teaching Methods
9. Lecture-discussion
10. Self-reading
Assessment Methods
5. Written Test
Reference Materials
CC. Jeppesen- Operational Procedures: JAA Training, Edition 2
DD. ICAO Annex 6: Operation of Aircraft Part I Commercial Air transport Operations (Aeroplanes)
EE. ECARAS Part 8: Operations
FF. JAR OPS-1: Commercial Air Transport Aeroplanes
GG. ICAO Annex 17-Security
HH. ICAO Annex 18- Transport of Dangerous Good by Air
II. FAA-H-8083-3A: Aeroplane Flying Handbook
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 393 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL108: AVIATION SECURITY
3.34. PTS/PL108: AVIATION SECURITY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
SECURITY — Safeguarding International Civil Aviation against Acts of Unlawful
010 12 00 00 14
Interference (ICAO Annex 17)
010 12 01 00 Essential definitions of ICAO Annex 17
010 12 01 01 Essential definitions of ICAO Annex 17
LO Recall the definitions of the following terms:
airside, aircraft security check, screening, security, security control, security-restricted
area, unidentified baggage.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 1 Definitions
010 12 02 00 General principles
010 12 02 01 General principles — Objectives of security
LO State the objectives of security.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 2, 2.1 Objectives
010 12 03 00 Intentionally left blank
010 12 04 00 Preventive security measures
010 12 04 01 Preventive security measures
LO Describe the objects not allowed (for reasons of aviation security) on board an aircraft that
is engaged in international civil aviation.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 4, 4.1 Objective
LO State what each Contracting State is supposed to do if passengers subjected to security
control have mixed after a security screening point.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 4, 4.4 Measures relating to passengers and their cabin
baggage
LO Explain what has to be done when passengers who are obliged to travel because of
judicial or administrative proceedings are supposed to board an aircraft.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 4, 4.7 Measures relating to special categories of
passengers
LO Explain what has to be considered if law enforcement officers carry weapons on
board.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 4, 4.7 Measures relating to special categories of
passengers
010 12 05 00 Management of response to acts of unlawful interference
010 12 05 01 Management of response to acts of unlawful interference
LO Describe the assistance each Contracting State shall provide to an aircraft subjected to an
act of unlawful seizure.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 5, 5.2 Response
LO State the circumstances which could prevent a Contracting State from detaining an aircraft
on the ground after being subjected to an act of unlawful seizure.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 5, 5.2 Response
010 12 06 00 Operators’ security programme
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 394 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL108: AVIATION SECURITY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
010 12 06 01 Operators’ security programme — Principles
LO Describe the principles of the written operator’s security programme each
Contracting State requires from operators.
Source: ICAO Annex 17, Chapter 3, 3.3 Aircraft operators
Security procedures in other documents, i.e. ICAO Annexes 2, 6 and 14, ICAO Doc
010 12 07 00
4444, Regulation (EU) No 965/2012 and CS-ADR-DSN
010 12 07 01 ICAO Annex 2 — Rules of the Air, including Attachment B — Unlawful interference
LO Describe what the PIC should do, in a situation of unlawful interference, unless
considerations aboard the aircraft dictate otherwise.
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Chapter 3, 3.7 Unlawful interference
LO Describe what the PIC, of an aircraft subjected to unlawful interference, should do if:
the aircraft must depart from its assigned track;
the aircraft must depart from its assigned cruising level;
the aircraft is unable to notify an ATS unit of the unlawful interference.
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Attachment B ‘Unlawful interference’
LO Describe what the PIC should attempt to do with regard to broadcast warnings and the level
at which to proceed, in a situation of unlawful interference, if no applicable regional
procedures for in-flight contingencies have been established.
Source: ICAO Annex 2, Attachment B ‘Unlawful interference’
010 12 07 02 ICAO Annex 6 — Operation of Aircraft , Chapter 13 — Security
LO Describe the special considerations referring to flight crew compartment doors with
regard to aviation security.
Source: ICAO Annex 6, Chapter 13, 13.2 Security of the flight crew compartment
010 12 07 03 ICAO Annex 14 Volume I — Aerodromes Chapter 3 — Physical characteristics
LO Describe what minimum distance an isolated aircraft parking position (after the aircraft has
been subjected to unlawful interference) should have from other parking positions,
buildings or public areas.
Source: ICAO Annex 14 Volume I, Chapter 3, 3.14 Isolated aircraft parking position
010 12 07 04 ICAO Doc 4444 — Air Traffic Management
LO Describe the considerations that must take place with regard to a taxi clearance in case an
aircraft is known or believed to have been subjected to unlawful interference.
Source: ICAO Doc 4444, Chapter 15, 15.1.3 Unlawful interference and aircraft bomb
threat
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-discussion
2. Hands on Practice
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
2. Demonstration
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 395 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL108: AVIATION SECURITY
Syllabus Duration
BK Syllabus Details and Associated Learning Objectives
Reference (Hrs.)
Reference Materials
A. ICAO ANNEX 17: Security
B. ICAO Annex 6:Operation of Aircraft
C. ICAO Doc 9433:Manual Concerning Interception of Civil Aircraft
D. Ethiopian Security Training Manual
E. Jeppesen, Air Law: JAA ATPL Training, Edition 2
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 396 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL243: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS III
3.35. PTS/PL243: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS III
Lesson Code: LAN-03
Lesson Duration: 40 hrs.
Lesson Objectives:
At the end of this lesson, trainees will be able to:
Use Polite expression to calm angry passengers before situations set worse
Describe seemingly dangerous passengers
Use words to describe actions and positions of passenger
Use accurate actions in progress to describe actions in progress
Use appropriate words and expressions of reporting
Research and present major communication problems in Pilot to pilot and Pilot to ATC
Communication
Evaluate the causes for different incidents and accidents in aviation
Emphasize the importance of maintaining effective communication for aviation safety
1. Security
1.1. Air rage
1.2. Suspicious passengers
1.3. Unlawful interference
1.4. Language Functions
1.4.1. Expressing possibility
1.4.2. Reporting
1.4.3. Describing people
1.4.4. Describing Actions and Position
1.4.5. Describing an action in progress
2. Fatal Words (Situational Analysis And Presentation)
2.1. Language based Communication Problems
2.2. Communication Problems that are not based on Language
2.3. Potential Solutions
3. Project presentation
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. Lecture-Discussion
2. Group work
3. Individual Reading Assignment
4. Video Analysis
5. CBT
6. Extensive Listening and Speaking Exercises
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 397 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
PTS/PL243: AVIATION ENGLISH FOR PILOTS III
7. Speech Recognition & Voice Record Exercises
8. Vocabulary Exercises
9. presentations
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
2. Class participation
3. Group Project Presentations
4. Individual Assignment presentation
REFERENCE MATERIALS
A. Aviation English course book
B. AES for Pilots
C. ICAO Manual for Radio Telephony
D. ICAO Manual for the Implementation of ICAO Language Proficiency Ratings
E. Fatal Wards: Communication Clashes and Aircraft Crashes
_________________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training - Phase III 398 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Ground Training: Phase IV
4. GROUND TRAINING PHASE IV (Optional)
The training in this phase is required for MPL Type rating on B 737 or Q-400 aeroplanes.
Trainees will either take the B 737 NG or the Q 400 systems training based on which
aircraft they are going to be type rated.
The System training is Computer based (CBT).
The syllabus for the system is already approved by ECAA together with the type rating
approval for the two aircraft.
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training – Phase IV 399 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March. 2022
PTS/PL555: B737 NG Aircraft Systems
4.1. PTS/PL555: B 737 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
Lesson Code: TYP-03
Lesson Duration: 20 hrs.
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson, trainees will be able to:
Describe different B-737NG system
Identify considerations for normal and abnormal operations of different B-737NG systems
1. Aircraft General
1.1. System Description
2. Air Conditioning
2.1. System Description
2.2. Normal Operation
2.3. Non-Normal Operation
3. APU
3.1. System Description
3.2. Normal Operation
3.3. Non-Normal Operation
4. Autoflight
4.1. System Description
4.2. Normal Operation
4.3. Non-Normal Operation
5. Bleed Air
5.1. System Description
5.2. Normal Operation
5.3. Non-Normal Operation
6. Communication
6.1. System Description
6.2. Normal Operation
6.3. Non-Normal Operation
7. Engines
7.1. System Description
7.2. Normal Operation
7.3. Non-Normal Operation
8. Electrical
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training – Phase IV 400 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March. 2022
PTS/PL555: B737 NG Aircraft Systems
8.1. System Description
8.2. Normal Operation
8.3. Non-Normal Operation
9. Fire Protection
9.1. System Description
9.2. Normal Operation
9.3. Non-Normal Operation
10. Flight Controls
10.1. System Description
10.2. Normal Operation
10.3. Non-Normal Operation
11. Flight Instruments
11.1. System Description
11.2. Normal Operation
11.3. Non-Normal Operation
12. Flight Management
12.1. Part I
12.2. Part II
12.3. Part III
13. Fuel
13.1. System Description
13.2. Normal Operation
13.3. Non-Normal Operation
14. Hydraulics
14.1. System Description
14.2. Normal Operation
14.3. Non-Normal Operation
15. Ice and Rain
15.1. System Description
15.2. Normal Operation
15.3. Non-Normal Operation
16. Landing Gear
16.1. System Description
16.2. Normal Operation
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training – Phase IV 401 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.9
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM March. 2022
PTS/PL555: B737 NG Aircraft Systems
16.3. Non-Normal Operation
17. Pressurization
17.1. System Description
17.2. Normal Operation
17.3. Non-Normal Operation
18. Warning Systems
18.1. System Description
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. CBT
2. Self-Reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. B 737 NG Flight Crew Operations Manual
_____________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Ground Training – Phase IV 402 | 4 0 4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
4.2. PTS/PL556: BOMBARDIER Q-400 NG AIRCRAFT SYSTEMS
Lesson Duration: 20 hrs.
Learning Objectives
At the end of the lesson, trainees will be able to:
Describe different q400 system
Identify considerations for normal and abnormal operations of different Q-400 systems
1. Aircraft General - Exterior
2. Aircraft General- Interior
3. Exterior Lighting
4. Crew Alerting System
5. Electrical System Description
6. Electrical Controls and Indicators
7. Fuel Overview
8. Refueling Defueling and Fuel Transfer
9. Interior Lighting
10. Electrical Normal Operation
11. Electrical Abnormal Operation
12. APU
13. Engine Fuel System
14. Propeller Control System
15. Power Plant Abnormal Operation Part I
16. Power Plant Abnormal Operation Part II
17. Fire Protection
18. Power Plant Overview
19. Engine Oil System
20. Power Plant Normal Operation
21. Air Conditioning
22. Pressurization
23. Ice and Rain Protection
24. Hydraulic System Description
25. Landing Gear Overview
26. Landing Gear Operation
27. Brakes and Nose Wheel Steering
28. Flight Controls Overview
29. Flight Controls Roll
30. Pitch Control System
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-403
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
31. Flight Controls Yaw
32. Flight Controls Flaps
33. Flight Controls Warnings
34. PFD
35. AHRS
36. EFIS Autopilot Overview
37. PFD Flags
38. MFD Nav. Displays
39. Air Data System
40. Miscellaneous Avionics
41. Weather Radar
42. TCAS Overview
43. FMS Overview
44. FMS CDU Basics
45. FMS Additional Functions
46. Communications
47. Emergency
48. AFCS Overview
49. AFCS Models and Control
Learning-Teaching Methods
1. CBT
2. Self-Reading
Assessment Methods
1. Written Test
Reference Materials
A. DHC- 8 (Q-400) Flight Crew Operations Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-404
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
PART II- FLIGHT TRAINING (Stages 1-5)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-405
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Part II: FLIGHT TRAINING –COMMON (STAGES 1-5)
This section covers the practical flight training courses common to both categories of MPL
training.
The table below shows the stages and training duration for each stage covered in this sub
part.
5. Flight Training (Common)
Duration (Hrs.)
Phase Stage Stage Title FTD
Aeroplane Total
PF PNF
1 Flight Basics 15 - 0 15
I (Core) 2 Flying Fundamentals 10 - 14 24
3 Core Flying Skills 15 - 17 32
4 Basic Instrument 40 - 52.5 92.5
II (Basic) Multi Engine
5 Procedures 20 - 13 33
Total 100 0 96.5 196.5
Table 1-1: Summary of Common Flight Training
1. FLIGHT TRAINING - STAGE-1: FLIGHT BASICS
Overview
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-406
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
This stage of training is completed in a DA-40 NG or C-172 Flight Training Device (FTD) and is
designed to prepare the student for flight operations. This stage uses Line Oriented Simulation (LOS)
to gradually introduce more complex Pilot Decision Making (PDM) and operation line decisions
designed to promote a healthy attitude towards safety and risk management.
Objectives
After completion of stage 1, trainee will be able to:
apply basic flight procedures up to and including all exercises including the circuit;
apply theoretical knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of flight, meteorology and air
regulations;
Follow Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) for the DA-40 NG/C-172;
Make basic Pilot Decision Making skills (PDM); and
Demonstrate awareness of Safety Management through basic risk assessment and promote a
positive safety culture.
Instructional Methods to be used
This stage of training uses a combination of traditional instruction and Scenario Based Training for
the pre, post and in flight lesson structure. Line Oriented Simulation and the use of Line Oriented
Flight Training (LOFT) debriefing techniques are used to help develop the student’s PDM and risk
management skills.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage II, students must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Proficiency in the use of the SOP
Knowledge of flight operations including airspace, theory of flight, weather and radio
procedures
The ability to make basic decisions pertaining to flight operations, and a positive
attitude towards flight safety.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-407
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Flight Time Total
Lesson
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF
No. X/C A/C SIM
(A/C) (SIM) (A/C) (A/C) (SIM)
Procedures
1.1 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 1
Procedures
1.2 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 2
Procedures
1.3 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 3
Procedures
1.4 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 4
Procedures
1.5 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 5
Procedures
1.6 (P) DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 6
Procedures
1.7 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 7
Procedures
1.8 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 8
Procedures
1.9 DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
Trainer 9
1.10 Procedures
DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 1.5
(V) Validation
Stage 1 Flight Hours breakdown 0 15.0 0 0 0 0 0 15.0
Total Flying Hours (Stage 1 to 1) 0 15.0
Table 1-2: Summary of Stage 1 Flight Training
Key
(p) - Progress Check
(v) - Validation Check
IF - Instrument Flight
A/C - Aircraft
SIM - Simulator
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-408
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
PIC- Pilot in Command
A/C- Aircraft
X/C- Cross Country Flight
1.1. Lesson Plan 1.1 -Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.1 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
4 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
5 CRM/SRM
6 Pre-flight Procedures
7 Aircraft Cockpit Layout
8 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) – Pre-flight to After Start
9 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - Shutdown to Post-Flight
10 Pitch, Roll, Yaw Attitudes and Associated Flight Control Movements
11 Straight and Level Flight
12 Sector Scan (Horizon and Traffic Lookout)
II. Objectives
- To introduce the aircraft SOPs from Pre-flight to after Engine Start and Shutdown to Post-Flight
- To introduce Pitch, Roll and Yaw and the control movements that control each
- To introduce Straight and Level Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-409
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
- To demonstrate how to perform a proper Sector Scan
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1, 2, 4 - 6)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight
Authorization Procedures)
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the trainee:
Safety Procedures for the simulator
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Aircraft Pre-flight Inspection
Aircraft cockpit/control Layout
SOPs and use of Checklists
Normal Sector Scan Procedure
Cruise Attitude
Pitching, Pitch Attitudes, and control of Pitch Attitudes
Rolling, Banked Attitudes, and control of Banked Attitudes
Yaw, causes of Yaw and control of Yaw Attitudes
4 The trainee should be allowed to practice:
Normal Sector Scan Procedure, Cruise Attitude
Pitching, Pitch Attitudes, and maintenance of Pitch Attitudes
Rolling, Banked Attitudes, and maintenance of Banked Attitudes
Control of Yaw
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee should be able to:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-410
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
- Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Checklists
- Recognize the Cruise Attitude and Recognize the Basic Attitudes of the aircraft
- Smoothly Control Aircraft Movements and Maintain Attitudes
- Maintain Straight and Level Flight within Competency Criteria
- Demonstrate a proper Sector Scan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-411
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.2. Lesson plan 1.2 - Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.2 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “B” 07005 25KM CLEAR 18/12 Q1023
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - After Start to Taxi Out
3 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) – Taxi-in to Post-flight
4 Taxiing
5 Aircraft Trim
6 Straight and Level Flight at Varying Airspeeds
7 Engine Handling
8 Heading Indicator (Setting in Flight) and Compass Errors
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs from Pre-flight to Taxi-out and Taxi-in to
Post-flight
- To learn how to Taxi the aircraft
- To Recognize when the aircraft needs to be Trimmed
- To learn how to Trim the aircraft
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-412
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
- To fly Straight and Level at varying Airspeeds
- To learn proper Engine Handling Techniques
- To learn the procedures for setting the aircraft Heading Indicator while flying
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 2 - 6)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight
Authorization Procedures)
SOPs
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Attitudes and Movements
Straight and Level Flight
Sector Scan
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
SOPs - After Start and Taxi Out
Taxiing
Aircraft Trimming
Straight and Level Flight at various Airspeeds
Engine Handling Techniques
Compass Errors
Setting the Heading Indicator
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Normal Sector Scan Procedure
Cruise Attitude
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-413
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Pitching, Pitch Attitudes, and maintenance of Pitch Attitudes
Rolling, Banked Attitudes, and maintenance of Banked Attitudes
Control of Yaw
Straight and Level Flight at various Airspeeds
Aircraft Trimming
Setting the Heading Indicator
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
- Place the aircraft in the Cruise, and Normal Range of Attitudes
- Smoothly control aircraft movements
- Keep the aircraft in a Trimmed condition
- Use proper Engine Handling Techniques
- Set the Heading Indicator in flight
- Maintain Straight and Level Flight within Competency Criteria at various Airspeeds
- Demonstrate a proper Sector Scan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-414
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.3. Lesson Plan 1.3 - Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.3 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “C” 25005 25KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - Before Takeoff, Cruise, and After Landing
3 Climbs
4 Descents
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs for before Takeoff, Cruise and after Landing
- To learn the correct procedures to Enter, Maintain, and Level off from a Climb
- To learn the correct procedures to Enter, Maintain, and Level off from a Descent
- To Recognize that the aircraft can Climb and Descend at different rates
- To Recognize the effect of Flaps on aircraft performance
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 7 - 9)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-415
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Taxiing
Attitudes and Movements
Straight and Level Flight
Setting the Heading Indicator
Sector Scan
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
SOPs - Before Takeoff, and Cruise
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures
The effect and use of Flaps
SOPs - after Landing
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Taxiing
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures
Use of Flaps
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-416
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Perform Climbs at various Airspeeds
Perform Descents at various Airspeeds
Manage the use of Flaps
Demonstrate a proper Sector Scan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-417
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.4. Lesson Plan 1.4 - Procedures Trainer 4 (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.4 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “D” 25005 25KM 100BKN 19/10 Q1013
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - Climb Out, Approach, and Descent
3 Turns
4 Range and Endurance
5 Navigation To/From training areas.
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs for Climb out, Approach and Descent
- To change the aircraft heading in flight using the correct procedures
- To conduct Turns at different Bank Angles while maintaining Altitude
- To conduct Turns at different Bank Angles while either Climbing or Descending
- To place the aircraft in the proper configuration to maximize the aircraft’s Range
- To place the aircraft in the proper configuration to maximize the aircraft’s Endurance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-418
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
- To learn to identify landmarks on a map
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 9 and 10)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Climbs and Descents
Engine Handling Techniques
Use of Flaps
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
SOPs - Climb out
Standard and Half-Standard Turns
Climbing and Descending Turns
Flight for Maximum Range
Flight for Maximum Endurance
Identification of landmarks on a map
SOPs - Approach and Descent
4 The trainee should be allowed to practice:
Standard and Half-Standard Turns
Climbing and Descending Turns
Flight for Maximum Endurance
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-419
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Level Turns at various Airspeeds
Perform Climbing and Descending Turns
Roll Out on a Preselected Geographical Heading or specific Magnetic Heading within
15
Configure the aircraft for flight with Maximum Range and Endurance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-420
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.5. Lesson Plan 1.5 - Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.5 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “E” 27005 25KM 100SCT 22/14 Q1018
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - After Takeoff and Before Landing
3 Slow Flight
4 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
5 Navigation To/From training areas.
6 Radio Communications
7 Traffic pattern entry procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs for After Takeoff and Before Landing.
- To Enter, Maneuver and Recover the aircraft in the Slow Flight Speed Range
- To Recognize the characteristics of flight within the Slow Flight Speed Range
- To Recognize an approaching or actual stall
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-421
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
- To recover from an approaching or actual Stall with a minimum loss of Altitude
- To learn to Navigate using landmarks to and from the airport
- To introduce Radio Communication Procedures
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 10, 12, 13, 17, 20)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Navigation to/from the practice area
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Standard and Half-Standard Turns (in Level Flight and Climbing/Descending)
Flight for Maximum Range and Endurance
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
SOPs - After Takeoff
Slow Flight Entry and Recovery
Slow Flight characteristics
Approaching Stall symptoms and characteristics
Stall Entry and Recovery - Power Off
Stall Entry and Recovery - Power On
Elevator trim stall
Navigation to/from the practice area
Radio Communications
SOPs - Before Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-422
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Slow Flight Entry and Recovery
Stall Entry and Recovery
Navigation to/from the practice area
Radio Communications
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
5 The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Slow Flight at various Airspeeds
Recognize and Recover from Approaching Stall and full Stall
Use proper Techniques to Navigate to and from the practice area
Perform basic Radio Communications
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-423
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.6. Lesson Plan 1.6 - Procedures Training (Progress Check)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
1.6 (P)
Progress Test
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “F” 10005 25KM CLEAR 14/08 Q998
RNAV or VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 Steep Turn
4 Spiral Dive
5 Traffic Pattern/ Take-off and landing
6 Precautionary Approach/Forced Landing
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs
- To perform Precision Steep Turns
- To Recognize and Recover the aircraft from a Spiral Dive
- To perform traffic pattern entry procedures and exercise touch and go
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 16,21)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-424
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Navigation to/from the practice area
Radio Communications
Traffic Pattern/ Take-off and landing
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Slow Flight Entry, Maneuvering, and Recovery
Stall Recognition and Recovery
Elevator trim stall
Emergency Approach/Forced Landing
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Steep Turns (Precision)
Spiral Dive Recovery
Traffic Pattern/ Take-off and landing
Precautionary Approach/Forced Landing
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Steep Turns
Spiral Dive Recognition and Recovery
Emergency Approach/Forced Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all Pre and Post-Flight Duties without assistance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-425
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Demonstrate correct use of the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Precision Steep Turns
Demonstrate Elevator trim stall
Recognize and Recover from a Spiral Dive
Use proper Techniques to Navigate to and from the practice area
Perform basic Radio Communications
1.7. Lesson Plan 1.7 - Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.7 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “G” 03005 25KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
RNAV or VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - Traffic Pattern and Go-Around
3 Slips and skids
4 Estimating a Descent Point
5 Glide Descent
6 Traffic Patterns/ Take-off and landing
7 Go-Around
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-426
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs for the Traffic Pattern and Go-Around
- To identify types of slips and when to use them
- To perform Side-Slip, Forward-Slip and Slipping Turns
- To learn how to estimate a Descent Point
- To practice Glide to a Descent Point
- To learn Traffic Pattern Procedures
- To perform touch and go exercise and a Go-Around
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 12, 13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Navigation to/from the practice area
Radio Communications
Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Steep Turns
Spiral Dive Recognition and Recovery
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Slips
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-427
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Judging a Descent Point
Glide Descent
Traffic Pattern Procedures and Take-off and landing
Go-Around Procedures
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Slipping
Descents to a Point
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
Go-Around
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all Pre and Post-Flight Duties without assistance
Demonstrate correct use of the SOPs and Checklists
Identify and perform all three types of slips
Fly a Normal Traffic Pattern and perform touch and go’s
Recognize where the aircraft will land and adjust the Descent with power, Flaps and
slips
Perform a Go-Around with Positive Aircraft Control at all times
Use proper Techniques to Navigate to and from the practice area
Perform basic Radio Communications
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-428
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.8. Lesson Plan 1.8 - Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.8 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “H” 25005 25KM 100BKN 21/14 Q1017
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) - Takeoff and Landing
3 Takeoff/Landing
4 Take off aborting procedures (Before rotation speed)
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs for Takeoff and Landing
- To perform a Normal Takeoff
- To perform a Normal Landing
- To Take off aborting procedures (Before rotation speed)
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 10, 12, 13,)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-429
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Slips
Judging a Descent Point
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
Go-Around
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Normal Takeoff
Normal Landing
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Normal Takeoff and Normal Landing
Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
Traffic Patterns
Go-Around
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all Pre and Post-Flight Duties without assistance
Demonstrate correct use of the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Normal Takeoffs
Fly a Normal Traffic Pattern
Recognize where the aircraft will land and adjust the Descent with power, Flaps and
slips
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-430
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Recognize the need for, and perform a Go-Around when required
Perform Normal Landings
Perform Radio Communications
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-431
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.9. Lesson Plan 1.9 - Procedures Training (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.9 Procedures Training DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “I” 34015 25KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-Flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 Effects of Wind and Illusions Created by Drift
4 Crosswind Takeoff
5 Crosswind Landing
6 Take off aborting procedures (Before rotation and after airborne)/ Forced Landing)
II. Objectives
- To learn the aircraft SOPs
- To learn the effects of Wind and illusions created by Drift
- To learn how to manage Drift in the Traffic Pattern
- To perform a Crosswind Takeoff
- To perform a Crosswind Landing
- Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-432
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 11, 13, 14, 22)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
SOPs
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Normal Takeoff
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Normal Landing
Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Crosswind Takeoff
Illusions created by Drift
Crosswind Landing
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Crosswind Takeoff
Traffic Patterns with Drift
Crosswind Landing
Go-Around with Drift
Take off aborting procedures/ Forced Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-433
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee should be able to:
Perform all Pre and Post-Flight Duties without assistance
Demonstrate correct use of the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Crosswind Takeoffs with 10 knots of Wind
Fly a Normal Traffic Pattern with 20 knots of Crosswind
Recognize where the aircraft will land and adjust the Descent with power, Flaps and
slips
Recognize the need for, and perform a Go-Around when required
Perform Crosswind Landings with 10 knots of Wind
Perform Radio Communications
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-434
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
1.10. Lesson Plan 1.10 - Procedures Validation Check
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
1.10 (V) Procedures Validation Check DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “J” 34010 25KM 100BKN 15/08 Q1013
RNAV or VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 All Exercises from 1.1 to 1.9 including touch and go
4 Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
5 Workload Management (WM)
II. Objectives
- To verify sufficient Knowledge of the aircraft SOPs
- To verify adequate Knowledge of applicable theory to commence flight training
- To verify sufficient proficiency at basic Flight Maneuvers
- To verify basic concepts of take off and landing procedure are grasped
- To verify basic PDM and WM Skills are demonstrated by the student
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1 - 14, 17 - 22)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-435
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Validation Information
This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the phase have been met. The Instructor
is to provide the student the scenario package and monitor student performance. The flight will be
treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required during flight without any
prompting from the Instructor.
Scenario:
A solo flight to the practice area review Steep Turns, Slow Flight, and Stalls (Departure Stall,
Approach Stall, and Elevator Trim Stall). Remaining time will be used to practice Traffic Patterns.
The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
The following items must be demonstrated to a grade of 3 or better with reference to the
Competency Criteria:
Pre-flight Duties
Engine Start and Taxi Out
Normal Takeoff
Climb out
Cruise
Navigation to/from the practice area
Steep Turns
Slow Flight
Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
Approach preparation
Radio Communication Procedures
Traffic Pattern Joining/Entry Procedures
Go-Around
Normal Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-436
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 1
Taxi In and Shutdown
Post-Flight Duties
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the Validation Flight, and:
Complete all tasks without assistance
Demonstrate Workload Management (WM) Skills
Demonstrate PDM Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications
Perform take of and landing exercise
Perform proper aborting procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 1 1-437
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2. FLIGHT TRAINING (COMMON) - STAGE 2: FLYING FUNDAMENTALS
Overview
This stage of training introduces flight operations in the Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 aircraft. This
stage is designed to apply the student’s previous knowledge and prepare the student for their first
solo flight. This stage commences after the Procedures Validation in Stage I and terminates with the
recommendation for the student’s first solo.
Objectives
After completion of stage 2, trainee will be able to:
apply basic flight skills to a proficiency level sufficient to fly as Pilot In Command (first solo);
Demonstrate knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of flight, meteorology and air regulations
in flight
apply basic Pilot Decision Making skills (PDM) for normal and emergency operations; and
develop risk assessment skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
Instructional Methods to be used
This stage of training uses a combination of traditional instruction and Scenario Based Training for
the pre, post and in flight lesson structure. Line Oriented Simulation and the use of Line Oriented
Flight Training (LOFT) debriefing techniques are used to help develop the student’s PDM and risk
management skills.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage III, students must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Proficiency in operation of the aircraft as PIC (solo);
The ability to make basic decisions pertaining to flight operations and a positive attitude
towards flight safety; and
Adequate knowledge of emergency procedures for the DA-40 NG/C-172.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Flight Time Total
Lesson
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF
No X/C A/C SIM
A/C SIM A/C A/C SIM
2.1 Flying Fundamentals DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 2.0
2.2 Flying Fundamentals DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 2.0
2.3 Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 2.0
Airport and
2.4 Emergency DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 2.0
Procedures
Airport & Emergency
2.5 (S/P) DA-40 NG/C-172 FTD 2.0
Crosswinds
Area orientation and
2.6 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Air work
Flying Fundamentals
2.7 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
(Air work)
Air work & Airport
2.8 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Procedures
Airport Procedures
2.9 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
(Traffic Pattern)
Airport Procedures
2.10 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
(Traffic Pattern)
2.11 Airport Procedures –
DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
(S/P) (Traffic Pattern)
Airport and
2.12 Emergency DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Procedures
Airport Procedures
2.13 (V) DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
(Traffic Pattern)
2.14 First supervised Solo DA-40 NG/C-172 0.5 0.5
Second supervised
2.15 DA-40 NG/C-172 0.5 0.5
Solo
Stage 2 Total Hours breakdown 13 10.0 1.0 14 10
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Flight Time Total
Lesson
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF
No X/C A/C SIM
A/C SIM A/C A/C SIM
Total Hours ( Stages 1 to 2) breakdown 13 25.0 1.0 14 25
Total Flying Hours (Stage 1 to 2) 39
Table 1-3: Summary of Stage 2 Flight Training
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.1. Lesson Plan 2.1 - Flying Fundamentals (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.1 Flying Fundamentals DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” 29005 15KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Aircraft Trim
3 Straight and Level Flight at Varying Airspeeds
4 Types of Climbs and Definitions
5 Types of Descents and Definitions
6 Effect of Flap on Descents
7 Climb Entry and Level Off Procedures
8 Descent Entry and Level Off Procedures
9 Gliding
10 Tums-Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns in Level Flight
II. Objectives
- To Recognize when the aircraft needs to be Trimmed
- To learn how to Trim the aircraft
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
- To fly Straight and Level at varying Airspeeds
- To learn the correct procedures to Enter, Maintain, and Level Off from a Climb
- To learn the correct procedures to Enter, Maintain, and Level Off from a Descent
- To Recognize that the aircraft can Climb and Descend at different rates
- To Recognize the effect of Flaps on aircraft Descent performance
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1 - 14)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
6 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
Navigation
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
7 The Instructor should review with the student:
A Normal lookout (Sector Scan) Procedure
Cruise Attitude
Pitching and Pitch Attitudes
Rolling and Banked Attitudes
Control of Yaw
Attitudes and Movements
Straight and Level Flight at various Airspeeds
Aircraft Trimming
Engine Handling
8 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Aircraft Trim
Straight and Level Flight at varying Airspeeds
Compass errors, setting the Heading Indicator in flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures
The effect of Flaps on Descents
Gentle and Medium Turns
Normal Approach and Landing Procedures
Best Glide
9 The student should be allowed to practice:
Trimming the aircraft
Straight and Level Flight at varying Airspeeds
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures/ with and without Flaps
Best Glide
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns in Level turns
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Smoothly control aircraft movements and control Yaw
Keep the aircraft in a Trimmed condition
Use proper Engine Handling Techniques
Set the Heading Indicator in flight
Perform Climbs at various Airspeeds
Perform Descents at various Airspeeds
Manage the use of Flaps
Maintain Straight and Level Flight within Standards at various Airspeeds
Demonstrate a Sector Scan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.2. Lesson Plan 2.2 - Flying Fundamentals (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.2 Flying Fundamentals DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “B” 04010 15KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
RNAV or VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Climbing and Descending Turns
3 Engine Handling
4 Steep Turns - Precision and Collision Avoidance
5 Flight for Maximum Range
6 Flight for Endurance
7 Slow Flight
II. Objectives
- To change the aircraft heading in flight using the correct procedures
- To conduct Turns at different angles of Bank while maintaining Altitude
- To conduct Turns at different angles of Bank while either Climbing or Descending
- To place the aircraft in the proper configuration to maximize the aircraft’s Range
- To place the aircraft in the proper configuration to maximize the aircraft’s Endurance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
- To Recognize, Enter, Maneuver and Recover from Slow Flight
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 7 - 9, 17, 21)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Normal Takeoff
Pilot Decision Making (PDM) - Weather Analysis
Flight Management - Workload
Navigation
Approach Procedures and Traffic Pattern Entry/Exit
Normal Landing
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures
Judgment and manipulating Glides
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns in Level Flight
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Climbing and Descending Turns
Precision Steep Turns
Flight for Range and Endurance
Engine Handling
Slow Flight
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Climbing and Descending Turns
Precision Steep Turns
Flight for Range and Endurance
Slow Flight at various Airspeeds
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Level Turns at various Airspeeds
Perform Climbing and Descending Turns
Roll Out on a Preselected Geographical Heading or Specific Magnetic Heading within
15
Identify flight for Maximum Range and Endurance
Configure the aircraft for flight with Maximum Range and Endurance
Enter, Maneuver and Recover from Slow Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.3. Lesson Plan 2.3 – Air work (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.3 Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “C” 19008 15KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
ILS or VISUAL APP 25L DEPART 25R
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Stall Theory
3 Effect of Ailerons, Flaps and Power in Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim
Stall)
4 Recognition of an Approaching and Actual Stall
5 Power Off Stall and Elevator trim stall Entry and Recovery Procedures
6 Power On Stall Entry and Recovery Procedures
7 Elevator Trim Stall Entry and Recovery Procedures
II. Objectives
- To Recognize an approaching or actual Stall
- To recover from an approaching or actual Stall with a minimum loss of Altitude
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 12, 18 - 20)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Normal Takeoff
Pilot Decision Making (PDM) - Weather Analysis
Flight Management - Workload
Navigation
Approach Procedures and Traffic Pattern Entry/Exit
Normal Landing
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Climbing and Descending Turns
Precision Steep Turns
Range and Endurance
Slow Flight
Elevator trim stall
Engine Handling Techniques
Use of Flaps
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Stall Entry and Recovery - Power Off
Stall Entry and Recovery - Power On
Stall Entry and Recovery- Elevator Tri
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Power Off, On and Elevator trim stall Entry, Power Off, On and Elevator trim stall
Recovery Procedure
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Recognize and Recover from approaching Stall and full Stall
Navigate to and from the practice area with limited assistance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Perform Elevator trim stall
Perform Radio Communications with limited assistance
Join the Traffic Pattern and manage the Descent
Demonstrate PDM Skills pertaining to the flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.4. Lesson Plan 2.4 - Airport Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Airport & Emergency DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
2.4
Procedures
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “D” 16010 15KM 80BKN 8/1 Q1019
RNAV or VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Takeoff - Normal and Crosswind
3 Traffic Patterns - Runway Change
4 Landing - Normal and Crosswind
5 Go-Around (Including after round out)
6 Emergency Procedures - Bounce, Porpoise, Balloon Recovery
7 Emergency Procedures - Engine Failure at all points in the Traffic Pattern including engine
failure after takeoff.
8 Treat and error management.
Objectives
- To learn to fly a Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
- To learn to fly a correct Traffic Pattern - including Runway Change
- To learn to fly a Normal and Crosswind Approach and Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
- To learn the Go-Around Procedure
- To learn how recover from a Bounce, Porpoise and Balloon on Landing
- To learn how to handle Engine Failure at all points in the Traffic Pattern (including after
airborne)
II. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 10 - 14)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
III. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff Procedures
Normal Traffic Pattern Procedures - Runway Change
Normal and Crosswind Landing Procedures
Go-Around Procedure
Bounce, Porpoise and Balloon Recovery
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern (including After Airborne)
2 The student should be allowed to practice:
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
Traffic Pattern Procedures including Runway Change
Normal and Crosswind Landing
Bounce, Porpoise, and Balloon Recovery
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern to Touchdown
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.5. Lesson Plan 2.5 - Airport & Emergency Crosswind (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Airport & Emergency DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
2.5 (S/P)
Crosswinds
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “E” 34010 15KM 100BKN 21/14 Q998
RNAV or VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-Flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Takeoff - Crosswind
3 Illusions Created by Drift
4 Traffic Pattern - Managing Drift
5 Landing - Crosswind
6 Emergency Procedures - Partial Power Loss/Rough Running Engine
II. Objectives
- To learn to fly a Crosswind Takeoff
- To learn to fly a correct Traffic Pattern - managing Drift
- To learn to fly a Crosswind Approach and Landing
- To learn the effects of illusions created by Drift
- To learn how to manage a partial power loss/rough running engine
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 10 - 15, 22)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
Normal Takeoff
Traffic Pattern Procedures - Runway Change
Normal Landing
Go-Around
Emergency Procedures for Partial Power Loss/Rough Running Engine
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Crosswind Takeoff
Illusions created by Drift
Traffic Pattern Procedures to manage Drift
Crosswind Landing
3 The student should be allowed to practice:
Crosswind Takeoff
Managing Drift (Bank Angle Correction)
Traffic Patterns - Managing Drift
Crosswind Landing
Go-Around
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee should be able to:
Perform a Normal Takeoff with 10 knots of Crosswind
Fly the correct Traffic Pattern and compensate for Drift
Accomplish a Runway Change without assistance
Perform a Normal Landing with 10 knots of Crosswind
Determine when and execute a Go-Around when required
Perform Emergency actions for an Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern to Touchdown
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Perform Emergency Procedures for Partial Power Loss/Rough Running Engine
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.6. Lesson Plan 2.6 – Area Orientation & Air work (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.6 Area Orientation & Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-Flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Taxiing
3 Area Orientation
4 Aircraft Trim
5 Straight Flight
6 Level Flight
7 Straight and Level Flight at Varying Airspeeds
8 Engine Handling
9 Heading Indicator (Setting in Flight) and Compass Errors
II. Objectives
- To learn to Taxi the aircraft
- To Recognize when the aircraft needs to be Trimmed
- To learn how to Trim the aircraft
- To fly Straight
- To fly Level
- To fly Straight and Level at varying Airspeeds
- To review the procedures for setting the aircraft Heading Indicator while flying
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1 - 10, 12, 13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
Aircraft Pre-flight Inspection
Taxiing and Radio Communications
Navigation to & from the practice area
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2 The Instructor should review with the student:
Normal Sector Scan Procedure
Cruise Attitude
Pitching and Pitch Attitudes
Rolling and Banked Attitudes
Control of Yaw
Stabilized Approach
3 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Aircraft Trim
Straight Flight
Level Flight
Straight and Level Flight at varying Airspeeds
Compass errors
Setting the Heading Indicator in flight
Climb and Descent Procedures
Normal Approach and Landing Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
4 The student should be allowed to practice:
Trimming the aircraft
Straight Flight
Level Flight
Straight and Level Flight at varying Airspeeds
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Recognize the Cruise Attitude and Recognize the Basic Attitudes of the aircraft
Smoothly Control Aircraft Movements and Maintain Attitudes
Maintain Straight and Level Flight within standards
Demonstrate a proper Sector Scan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform a Normal Takeoff with 10 knots of Crosswind
Fly the correct Traffic Pattern and compensate for Drift
Perform a Normal Landing with 10 knots of Crosswind
Determine when and execute a Go-Around when required
Perform Emergency actions for a bounce, porpoise or balloon on Landing
Perform Emergency actions and Glide the aircraft to a Touchdown
Go-Around
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.7. Lesson Plan 2.7 – Flight Fundamental (Air work) (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.7 Flight Fundamental (Air work) DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-Flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Types of Climbs and Definitions
3. Types of Descents and Definitions
4. Effect of Flap on Descents
5. Climb Entry and Level Off Procedures
6. Descent Entry and Level Off Procedures
7. Gliding, Forced Landing
8. Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns in Level Flight
9. Slow Flight
10. Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
11. Steep Turn
12. Stabilized Approach
II. Objectives
- To learn the correct procedures to Enter, Maintain, and Level Off from a Climb
- To learn the correct procedures to Enter, Maintain, and Level Off from a Descent
- To Recognize that the aircraft can Climb and Descend at different rates
- To Recognize the effect of Flaps on aircraft Descent performance
- To learn the correct procedures for stabilized approach
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1 - 10 , 12, 13)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
Pre-flight Preparation (Weight and Balance, Weather Analysis, Flight Authorization
Procedures)
Navigation
Stabilized Approach
Post-Flight Duties (Flight Completion Paperwork, Log Book Entries)
2. The Instructor should review with the student:
Attitudes and Movements
Straight and Level Flight at various Airspeeds
Aircraft Trimming
Engine Handling
Sector Scan
3. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures
The effect of Flaps on Descents
Gentle and Medium Turns
Normal Approach and Landing Procedures
Best Glide
4. The student should be allowed to practice:
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures/ with and without Flaps
Stabilized approach
Best Glide
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns in Level Flight
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Smoothly control aircraft movements and control Yaw
Keep the aircraft in a Trimmed condition
Use proper Engine Handling Techniques
Set the Heading Indicator in flight
Perform Climbs at various Airspeeds
Perform Descents at various Airspeeds
Manage the use of Flaps
Maintain Straight and Level Flight within standards at various Airspeeds
Demonstrate a proper Sector Scan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.8. Lesson Plan 2.8 – Air work & Airport Procedure (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Air work & Airport
2.8 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Procedure Demo
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-Flight-Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Climbing and Descending Turns
3. Engine Handling
4. Steep Turns - Precision and Collision Avoidance
5. Flight for Maximum Range
6. Flight for Endurance
7. Slow Flight
8. Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
9. Traffic pattern entry procedures/Stabilized approach
II. Objectives
- To change the aircraft heading in flight using the correct procedures
- To conduct Turns at different Bank Angles while maintaining Altitude
- To conduct Turns at different Bank Angles while either Climbing or Descending
- To place the aircraft in the proper configuration to maximize the aircraft’s Range
- To place the aircraft in the proper configuration to maximize the aircraft’s Endurance
- To Recognize, Enter, Maneuver and Recover from Slow Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
- To practice proper procedures for traffic pattern entry (including procedures for joining
beginning, middle and base) and Stabilized approach
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 12, 17, 21)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
Normal Takeoff
Pilot Decision Making (PDM) - Weather Analysis
Flight Management - Workload
Navigation
Approach Procedures and Traffic Pattern Entry procedures
Normal Landing
2. The Instructor should review with the student:
Normal Climb Procedures
Normal Descent Procedures
Judgment and manipulating Glides
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns in Level Flight
3. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Climbing and Descending Turns
Precision Steep Turns
Flight for Maximum Range and Endurance
Engine Handling
Slow Flight
4. The student should be allowed to practice:
Climbing and Descending Turns
Precision Steep Turns
Elevator trim stall
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Flight for Maximum Range and Endurance
Slow Flight at various Airspeeds
Traffic pattern entry procedures from different side of the approach (beginning,
middle, base) and Stabilized approach
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the Instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
Perform Level Turns at various Airspeeds
Perform Climbing and Descending Turns
Perform Elevator trim stall
Roll Out on a Preselected Geographical Heading or Specific Magnetic Heading within
15
Identify flight for Maximum Range and Endurance
Configure the aircraft for flight with Maximum Range and Endurance
Enter, Maneuver and Recover from Slow Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.9. Lesson Plan 2.9 – Airport Procedure (Traffic Pattern) Dual
Flight Time
LP
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC Instr Instr X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.9 Airport Procedure (Traffic Pattern) Practice DA-40 NG/C- 1.5
172
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Stall Theory
3. Effect of Ailerons, Flaps and Power In Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim
Stall)
4. Recognition of an Approaching and Actual Stall
5. Power Off Stall and Elevator trim stall Entry and Recovery Procedures
6. Power On Stall Entry and Recovery Procedures
7. Spiral Dives
8. Forced Landing
9. Stabilized Approach/Take off and landing
10. Go-Around
II. Objectives
- To Recognize an approaching or actual Stall
- To recover from an approaching or actual Stall with a minimum loss of Altitude
- To exercise stabilized approach, take off and landing
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 18, 19, 20)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
Normal Takeoff
Pilot Decision Making (PDM) - Weather Analysis
Flight Management - Workload
Navigation
Approach Procedures and Traffic Pattern Joining
Normal Landing and take off
2. The Instructor should review with the student:
Climbing and Descending Turns
Precision Steep Turns
Range and Endurance
Slow Flight
Engine Handling Techniques
Use of Flaps
3. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Stall Entry and Recovery - Power Off
Stall Entry and Recovery - Power On
Spiral Dives
Normal take off and landing
4. The student should be allowed to practice:
Power Off Stall and Elevator trim stall entry, Power Off and on Recovery Procedure
Spiral Dive Recovery
Elevator trim stall
Normal take off and landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOPs and Checklists
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Recognize and Recover from approaching Stall and full Stall
Perform Spiral Dive Recovery
Navigate to and from the practice area with limited assistance
Perform Radio Communications with limited assistance
Join the Traffic Pattern and manage the Descent
Demonstrate PDM Skills pertaining to the flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.10. Lesson Plan 2.10 - Airport Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Airport Procedure (Traffic
2.10 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Pattern)
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Takeoff - Normal and Crosswind
3. Traffic Pattern - Runway Change
4. Landing - Normal and Crosswind
5. Go-Around (At different phases of the final approach and after round out)
6. Emergency Procedures - Bounce, Porpoise, Balloon Recovery
7. Emergency Procedures - Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
8. Emergency Procedures - Radio Failure
9. Glide Approach
10. Radio Failure procedure
11. Situational awareness
12. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
II. Objectives
- To learn to fly a Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
- To learn to fly a correct Traffic Pattern - including Runway Change
- To learn to fly a Normal and Crosswind Approach and Landing
- To learn the Go-Around Procedure
- To learn how recover from a Bounce, Porpoise and Balloon on Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
- To learn how to manage an Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
- To learn how to manage a Radio Failure in the Traffic Pattern
- To learn to judge a Glide Approach
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 11, 13, 14, 15, 16, 22)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff Procedures
Normal Traffic Pattern Procedures - Runway Change
Normal and Crosswind Landing Procedures
Go-Around Procedure
Bounce, Porpoise and Balloon Recovery
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern (including After Takeoff)
Glide Approach
Radio Failure Procedures (including Light Gun Signals)
2. The student should be allowed to practice:
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
Traffic Pattern Procedures including Runway Change
Normal and Crosswind Landing
Bounce, Porpoise, and Balloon Recovery
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern to Touchdown
Glide Approach
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform a Normal Takeoff with 10 knots of Crosswind
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Fly the correct Traffic Pattern and compensate for Drift
Perform a Normal Landing with 10 knots of Crosswind
Determine when and execute a Go-Around when required
Perform Emergency actions for a bounce, porpoise or balloon on Landing
Perform Emergency actions and Glide the aircraft to a Touchdown
Accurately estimate the Touchdown Point from a Glide Approach
Perform Emergency Procedures for Radio Failure in the Traffic Pattern
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.11. Lesson Plan 2.11 - Airport Procedures (Traffic Pattern) (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Airport Procedure (Traffic
2.11 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Pattern)
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Takeoff/Landing- Crosswind
3. Illusions Created by Drift
4. Traffic Pattern - Managing Drift
5. Slip
6. Emergency Procedures - Partial Power Loss/Rough Running Engine
7. Forced Landing
8. Stabilized Approach
9. Go-Around (At different phases of the final approach and after round out)
10. Situational awareness and pilot decision making
11. Treat and error management
II. Objectives
- To learn to fly a Crosswind Takeoff
- To learn to fly a correct Traffic Pattern - managing Drift
- To learn to fly a Crosswind Approach and Landing
- To learn when and how to use all three types of Slips
- To learn the effects of illusions created by Drift
- To learn how to manage a partial power loss/rough running engine
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 11, 13, 14, 15, 22)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should review with the student:
Normal Takeoff
Traffic Pattern Procedures - Runway Change
Normal Landing
Go-Around
Emergency Procedures for Partial Power Loss/Rough Running Engine
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Crosswind Takeoff
Illusions created by Drift
Traffic Pattern Procedures to manage Drift
Crosswind Landing
Forward-Slip
Side-Slip
Slipping Turns
3. The student should be allowed to practice:
Crosswind Takeoff
Managing Drift (Bank Angle Correction)
Traffic Patterns - Managing Drift
Crosswind Landing
Forward-Slip, Side-Side, and Slipping Turn
Go-Around
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Perform a Normal Takeoff with 10 knots of Crosswind
Fly the correct Traffic Pattern and compensate for Drift
Accomplish a Runway Change without assistance
Perform a Normal Landing with 10 knots of Crosswind
Recognize when to use and perform all three types of slip
Determine when and execute a Go-Around when required
Perform Emergency actions for an Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern to Touchdown
Perform Emergency Procedures for Partial Power Loss/Rough Running Engine
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.12. Lesson Plan 2.12 - Airport & Emergency Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Airport Procedure (Traffic
2.12 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Pattern)
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Go-Around (At different phases of the final approach and after round out)
3. Managing Emergency Procedures
4. Engine Failure (during initial climb and at different parts of the pattern)
5. Rejected Takeoff (before rotation and after airborne)
6. Fire handling procedures for both Engine and Electrical (and on air and on ground)
7. Evacuation procedures
8. Take-off/Landing- Cross-wind
9. Situational awareness and pilot decision making
10. Treat and error management
II. Objectives
- To learn how to manage In Flight Emergencies
- To learn how to perform an Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
- To learn how to perform a Rejected Takeoff and Evacuation
- To learn how to manage Aircraft Fires
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 13, 15)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Emergency Procedure Management
Resource Management including identifying and use of Available Resources
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
Rejected Takeoff Procedure
Evacuation Procedure
Engine Fire Procedure
Electrical Fire Procedure
Engine Failure After Takeoff
2. The student should be allowed to practice:
Go-Around due to unexpected event (truck on runway)
Emergency Procedure Management
Resource management including identifying and use of Available Resources
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern
Rejected Takeoff Procedure
Evacuation Procedure
Engine Fire Procedure
Electrical Fire Procedure
Engine Failure After Takeoff
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all Emergency actions as per the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
Perform Rejected Takeoff
Manage In Flight Emergencies effectively
Identify and use Available Resources
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
Perform Emergency actions for an Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern to Touchdown
Perform Electrical Fire Procedures in the Traffic Pattern to a Landing
Perform an Evacuation Procedure
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills pertaining to the flight
scenario
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.13. Lesson Plan 2.13 - Airport Procedures - Validation (Traffic
Pattern)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Airport Procedure (Traffic
2.13 (V) DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Pattern)
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
4. Workload Management (WM)
5. Take-off (Normal & Cross-Wind)
6. Landing (Normal & Cross-Wind)
7. Go-Around (At different phases of the final approach and after round out)
8. Stabilized Approach
II. Objectives
- To verify sufficient Knowledge of the SOPs, theory of flight, and air regulations pertaining
to local airport operations
- To verify adequate Knowledge of applicable theory to operate solo
- To verify sufficient proficiency of all Flight Maneuvers required for solo flight
- To verify sufficient Knowledge and Skill of Emergency Procedures to operate solo
- To verify effective PDM and WM Skills are demonstrated by the student
- To verify the trainee can safely operate the aircraft starting from engine start, taxi, take-
off and landing
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1 - 10, 12, 13, 15, 16)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Validation Information
This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the stage have been met. The Instructor is
to only intervene if performance is below the Minimum Standard or safety is jeopardized. The flight
will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required during flight
without any prompting from the Instructor.
1. The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
2. The following items must be demonstrated to a grade of 3 or better with reference to the
standards:
Pre-flight Duties
Engine Start and Taxi Out
Takeoff
Radio Procedures
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Go-Around
Landing
Emergency Procedures
Taxi In and Shutdown
Post-Flight Duties
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the Validation Flight, and:
Complete all tasks without assistance
Demonstrate good PDM Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications
Perform taxi, take-off and landing without compromising safety
The Instructor must be satisfied the student is safe for solo flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.14. Lesson Plan 2.14 - First Supervised Solo (Solo)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.14 First Supervised Solo DA-40 NG/C-172 0.5 0.5
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. First Solo Flight
3. Emergency handling procedure during solo flight (aircraft remark, engine failure)
4. Landing irregularity and go around
5. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
II. Objectives
- To perform your first solo Takeoff and Landing safely
- To revise emergency handling procedures
- To revise procedures for handling landing irregularities and go around
III. References
1. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3. PTS procedure Manual
4. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Weather
- To promote the development of PDM, the Pilot Flying (PF), in consultation with his/her
Instructor, shall determine if the Weather is suitable for the proposed flight
V. Required Practice during Flight
1. The Instructor will fly dual with the student to observe three unassisted Takeoffs and
Landings before allowing student to demonstrate solo
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-44
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2. The student shall conduct one solo Takeoff, Traffic Pattern, and a full stop Landing. The
Instructor shall advise Air Traffic Control (ATC) that the student will be conducting the first
solo flight prior to the student’s Departure
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The flight will be deemed successful if the student returns the aircraft with no damage
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-45
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 2
2.15. Lesson Plan 2.15 – Second Supervised Solo (Solo)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
2.15 Second supervised Solo DA-40 NG/C-172 0.5 0.5
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Second Solo Flight/one touch and go with full stop
3. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
II. Objectives
- To perform your second supervised solo /Takeoff and Landing
III. References
1. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3. PTS procedure Manual
4. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Weather
- To promote the development of PDM, the Pilot Flying (PF), in consultation with his/her
Instructor, shall determine if the Weather is suitable for the proposed flight
V. Required Practice during Flight
1. The Instructor will fly dual with the student to observe three unassisted Takeoffs and
Landings before allowing student to demonstrate solo
2. The student shall conduct solo Takeoff, one touch & go, Traffic Patterns and Full stop
Landing. The Instructor shall advise Air Traffic Control (ATC) that the student will be
conducting the Second supervised solo flight prior to the student’s Departure
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The flight will be deemed successful if the student returns the aircraft with no damage
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 2 2-46
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3. FLIGHT TRAINING (COMMON) - STAGE 3: CORE FLYING SKILLS
Overview
This stage of training is designed to bring the student up to the proficiency requirements equivalent
to a Private Pilot License. This stage commences with the first solo flight and terminates upon
successful completion of the Phase 1 Flight Test. This stage marks sufficient proficiency that Mutual
(Pilot and Safety Pilot) Operations can be conducted in Stage IV.
Objectives
After completion of stage 3, trainee will be able to:
Demonstrate knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of flight, meteorology and air regulations
in flight
apply Pilot Decision Making skills (PDM) for normal and emergency operations; and
develop risk assessment skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
Instructional Methods to be used
This stage of training uses a combination of traditional instruction and Scenario Based Training for
the pre, post and in flight lesson structure. Line Oriented Simulation and the use of Line Oriented
Flight Training debriefing techniques are used to help develop the student’s PDM and risk
management skills.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage IV, students must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Proficiency in application of theoretical knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of
flight, meteorology and air regulations;
The ability to apply Pilot Decision Making skills (PDM) for normal and emergency
operations; and
Required risk assessment skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Flight Time Total
Lesson Dua A/C SIM
Description Equip Dual PIC IF IF X/C
No. l
A/C A/C A/C SIM PIC
SIM
Air work Review & Area
3.1 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Orientation
Traffic Patterns and Soft
3.2 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.0
Field
Traffic Patterns and Soft
3.3 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.0
Field
3.4(V) Traffic Patterns DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
3.5 Traffic Patterns DA-40 NG/C-172 1.0
3.6 Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
3.7 Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.8 Short/Soft Field Operations 1.5
FTD
Air work Review and Forced DA-40 NG/C-172
3.9 1.5
Approach FTD
Precautionary Approach and DA-40 NG/C-172
3.10 1.5
Diversion FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.11 LOFT 3-A PDM 1.5 0.5
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.12 LOFT 3-B WM 1.5 0.5
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.13 Navigation and LOFT 3-C 2.0
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.14 Navigation 1.5
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.15 Instrument Flying 2.0 2.0
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.16 LOFT 3-D PDM 2.0
FTD
3.17 Basic attitude instrument DA-40 NG/C-172 1.0 1.0
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Flight Time Total
Lesson Dua A/C SIM
Description Equip Dual PIC IF IF X/C
No. l
A/C A/C A/C SIM PIC
SIM
Navigation and Cross
3.18 DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
Country Procedures
Navigation and Cross
3.19 DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
Country Procedures
3.20 Check Ride Prep DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
3.21(v) Phase 1 Flight Test DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Stage 3 Total Hours breakdown 13 15.0 4.0 1.0 3.0 0 17 15
Total Hours (Stages 1 to 3) breakdown 26 40.0 5.0 1.0 3.0 0 31 40
Total Flying Hours (Stage 1 to 3) 71
Table 1-4: Summary of Stage 3 Flight Training
3.1. Lesson Plan 3.1 -Air Work Review and Area Orientation(Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Air work Review & Area
3.1 DA-40NG /C-172 1.5
Orientation
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
2 Emergency Procedures - Engine Failure
3 Steep Turns
4 Slow Flight
5 Stalls (Power On, Power Off and Elevator Trim Stall)
6 Navigation to/from practice area
II. Objectives
- To execute a proper and safe Forced Landing, using the correct procedures, in the event of
an Engine Failure
- To prevent any injuries to yourself or your passengers
- To prevent or minimize damage to the aircraft
- To review Air work Exercises
- To Navigate to/from the practice area using a Visual Navigation Chart (VNC)
III. References
7 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,15-21)
8 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
9 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
10 PTS procedure Manual
11 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
12 The Instructor should review with the student:
Navigation to/from the practice area
Steep Turns
Slow Flight
Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) - Power On
13 The student should be allowed to practice:
Emergency Procedures for the Engine Failure
Air work
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Establish the aircraft in the correct configuration and manage the Glide Descent to
the selected field (does not have to successfully reach the field each time)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Perform the Emergency Procedures accurately for Engine Failure
Demonstrate good Pilot Decision Making (PDM) with respect to the Emergency
Perform all Air work Review Items to the Minimum Standards
3.2. Lesson Plan 3.2 - Traffic Patterns and Soft Field (Dual/Solo)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.2 Traffic Pattern & Soft Field DA-40NG /C-172 1.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Normal Takeoff
3 Normal Traffic Pattern
4 Normal Landing
5 Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
II. Objectives
- To practice and become more proficient at Normal Takeoff and Landing
- To build confidence in your ability to fly the aircraft without the presence of the Instructor
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
IV. Weather
To promote the development of PDM Skills, the Pilot Flying (PF), in consultation with his/her
Instructor, shall determine if the Weather is suitable for the proposed flight
V. Required Practice during Flight
- The student is to practice Normal Takeoffs, the Traffic Pattern, Landings and a Go-Around if
possible
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee is expected to continue to improve the quality of their Takeoffs and Landings.
3.3. Lesson Plan 3.3 - Traffic Patterns and Short Field (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.3 Traffic Pattern & Soft Field DA-40NG /C-172 1.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Normal Takeoff
3 Normal Traffic Pattern
4 Normal Landing
5 Short Field Takeoff and Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
6 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
7 Go-Around
8 Situational Awareness
II. Objectives
- To ensure that the correct procedures are being used to conduct a Normal Takeoff, Traffic
Pattern, Landing, and a Go-Around
- To learn the procedures for Operating from a Short Field
- To learn the procedures for Obstacle Departure and Approach
III. References
- Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,15,25,26)
- Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
- DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
- PTS procedure Manual
- Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
9 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Short Field Takeoff
Short Field Landing
10 The student should be allowed to practice with the Instructor (Dual):
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Normal and Crosswind Landing
Short Field Takeoff (Only Dual)
Short Field Landing (Only Dual)
Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern (Only Dual)
Go-Around
11 The student is to practice Normal Takeoffs, the Traffic Pattern, and Landings
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform a Normal Takeoff with up to 10 knots of Crosswind
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Fly the correct Traffic Pattern and compensate for Drift
Accomplish a Runway Change without assistance
Perform a Normal Landing with up to 10 knots of Crosswind
Perform correct procedures for Short and Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
Determine when and execute a Go-Around when required
Perform Emergency actions for an Engine Failure in the Traffic Pattern to
Touchdown
Perform Emergency procedures for radio failure in the traffic pattern
Maintain Situation Awareness by demonstration a good lookout, accurate wind corrections, and
maintaining correct traffic pattern spacing.
3.4. Lesson Plan 3.4- Traffic Patterns and area work (Validation)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.4 (V) Traffic Pattern DA-40NG /C-172 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Pre-Flight Procedure
3 Pilot Decision making
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
4 Work Load Management
5 Normal Take-Off
6 Cross-Wind Take-Off
7 Normal Landing
8 Cross-Wind Landing
9 After Landing Procedure
10 Navigation to/from practice area
II. Objectives
- To review Traffic Pattern Exercises
- To Navigate to/from the practice area using a Visual Navigation Chart (VNC)
- To improve proficiency of Takeoffs and Landings
III. References
- Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-14,17-21)
- Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
- DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
- PTS procedure Manual
- Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
The Instructor should review with the student:
Navigation to/from the practice area
Steep Turns
Slow Flight
Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) -
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate good PDM in the Traffic Pattern
Perform all Air work Review Items to the Minimum Standards
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3.5. Lesson Plan 3.5 – Traffic Patterns (Solo)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.5 Traffic Pattern DA-40NG /C-172 1.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Normal Takeoff
3 Normal Traffic Pattern
4 Normal Landing
5 Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
II. Objectives
- To practice and become more proficient at Normal Takeoff and Landing
- To build confidence in your ability to fly the aircraft without the presence of the Instructor
III. References
- Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
- Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
- DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
- PTS procedure Manual
- Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Weather
To promote the development of Pilot Decision Making (PDM), the Pilot-In-Command in
consultation with his/her Instructor shall determine if the Weather is suitable for the proposed
flight.
V. Required Practice during Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
6 The student is to practice Normal Takeoffs, the Traffic Pattern, Landings and a Go-Around
if possible
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee is expected to continue to improve the quality of their Takeoffs and Landings.
3.6. Lesson Plan 3.6 –Air work (Solo)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.6 Air work DA-40NG /C-172 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Steep Turns
3 Slow Flight
4 Stall
5 Power Off/Power On Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
6 Normal and Crosswind Takeoff and Landing
I. Objectives
- To review Air work Exercises
- To Navigate to/from the practice area using a Visual Navigation Chart (VNC)
- To improve proficiency of Takeoffs and Landings
II. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-14,17-21)
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
III. Required Instruction during Flight
The Instructor should review with the student:
Navigation to/from the practice area
Steep Turns
- Slow Flight
- Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) - Power On
IV. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate good PDM in the Traffic Pattern
Perform all Air work Review Items to the Minimum Standards
3.7. Lesson Plan 3.7 – Air work (Solo)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.7 Air work DA-40NG /C-172 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Steep Turns
3. Slow Flight
4. Stall
5. Power Off/Power On Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
6. Normal and Crosswind Takeoff and Landing
II. Objectives
- To review Air work Exercises
- To Navigate to/from the practice area using a Visual Navigation Chart (VNC)
- To improve proficiency of Takeoffs and Landings
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-14,17-21)
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
The Instructor should review with the student:
Navigation to/from the practice area
Steep Turns
- Slow Flight
- Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) - Power On
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate good PDM in the Traffic Pattern
Perform all Air work Review Items to the Minimum Standards
3.8. Lesson Plan 3.8 - Short/Soft Field Operations (Dual)
Lesson No. Description Equip Flight Time
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40 NG/C-172
3.8 Short/Soft Field Operations 1.5
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Short Field Takeoff and Landing
3. Soft Field Takeoff and Landing
4. Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
5. Fire - Engine and Electrical
II. Objectives
- To learn the procedures for operating from a Short Field
- To learn the procedures for operating from a Soft Field
- To learn the procedures for Obstacle Departure and Approach
- To review Emergency Procedures for Aircraft Fires
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,13,15,25 - 28)
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Short Field Takeoff
Short Field Landing
Soft Field Takeoff
Soft Field Landing
Obstacle Takeoff
Obstacle Landing
Electrical Fire Procedure
Engine Fire after Takeoff
2. The student should be allowed to practice:
Short Field Takeoff
Short Field Landing
Soft Field Takeoff
Soft Field Landing
Obstacle Takeoff
Obstacle Landing
Electrical Fire Procedure
Engine Fire after Takeoff
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform the correct procedures for Short, Soft and Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
Perform the Emergency procedures accurately for Engine Fire and Electrical Fire
Demonstrate good Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills with respect to the
Emergencies
3.9. Lesson Plan 3.9 – Air work Review and Forced Approach (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Air work Review & Forced DA-40NG /C-172
3.9 1.5
Approach FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Forced Approach and Landing Procedures
3. Emergency Procedures - Engine Failure
4. Steep Turns
5. Slow Flight
6. Stalls (Power On, Power Off and Elevator Trim Stalls)
7. Spin
8. Spiral Dive
II. Objectives
- To execute a proper and safe Forced Landing, using the correct procedures, in the event of
an Engine Failure
- To prevent any injuries to yourself or your passengers
- To prevent or minimize damage to the aircraft
- To review Air work Exercises
- To Navigate to/from the practice area using a Visual Navigation Chart (VNC)
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,13,15-21)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should review with the student:
Navigation to/from the practice area
Steep Turns
Slow Flight
Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) - Power On
Spins
Spiral Dive Recovery
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Forced Approach Procedure (complete)
3. The student should be allowed to practice:
Forced Approach Procedure in stages
Emergency Procedures for the Forced Approach
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Establish the aircraft in the correct configuration and manage the Glide Descent to
the selected field (does not have to successfully reach the field each time)
Perform the Emergency Procedures accurately for Engine Failure
Demonstrate good Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills with respect to the
Emergency
Perform all Air work Review Items to the Minimum Standards
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3.10. Lesson Plan 3.10 - Precautionary Approach and Diversion
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Precautionary Approach & DA-40NG /C-172
3.10 1.5
Diversion FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Precautionary Approach - Unfamiliar Airport
3. Diversion - to Airport
4. Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
5. Short Field Landing - Obstacles
6. Short Field Takeoff - Obstacles
7. Workload Management (WM)
II. Objectives
- To complete an Air work Review
- To practice Forced Approaches
- To perform a Diversion to an Unfamiliar Airport
- To perform Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
- To execute a proper and safe Precautionary Landing at an Unfamiliar Airport
- To perform a Short Field Landing and Takeoff
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
- To demonstrate good WM Skills when approaching an Unfamiliar Airport
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,13,25,26)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
Diversion to airport
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Short Field Landing and Takeoff
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Air Traffic Control (ATC) Radar Vectors
3. The student should be allowed to practice:
Air work Review
Forced Approach
Diversion back to the base airport
Precautionary Approach Procedure (Unfamiliar Airport)
Short Field Landing and Takeoff
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance to and from the practice area
Perform Precautionary Approach Procedures correctly
Perform Diversion Procedures correctly
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) Skills with respect to arriving at
an Unfamiliar Airport
Perform a safe Air work Review (Safe for Solo Practice)
Perform a successful Forced Approach (75% of the time)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3.11. Lesson Plan 3.11 - Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) 3-A
Decision Making (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
3.11 LOFT 3-A PDM 1.5
FTD
Weather:
HAAB/ADD ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Instrument Flying
3. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
4. Resource Management - Communications
II. Objectives
- To display PDM Skills in a real time flight environment
- To demonstrate awareness and use of Available Resources to determine the best outcome
- To learn Basic Instrument Flying Skills to Exit Poor Weather Conditions
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,13,29)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor shall review with the student:
Purpose of Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT)
Expectations of the student
Conduct of the flight as real time
Treat all abnormalities as real unless told otherwise
The Instructor will act as Air Traffic Control (ATC), other aircraft, etc.
The Instructor will only intervene if negative training will occur
The Debriefing is where the majority of learning will occur, and the Instructor will
lead the student to self-debrief the scenario
2. The Instructor will provide the scenario package to the student and follow the required
script
3. The Instructor will teach Basic Instrument Flying Skills during the LOFT event including:
Radial Scan
Performance Instruments
Control Instruments
Straight and Level Flight with reference to the Instruments
Climbs and Descents with reference to the Instruments
Combination of Turns, Climbs, and Descents
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the minimum standard during the flight, and:
Complete all tasks without assistance
Maintain Straight and Level Flight and execute a 180° turn with reference only to
the Instruments
Demonstrate good PDM Skills
Demonstrate effective Resource Management Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3.12. Lesson Plan 3.12 - Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) 3-B
Decision Making (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
3.12 LOFT 3-A PDM 1.5
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
3. Workload Management (WM)
4. Instrument Flying
II. Objectives
- To display PDM Skills in a Real Time Flight Environment
- To demonstrate good WM Skills
- To learn Basic Instrument Flying Skills to Exit Poor Weather Conditions
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,29)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
The Instructor shall review with the student:
Purpose of Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT)
Expectations of the student
Conduct of the flight as real time
Treat all abnormalities as real unless told otherwise
The Instructor will act as Air Traffic Control (ATC), other aircraft, etc.
The Instructor will only intervene if negative training will occur
The Debriefing is where the majority of learning will occur, and the Instructor will
lead the student to self-debrief the scenario
The Instructor will provide the scenario package to the student and follow the required script
I. The Instructor will review Basic Instrument Flying Skills during the LOFT event including:
Radial Scan
Performance and control Instruments
Straight and Level Flight with reference to the Instruments
Climbs and Descents with reference to the Instruments
Combination of Turns, Climbs, and Descents
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Complete all tasks without assistance
Maintain Straight and Level Flight, Climb and Descend, and execute a 180° turn
with reference only to the Instruments
Demonstrate good PDM Skills
Demonstrate effective Resource Management Skills
3.13. Lesson Plan 3.13 - Navigation and LOFT 3-C Pilot Decision Making
(Dual)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
3.13 Navigation & LOFT 3-C 2.0
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Navigation
3. Lost Procedures
4. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
5. Workload Management (WM)
6. Resource Management - Communications
II. Objectives
- To learn Visual Flight Rules (VFR) navigation Procedures (2 flight legs)
- To learn Lost Procedures
- To display PDM Skills in a real time flight environment
- To demonstrate good WM Skills
- To demonstrate awareness and use of Available Resources
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor shall review with the student:
Purpose of Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT)
Expectations of the student
Conduct of the flight as real time
Treat all abnormalities as real unless told otherwise
The Instructor will act as Air Traffic Control (ATC), other aircraft, etc.
The Instructor will only intervene if negative training will occur
The Debriefing is where the majority of learning will occur, and the Instructor will
lead the student to self-debrief the scenario
2. The Instructor will provide the scenario package to the student and follow the required
script. On leg one the Instructor shall demonstrate Navigation procedures to a planned
destination. On leg 2 the student will practice Navigation procedures to a planned
destination. The student will be presented with a scenario to challenge his/her PDM and
Resource Management Skills.
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Complete all Navigation Procedures with minimal assistance
Demonstrate good PDM Skills
Demonstrate effective Resource Management Skills
3.14. Lesson Plan 3.14 - Navigation (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
3.14 Navigation 1.5
FTD
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Navigation
3. Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4. Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
5. Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern using the correct procedures
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To learn the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures
3. The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
3.15. Lesson Plan 3.15 - Instrument Flying (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.15 Instrument Flying DA-40NG /C-172 FTD 2.0 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Selective Radial Scan
3. Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns
4. Symptoms of an Approaching Stall
5. Symptoms of a Spiral Dive
6. Stall Recovery Procedures
7. Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures
8. Instrument Flying - Partial Panel
II. Objectives
- To review the selective Radial Scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone
- To learn the Recovery Procedures for Attitudes Not Normally Encountered While Flying with
reference to the Instruments alone
- To learn to Recognize Instrument Failure and fly with reference to Partial Panel Instruments
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,18-20,29)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objective
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
1) Recognition and recovery from spiral dive
2) Stall recovery
3) Instrument scan skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
Instrument Failures and Limitations
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
3. The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone while remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 15
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
Maintain Straight and Level Flight while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3.16. Lesson Plan 3.16 - Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT) 3-D
Decision Making (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.16 LOFT 3-D PDM DA-40NG /C-172 FTD 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather:
ATIS “A” CALM 25KM CLEAR 23/14 Q1018
VISUAL APP 07R DEPART 07L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Instrument Flying - Introduction to Global Positioning System (GPS)
3. Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
4. Resource Management - Communications
II. Objectives
- To display PDM Skills in a real time flight environment for a time critical decision
- To demonstrate awareness and use of Available Resources to determine the best outcome
- To display Basic Instrument Flying Skills to Exit Poor Weather Conditions
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,29)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor shall review with the student:
Purpose of Line Oriented Flight Training (LOFT)
Expectations of the student
Conduct of the flight as real time
Treat all abnormalities as real unless told otherwise
The Instructor will act as Air Traffic Control (ATC), other aircraft, etc.
The Instructor will only intervene if negative training will occur
The Debriefing is where the majority of learning will occur, and the Instructor will
lead the student to self-debrief the scenario
2. The Instructor will provide the scenario package to the student and follow the required
script
3. The Instructor will teach Basic Instrument Flying Skills during the LOFT event including:
GPS use to determine current location
GPS use to find nearest airport
IV. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Complete all tasks without assistance
Demonstrate good PDM Skills
Demonstrate effective Resource Management Skills
3.17. Lesson Plan 3.17 Basic Attitude Instrument
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.17 Basic Attitude Instrument DA-40NG /C-172 1.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Instrument Flying -Full Panel
3. Instrument Scan
4. Straight and Level Flight at Varying Airspeeds
5. Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns
6. Symptoms of an Approaching Stall
7. Stall Recovery Procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn the scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice Straight and Level Flight at varying Airspeeds with reference to Instruments
alone
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone
- To understand symptoms of approaching Stall with reference to the Instruments alone
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,18-20,29)
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
2. The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Straight and Level Flight at varying Airspeeds
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard and Half-Standard Rate Turns
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes
I. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 15
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
3.18. Lesson Plan 3.18 – Navigation & Cross Country Procedures
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Navigation & Cross Country
3.18 DA-40NG /C-172 2.0
Procedures
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. VFR weather minimums and obstacle clearance minimums
3. Navigation
4. Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
5. Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
6. Diversions
I. Objectives
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern using the correct procedures
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To learn the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
II. References
- Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
- Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
- DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
- PTS procedure Manual
- Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
III. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures
3. The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
IV. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
3.19. Lesson Plan 3.19 – Navigation & Cross Country Procedures
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Navigation & Cross Country
3.19 DA-40NG /C-172 2.0
Procedures
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Navigation and course tracking
3. Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4. Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
5. Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern using the correct procedures
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To learn the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
The Instructor should assist the student with:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures
The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
3.20. Lesson Plan 3.20 – Check Ride Prep
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Navigation & Cross Country
3.20 DA-40NG /C-172 1.5
Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
I. Lesson Topics for Review (Review
of Student weak areas)
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Pre-flight
3. Navigation to/from training area
4. Weather requirements VFR
5. Airspace
6. Aircraft Systems
7. Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
8. Turns to Headings
9. Constant Airspeed Climbs/Descents
10. Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
11. Steep Turns
12. Unusual Attitude Recovery
13. Simulated Forced Landing
14. Slow flight
15. Basic Instrument Procedures
16. Traffic Pattern
17. Go-Around/Rejected Landing
18. Short Field Takeoff and Landing Procedures
19. Soft Field Takeoff and Landing Procedures
20. Lost Procedures/Diversion
21. Situational Awareness
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Note: The check ride preparation should include lesson topics 7,10,11,13,14,16,17,18. On the
remaining items the trainee should have satisfactory knowledge.
II. Objectives
- To practice weak sequences and verify that the student has achieved sufficient
Knowledge and Skill in VFR Procedures and Basic Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Skills
III. References
1. Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Pre-Validation Information
1. This session is a Pre-Validation Flight. The Instructor will ensure the student is prepared for
the Validation Flight.
2. The Instructor shall review with the student:
Expectations of the student
Weather Requirements VFR - Cross-Country Preparation
VFR Procedures
Lost Procedures/Diversion
Weak areas as described in Training Folder
Any Skill the student would like to discuss
Situational Awareness
3. The following items must be demonstrated to a grade of 2 or better, with reference to the
standards:
Pre-flight Duties - Navigation Planning
Takeoff - Crosswind (if possible)
Navigation Procedures
Radio Procedures
Steep Turns
Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Unusual Flight Attitudes
Basic Instrument flight
Simulated Forced Landing
Go-Around
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Go-Around
Landing - Crosswind (if possible)
Emergency Procedures - Lost
Situational Awareness - Fuel, Weather, Traffic, etc.
Taxi In and Shutdown
Post-Flight Duties
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the Pre-Validation Flight,
and:
Navigate without assistance
Demonstrate good Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications to maintain Situational Awareness of
Weather, Traffic, and Position Reports
Maintain good Situational Awareness of the Fuel Status of the aircraft
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) Skills by not falling behind the
aircraft when arriving at the destinations
The Instructor must be satisfied the student is ready for the Validation Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3.21. Lesson Plan 3.21 – Phase 1 Flight Test (Validation)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
3.21 Phase 1 Flight Test DA-40NG /C-172 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Ground Procedures-Start-up to Line-Up
3. Take-Off Roll Abort Procedures
4. Normal Take-Off
5. Climb & Climbing turn Procedures
6. Level Off from climb& Level – Off descent
7. Slow Flight
8. Steep Turn
9. Power Off Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
10. Forced Landing
11. Flight Management Skills
12. Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved the proficiency level for the Core Flying Skills
Phase
III. References
1. Core Flying Skills/Private Pilot Flight Test Guide
2. Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
3. DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4. PTS procedure Manual
5. Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the stage have been met. The Instructor is
to only intervene if performance is below the Minimum Standard or safety is jeopardized. The flight
will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required during flight,
without any prompting from the Instructor.
1. The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
2. The following items must be demonstrated to a grade of 3 or better with reference to the
standards:
Pre-flight Preparation
Certificates and Documents
Airworthiness Requirements
Weather Information
Cross-Country Flight Planning
Airspace System
Operation of aircraft systems
Pre-flight Procedures
Pre-flight Inspection
Cockpit Management
Engine Starting
Taxiing
Before Takeoff Check
Airport operations
Radio Communications and Air Traffic Control (ATC) Light Signals
Traffic Patterns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
Airport Runway and Taxiway Signs, Markings, and Lighting
Takeoffs, Landings, and Go-Arounds
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff and Climb
Normal and Crosswind Approach and Landing
Soft Field Takeoff and Climb, Approach and Landing
Short Field Takeoff and maximum performance Climb, Approach and Landing
Forward-Slip to a Landing
Go-Around/Rejected Landing
Performance Maneuvers
Steep Turns
Maneuvering during Slow Flight
Power Off/Power On Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
Navigation
Ground Reference Rectangular Course
Ground reference S-Turns
Navigation Systems and Radar Services
Diversion
Lost Procedures
Basic Instrument maneuvers
Straight and Level Flight
Constant Airspeed Climbs/Descents
Turn to headings
Recover from Unusual Flight Attitudes
Radio Communications, Navigation Systems
Emergency operations
Emergency Approach and Landing (simulated)
Systems and Equipment Malfunctions
Emergency Equipment and Survival Gear
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 3
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee must be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight for all exercises as
listed in paragraph D, and:
Complete all tasks without assistance
Demonstrate good PDM Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications
*The Instructor must be satisfied the student is safe for solo flight.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 3 3-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4. FLIGHT TRAINING (COMMON) - STAGE 4 – COMMERCIAL MANOEUVRES AND BASIC ATTITUDE
INSTRUMENT FLYING
Overview
This Stage of training is designed to train basic instrument flight procedures to the proficiency level
required to obtain an instrument rating. CRM skills for instrument flight such as Situational
Awareness, Workload Management and Pilot Decision Making are developed using scenario based
training (SBT) to analyze aircraft accidents and incidents
Objectives
After completion of stage 4, trainee will be able to:
Demonstrate basic understanding of all flight procedures and manoeuvres required for the
Instrument Rating Flight Test;
Apply knowledge of IFR fundamental procedures to the instrument rating standard;
Demonstrate knowledge of Threat and Error Management concept;
Demonstrate proficiency in single crew operations and applicable CRM skills to an IFR
environment; and
Demonstrate Pilot Decision Making skills (PDM) for normal and emergency operations.
Instructional Methods to be used
This stage of training uses a combination of traditional instruction and Scenario Based Training for the
pre, post and in flight lesson structure. Line Oriented Simulation and the use of Line Oriented Flight
Training debriefing techniques are used to help develop the student’s PDM and risk management
skills.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage V, trainees must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Proficiency in IFR navigation skills to include cross country navigation;
Application of theoretical knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of flight, meteorology
and air regulations;
Basic two crew operations and application of CRM skills, required risk assessment skills
and a positive attitude towards safety;
Ability to apply Pilot Decision Making skills (PDM) for normal and emergency
operations; and
Sound risk management skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Flight Time Total
Lesson Dua Dua A/C SIM
Description Equip PIC IF IF X/C
No. l l
A/C A/C SIM PIC
A/C SIM
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.1 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.2 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.3 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.4 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.5 (P) Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172 1.7
4.6 Instrument Flying - VOR 2.0
FTD
Instrument Flying – DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.7
VOR Holds FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.8 Instrument Flying - GPS
FTD
Instrument Flying – DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.9
GPS Holds FTD
Instrument Flying – DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.10 (P)
VOR& GPS FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.11 IFR Holding Procedures
FTD
IFR VOR & LOC DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.12
Approaches FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.13 IFR GPS Approaches
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.14 IFR ILS Approaches
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.15 (P) IFR Approach Progress
FTD
4.16 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Flight Time Total
Lesson Dua Dua A/C SIM
Description Equip PIC IF IF X/C
No. l l
A/C A/C SIM PIC
A/C SIM
4.17 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.18 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.19 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.20 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.21 Instrument Flying - VOR DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
Instrument Flying – DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.22
VOR Holds
4.23 Instrument Flying - GPS DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
Instrument Flying – DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.24
GPS Holds
4.25 IFR Holding Procedures DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
IFR VOR & LOC 1.2
4.26 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
Approaches
4.27 IFR ILS Approaches DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.28 IFR GPS Approaches DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
4.29 IFR Practice DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
4.30 (V) IFR Validation check DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.31 VFR Upper Air work 2.0
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.32 VFR Circuits 2.0
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.33 VFR Circuits 2.0
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.34 VFR Upper Air work 2.0
FTD
DA-40 NG/C-172
4.35 (V) VFR Air work Validation 2.0 1.0
FTD
4.36 VFR Upper Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Flight Time Total
Lesson Dua Dua A/C SIM
Description Equip PIC IF IF X/C
No. l l
A/C A/C SIM PIC
A/C SIM
4.37 VFR Upper Air work DA-40 NG/C-172 1.5
4.38 (V) VFR Air work Validation DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
4.39 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
4.40 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
4.41 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 1.30
4.42 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 1.30
4.43 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 1.30
4.44 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 1.30
4.45 Dual Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0
Traffic Pattern/
4.46 DA-40 NG/C-172 1.0 0.5
Maneuvers (SOLO)
4.47 Solo Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.5 2.5
4.48 Solo Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
4.49 Solo Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
4.50 Solo Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
4.51 Solo Cross-Country DA-40 NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
Stage 4 Flight Hours Breakdown 41.5 40.0 11.0 19 26.5 10.5 52.5 40
(Stages 1 - 4) Flight Hours Breakdown 67.5 80.0 16.0 20 29.5 10.5 83.5 80
Total Flying Hours (Stage 1-4) 163.5
Table 1-5: Summary of Stage 4 Flight Training
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.1. Lesson Plan 4.1 - Instrument Flying - BAI (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.1 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
1 Instrument Scan Pattern
2 Standard Rate Turns
3 Constant Bank Turns
4 Constant Rate Climbs and Descents
5 Constant Airspeed Climbs and Descents
6 Symptoms of an Approaching Stall
7 Symptoms of a Spiral Dive
8 Stall Recovery Procedures
9 Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures
10 Unusual Attitude Recoveries
II. Objectives
- To review Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone
- To learn the Recovery Procedures for Attitudes Not Normally Encountered While Flying with
reference to the Instruments alone
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- To practice Climbing and Descending with reference to the Flight Instruments alone
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 29 Page 8-2 to 8-9)
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Instrument Scan Pattern
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard Rate Turns
Constant Bank Turns from 10° to 30°
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard Rate Turns
Constant Bank Turns from 10° to 30°
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 15
Maintain Altitude +/- 150 ft.
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.2. Lesson Plan 4.2 - Instrument Flying - BAI (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.2 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Scan Pattern
3 Timed Turns to Compass Headings
4 Timed Climbs and Descents
5 Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures - Partial Panel
6 Unusual Attitude Recoveries - Partial Panel
7 Instrument Flying - Partial Panel
II. Objectives
- To review Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone - Partial Panel
- To learn the Recovery Procedures for Attitudes Not Normally Encountered While Flying with
reference to the Instruments alone
- To practice Climbing and Descending with reference to the Flight Instruments alone - Partial
Panel
- To learn to Recognize Instrument Failure and fly with reference to Partial Panel Instruments
III. References
Pilot Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Pages 8-2 to 8-9 )
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
Recognising Instrument Failure
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight - Partial Panel
Climbs and Descents - Partial Panel
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Timed Turns to Compass Headings - Partial Panel
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery - Partial Panel
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery - Partial Panel
Instrument Failures and Limitations
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Straight and Level Flight - Partial Panel
Climbs and Descents - Partial Panel
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Timed Turns to Compass Headings - Partial Panel
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes - Partial Panel
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes - Partial Panel
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level Attitude, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 20 during Timed Turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Maintain Altitude +/- 150 ft.
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
Maintain Straight and Level Flight while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.3. Lesson Plan 4.3 - Instrument Flying - BAI (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.3 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2. Instrument Flying Pattern A
3. Instrument Flying Pattern B
II. Objectives
- To review Basic Instrument Flying by flying predetermined patterns
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1. The Instructor should assist the student with:
Understanding Pattern A and B requirements
2. The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Pattern A
Pattern B
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
3. The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Pattern A Full and Partial Panel
Pattern B Full and Partial Panel
Review of previous maneuvers as necessary
Pattern “A”
The purpose of both Pattern A and Pattern B is to further develop the pilot’s ability to control the
aircraft without deliberate thought. These patterns help prepare the student for the Holding Pattern
and Procedure Turns he/she will fly during radio navigation. Initial practice should be on cardinal
headings for simplification; however, as proficiency increases the student should be able to accomplish
the patterns on any heading. The Instructor may make various changes in the patterns, or the
patterns may be flown over a navigational facility, correcting for Drift on each leg.
2. Brief the Student thoroughly prior to each flight
Performance of maneuver in the aircraft:
This maneuver should be performed first with all available Instruments, then on Partial
Panel
Start the Pattern A and demonstrate through the first 3 turns, then have the Student
continue
Timing should start when the clock second hand is on a cardinal Point, preferably the
12 o’clock position
The timing for this pattern is consecutive in that the time for each leg is started when
control pressure is applied to recover from the preceding turn
After recovery from turns, allow sufficient time for the compass card oscillation, then
note the heading and correct if necessary. An exception is the 30 second leg. If you
note an error in the heading here, compensate for it by lengthening or shortening
the time allotted for the next turn
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Pattern “B”
3. Brief the Student thoroughly prior to the flight
Performance of maneuver in the aircraft
Do not demonstrate unless absolutely necessary
All available Instruments are used
Roll Out on Headings regardless of Time
When changing Airspeed in turns, simultaneously change Bank and power, also Pitch if
applicable
The Descending final turn is made at an absolute rate
The final Descent is made to a minimum Altitude set by the Instructor, or until the time
expires, whichever comes first
The Emergency pull up is made as a Normal Go-Around Procedure, Climbing to the
original Altitude
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
4. The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Pattern A and B within Minimum Standards
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 10
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
Fly Patterns A and B while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.4. Lesson Plan 4.4 - Instrument Flying – BAI (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.4 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
1 Vertical S, S-1, and S-2
II. Objectives
- To review Basic Instrument Flying by flying predetermined patterns
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Handout on Vertical S Patterns
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Understanding Vertical S Patterns requirements
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Vertical S Patterns
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Vertical S Patterns Full and Partial Panel
A and B Patterns Full and Partial Panel
Previous Instrument Maneuvers as necessary - Full and Partial Panel as necessary
Vertical S, S-1 and S-2
Vertical S - This maneuver is a series of Climbs and Descents at a definite indicated rate
1. Climbing or Descending Airspeed should be established prior to entry
2. During the reversal of vertical direction, lead the Altitude 40 to 60 ft. in Descents and 20 to 30
ft. in Climbs
3. Change the Altitude 500 ft., 400 ft., and then 200 ft., returning to the original Altitude each
time. After the 200 foot Altitude change, return to the original Altitude and Level Off at
Climbing or Descending Airspeed (Long Range Cruise [LRC]).
4. Performing the Vertical - S
From an exact Altitude and Climbing or Descending Airspeed, adjust the power and
Pitch Attitude to Enter a Climb or Descent
As the power is adjusted in the entry, the Airspeed Indicator becomes primary for
Pitch
As the Vertical Speed approaches 500 fpm, the Vertical Speed Indicator becomes
primary for Pitch and remains so until the reversal of the vertical direction is started.
As the Vertical Speed reaches 500 fpm, the Airspeed Indicator becomes the primary
Instrument for power.
As the reversal of the vertical direction is started, the Airspeed Indicator becomes
primary for Pitch and remains so until the Vertical Speed approaches the desired rate
of 500 fpm
Stress the importance of Trim and Cross-Check
Vertical S-1: This maneuver is a combination of the Vertical S and a Standard Rate Turn
Enter in the same manner as a Climbing or Descending Turn
Reverse the direction of turn with each return to entry Altitude
Emphasize Trim and smooth Control Technique
Vertical S-2: This maneuver differs from the Vertical S-1 in that the direction of the turn is reversed
with each reversal in direction
Student practice - perform the Vertical S, Vertical S-1 and Vertical S-2:
With all available Flight Instruments
Without the Attitude Indicator
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Vertical S Patterns within Minimum Standards
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 10
Fly the S Pattern while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.5. Lesson Plan 4.5 - Instrument Flying - BAI (Progress Check FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.5(P) Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 All Exercises for Basic Attitude Instrument Flying
3 Flight Management Skills
4 Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved the proficiency level necessary for flying basic
Attitude Instruments
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Pages 8-2 to 8-9)
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Handout on Pattern A and B, Vertical S Patterns
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor will review with the student:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Instrument Scan
Straight and Level Flight (Full and Partial Panel)
Climb and Descents (Full and Partial Panel)
Combination of (2) and (3) above
Constant Bank Turns and Timed Turns
Pattern A and B / Vertical S Pattern
Instrument Failures and Limitations
2 The student should be allowed to practice:
Straight and Level Flight (Full and Partial Panel)
Climb and Descents (Full and Partial Panel)
Combination of (2) and (3) above
Constant Bank Turns and Timed Turns
Pattern A and B / Vertical S Pattern
Instrument Failures and Limitations
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee must be able to perform to the minimum Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) standard during the
flight for all exercises, and:
Demonstrate sound Flight Management Skills including good Situational Awareness
and Workload Management (WM)
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills and effective use of Available
Resources
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.6. Lesson Plan 4.6 - Instrument Flying - VOR/DME (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.6 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR) and Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) Ground
Equipment
3 VOR and DME Airborne Equipment
4 Serviceability Checks
5 Tuning and Identifying a Station
6 Tracking Direct to a Station
7 Track Maintenance - Drift Elimination
8 Intercepting Predetermined Track Inbound
9 Station Passage
10 Intercepting Predetermined Track Outbound
11 Full Panel Instrument Flying - Airspeed/Configuration Changes,
Specific Rates of Climb and Descent
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge about the Function, Use and Limitations of a VOR
and DME
- To learn the correct procedure for using the VOR to Track to a Station on a Predefined Radial
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- To learn the correct procedure for using the VOR to Track from a Station on a Predefined Radial
- Intercepting VOR Radials
- To learn the correct procedure for using the DME to Determine Distance to a Station and proper
use of Groundspeed and Time Displays
- To review and practice Full and Partial Panel Instrument Flying Techniques
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 2
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
- Practice a VOR Check using the HAAB VOT
- Comparison Check of NAV Equipment using suitable VOR
- Geographic Check of VOR Equipment and VOR/DME Orientation
- Orientation using Radials from two suitable VOR Stations
- Orientation using Radial and DME Distance to VOR Station
- Tracking Direct to a VOR with Drift Elimination
- Station Passage and Outbound Tracking with Drift Elimination
- Intercepting and Tracking a Predetermined Radial Outbound
- Intercepting and Tracking a Predetermined Radial Inbound
- Full panel Instrument Flying
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Tune and Identify a VOR and DME
Establish the Aircraft’s Position Relative to a VOR Station and Track Directly to the
Station
Intercept Predefined Track Inbound and Outbound to a VOR
Perform Full Instrument Flying including Airspeed changes, specific Rates of
Climb/Descent and Turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.7. Lesson Plan 4.7 - Instrument Flying - VOR/DME Holds (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.7 Instrument Flying - BAI 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
1 VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR) Holds at Station
2 Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Hold Entry Procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn the correct procedure for using the VOR Hold at Station
- To learn the correct procedures for VOR Hold Entries including Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Entry
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 5
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Tracking direct to a VOR with Drift Elimination
2 Station Passage and Outbound Tracking with Drift Elimination
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
3 Intercepting and Tracking a Predetermined Radial Inbound
4 Enter a VOR Hold using Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Entry
5 Holding Procedures at Station
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Tune and Identify a VOR
Establish the Aircraft’s Position relative to a VOR Station and Track Directly to the
Station
Intercept Predefined Track Inbound and Outbound to a VOR
Perform Full Instrument Flying including Airspeed changes, specific Rates of
Climb/Descent and Turns
Enter and establish the aircraft in a VOR Hold using procedures in the Instrument
Procedures Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.8. Lesson Plan 4.8 - Instrument Flying – GPS (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.8 Instrument Flying – GPS 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Introduction to Global Positioning System (GPS)
3 GPS Equipment and Functions
4 Serviceability Checks
5 Procedures for Direct and Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) Navigation
6 Introduction to ADF
7 ADF bearing interception and tracking
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge about the Function, Use and Limitations of Global
Positioning Systems (GPS)
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS including Serviceability Checks
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Determine Current Location
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Proceed Direct to a Point
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Proceed Direct to the Nearest Airport
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Navigate on an OBS Selected Course
- To learn ADF interception and tracking
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 8
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
6 Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
7 Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice procedure for GPS, use including:
Confirm Serviceability of GPS
Enter a Flight Plan
Establish Aircraft on Track
Recognize and Turn past first Waypoint
Use Map Mode and Nav Pages
Use “Nearest” feature for Diversions
Use OBS feature for Tracking Courses
ADF interception and tracking
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Verify GPS Serviceability and Identify Failures
Determine the aircraft location using the GPS
Proceed direct to a Waypoint and nearest airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.9. Lesson Plan 4.9 - Instrument Flying - GPS Holds (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.9 Instrument Flying – GPS Holds 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Global Positioning System (GPS) Equipment and Functions
3 GPS Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) Functions
4 GPS Holding Pattern Depictions
5 GPS Holding at a Specified Waypoint
6 Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Hold Entry and Procedures for GPS
7 Autopilot flight
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge about the Function, Use and Limitations of GPS
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS OBS functions
- To learn the correct procedure for determining when GPS will depict Holding Pattern and when
pilot must visualize the Holding Pattern
- Orientation to selected Waypoint
- To learn the correct procedure for GPS holds including Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Entry
Procedures
- To learn autopilot flight including autopilot holding.
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 8
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
8 Demonstrate and have the student practice procedure for GPS use, including:
Confirm Serviceability of GPS
Enter a Flight Plan
Recognize when GPS will draw Holding Pattern and when the pilot must visualize the
Holding Pattern
Use Map Mode and Nav Pages
Use OBS Functions
GPS Hold at a specified Waypoint
Teardrop, Parallel and Direct Entry Procedures
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standards, and:
Verify GPS Serviceability and Identify Failures
Determine the Aircraft Location using the GPS
Perform Teardrop, Parallel and Direct Entry Procedures and correct GPS Holding
Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.10. Lesson Plan 4.10 Instrument Flying 10 - VOR/GPS Navigation and
Holding (Progress Check)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
Instrument Flying – VOR & GPS DA-40NG /C-172
4.10(P) 2.0 1.7
Holds Progress FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Progress Check of VHF Omni Directional Range (VOR)/ Distance Measuring Equipment (DME)
and Global Positioning System (GPS) Procedures
3 Progress Check of Procedures for Intercepting and Tracking Courses, Radials and bearing
Using VOR/DME, GPS and ADF.
4 Progress Check of Holding Procedures and Entries for Both VOR, GPS
5 Standard instrument approach briefings (chart, approach, weather, NOTAM….)
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge and Procedures to operate as VOR/DME and GPS
Navigation
- To verify the student can effectively use a VOR/DME and GPS for Tracking Courses, Radials and
bearings for Navigation Procedures
- To verify the student can perform the proper Entry into a Holding Pattern
- To verify the student can perform VOR and GPS Holds
- To be able to perform proper procedure for non- precision approach and hold
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 2 and 8
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Expectations of the student
2 The following items must be demonstrated:
Tuning, Identifying, and proper Orientation to VOR/DME and GPS Systems
Use of VOR/DME and GPS for Navigation
Proper Hold Entries as determined by Check Instructor
Proper VOR/DME and GPS Holding Procedures
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the Progress Check, and:
Demonstrate effective use of VOR/DME and GPS equipment for Navigation
Demonstrate Knowledge of VOR/DME and GPS Operation and Errors
Demonstrate good Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
Maintain good Situational Awareness of the Fuel Status of the aircraft
Demonstrate Hold Entry Procedures
Properly fly the Holding Pattern using VOR/DME and GPS as instructed by the Check
Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.11. Lesson Plan 4.11 - IFR Holding Procedures (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.11 IFR Holding Procedures 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Hold Procedures
3 Holding entries and procedures
4 Air Traffic Control (ATC) Clearances
5 Standard instrument approach briefings (chart, approach, weather, NOTAM….
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Holding Procedures including types of Entry, Wind Compensation and Air
Traffic Control (ATC) Clearances
III. To be able perform proper procedure
for non- precision approach
IV. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
V. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
ATC IFR Clearance
VOR/DME and GPS Hold Procedures
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Instrument Rating standard, and:
Perform all Pre-flight Planning and Ground Checks
Intercept and Track to/from GPS and VOR compensating for Wind on published
airways
Comply with ATC Instructions and Clearances
Perform a GPS or VOR Hold, Entry, Adjustments for Wind and Exit
Perform IFR Approach Planning and an IFR Approach Briefing as per the SOPs
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.12. Lesson Plan 4.12 - IFR VOR and LOC Approaches (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.12 IFR VOR & LOC Approaches 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Non-Precision Approach (NPA) - VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR) and Localizer (LOC)
3 Procedure Turns
4 Missed Approach Procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Non-Precision Approaches - VOR and LOC.
- To learn how to perform Procedure Turns.
- To learn how to fly Missed Approach Procedures.
- To be able to interpret weather minimums and make a decision to commence precision or non-
precision approach.
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 5
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor will assist the student with:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
ATC IFR Clearance
Use of the IFR Flight Log
IFR Approach Planning
2 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Full Procedure VOR and LOC Straight-In Approach
All three types of Procedure Turn Entries
Radar vectors to Final Approach course
Missed Approach Procedures both radar vector and published
Visual Descent Point and Required Rate of Descent calculations
Landing from Straight-In Approach
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Perform all Pre-flight Planning and Ground Checks
Intercept and Track to/from GPS and VOR compensating for Wind on published
airways
Comply with ATC Instructions and Clearances
Perform IFR Approach Planning and an IFR Approach Briefing as per the SOP
Fly a full procedure Straight-In NPA to Landing with minimal assistance from the
Instructor
Fly a published Missed Approach with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.13. Lesson Plan 4.13 - IFR GPS Approach (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.13 IFR GPS Approaches 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Non-Precision Approaches (NPA) – GPS using both autopilot and manual.
3 Circling Procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Non-Precision Approaches - GPS
- To learn how to perform a Circling Procedure to Landing or Go-Around
- To be able to interpret weather minimums and make a decision to hold or commence precision or
non- precision approach.
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Approach Charts
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor will assist the student with:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
2 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
GPS Approach Procedures
Circling Procedures to a Landing
Circling Procedures to a Go-Around
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The Trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Instrument Rating standard, and:
Perform a GPS Approach with minimal assistance from the Instructor
Perform a NPA Circling Approach to a Go-Around after circling commenced
Transition to Landing from a Circling Approach
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.14. Lesson Plan 4.14 – IFR ILS Approach (FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.14 IFR ILS Approaches 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: METAR HAAB 172000Z 280/10KT 1/4SM R25L/700/N -RA BKN008 OVC040
19/18 A1018 RERA RMK SF5NS3
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Low Visibility Departure Procedures
3 Precision Approach - Instrument Landing System (ILS)-with both autopilot and manual
4 IFR emergency handling and approaches
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Low Visibility Departures
- To learn how to perform Precision Approaches - ILS
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 4,
Section B
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 The Instructor will assist the student with:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
IFR Approach Planning
2 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Low Visibility Departure Procedures
ILS Approach Procedures
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Instrument Rating Standard, and:
Perform a Low Visibility Instrument Departure
Perform an ILS Approach to a Go-Around with minimal assistance
Perform an ILS Approach to a Landing with minimal assistance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.15. Lesson Plan 4.15 - IFR Approaches (Progress Check FTD)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG /C-172
4.15(P) IFR Approaches Progress 2.0 1.7
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Flight Planning
3 IFR Pre-flight Procedures
4 Non-Precision Approach (NPA) VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR) and Global Positioning
System (GPS)
5 Hold
6 Precision Approach - Instrument Landing System (ILS)
7 Circling Approach
8 Missed Approach Procedures
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved sufficient Knowledge and Skill in IFR Procedures to commence
Airborne IFR Training
- To verify sufficient knowledge on autopilot flights and commence at least one approach with
autopilot.
- To verify the has sufficient knowledge in IFR weather interpretation and decision making to hold or
commence or divert to alternate airport.
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 This session is a Progress Check to ensure that the required objectives of the phase have
been met. The flight will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions
as required during flight without any prompting from the Instructor.
2 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
3 The following items must be demonstrated to the Minimum Standards:
Pre-flight Planning and Procedures
Departure Procedures
Holds
Non-Precision Approach
Precision Approach
Missed Approach Procedure
Circling Approach to a Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the minimum IFR standard during the Validation Flight, and:
Demonstrate good Situational Awareness at all times
Demonstrate good Knowledge of IFR Rules and Regulations
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications to maintain Situational Awareness of
Weather, Traffic, and Position Reports
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) Skills by not falling behind the
aircraft
The Instructor must be satisfied the student is ready to commence Airborne IFR
Training
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.16. Lesson Plan 4.16 - Instrument Flying - BAI (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.16 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Scan Pattern
3 Standard Rate Turns
4 Constant Bank Turns
5 Constant Rate Climbs and Descents
6 Constant Airspeed Climbs and Descents
7 Symptoms of an Approaching Stall
8 Symptoms of a Spiral Dive
9 Stall Recovery Procedures
10 Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures
11 Unusual Attitude Recoveries
II. Objectives
- To review Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone
- To learn the Recovery Procedures for Attitudes Not Normally Encountered While Flying with
reference to the Instruments alone
- To practice Climbing and Descending with reference to the Flight Instruments alone
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-44
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Instrument Scan Pattern
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard Rate Turns
Constant Bank Turns from 10° to 30°
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Straight and Level Flight
Climbs and Descents
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Standard Rate Turns
Constant Bank Turns from 10° to 30°
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-45
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 15
Maintain Altitude +/- 150ft
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-46
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.17. Lesson Plan 4.17 - Instrument Flying - BAI (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.17 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Scan Pattern
3 Timed Turns to Compass Headings
4 Timed Climbs and Descents
5 Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures - Partial Panel
6 Unusual Attitude Recoveries - Partial Panel
7 Instrument Flying - Partial Panel
II. Objectives
- To review Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone - Partial Panel
- To learn the Recovery Procedures for Attitudes Not Normally Encountered While Flying with
reference to the Instruments alone
- To practice Climbing and Descending with reference to the Flight Instruments alone - Partial Panel
- To learn to Recognize Instrument Failure and fly with reference to Partial Panel Instruments
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-47
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
Recognising Instrument Failure
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight - Partial Panel
Climbs and Descents - Partial Panel
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Timed Turns to Compass Headings - Partial Panel
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery - Partial Panel
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery - Partial Panel
Instrument Failures and Limitations
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Straight and Level Flight - Partial Panel
Climbs and Descents - Partial Panel
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Timed Turns to Compass Headings - Partial Panel
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes - Partial Panel
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes - Partial Panel
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 20 during Timed Turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-48
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Maintain Altitude +/- 150ft
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
Maintain Straight and Level Flight while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-49
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.18. Lesson Plan 4.18 - Instrument Flying - BAI (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.18 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Scan Pattern
3 Timed Turns to Compass Headings
4 Timed Climbs and Descents
5 Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures - Partial Panel
6 Unusual Attitude Recoveries - Partial Panel
7 Instrument Flying - Partial Panel
II. Objectives
- To review Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
- To practice turning with reference to the Flight Instruments alone - Partial Panel
- To learn the Recovery Procedures for Attitudes Not Normally Encountered While Flying with
reference to the Instruments alone
- To practice Climbing and Descending with reference to the Flight Instruments alone - Partial Panel
- To learn to Recognize Instrument Failure and fly with reference to Partial Panel Instruments
III. References
Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-50
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Instrument Scan for Instrument Flying
Recognising Instrument Failure
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Straight and Level Flight - Partial Panel
Climbs and Descents - Partial Panel
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Timed Turns to Compass Headings - Partial Panel
Nose High Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery - Partial Panel
Nose Low Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery - Partial Panel
Instrument Failures and Limitations
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Straight and Level Flight - Partial Panel
Climbs and Descents - Partial Panel
Combination of (1) and (2) above
Timed Turns to Compass Headings - Partial Panel
Nose High Unusual Flight Attitudes - Partial Panel
Nose Low Unusual Flight Attitudes - Partial Panel
Partial Panel Instrument Flying
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 20 during Timed Turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-51
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Maintain Altitude +/- 150ft
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
Maintain Straight and Level Flight while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-52
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.19. Lesson Plan 4.19 - Instrument Flying - BAI (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.19 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Flying Pattern A
3 Instrument Flying Pattern B
II. Objectives
To review Basic Instrument Flying by flying Predetermined Patterns
To further develop your ability in maintaining straight-and-level flight and performing
timed turns at definite time intervals.
To develop experience in planning, precision timing, maintaining orientation, holding,
performing procedure turns, and making approaches.
To develop coordination in power, pitch attitude, and bank attitude control.
Increase speed in cross-checking instruments.
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-53
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Handout on Pattern A and B
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Understanding Pattern A and B requirements
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Pattern A
Pattern B
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Pattern A Full and Partial Panel
Pattern B Full and Partial Panel
Review of previous maneuvers as necessary
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Pattern A and B within Minimum Standards
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 10
Recognize an Unusual Attitude by reference to the Instruments alone
Recover promptly, with a minimum loss of Altitude, from Unusual Flight Attitudes
using the correct Recovery Procedure
Fly Patterns A and B while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-54
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.20. Lesson Plan 4.20 - Instrument Flying - BAI (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.20 Instrument Flying - BAI DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Vertical S, S1, and S2 Patterns
II. Objectives
To review Basic Instrument Flying by Flying Predetermined Patterns
To further develop your ability in maintaining straight-and-level flight and performing timed
turns at definite time intervals.
To develop experience in planning, precision timing, maintaining orientation, holding,
performing procedure turns, and making approaches.
To develop coordination in power, pitch attitude, and bank attitude control.
Increase speed in cross-checking instruments.
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Handout on Vertical S Patterns
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-55
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Understanding Vertical S Patterns requirements
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Vertical S Patterns
3 The Instructor should allow the student to practice (with reference to the Instruments):
Vertical S Patterns Full and Partial Panel
A and B Patterns Full and Partial Panel
Previous Instrument Maneuvers as necessary - Full and Partial Panel as necessary
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight, and:
Execute Vertical S Patterns within Minimum Standards
Execute Straight and Level, Climbs, Descents and Turns with reference to the
Instruments alone remaining within the Minimum Standards
Roll Out on a Preselected Magnetic Heading within 10
Fly the S Pattern while on Partial Panel Instruments only
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-56
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.21. Lesson Plan 4.21 - Instrument Flying VOR (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.21 Instrument Flying - VOR DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR) and Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) Ground
Equipment
3 VOR and DME Airborne Equipment
4 Serviceability Checks
5 Tuning and Identifying a Station
6 Tracking Direct to a Station
7 Track Maintenance - Drift Elimination
8 Intercepting Predetermined Track Inbound
9 Station Passage
10 Intercepting Predetermined Track Outbound
11 Full Panel Instrument Flying - Airspeed/Configuration Changes, Specific Rates of Climb and
Descent
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge about the Function, Use and Limitations of a VOR
and DME
- To learn the correct procedure for using the VOR to Track to a Station on a Predefined Radial
- To learn the correct procedure for using the VOR to Track from a Station on a Predefined Radial
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-57
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- Intercepting VOR Radials
- To learn the correct procedure for using the DME to Determine Distance to a Station and proper
use of Groundspeed and Time Displays
- To review and practice Full and Partial Panel Instrument Flying Techniques
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial Chapter 2
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Practice a VOR Check using the HAAB VOT
2 Comparison Check of NAV Equipment using suitable VOR
3 Geographic Check of VOR Equipment and VOR/DME Orientation
4 Orientation using Radials from two suitable VOR Stations
5 Orientation using Radial and DME distance to VOR Station
6 Tracking Direct to a VOR with Drift Elimination
7 Station Passage and Outbound Tracking with Drift Elimination
8 Intercepting and Tracking a Predetermined Radial Outbound
9 Intercepting and Tracking a Predetermined Radial Inbound
10 Full panel Instrument Flying
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Tune and Identify a VOR and DME
Establish the Aircraft’s Position relative to a VOR Station and Track Directly to the
Station
Intercept Predefined Track Inbound and Outbound to a VOR
Perform Full Instrument Flying including Airspeed Changes, Specific Rates of
Climb/Descent and Turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-58
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.22. Lesson Plan 4.22 - IFR-VOR Holds (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.22 Instrument Flying – VOR Hold DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR) Holds at Station
3 Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Hold Entry Procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn the correct procedure for using the VOR Hold at Station.
- To learn the correct procedure for VOR Hold Entries including Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Entry.
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Tracking Direct to a VOR with Drift Elimination
2 Station Passage and Outbound Tracking with Drift Elimination
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-59
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
3 Intercepting and Tracking a Predetermined Radial Inbound
4 Enter a VOR Hold using Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Entry
5 Holding Procedures at Station
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Tune and Identify a VOR
Establish the Aircraft’s Position relative to a VOR Station and Track Directly to the
Station
Intercept Predefined Track Inbound and Outbound to a VOR
Perform Full Instrument Flying including Airspeed Changes, and Specific Rates of
Climb/Descent and Turns
Enter and Establish the aircraft in a VOR Hold using procedures in the Instrument
Procedures Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-60
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.23. Lesson Plan 4.23 - Instrument Flying - GPS (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.23 Instrument Flying – GPS DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Introduction to Global Positioning System (GPS)
3 GPS Equipment and Functions
4 Serviceability Checks
5 Procedures for Direct and Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) Navigation
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge about the Function, Use and Limitations of GPS
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS including Serviceability Checks
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Determine Current Location
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Proceed Direct to a Point
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Proceed Direct to the Nearest Airport
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS to Navigate on an OBS Selected Course
III. References
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-61
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice procedure for GPS use, including:
Confirm Serviceability of GPS
Enter a Flight Plan
Establish aircraft on Track
Recognize and Turn past first Waypoint
Use Map Mode and Nav Pages
Use “Nearest” feature for Diversions
Use OBS feature for Tracking Courses
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Verify GPS Serviceability and Identify Failures
Determine the Current Aircraft Location using the GPS
Proceed Direct to a Waypoint and Nearest Airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-62
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.24. Lesson Plan 4.24 - IFR GPS Holds (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.24 Instrument Flying – GPS Hold DA-40NG /C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Global Positioning System (GPS) Equipment and Functions
3 GPS Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) Functions
4 GPS Holding Pattern Depictions
5 GPS Holding at a Specified Waypoint
6 Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Hold Entry and Procedures for GPS
7 Autopilot flight
II. Objectives
- To learn the required background Knowledge about the Function, Use and Limitations of GPS
- To learn the correct procedure for using the GPS OBS Functions
- To learn the correct procedure for determining when GPS will depict Holding Pattern and when
pilot must visualize the Holding Pattern
- Orientation to selected Waypoint
- To learn the correct procedure for GPS Holds including Teardrop, Parallel, and Direct Entry
Procedures
- To perform holding using autopilot
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-63
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice the procedure for GPS Use, including:
Confirm Serviceability of GPS
Enter a Flight Plan
Recognize when GPS will draw Holding Pattern and when the pilot must Visualize the
Holding Pattern
Use Map Mode and Nav Pages
Use OBS Functions
GPS Hold at a specified Waypoint
Teardrop, Parallel and Direct Entry Procedures
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standards, and:
Verify GPS Serviceability and Identify Failures
Determine the Aircraft Location using the GPS
Perform Teardrop, Parallel and Direct Entry Procedures and Correct GPS Holding
Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-64
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.25. Lesson Plan 4.25 - IFR Holding Procedures (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.25 IFR Holding Procedures DA-40NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Hold Procedures
3 Air Traffic Control (ATC) Clearances
4 Standard instrument approach briefings (chart, approach, weather, NOTAM….)
5 Emergency handling procedure during IFR flight and approach
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Holding Procedures including Types of Entry, Wind Compensation and
ATC Clearances
- To be able to make decision to hold or leave the hold based on weather, fuel, aircraft status…
Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
PTS procedure Manual
Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
Jeppesen Enroute Charts
III. Required Instruction during Flight
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-65
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
ATC IFR Clearance
VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR)/Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) and Global
Positioning System (GPS) Hold Procedures
IV. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Instrument Rating standard, and:
Perform all Pre-flight Planning and Ground Checks
Intercept and Track to/from GPS and VOR compensating for Wind on published
airways
Comply with ATC Instructions and Clearances
Perform a GPS or VOR Hold, Entry, Adjustments for Wind and Exit
Perform IFR Approach Planning and an IFR Approach Briefing as per the SOPs
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-66
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.26. Lesson Plan 4.26 - IFR VOR & LOC (G/S OUT) Approaches (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
IFR VOR & LOC (G/S OUT)
4.26 DA-40NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
Approaches
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Non-Precision Approach (NPA) - VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR) and
Localizer (LOC) Procedure Turns
3 Missed Approach Procedures
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Non-Precision Approaches - VOR and LOC
- To learn how to perform Procedure Turns
- To learn how to fly Missed Approach Procedures
- To perform non-precision approaches using autopilot
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
6 Jeppesen Approach Charts
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-67
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor will assist the student with:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
ATC IFR Clearance
Use of the IFR Flight Log
IFR Approach Planning
2 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Full Procedure VOR and LOC Straight-In Approach
All three types of Procedure Turn Entries
Radar vectors to Final Approach Course
Missed Approach Procedures both Radar Vector and Published
Visual Descent Point and Required Rate of Descent calculations
Landing from Straight-In Approach
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Perform all Pre-flight Planning and Ground Checks
Intercept and Track to/from GPS and VOR compensating for Wind on published
airways
Comply with ATC Instructions and Clearances
Perform IFR Approach Planning and an IFR Approach Briefing as per the SOP
Fly a full procedure Straight-In NPA to Landing with minimal assistance from the
Instructor
Fly a published Missed Approach with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-68
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.27. Lesson Plan 4.27 - IFR ILS Approaches (Dual)
Lesson Flight Time
No. Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.27 IFR ILS Approaches DA-40NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Low Visibility Departure Procedures
3 Precision Approach - Instrument Landing System (ILS)-using both manual and autopilot
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform Low Visibility Departures
- To learn how to perform Precision Approaches – ILS
- To be able to make decision wither to hold or leave the hold based on weather, fuel, aircraft
status…
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
6 Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor will assist the student with:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-69
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
IFR Approach Planning
2 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Low Visibility Departure Procedures
ILS Approach Procedures
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Instrument Rating standard, and:
Perform a Low Visibility Instrument Departure
Perform an ILS Approach to a Go-Around with minimal assistance
Perform an ILS Approach to a Landing with minimal assistance
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-70
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.28. Lesson Plan 4.28 - Non-Precision Approach (GPS) and Circling
Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
IFR Non-Precision Approach
4.28 DA-40NG/C-172 1.5 1.2
(GPS) & Circling Procedures
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Non-Precision Approach (NPA) - Global Positioning System (GPS)
3 Circling Procedures
4 IFR emergency handling procedure
II. Objectives
- To learn how to perform NPAs - GPS
- To learn how to perform a Circling Procedure to Landing or Go-Around
- To be able to make decision wither to hold or leave the hold based on weather, fuel, aircraft
status…
- To review proper emergency handling procedures
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-71
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
6 Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
7 Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 The Instructor will assist the student with:
IFR Pre-flight Procedures
2 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
GPS Approach Procedures
Circling Procedures to a Landing
Circling Procedures to a Go-Around
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Instrument rating standard, and:
Perform a GPS Approach with minimal assistance from the Instructor
Perform a NPA Circling Approach to a Go-Around after Circling commenced
Transition to Landing from a Circling Approach
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-72
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.29. Lesson Plan 4.29 - IFR Practice (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.29 IFR - Practice DA-40NG/C-172 1.5 1.7
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Flight Planning
3 IFR Pre-flight Procedures
4 Non-Precision Approach (NPA) VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR) and Global Positioning
System (GPS) Hold using autopilot
5 Precision Approach Instrument Landing Systems (ILS)-
6 Circling Approach.
7 Missed Approach Procedures.
II. Objectives
- Review to ensure the student has achieved sufficient Knowledge and Skill in IFR Procedures to
commence Airborne IFR Training
- Review sufficient knowledge on approaches with autopilot
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument/Commercial
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-73
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
6 Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
7 Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 This is a practice session prior to the Validation Lesson to ensure the required objectives of
the phase have been met. The flight will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to
make all decisions as required during flight without any prompting from the Instructor.
2 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
3 The following items must be demonstrated to the Minimum Standards:
Pre-flight Planning and Procedures
Departure Procedures
Holds
Non-Precision Approach
Precision Approach
Missed Approach Procedure
Circling Approach to a Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the minimum IFR Standard during the Validation Flight, and:
Demonstrate good Situational Awareness at all times
Demonstrate good Knowledge of IFR Rules and Regulations
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications to maintain Situational Awareness of
Weather, Traffic, and Position Reports
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) Skills by not falling behind the
aircraft
The Instructor must be satisfied the student is ready to commence Airborne IFR
Training.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-74
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.30. Lesson Plan 4.30 - IFR Validation (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
4.30(V) IFR - Practice DA-40NG/C-172 2.0 1.7
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for IFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Instrument Scan Pattern
3 Standard Rate Turns
4 Constant Bank Turns
5 Constant Rate Climbs and Descents
6 Constant Airspeed Climbs and Descents
7 Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) Flight Planning
8 IFR Pre-flight Procedures
9 Non-Precision Approach (NPA) VHF Omni-Directional Range (VOR) and Global Positioning
System (GPS) using Autopilot flights
10 Hold
11 Precision Approach - Instrument Landing System (ILS)
12 Circling Approach
13 Missed Approach Procedures
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved sufficient Knowledge and Skill in IFR Procedures to commence
Airborne IFR Training
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-75
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- To verify the student has sufficient knowledge and skill in autopilot flights
- To verify the student is able to make decision wither to hold or leave the hold based on weather,
fuel, aircraft status…
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 Jeppesen Guided Flight Discovery Instrument Commercial
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
6 Garmin G1000 Cockpit Reference Guide
7 Jeppesen Approach Charts
IV. Validation Information
1 This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the phase have been met. The
flight will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required
during flight without any prompting from the Instructor.
2 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
3 The following items must be demonstrated to the Minimum Standards:
Pre-flight Planning and Procedures
Departure Procedures
Instrument Scan Pattern
Standard Rate Turns
Constant Bank Turns
Constant rate Climbs and Descents
Constant Airspeed Climbs and Descents
Holds
Non-Precision Approach
Precision Approach
Missed Approach Procedure
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-76
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Circling Approach to a Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to perform to the minimum IFR standard during the Validation Flight, and:
Demonstrate good Situational Awareness at all times
Demonstrate good Knowledge of IFR Rules and Regulations
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills
Perform effective Radio Communications to maintain Situational Awareness of
Weather, Traffic, and Position Reports
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) Skills by not falling behind the
aircraft
The Instructor must be satisfied with the student’s performance to a level of IFR rated
pilot.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-77
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.31. Lesson Plan 4.31 - VFR Upper Air Work Review (FTD)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG/C-172
4.31 VFR Upper Air work Review 2.0
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Steep Turns - Precision, 180 and 360 Turns
3 Slow Flight
4 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
5 Forced Approaches
6 Precautionary Approaches and Landings
II. Objectives
- To practice the air exercises required increase pilot proficiency in Aircraft Handling
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 15,16,17,18,19,21,)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Normal Takeoff
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-78
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
2 Steep Turns at 45 Bank Angle at various Airspeeds
3 Slow Flight Entry, Manoeuvring, and Recovery - Bank Angles up to 30
4 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) (including: Banking and Departure
Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall))
5 Forced Approaches - complete from 2000 ft. AGL or lower using the correct full procedure
6 Precautionary Approaches
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Demonstrate Pilot Decision Making (PDM) at the Commercial Pilot Level
Perform all maneuvers with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-79
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.32. Lesson Plan 4.32 - VFR Circuit Review (FTDF)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG/C-172
4.32 VFR Circuit Review 2.0
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
3 Short Field Takeoff
4 Soft Field Takeoff
5 Traffic Pattern
6 Normal and Crosswind Landing
7 Soft Field Landing
8 Short Field Landing
9 Power Off 180 Accuracy Approach and Landing
II. Objectives
- To practice the air exercises required to increase Piloting Skill
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 10-14,15,16,25-28,)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-80
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Soft Field Takeoff over a 50ft Obstacle
2 Normal and Crosswind Takeoffs
3 Soft Field Takeoff with 50ft Obstacle
4 Soft Field Takeoff without Obstacles
5 Traffic Pattern Operations
6 Power - Off 180º Accuracy Approach
7 Short Field Landings with 50 ft. Obstacle
8 Soft Field Landings with and without 50 ft. Obstacle
9 Normal and Crosswind Landings
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Demonstrate Pilot Decision Making (PDM) at the Commercial Pilot Level
Perform all maneuvers with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-81
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.33. Lesson Plan 4.33 - VFR Circuit Review (FTD)
Flight Time
Lesson No.
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
(A/C) (Sim) (A/C) (A/C) (Sim) (A/C)
DA-40NG/C-172
4.33 VFR Circuit Review 2.0
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Aborted Takeoff
3 Engine Failure on Initial Climb
4 Engine Failure in All Parts of the Pattern
5 Forced Approaches
6 Slips to Landing
7 Go-Around
8 Emergency Procedures
II. Objectives
- To practice the Skills necessary to handle Emergency Procedures in the Traffic Pattern and during
Takeoff and Landing
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 10,15,16,13,14,)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-82
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-83
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Aborted Takeoff
2 Engine Failure on initial Climb
3 Engine Failure in all parts of the Pattern
4 Forced Approaches
5 Slips to Landing
6 Go-Around
7 Emergency Procedures
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Demonstrate Pilot Decision Making (PDM) at the Commercial Pilot Level
Perform all maneuvers with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-84
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.34. Lesson Plan 4.34 - VFR Upper Air work (FTD)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
DA-40NG/C-172
4.34 VFR Upper Air work Review 2.0
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Chandelles
3 Lazy Eights
II. Objectives
- To practice Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Commercial Maneuvers to increase student’s Aircraft
Handling abilities
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Chandelles
2 Lazy Eights
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-85
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Chandelles
The Chandelle is a maximum performance climbing course reversal. Named for the French aviator
who first perfected the maneuver as a combat tactic during the early days of World War 1, it is now
required for the commercial pilot and flight instructor practical tests in Single Engine aircraft.
Chandelle
Initially, the Chandelle was a very abrupt maneuver. The nose of the airplane was lowered to attain
the maximum speed possible, and then the wings were rolled to 60° - 80° Bank Angles. As the airplane
began to turn, the Pitch was raised to well above a Power on Stall Attitude while full throttle was
applied. As the turn progressed and the Airspeed bled off, the Bank was rolled out and the Pitch was
lowered so that when the airplane had turned 180°, the wings were level and the Airspeed was just
above the Stall. Then the pilot would recover to Level Flight. The maneuver was used as both an
aggressive maneuver to position the airplane in back of, underneath and Pointing up at a higher flying
enemy going in the opposite direction, and as a defensive maneuver to shake an enemy off the pilot's
tail.
Today's training maneuver Chandelle is used to exact maximum performance from the pilot, not the
airplane. By accomplishing the same maneuver using gentle but firm control inputs rather than abrupt
ones, and using more moderate Pitch and Bank Attitudes, the aerodynamic forces imposed are drawn
out over a longer period of time. This requires the pilot to develop their planning, orientation,
coordination, and feel for maximum performance flight, and their control usage Techniques while
changing Attitudes and Airspeeds.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-86
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
The maneuver may be broken down into 3 control functions: Bank, Pitch, and Power. Looked at as
separate functions, the Chandelle becomes quite understandable.
Bank
Appendix A - The airplane is rolled firmly into a 30° Bank turn. This Bank is held
constant until reaching the 90° Point of the maneuver. Then you Roll Out of the Bank smoothly and at
a constant Roll rate so as to reach wings-Level Flight just as you reach the 180° Point of the turn. This
function can be practiced beforehand while in Level, Cruise Flight or while transitioning to Slow Flight.
Pitch
Appendix B - Once the Bank is established, the Pitch will be raised to an Attitude
which, when full power is applied (Climb power with a constant speed propeller), will end up giving
you an Airspeed of 1.2 Vs1 (1.2 times the Power Off Stall and Elevator trim stall speed in the clean
configuration). This function can be practiced in conjunction with the power function while in straight-
ahead flight.
Power
Appendix C - Once the Bank is set and you have begun increasing the Pitch, power will
be smoothly applied. In training airplanes equipped with a fixed-Pitch prop, you will be applying full
throttle. As you first hear the rpm begin to lug down, add just enough throttle to maintain the rpm at
your entry setting. Of course, once full throttle is reached, the rpm will lug down anyway, but you will
not have over-revved the engine in the process.
Appendix D - In a trainer with a constant speed prop, increase the RPM to the Climb
RPM setting as part of your set up for the maneuver. As you raise the Pitch, increase your throttle
setting slowly and smoothly to the Climb power manifold pressure.
Setting Up For the Chandelle
The chandelle is accomplished in the clean configuration (Flaps and gear retracted).
As with all flight training maneuvers, safety is of primary importance. You must accomplish the
Chandelle in such a way so as to remain at or above 1,500 ft. above ground at all times. A slight
Descent may be required to attain the recommended entry speed in some aircraft, so you may need to
start the maneuver a few hundred feet higher. Due to the concentration level required, especially
during the initial practicing of this maneuver, the area must be thoroughly cleared prior to beginning
the maneuver. Be sure to clear the area into which you will be turning during the maneuver. If you
are to accomplish a Chandelle to the right, your clearing turn should be to the left.
As you are clearing, establish visual references for your 90° and 180° Points. When you are ready to
start the Chandelle, the 90° reference Point should be directly off the wingtip in the direction you are
going to turn.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-87
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Also as you are clearing, or immediately after completing your clearing turn, establish your entry speed
and power setting. The manufacturers of most trainers have recommended entry speeds for the
Chandelle. If the recommended entry speed is greater than Va (maneuvering speed), or if no
recommendation is made, use Va as your entry speed. If your airplane has a constant speed propeller,
advance the rpm to the Climb rpm setting.
Executing the Chandelle
Once your set up is completed begin the Chandelle with a firm, coordinated Roll to a 30° Bank turn. As
you reach 30° Bank Angle, immediately begin increasing back pressure to start the Pitch up. Your Pitch
reference in the windshield (see VFR Attitude Flying) should scribe a straight line from slightly nose
down at the beginning to your maximum Pitch Attitude at the 90° Point.
With a fixed-Pitch propeller, listen for a change in engine rpm as your nose begins to rise. Holding your
30° Bank Angle as you turn, increase throttle progressively and smoothly, trying to maintain the initial
rpm until full throttle has been applied.
With a constant speed propeller, smoothly apply Climb power manifold pressure as you hold your 30°
Bank Angle.
As you reach the 90° Point of the Chandelle, your Pitch should be just reaching its high Point and you
should still have 30° Bank Angle.
As you pass the 90° Point, you will begin to Roll Out the 30° Bank Angle as you hold your Pitch constant
for the rest of the maneuver. The coordinated Roll out should be made smoothly and continuously so
as to reach a Wings Level Attitude just as you reach the 180° Point.
At the 180° Point you should be wings level and your speed should be 1.2 Vs1 +5/-0 knots. Now your
task is to recover to Straight and Level Flight while maintaining Altitude within 50 ft. and heading
within 5°.
Things to Beware of
Aileron/rudder coordination plays a big part in the Chandelle. Once you have applied power, you will
need to contend with ever-increasing torque and p-factor trying to yaw the airplane to the left. This
will require you to offset the rudder to the right.
During a chandelle to the left, you will be rolling out of the left bank by applying right aileron
pressure. This, of course, will require additional right rudder to coordinate. During a chandelle to the
right, however, you will be rolling out by applying left aileron pressure. In most cases applying left
rudder pressure to coordinate with the left aileron will not be necessary. Relax some of the right
rudder to offset the engine torque and P-factor.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-88
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Watch pitch, and do not raise it too quickly. Many students will tend to raise the nose so quickly
they're at their maximum Pitch Attitude before they've reached the 45° Point in the Chandelle. You are
only going to raise the pitch a total of about 15° during the first 90° of turn. And during that phase,
your Airspeed is still relatively high, giving you a slower rate of turn, so take your time. Also be aware
that as you roll out, the pitch will tend to rise even further. This is because of the reduction in Bank
during the last 90° of the maneuver. Just like in a Level Flight turn, as you Roll out of the Bank you
need to relax your back pressure a little.
Do not trim for the maneuver. Part of the objective of the Chandelle is to help you develop a feel for
the control forces needed when changing Bank, Pitch, and Airspeed.
Level off smoothly when you have completed the maneuver. Keep your head outside the airplane to
hold your heading while you level off, taking only brief glances at your altimeter to assure you are
remaining level.
4. Entry Point
Appendix E - Set up at maneuvering speed or the manufacturer's recommended entry
speed. Reference out the left wingtip (or right wingtip for Chandelle to the right). Roll firmly into and
maintain a 30° Bank turn. Initiate Pitch up. Constant Speed Prop: Add throttle as assigned.
1. Fixed Pitch Prop RPM Drop:
Start to apply full throttle. Maintain rpm sound until full throttle is reached.
90° Point
Appendix F - Pitch just reaching maximum. Hold at this Attitude. Bank still at 30°, start
Roll Out.
2. 180° Point
Pitch still at maximum. Bank just reaching wings level. Speed at minimum controllable. Initiate Level
Off.
3. Completion
Resume Normal flight without losing Altitude.
Lazy Eight
The lazy eight is normally the last VFR maneuver introduced to you during your Commercial Pilot
training. There is good reason for this: the Lazy Eight requires that the pilot plan and execute a
complex maneuver involving Pitch, Bank, Airspeed, Altitude and P-factor which are constantly in a
state of change over an extended period of time.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-89
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Simply stated, the Lazy Eight is a series of opposing 180° turns combined with Climbs and Descents.
When looked at from the side, the airplane will scribe a path resembling an 8 laying on its side, hence
the name “Lazy Eight”. Additionally the word "Lazy" implies the maneuver is accomplished slowly. In
order to gain maximum benefit from this maneuver, it must be accomplished slowly and methodically.
Lazy Eight
Set Up for the Lazy Eight
Before dissecting the maneuver, contemplate the set up. Reference Points or lines are needed for the
start and completion headings and a prominent Point chosen toward which the nose will be pointed as
it turns through the 90° Point of each turn. The airplane is stabilized in Level Flight at maneuvering
speed or the manufacturers recommended entry speed. If Level Flight is impossible at the entry speed,
a slight Descent is permissible. The power setting required for the set up will not be changed during
the maneuver.
1) Bank
To begin with; each 180° portion of the Lazy Eight involves rolling continuously into and then out of a
30° Bank turn. Breaking the turn into 30° increments, you will increase the Bank 10° during each of the
first 3, 30° increments, and then decrease the Bank 10° during the remaining 3, 30° increments. During
the first increment and the last increment, your Airspeed will be close to entry speed, and the rate of
turn at these very shallow Banks will be extremely slow. Lots of patience is required. During the
second through fifth 30° increments, your Airspeed will be slower and, combined with the slightly
steeper Bank, the turn is quicker.
2) Pitch
Now we can cut each 180° turn into 4, 45° segments and discuss Pitch. The nose will be raised ever so
slowly while turning the first 45° to reach its maximum Nose Up Attitude just as the airplane turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-90
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
through this heading. This Pitch Attitude will vary between types of airplanes, but will generally be
between 12° and 18° nose-up. At this point, then, the Attitude should look like a Climbing 15° Bank
turn.
As you pass through the 45° Point of the turn, the Pitch is smoothly brought back downward so that it
passes through the horizon just as the 90° Point of the turn is passed. A snapshot taken through the
windshield at this Point would look like a level 30° Bank turn.
Continuing to lower the Pitch, the lowest Point is reached at the 135° Point of the turn. Here the
Attitude is a nose low 15° Banked turn, and you will start to raise the Pitch again.
Just as you reach the 180° Point, completing the first turn, your Pitch should pass through the set up
Attitude and start your turn in the opposite direction.
Additional Requirements and Side Effects
Your Altitude will vary throughout the maneuver. You will be Climbing during the first 45° of turn and
into the next 45° increment as well. Since your Airspeed is slow due to the high Pitch Attitude, you will
start Descending just before reaching the 90° Point and flat Pitch. Then you will continue to Descend
through the low-Pitch Point at 135° into the turn and until reaching your set up Attitude. At this Point,
the Altitude must be the same as it was when you entered the maneuver.
Your Airspeed will decrease and increase pretty much in concert with your Altitude. Your slowest
speed should be about 1.2Vs1. Your speed at the completion of each turn should be the same as your
set up Airspeed.
P-factor will be constantly changing, requiring varying amounts of additional right rudder pressure to
coordinate the turn. During the right-hand turn, more right rudder will be required between the 45°
and 90° Points of the turn and less left rudder will be needed during that portion of the left-hand turn.
3) Entry Point
At maneuvering speed or the manufacturer's recommended entry speed
References for the 90° and 180° Points Set
Initiate very slowly by starting Bank and Pitching up
4) 45° Point
15° Bank Angle - continue rolling in
Maximum Pitch-Up Attitude - begin decreasing
5) 90° Point
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-91
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Just reaching 30° Bank Angle as Pitch passes downward through the horizon
Begin to shallow the Bank
Continue downward with Pitch Attitude
6) 135° Point
15° Bank Angle - continue rolling out very slowly
Maximum Pitch-Down Attitude - begin increasing
7) 180° Point
Bank just reaching wings level
Pitch just reaching Entry Attitude
Altitude just reaching entry Altitude
Start with step 1 in the other direction
Trainee Competency Criteria
4. The trainee should be able to demonstrate basic Knowledge of the variations in aircraft
control pressures during the commercial maneuvers
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-92
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.35. Lesson Plan 4.35 - VFR Air work (Validation FTD)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
DA-40NG/C-172
4.35(V) VFR Air work Validation FTD 2.0 1.0
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Symptoms of an Approaching Stall
3 Symptoms of a Spiral Dive
4 Stall Recovery Procedures
5 Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures
6 Unusual Attitude Recoveries
7 Slow Flight
8 Steep Turn - Minimum Radius
9 Forced Approaches
10 Precautionary Landings
11 Go-Around
12 Emergency Procedures
13 Normal, Short, and Soft Field Takeoffs
14 Normal, Short, and Soft Field Landings
II. Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-93
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- To verify the student has achieved the proficiency level for the standards for the
maneuvers listed above
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Validation Information
1 This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the phase have been met. The
flight will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required
during flight without any prompting from the Instructor.
2 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
3 The following items must be demonstrated to the Minimum Standards in reference to the
Competency Criteria:
Symptoms of an approaching Stall
Symptoms of a Spiral Dive
Stall Recovery Procedures
Spiral Dive Recovery Procedures
Unusual Attitude recoveries
Slow Flight
Steep Turn - Minimum Radius
Forced Approaches
Precautionary Landings
Go-Around
Emergency Procedures
Normal, Short, and Soft Field Takeoffs
Normal, Short, and Soft Field Landings
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-94
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee must be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight for all exercises, and:
Demonstrate sound Flight Management Skills including good Situational Awareness
and Workload Management (WM)
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills and effective use of Available
Resources
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-95
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.36. Lesson Plan 4.36 - VFR Upper Air Work Review (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
DA-40NG/C-172
4.36 VFR Upper Air work Review 1.5
FTD
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Steep Turns - Precision, 180 and 360 Turns
3 Slow Flight
4 Chandelles and Lazy Eights
5 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
6 Forced Approaches
7 Precautionary Approaches and Landings
8 Go-Around
9 Soft Field Takeoff and Landing
10 Short Field Takeoff and Landing
II. Objectives
- To practice the air exercises required increase pilot proficiency in Aircraft Handling. This is
an opportunity to review and practice weak areas prior to the Validation Check.
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-96
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flight
1 Normal Takeoff
2 Steep Turns at 45 Bank Angle at various Airspeeds
3 Slow Flight Entry, Manoeuvring, and Recovery - Bank Angles up to 30
4 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) (including: Banking and Departure
Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall))
5 Forced Approaches - complete from 2000 ft. Above Ground Level (AGL) or lower using the
correct full procedure
6 Precautionary Approaches
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Demonstrate Pilot Decision Making (PDM) at the Commercial Pilot Level
Perform all maneuvers with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-97
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.37. Lesson Plan 4.37 VFR Air Work Review (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.37 VFR Upper Air work Review DA-40NG/C-172 1.5
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Steep Turns - Precision, 180 and 360 Turns
3 Slow Flight
4 Chandelles and Lazy Eights
5 Stalls Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
6 Forced Approaches
7 Precautionary Approaches and Landings
8 Go-Around
9 Soft Field Takeoff and Landing
10 Short Field Takeoff and Landing
II. Objectives
- To practice the air exercises required increase pilot proficiency in Aircraft Handling. This is
an opportunity to review and practice weak areas prior to the Validation Check.
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-98
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flight
1 Normal Takeoff
2 Steep Turns at 45 Bank Angle at various Airspeeds
3 Slow Flight Entry, Manoeuvring, and Recovery - Bank Angles up to 30
4 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) (including: Banking and Departure
Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall))
5 Forced Approaches - complete from 2000ft AGL or lower using the correct full procedure
6 Precautionary Approaches
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the Minimum Standard, and:
Demonstrate Pilot Decision Making (PDM) at the Commercial Pilot Level
Perform all maneuvers with minimal assistance from the Instructor
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-99
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.38. Lesson Plan 4.38(V) - VFR Air Work Validation Check
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.38(v) VFR Air work Validation Check DA-40NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Chandelles
3 Lazy Eights
4 Slow Flight
5 Steep Turn
6 Stalls(Departure, Approach and Elevator trim stalls)
7 Forced Approaches
8 Precautionary Landings
9 Go-Around
10 Emergency Procedures
11 Normal, Short, and Soft Field Takeoffs
12 Normal, Short, and Soft Field Landings
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved the proficiency level for the standards for the
maneuvers listed above
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-100
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Validation Information
1 This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the phase have been met. The
flight will be treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required
during flight without any prompting from the Instructor.
2 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
3 The following items must be demonstrated to the Minimum Standards in reference to the
Competency Criteria:
Chandelles
Lazy Eights
Slow Flight
Steep Turn - Minimum Radius
Stalls (Departure, Approach and Elevator trim stalls)
Forced Approaches
Precautionary Landings
Go-Around
Emergency Procedures
Normal, Short, and Soft Field Takeoffs
Normal, Short, and Soft Field Landings
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee must be able to perform to the Minimum Standard during the flight for all exercises, and:
Demonstrate sound Flight Management Skills, including good Situational Awareness
and Workload Management (WM)
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills and effective use of Available
Resources
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-101
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.39. Lesson Plan 4.39 - Dual Cross-Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.39 Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Cross-Country Planning
3 Navigation
4 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
5 Inadvertent IFR weather penetration
6 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
7 Diversions
II. Objectives
- To prepare for the Cross-Country Solo
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern at using the correct procedures
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To review the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-102
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures with a Diversion
3 The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Lost Procedures with Diversion
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-103
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.40. Lesson Plan 4.40 - Dual Cross-Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.40 Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Cross-Country Planning
3 Navigation
4 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
5 Inadvertent IFR weather penetration
6 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
7 Diversions
8 Circumnavigation
II. Objectives
- To prepare for the Cross-Country Solo
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern at using the correct procedures
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To review the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-104
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flightd
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures with a Diversion
3 The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Lost Procedures with Diversion
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-105
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.41. Lesson Plan 4.41 - Dual Cross-Country
Flight Time
Du
Lesson No. PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip Dual al
(A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
(A/C) (Si
) ) ) )
m)
4.41 Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 1.30
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Cross-Country Planning
3 Autopilot flight
4 Navigation
5 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
6 Inadvertent IFR weather penetration
7 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
8 Diversions and Emergency handling (lost during navigation)
9 Circumnavigation
II. Objectives
- To prepare for the Cross-Country Solo
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern at using the correct procedures
- To practice autopilot flights
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-106
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To review the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
- To fellow proper lost procedure and emergency handling
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures with a Diversion
3 The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Lost Procedures with Diversion
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-107
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-108
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.42. Lesson Plan 4.42 - Dual Cross-Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.42 Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Visual Flight Rules (VFR) Cross-Country Planning
3 Navigation and use of checklist and POH for emergency
4 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
5 Inadvertent IFR weather penetration
6 Obstacle Takeoff and Landing Procedures
7 Diversions and Emergency handling (Due to weather/low visibility or low cloud ceiling)
II. Objectives
- To prepare for the Cross-Country Solo
- To Navigate to an airport as directed by an Instructor
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern at using the correct procedures
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Obstacle Takeoffs and Landings
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) back to base
- To review the procedures for Opening and Closing a Flight Plan
- Be able to handle emergency procedure and make decision accordingly
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-109
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The following items should be demonstrated for the student:
Lost Procedures with a Diversion
3 The student should be allowed to practice:
Navigation Procedures
Lost Procedures with Diversion
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills with respect to arriving at an Unfamiliar Airport
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-110
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.43. Lesson Plan 4.43 – DUAL CROSS- COUNTRY
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.43 Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 1.30
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Normal and Crosswind Takeoff
3 Short Field Takeoff
4 Soft Field Takeoff
5 Traffic Pattern
6 Normal and Crosswind Landing
7 Soft Field Landing
8 Short Field Landing
9 Power Off 180º Accuracy Approach and Landing
10 Emergency handling and Diversions (Engine related remarks)
II. Objectives
- To practice the correct procedures for performing Takeoffs and Landings
- To Enter the Traffic Pattern using the correct procedures
- To Navigate (without Instructor assistance) in the Traffic Pattern
- To practice the Go-Around Procedures
- To fly the Traffic Pattern solo
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-111
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
- Be able to handle emergency procedure and make decision accordingly
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction During Flight
1 The Instructor should assist the student with:
Traffic Pattern Procedures
Go-Around Procedures
Any weak sequence as described in the Pre brief
2 The student should be allowed to practice:
Normal and Crosswind Takeoffs
Traffic Patterns
Go-Arounds
Normal and Crosswind Landings
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Fly a Traffic Pattern without assistance from Instructor
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-112
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.44. Lesson Plan 4.44 - Dual Cross-Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip Dual
(Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
(A/C)
) ) ) ) )
4.44 Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 1.30
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
The Instructor should review with the student:
Filing a Flight Plan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-113
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
1. The student should practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-114
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.45. Lesson Plan 4.45 - Dual Cross-Country Validation Check
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.45(V) Dual Cross - Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions Emergency handling during navigation
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport without any assistance and
demonstrate readiness for cross-country solo
- To perform proper emergency handling procedure and make decision based on the
scenario.
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-115
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The student should demonstrate the required skill and knowledge of
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Normal Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
Emergency handling procedure during navigation
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate proper emergency handling procedures.
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-116
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.46. Lesson Plan 4.46 – Traffic Pattern/ Maneuvers Solo
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.46 Traffic Pattern DA-40NG/C-172 1.0 0.5
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Take off and landing
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
II. Objectives
- To perform touch and go exercise (two touch and go to full stop)
- To perform two touch and go to full a stop during solo
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-117
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Filing a Flight Plan
Traffic pattern Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The student should practice:
Touch and go’s
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform normal take off and landing (crosswind take-off/landing if available).
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-118
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-119
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.47. Lesson Plan 4.47 – Solo Cross – Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.47 Solo cross - country DA-40NG/C-172 2.5 2.5
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions and Emergency handling during navigation
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-120
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Filing a Flight Plan
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
Emergency handling procedures
2 The student should practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-121
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-122
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.48. Lesson Plan 4.48– Solo Cross – Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.48 Solo Cross -Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
Filing a Flight Plan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-123
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
Emergency handling procedures
2 The student should practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-124
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-125
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.49. Lesson Plan 4.49– Solo Cross – Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.49 Solo Cross -Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
Filing a Flight Plan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-126
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
Emergency handling procedures
2 The student should practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-127
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-128
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.50. Lesson Plan 4.50– Solo Cross – Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.50 Solo Cross -Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
Filing a Flight Plan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-129
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The student should practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
1) Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
2) Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
3) Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
4) Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
5) Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-130
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
4.51. Lesson Plan 4.51– Solo Cross – Country
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
4.51 Solo Cross -Country DA-40NG/C-172 2.0 2.0
HAAB/ADD Weather: Minimum Weather Requirements for VFR
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Navigation
3 Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
4 Inadvertent Weather Penetration
5 Diversions
II. Objectives
- To Navigate Cross-Country and return to departure airport
III. References
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Pre-flight Instruction
1 The Instructor should review with the student:
Filing a Flight Plan
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-131
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 4
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
2 The student should practice:
Navigation Procedures
Uncontrolled Airport Procedures
Obstacle Takeoff and Landing
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Navigate without assistance and complete required Flight Logs
Make appropriate Radio Communications and perform the correct Traffic Pattern
Joining Procedures for an Uncontrolled Airport
Demonstrate understanding of Lost Procedures
Demonstrate Knowledge of Available Resources if Lost
Demonstrate good Workload Management (WM) and Pilot Decision Making (PDM)
Skills
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 4 4-132
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5. FLIGHT TRAINING (COMMON) - STAGE 5: MULTI-ENGINE PROCEDURES
Overview
This Stage of training is designed to prepare the trainee to fly multi-engine aircraft in commercial
operations. This Stage introduces the complex aircraft and the applicable systems knowledge. Multi-
engine aerodynamics and performance is investigated in depth.
Objectives
After completion of stage 5, trainee will be able to:
Demonstrate knowledge of complex aircraft systems and standard operating procedures for
multi-engine aircraft;
Perform performance calculations relating to multi-engine flying; and
Demonstrate comprehension of multi-engine aerodynamics and operational considerations for
safe flight.
Instructional Methods to be used
This Stage of training uses a combination of traditional method of instruction and Scenario Based
Training to develop the nontechnical skills and knowledge. It teaches the flying skills necessary to fly
piston multi-engine airplanes.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage 6, trainees must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Advanced proficiency in VFR multi-engine skills and knowledge;
Proficiency in application of theoretical knowledge of aircraft systems,
theory of flight, meteorology and air regulations
CRM and Threat Error Management (TEM) at the level expected of a
commercial pilot; and
Sound risk management skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
Flight Time Total
Lesson
Description Equip Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C A/C SIM
No.
A/C SIM A/C A/C SIM PIC
5.1 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 FTD 2.0
Multi-Engine Procedures
5.2 DA-42 FTD 2.0
5.3 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 FTD 2.0 0.7
5.4 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 FTD 2.0
5.5 (P) Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 FTD 2.0
5.6 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 FTD 2.0 1.5
5.7 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 FTD 2.0 1.5
5.8 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 FTD 2.0 1.0
Multi-Engine Pre-Flight
5.9 DA-42 FTD 2.0 1.0
Test
5.10
Multi-Engine Flight Test DA-42 FTD 2.0 0.7
(V)
5.11 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
5.12 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
5.13 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
5.14 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
5.15 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
1.5
5.16 Night Flight Introduction DA-42 NG
5.17 Night Flying DA-42 NG 1.5
Stage 5 Flight Hours Breakdown 13.0 20.0 0.0 0.0 6.4 0.0 13 20
(Stages 1 to 5) Flight Hours Breakdown 96.5 100.0 16.0 20 35.9 10.5 96.5 100
Total Flight Hours (Stage 1-5) 196.5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
Table 1-6: Summary of Stage 5 Flight Training
Note: - This phase teaches the flying skills necessary to fly piston multi-engine airplanes.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.1. Lesson Plan 5.1 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.1 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 NG FTD 2.0
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Characteristics of the DA-42NG FTD
3 Proper Operating Procedures for the DA-42NG FTD
4 Emergency Procedures for the DA-42NG FTD
5 Engine Handling - Constant Speed Full Feathering Propeller System
6 Engine Handling - Propeller Synchronization
7 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
8 Pre-flight Inspection
9 Cockpit Management
10 Run-up/Before Takeoff Check
11 Takeoff Briefing
12 Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
13 Steep Turns
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
14 The Effect of Flaps and Landing Gear on Airspeed and Pitch
15 Two Engine Climbs at Vx (Best Angle) and Vy (Best Rate)
16 Descents in various conditions (i.e. Flap and Gear combinations) to see the effect on Airspeed
Pitch and Rate of Decent
17 Power Off Stall
18 Slow Flight at 85 kts. and 76 kts.
19 Normal Takeoff and Landing
20 After Landing, Shutdown, and Securing Procedures
21 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To introduce the student to the Normal and Emergency Procedures in the use of the DA-
42NG FTD
- To introduce the student to the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) for the DA-42NG in
preparation for the multi-engine training
- To introduce the student with the Cockpit Layout of the DA-42NG
- General Aircraft Handling characteristics
- Student will demonstrate Slow Flight including critically slow Airspeed
- The student will demonstrate proficiency in Stall Recognition and Recovery from Stalls (
Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) in straight and turning flight, as well as
with the aircraft configured for Climb, Cruise and Approach, at the first physical indication of
a Stall
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Characteristics of the DA-42NG FTD
2 Proper Operating Procedures for the DA-42NG FTD
3 Emergency Procedures for the DA-42NG FTD
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
4 Engine Handling - Constant Speed Full Feathering Propeller System
5 Engine Handling - Propeller Synchronization
6 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
7 Pre-flight Inspection
8 Cockpit management
9 Engine Starting
10 Taxiing
11 Run-up/Before Takeoff Check
12 Takeoff Briefing
13 Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
14 Steep Turns
15 The effect of Flaps and Landing gear on Airspeed and Pitch
16 Two engine Climbs at Vx (Best Angle) and Vy (Best Rate)
17 Descents in various conditions (i.e. Flap and Gear Combinations) to see the effect on Airspeed
Pitch and Rate of Decent
18 Incipient Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall), Power On and Power Off
19 Incipient Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall), with and without Bank
20 Slow Flight including flight at critically slow Airspeed
21 Normal Takeoff and Landing
22 After Landing, Shutdown, and Securing Procedures
23 ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate Knowledge of the aircraft systems
Demonstrate basic Knowledge of the SOP
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.2. Lesson Plan 5.2 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.2 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 NG FTD 2.0
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Airport signs, lighting, and markings to include runway incursion avoidance
3 Traffic Pattern to include collision avoidance, wake turbulence avoidance, and Winds hear
Recognition and Recovery
4 Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
5 Use of Emergency checklist and POH
6 Go-Arounds
7 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- The student will demonstrate proficiency in Traffic Pattern Operations
- The student will demonstrate recognition of collision avoidance, wake turbulence
avoidance, and wind shear Recognition and Recovery
- The student will demonstrate proficiency in Normal, Short Field and Crosswind Takeoffs and
Landings
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Airport signs, lighting, and markings to include runway incursion avoidance
Traffic Pattern to include collision avoidance, wake turbulence avoidance, and wind
shear Recognition and Recovery
Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
Go-Arounds
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Student Competency Criteria
The student should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate Knowledge multi-engine performance
Demonstrate Knowledge of the SOP
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.3. Lesson Plan 5.3 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.3 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 NG FTD 2.0 0.7
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Principles of Flight with One Engine Inoperative
3 Yaw and Roll Effect of Engine Failure
4 Climb performance with One Engine Inoperative
5 Critical Engine
6 Effects of Bank and Airspeed Control During One Engine Inoperative
7 Zero Side-Slip
8 Single Engine Handling characteristics
9 Emergency Procedures Checklist and Engine Failure Procedures including Memory Items
10 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To introduce the student to Single Engine Handling characteristics including how to obtain
best performance with One Engine Inoperative
- To introduce the student to Emergency Procedures - Engine Failure
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Introduction to Engine Failures in Straight and Level VR (Visual Rules) and IR (Instrument
Rules)
Introduction to Engine Failures during Climbs and Descents - VR and IR
Engine Failure at Altitude and Drift Down Procedure - VR and IR
Introduction to Engine Failures during Turning Flight - VR and IR
Engine Failures during Steep Turns
In-flight Shutdown, Feathering, and Air-Restart Procedure
Introduce One Engine Inoperative Landing
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate smooth Aircraft Handling
Demonstrate Knowledge of the SOP and Emergency Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.4. Lesson Plan 5.4 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.4 Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 NG FTD 2.0
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Single Engine Performance Calculations
3 Recognition and Recovery from loss of directional control One Engine Inoperative - Vmca
4 Vmca (Cause and Effect)
5 Vyse (Cause and Effect)
6 Effects of Drag on Airplane Control and Performance
7 Single Engine Go-Around Procedure (and note characteristics with different configuration)
8 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To learn to Recognize and Recover from Loss of Directional Control - One Engine Inoperative
- To learn the effects of Drag created by airplane configuration and zero Side-Slip during One
Engine Inoperative
- One Engine Inoperative Go-Around
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the Student practice:
Recognition and Recovery from Loss of Directional Control One Engine Inoperative -
Vmca Demo (performed above 4,000 ft. Above Ground Level [AGL]) - Recovery at first
indication of Loss of Control or Approaching Stall
Effects of Drag demonstration on airplane control and performance (performed above
3,000ft AGL)
One Engine Inoperative Go-Arounds - initiated with One Engine Inoperative Approach
and with Two Engine Approach (performed above 3,000ft AGL)
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises with minimal from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate Positive Aircraft Control at all times
Perform Emergency Procedures accurately
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.5. Lesson Plan 5.5 - Multi-Engine Procedures
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.5(P) Multi-Engine Procedures DA-42 NG FTD 2.0
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Engine Failure on Takeoff
3 Engine Failures at all Points in the Traffic Pattern
4 Single Engine Procedures
5 Rejected Takeoff Procedure (Before and After V1)
6 One Engine Inoperative Landing
7 One Engine Inoperative Go-Around (note characteristics below/above 800ft and with/without
configuration)
8 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To gain proficiency in Engine Failures and One Engine Inoperative Operation in all phases of
Takeoff, Traffic Pattern, and Landing
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the Student Practice:
Engine Failure on Takeoff (all airborne simulated Engine Failures will be conducted
above Vsse and 400ft AGL)
Engine Failures at all Points in the Traffic Pattern
Single Engine Procedures
Rejected Takeoff Procedure (aborted Takeoffs for Engine Failures should be performed
at or below 50% Vmca)
One Engine Inoperative Landing
One Engine Inoperative Go-Around (only performed with simulated Engine Failure and
at safe Altitude)
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises to the multi-engine flight test standard, and:
Demonstrate Positive Aircraft Control at all times
Perform Emergency Procedures accurately
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.6. Lesson Plan 5.6 - Multi-Engine Flying (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.6 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG FTD 2.0 1.5
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Single Engine Performance Calculations
3 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 Precision Approaches both Normal and One Engine Inoperative
5 Non-Precision Approaches Both Normal and One Engine Inoperative
6 One Engine Inoperative Landing from Straight-In Precision and Non-Precision Approaches
(NPA)
7 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To gain proficiency in One Engine Inoperative Precision and Non-Precision Approaches
- To practice Single Engine Handling and Emergency Procedures
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Straight-In Precision Approaches both Normal and One Engine Inoperative
Straight-In Non-Precision Approaches both Normal and One Engine Inoperative
One Engine Inoperative Landing from Straight-In Precision and Non-Precision
Approaches
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate good Knowledge of the aircraft systems
Demonstrate good Knowledge of the SOP
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.7. Lesson Plan 5.7 - Multi-Engine Flying (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.7 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG FTD 2.0 1.5
HAAB Weather: Circling Minima
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Review Vmca Demo and Causes and Effects
3 Normal Holding Procedures
4 Partial Panel Approaches with Engine Failure
5 One Engine Inoperative Circle-to-Land Procedures
6 One Engine Inoperative Landing from Circle-to-Land
7 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To demonstrate One Engine Inoperative Precision and
Non-Precision Approaches (NPA) with Circle-to-Land
- To gain proficiency in One Engine Inoperative Precision and Non-Precision Approaches
- To practice Single Engine Handling and Emergency Procedures
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
2 QRH Diamond
3 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and Have the Student practice:
Review VMCA demo
Normal Holding Procedures
One Engine Inoperative Non-Precision Approach with Circle-to-Land Procedures
One Engine Inoperative Precision Approach with Circle-to-Land Procedures
One Engine Inoperative Non-Precision Approach with Partial Panel
One Engine Inoperative Precision and Non-Precision Approach with Procedure Turn
One Engine Inoperative Landing from Circle-to-Land
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises without assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate good Knowledge of Multi-Engine Performance
Demonstrate good Knowledge of the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.8. Lesson Plan 5.8 - Multi-Engine Flying (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.8 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG FTD 2.0 1.0
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 2sm 9OVC 19/16 1015mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Unusual Attitude Recovery
3 Emergency Descent
4 Emergency Gear Extension
5 Engine and Electrical Fire in Flight
6 Cabin Fire in Flight
7 Electrical Failures
8 G1000 Failures
9 ECU Failures
10 All Items on Emergency Procedures Checklist
11 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To perform all Emergency situations properly to Acceptance Test Procedure (ATP) standards
using proper SRM.
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 QRH Diamond
3 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and Have the Student Practice:
Unusual Attitude Recovery
Emergency Descent
Emergency gear extension
Engine and Electrical Fire in flight
Cabin fire in flight electrical failures
G1000 failures
ECU failures
All items on Emergency Procedures Checklist
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to complete all exercises without assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate smooth Aircraft Handling
Demonstrate good Knowledge of the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) and
Emergency Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.9. Lesson Plan 5.9 - Multi-Engine Pre - flight Test (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.9 Multi-Engine Pre-Flight Test DA-42 NG FTD 2.0 1.0
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 CAVOK 19/16 1018mb RWY25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Off Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
3 Slow Flight
4 Steep Turns
5 Vmca Demonstration
6 Spin Awareness
7 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved the proficiency level for the Multi-Engine Rating
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
5 Incipient Power On and off Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) with and
without Bank VR and IR
6 Slow Flight including critically slow Airspeed VR and IR
7 Steep Turns VR and IR
8 Vmca demonstration VR and IR
9 Any additional maneuvers deemed necessary for review by the flight Instructor
10 ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee must be able to perform to the minimum Multi-Engine Standard during the flight for all
exercises, and:
Demonstrate adequate Knowledge of Multi-Engine Theory of Flight, Performance, and
Handling Characteristics
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills and effective use of Available
Resources
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.10. Lesson Plan 5.10 - Multi-Engine Flight Test (Validation)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.10(V) Multi-Engine Pre-Flight Test DA-42 NG FTD 2.0 0.7
HAAB Weather: 280/5-10 25m 90 vc 19/16 1015 mb Rwy 25L
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 All Lesson Topics Required for the Multi-Engine Rating Flight Test
II. Objectives
- To verify the student has achieved the proficiency level for the Multi-Engine Rating
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
This session is a Validation that the required objectives of the phase have been met. The flight will be
treated as a solo flight and the student is to make all decisions as required during flight without any
prompting from the Instructor.
1 The Instructor shall review with the student:
Validation Rules
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
How Repeats will be conducted
Expectations of the student
2 The following items must be demonstrated to a grade of 3 or better in reference to the
standards:
Pre-flight Procedures
Certificates and documents
Airworthiness requirements
Weather Information
Cross-Country Flight Planning
Airspace System
Operation of Aircraft Systems
Pre-flight Procedures
Pre-flight Inspection
Cockpit management
Engine Starting
Taxiing
Before Takeoff Check
Airport Operations
Radio Communications and Air Traffic Control (ATC) Light Signals
Traffic Patterns
Airport Runway and Taxiway Signs, Markings, and Lighting
Takeoffs, Landings, and Go-Arounds
Normal and Crosswind Takeoff and Climb
Normal and Crosswind Approach and Landing
Soft Field Takeoff and Climb, Approach and Landing
Short Field Takeoff and maximum performance Climb, Approach and Landing
Forward-Slip to a Landing
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
Go-Around/Rejected Landing
Performance maneuvers
Steep Turns
Maneuvering during Slow Flight
Power Off/Power On Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
Navigation
Ground reference rectangular course
Ground reference S-Turns
Navigation Systems and Radar Services
Diversion
Lost Procedures
Basic Instrument maneuvers
Straight and Level Flight
Constant Airspeed Climbs/Descents
Turn to headings
Recover from Unusual Flight Attitudes
Radio Communications, Navigation Systems
Emergency Operations
Emergency Approach and Landing (simulated)
Systems and Equipment Malfunctions
Emergency Equipment and survival gear
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The student must be able to perform to the minimum Multi-Engine Standard during the flight for all
exercises in reference to the Competency Criteria, and:
Demonstrate adequate Knowledge of Multi-Engine Theory of Flight, Performance, and
Handling Characteristics
Demonstrate sound Pilot Decision Making (PDM) Skills and effective use of all Available
Resources
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.11. Lesson Plan 5.11 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.11 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Characteristics of the DA-42NG A/C
3 Proper Operating Procedures for the DA-42NG A/C
4 Emergency Procedures for the DA-42NG A/C
5 Engine Handling - Constant Speed Full Feathering Propeller System
6 Engine Handling - Propeller Synchronization
7 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
8 Pre-flight Inspection
9 Cockpit Management
10 Run-up/Before Takeoff Check
11 Takeoff Briefing
12 Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
13 Steep Turns
14 The Effect of Flaps and Landing Gear on Airspeed and Pitch
15 Two Engine Climbs at Vx (Best Angle) and Vy (Best Rate)
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
16 Descents in various conditions (i.e. Flap and Gear combinations) to see the effect on Airspeed
Pitch and Rate of Decent
17 Power Off stall
18 Slow Flight at 85 kts and 76 kts
19 Normal Takeoff and Landing
20 After Landing, Shutdown, and Securing Procedures
21 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To introduce the student to the Normal and Emergency Procedures in the use of the DA-
42NG A/C
- To introduce the student to the Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) for the DA-42NG in
preparation for the multi-engine training
- To introduce the student with the Cockpit Layout of the DA-42NG
- General Aircraft Handling characteristics
- Student will demonstrate Slow Flight including critically slow Airspeed
- The student will demonstrate proficiency in Stall Recognition and Recovery from Stalls (
Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) in straight and turning flight, as well as
with the aircraft configured for Climb, Cruise and Approach, at the first physical indication of
a Stall
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
- Characteristics of the DA-42NG A/C
- Proper Operating Procedures for the DA-42NG A/C
- Emergency Procedures for the DA-42NG A/C
- Engine Handling - Constant Speed Full Feathering Propeller System
- Engine Handling - Propeller Synchronization
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
- Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Cockpit management
- Engine Starting
- Taxiing
- Run-up/Before Takeoff Check
- Takeoff Briefing
- Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
- Steep Turns
- The effect of Flaps and Landing gear on Airspeed and Pitch
- Two engine Climbs at Vx (Best Angle) and Vy (Best Rate)
- Descents in various conditions (i.e. Flap and Gear Combinations) to see the effect on Airspeed
Pitch and Rate of Decent
- Incipient Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall), Power On and Power Off
- Incipient Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall), with and without Bank
- Slow Flight including flight at critically slow Airspeed
- Normal Takeoff and Landing
- After Landing, Shutdown, and Securing Procedures
- ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The student should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate Knowledge of the aircraft systems
Demonstrate basic Knowledge of the SOP
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.12. Lesson Plan 5.12 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.12 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Airport signs, lighting, and markings to include runway incursion avoidance
3 Traffic Pattern to include collision avoidance, wake turbulence avoidance, and Wind shear
Recognition and Recovery
4 Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
5 Go-Arounds
6 Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall) (Power ON & Power Off)
7 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
8 Slow flight (with gear & flaps) speech 85 kts (76 kts)
9 Steep turns
II. Objectives
- The student will demonstrate proficiency in Traffic Pattern Operations
- The student will demonstrate recognition of collision avoidance, wake turbulence
avoidance, and wind shear Recognition and Recovery
- The student will demonstrate proficiency in Normal, Short Field and Crosswind Takeoffs and
Landings
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Airport signs, lighting, and markings to include runway incursion avoidance
Traffic Pattern to include collision avoidance, wake turbulence avoidance, and wind
shear Recognition and Recovery
Normal/Crosswind Takeoffs and Landings
Go-Arounds
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The student should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate Knowledge multi-engine performance
Demonstrate Knowledge of the SOP
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.13. Lesson Plan 5.13 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.13 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Principles of Flight with One Engine Inoperative
3 Yaw and Roll Effect of Engine Failure
4 Climb performance with One Engine Inoperative
5 Critical Engine, Vmca
6 Effects of Bank and Airspeed Control During One Engine Inoperative
7 Zero Side-Slip
8 Single Engine Handling characteristics
9 Emergency Procedures Checklist and Engine Failure Procedures including Memory Items
10 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
11 Fire and Emergent at descent
12 Touch and go landings, 60 around
II. Objectives
- To introduce the student to Single Engine Handling characteristics including how to obtain
best performance with One Engine Inoperative
- To introduce the student to Emergency Procedures - Engine Failure
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the student practice:
Introduction to Engine Failures in Straight and Level VR (Visual Rules) and IR (Instrument
Rules)
Introduction to Engine Failures during Climbs and Descents - VR and IR
Engine Failure at Altitude and Drift Down Procedure - VR and IR
Introduction to Engine Failures during Turning Flight - VR and IR
Engine Failures during Steep Turns
In-flight Shutdown, Feathering, and Air-Restart Procedure
Introduce One Engine Inoperative Landing
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The student should be able to complete all exercises with assistance from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate smooth Aircraft Handling
Demonstrate Knowledge of the SOP and Emergency Procedures
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.14. Lesson Plan 5.14 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.14 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Single Engine Performance Calculations
3 Recognition and Recovery from loss of directional control One Engine Inoperative - Vmca
4 Vmca (Cause and Effect)
5 Vyse (Cause and Effect)
6 Effects of Drag on Airplane Control and Performance
7 Single Engine Go-Around Procedure
8 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
9 Landing Exercises
II. Objectives
- To learn to Recognize and Recover from Loss of Directional Control - One Engine Inoperative
- To learn the effects of Drag created by airplane configuration and zero Side-Slip during One
Engine Inoperative
- One Engine Inoperative Go-Around
III. References
1 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the Student practice:
Recognition and Recovery from Loss of Directional Control One Engine Inoperative - Vmca
Demo (performed above 4,000ft Above Ground Level [AGL]) - Recovery at first
indication of Loss of Control or Approaching Stall
Effects of Drag demonstration on airplane control and performance (performed above
3,000ft AGL)
One Engine Inoperative Go-Arounds - initiated with One Engine Inoperative Approach
and with Two Engine Approach (performed above 3,000ft AGL)
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The student should be able to complete all exercises with minimal from the Instructor, and:
Demonstrate Positive Aircraft Control at all times
Perform Emergency Procedures accurately
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.15. Lesson Plan 5.15 - Multi-Engine Procedures (Dual)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.15 Multi-Engine Flying DA-42 NG 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Engine Failure on Takeoff
3 Engine Failures at all Points in the Traffic Pattern
4 Single Engine Procedures
5 Rejected Takeoff Procedure
6 Landing Exercise
7 One Engine Inoperative Landing
8 One Engine Inoperative Go-Around
9 Aeronautical Decision Making (ADM) and Single-pilot Resource Management (SRM) Skills
II. Objectives
- To gain proficiency in Engine Failures and One Engine Inoperative Operation in all phases of
Takeoff, Traffic Pattern, and Landing
III. References
1 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
2 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
3 PTS procedure Manual
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
4 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Demonstrate and have the Student Practice:
Engine Failure on Takeoff (all airborne simulated Engine Failures will be conducted
above Vsse and 400ft AGL)
Engine Failures at all Points in the Traffic Pattern
Single Engine Procedures
Rejected Takeoff Procedure (aborted Takeoffs for Engine Failures should be performed
at or below 50% Vmca)
One Engine Inoperative Landing
One Engine Inoperative Go-Around (only performed with simulated Engine Failure and
at safe Altitude)
ADM and SRM Skills
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The student should be able to complete all exercises to the multi-engine flight test standard, and:
Demonstrate Positive Aircraft Control at all times
Perform Emergency Procedures accurately
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.16. Lesson Plan 5.16 Night Flight - Introduction
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.16 Night Flight - Introduction DA-42 NG 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Personal Equipment and Health Status
3 Weather Considerations and Threats
4 Aircraft Equipment
5 Taxiway and Runway Lighting
6 Traffic Pattern Procedures
7 Go-Around Procedure
8 Steep Turns
9 Slow Flight
10 Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
II. Objectives
- To teach the student the correct procedures for aircraft Operations at Night
- To allow the student sufficient practice to become proficient at conducting Night Takeoffs
and Landings
- To review air work including Steep Turns, Slow Flight and Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach
Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,
17-21,29,30)
2 Diamond DA-42NG Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-42 NG Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Aircraft and Cockpit Checks
2 Taxiing, With and Without the Taxi Light
3 Takeoffs, Traffic Patterns and Landings with and without the Landing light. At least three
Landings should be to a full stop.
4 Perform a Go-Around
5 Review Steep Turns, Slow Flight, and Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim
Stall)
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Safely conduct a Night Takeoff, Traffic Pattern, and Landing with and without the use of
the Landing Light
Demonstrate understanding of the Threats and Hazards of Night Operations
Perform Steep Turns, Slow Flight, and Stalls ( Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator
Trim Stall) within Standards
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
5.17. Lesson Plan 5.17 – Night Flying
Flight Time
Lesson No. Dual Dual PIC IF IF X/C
Description Equip
(A/C (Sim (A/C (A/C (Sim (A/C
) ) ) ) ) )
5.17 Night Flight DA-42 NG 1.5
I. Lesson Topics
1 Pre-flight Preparation
- Pre-flight Inspection
- Weight and Balance Calculation
- Obtaining Weather Information
- Aircraft Performance
- Risk Assessment (FRAT)
- Go & No-Go Decision Making
- CRM/SRM
2 Personal Equipment and Health Status
3 Weather Considerations and Threats
4 Aircraft Equipment
5 Taxiway and Runway Lighting
6 Traffic Pattern Procedures
7 Go-Around Procedure
8 Steep Turns
9 Slow Flight
10 Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
II. Objectives
- To teach the student the correct procedures for aircraft Operations at Night
- To allow the student sufficient practice to become proficient at conducting Night Takeoffs
and Landings
- To review air work including Steep Turns, Slow Flight and Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach
Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
III. References
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training-Stage 5
1 Jeppesen Private Pilot Maneuvers Manual (Maneuver 1-10,12,13,
17-21,29,30)
2 Diamond DA-40 NG/C-172 Pilot Operating Handbook
3 DA-40 NG/C-172 Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
4 PTS procedure Manual
5 Competency Criteria - Expanded Actions/Performance Objectives
IV. Required Instruction during Flight
1 Aircraft and Cockpit Checks
2 Taxiing, With and Without the Taxi Light
3 Takeoffs, Traffic Patterns and Landings with and without the Landing light. At least three
Landings should be to a full stop.
4 Perform a Go-Around
5 Review Steep Turns, Slow Flight, and Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator Trim Stall)
V. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Land without the use of the Landing Light (Blackout Landing)
Demonstrate understanding of the Threats and Hazards of Night Operations
Perform Steep Turns, Slow Flight, and Stalls (Departure Stall, Approach Stall, Elevator
Trim Stall) within Standards
__________________________________________________________________________________________
Issue No. 0 Flight Training – Stage 5 5-44
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
Multi-Pilot License (MPL) Training
PART III- FLIGHT TRAINING (Stages 6-8)- B737 NG
Issue No. 0 Part II Flight Training B-737NG 6-1
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Flight Training: B-737NG Type Rating
Flight Training: B 737 Type Rating
Duration (Hrs.)
Phase Stage Stage Title FTD
Aeroplane Total
PF PNF
6 Multi Crew 20 20 0 20
II (Basic)
7 Multi-crew Instrument 20 20 0 40
Multi-crew
8A Commercial 20 20 0 40
Operations
III (Intermediate)
Multi-crew
8B Commercial 20 20 0 40
Operations
IV (Advanced) 9 B 737 Type Rating 20 20 0 40*
Total 100 100 0 200
Table 6-0: Summary of B-737NG Flight Training
KEY:
PF- Pilot Flying
PNF- Pilot Not Flying
FTD – Flight Training Device
* The phase IV (advanced) training curriculum is a complement to this curriculum and being prepared by
Flight Operations as part of type training certification separately approved by ECAA.
Issue No. 0 Part II Flight Training B-737NG 6-2
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6. FLIGHT TRAINING (B-737 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 6
Overview
This stage of training is designed to introduce the students to commercial operations in a multi-crew
environment on a multi-engine aircraft in IFR conditions Scenario Based Training is used to place emphasis on
developing CRM skills such as Leadership, Monitor and Feedback and Crew Briefings in a commercial
environment. Students will complete training in both crew positions (Captain and First Officer) and operate as
Pilot Flying (PF) and Pilot Not Flying (PNF).
Objectives
- To develop IFR multi-crew skills and knowledge to gain experience in a multi-crew IFR commercial flight
operations through scenario-based training sessions;
- To apply CRM skills at the commercial pilot level to real world situations; and to demonstrate sound risk
management and leadership skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
Instructional Methods to be Used
This stage of training uses the competency based training and assessment method of instruction along with
Line Oriented Flight Training. Crew centered facilitated debriefing and self-assessment techniques are used to
develop the student’s command (Leadership) and CRM skills.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage VII, students must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Advanced proficiency in IFR multi-engine skills and knowledge;
Ability to serve as a member of a multi-crew during IFR commercial flight operations;
Proficiency in application of theoretical knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of flight,
meteorology and air regulations;
Necessary leadership skills, CRM and Threat Error Management (TEM) at the level expected of
a commercial pilot; and
Sound risk management skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
Flight Time
Lesson Total
Description Equip PF PNF
No.
FTD FTD
6.1 Cockpit Familiarization B737 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-3
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.2 Cockpit Familiarization B737 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
6.3 Cockpit Familiarization B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
Basic Handling and
6.4 B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
ILS Approaches
Basic Handling and
6.5 B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
ILS Approaches
Basic Handling and
6.6 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
ILS Approaches
Basic Handling and
6.7 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
ILS Approaches
Basic Handling and Localizer
6.8 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
Basic Handling and VOR/DME
6.9 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
6.10 (P) Progress Check B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Basic Handling and RNAV
6.11 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
Basic Handling and Non-ILS
6.12 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
6.13 Basic Handling and NNC Use B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.14 Basic Handling and NNC Use B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.15(V) Validation Check B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Stage 6 Total Hours 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-6) 236.5
Table 6-1: Summary of Training Stage 6 Summary – B737 Type Rating
* The training time for the CPT and VPT lessons will not to be added in adding the total time of the flight
training. The CPT/VPT sessions will not be graded.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-4
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.1 Lesson Plan 6.1 – Cockpit Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.1 Cockpit Familiarization B-737NG CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Captain/First Officer Duties
2. Checklist Protocol
3. Normal checklist
4. Pre-flight procedures
5. Engine Start Procedures
6. Before Taxi
7. Before Takeoff
8. After Landing Procedure
9. Shutdown and secure Procedures
II. Objectives
To familiarize the trainee with Pre-flight duties, Procedures, and the Normal Checklist from an
unpowered airplane up to the Landing Checklist
To familiarize the trainee with the B737NG cockpit environment
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief
Simulator area safety brief and training facility orientation
Discuss normal procedure’s philosophy and assumptions, crew duties, scan flow and area of
responsibility
Pilot seat, seat belt and shoulder harness and cockpit lighting adjustments
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-5
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Normal procedures and checklist instructions (QRH CI)
The scenario is designed to let the student practice the Procedures and operation of the various
systems in the cockpit. Assume the External Checks have been completed.
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with GPU available, but not supplying power to the aircraft.
V. Lesson Plan
- Electrical Power Up (FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
- Preliminary Pre-flight Procedure (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Pre-flight Procedure First Officer then Captain
- Call “PRE-FLIGHT CHECKLIST.” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Before Engine Start Procedure
- Call “Before Start Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Engine Start Procedure
- Call “Before Taxi Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Before Taxi Procedure (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Call “Before Taxi Checklist”
- After Landing Procedure (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Shutdown Procedures
- Call “shutdown Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Secure check List
- Power down
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCHING SEATS
REPEAT SAME
i. Trainee competency Criteria
- The trainee should be familiar with B737 cockpit environment
- Understand Normal procedure philosophy and scan flows
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-6
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- Understand area of responsibilities and PM/PF duties
- Should be familiar with the training environment safety procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-7
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.2 Lesson Plan 6.2 – Cockpit Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.2 Cockpit Familiarization B-737NG CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal checklist
2. Pre-flight procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Before Takeoff
6. Normal takeoff
7. Climb, cruise, and descent
8. Landing
9. Shut down and secure
II. Objectives
To familiarize the student with the switch positions, the flows, and the operation of the various systems
in the cockpit during a station stop.
Flows and checklists are to be done from Pre-flight, to Engine start, Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, Landing and a
Shutdown.
To familiarize trainees with the approved onboard performance tool (OPT).
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief
- Discuss on the use of OPT for takeoff and landing performance calculations
- This scenario is designed to let the student practice the flows and operation of the various systems in
the cockpit. Assume the External Checks have been completed.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-8
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- Discuss aircraft limitations
- Discuss normal procedures and checklist
- Discuss TEM associated with Normal procedures
V. Lesson Plan
- Electrical Power Up
- Pilot seat adjustments
- Pre-flight Procedure First Officer then Captain
- Call “PRE-FLIGHT CHECKLIST.” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Before Engine Start Procedure
- Call “Before Start Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Engine Start Procedure
- Call “Before Taxi Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Before Taxi Procedure (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Call “Before Taxi Checklist”
- Takeoff Procedure
- Call “Before Takeoff checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Climb and Cruise Procedure
- Call “After Takeoff Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Reposition 6NM final for ILS 25L AUTOLAND (FCOM CH4 )
- Call “Descent Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Approach procedure
- Call “Approach Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Landing Procedure
- Call “Landing Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Landing Roll Procedure (FCOM NP, SOP)
- After Landing Procedure (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Shutdown Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-9
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- Call “shutdown Checklist” (FCOM NP, SOP)
- Secure and power down
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS AND REPEAT SAME
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
- The trainee should be familiar with B737 SOP,
- Understand Normal procedure philosophy and scan flows
- Able to perform PM/PF duties
- Able to use OPT for takeoff and landing performance calculations
6.3 Lesson Plan 6.3 – Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.3 Cockpit Familiarization B-737NG VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. MCP Operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Before Takeoff
6. Normal takeoff
7. Climb, cruise, and descent,approach and land
II. Objectives
- To practice normal procedures and checklist from power up to power down
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-10
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- The Scenario is primarily designed to let the student observe and practice the operation of the MCP
(made control panel), the Glare shield panel, the MFD display, the EFIS control panel, and display
switching.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief
- This aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with APU power supplying the aircraft.
- Discuss normal procedures (FCOM NP)
- Discuss automatic flight system and MCP operations
- Discuss normal checklist protocols and instructions
- Discuss standard callouts (SOP and FCTM)
- Review aircraft limitations
- Discuss CRM and TEM on the above tasks
V. Lesson Plan
- Begin the flows from the Preliminary Pre-flight Procedures and complete the Pre-flight Checklist.
Takeoff briefings are not required at this point.
- When this is completed, continue with the engine start, take off, climb FL160
- The instructor will demonstrate the MCP (mode control panel), the Glare Shield Panel, the MFD display,
the EFIS control panel, and Display switching. The trainees should be given enough time to practice and
understand the MCP operations.
- Do descent preparations for ILS approach via ADS, complete ILS approach and Auto land.
- After landing, shut down and secure procedures and checklists.
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-11
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
a) Demonstrate understanding and comprehension of how to use the SOP for normal procedures and
checklists
b) Demonstrate on procedure scan flow and use of normal checklist
c) Demonstrate knowledge of the MCP, Glare Shield Panel, MFD, and Display Switching
d) Complete preflight, engine start, before taxi, takeoff, shut down and secure procedures and checklists.
6.4 Student Lesson Plan 6.4 – B737 NG Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.4 Basic Handling and ILS Approaches B-737NG VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. MCP Operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. Minimum maneuvering speeds
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-12
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- To introduce the student to the basic flying operations of the B737 NG.
- To do takeoff and landing performance calculations using OPT/manuals
- The lesson will initially be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a
feel for the aircraft and it’s handing. Then trainees will practice manual aircraft handling and manual ILS
approaches with flight directors.
- To practice normal procedures and checklists from power up to power down.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
- Takeoff and landing performances using OPT and manuals
- Review MCP Procedures with and without Autopilot
- Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
- Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
- Review flap retraction schedule (FCTM Ch. 1)
- Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
- Review Descent and Level OFF technique
- Discuss standard callouts (SOP and FCTM)
- Review ILS RW25L
- Review Normal Landing Procedures
- Discuss CRM/TEM on each of the above tasks
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7 HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-13
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 20.8
GTOW 72.6
CG 13.1
Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “A” ____ Z CALM CAVOK 23/14 QNH1023
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (SOP, FCOM NP and SP Ch.6)
- Normal Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
- Taxi procedures (FCTM Ch.2)
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
- After Level Off at 14,000ft do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
- Speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS
- Fly at min maneuvering speed for (FCTM Ch.1)
- Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 30 (straight and level and turns) with F/DS
- ILS Y Approach RW25L & Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
- (Full Automation ON, Auto land for demonstration purpose)
- Reposition 7NM Final
- Practice ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- TAKE A BREAK -
THEN SWITCH SEATS
ATIS info “A” ____ Z CALM CAVOK 23/14 QNH1023
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 25L (original aircraft weights)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-14
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.2)
Line-up Runway 25L (Nose Steering OFF, then ON) (FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
After Level Off at 14,000ft do various turns,
climbs/descents for practice (Auto Throttle& Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS
Fly at min maneuvering speed for (FCTM Ch.1)
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 30 (straight and level and turns)
ILS Approach RW25L & Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Full Automation ON, Auto land for demonstration purpose)
Reposition 7NM Final
Practice ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and Checklists
(FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Trainee competency criteria:
The trainee should be able to:
a) Complete Takeoff and Landing Performance calculations
b) Demonstrate proper use of the MCP and Flight Instruments
c) Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists for normal procedures
d) Smoothly control the aircraft for Takeoff, area maneuver and Landing
e) Complete an ILS Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-15
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-16
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.5 Lesson Plan 6.5 – B737 NG Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.5 Basic Handling and ILS Approaches B-737NG VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. MCP Operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. Minimum maneuvering speeds
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- The Scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic operations of the B737 NG.
- The lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and it’s handing.
- To complete normal procedures as per the SOP
- Understand and demonstrate flap retraction and extension schedule
- To practice manual flying using flight director
- To practice MCP operations with and without Autopilot
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
- Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations using OPT and manuals
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-17
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- Review MCP Procedures
- (Autopilot, Flight Director, Auto Throttle ON)
- Review Taxi Procedures
- Review Takeoff Flap 15 Procedures
- Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
- Review the flap retraction schedule (FCTM Ch. 1)
- Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
- Review Climb IAS, transition to Mach
- Review Descent and Level OFF technique
- Review ILS RW25L (full automation) - Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 20.8
GTOW 72.6
CG 13.1
Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “B” ____ Z CALM 10KM CAVOK 20/14 QNH1025
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (Nose Steering OFF, then ON) (FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Autopilot ON, Flight Director ON, Auto Throttle ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-18
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Climb FL160, Speed 250kts
Manual flight level turns 180 degrees both direction
Manual flight Climb level off FL200, speed 250kts
Manual flight Climb level off FL250, speed 250kts
Engage Autopilot and Auto-throttles
Climb FL310 at 300KTS, Transition at Mach.70
Descend FL 250 at Mach.70 Transition 300KTS
Manual flight FL 250 speed 250 kts with flight directors
Descend level off to FL200, FL150
Fly at min maneuvering speed for (FCTM Ch.1)
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 30 (straight and level and turns)
ILS Z Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Shut down and secure
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
- ATIS info “B” ____ Z CALM 10KM CAVOK 20/14 QNH1025
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (Nose Steering OFF, then ON) (FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Autopilot ON, Flight Director ON, Auto Throttle ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Climb FL160, Speed 250kts
Manual flight level turns 180 degrees both direction
Manual flight Climb level off FL200, speed 250kts
Manual flight Climb level off FL250, speed 250kts
Engage Autopilot and Autothrottles
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-19
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Climb FL310 at 300KTS, Transition at Mach.70
Descend FL 250 at Mach.70 Transition 300KTS
Manual flight FL 250 speed 250 kts with flight directors
Manual flight Descend level off to FL200, FL150
Fly at min maneuvering speed for (FCTM Ch.1)
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 30 (straight and level and turns)
ILS Z Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Shut down and secure checklist
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
- Demonstrate proper use of the MCP and Flight Instruments
- Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
- Demonstrate flap retraction and extension schedule
- Demonstrate Manual flying skill using flight director
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-20
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.6 Lesson Plan 6.6 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.6 Basic Handling and ILS Approaches B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. MCP Operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. Minimum maneuvering speeds
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
The Scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic flaying operations of the B737 NG.
To perform normal procedures as per the SOP
To enable understand and use FMC operations
Practice to climb and descent and Level OFF
To practice ILS approaches and manual landings
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review MCP Procedures
Review Takeoff Procedures and techniques (FCTM Ch. 3)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-21
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review FMC climb, cruise, and descent page
Review Descent and Level OFF technique
Review ILS Y RW25L approaches
Review Manual landings
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7 HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 10.8
GTOW 72.6
CG 13.1
Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” ____ Z CALM CAVOK 23/14 QNH1025
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (SOP, FCOM NP and SP Ch.6)
Normal Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Taxi with Nose Steering OFF, then ON (FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Practice takeoffs and repeat as needed (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
After Level Off at 14,000ft do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Fly at min maneuvering speed (FCTM Ch.1)
Speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-22
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Climb FL250, Review FMC climb page
Enter/Delete climb Speed Restrictions
Cruise FL250, Review FMC cruise page
Change cruise speed
Decent, review FMC descent page
Change descent speed
ILS Y Approach RW25L & Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Reposition 6NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After landing and Full stop on the runway
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
ATIS info “A” ____ Z CALM CAVOK 23/14 QNH1025
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 25L (original aircraft weights)
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.2)
Line-up Runway 25L (FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
After Level Off at 14,000ft do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS
Fly at min maneuvering speed for (FCTM Ch.1)
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 30 (straight and level and turns)
ILS Approach RW25L & Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Full Automation ON, Auto land for demonstration purpose)
Reposition 6NM Final
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-23
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
ILS Y Approach RW25L & Manual Land
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and Checklists
(FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
- Demonstrate normal procedures as per the SOP
- Demonstrate takeoff to an acceptable standard
- To practice ILS approaches and manual landings
- Demonstrate acceptable manual flying skill using flight directors
- Demonstrate and understand flaps extension and retraction schedule
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-24
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.7 Lesson Plan 6.7 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.7 Basic Handling and ILS Approaches B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. MCP Operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. Minimum maneuvering speeds
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- The Scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic operations of the B737 NG. This lesson
will focus on normal procedures and manual flying using flight director
- To perform normal procedures as per the SOP
- To practice manual flying using flight director
- To practice MCP Procedures with and without Autopilot, Flight Director ON
- To practice descent planning and holding procedures
- To practice manual ILS approach and landings
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local, Shala departure and provide performance data
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-25
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
- Do Takeoff and Landing performance calculations
- Review MCP Procedures with and without Autopilot, Flight Director ON and Auto Throttle OFF
- Review Takeoff Flap 15 Procedures
- Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
- Review Descent and Level OFF technique
- Review FMC climb, cruise, and descent page
- Descent planning and speed brake usage (FCTM Ch. 4)
- HOLD and Modify hold (FCTM Ch. 4)
- Review ILS Z RW25L
- Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 20.8
GTOW 72.6
CG 13.1
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN210 25/14 QNH1026
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (
Autopilot & Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-26
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Manual Climb FL160, Speed 250kts Various level turns at FL160
FL160 Manual climbing turn and level off FL 200
Climb FL310 Review FMC climb page
Enter/Delete climb Speed Restrictions
Autopilot and Auto throttle ON, Climb FL310 at 280KTS, Transition at Mach.70
Cruise FL3100, Review FMC cruise page
Change cruise speed
Decent, review FMC descent page
Change descent speed
Descend FL200 at Mach.70 Transition 280KTS
Descent planning and Speed Brakes usage (FCTM Ch.4)
HOLD and Modify hold (FCOM 11.43, FCTM Ch.4)
ILS Z Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Practice Visual Approach RW25L (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot & Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Perform full stop landing on the runway and do After landing procedures
- TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP)
Line-up Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Autopilot & Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Manual Climb FL160, Speed 250kts
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-27
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Practice Various level turns at FL160 and Manual climbing/descending turn to FL 200
Engage Autopilot and Autothrottles, Climb FL310 at 280KTS, transition at Mach.75
Descend at Mach.75 Transition 280KTS
Descent planning and Speedbrakes usage (FCTM Ch. 4)
HOLD and Modify hold (FCOM Ch.11, FCTM Ch. 4)
ILS Y Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot & Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW07R (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
(Autopilot & Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Visual Approach RW07R (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot & Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and Checklists
(FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
VIII. Trainee Competency Criteria
- Demonstrate proper MCP Procedures with and without Autopilot, Flight Director ON
- Demonstrate takeoff to the standard
- Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
- Demonstrate holding procedures using FMC
- Understand descent planning and Speed Brake usage
- Demonstrate satisfactory manual flying skill using flight director
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-28
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.8 Lesson Plan 6.8 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.8 Basic Handling and Localizer Approaches B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. TCAS Recognition and Recovery
7. LOC Approach and Missed Approach
8. Crosswind Landing
9. Shutdown
II. Objectives
The Scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic operations of the B737 NG.
To practice LOC Approach and Missed Approach
To practice TCAS Recognition and Recovery
To practice cross wind takeoff and landings
To demonstrate basic communications and workload management
To Demonstrate basic decision making and situational awareness
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-29
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Weight and Balance
Review Takeoff and Landing performance calculations
Review TCAS Recognition and Recovery
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review LOC Approach using VNAV (3D approach)
Review Continuous Descent Approaches
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Discuss on Stabilized approach criteria
Review Crosswind takeoff and Landing techniques (FCTM)
Discuss CRM/TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power ON
Geographic Faults for preflight
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
ZFW - 57.0
Fuel - 11.0
GTOW - 67.8
CG - 18.3
Stab Trim - 5.15
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 36010KTS 10KM BKN150 19/14 QNH1025
Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-30
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Normal Flap 5, Cross Wind Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Engage automations, level off at FL 160, Practice TCAS event (FCTM Ch.7, QRH MAN)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director, Flight director OFF) FL 160, 250 KTS do Level turns
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director, Flight director OFF) Practice climb level off and Descend level
off
LOC Z Approach RW25L (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Reposition 6NM ILS Approach RW25L practice manual landings(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight
Director ON)
Visual Approach RW25L and Manual Crosswind Landing (back up with ILS) (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5
and Ch.6)
Reposition 6NM ILS final RW25L and repeat Manual Crosswind Landing
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Before Takeoff Checklist (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Climb FL140
Demonstrate TCAS Recovery (FCTM Ch.7, QRH MAN)
LOC Approach RW25L (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
LOC Approach RW25L (Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-31
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Visual Approach RW07R and Manual Crosswind Landing (Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director
ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Reposition 6NM ILS final RW25L and repeat Manual Crosswind Landing
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
After Landing/Shutdown (FCOM NP, SOP)
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
- Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
- Complete LOC Approach and Missed Approach
- Demonstrate TCAS Recognition and Recovery
- Demonstrate basic communications and workload management
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-32
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Lesson Plan 6.9 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.9 Basic Handling and VOR/DME Approaches B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
7. VOR DME Approach and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- The Scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic operations of the B737 NG.
- This lesson will introduce flying without Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle, or Flight Director.
- To demonstrate basic communications and workload management
- To Demonstrate basic decision making and situational awareness
- To be proficient on Normal procedures
- To demonstrate manual flying with and without Flight Directors
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds and flap retraction schedule
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-33
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique with and without flight directors
Descent planning and Speed Brakes usage (FCTM CH)
HOLD and Modify hold (FCTM CH)
Review VOR DME Approach runway 25L using V/S (2D approach)
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Discuss on stabilized approach criteria and mandatory missed approach
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 11.0
GTOW 67.8
CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 16005KTS 10KM BKN130 18/10 QNH1024
Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Demonstrate Flying at min maneuvering speed (FCTM Ch.1)
Practice level turns and climbing turns with and without flight directors
Engage automations and return back
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-34
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Descent planning and preparations
VOR DME Approach RW25L (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Complete approach using V/S (2D approach)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
VOR DME Approach RW25L and Manual Landing
Reposition 6NM final ILS and manual landings
Practice Visual Approach RW25L and Manual Landing (backed up with ILS)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Before Takeoff Checklist (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.2)
Fly at min maneuvering speed for (FCTM Ch.1)
Flap Zero, Flap 30 (straight and level and turns)
VOR DME Approach RW25L (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
VOR DME Approach RW25L and Manual Landing
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Reposition 6NM final ILS and manual landings
Visual Approach RW25L and Manual Landing (backed up with ILS)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-35
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
After Landing/Shutdown (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Secure and power down (FCOM NP , SOP)
VIII. Trainee Competency Criteria
- Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
- Complete Non-ILS Approach and Missed Approach
- Demonstrate manual flying using flight Director to the standards
- Demonstrate basic decision making and workload management skills
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-36
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.10 Lesson Plan 6.10 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.10 Progress Check B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. ILS Approach
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to check the progress of the student demonstrating the basic operations of
the B-737NG.
The trainee needs to be proficient on pre-flight procedures, FMC duties and basic manual handling of
the aircraft using flight director
To demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
To demonstrate basic communications and workload management skills
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review takeoff and landing performance calculations using OPT
Discuss on aircraft limitations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-37
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Review MCP procedures with and without the Auto Pilot and Auto Throttle
Review Takeoff Procedures
Review flap retraction schedule
Review Descent planning, Hold and Speedbrakes usage (FCTM Ch.4)
Discuss on stabilized approach criteria
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
Geographic Faults
ZFW 50.0
Fuel 10.0
GTOW 60.0
CG 18.1
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 160/5 KTS 10KM BKN180 22/14 QNH1025
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Various turns at FL160 (Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Climbing and Descending turn from FL 160 to FL190 and back to FL160
Descent preparations
Descent planning and use of speed brake
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-38
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
ILS Z Approach RW25L & Missed Approach
Reposition 6NM final ILS approach and Manual Landing (Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director
ON)
Reposition 6NM Final for visual runway 07R
Practice Visual Approach and landings RW07R (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
After landing procedures
Shut down and secure
TAKE A BREAK -
THEN SWITCH SEATS
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 160/05 KTS 10KM BKN180 22/14 QNH1025
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP)
Line-up Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Various turns at FL210 (Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Descend to FL160
Climbing and Descending turn from FL 160 to FL190 and back to FL160
Descent preparations and planning
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.2)
(Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Visual Approach RW07R (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-39
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
(Auto Pilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6,
SOP)
VII. Trainee competency criteria
Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
Complete LOC Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate TCAS Recognition and Recovery
Demonstrate basic communications and workload management
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-40
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.11 Lesson Plan 6.11 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.11 Basic Handling and RNAV Approaches B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. EGPWS Recognition and Recovery
7. RNAV Approach using VNAV (3D approach ) and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic operations of the B-737NG.
III. Reference
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Takeoff and Landing performance calculations
Review EGPWS Recognition and Recovery
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Non-normal checklist instructions (QRH CI)
Review RNAV Approach runway 25L
Review Continuous Descent Approaches
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-41
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 11.0
GTOW 67.8
CG 18.3
Stab Trim 5.15
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 36010KTS 10KM BKN180 24/14 QNH1022
Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, SOP)
Normal Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 25L (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
After departure vectors towards terrain
Demonstrate EGPWS (TERRAIN) Recovery and Repeat as Needed (FCTM Ch.7, QRH MAN)
Practice manual flight (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Auto Pressurization Fail (QRH 2.3)
RNAV Approach RW07R (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
RNAV Approach RW07R and Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-42
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Reposition for Visual Approach RW07R and Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Before Takeoff Checklist (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Demonstrate EGPWS (TERRAIN) Recovery Repeat as Needed (FCTM Ch.7, QRH MAN)
Practice manual flight (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Single Pack fault
RNAV Approach RW07R (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
RNAV Approach RW07R and Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Reposition for Visual Approach RW07R and Land (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
After Landing/Shutdown (FCOM NP, SOP)
VI. Trainee competency criteria
The trainee should be able:
Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
Complete RNAV Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate GPWS Recognition and Recovery
Demonstrate basic communications and workload management
Demonstrate basic Situational awareness and decision making skills
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-43
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-44
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.12 Lesson Plan 6.12 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.12 Basic Handling and Non- ILS Approaches B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descent and Land
6. TCAS Recognition and Recovery
7. Non-ILS Approach and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to the basic operations of the B-737NG.
III. Reference
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Takeoff and Landing Performance calculations
Review Aborted Engine Start
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review TCAS Recognition and Recovery
Review RNAV Approach runway 07R
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-45
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Review cross wind takeoff and landings
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.2
Fuel 11.4
GTOW 62.6
CG 19.2
Stab Trim 5.37
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “L” ____ Z 16010KTS 10KM BKN050 17/14 QNH1024
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists (FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
Aborted Engine Start (FCOM NP, SOP)
Taxi Runway 07R (FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.2)
Crosswind Takeoff repeat as needed
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Climb and level off FL 160
Various turns at FL160 (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Climb level off and descend level off(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
After level off engage autopilot/auto throttle
TCAS event
SOURCE OFF (Left generator)
Non-ILS Approach RW25L Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-46
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Reposition 6NM for ILS Approach RW25L and Manual Crosswind Landing (repeat as needed)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Various turns at FL210
NON-ILS Approach RW25L (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
RNAV Approach RW25R & Manual Landing (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
ATIS info “N” ____ Z 16010KTS 4KM BKN004 17/16 QNH1024
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights) (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
ILS Approach RW25L and Manual Crosswind Landing
(FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5 and Ch.6)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and Checklists
(FCOM NP, FCOM SP.Ch.6, SOP)
VII. Trainee competency criteria
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Complete an Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-47
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Demonstrate comprehension of SOP while accomplishing normal and selected non-normal
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-48
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.13 Lesson Plan 6.13 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.13 Basic Handling and NNC Use B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. QRH Procedures (Engine Start; Electric; Hydraulic)
3. Normal Flight Procedures
4. Cross wind takeoff and landings
5. Shutdown and Secure Procedures
II. Objectives
This scenario is primarily designed to practice non normal Procedures and QRH usage for various
systems in the aircraft.
To integrate normal and selected non-normal procedures
To enhance trainees situational awareness and basic decision making skills
III. Reference
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
*Note: FCOM Chapters refer to ‘System’s Description’ section unless stated otherwise.
IV. Instructor Pre-brief
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with APU Power supplying the aircraft.
Discuss engine start faults
Review cross wind takeoff and landings
Discuss hydraulic and electrical system non normal
Discuss TEM/ CRM on the above events
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-49
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
V. Lesson Plan
Begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
#2 Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
“Hot Start” (SOP, FCOM NP, QRH NNC.7)
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the Procedure)
Normal Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
After Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
Taxi (FCTM Ch. 2)
TRU #1 Fails (fixed after Checklist)
(QRH NNC.6, QRH CI, FCOM Ch.6)
Line Up
Cross wind Takeoff (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Practice Climb level off and descend level off (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Hydraulic Pump Low Pressure (#2) (QRH NNC.13)
Cruise (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Descent (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
TRU #1 Fails (QRH NNC.6, QRH CI, FCOM Ch. 6)
Approach (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
ILS Approach and cross wind landings (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
Land (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.6)
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Begin the flows from the Before Engine Start Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-50
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
#1 Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP, QRH NNC.7, QRH NNC.7)
Start Fault
Normal Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
After Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
Taxi (FCTM Ch.2)
Line Up
Cross wind Takeoff (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Climb (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.3, FCTM Ch.4)
Generator Fails (QRH NNC.6)
Hydraulic Pump Overheat (QRH NNC.13)
Cruise (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Descent (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Generator Fails (QRH NNC.6)
Approach (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
ILS Approach and cross wind landings (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
Land (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.6)
Shut Down (SOP, FCOM NP)
Secure and power down
VI. Trainee competency criteria
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of SOP while accomplishing normal and selected non-normal
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-51
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.14 Lesson Plan 6.14 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.14 Basic Handling and NNC Use B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. QRH Procedures
3. Review Normal Flight Procedures
4. Review TCAS Recognition and Recovery
5. ILS and non-ILS approaches
6. Cross wind takeoff and landings
7. Shutdown Procedures
II. Objectives
This scenario is primarily designed to let the student practice Engine System, Air System and Flight
Instrument/Display Malfunctions, including QRH usage
III. Reference
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
*Note: FCOM Chapters refer to ‘System’s Description’ section unless stated otherwise.
IV. Instructor Pre-brief
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with APU Power supplying the aircraft.
Review SOP Normal procedures from power up to power down
Review Cross wind takeoff and landings
Review TCAS Recognition and Recovery
Review electrical and engine start non-normal
Review non-normal checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-52
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
V. Lesson Plan
Begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP, QRH NNC.7, FCOM Ch.7)
Start Fault
After Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
Taxi (FCTM Ch.2, P2.3)
Line Up
Cross wind Takeoff (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3)
Climb (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.3, FCTM Ch.4)
TRU #1 Fails (fixed after Checklist)
Climbing turn level off and descending turn level off practice with and without flight directors
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON/OFF)
Cruise (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Descent planning and holdings
Descent (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Approach (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
ILS Approach (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Reposition 6NM ILS Cross wind Landings
Visual approaches & Cross wind Landings (FCTM Ch.6)
Shut down and secure
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Begin the flows from the Before Engine Start Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-53
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Engine Start (SOP, FCOM NP, QRH NNC.7, FCOM Ch.7)
Start Fault
After Start (SOP, FCOM NP)
Taxi (FCTM Ch.2)
Line Up
Takeoff (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.3,P3.4)
Climb (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.3, FCTM Ch.4)
Cruise (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Display failure (QRH NNC.10, FCOM Ch.10)
Climb level off and descend level off practice with and without flight directors
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON/OFF)
Descent planning and holdings
Descent (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.4)
Approach (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
ILS Approach (SOP, FCOM NP, FCTM Ch.5)
Missed Approach (FCOM NP, SOP, FCTM Ch.5)
Reposition 6NM ILS Cross wind Landings
Visual approaches & Cross wind Landings (FCTM Ch.6)
Shut Down and Secure (SOP, FCOM NP)
VI. Trainee competency criteria
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of SOP while accomplishing normal and selected non-normal
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-54
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
6.15 Lesson Plan 6.15 – B737 NG FTD Procedures Validation
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.15 Validation Check B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Approach and Missed Approach
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
To verify the knowledge of the Standard Operating Procedures.
To verify the proficiency at basic flight maneuvers,
T0 verify the basic knowledge to the operating systems of the B737 NG; and
To verify the basic Pilot Decision Making and Workload Management skills in the B737 NG.
III. Reference
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-55
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Oral Exam on aircraft systems knowledge, SOP, FCTM and QRH
Review Takeoff and Landing performance calculations
Review Cross wind Takeoff and landing techniques
Review Climb/descend, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review electrical and engine start malfunction
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Review Normal approach and Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU unavailable,
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 11.0
GTOW 67.8
CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “L” ____ Z 16010KTS 10KM BKN050 17/14 QNH1024
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Aborted Engine start
Cross wind takeoff
Climb level off and descend level off (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON/OFF)
Selected Non-normal covered on stage 6
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-56
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG )
Non- ILS approaches and missed approaches
ILS approach and manual cross wind landing
Reposition Final for visual approach and landings
After Landing/Shutdown/secure/Electrical Power Down Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee competency criteria
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Complete an Approach and missed approach
Demonstrate comprehension of SOP while accomplishing normal and selected non-normal
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Demonstrate flight path management using automation and manual flying
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (B-737NG ) 6-57
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7. FLIGHT TRAINING (B-737 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 7
Flight Time
Total
Lesson No. Description Equip PF PNF
FTD FTD
7.1 Multi Crew Instrument B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
7.2 Multi Crew Instrument B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
7.3 Multi Crew Familiarization B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.4 Multi Crew Familiarization B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.5 Multi Crew Instrument B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.6 Multi Crew Instrument B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.7 LOFT B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.8 Multi Crew Instrument B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.9 (P) Progress Check B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.10 Multi Crew Instrument B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
LOFT and Multi Crew
7.11 B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Instrument
7.12 (V) Validation Check B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Stage 7 Total Hours (Excluding CPT and VPT) 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-7) 276.5
Table 7-1: Summary of Training Stage 7 Summary – B737 Type Rating
Note: 7.1 and 7.2 will not be graded.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-1
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.1. Lesson Plan 7.1 – B737 NG Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.1 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal Procedures
2. Non-normal checklist instructions
3. QRH Procedures (Engine Start; Electric; Hydraulic)
4. Performance calculations considering non-normal
II. Objectives
To integrate normal and selected normal procedures
To let the student practice QRH non-normal Procedures for various systems in the aircraft.
To practice FMC Climb, cruise and descent operations
To practice manual flying
To perform Performance calculations considering non-normal conditions
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with APU Power supplying the aircraft and
instructor will provide weight and environmental data
Discuss normal procedures from POWER UP to SECURE
Discuss Non-normal checklist instructions and QRH usage
Discuss Performance calculation considering non-normal (ANTISKID INOP)
Discuss engine start, electric and hydraulic non-normal as they happen on the Plan
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-2
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” – Z 1810KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 23/18 Q1026
Have them begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
#2 Engine Start malfunctions (hot or wet start conditions)
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the Procedure)
Normal Engine Start
After Start
Taxi
ANTISKID INOP (Check Performance as per the QRH)
Line Up
Cross wind Takeoff
Climb FL160
FMC CLIMB PAGE REVIEW
Hydraulic Pump Low Pressure (#2)
Manual flight Level turns, climb level off and descend level off (F/D 0N)
Cruise
REVIEW FMC CRUISE PAGE
Descent
REVIEW FMC DESCENT PAGE
Electrical malfunctions (SOURCE OFF or DRIVE)
Approach
ILS Approach
Cross wind Landing
Reposition 7NM Final
Practice ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-3
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Have them begin the flows from the Before Engine Start Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
#1 Engine Start Malfunction (No Ignition )
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the Procedure)
Normal Engine Start
After Start, Flight Director ON)
Taxi
ANTI SKID INOP
Line Up
Cross wind Takeoff
Climb FL160
REVIEW FMC CLIMB PAGE
Hydraulic Pump Overheat (#2)
Manual flight Level turns, climb level off and Descend level off (F/D 0N)
Cruise
REVIEW FMC CRUISE PAGE
Electrical malfunctions (SOURCE OFF or DRIVE)
Descent
REVIEW FMC CRUISE PAGE
Approach
ILS Approach
Cross wind Land
Shut Down
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-4
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Reposition 7NM Final
Practice ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After Landing /shutdown /Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklists
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the Engine, hydraulic and electrical Systems
Demonstrate proper performance calculations considering non-normal conditions
Complete a flight by integrating normal and non-normal conditions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-5
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.2. Lesson Plan 7.2 – B737 NG Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.2 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal flight Procedures
2. Performance calculations considering MEL/CDL
3. QRH usage for non-normal conditions
4. Use of Engine and wing anti- ice
II. Objectives
To practice Engine System, Air System and Flight Instrument/Display Malfunctions,
To demonstrate proper QRH usage for selected non-normal procedures
To practice manual flying
Apply CRM/TEM attributes while practicing selected non-normal procedures
To practice engine and wing anti-ice operations
III. References
5. B-737NG FCOM
6. B-737NG FCTM
7. ET B737 SOP
8. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with APU Power supplying the aircraft
Have students do performance calculation (MEL: Number 1 thrust reverser INOP)
Review Minimum Maneuvering Speed
Review Flap retraction and extension schedule
Discuss Engine System, Air System and Flight Instrument/Display Malfunctions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-6
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Discuss Engine and Wing anti-ice system and procedures
V. Lesson Plan
Maintenance Status: Number 1 thrust reverser Inoperative
ATIS wind 340/10 KTS visibility 3km BR 120BKN Temp 12/6 QNH 1025
Have them begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
Engine Start
Start Valve remains Open
(Valve light extinguishes after affected Engine Bleed air switched Off)
After Start
Taxi
Line Up
Cross Wind Takeoff
Climb
EEC Alternate Mode (normalize after QRH)
FL 190 Cruise
Practice Climbs /descents manual flight (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level off at 14000ft., Speed 250 KTS do various turns manual flight (Autopilot, Auto
Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Have crew do speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS manual flight, Flight Director OFF
Descent
Display Failure (no automatic switching) (normalize after QRH)
Approach
ILS Approach
Cross wind landings
Line Up
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-7
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Cross wind Takeoff
Climb
Auto Pressurization Fail (normalize after QRH)
Cruise
Display Source – one DEU supplying Display
Descent
Approach
ILS Approach
Reposition 7NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L & practice Manual cross wind Landing
After Landing procedures
Shut Down shut down procedures
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Have them begin the flows from the Before Engine Start Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Engine Start
CDS fault after ENG 1 start (Malfunction cleared after QRH)
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW07R ASOLE 1A Departure, expect FL190 after departure Squawk 2414
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist
Line-up Runway07R
Normal Flap 5 takeoff (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Level off 14,000ft.
Practice Climbs /descents manual flight (Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level off at 14000ft., Speed 250 KTS do various turns manual flight
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-8
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
(Autopilot, Auto Throttle, Flight Director OFF)
Have crew do speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS
Duct Overheat
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” – Z 01010KTS 2SM BR 003BKN 22/18 Q1026
ILS Approach RW25L & manual Land (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition 7NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L & practice Manual cross wind Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After Landing /shutdown /Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklists
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of SOP while accomplishing normal and selected non-normal
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attribute
Lesson Plan 7.3 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.3 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal Preflight procedures and Geographic faults
2. Air Faults and Fuel malfunctions
3. Steep turn and Approach to stall recoveries
4. Engine out familiarizations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-9
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
5. Non-ILS Approach and missed approach
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and
procedures of the B-737NG.
To demonstrate proper use of QRH to accomplish non normal checklist
To practice Engine out aircraft control during climb, cruise and descent
To complete Non-ILS Approach and missed approach
To integrate normal and selected non-normal procedures
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM, Do Take off & Landing performances calculations
Review Pack and Fuel Abnormalities
Discuss Steep turns
Discuss Approach to Stall Recoveries
Discuss on rudder usage and manual thrust management during Engine out conditions
Review non–ILS approaches and Missed approaches
Review visual approaches and Landings
Discus CRM/TEM on the above non-normal maneuvers
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-10
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Motion OFF
Switches incorrectly set (before crew enters FTD/VPT)
Supply Cool ALT and Fuel Cross feed at Cross feed
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” – Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 23/18 Q1026
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R ASOLE 1A Departure, expect FL190 after departure, squawk 2414
Power UP/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
CLIMB
Single pack Fails reset after QRH completed
Have crew Level off a 14000 ft., speed 250 KTS climbs/descents for practice
Have crew level off FL160, 250KTS (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
Practice Steep turn 3600 both directions
Practice Engine out familiarization as per FCTM Ch. 7 (CRUISE, CLIMB & DESCENT)
Approach to Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps up, Speed brake Extended, Thrust Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Thrust Idle, Turning
Fuel Pump Low Pressure
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” – Z 01010 KTS 2SM BR 0038 BKN 22/18 Q1026
Non-ILS Approach and missed approach
Visual approach and manual landing RW25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
Reposition 7NM Final
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-11
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Practice Visual Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After Landing /shutdown /Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklists
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “A” – Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004B KN 23/18 Q1026
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW07R ASOLE 1A Departure, expect FL290 10
Minutes after departure Squawk 2114
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist
Line-up Runway07R
Normal Flap 5 takeoff (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level off at 14000ft., climbs/descents for practice
Have crew level off FL160, 250KTS (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
Practice Steep turn 3600 both directions
Approach to Stall Recoveries
Practice engine out familiarization as per FCTM Ch. 7
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps up, Speed brake Extended , Idle Thrust
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Idle thrust, Turning
Fuel imbalance (Leak NOT suspected)
Duct Overheat
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” – Z 01010KTS 2SM BR 003BKN 22/18 Q1026
Complete Non-ILS Approach and Missed approach
Reposition Final for Visual approach and manual landing RW25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-12
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
Reposition 6NM Final
Practice Visual Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After Landing /shutdown /Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklists
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH for non-normal conditions
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and missed approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP for Normal and Non- Normal procedures
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-13
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.4. Lesson plan 7.4– B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.4 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal procedures
2. Steep Turns, Approach to stall Recoveries
3. LOC Approach and missed approach
4. Engine failure after V1
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and
procedures of the B-737NG.
To practice Steep Turns and Approach to stall Recoveries
To Complete LOC approach and missed approach
To practice Engine failure after V1 and Engine out escape routes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-14
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions from previous sessions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Steep Turns
Review Approach to Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review LOC approach RW25L
Review two engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure after V1 procedure and Engine out escape route (HAAB)
Discus CRM and TEM on the above Events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW25L HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 47
Fuel 10
GTOW 57
CG 21
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “B” – Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1025
ATC Clears ET302 to the HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-15
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Depart RW07R, ASOLE 1A Departure, initially maintain 14,000ft 10 squawk 2414
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Have crew level Off at 14000ft
45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Approach to stall recoveries:
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, flight Idle
Return to HAAB with company advise
ATIS info “C” – Z 20010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/19 Q1025 (instructor sets zero/zero)
LOC Z Approach 25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach (Allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition RW 25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “D” – Z 02010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1026
Flap 5 Takeoff (Practice Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
Repeat(2X) Engine Failure after V1
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Perform engine out escape route and ILS Approach
Single engine ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
Reposition 6NM final Repeat SE ILS approach and manual landings
-BREAK-
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-16
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “B” – Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1025
ATC Clears ET302 to the HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R, ASOLE 1A Departure, initially maintain FL160 10 squawk 2414
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Have crew level Off at FL160
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Approach to stall recoveries:
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, flight Idle
Return to HAAB with company advise
ATIS info “C” – Z 20010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/19
Q1025 (instructor sets zero/zero)
LOC Z Approach 25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach (Allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “D” – Z 02010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1026
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Perform engine out escape route
Complete single engine ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-17
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Reposition 6NM final Repeat SE ILS approach and manual landings
After landing checklist
Shut down and secure
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete LOC Approach and Missed Approach
Complete engine out escape maneuver
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and non-Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-18
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.5. Lesson plan 7.5 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.5 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Stick shaker Recoveries
6. VOR, RNAV Approaches
7. Engine failure after V1
8. Both engine and single engine missed approaches
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and
procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
To perform steep turns
To practice approach to stall recoveries
To perform RNAV approach and missed approach
To perform engine failure after V1
To perform single engine approach and missed approach
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-19
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hour)
Ask the students if they have any questions from previous items
Review Steep Turns
Review stall recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review Stall Recoveries High Altitude
Review RNAV approach RW25L
Review Engine Failure after V1 procedures
Review single engine Missed Approach
Discus CRM/TEM on the above maneuvers
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW25L HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 11.0
GTOW 67.8
CG 18.3
Stab Trim 5.15
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “C” – Z 26010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1026
ATC Clears ET306 to the HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, NIDEG 1B Departure; initially FL160 after departure, squawk 2412
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Manual flight have crew level off at 14000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-20
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Approach to stall recoveries:
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, flight Idle
Reposition to FL310
High Altitude Stall Recovery
(A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps up, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle)
Reposition to 14000ft
Return to HAAB for RNAV approach RW25L
ATIS info “D” – Z 20010KTS 1SM BR 003BKN 20/19 Q1026
RNAV approach RW25L and manual landings
Reposition 10NM Low Altitude Stall Recovery on the ILS Approach RW25L
(A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps30, Thrust flight Idle)
Complete Missed Approach
Reposition 6NM final for visual approach and manual landings
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “E” – Z 20010KTS 5SM BR 007BKN 20/14 Q1025
Engine failure After V1 (reposition to runway after QRH)
SE ILS RW25L approach and missed approach
SE ILS approach and manual landings
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “C” – Z 201010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1026
ATIS info “C” – Z 26010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 Q1026
ATC Clears ET306 to the HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, NIDEG 1B Departure; initially FL160 after departure, squawk 2412
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-21
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Manual flight have crew level off at 14000ft.
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Approach to stall recoveries:
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, flight Idle
Reposition to FL310
High Altitude Stall Recovery
(A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps up, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle)
Reposition to 14000ft
Return to HAAB for RNAV approach RW25L
ATIS info “D” – Z 20010KTS 1SM BR 003BKN 20/19 Q1026
RNAV approach RW25L and manual landings
Reposition 10NM Low Altitude Stall Recovery on the ILS Approach RW25L
(A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps30, Thrust flight Idle)
Complete Missed Approach
Reposition 6NM final for visual approach and manual landings
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “E” – Z 20010KTS 5SM BR 007BKN 20/14 Q1025
Engine failure After V1 (reposition to runway after QRH)
SE ILS RW25L approach and missed approach
SE ILS approach and manual landings
After landing, shut down and secure checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-22
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP to accomplish normal and non-normal procedures
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-23
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.6. Lesson plan 7.6 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.6 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Unusual Attitudes
6. Circling Approaches
7. Engine failure after V1 and Relight
8. Rejected Takeoff
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and
procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full and reduced automation.
To practice high altitude approach to stall recoveries
To practice nose High/Low unusual attitude recoveries
To perform Engine failure after V1 and Engine Inflight Start
To practice Rejected Take off maneuvers
1. References
2. B-737NG FCOM
3. B-737NG FCTM
4. ET B737 SOP
5. ET B-737NG QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-24
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review High altitude Approach to stall recoveries (ground contact not a factor)
Review Engine failure after V1
Discuss Engine-Inflight Start (Relight)
Discuss Upset recoveries Nose high and Nose low
Discuss Circling Approaches and missed approaches
Discuss Rejected Take off
Discuss CRM/TEM on the above maneuvers
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW25L HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 47.0
Fuel 10.0
GTOW 57.0
CG 21
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “D” – Z 31010KTS 6SM 024BKN 28/17 Q1025
ATC Clears ET344 to HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, expect FL250 After departure, squawk 2124
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Engine Quick Start
Rejected Takeoff (Engine Flameout V1 minus 15 kts)(REPEAT AS NEEDED)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Clear the crew via the Flight Plan climb and intermediate level off FL 150
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-25
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
AUTO FAIL (Extinguishes when ALTN mode selected via QRH)
Reposition FL 310
High Altitude Approach to stall recoveries:
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, SpeedBrakes Retracted, Idle thrust
Unusual Attitude Recoveries
• Nose High
• Nose Low
Reposition FL150
Company advised to Return to HAAB
ATIS info “E” – Z 09010KTS CAVOK 28/17 Q1025
RNAV Approach RW25L circling RW07R and Manual Landing/Missed approach
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “F” – Z 31010 KTS 5SM 010BKN 27/20 Q1026
Normal Flap 5 takeoff (Autopilot OFF, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Engine Flameout after V1 (relights via QRH)
Maintenance request return to HAAB to check engine
ATIS info “F” – Z 34010KTS 5SM 010BKN 27/20 Q1026
ILS Y Approach RW25L (Autopilot OFF, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Manual landings
Reposition 6NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L and manual Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “D” – Z 31010KTS 6SM 024BKN 28/17 Q1025
ATC Clears ET344 to HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, expect FL250 After departure, squawk 2124
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-26
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Engine Quick Start
Rejected Takeoff (Engine Flameout V1 minus 10 kts)(REPEAT AS NEEDED)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Clear the crew via the Flight Plan climb and intermediate level off FL 150
AUTO FAIL (Extinguishes when ALTN mode selected VIA QRH)
Reposition FL 310
High Altitude Approach to stall recoveries:
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, SpeedBrakes Retracted , Idle Thrust
Reposition FL 310
Unusual Attitude Recoveries
• Nose High
• Nose Low
Reposition FL150
Company advised to Return to HAAB
ATIS info “E” – Z 09010KTS CAVOK 28/17 Q1025
LOC Z RW25L circling RW07R and Manual Landing/Missed approach
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “F” – Z 31010 KTS 5SM 010BKN 27/20 Q1026
Normal Flap 5 takeoff (Autopilot OFF, Auto Throttle ON, Flight Director ON)
Engine Flameout after V1 (Relights via QRH)
Maintenance request return to HAAB to check engine
ATIS info “F” – Z 34010KTS 5SM 010BKN 27/20 Q1026
RNAV Approach RW25L (Autopilot OFF, Auto Throttle OFF, Flight Director ON)
Manual landings
Reposition 6NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L and manual Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-27
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate High altitude approach to stall recoveries
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP for non-normal situations
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-28
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.7. Lesson plan 7.7 – B737 NG FTD LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.7 LOFT B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Non-ILS Approach
6. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to Line Oriented Flight Training operations and
procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being available and demonstrate SOP at all
phases of the flight.
To practice communications and radio procedures while crossing FIRs
To practice departure and arrival procedures at different airports
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Taxi Procedures of HAAB
Review Taxi Procedures of HDMA
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-29
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Review Departure Procedures (SIDs)for both airports
Review Routings (HAAB-HDAM-HAAB)
Discuss communications and radio procedures while crossing FIRs
Review Arrival Procedures (STARS and approach plates) for both airports
Review CRM/TEM attributes workload management and situational awareness
Review Normal landing Procedures
Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7 HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.2
Fuel 11.4
GTOW 62.6
CG 19.2
Stab Trim 5.37
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “H” – Z 160/15KTS 3SM BR 006OVC 16/14 Q1025
IFR Approach ILS 25L Departures RW25L
ATC Clears ET364 to HDAM, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, NIDEG 1B Departure, expect FL230
After departure, squawk 2112
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Clear ET 364 via Flight Planned Route
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-30
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
When level at FL310,
<Pack Fail>
HDAM ATIS info “B” – Z 00010KTS CAVOK 30/14 Q1014
VOR Approach RW09 & Land
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Taxi to Ramp
After landing/Shutdown
Maintenance Clears Fault
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Have crew enter Flight Plan HDAM-HAAB (Same weights as first leg)
ATIS info “C” – Z 00010KTS CAVOK 32/18 Q1014
VOR Approach 09 Departures RW09
ATC Clears ET307 to Addis Ababa Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW09, initially FL240 expect higher level10 Minutes after departure, Squawk 3114
ET307 Cleared Taxi short RW09
Before Takeoff Procedure and Checklist
Line-up Runway 09
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Clear ET 345 via Flight Planned Route
When level at FL350,
Cabin Temperature Hot
ATIS info “J” – Z 20015KTS 3SM BR 007OVC 17/14 Q1025
IFR Approach LOC 25L Departures RW25L
LOC Approach RW25L & Manual landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Taxi to Ramp
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-31
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power down Procedures and checklists
REMAINING TIME PRACTICE MANUAL VISUAL APPROCH AND LANDINGS AT BOTH AIRPORTS
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete departure and arrival procedures at both Airports
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP through all phases of the flight
Demonstrate proper communication and radio procedures
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-32
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Lesson plan 7.8 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.8 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal flight procedure
2. Flight Instruments Malfunctions
3. RNAV Approaches
4. Single Engine Approaches and Missed Approaches
5. Engine Fire/Failure after V1
6. Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and
procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full and reduced automation.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Engine Failure after V1 and engine in flight start
Review Steep Turn/Stall Recoveries
Review circling approaches
Review Flight Instruments Malfunctions and QRH usage
Discuss Engine Fire after V1
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-33
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Review Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
Discuss CRM/TEM attributes embedded on the above briefings
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW25L HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 47
Fuel 10
GTOW 57
CG 19.2
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “F” – Z 16010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 Q1025
ATC Clears ET306 to Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, FL 150
After departure, squawk 2223
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Engine Quick Start
Engine Failure after V1, (relight via QRH)
(Autopilot ON, Auto Throttle, flight Director ON)
Have crew Level Off at 14000ft.
Display Panel control 1 fail (normalize after QRH)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, flight Idle
Return HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-34
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
ATIS info “G” – Z 070/10KTS 6SM BR SKC 18/15 Q1025
LOC Approach RW25L Circling 07R
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Complete Missed Approach
Reposition ILS final RW25L
Approach to stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, flight Idle
REPOSITION final after recovery and perform ILS RW25L Manual landings
ATIS info “G” –Z 20010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 Q1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (FIRE after V1, before 50ft )
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition final after ENGINE FIRE QRH completed
ATIS info “H” – Z 16010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 Q1025
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot flight Director ON)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Flap 5 Takeoff ENGINE FIRE 10KTS BEFORE V1
Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “G” – Z 16010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 Q1025
ATC Clears ET306 to Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R, ASOLE 1B Departure, FL 150 After departure, squawk 2223
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Engine Failure after V1, (relight via QRH)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-35
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
(Autopilot ON, Auto Throttle, flight Director ON)
Have crew Level Off at 14000ft.
Display Panel control 1 fail (normalize after QRH)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, flight Idle
Return HAAB
ATIS info “G” – Z 160/10KTS 6SM BR SKC 18/15 Q1025
LOC Approach RW25L Circling 07R
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Complete Missed Approach
Reposition ILS final RW25L
Approach to stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, flight Idle
REPOSITION final after recovery and perform ILS RW25L Manual landings
ATIS info “G” –Z 20010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 Q1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (FIRE after V1, before 50ft )
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition final after ENGINE FIRE QRH completed
ATIS info “H” – Z 16010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 Q1025
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot flight Director ON)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Flap 5 Takeoff ENGINE FIRE 10KTS BEFORE V1
Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-36
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH
Demonstrate required level of proficiency on engine failure after V1
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-37
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.9. Lesson plan 7.9 – B737 NG FTD (Progress Check)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.9 Progress Check B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start malfunctions
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Hydraulic/Electric Malfunctions
6. RNAV and Circling Approaches
7. Single Engine Approaches and Missed Approaches
8. Engine fire on Missed Approach
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to check the progress of the student demonstrating the advanced flying
operations and procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full and reduced automation.
To complete Steep Turn/Stall Recoveries to an acceptable standard
To Demonstrate engine fire/failure after V1 to an acceptable standard
To Demonstrate Circling approach to an acceptable standard
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP for normal and non-normal procedures
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-38
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Give flight plan HAAB-HKJK
Review Engine Fire, after V1
Review Missed Approaches with Engine Fire
Review Engine failure after V1 before 50ft AGL
Review Hydraulic Malfunctions
Review upset recoveries (UPRT)
Review RNAV approach 25L circling RW07R
Review Steep Turn/Stall Recoveries
Review Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
Discuss CRM/TEM attributes on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW07R HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.2
Fuel 11.4
GTOW 62.6
CG 19.2
Stab Trim 5.37
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “G” – Z 16010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 Q1025
ATC Clears ET302 to Jomo Kenyatta Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R, SHALA 1A Departure, initially FL160 After departure, squawk 2223
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start malfunctions (HOT start)
Maintenance fixes the problem
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-39
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Normal start both engines
Taxi Runway 07R
Engine Failure after V1 (relight via QRH)
(Autopilot on, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level Off at FL160
Hydraulic Pump Overheat (normalize after QRH)
Steep turn 45 degree bank turn in both directions through 1800
Approach to Stall Recoveries
• Clean: A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• Turning: A/P Engaged, Gear up, Flaps 5, turning , Thrust Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” – Z 16010KTS 5SM BR 027SCT 18/15 Q1025
RNAV Approach RW25L, circle RW07R
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach with Engine fire when Gear Up
Clear to Hold ADS VOR
ATIS info “H” –Z 29010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 Q1025
Clear crew for Approach directly from Hold when crew ready
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, autopilot OFF, Flight director ON)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “I” – Z 16010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 Q1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft –no relight)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition final Engine Failure QRH completed
Single engine visual approach and landing
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-40
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “G” – Z 01010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 Q1026
ATC Clears ET302 to Jomo Kenyatta Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW07R, SHALA 1A Departure, 14,000ft after departure, Squawk 2423
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Engine Failure after V1, (relight via QRH)
(Autopilot ON, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level Off at 14000ft.
Hydraulic pump Low Pressure (normalize after QRH)
Steep turn 45 degree bank turn in both directions through 1800
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, thrust Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, turning, thrust Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” – Z 16010KTS 3SM BR 024BKN 18/15 Q1025
RNAV Approach RW25L Circle RW07R
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach with Engine fire when Gear up
Clear to Hold ADS VOR
ATIS info “H” – Z 20010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 Q1025
Clear crew for Approach directly from Hold when crew ready
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Reposition RW07R (Original Aircraft Weight)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-41
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
ATIS info “I” – Z 160010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 Q1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft-no relight)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Reposition final single ILS approach after QRH completed
Single ILS approach and manual landing
Rejected Take off with Passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Complete steep turns and Approach to stall recoveries
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP for normal and non-normal procedures
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM/TEM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-42
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.10. Lesson plan 7.10 – B737 NG FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.10 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Flight control Malfunctions
6. VOR, RNAV Approaches
7. Circling Approaches and Missed Approaches
8. Engine failure after V1 and engine out escape routes
9. Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to integrate selected normal and non-normal through Line Oriented Flight
Training operations and procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being available.
Practice engine out escape route HDAM
Practice LOFT scenarios
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-43
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM, Calculate Takeoff and Landing performance
Review Taxi & Departure Procedures of HAAB/HADAM
Review Engine out escape routes of HAAB/HDAM
Review TCAS
Review Routings (HAAB-HDAM-HAAB)
Review Engine Failure, after V1 and Engine Inflight start
Review circling approaches and Missed Approaches
Review Flight Control malfunctions
Review Icing conditions (Engine and Wing Anti-Ice)
Review CRM/TEM attributes
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, surface condition WET, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 53.0
Fuel 11.8
GTOW 64.8
CG 13.1
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “H” – Z 160/15KTS 3SM BR 006OVC –RA 9/4 Q1025
Aircraft at the Gate
ATC Clears ET306 to HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R, ASOLE 1A Departure, initially FL190 After departure, squawk 2423
Normal Engine Start and taxi Hold short A
Line-up Runway 07R
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-44
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Engine Failure after V1, Escape route
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Instructor gives weather below minima
Crew elects to continue HDAM
Climbing to engine out MAX ALT and speed, Accomplish Engine inflight start via the QRH
Accomplish FUEL IMABL after successful Inflight Engine start
Continue Climb and level off at FL310
TCAS Event
SPEED BRAKE DO NOT ARM
HDAM ATIS info “G” – Z 27010KTS 7SM 030BKN 270C Q1016 MB
VOR Approach 09 circling RW27
Complete Missed approach
Reposition Final ILS RW27
Manual landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Taxi to Ramp
After landing/Shutdown
Maintenance Clears Fault
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Have crew enter Flight Plan HDAM-HAAB (Same weights as first leg)
ATIS info “C” – Z 27010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 26/18 Q1014
ILS Approach 27 Departures RW27
ATC Clears ET307 to Addis Ababa Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW27,LAKBE 2W initially FL100 expect FL320 10 Minutes after departure, Squawk 4114
ET307 Cleared Taxi short RW27
Engine Failure after V1, Flap 5 Takeoff, Escape route (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-45
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Advise crew HDAM airport unavailable while completing the QRH
Crew elects to Continue HAAB
Restart Failed engine via QRH
Accomplish FUEL IMABL after successful Inflight Engine start
Continue Climb and level off at FL320
TCAS Event
YAW DAMPER (Reset Via QRH)
Maintenance request return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” – Z 09010KTS 5SM 028BKN 17/15 Q1025
LOC Approach RW25L CIRCLING 07R (Autopilot OFF, Auto Throttle, Flight Director ON)
Complete approach and Missed approach
Reposition 6NM final RW07R visual approach
CARGO FIRE ON Final
Manual Landing and Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Integrate normal and non-normal procedures through LOFT
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-46
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.11. Lesson plan 7.11 – B737 NG FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.11 LOFT & Multi-crew Instruments B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal flight procedures
2. Engine Start Malfunction
3. Engine failure after V1 before 50ft
4. Steep turn and Approach to stall recoveries
5. Single engine approach and Missed Approach
6. Circling approach and Missed Approach
7. Rejected takeoff and passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to the student to demonstrating the advanced flying operations and
procedures of the B-737NG
The lesson will enable trainees to be proficient on previously exercised non-normal maneuvers
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being available.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM and calculate performance for takeoff and Landing
Review Engine start malfunctions
Review steep turn and Approach to stall Recoveries
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-47
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Review Engine Failure after V1
Review Single engine approaches and Missed approaches
Review RTO and Passenger Evacuation
Review CRM/TEM attributes
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 11.0
GTOW 67.8
CG 12.9
Stab Trim 5.20
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “I” – Z 160/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 Q1025
IFR Approach VOR 25L Departures RW25L
ATC Clears ET306 to HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, cleared FL320 After departure, squawk 2412
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start malfunction (START VALVE OPEN)
Both Engines Quick start after QRH completed
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Clear ET 302 via Flight Planned Route
Intermediate level off Climbing through 15,000ft
Steep turn 45 degree bank turn in both directions through 1800
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-48
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Approach to Stall Recoveries
• Clean: A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• Turning: A/P Engaged, Gear up, Flaps 5, turning , Thrust Idle
Maintenance Requests return to HAAB
ATIS info “I” – Z 200/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 Q1025
Approach RNAV Z 25L circling 07R
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Complete approach and manual landings
Reposition to RW25L (Systems all restored, original aircraft weights)
ATIS info “J” – Z 160/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 Q1026 ILS 25L Departures RW25L
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Failure after V1
Complete Engine out escape Route
ATIS info “K” – Z 200/15KTS 5SM BR 010 OVC 20/14 Q1026
Complete single engine approach and missed approach
Reposition final SE ILS approach and manual landings
Reposition to RW25L (Systems all restored, original aircraft weights)
ATIS info “J” – Z 160/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 Q1026 ILS 25L Departures RW25L
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Fire before V1
Rejected takeoff and passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “I” – Z 160/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 Q1025 Departures RW25L
ATC Clears ET306 to HDAM Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, cleared FL320 After departure, squawk 2412
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start malfunction(HUNG START)
Both Engines Quick start after QRH completed
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-49
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Clear ET 302 via Flight Planned Route
Intermediate level off Climbing through 15,000ft
Steep turn 45 degree bank turn in both directions through 1800
Approach to Stall Recoveries
• Clean: A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, flight Idle
• Turning: A/P Engaged, Gear up, Flaps 5, turning , Thrust Idle
Maintenance Requests return to HAAB
ATIS info “I” – Z 200/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 Q1025
Approach LOC Z 25L circling 07R
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Complete approach and manual landings
Reposition to RW25L (Systems all restored, original aircraft weights)
ATIS info “J” – Z 160/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 Q1026 ILS 25L Departures RW25L
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Failure after V1
ATIS info “K” – Z 200/15KTS 5SM BR 010 OVC 20/14 Q1026
Complete single engine approach and missed approach
Reposition final SE ILS approach and manual landings
Reposition to RW25L (Systems all restored, original aircraft weights)
ATIS info “J” – Z 160/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 Q1026 ILS 25L Departures RW25L
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Fire before V1
Rejected takeoff and passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-50
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Complete circling Approach and Missed Approach to the standard
Complete engine failure after V1 to the standard
Complete single engine Approach and Missed Approach
Complete steep turns and approach to stalls recoveries
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-51
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
7.12. Lesson plan 7.12 – B737 NG FTD-Validation Flight
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.12 Validation Check B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start malfunctions
3. Engine Start Malfunction
4. Engine failure after V1 before 50ft
5. Steep turn and Approach to stall recoveries
6. Single engine approach and Missed Approach
7. Circling approach and Missed Approach
8. Evacuation
II. Objectives
This scenario is Validation Flight to assess trainee’s competencies while performing selected non-
normal maneuvers and procedures of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being available.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
ATIS info “H” – Z 200/15KTS 5SM BR 010 OVC 20/14 Q1026
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM, Weight and balance Data
Trainees calculate performance for takeoff and Landing and will be verified by instructor
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-52
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Oral system exam on selected non-normal (Electrical or Bleed air system)
Discuss Approach to stall Recovery
Review Engine Failure after V1
Review Single engine approaches and Missed approaches
Review RTO and Passenger Evacuation
Review CRM/TEM attributes on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 11.0
GTOW 67.8
CG 19.0
VI. Lesson Plan
Note Sequence of events may vary as necessary by the examiner
ATIS info “H” – Z 200/15KTS 5SM BR 010 OVC 20/14 Q1026
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start malfunctions (selected from the stage)
Taxi and line up procedures
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff with 10kts cross wind (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Climb level off FL160
Selected Malfunction requiring QRH (Restore after QRH)
45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Approach to Stall Recoveries (Clean and turning/landing)
Circling approach manual Landing/Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-53
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG)
Engine Failure after V1
Single Engine ILS Approach, Missed Approach & Manual Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
SWITCH SEATS REPEAT VALIDATION
TRAINEES NEEDS TO BE PROFICIENT BOTH ON PF & PM DUTIES
Note Sequence of events may vary as necessary
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Satisfactorily Complete steep turn and approach to stall recoveries
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Satisfactorily Complete circling Approach and Missed Approach
Satisfactorily Complete Engine failure after V1
Satisfactorily Complete Single Engine approach and missed approach
Demonstrate satisfactory performance on all applicable pilot competencies on each of the tasks
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment by applying CRM attributes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (B-737NG ) 7-54
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.A FLIGHT TRAINING (B-737 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 8A
Flight Time
Lesson Total
Description Equip PF PNF
No.
FTD FTD
8.1 Multi Crew Instruments B737 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
8.2 Multi Crew Instruments B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
8.3 Multi-crew Instruments B737 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
8.4 Approaches & Maneuvers B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.5 LOFT B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.6 Approaches & Maneuvers B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.7 LOFT B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.8 Approaches & Maneuvers B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.9 LOFT B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.10 Approaches & Maneuvers B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.11 LOFT B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.12 LOFT B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.13 LOFT Validation B737 FTD 2.0 2.0
Stage 8A Total Hours (Excluding CPT and VPT) 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-8A) 316.5
Table 8-1: Summary of Training Stage 8A Summary – B737 Type Rating
Note: The CPT and VPT sessions will not be graded and won’t be added to the total time.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-1
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Overview of Stage 8 Lessons
Stage 8:
10 FTD Lessons (8A)
10 SIM Lessons (8B)
Stage 8A:
Addis is to be utilized as the home airport for these lessons.
FTD 1- 3: Review of approaches and maneuvers
FTD: 5, 7, 9, 11 and 12 LOFTs to Nairobi and Djibouti scenarios with selected malfunction, adverse Weather,
and thunderstorm avoidance.
FTD 4, 6, 8 and 10 Review of approaches and maneuvers with more QRH work
FTD 13: LOFT Validation with selected scenario and event.
Stage 8B:
The training outlined at this stage requires the use of a Level C or D B737 full flight simulator (FFS). The
B737MAX FFS Simulator can be used for the stage, provided the required ground differences course is
completed i.e., both the differences and the return to service ground computer-based training is
completed.
SIM 1-8: practice maneuvers and approaches and LOFT scenarios with motion.
SIM 9: Prep for Validation
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-2
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
SIM 10: Validation
This stage should enable trainees to build all the commercial pilot competencies and prepare them for
Stage 9 which is the type rated training, and trainees should have no issues on type rating.
8.1. Lesson plan 8.1 – B737 NG Cockpit Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.1 Multi-crew Instruments B-737NG CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Captain/First Officer Duties
2. Checklist Protocol
3. Normal and Non-Normal Checklist usage
4. Normal procedures
5. Wet and contaminated surface condition
6. ILS approach procedures
7. RNAV approach procedures
8. Missed approach procedures
II. Objectives
To review the Flows and Callouts for the Pre-flight, Engine Start, Takeoff, Climb, Cruise, Approach,
Landing, and Shutdown
To review normal and non-normal checklist protocols
To understand effect of surface condition on aircraft performance
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-3
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
To practice speed brake usage and descent planning
To perform Maximum Rate Climb, Maximum Angle Climb and Economy climb speed
To perform ILS, Non-ILS approach and missed approach
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with GPU available, but not supplying power to the aircraft
Have students do performance calculations
Discuss effect of surface condition on aircraft performance (Both on takeoff and landing)
The instructor should ask a question about flight control system or flight control switches to ensure
their understanding
Discuss Maximum Rate Climb, Maximum Angle Climb and Economy climb speed
Discuss Flight control malfunction (YAW DAMPER disengaged and SPEED TRIM FAIL)
Discuss Descent planning and Speed brake usage
Review RNAV approach and Missed Approach
Discuss threat and error management on the above events
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS RW25L OVC050 -RA 9/5 QNH1025
Electrical Power Up
Preliminary Pre-flight Procedure
Pre-flight Procedure
Call “PRE-FLIGHT CHECKLIST.”
Before Engine Start Procedure
Call Before Start Checklist
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-4
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Pushback and Engine Start Procedure
Call Before Taxi Checklist
Do the Before Taxi Checklist on Captain’s command
Normal Flaps 5 Takeoff observe effect of WET surface condition on V speeds
While Climbing practice Maximum Rate Climb, Maximum Angle Climb and Economy climb speed
Manual flying practice at speed 250kts climbing and descending turns without using Flight director
YAW DAMPER disengaged or SPEED TRIM FAIL
After QRH Company advise to return back
ATIS info “C” – Z 180/10KTS 3KMS RWY 25L OVC050 -RA 10/5 QNH1025
Descent planning and speed brake usage
RNAV Approach and Missed approach truck on the runway
Reposition final for cross wind approach and Landing
Shutdown
Secure
TAKE A BREAK THEN REPEAT SAME WITH THE STUDENTS’ SWITCHING SEATS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-5
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.2. Lesson plan 8.2 – B737 NG Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.2 Multi Crew Instruments B-737NG VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal Procedures
2. QRH Procedures (Engine Start; Tailpipe Fire; Gear Malfunctions and WHEEL WELL FIRE)
3. Normal Flight Procedures
4. Shutdown Procedures
II. Objectives
This scenario is primarily designed to let the student practice QRH Memory Actions and Procedures
for various systems in the aircraft
To understand effect of deferred items on aircraft performance
To practice Engine, Start malfunctions
To practice Gear Malfunctions, WHEEL WELL FIRE and
To practice smoke procedures
To enable trainees, understand inflight performance with gear extended
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with APU Power supplying the aircraft and
Aircraft remark ANTISKID INOP.
Review Engine Start malfunctions Tail pipe fire
Discuss ANTISKID INOP (Refer DDG) and performance effect
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-6
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Discuss Gear Malfunctions (Gear Lever will not move Up after Takeoff)
WHEEL WELL FIRE and performance with gear extended (FCTM Ch. 8, QRH Ch. PI)
Discuss smoke, fire fume procedures and Evacuation
Discuss threat and error management on the above events
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “E” – Z 16010KTS 3KMS RW25L OVC050 -RA 9/5 QNH1025
Have them begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
#2 Engine Start Tailpipe Fire
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the QRH)
Normal Engine Start
After Start procedures
Taxi
Line Up
Takeoff
Gear Lever will not move Up after Takeoff (Failure of the landing gear lever lock solenoid)
Clear malfunction after QRH
During Climb enter speed and altitude restriction on CDU climb page
Lavatory Smoke
Return HAAB ATIS info “G” – Z 19010KTS 3KMS RW25L BKN050 -RA 9/5 QNH1025
Descent and approach
ILS Approach and manual Landing
Evacuation
Quick setup for takeoff
Takeoff
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-7
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Climb
Wheel Well Fire and Fire persists (Fire persists after QRH)
Return HAAB
Descent With Gear Extended
LOC Approach and landing
Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
REPEAT SAME
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate satisfactory knowledge on the Aircraft Systems
Understand and demonstrate effect of QRH non-normal on performance
Able to use QRH performance inflight manual and onboard performance tool to calculate
performances
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-8
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.3. Lesson plan 8.3 – B737 NG Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.3 Multi-crew Instruments B-737NG VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Normal Flight Procedures
3. QRH Procedures (Pressurization System, Air Faults; Engine start Malfunctions; Flight Instrument/Display
Faults)
4. Emergency descents and depressurization escape routes
5. Shutdown Procedures
II. Objectives
This scenario is primarily designed to let the student practice Engine System, Air System,
Pressurization and Flight Instrument/Display Malfunctions, including QRH usage
To handle Flight Instrument/Display Malfunctions
To practice Pressurization malfunctions and emergency descent
To complete RNAV approach and manual landings
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with GPU Power supplying the aircraft.
Provide HAAB-HDAM computer flight plan.
Discuss engine start malfunctions and aborted engine starts
Discuss flight Instrument/Display Faults (Display Failure and DISPLAY SOURCE)
Discuss pressurization malfunction and Decompression (Slow vs. Rapid decompression)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-9
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Discuss Emergency descent procedures and Escape routes
Discuss threat and mitigation plan on the above events
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “H” – Z 160/10KTS 3KMS- RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1025
Begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
Abnormal Engine Start- Start Valve remains Open
Malfunction cleared by instructor after QRH and perform Quick starts
After Start
Taxi
Line Up
Takeoff
Climb passing 10,000ft AGL Climb ATC advise expedite climb
Display Failure (no automatic switching) (normalize after QRH)
DISPLAY SOURCE (normalize after QRH)
Cruise FL310
One man in the cockpit and start Slow Decompression
Emergency Descent and follow depressurization escape route
RNAV Approach
Manual Landing
Shut down
Secure
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Begin the flows from the Before Engine Start Procedures.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-10
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Aborted Engine Start #2 hung start
After Start
Taxi
Line Up
Takeoff
Climb FL310 expedite out of FL250
Display Failure (automatic switching occurs) (normalize after QRH)
DISPLAY SOURCE (normalize after QRH)
Cruise FL310
Rapid Decompression
Emergency descent
Descent
RNAV Approach
Land
Shut Down
SECURE
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the Air, Engine, Pressurization and Flight Instrument/Display Systems
Complete a flight with depressurization problems
Demonstrate satisfactory performance on RNAV approach and manual landings
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-11
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.4. Lesson Plan 8.4 - B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.4 Approaches & Maneuvers B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. QRH Procedures (Air Faults; Engine malfunctions; Flight Instrument/Display faults)
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Upset Prevention and Recovery training (UPRT)
7. Airspeed Unreliable
8. ILS Approach and Missed Approach (Full procedure)
9. RNAV Approach (Full Procedure)
10. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to Practice Approaches and maneuvers of the B-737NG.
To perform steep turns and approach to stall recoveries
To handle pack and fuel Abnormalities
To practice Airspeed Unreliable Non-normal
To complete approach and missed approach
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-12
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Have students do performance calculations
Review pack and fuel Abnormalities
Review MCP Procedures for Auto Throttle and Autopilot On
Review takeoff Flap 15 Procedures
Review Missed Approaches
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 20.8
GTOW 72.6
CG 13.1
Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS- RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, squawk 2114
Power UP/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Climb
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-13
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
PACK failure (normalize after QRH)
Steep turns and Approach to Stall recoveries
Level Off: Initial Conditions A/P – Engaged, Gear and flaps – Up, Speedbrakes – Extended, establish
normal descent, disconnect autothrottles, thrust Idle, Level Off
Turning Base: Initial Conditions A/P – Engaged Gear – Up, Flaps – 5, Speedbrakes – Retracted,
Establish flaps 5 maneuver speed
Slew FL250 Practice UPRT (Nose high, Nose low and bank more than 45 degrees)
Fuel imbalance and fuel leak suspected
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” – Z 16005 KTS 2KMS- BR 0038 BKN 12/6 QNH1025
Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach (full procedure)
ATIS info “B” –Z 16005KTS 2KMS-RW 003BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Full Procedure RNAV Approach RW07R and Land
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
ATIS info “C” – Z 16005 KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Airspeed Unreliable due blocked pilot on CAPT side Above 1000ft AGL
Complete Airspeed Unreliable NNC
Crew decide return and complete Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L
Manual Landing (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Shutdown
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-14
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, Squawk 1114
Aircraft Reposition Threshold Runway 25L
Normal Flap 15 takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight director ON)
Have Crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do
Step turns, Climbs/descents for practice
Approach to Stall recoveries Level Off and Turning Base
WING-BODY OVERHEAT (normalize after QRH)
Fuel imbalance and fuel leak is suspected
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” – Z 16005KTS 2KMS- RW 003BKN 22/20 QNH1024
Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach (full procedure)
ATIS info “B” – Z 16005KTS 2KMS RW07R 003BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Full Procedure RNAV Approach RW07R and manual Land
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
ATIS info “C” – Z 16005 KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Airspeed Unreliable due blocked pilot on CAPT side
Complete Airspeed Unreliable NNC
Crew decide quick turn back and complete Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L
Manual Landing (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Complete After Landing /shutdown /Secure/Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklists
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-15
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Complete an Approach and missed approach
Demonstrate comprehension to the SOP
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment and should manage non-normal
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-16
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.5. Lesson plan 8.5 – B737 NG FTD LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.5 LOFT B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb,
5. Cruise,
6. Descend,
7. Land
8. Shut down and secure
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to Practice Line oriented flight trainings on the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
The B737 SOP will be adhered throughput the flight
To practice icing procedures during various phases of the flight
To practice IFR communications on LOFT flights
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM, do performance calculations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-17
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Review Normal procedures in Lieu of LOFT scenarios
Review Airway, Approach charts of both airports
Review IFR communications in radar and non-radar environments
Discus on ATC Communication giving Estimates and position reports
Review abeam points and conditional way points
Review LOC approach RW27(JIB)/RW25L(ADD)
Review two engine Missed Approach
Ask the students if they have any questions
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 10.8
GTOW 62.6
CG 18.1
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “B” – Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 16/13 QNH 1025
ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain initially FL150, squawk 2412
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Climb initially FL250
ATC clears FL310 Final level
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-18
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Cruise procedures
Practice Communications (Estimates and position reports)
Decent preparations
HDAM Z 03009KTS 9999 FEW023 36/22 Q1003 ILS Approach RW27
ATC communications and handover to HDAM
Complete ILS approach RW27
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach (Allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
VOR Approach RW09 & Manual Landing
(Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition 7NM Final ILS RW27 (Original Aircraft Weight)
ILS Approach RW27 & Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Shut down and SECURE
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
HDAM Z 03009KTS 9999 FEW023 36/22 Q1003 ILS Approach RW27
ATC Clears ET327 to the HAAB Airport, via Flight plan route, initially FL120 Depart RW27, LAKBE 2W
Departure, Squawk 4300
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Taxi and hold short RW27 (Original Aircraft Weights)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Have crew level Off at FL120, TCAS event
Climb FL240, ATC communications and handover to Addis Center
Cruise FL320
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-19
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Cruise procedures
Practice Communications (Estimates and position reports)
ATIS info “D” – Z 18010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 16/13 QNH 1025
Decent preparations
Complete LOC Approach RW25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach (Allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
VOR Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition final RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual cross wind Landing
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After landing checklist
Shut down
Secure checklist
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-20
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.6. Lesson plan 8.6 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.6 Approaches & Maneuvers B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Steep Turns, Approach to stall Recoveries
7. Electrical malfunctions
8. Visual Traffic Pattern
9. Engine failure after V1
10. Single engine Approaches
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to Practice Approaches and maneuvers of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
To practice Steep Turns, Approach to stall Recoveries
To practice Engine failure after V1
To perform Electrical malfunctions
To practice Visual Traffic Pattern
III. References
5. B-737NG FCOM
6. B-737NG FCTM
7. ET B737 SOP
8. ET B-737NG QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-21
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Approach to Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review Electrical malfunctions (SOURCE OFF or DRIVE)
Discuss Visual Traffic Pattern FCTM 5, QRH MAN
Review Engine Failure after V1 before 50ft
Review single engine approach and Missed Approach
Discuss Flight pattern and effects of wind Pattern altitudes (normal) Timing, Aircraft configuration,
use of PAPI/ VASI, Inside/ outside scan turning to final Stabilized on final by 1000ft Flare and
touchdown
Discuss threat and error management on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 20.8
GTOW 72.6
CG 13.1
Stab Trim - 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “B” – Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH 1025
ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, squawk 1224
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Quick Engine Start by instructor
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-22
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Have crew level Off at 14,000ft
SOURCE OFF or DRIVE
45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Thrust Idle, Turn
• A/P Engaged, Gear up, Flaps up, Speed brake Extended, Thrust Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” – Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008 BKN 20/16 QNH 1025
Complete LOC Z Approach RW25L
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
LOC Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
(Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “D” – Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH 1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition Final after QRH completed
ATIS info “E” – Z 36010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH 1025
SE ILS Approach RW25L & Missed approach
Reposition final SE ILS Approach Manual Landing
(Auto Throttle & Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Reposition RW25L Original Aircraft Weight CAVOK
Practice Visual Traffic Pattern and touch and go (FCTM 5, QRH MAN)
Flight pattern and effects of wind Pattern altitudes, Timing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-23
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Aircraft configuration, use of PAPI/ VASI
Inside/ outside scan turning to final Stabilized on final by 1000ft
Flare and touchdown
Shut down and secure
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
REPEAT SAME AFTER SWITCHING SEATS
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-24
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.7. Lesson plan 8.7 – B737 NG FTD LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.7 LOFT B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to Practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Discuss standard preflight fuel planning
Discuss engine start malfunctions
Discuss Weather Radar usage and weather Avoidance procedures
Discuss radio procedures and standard communications
Discuss ATC communications
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-25
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Discuss CRM and TEM issues
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 50.0
Fuel 7.0
GTOW 56.8
CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “C” – Z 30015KTS RVR400M 010BKN 20/20 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310 squawk 2112
Taxi RW25L
#2 Engine Start
Hung start
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the procedure)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Aircraft at Threshold RW 25L Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Tower switches ET326 to Departure 119.7
Climbing through FL 150 thunderstorm CB ahead
Navigate to clear weather ahead
Cruise FL310
When clear of weather clear direct Lakbe and report abeam Nideg
HDAM ATIS info “E” – Z 120010 KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012 ET call Djibouti Approach on
121.1
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-26
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Cleared VOR Approach RW09 and Manual Landing
Call Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land, wind 1200 at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp
HDAM ATIS info “E” – Z 25015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012
Original Aircraft Load and Weights
ATC Clears ET307 to the Bole international Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW27, LAKBE 1W Departure, Maintain FL120, Squawk 4330
Taxi RW27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Tower Switches ET307 to Departure 121.1
Climbing through FL060, re clear FL240ET326 to turn right HDG270 for traffic,
Thunderstorm ahead leaving FL150
Advise report position Lakbe
Resume on course, maintain FL320
HAAB ATIS info “M” – Z 30015KTS 3KMS 006BKN 19/16 QNH1025
ET call Bole Approach on 119.7
Vector, then Direct AB001,
Cleared RNAV (GPS) RW25L
Contact Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW25L, wind 300 at 15KTS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-27
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Demonstrate good communications and coordination
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
8.8. Lesson plan 8.8 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.8 Approaches & Maneuvers B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Malfunctions
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Wheel Well Fire
6. Circling Approaches
7. ILS Raw data approach and manual landing
8. Rejected Takeoff/Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-28
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
This scenario is designed to practice Advanced Flight Training of the B-737NG. This lesson will be
operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for the aircraft and
its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Discuss Tailpipe Fire
Discuss Wheel Well Fire and performance with gear down
Discuss ILS Raw data approach and manual landing
Review circling approaches
Discuss Rejected Takeoff and Passenger Evacuation
Discuss CRM and TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on get HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 47.0
Fuel 10.0
GTOW 57.0
CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “M” – Z 18015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH 1023
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-29
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310, squawk 2112
#1 Engine Start
Ground crew reports Tailpipe Fire (no cockpit Fire indication)
Restore after QRH procedure
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Tower Switches ET 306 to Departure 119.7
Wheel Well Fire
Crew Should elect quick return to HAAB
Approach vectors heading to IAF
HAAB ATIS info “O” – Z 16010KTS 10KMS 010 BKN 26/20 QNH1024 LOCZRW25L
Last minute RWY change LOC 25L Circle to land RW07R
Contact Tower 118.1
Manual Land RW07R, wind 160 at 10KTS
Reposition Long final 25L, Practice ILS Raw data manual landing with wind 160 at 05KTS
Reposition takeoff position for RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Rejected Takeoff due engine fire before V1
Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
HAAB ATIS info “C” – Z 16015KTS 1KM RW 110BKN 26/20
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310, squawk 2112
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-30
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
#1 Engine Start
Ground crew reports Tailpipe Fire (no cockpit Fire indication)
Restore after QRH procedure
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Tower Switches ET 306 to Departure 119.7
Wheel Well Fire
Crew Should elect to turn back HAAB
Approach gives heading to IAF
HAAB ATIS info “O” – Z 16025KTS 10KMS 010 BKN 26/20 QNH1020
LOC 25L Circle to land RW07R
Contact Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 160 at 15KTS
Reposition Long final 25L, Practice ILS Raw data manual landing with wind 160 at 05KTS
Reposition takeoff position for RW25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Rejected Takeoff due Engine fire before V1
Passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Demonstrate basic decision making
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise, and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-31
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.9. Lesson plan 8.9 – B737 NG FTD LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.9 LOFT B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Engine start malfunctions
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise,
6. Pressurization malfunctions
7. Descend, approach and Land
8. Shutdown
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B737 NG. This lesson will
be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for the aircraft
and its handling.
To practice LOFT with non-normal scenarios (Engine and pressurization malfunction)
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Discuss Engine start malfunctions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-32
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Discuss ENGINE OVERHEAT
Discuss emergency descent procedures
Discuss HAAB-HDAM Depressurization Escape route
Discuss CRM and TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 50.0
Fuel 7.5
GTOW 57.3
CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “M” – Z 10015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET302 to the Nairobi Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R, NIDEG 1A Departure, Maintain FL190, squawk 2413
Abnormal Engine Start valve remains Open
(Valve light extinguishes after affected Engine Bleed air switched Off)
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Tower switches ET362 to Departure 119.7
ET 362 cleared to maintain FL250 give TCAS Event
Climbing through FL250 instructor gradually adds turbulence to Moderate level by FL320
Increase turbulence to maximum Turbulence to enroute at FL370
Crew should elect lower level below FL320
Cruise FL310
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-33
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Descent preparations
Descending through FL250#1 ENGINE OVERHEAT (light remains illuminated)
Vector direct SW for VOR RW09
HDAM ATIS info “C” – Z 120010 KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012 ET call Djibouti Approach on
121.1
Single Engine VOR approach RW09
Call Tower 118.1; Cleared to land RW09, wind 100 degrees at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing procedure
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp, maintenance cleared the remark
HDAM ATIS info “E” – Z 120010 KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012
Original Aircraft Load and Weights
ATC Clears ET363 to the HAAB Airport, via Flight plan route
Depart RW09, LAKBE Departure, Maintain FL180, Squawk 4313
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Tower Switches ET302 to Departure 121.1
Climbing through FL150 re clear ET302 Direct LAKBE, On Course
After transfer ADD Cleared to maintain FL320
Climbing through FL250 re clear ET302 to maintain FL320
instructor gradually adds turbulence to Moderate level by FL320
Increase turbulence to maximum Turbulence to enroute at FL380
After level off at FL320 prior to ASOLE, Pressurization Malfunction
Emergency Descent
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-34
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Crew should follow the Depressurization Escape Route to HAAB
HAAB ATIS info “O” –Z 12015KTS 12KMS 110BKN 26/20 QNH1020 LOC 25L circle to land RW07R
After 25NM ADS clear for the approach
ET call Bole Approach on 119.7
Cleared LOC RW25L circle RW07R
Contact Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 120 at 15KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown and Secure Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in LOFT
Apply CRM attributes to enhance safety
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-35
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.10. Lesson plan 8.10 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.10 Approaches & Maneuvers B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Abnormal Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb,
5. EGPWS recognition and escape maneuvers
6. Cruise
7. Loss of Hydraulic System A, system B
8. Evacuation
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the students to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Have students do Takeoff Performance
Review Cross wind takeoff and landings
Review GPWS Recognition and maneuver
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-36
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Review upset recovery (Nose high and Nose low)
Discuss Loss of Hydraulic System A, system B
Review Cargo Fire
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.0
Fuel 7.5
GTOW 64.3
CG 18.3
Stab Trim 5.2
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” – Z 16015KTS 3KSM-RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, NIDEG 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2114
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start (#2 Hot) Fix after QRH
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Steep Turns
Loss Hydraulic System A
Company advised Return to HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-37
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
ATIS info “B” – Z 16015KTS 2KMS-RW 003BKN 22/20 QNH1023
Full procedure ILS Approach RW25L and Land
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Reposition takeoff point
ATIS info “B” – Z 16015KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1023
Flap 5 Takeoff
Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON
Departure Vectors towards terrain
Practice GPWS maneuver
Reposition FL250
Practice UPRT Nose High and Nose Low
ATIS info “B” – Z 16015KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1023
Cargo Fire on final
ILS approach RW25L
Manual Landing (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
After landing
After QRH fire unextinguishable
Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS- RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET327 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL350, Squawk 1114
Aircraft Reposition Threshold Runway 25L
Engine Start (START VALVE OPEN) Fix after QRH
Normal Engine Start
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-38
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Steep Turns
Slew FL250 Practice UPRT Nose High and Nose Low
Return to HAAB
Vector to toward terrain
Practice GPWS maneuver
ATIS info “B” – Z 16015KTS 2KMS-RW 003BKN 22/20 QNH1024
Vectored ILS Approach RW25L
Cargo Fire on Final
Landing and Evacuation
ATIS info “C” – Z 16015KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Flap 15 Takeoff
(Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Expedite climb and Level off FL250
After Level off Loss Hydraulic System B
Vector RNAV Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
After landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-39
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-40
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.11. Lesson plan 8.11 – B737 NG FTD LOFT (Progress Check)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.11 LOFT B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise,
5. Runaway Stabilizer
6. Descend, Land
7. VOR, LOC Approaches
8. Missed approach
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Approaches and maneuvers of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review takeoff alternate considerations
Enroute weather avoidance procedure
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-41
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Runaway Stabilizer
Discuss Manual Trimming technique
Review VOR/LOC approach and landing
Review Two Engine Missed Approach
Review CRM/TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 51.8
Fuel 10.8
GTOW 62.6
CG 21.0
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “F” – Z 30015KTS RVR400M 010BKN 20/20 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET 326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, squawk 2412
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
TS/Weather ahead request vector to avoid TS
Climb FL310
After level off Runaway Stabilizer
ATC Gives speed 250Kts, 310Kts Practice manual trimming
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-42
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
HDAM ATIS info “C” – Z 190010 KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012 ET call Djibouti Approach on
121.1
LOC approach RW27
Call Tower 118.1
Missed Approach truck on the runway manual trimming
Cleared direct NW for VOR RW09, wind 100 degrees at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
Aircraft on Threshold RW25L (original weights)
HDAM ATIS info “C” – Z 190010 KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012
ATC Clears ET 327 to the HAAB Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW27, LAKBE 2F Departure, Maintain FL100, squawk 4312
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Climb FL230
TS/Weather ahead request vector to avoid TS
Runaway Stabilizer
Manual trimming
ATIS info “M” – Z 18015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
Approach on 119.7
LOC approach RW25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-43
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Call Tower 118.1
Missed Approach truck on the runway, manual trimming
Cleared Direct waypoint for RNAV RW07R, wind 100 degrees at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown and Secure Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-44
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.12. Lesson plan 8.12 – B737 NG FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.12 LOFT B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
- Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start using external air source (APU INOP)
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Pressurization malfunction
6. Engine RNAV Approach (full procedures)
7. Shutdown
- Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the B-737NG.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
- References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
- Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Give flight plan HAAB-HKJK
Have students do takeoff and landing performance
Discuss Engine Start using external air source and cross bleed start (APU INOP)
Discuss Diversions
Rapid Decompression and Escape route
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-45
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Review RNAV Approach and Missed approach
Review visual circuit and Normal Landing Procedures
Discuss CRM/TEM on the above events
- Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU and external air source available, power OFF
APU INOPERATIVE
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 57.8
Fuel 10.0
GTOW 67.6
CG 21.1
- Lesson Plan
ATIS info “M” – Z 10015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET302 to the Nairobi Airport, via flight Plan Route,
Depart RW07R, SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL360, squawk 4113
Engine Start using external air source and cross bleed start
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Tower switches ET302 to Departure 119.7
ET 302 cleared to maintain FL180
TCAS Event
Continue climb FL360
Thunderstorm ahead
Cruise FL360
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-46
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Rapid Decompression
Escape Route
HAAB ATIS info “N” – Z 10010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 26/20 QNH1024 RNAV 07R
Call Tower 118.1
Cleared RNAV Approach RW07R via UTRIX
Missed approach
Cleared visual circuit and manual landing
Cleared to land RW07R, wind 100 degrees at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
-BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
HAAB ATIS info “O” – Z 12015KTS 12KMS 110BKN 26/20 QNH1024
Original Aircraft Load and Weights
ATC Clears ET302 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight plan route,
Depart RW07R, SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL380, Squawk 2413
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
Tower Switches ET302 to Departure 119.7
Climbing through FL160 re clear ET302 Direct SHALA, On Course
Cleared to maintain FL360
Climbing through FL150 weather ahead
After level off at FL320, TCAS Event
Re clear to FL360
Rapid Decompression
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-47
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
Escape Route
HAAB ATIS info “N” – Z 10010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 26/20 QNH1023 RNAV 07R
Call Tower 118.1
Cleared RNAV Approach RW07R via UTRIX
Missed approach
Cleared visual circuit and manual landing
Cleared to land RW07R, wind 100 degrees at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Complete an Approach Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a LOFT environment
Demonstrate all the applicable pilot competencies in each of the tasks
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-48
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
8.13. Lesson plan 8.13 – B737 NG FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.13 LOFT Validation Check B-737NG FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Enroute weather avoidance
6. Selected Non normal scenarios
7. Shutdown and Secure
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed for check trainees’ competencies on LOFT scenarios.
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
Selected scenarios will be given to check competencies
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
- Give flight Plan HAAB-HDAM
- Review Loss of system A, Runaway stab, wheel well fire, pressurization malfunction
- Discus CRM and threat error management
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-49
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on Gate HAAB
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion OFF
- ZFW 57.0
- Fuel 7.0
- GTOW 63.8
- CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “F” – Z 30015KTS RVR400M 010BKN 20/20 QNH1025
- HDAM ATIS info “X” – Z 25015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 20/18 QNH1012 LOC Approach RW27
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Climbing and intermediate level off perform TCAS RA
- After recovery, re clear to maintain FL310 level off at cruise,
- CB Weather ahead
- Perform Selected nonnormal (Hydraulic malfunction, Runaway stab, wheel well fire, electrical
malfunctions)
- Vector LCTR RW27 and Manual Landing
- Taxi to Ramp
- After Landing Checklist
- Shutdown
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp
- HDAM ATIS info “Z” – Z 25015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 20/18 QNH1012 Original
- Original Aircraft Load and weight (Maintenance has fixed remarks)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-50
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG )
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Depart RW27 LAKBE 1W Departure, Maintain FL120
- TCAS Event
- Cleared FL210, Resume on course, continue with ADDIS CENTER
- Level off FL320 at cruise
- CB Weather ahead
- Selected non normal: Loss of system A, Runaway stab, wheel well fire, Electrical malfunctions
- HAAB ATIS info “M” – Z 30015KTS 3KMS 006BKN 19/16 QNH1026
- RNAV (GPS) RW25L
- Manual to Land RW25L, wind 300 at 15KTS Taxi to Ramp
- After Landing Checklist
- Shutdown
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise, and Landing
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
- Operate effectively in a LOFT environment
- Demonstrate standard ATC communication skills
- Shall complete LOFT handling non-normal scenarios
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (B-737NG ) 8-51
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.B FLIGHT TRAINING (B-737 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 8B
Flight Time
Lesson Total
Description Equip PF PNF
No.
FTD FTD
8.14 Multi-crew Maneuvers & Approaches B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.15 Multi-crew Maneuvers & Approaches B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.16 Multi-crew Maneuvers & Approaches B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.17 LOFT B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.18 LOFT B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.19 Multi-crew Maneuvers & Approaches B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.20 LOFT B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.21 Multi-crew Maneuvers & Approaches B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.22 Preparation for validation B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.23 Validation B737 SIM 2.0 2.0
Stage 8B Total Hours 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-8B) 356.5
Table 8-2: Summary of Training Stage 8B Summary – B737 Type Rating
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-52
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.14. Lesson plan 8.14 – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.14 B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Approach to Stall Recoveries
6. LOC Approach and missed approach
7. Visual Traffic Pattern and manual landings
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to Practice Multi Crew Maneuvers and Approaches of the B-737NG with
full motion.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling with motion.
- Practice manual landings with motion
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-53
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
- Preflight on time and with geographic fault
- Review Steep Turns
- Review Approach to Stall Recoveries
- Review LOC approach and two engine Missed Approaches
- Review Visual Traffic Pattern and manual landings
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW 55.8
- Fuel 10.8
- GTOW 62.6
- CG 13.1
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “B” – Z 30015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL210, Squawk 2412
- Aircraft on Ramp
- Normal Engine Start
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Have crew Level off at 16,000 ft.
- degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
- Approach to Stall Recoveries
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-54
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, Flight Idle
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “C” – Z 30010 KTS 4KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH 1024
- LOC Approach 25L
- Missed Approach truck on the runway (allow full procedure)
- Reposition Final ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Repat Reposition Final ILS RW25L
- Practice manual landings
- Quickly setup for takeoff
- ATIS info “D” –Z 02010KTS CAVOK 20/6 QNH1025
- Clear for Visual traffic pattern
- Flap 5 Takeoff
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Perform the first pattern with FD and autothrottles ON
- Practice Visual Traffic Pattern
- Practice 3 touch and go landings
- Shut down and Secure
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- ATIS info “B” – Z 30015KTS 4KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1023
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
- Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310, Squawk 2112
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-55
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Aircraft at Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weights)
- Engine Quick Start
- Normal Flap 5 takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight director ON)
- Have Crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
- degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
- Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, Flight Idle
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “C” – Z 30010 KTS 3KMS BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH 1020
- LOC Approach RW25L
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Runway occupied and Missed Approach (allow full procedure)
- ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- Repat Reposition Final ILS RW25L
- Practice manual landings
- Quickly setup for takeoff
- ATIS info “D” –Z 02010KTS CAVOK 20/6 QNH1025
- Clear for Visual traffic pattern
- Flap 5 Takeoff
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Perform the first pattern with FD and autothrottles ON until base turn
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-56
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Practice Visual Traffic Pattern
- Practice 3 touch and go landings
- Shut down and Secure
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise, and Landing
- Complete an Approach and Missed approach
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-57
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.15. Lesson plan 8.15 – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.15 B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Quick Start
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Rapid Decompression /Emergency/ Descent
6. Engine failure after V1
7. Single Engine ILS Approaches and Missed Approaches
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to Practice Multi Crew Maneuvers and Approaches of the B-737NG with full
motion.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions.
- Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM and do performance calculations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-58
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Review Rapid Decompression /Emergency Descent
- Review Single Engine ILS RW25L
- Review advanced FMC Features (use Route 2 for various phases of flight, Abeam Points)
- Review Engine Failure after V1
- Review single engine Missed Approach
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
- Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW 51.8
- Fuel 20.8
- GTOW 72.6
- CG 13.1
- Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “B” – Z 20015KTS 1KM 003BKN 24/20 QNH1023
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Normal Preflight
- Engine start malfunction
- After QRH complete Engine Quick start
- ATC Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL370, Squawk 2412
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Allow Manual flight and climb until FL190
- ATC Clear FL310 advise expedite climb to level Off
- Slew to FL310 and one man in the cockpit
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-59
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Rapid Decompression
- Emergency Descent
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “E” – Z 30010KTS 15KM SKC 20/19 QNH 1023
- Full procedure ILS Approach 25L
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Manual landing
- After landing procedures
- Preflight and Quick set up for take off
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Practice Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft-no relight)
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Allow complete full procedure
- ATIS info “C” – Z 20010KTS 3KMS BR 008BKN 20/16 QNH 1023
- Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Missed approach
- Reposition final practice Single engine ILS approach and Manual Landing
- (Auto Throttle OFF, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- After landing Procedure and Shut down checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- ATIS info “B” – Z 20015KTS 1KM 003BKN 24/20 QNH 1023
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL150, Squawk 2412
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-60
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Allow manual flight until FL200
- Clear FL310 ATC advise expedite climb to level Off
- slew to FL310 and one man in the cockpit
- Rapid Decompression
- Emergency Descent
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “E” – Z 30010KTS 15KM SKC 20/19 QNH 1023
- Full procedure ILS Approach 25L
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Manual landing
- After landing procedures
- Quick set up for take off
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Practice Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft-no relight)
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Allow to complete full procedure
- ATIS info “C” – Z 20010KTS 3KMS BR 008BKN 20/16 QNH 1023
- Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Missed approach
- Reposition final after complete procedure
- Practice Single engine ILS approach and Manual Landing
- (Auto Throttle OFF, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- After landing Procedure and Shut down checklist
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-61
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
- Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-62
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.16. Lesson plan 8.16 – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.16 B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure and Engine Start by the instructor
2. Before Taxi and Takeoff
3. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
4. Windshear
5. UPRT
6. VOR, RNAV Circling Approaches
7. Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to Practice Approaches and maneuvers of the B-737NG.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
- Give flight plan HAAB-HKJK
- Review engine failure during climb
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-63
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Discuss wind shear avoidance and recovery
- Discuss nose high and nose low UPRT
- Review circling approach
- Review two engine Missed Approach from Circle Approach
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on gate HAAB
- Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW
- Fuel 10.0
- GTOW MAX LANDING WEIGHT
- CG 18.3
- Stab Trim 5.15
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “C” – Z 09015KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- ATC Clears ET302 to Jomo Kenyatta Airport, via Flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW07R, SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL320, Squawk 2412
- Taxi RW07R
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Climbing through FL 150, Engine Flameout (no damage)
- Engine Inflight Start
- Maintenance requests return HAAB after successful start
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “C” – Z 25010KTS 6KMS SKC 20/16 QNH 1025
- RNAV Approach RW07R via Kalty Circle RW25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-64
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Rejected Landing from 50ft (truck on runway)
- Clear visual Approach and Manual Landing
- Reposition RW07R (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “D” – Z 09005 KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/14 QNH 1024
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Practice light to moderate windshear during takeoff
- Reposition FL250 practice UPRT both nose high and nose low recoveries
- Reposition Final ILS RW25L and perform windshear on final
- After landing and shut down checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- ATIS info “C” – Z 09015KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/16 QNH1026
- ATC Clears ET302 to Jomo Kenyatta Airport, via Flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW07R, SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL320, Squawk 2412
- Taxi RW07R
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Climbing through FL 150, Engine Flameout (no damage)
- Engine Inflight Start
- Maintenance requests return HAAB after successful start
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “C” – Z 25010KTS 6KMS SKC 20/16 QNH 1025
- RNAV Approach RW07R via Kalty Circle RW25L
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Rejected Landing from 50ft (truck on runway)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-65
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Clear visual Approach and Manual Landing
- Reposition RW07R (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “D” – Z 09005 KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/14 QNH 1024
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Practice light to moderate windshear during takeoff
- Reposition FL250 practice UPRT
- Practice Both nose high and nose low upset recoveries
- Reposition Final ILS RW25L and perform windshear on final
- After landing and shut down checklist
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
- Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-66
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.17. Lesson plan 8.17 – B737 NG SIM LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.17 LOFT B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight fuel planning
2. Normal Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Flight Control Malfunctions
6. Icing Procedures
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B737 NG.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
- To practice LOFT scenarios
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-67
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
- Discuss on standard preflight fuel planning
- Discuss Icing Procedures
- Review Engine Anti ice operations during climb, cruise, and descent
- Review advanced FMC Features (use Route 2 for various phases of flight)
- Review Runway stabilizer and Electric Stabilizer Trim Inoperative non normal
- Discuss CRM and TEM
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on gate HAAB
- GPU available, power OFF
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW 51.8
- Fuel 20.8
- GTOW 72.6
- CG 13.1
- Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS-RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1025
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route, Depart
- RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310, Squawk 2112
- Taxi RW25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Tower switches ET326 to Departure 119.7
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-68
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Climbing through FL150 re clear ET326 to maintain FL190 for traffic
- Engine Anti ice operations during climb, cruise, and descent
- After level at FL 190 re clear ET326 to maintain FL310
- Climbing Through FL 250, Stabilizer Trim Inoperative
- Continue using manual trim
- HDAM ATIS info “E” – Z 25010KTS 6KMS 010BKN 06/02 QNH1012
- ET call Djibouti Approach on 121.1
- Vector for ILS RW27
- Cleared ILS Approach RW27and Manual Landing
- Call Tower 118.1
- Cleared to land, wind 250 at 10KTS Taxi to Ramp
- After Landing Checklist
- Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp
- (Maintenance fixed Elevator Jam)
- HDAM ATIS info “E” – Z 25015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 06/02 QNH1012
- Original Aircraft Load and Weights
- ATC Clears ET327 to the Bole International Airport, via Flight plan route,
- Depart RW27, LAKBE 1W Departure, Maintain FL320, Squawk 2323
- Taxi RW07
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- Tower Switches ET327 to Departure 121.1
- Climbing through FL090, COWL VALVE OPEN
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-69
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Climbing through FL150 re clear ET327 to turn right HDG270 for traffic, leaving FL210, resume on
course, maintain FL320
- COWL VALVE OPEN
- Light Extinguishes through FL170
- Climbing through FL250 Runaway Stabilizer
- HAAB ATIS info “M” –Z 30010KTS 3KMS 006BKN 08/06 QNH1026
- ET call Bole Approach on 119.7
- Vector, then Direct AB001 at FL140,
- Cleared RNAV (GPS) RW25L, Contact Tower 118.1
- Cleared to Land RW25L, wind 300 at 10KTS
- Taxi to Ramp/ After Landing Checklist / Shutdown Checklist
- Secure checklist
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
- Complete an Approach
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-70
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.18. Lesson plan 8.18 – B737 NG FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.18 LOFT B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise,
5. Pilot incapacitation
6. Descend, Land
7. Shutdown
8. Rejected takeoff with passenger evacuation
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B-737NG.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the students to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-71
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Ask the students if they have any questions
- Give flight plan HAAB-HKJK
- Discuss aborted Engine starts and abnormal start protection
- Discuss Weather Radar Usage and weather avoidance Procedures
- Discuss type of turbulence and turbulence procedures
- Review rapid decompression and depressurization escape route
- Discuss Pilot incapacitation (FOM ch.3.6)
- Review Rejected takeoff and passenger evacuation
- Review CRM and TEM associated with the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on get HAAB
- GPU available, power OFF
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW 51.8
- Fuel 10.8
- GTOW 62.6
- CG 13.1
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “S” – Z 16015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
- ATC Clears ET 302 to Jomo Kenyatta Airport, Via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
- SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL380, Squawk 2413
- Engine #1 HOT START
- Maintenance is called and engine is fixed
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-72
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Taxi RW07R
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Tower Switches ET302 to departure 119.7
- ET 302 cleared to maintain FL380
- CB Weather Ahead request vectors to avoid CB ahead
- Climbing through FL270 simulator operator gradually adds Turbulence and Heavy Rain
- The crew should request lower level and fly at turbulence penetration speed
- Level off FL300 and consider additional fuel burn
- One man in the cockpit
- Rapid Decompression
- Emergency decent
- After level off captain incapacitated
- HAAB ATIS info “Y” – Z 10010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 26/20 QNH1026
- Full Procedure RNAV RW07R
- ATC Vector direct ARONA
- Cleared for RNAV Approach RW07R
- Call Tower 118.1
- Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 200 degrees at 10KTS
- After landing procedure
- Quick Set up for takeoff
- Rejected takeoff due Cargo Fire (unextinguishable)
- Passenger evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- Aircraft parked on HAAB Ramp
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-73
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- ATIS info “V” – Z 16010KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1024
- ATC Clears ET 302 to Jomo Kenyatta Airport, Via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
- SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL380, Squawk 2413
- Engine #1 HUNG START
- Maintenance is called and engine is fixed
- Taxi RW07R
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Tower Switches ET302 to departure 119.7
- ET 302 cleared to maintain FL380
- CB Weather Ahead request vectors to avoid CB ahead
- Climbing through FL270 simulator operator gradually adds Turbulence and Heavy Rain
- The crew should request lower level and fly at turbulence penetration speed
- Level off FL300 consider fuel burn
- One man in the cockpit
- Rapid Decompression
- Emergency decent
- After level off captain incapacitated
- HAAB ATIS info “T” – Z 10010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 26/20 QNH1026
- Full Procedure RNAV RW07R
- ATC Vector direct ARONA
- Cleared for RNAV Approach RW07R
- Call Tower 118.1
- Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 200 degrees at 10KTS
- After landing procedure
- Quick Set up for takeoff
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-74
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Rejected takeoff due unextinguishable Engine Fire
- Passenger evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise, and Landing
- Complete an Approach
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
- Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Demonstrate standard competencies on LOFT scenarios
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-75
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.19. Lesson plan 8.19 – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.19 B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Abnormal Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. RNAV Approach (full procedure)
6. Loss of both Hydraulic System (Manual reversion)
7. Flight control malfunctions
8. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to Practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the B-737NG.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-76
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Have students do performance for takeoff and landings
- Review approach to stall recoveries
- UPRT scenario-based recoveries from sudden left or right turn
- Discuss on Loss of Both Hydraulic Systems (Manual reversion)
- Review trailing edge flap asymmetry and disagree malfunctions
- Review CRM and TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on gate HAAB
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS
- Motion ON
- ZFW
- Fuel 7.0
- GTOW MAX LANDING WEIGHT
- CG 18.3
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “C” – Z 30015KTS RVR600M 030BKN 10/07 QNH1026
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL350 squawk 1114
- Normal preflight
- Engine QuickStart
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.,
- Practice manual Climbs/descents without flight director
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-77
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Do Steep Turns 180 degree on both direction
- Practice Approach to stall recoveries with clean and with Flaps 5 while turning
- Clear climb FL310
- While climbing practice sudden left or right turn (UPRT scenario based)
- Loss of Hydraulic System A and system B
- MANUAL REVERSION
- ATIS info “B” _ Z 16005KTS 10KMS CAVOK 22/15 QNH1025
- Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L and Land
- ATIS info “B” _ Z 16005KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1026
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- ATIS info “B” _ Z 16005KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1025
- Trailing Edge Flaps asymmetry
- ILS Approach and partial Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- After Landing
- Shutdown
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS-RW 004 BKN 23/19 QNH1026
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL350, Squawk 1114
- Aircraft Reposition Threshold Runway 25L
- Quick Engine Start
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.,
- Practice manual Climbs/descents without flight director
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-78
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Steep Turns
- Practice Approach to stall recoveries clean and with Flaps 5 turning
- Climb FL310
- While climbing practice sudden left or right turn (UPRT scenario based)
- Loss Hydraulic System B and system A
- MANUAL REVERSION
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “B” – Z 16005KTS CAVOK 22/8 QNH1025
- Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L and Land
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- ATIS info “B” – Z 16005KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- ATIS info “B” – Z 16005KTS 5KMS-RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1026
- Trailing Edge Flaps Disagree
- ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- After Landing/Shutdown/Electrical Power Down Procedures and checklists
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-79
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.20. Lesson plan 8.20 – B737 NG SIM LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.20 LOFT ETOPS B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. ETOPS Fuel planning
2. Pre-flight procedure
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Wind shear during Take off
6. Climb, Cruise,
7. Engine out drift down
8. Descend, Land
9. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B-737NG.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the students to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
- This lesson will introduce trainees to ETOPS line operations.
- Engine out drift down and performance considerations
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B-737NG QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-80
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
4. ET B737 SOP
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Give flight plan HAAB- FSIA
- Have students do performance calculations
- Review Wind shear after takeoff
- Discuss on ETOPS fuel planning(FOM)
- Discuss diversion and ETOPS alternates (FOM)
- Engine fail in cruise before ETP
- Engine INOP CRZ drift down (FPPM, FCTM)
- Review single engine approach and missed approach
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on gate HAAB
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below, Cloud Tops FL300
- Motion ON
- ZFW 57.0
- Fuel 7.5
- GTOW 64.3
- CG 18.3
- Stab Trim 5.2
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “A” – Z 16005KTS 3KMS-RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH 1025
- ATC Clears ET326 ETH 879 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL350, squawk 1114
- ETH- 879 is cleared to Seychelles International Airport. MIWAS 2A departure as filed. Departure 119.7,
Squawk 2437.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-81
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
- Normal Engine Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Wind shear after liftoff
- Climb and intermediate Level off FL150
- TCAS Event
- Re clear FL330
- Expedite climb FL330
- Cruise FL330 instructors sets fast forward to EEP
- Engine fail in cruise after EEP before ETP
- Engine INOP CRZ drift down
- Engine Restart not successful
- Alternate decision – Diversion HDAM
- HDAM ATIS info “E” – Z 25010KTS 6KMS 010BKN 06/02 QNH1012
- ET call Djibouti Approach on 121.1
- Vector for ILS RW27
- Single engine ILS Approach RW27and Missed approach
- Manual Landing
- Cleared to land, wind 250 at 10KTS Taxi to Ramp
- After Landing Checklist
- Shutdown Checklist
- Secure checklist
- BREAK -
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-82
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
(Switch Seats)
REPEAT THE ABOVE AFTER BREAK
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-83
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.21. Lesson – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.21 B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Flight Control Malfunctions
6. Air Conditioning Malfunctions
7. Shutdown
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the B-737NG.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get feel for the
aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. Boeing B-737NG FCOM
2. Boeing 737NG Flight Crew Training Manual
3. Ethiopian Airlines Standard Operating Procedures
4. Ethiopian Airlines Normal Checklist
5. Ethiopian Airlines Non-Normal QRH Checklist
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
- Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-84
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Review WHEEL WELL FIRE
- Review circling approach
- Engine severe damage after V1
- Discuss CRM and TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on gate HAAB
- Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below, Tops FL 190
- Motion ON
- ZFW 57.0
- Fuel 15.0
- GTOW 71.8
- CG 18.3
- Stab Trim 5.15
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “A” – Z 16015KTS 3KMS-RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH 1025
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, squawk 2437
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
- Engine Quick Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Climbing level off FL150
- Climbing intermediate level off FL150, speed 250kts
- Steep turn 180 degrees either direction
- Approach to stall recoveries with clean and Flaps 5
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-85
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- WHEEL WELL FIRE
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “B” – Z 09010KTS 8KMS 012BKN 25/20 QNH1025
- VOR Approach RW25LCircle RW07R
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- Manual landing
- Quick setup for take off
- ATIS info “C” – Z 16005KTS 2KMS 003BKN 25/21 QNH1025
- ATC Clears ET 326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310, Squawk 4312
- Flap 5 Takeoff Engine severe damage after V1 (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- ATC Clears to FL140 on the Escape route
- ATIS info “Z” – Z 30015 KTS RVR600M 003OVC 18/17 QNH1025 RW25L
- Single engine ILS Approach RW25L
- Vector for ILS RW25L
- Cleared ILS Approach RW25L and Manual Landing
- Call Tower 118.1
- Cleared to Land, wind 300 at 15KTS
- Taxi to Ramp
- After Landing/Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- HAAB ATIS info “c” – Z 18015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 19/16 QNH1025
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, squawk 2437
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-86
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
- Engine Quick Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Climbing intermediate level off FL150, speed 250kts
- Steep turn 180 degrees either direction
- Approach to stall recoveries with clean and Flaps 5 configuration
- Re clear FL250
- WHEEL WELL FIRE
- Return to HAAB
- ATIS info “B” – Z 06010KTS 8KMS 012BKN 25/20 QNH1025
- VOR Approach RW25LCircle RW07R
- (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, flight Director ON)
- Manual landing
- Quick setup for take off
- ATIS info “C” – Z 16005KTS 2KMS 003BKN 25/21 QNH1025
- ATC Clears ET 326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL310, Squawk 4312
- Flap 5 Takeoff Engine severe damage after V1 (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- ATC Clears to FL140 on the Escape route
- ATIS info “Z” – Z 30015 KTS RVR200M 003OVC 18/17 QNH1025 RW25L
- Single engine ILS Approach RW25L
- Vector for ILS RW25L
- Cleared ILS Approach RW25L and Manual Landing
- Call Tower 118.1
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-87
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Cleared to Land, wind 300 at 15KTS
- Taxi to Ramp
- After Landing/Shutdown Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper handling of nonnormal
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
8.22. Lesson plan 8.22 – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.22 Approaches(Preparation for B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
Validation)
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-88
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
4. Air system malfunctions
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Steep Turns, Stall Recoveries
7. VOR/LOC Circle Approaches
8. Engine Failure after V1
9. RTO with Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the B-737NG for a Validation Flight.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
- Give flight plan HAAB – HDAM
- Review WING-BODY OVERHEAT and EQUIPMENT COOLING OFF
- Review Approach to Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
- Review LOC approach RW25L, Circle 07R
- Review engine fire on Missed Approach
- Review Engine Failure after V1
- Review RTO with Passenger Evacuation
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-89
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Discuss TEM on the selected events from the listed items
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on Gate HAAB
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW 51.8
- Fuel 20.8
- GTOW 72.6
- CG 13.1
- Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “Q” – Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1026
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, Squawk 1224
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
- Normal Engine Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
- After passing 14,000ft
- WING-BODY OVERHEAT
- (Normalize after QRH)
- 45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
- Approach to Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-90
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, Flight Idle
- ATIS info “Q” – Z 09010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- RNAV Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
- Rejected landing (truck on runway)
- ENGINE FIRE on Go Around
- Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
- Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “S” – Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1026
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
- Reposition final after QRH completed
- ATIS info “T” – Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1026
- Single engine Visual Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- Reposition threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “U” – Z 02010KTS 1KM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1026
- Flap 5 Rejected Takeoff / Fire /Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- ATIS info “Q” – Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1026
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, Squawk 1224
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
- Normal Engine Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-91
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- EQUIPMENT COOLING OFF light illuminates
- (Normalize after QRH)
- 45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
- Approach to Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, Flight Idle
- ATIS info “Q” – Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- LOC Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
- Rejected landing (truck on runway)
- ENGINE FLAME OUT on Go Around
- Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
- Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “S” – Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
- Reposition final after QRH completed
- ATIS info “T” – Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
- Single engine Visual Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- Reposition threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “U” – Z 02010KTS 1KM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Rejected Takeoff / Fire /Passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise, and Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-92
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
- Demonstrate proper handling of non-normal
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
- Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Demonstrate satisfactory performance in all pilot competencies
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-93
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
8.23. Lesson plan 8.23 – B737 NG SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.23 Validation B-737NG SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, approach to Stall recoveries
6. VOR/LOC, Circle Approaches
7. Engine Failure after V1
8. RTO with Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
- This scenario is designed to validate trainee’s competencies by giving both normal and non-normal of
the B-737NG for a Validation Flight.
- This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
- The trainees need to satisfactorily demonstrate all the pilot competencies and should complete a flight.
III. References
1. B-737NG FCOM
2. B-737NG FCTM
3. ET B737 SOP
4. ET B-737NG QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
- Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-94
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
- Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
- Review QRH usage and NNCI
- Review LOC/RNAV approach RW25L, Circle 07R
- Review two engine Missed Approach
- Review Engine Failure after V1
- Review RTO with Passenger Evacuation
- Discuss TEM on the selected events from the listed items
V. Simulator Set Up
- Aircraft on Gate HAAB
- Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
- Motion ON
- ZFW 51.8
- Fuel 20.8
- GTOW 72.6
- CG 13.1
- Stab Trim 5.26
VI. Lesson Plan
- ATIS info “B” – Z 30005KTS RVR600M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1026
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via flight Plan Route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, Squawk 1224
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
- Normal Engine Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-95
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Malfunction requiring QRH
- (Normalize after QRH)
- Steep turns 360 degrees either direction
- Approach Stall Recoveries clean, Flaps 5 and landing configuration on ILS Final
- ATIS info “B” – Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1026
- RNAV/LOC Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
- Rejected Landing (truck on runway)
- ENGINE FIRE on Go Around
- Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
- Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “D” – Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
- Clear for approach After QRH completed
- Reposition final after QRH
- ATIS info “E” – Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
- Visual Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- Reposition threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “F” – Z 02010KTS 1KM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Rejected Takeoff / Fire /Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch Seats)
- ATIS info “B” – Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- ATC Clears ET326 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight plan route,
- Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL330, Squawk 1224
- Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-96
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
- Normal Engine Start
- Taxi Runway 25L
- Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Auto Throttle, Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
- Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
- Malfunction requiring QRH
- (Normalize after QRH)
- 45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
- Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Speed brake Extended, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Speed brake Retracted, Flight Idle
• A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Speed brake Armed, Flight Idle
- ATIS info “B” – Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- LOC/RNAV Approach RW25R, Circle RW07R
- Rejected Landing (truck on runway)
- ENGINE FLAME OUT on Go Around
- Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
- Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “S” – Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine failure after V1, before 50ft – no relight)
- Reposition Final after QRH completed
- ATIS info “E” – Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
- Visual Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- Reposition threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
- ATIS info “F” – Z 02010KTS 1KM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1025
- Flap 5 Rejected Takeoff / Fire /Passenger Evacuation
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-97
Rev. No.4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG )
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to: -
- Demonstrate all the applicable pilot competencies to the standard on each task
- Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
- Smoothly control of the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise, and Landing
- Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8B (B-737NG ) 8-98
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY
Multi-Pilot Licence (MPL) Training
PART IV - FLIGHT TRAINING (Stages 6-8) Q-400
Issue No. 0 Part II Flight Training – Q 400 6-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Flight Training: Q-400 Type Rating
Flight Training: Q-400 Type Rating
Duration (Hrs.)
Phase Stage Stage Title FTD
Aeroplane Total
PF PNF
6 Multi Crew 20 20 0 40
II (Basic)
7 Multi-crew Instrument 20 20 0 40
Multi-crew
8A Commercial 20 20 0 40
Operations
III (Intermediate)
Multi-crew
8B Commercial 20 20 0 40
Operations
IV (Advanced) 9 Q-400 Type Rating 20 20 0 40
Total 100 100 0 200
Table 6-0: Summary of Q-400 Flight Training
KEY:
PF- Pilot Flying
PNF- Pilot Not Flying
FTD – Flight Training Device
* The phase IV (advanced) training curriculum is a complement to this curriculum and being prepared by
Flight Operations as part of type training certification separately approved by ECAA.
Issue No. 0 Part II Flight Training – Q 400 6-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6. FLIGHT TRAINING (Q-400 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 6
Overview
This stage of training is designed to introduce the students to commercial operations in a multi-crew
environment on a multi-engine aircraft in IFR conditions Scenario Based Training is used to place emphasis on
developing CRM skills such as Leadership, Monitor and Feedback and Crew Briefings in a commercial
environment. Students will complete training in both crew positions (Captain and First Officer) and operate as
Pilot Flying (PF) and Pilot Not Flying (PNF).
Objectives
- To develop IFR multi-crew skills and knowledge to gain experience in a multi-crew IFR commercial flight
operations through scenario-based training sessions.
- To apply CRM/TEM skills at the commercial pilot level to real world situations; and to demonstrate sound
risk management and leadership skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
Instructional Methods to be Used
This stage of training uses the competency-based training and assessment method of instruction along with
Line Oriented Flight Training. Crew lead debriefing and self-assessment techniques are used to develop the
student’s command (Leadership) and CRM skills.
Competency Standards
Prior to advancing to Stage VII, students must successfully:
Pass the Stage Examination
Pass the Flight Check by demonstrating:
Advanced proficiency in IFR multi-engine skills and knowledge;
Ability to serve as a member of a multi-crew during IFR commercial flight operations.
Proficiency in application of theoretical knowledge of aircraft systems, theory of flight,
meteorology, and air regulations.
Necessary leadership skills, CRM, and Threat Error Management (TEM) at the level expected of
a commercial pilot; and
Sound risk management skills and a positive attitude towards safety.
Flight Time
Lesson Total
Description Equip PF PNF
No.
FTD FTD
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.1 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
6.2 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
6.3 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
6.4 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
Basic Handling and
6.5 Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
ILS Approaches
Basic Handling and
6.6 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
ILS Approaches
Basic Handling and
6.7 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
ILS Approaches
6.8 Basic Handling and Localizer Approaches Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.9 Basic Handling and VOR/DME Approaches Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.10 (P) Progress Check Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.11 Basic Handling and VOR Approaches Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.12 Basic Handling and RNAV Approaches Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.13 Basic Handling and NNC Use Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.14 Basic Handling and NNC Use Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
6.15(V) Validation Check Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Stage 6 Total Hours 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-6) 236.5
Table 6-1: Summary of Training Stage 6 Summary – Q-400 Type Rating. * The training time for the CPT and VPT
lessons will not be added in adding the total time of the flight training and will not be graded.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.1 Lesson Plan 6.1 – Cockpit Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.1 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Captain/First Officer Duties
2. Checklist Protocol
3. Normal Checklist
4. Flight Deck Preparation – Power off
5. Flight Compartment Power Up Procedures
6. Flight Deck Preparation – Power on
7. Pre-flight Procedures
8. Engine Start Procedures
II. Objectives
To demonstrate cockpit seating position adjustment
To familiarize Dash 8 panel and switch positions
To introduce FMC, ARCDU and ICP operation
To introduce normal checklist usage
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q-400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief
- Simulator area safety briefing and training facility orientation
- Discuss normal procedure philosophy and assumption, crew duties, scan flow and area of
responsibility
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
- Pilot seat, seat belt and shoulder harness and flight deck lighting adjustment
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with GPU available, but not supplying power to the aircraft.
This scenario is designed to let the student practice the Procedures and operation of the various systems in
the cockpit.
Assume the External Checks have been completed.
V. Lesson Plan
As this lesson plan is being conducted, the instructor should ask a question or two about each system or set of
switches to ensure their understanding.
Flight Deck Preparation Power off
Flight Compartment Power Up Procedures GPU – Left Seat Pilot
Flight Deck Preparation Power on – Left Seat and Right Seat Pilot
FMS Programming simulated for the FTD Takeoff Briefing
Call “ORIGINATING BEFORE START Checklist.” C
Do the checklist on the captain’s command. F/O
Before Engine Start Procedure
Call “BEFORE START Checklist” C
Do the Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Call “START APPROVED Checklist” C
Do the Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Engine Start Procedure
Call “AFTER START TO THE LINE Checklist” C
Do the Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Pushback
Call “AFTER START Checklist (FLOW and Checklist) C
Do the FLOW and Checklist on Captains command F/O
Call “24 HOURS SYSTEMS CHECKLIST” C
Do Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Call “TAXI Checklist” C
Do Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCHING SEATS
REPEAT SAME
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.2 Lesson Plan 6.2 – Cockpit Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.2 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal Checklist
2. Flight Deck Preparation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Before Takeoff
6. Normal Takeoff
7. Climb, Cruise,
II. Objectives
To introduce Automated aircraft operation
To introduce FGCP operations
To demonstrate manual aircraft handling
To introduce Airport analysis
To introduce SOP applications
III. References
5. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
6. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
7. Q-400 Standard Operating Procedures
8. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief
Ask the students if they have any questions from the previous trainer.
This scenario is designed to let the student practice the flows and operation of the various systems in the
cockpit.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Assume the External Checks have been completed.
Discuss aircraft limitations
Discuss takeoff and landing performance calculations
V. Lesson Plan
As this lesson plan is being conducted, the Instructor should ask a question or two about each system
or set of switches to ensure their understanding.
The appropriate Procedure should be accomplished with each Checklist.
Flight Deck Preparation Procedure – Power on (APU) Call “ORIGINATING BEFORE START Checklist.”
Before Engine Start Procedures
Call “BEFORE START Checklist”
Call “START APPROVED Checklist”
Engine Start Procedure
Call “AFTER START TO THE LINE Checklist”
Pushback
Call “AFTER START Checklist” (Flow and Checklist)
Call “TAXI Checklist”
Call “LINEUP Checklist”
Normal Takeoff
Call “AFTER TAKE OFF Checklist”
Call “CRUISE Checklist”
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
6.3 Lesson Plan 6.3 – Virtual Procedures Trainer
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.3 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. FGCP operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Before Takeoff
6. Normal Takeoff
7. Climb, Cruise, and Descent
8. Landing
II. Objectives
To introduce electrical power up using APU
To apply SOP throughout the flight phases
To introduce descent preparation and aircraft configuration
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q-400 Standard Operating Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief
This aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with APU power supplying the aircraft.
Discuss normal checklist protocols and instructions
Discuss standard callouts
Discuss aircraft limitations
V. Lesson Plan
Have them begin the flows from the Flight Deck Preparation, Power-Off Procedures and complete
Originating Before Start Procedures and Checklist
Takeoff briefings are not required at this point.
Then demonstrate the FGCP (Flight Guidance Control Panel), the ESCP (Engine and System Integrated
Display control panel), the ARCDU (Audio and Radio Control Display Unit), the EFCP (EFIS Control
Panel), the ICP (Index Control Panel), the AHRS Control Panel, and all of the CRT Display Units (panel
switching). Make sure they get a chance to move the switches and knobs after proper use has been
demonstrated.
When this is completed, continue with the engine start until landing.
After landing, take a break, and then repeat the whole exercise with the students in the opposite seats.
Repeating from the beginning will be a good review for both students.
If you have time at the end of the day, practice some takeoffs with each pilot as PF.
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the operation of the Display Units, Control Panels, and switches on the Flight
Deck.
Complete an engine start
TAKE A BREAK
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.4 Student Lesson Plan 6.4 – Q-400 VPT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.4 Cockpit Familiarization Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Captain/First Officer Duties
2. Checklist Protocol
3. Normal Checklist
4. Flight Deck Preparation – Power off
5. Flight Compartment Power Up Procedures
6. Flight Deck Preparation – Power on
7. Pre-flight Procedures
8. Engine Start Procedures
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phases
To demonstrate proper usage of FMC, ARCDU and ICP
To observe proper accomplishment of preflight procedures
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Ethiopian Airlines Standard Operating Procedures
4. Ethiopian Airlines Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Review FGCP procedures
Review Taxi procedures, Nose wheel steering ON and OFF
Review climb, Level off and resume climb techniqes
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review Minimum Maneuvering speeds
V. Lesson Plan
As this lesson plan is being conducted, the Instructor should ask a question or two about each system
or set of switches to ensure their understanding.
Flight Deck Preparation Power off
Flight Compartment Power Up Procedures GPU – Left Seat Pilot
Flight Deck Preparation Power on – Left Seat and Right Seat Pilot
FMS Programming simulated for the FTD Takeoff Briefing
Call “ORIGINATING BEFORE START Checklist.” C
Do the checklist on the Captain’s Command. F/O
Before Engine Start Procedure
Call “BEFORE START Checklist” C
Do the Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Call “START APPROVED Checklist” C
Do the Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Engine Start Procedure
Call “AFTER START TO THE LINE Checklist” C
Do the Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Call “AFTER START Checklist (FLOW and Checklist) C
Do the FLOW and Checklist on Captains Command F/O
Call “24 HOURS SYSTEMS CHECKLIST” C
Do Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
Call “TAXI Checklist” C
Do Checklist on Captain’s command F/O
- TAKE A BREAK -
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
THEN SWITCH SEATS
NOTE: If you have time at the end of the day, practice some takeoffs with each pilot as PF.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.5 Lesson Plan 6.5 – Q-400 VPT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.5 ILS Approaches Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Normal Checklist
2. Flight Deck Preparation - Power on (APU)
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Before Takeoff
6. Normal Takeoff
7. Climb, Cruise, and Descent
8. Landing
9. Shutdown
10. Last Flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phaes
To complete all required procedures within in allotted time
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q-400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal and QRH Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
To allow the student to see the SOPs and the Normal Checklist implemented through a complete flight.
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0
Fuel 4.0
GTOW 28.0
CG 16.6
VI. Lesson Plan
The appropriate Procedure should be accomplished with each Checklist.
Flight Deck Preparation Procedure – Power on (APU) Call “ORIGINATING BEFORE START Checklist.”
Before Engine Start Procedures
Call “BEFORE START Checklist”
Call “START APPROVED Checklist”
Engine Start Procedure
Call “AFTER START TO THE LINE Checklist”
Pushback
Call “AFTER START Checklist” (Flow and Checklist)
Call “TAXI Checklist”
Call “LINEUP Checklist”
Normal Takeoff
Call “AFTER TAKE OFF Checklist”
Call “CRUISE Checklist”
Descent planning and preparation
Call “DESCENT Checklist”
Call “APPROACH Checklist”
Call “LANDING Checklist”
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Call “AFTER LANDING Checklist”
Call “SHUTDOWN Checklist”
Call “LAST FLIGHT Checklist”
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal and QRH Checklists
Complete ILS approach
Complete a flight
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.6 Lesson Plan 6.6 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.6 Basic Handling and ILS Approach Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. FGCP operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
7. Shutdown
8. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phase
To demonstrate aircraft handling characteristics at various speeds
To understand aircraft handling characteristics far various maneuvers
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review FGCP Procedures for (Autopilot ON and OFF, Flight Director ON)
Review Taxi Procedures, Nose wheel Steering ON and OFF
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review Descent and Level OFF technique - Review ILS RW25L
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7 HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW - 24.0 KGS
Fuel - 4.0 KGS
GTOW - 28.0 KGS
Switches incorrectly set (before crew enters FTD)
Pressurization Mode Selector Switch “DUMP”
Nose Wheel Steering Switch “STEERING”
GPWS Landing Flap Selector “10 Degrees”
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z CALM CAVOK 23/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET201 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2314
Flight Deck Preparation – Power ON/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R (with Nose Steering OFF, then ON)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
SID ASOLE 1A
After Level Off at 14,000ft have crew do various manual flight turns, climbs/descents for practice
Have crew do speeds 180KTS, 200KTS, 250KTS
Have crew fly at min maneuvering speed for
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 35 (straight and level and turns)
Descent planning and preparation
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
Reposition 6NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
(Autopilot, Flight Director ON)
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Weather info ____ Z CALM CAVOK 23/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET201 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2314
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R (original aircraft weights)
Line Up Procedure and Checklist
Taxi Runway 07R (Nose Steering OFF, then ON)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft have crew do various Manual flight turns, climbs/descents for practice
Have crew do speeds 180KTS, 200KTS, 250KTS
Have crew fly at min maneuvering speed for
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 35 (straight and level and turns)
Descent planning and preparation
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
Reposition 6NM Final
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an ILS Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.7 Lesson Plan 6.7 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.7 Basic Handling and ILS Approach Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. FGCP operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Shutdown
7. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phases
To perform ILS approach procedures with minimal intervention from the instructor
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Weight and Balance
Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review FGCP Procedures for Autopilot & Flight Director ON
Review Taxi Procedures
Review Takeoff Flap 15 Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review Descent and Level OFF technique
Review ILS RW25L
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7,
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW - 24.0 KGS
Fuel - 4.0 KGS
GTOW - 28.0 KGS
Switches incorrectly set (before crew enters FTD)
Airframe Manual Select switch at an inner boot position
ANTI COLLISION LIGHT “RED”
F/O ARCDU NORMAL/EMER switch “EMER”
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM CAVOK 20/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET 202 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power ON/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R (Nose Steering OFF, then ON)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL160, Clear crew to FL250, climb at 210KTS,
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Various turns at FL250
Descend to FL140 at 230KTS
Hold
ILS Approach RW25L & Land (Flap 15)
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN010 20/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights)
ILS Approach RW25L & Land (Flap 15)
- TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM CAVOK 20/14 QNH1023
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Line Up Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Line-up Runway 07R (Nose Steering OFF, then ON)
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL160, Clear crew to FL250, climb at 210KTS,
Various turns at FL250
Descend to FL140 at 230KTS
Hold
ILS Approach RW25L & Land (Flap 15)
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN010 20/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights)
ILS Approach RW25L & Land (Flap 15)
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an ILS Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.8 Lesson Plan 6.8 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.8 Basic Handling and LOC Approach Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. FGCP operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Shutdown
7. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phase
To discuss Takeoff and Landing performance in depth
To perform various climb and descent maneuvers
To perform LOC approaches
To perform visual approaches
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review FGCP Procedures for Autopilot ON, Flight Director ON
Review Taxi Procedures
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review Descent and Level OFF technique
Review LOC RW25L
Review Visual Landing Procedures
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW -21.5 KGS
Fuel -3.5 KGS
GTOW -25.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN180 20/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET 203 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Climb FL230 initially 14,000ft,
SID ASOLE 1A , Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Right to 180 degrees,
After Level off at FL160, Clear crew to FL230, climb at 210KTS
Various turns at FL230
Descend to FL160 at 240KTS
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN010 20/14 QNH1023
LOC Approach RW25L & Land
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN180 20/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Visual Approach RW07R
TAKE A BREAK
THEN SWITCH SEATS
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN180 20/14 QNH1023
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Line Up Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Line-up Runway 07R
SID ASOLE 1A
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Right to 180 degrees
After Level off at FL160, Clear crew to FL230, climb at 210KTS
Various turns at FL230
Descend to FL160 at 240KTS
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN010 20/14 QNH1023
LOC Approach RW25L & Land
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN180 20/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Visual Approach RW07R
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an ILS Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.9 Lesson Plan 6.9 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.9 Basic Handling and VOR Approach Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. FGCP operation
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Shutdown
7. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phase
To perform FGCP operations with no input from the instructor
To perform different climb and descent profiles
To perform various turns
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review FGCP Procedures for Autopilot,
Flight Director ON
Review Taxi Procedures
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review Descent and Level OFF technique
Review VOR RW25L using V/S(2D approach)
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN210 25/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET 204 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff (Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL160, Clear crew to FL210, climb at 185KTS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Various turns at FL210 (Autopilot OFF)
Descend to FL160 at 250KTS
Weather info ____ Z 160/05KTS 6KM BKN005 25/22 QNH1023
VOR Approach RW25L using V/S(2D approach) & Land
(Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Weather info ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN210 25/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights) (Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
Visual Approach RW07R
(Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN210 25/14 QNH1023
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Line Up Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Line-up Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, Clear crew to FL210, climb at 185KTS
Various turns at FL210 (Autopilot OFF)
Descend to FL160 at 250KTS
Weather info ____ Z 160/05KTS 6KM BKN005 25/22 QNH1023
VOR Approach RW25L using V/S(2D approach) & Land
(Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Weather info ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN210 25/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights)
(Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Visual Approach RW07R
(Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all pre and post flight duties without assistance
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing
Performance
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing with and without the Auto Pilot
Smoothly control the aircraft at minimum maneuvering speeds for various Flap settings
Complete an ILS approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.10 Lesson Plan 6.10 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.10 Progress Check Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. ILS Approach
7. Shutdown
8. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper application of SOP throughout the flight phase
To perform various climb and descent maneuvers
To perform various turns
To perform ILS approach
To perform Visual approach
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review Taxi Procedures
Review flight without the Auto Pilot, using the Flight Director - Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review Descent and Level OFF technique
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN180 22/14 QNH1028
ATC Clears ET 205 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Right to 160 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, Clear crew to FL210
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Various turns at FL210
Descend to FL160
Clear crew to fly at min maneuvering speed for
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 35 (straight and level and turns)
Weather info ____ Z 200/05KTS 6KM BKN008 22/14 QNH1028
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
Weather info ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN180 22/14 QNH1028
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights) (Auto Pilot, Flight Director OFF)
Visual Approach RW07R
(Auto Pilot, Flight Director OFF)
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z CALM 10KM BKN180 22/14 QNH1028
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Line Up Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Line-up Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Autopilot ON, Clear to FL160, Turn Right to 160 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, Clear crew to FL210
Various turns at FL210
Descend to FL160
Clear crew to fly at min maneuvering speed for
Flap Zero, Flap 5, Flap 15, Flap 35 (straight and level and turns)
Weather info ____ Z 200/05KTS 6KM BKN008 22/14 QNH1028
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
Weather info ____ Z 110/05KTS 10KM BKN180 22/14 QNH1028
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
(Auto Pilot, Flight Director OFF)
Visual Approach RW07R
(Auto Pilot, Flight Director OFF)
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all pre and post flight duties without assistance
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing
Performance
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing with and without the Auto Pilot
Smoothly control the aircraft at minimum maneuvering speeds for various Flap settings
Complete an ILS approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.11 Lesson Plan 6.11 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Basic Handling and RNAV
6.11 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
7. RNAV Approach and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
9. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To demonstrate abnormal engine starts
To introduce non normal checklist protocol
To demonstrate minimum maneuvering speed
To demonstrate aircraft handling characteristics at various speed and configuration
To demonstrate RNAV approach using VANV(3D approaches)
To demonstrate Go-around procedure
III. Reference
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist and QRH
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Review Abnormal Engine starts
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review VOR DME Approach runway 25L
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7,
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 10KM BKN130 18/10 QNH1024
ATC Clears ET 206 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Aborted Engine Start
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
After Level Off at 14,000ft, various turns with and without FD
After Level off at FL 160, Clear crew to fly at min maneuvering speed for
Flap Zero, Flap 35 (straight and level and turns)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 4KM BKN008 18/14 QNH1024
Hold
RNAV Approach RW25L
(Set the Weather at 0/0)
Missed Approach
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 6KM BKN009 18/10 QNH1024
VOR DME Approach RW25L and Land
(Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 10KM BKN180 18/10 QNH1024
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Visual Approach RW25L and Land (backed up with ILS)
BREAK
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 10KM BKN130 18/10 QNH1024
Line Up Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff (Autopilot, Flight Director OFF)
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 030 degrees
After Level off at FL160, Clear crew to fly at min maneuvering speed for
Flap Zero, Flap 35 (straight and level and turns)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
DC Gen fail
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 4KM BKN008 18/14 QNH1024
Hold
RNAV Approach RW25L
(Set the Weather at 0/0)
Missed Approach
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 16005KTS 6KM BKN009 18/10 QNH1024
VOR DME Approach RW25L and Land
(Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 10KM BKN180 18/10 QNH1024
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW07R (original aircraft weights)
Visual Approach RW25L and Manual Landing (backed up with ILS)
After Landing/Shutdown
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all pre and post flight duties without assistance
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Demonstrate flight at various Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete a VOR DME Approach and Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.12 Lesson Plan 6.12 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Basic Handling and RNAV
6.12 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. EGPWS Recognition and Recovery
7. RNAV Approach and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
9. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To demonstrate Flaps 10 and 15 Takeoffs
To demonstrate tail wind Takeoff and Landing
To demonstrate EGPWS recognition and Recovery
To demonstrate RNAV approach
III. Reference
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Weight and Balance
Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review EGPWS Recognition and Recovery - Review Takeoff Flap 15 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique - Review RNAV Approach runway 07R
Review VNAV Descent Approaches
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-44
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7,
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 36010KTS 10KM BKN180 24/14 QNH1022
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Aborted Engine Start
Normal Engine Start
ATC Clears ET 207 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2215
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
Demonstrate EGPWS (TERRAIN) Recovery
Flight compartment Pack overheat
NAV Approach (VNAV Descent) RW07R
Missed Approach
RNAV Approach RW07R and Land
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW07R
Visual Approach RW07R and Land
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-45
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
- BREAK -
Switch seats)
Line Up Checklist
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
Demonstrate EGPWS (TERRAIN) Recovery
Hydraulic pump failure
RNAV Approach (VNAV Descent) RW07R
Missed Approach
RNAV Approach RW07R and Land
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff RW07R
Visual Approach RW07R and Land
After Landing/Shutdown
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all pre and post flight duties without assistance
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Demonstrate an EGPWS (Terrain) Recovery
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an RNAV Approach and Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-46
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.13 Lesson Plan 6.13 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Basic Handling and Localizer
6.13 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. TCAS Recognition and Recovery
7. LOC Approach and Missed Approach
8. Crosswind Landing
9. Shutdown
10. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To demonstrate TCAS recognition and recovery
To demonstrate and explain cross wind landing
To demonstrate LOC approach
To perform Go-around procedure
III. Reference
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-47
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
IV. Instructor Pre-brief
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations
Review TCAS Recognition and Recovery
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique
Review LOC Approach runway 25L
Review Constant Descent Approaches
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Review Crosswind Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Setup
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW 21.0
Fuel 3.0
GTOW 24.0
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 36015KTS 10KM BKN150 19/14 QNH1018
ATC Clears ET 208 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2215
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Aborted Engine Start
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-48
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft
Demonstrate TCAS RA Recovery
Fuel Filter Bypass
Weather info ____ Z 300/15KTS 5KM BKN007 19/14 QNH1023
(Set the Weather at 0/0)
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (full Missed Approach Procedure)
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS 5KM BKN007 19/14 QNH1023 (set the weather as per the Weather
info)
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (truck on the runway)
Weather info ____ Z 34020KTS 10KM BKN150 19/14 QNH1023
Visual Approach RW07R and Crosswind Landing (back up with ILS)
Reposition 6NM final RW07R and repeat Crosswind Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 36015KTS 10KM BKN150 19/14 QNH1023
Line Up Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft
Demonstrate TCAS RA Recovery
TRU fail
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS 5KM BKN007 19/14 QNH1023
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-49
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
(Set the Weather at 0/0) LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (full Missed Approach Procedure)
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS 5KM BKN007 19/14 QNH1023
(set the weather as per the Weather info)
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (truck on the runway)
Weather info ____ Z 34020KTS 10KM BKN150 19/14 QNH1023
Visual Approach RW07R and Crosswind Landing (back up with ILS)
Reposition 6NM final RW07R and repeat Crosswind Landing
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Perform all pre and post flight duties without assistance
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Demonstrate recognition and recovery from TCAS RA
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete a Localizer Approach and Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-50
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.14 Lesson Plan 6.14 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Basic Handling and VOR
6.14 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. TCAS Recognition and Recovery
7. VOR Approach and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
9. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform TCAS RA recovery
To perform various turns, climb and descent with no input from the instructor
III. Reference
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Instructor Pre-brief
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-51
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations - Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique - Review NDB Approach runway 25R
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Setup
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU unavailable, APU power ON
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0
Fuel 4.0
GTOW 28.0
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 10KM BKN050 17/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET 209 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2223
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Flap Power Caution
After Level Off at 14,000ft , Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, Clear crew to FL210, climb at 210KTS
Various turns at FL210
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-52
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Descend to FL160 at 250KTS
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 6KM BKN007 17/14 QNH1023
VOR Approach RW25R
Missed Approach (aircraft on runway)
VOR Approach RW25R & Land
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 4KM BKN004 17/16 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights)
ILS Approach RW25L and Crosswind Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 10KM BKN050 17/14 QNH1023
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW 07R
Line Up Procedure and Checklist (original aircraft weights)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft , Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, Clear crew to FL210, climb at 210KTS
Various turns at FL210
Descend to FL160 at 250KTS
Flap Power Caution
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 6KM BKN007 17/14 QNH1023
VOR Approach RW25R
Missed Approach (aircraft on runway)
VOR Approach RW25R & Manual Landing
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 4KM BKN004 17/16 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights)
ILS Approach RW25L and Crosswind Landing
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-53
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an VOR Approach
Complete a Missed Approach
Complete an ILS Approach with a Crosswind Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-54
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
6.15 Lesson Plan 6.15 – Q-400 FTD Procedures Validation
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
6.15 Validation Check Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Standard Operating Procedures
2. Pre-flight Procedures
3. Engine Start Procedures
4. Before Taxi
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. TCAS Recognition and Recovery
7. LOC Approach and Missed Approach
8. Shutdown
9. Last flight
II. Objectives
To verify the knowledge of the Standard Operating Procedures.
To verify the proficiency at basic flight maneuvers,
To verify the basic knowledge to the operating systems of the Q-400; and
To verify the basic Pilot Decision Making and Workload Management skills in the Q-400.
III. Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Oral questions on aircraft systems, Limitations, SOP…
Give flight plan HAAB-HAAB local
Have students do Weight and Balance
Have students do Takeoff and Landing Distance calculations - Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique - Review LOC and ILS Approach runway 25L
Review Missed Approach Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-55
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review Normal Landing Procedures
IV. Reference
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather Info
Motion OFF
ZFW - 24.0
Fuel - 4.0
GTOW - 28.0
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16010KTS 10KM BKN050 17/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET 210 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start
/Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Line-up Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, clear crew to FL250, climb at 210KTS
Various turns at FL250
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-56
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Descend to FL160 at 240KTS
Weather info ____ Z 16010KTS 6KM BKN007 17/14 QNH1023
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (truck on runway)
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Land
Weather info ____ Z 16010KTS 10KM BKN160 17/14 QNH1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights)
Visual Approach RW25L and Land
-BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 16010KTS 10KM BKN050 17/14 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET 210 for a local Training Flight, Depart RW07R
Maintain Runway Heading 14,000ft, Squawk 2213
Flight Deck Preparation – Power OFF/Originating Before Start /Before Start Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Line-up Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
After Level Off at 14,000ft, Clear to FL160, Turn Left to 360 degrees
After Level off at FL 160, clear crew to FL250, climb at 210KTS
Various turns at FL250
Descend to FL160 at 240KTS
Weather info ____ Z 16010KTS 6KM BKN007 17/14 QNH1023
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (truck on runway)
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
ATIS info “N” ____ Z 16010KTS 10KM BKN160 17/14 QNH1023
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-57
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff RW25L (original aircraft weights)
Visual Approach RW25L and Land
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Complete a Weight and Balance and calculate Takeoff and Landing Performance
Demonstrate proper use of the FGCP and Flight Instruments
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an ILS Approach
Complete a Localizer Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400) 6-58
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7. FLIGHT TRAINING (Q-400 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 7
Flight Time
Total
Lesson No. Description Equip PF PNF
FTD FTD
7.1 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
7.2 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
7.3 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400VPT 2.0* 2.0*
7.4 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.5 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.6 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.7 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.8 Multi Crew Instrument - LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.9 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.10 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.11 Multi Crew Instrument Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.12 Multi Crew Instrument- LOFT and Review Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
7.13 Validation Check Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Stage 7 Total Hours (Excluding CPT and VPT) 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-7) 276.5
Table 7-1: Summary of Training Stage 7 Summary – Q-400 Type Rating
*The training time for the 3 CPT and VPT lessons are to be added in adding the total time of the flight
training and will not be graded.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.1. Lesson Plan 7.1 – Q-400 CPT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.1 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Captain/First Officer Duties
2. Checklist Protocol
3. Normal Checklist
4. Electric Power Up Procedures
5. Preliminary Pre-flight Procedures
6. Pre-flight Procedures
7. Engine Start Procedures
8. Takeoff, Climb, Cruise, Approach, Landing Procedures
9. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To review Normal procedure and checklist
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with GPU available, but not supplying power to the
aircraft.
This scenario is designed to let the student practice the Procedures and operation of the various
systems in the cockpit.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
The Instructor should brief all of the Topics listed above. Assume the External Checks have been
completed.
V. Lesson Plan
As this lesson plan is being conducted, the Instructor should ask a question or two about each
system or set of switches to ensure their understanding.
- Electrical Power Up – Left Seat Pilot
- Preliminary Pre-flight Procedure – Left Seat Pilot
- Pre-flight Procedure
- First Officer then Captain
- Call “PRE-FLIGHT CHECKLIST.”
- Do the PREFLIGHT checklist on the captain’s command.
- Before Engine Start Procedure
- Call Before Start Checklist
- Do the Pre-flight Checklist on Captain’s command
- Pushback
- Engine Start Procedure
- Call Before Taxi Checklist
- Do the Before Taxi Checklist on Captain’s command
- Engine Start,
- Takeoff, Climb, Cruise, Approach, Landing,
- Shutdown
- Last flight
TAKE A BREAK THEN REPEAT WITH
THE STUDENTS SWITCHING SEATS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.2. Lesson plan 7.2 – Q-400 VPT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.2 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. QRH Procedures (Engine Start; Electric; Hydraulic)
3. Normal Flight Procedures
4. Shutdown Procedures
5. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To review Electrical power up using APU
To review Engine start malfunctions
To review Non-Normal procedure and checklist
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis with APU Power supplying the aircraft.
Performance with non-normal
MEL/CDL
V. Lesson Plan
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Have them begin the flows from the Pre Flight Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Start Approved Checklist
#2 Engine Start
“Hot Start”
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the Procedure)
• After Start
• Taxi
• TRU #1 Fails (fixed after Checklist)
• Line Up
• Takeoff
• Climb
• Hydraulic Pump Low Pressure (#2)
• Cruise
• Descent
• TRU #1 Fails
• Approach
• ILS Approach
• Land
• Shutdown
• Last flight
- BREAK –
Switch Seats
Have them begin the flows from the Before Engine Start Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Start Approved Checklist
#1 Engine Start
Fault Hung Start
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the Procedure)
• Normal Engine Start
• After Start
• Taxi
• Generator#1 Fails
• (Re-sets when Gen selected ON via the Checklist)
• Line Up
• Takeoff
• Climb
• Hydraulic Fluid Hot (#2)
• Cruise
• Descent Generator#1 Fails
• (Does not Re-set)
• Approach
• ILS Approach
• Land
• Shut Down
• Last flight
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the Air, Engine, and Flight Instrument/Display Systems
Complete a complete flight
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.3. Lesson plan 7.3 – Q-400 VPT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.3 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. QRH Procedures (Air Faults; Engine Malfunctions; Flight Instrument/Display Faults)
3. Normal Flight Procedures
4. Shutdown Procedures
5. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To review Engine start malfunction
To demonstrate manual pressurization
To practice display failure and air system faults
To perform non-Normal procedures and checklist
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hour)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis with APU Power supplying the aircraft
Discuss engine start malfunctions
Review non normal checklist protocols
Discuss on crosswind takeoff and landings
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
V. Lesson Plan
Have them begin the flows from the Pre Flight-Procedures
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
Engine Start - No Starter Cut Out
• After Start
• Taxi
• Line Up
• Takeoff (multiple cross wind takeoff practices)
• Climb
• Cabin Pack Hot (normalize after QRH)
• Cruise
• do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
• Display Failure (no automatic switching)
• (normalize after QRH)
• Descent
• FANS FAIL message on ED (light does not extinguish)
• Approach
• ILS Approach( multiple cross wind landings practice)
• Land
- BREAK –
Switch Seats
Have them begin the flows from the Before Engine Start
Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Engine Start - Low Engine Oil Pressure after start
(fast start engines after QRH)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
• After Start
• Taxi
• Line Up
• Takeoff(multiple cross wind takeoff practices)
• Climb
• Auto Pressurization Fail
(Normalize after QRH)
• Cruise
• do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
• Display Source – one DU supplying Display
• Descent
• Clear following QRH items
• Approach
• ILS Approach( multiple cross wind landings practice)
• Land
• Shut Down
• Last flight
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the Air, Engine, and Flight Instrument/Display Systems
Complete an engine start
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.4. Lesson plan 7.4 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.4 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Air Faults and Fuel Failures
6. ILS Approach
7. Shutdown
8. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform various maneuvers
To introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and procedures of the DH8 Q400.
To perform various Non-Normal procedures and checklist
To Familiarize with Engine out
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Have students do Weight and Balance
Review Pack and Fuel Abnormalities
Review Taxi Procedures for HAAB
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
Review Climb, Level OFF and Resume Climb technique - Review Descent and Level OFF technique
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review ILS 25L
Review Normal Landing Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” ____ Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 23/18 QNH 1023
ATC Clears ET306 to Djibouti, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW25L, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 1114
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., steep turns, stall
Engine out familiarization
Low oil pressure ( no oil pressure warning)
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” ____ Z 33010KTS 2SM BR 003BKN 22/18 QNH1023
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
Flaps 5 takeoff ( practice Engine Failure after V1)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Reposition 6NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “A” ____ Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 23/18 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW25L, expect FL230 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 1114
Aircraft at Hold Point short of RW25L (original aircraft weights)
Line Up Procedure and Checklist
Line-up Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do steep turns and stall for practice
Engine out familiarization
Low oil pressure ( no oil pressure warning)
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “B” ____ Z 01010KTS 2SM BR 003BKN 22/18 QNH1023
ILS Approach RW25L & Land
Flaps 5 takeoff ( practice Engine Failure after V1)
Reposition 6NM Final
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
After Landing/Shutdown/last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.5. Lesson plan 7.5 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.5 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Stick shaker Recoveries
6. Unusual Attitudes
7. ILS, LOC Approaches
8. Engine Failure after V1
9. Landing, shutdown
10. Last
II. Objectives
To introduce the student to more advanced flying operations and procedures of the DH8 Q400.
To perform steep turns
To perform Stall Recognition and recovery
To perform Unusual Attitude Recognition and Recovery
To demonstrate LOC APP
To demonstrate Engine Failure after V1
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HSSS
Review Steep Turns
Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact not a factor)
Review LOC approach RW 25L
Review two engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure after V1 procedure and checklist
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW07R HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW - 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG - 29%
Sound - 35%
ZFW - 24200 KGS
Fuel - 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “B” ____ Z 01010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1024
ATC Clears ET472 to the Khartoum, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RWY 25L, expect FL240 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 1224
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Up, Flaps 15, 25 degrees’ bank, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 35, wings level, VS-500, Flight Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “C” ____ Z 36010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH 1024 (instructor sets zero/zero)
LOC Approach 25L - USE VNAV
Missed Approach
(allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
Reposition 6nm ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 02010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1024
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 36010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNK1024
ILS Approach RW25L & Manual Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “B” ____ Z 34010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH 1024
ATC Clears ET472 to Djibouti, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW 25L, expect FL240 10 minutes after
departure, Squawk 1224
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weights)
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Wings Level, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 15, 25 degrees Bank, flight idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 35, Wings Level, VS-500ft/min, flight idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “C” ____ Z 36010KTS 8KM BR 040BKN 22/19 QNH1024
(instructor sets zero/zero)
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach
(allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
Reposition 6nm ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition RW25L(Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 02010KTS 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1024
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 36010KT 2SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH102
ILS Approach 25L & Manual Landing
After Landing/Shutdown/last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.6. Lesson plan 7.6 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.6 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Stick shaker Recoveries
6. Inflight Engine Flameout and Relight
7. VOR Approaches
8. Engine Failure after V1
9. Landing, shutdown
10. Last flight
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform Steep Turn
To perform Stall Recovery
To introduce Engine Flameout during climb and Relight
To perform Engine Failure after V1
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HDAM-HAAB
Review Steep Turns
Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review Stall Recoveries High Altitude
Review VOR RW09
Review two engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure and Relight
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW09 HDAM
Engines Quick Started
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “C” ____ Z 29010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1015
ATC Clears ET307 to Addis, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW09, expect FL240 10 minutes after
departure, Squawk 2112
Aircraft at Threshold RW09
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 5,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Reposition to FL150
High Altitude Stall Recovery
(A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle)
Reposition to 10,000ft
Engine Flameout (relights when air start actioned by the QRH)
Return to HDAM
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 09010KTS 1SM BR 003BKN 20/19 QNH1015
Low Altitude Stall Recovery on the ILS Approach RW27
(Gear Down, Flaps 35, Thrust Flight Idle)
Missed Approach
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 09010KTS 5SM BR 007BKN 20/14 QNH1015
VOR Approach RW09 and manual landing
Reposition RW09 (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 09010KTS 5SM BR 007BKN 20/14 QNH1015
Engine Failure After V1
Reposition 6nm final
Manual single engine ILS App and Landing practice
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “C” ____ Z 36010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1015
ATC Clears ET307 Addis, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW09, expect FL240 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2112
Aircraft at Threshold RW09
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 5,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Reposition to FL150
High Altitude Stall Recovery
(A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle)
Reposition to 10,000ft
Engine Flameout (relights when actioned by the QRH)
Return to HDAM
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 09010KTS 3SM BR 003BKN 20/19 QNH1015
Low Altitude Stall Recovery on the ILS Approach RW27 (Gear Down, Flaps 35, Thrust Flight Idle)
Missed Approach
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 09010KTS 5SM BR 007BKN 20/14 QNH1015
VOR 09 Approach and Manual Landing- (USE VERTICAL SPEED)
Reposition RW09 (Original Aircraft Weight)
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 09010KTS 5SM BR 007BKN 20/14 QNH1015
Engine Failure After V1
Reposition 6nm final
Manual single engine ILS App and Landing practice
After Landing/Shutdown/last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.7. Lesson plan 7.7 – Q-400 FTD (Progress Check)
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.7 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Inflight Engine Malfunctions
6. VOR, RNAV Approaches
7. Circling Approaches
8. Engine Failure after V1
9. Rejected Takeoff
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To introduce Rejected Takeoff
To perform Engine Failure during climb
To introduce Single Engine approach and missed Approach
To perform engine Relight
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HKJK
Review Engine Fire, Engine Low Oil Pressure, High Oil Temperature
Review Single Engine Approaches
Review RNAV 07R
Review Circling Approaches
Review Rejected Takeoff
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW07R HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 14010KTS 6SM 024BKN 24/17 QNH1024
ATC Clears ET800 to Nairobi, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07L, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 3124
Aircraft at Threshold RW07L
Engine Quick Start
Rejected Takeoff (Engine Flameout)
Reposition RW07L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Clear the crew via the Flight Plan
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Maintain 14000 steep turns, stall recovery
Unusual Attitude Recoveries
• Nose High
• Nose Low
Engine flameout ( relight after QRH procedure)
Maintenance request return to HAAB to check engine
LOC Approach RW07R Circle RW25L
(Autopilot OFF, Flight Director ON)
Missed Approach
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 31010KTS 1SM BR 004BKN 26/24 1024
ILS Approach RW25L and Landing
Reposition Threshold RW07R
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 03010KTS 1SM BR 004BKN 26/24 1024
Engine Failure after V1
Reposition 6nm final
Single Engine ILS App and Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “D” ____ Z 14010KTS 6SM 024BKN 24/17 1024
ATC Clears ET800 to Nairobi, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 3124
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Rejected Takeoff (Engine Flameout)
Reposition RW07R (Original Aircraft Weight)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Clear the crew via the Flight Plan
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Leaving 13,000ft, Engine Low Oil Pressure
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM 012BKN 28/17 1024
Single Engine RNAV Approach RW25L and Landing
Reposition RW25L
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM 010BKN 27/20 1024
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Engine Flameout through 15,000ft (airstart relight via QRH)
Maintenance request return to HAAB to check engine
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM 010BKN 27/20 1024
RNAV Approach RW07R Circle RW25L
Missed Approach
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 31010KTS 1SM BR 004BKN 26/24 1024
ILS Approach RW25L and Landing
Reposition Threshold RW07R
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 03010 KTS 1SM BR 004BKN 26/24 1024
Engine Failure after V1
Reposition to Threshold RW07R after QRH is completed
After Landing Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.8. Lesson plan 7.8 – Q-400 FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.8 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. ILS Approach
6. Shutdown
7. Last Flight
I. Objectives
To introduce the student to Line Oriented Flight Training operations and procedures of the DH8
Q400.
To perform Non-Normal Procedures and Checklist
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Taxi Procedures for HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Review Taxi Procedures for HDAM
Review Departure Procedures for both airports
Review Routings (HAAB-HADR-HAAB)
Review CRM Procedures
Review Normal Procedures
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 060/15KTS 3SM BR 006OVC 16/14 1022
IFR Approach ILS 07R Departures RW07R
ATC Clears ET326 to HDAM, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2112
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Clear ET326 via Flight Planned Route
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
ATIS info “B” ____ Z 25010KTS 1SM BR 003OVC 20/18 1012 ILS RW27
ILS Approach RW27L & Land
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing/Shutdown
Maintenance Clears Fault
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Have crew enter Flight Plan HDAM-HAAB (same weights as first leg)
ATIS info “C” ____ Z 16010KTS 3SM BR 004BKN 22/18 1012
Departures RW27
ATC Clears ET326 to HAAB, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW27, expect FL240 10 minutes after
departure, Squawk 3114
ET326 Cleared Taxi short RW27
Line Up procedures and Checklist
Line-up Runway 27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Clear ET 326 via Flight Planned Route
ATIS info “J” ____ Z 200/15KTS 3SM BR 007OVC 17/14 1024
IFR Approach ILS 25L Departures RW25L
ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.9. Lesson plan 7.9 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.9 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Flight Instruments Malfunctions
6. ILS, RNAV Approaches
7. Single Engine Approaches and Missed Approaches
8. Engine Fire
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform Engine Failure after V1
To perform Non-Normal procedures and checklist
To Perform Steep turn
To perform Stall Recovery
To introduce Engine Failure during Go-around
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HSSJ
Review Engine Fire after V1
Review Missed Approaches with Engine Fire
Review Hold on an Approach Fix
Review RNAV approach RW07R
Review Flight Instruments Malfunctions
Review Steep Turns/Stall Recoveries
Review Rejected Takeoff with Passenger Evacuation
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW25L HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 20010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 1023
ATC Clears ET490 to Juba, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW25L, expect FL230 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2223
Engine start Malfunction
Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Display Panel Control 1 fail (Normalize after QRH)
45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Up, Flaps 15, 25 degrees bank, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 35, wings level, VS-500, Flight Idle
Return to HAAB
• ATIS info “G” ____ Z 36010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 1023 (instructor sets zero/zero)
• RNAV Approach RW25L circle to land 07R
• Landing/Missed Approach
• Reposition RW25L original weight
• ATIS info “H” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 1023
• Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
• Full procedure
• ATIS info “H” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 1023
• ILS Approach RW25L
• Missed approach
• Reposition 6NM ILS approach RW25L
• Landing with passengers evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 20010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 1023
ATC Clears ET490 to Juba, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW25L, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2223
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L
Engine Quick Start
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Fuel Malfunction (normalize after QRH)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Up, Flaps 15, 25 degrees bank, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 35, wings level, VS-500, Flight Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 36010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 1023 (instructor sets zero/zero)
RNAV Approach RW25L circle to land 07R
Landing/Missed Approach
Reposition RW25L original weight
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 1023
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Full procedure
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 31010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 1023
ILS Approach RW25L
Missed approach
Reposition 6NM ILS approach RW25L
Landing with passengers evacuation
ILS Approach RW25L
Missed Approach
Reposition 6NM for ILS Approach RW25L
Landing with Passengers Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.10. Lesson plan 7.10 – Q-400 FTD-Validation Flight
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.10 Multi Crew Instruments Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Hydraulic Malfunctions
6. ILS, RNAV, Circling Approaches
7. Single Engine Approaches and Missed Approaches
8. Engine Fire on Missed Approach
9. Hold Patterns
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform Engine Failure after V1
To Perform Non-Normal Procedures and Checklist
To perform Steep turns
To Perform Stall Recovery
To Introduce Circling Approach and missed Approach
To Perform Engine Failure during Go-around
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Engine Fire after V1
Review Missed Approaches with Engine Fire
Review Hold on an Approach Fix
Review Hydraulic Malfunctions
Review RNAV approach RW 07R
Review Steep Turns/Stall Recoveries
Review Rejected Takeoff with Passenger Evacuation
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW09L EHAM
Engines Quick Started
Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 17010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 1024
ATC Clears ET306 to Djibouti, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL230 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2223
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Engine Start malfunction
Taxi Runway 07R
Engine Failure after V1 (relight by instructor)
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Hydraulic Pump Fail (normalize after QRH)
One 45 degree bank turn in one direction through 270 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 35, wings level, VS-500, Flight Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 29010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 1024 (instructor sets zero/zero)
RNAV Approach RW07R, Circle RW25L
Missed Approach with Engine Flameout/Fire when Gear Up
Clear to Hold
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 20010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 1024
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition RW07R
ATIS info “I” ____ Z 02010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 1024
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Restore Engine after QRH completed and Reposition RW07R
-BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 17010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 1024
ATC Clears ET306 to Djibouti, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2223
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start malfunction
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Taxi Runway 07R
Engine Failure after V1 (instructor restore engine)
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
Hydraulic Pump Fail (normalize after QRH)
One 45 degree bank turn in one direction through 270 degrees
Stall Recoveries
• A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
• A/P OFF, Gear Down, Flaps 35, wings level, VS-500, Flight Idle
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 29010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 1024 (instructor sets zero/zero)
RNAV Approach RW07R, Circle RW25L\ - USE VNAV
Missed Approach with Engine Flameout/Fire when Gear Up
Clear to Hold
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 20010KTS 3SM BR 007BKN 18/15 1024
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition RW07RL
ATIS info “I” ____ Z 02010KTS 5SM BR 009BKN 18/13 1024
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Restore Engine after QRH completed and Reposition Ramp
Shutdown
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-44
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.11. Lesson plan 7.11 – Q-400 FTD-Validation Flight
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.11 Multi Crew Instruments- LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
VII. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Fuel Malfunctions
6. VOR Approaches
7. Single Engine Approaches and Missed Approaches
8. Engine Fire after V1
9. Hold Patterns
10. Rejected Takeoff with Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform Rejected Takeoff with Passenger Evacuation
To perform Engine Failure after V1
To perform Single Engine Approach and Missed Approach
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-45
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB-HADR
Review Engine Fire after V1
Review Single Engine Missed Approaches
Review VOR RW25L
Review LOC approach RW25L
Review Fuel malfunctions
Review Holding Pattern Procedures
Review Rejected Takeoff with Passenger Evacuation
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on threshold RW07R HAAB
Engines Quick Started
Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 01010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 1023
ATC Clears ET326 to Dire Dawa, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL240 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2223
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Engine Failure/Fire after V1, Flap 5 Takeoff
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-46
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Issue crew Hold instruction while completing the QRH
Return to HAAB
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 20010KTS 5SM 008OVC 18/16 1023
(Instructor sets zero/zero)
Single Engine VOR Approach RW25L
Single Engine Missed Approach
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 20010KTS 1SM 004OVC 18/17 1023
Single Engine ILS RW25L and Land
Reposition RW25L
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 36010KTS 5SM 010OVC 18/17 1023
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Fuel Filter Bypass (one)
Maintenance request return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 36010KTS 5SM 008OVC 17/15 1023
LOC Approach RW25L - (USE VERTICAL SPEED)
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Rejected Takeoff practice and Evacuation (Engine Fire)
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 01010KTS 1SM 004BKN 18/17 1023
ATC Clears ET326 to Dire Dawa, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R, expect FL220 10 minutes
after departure, Squawk 2223
Aircraft at Threshold RW07R
Engine Quick Start
Engine Failure/Fire after V1, Flap 5 Takeoff
Issue crew Hold instruction while completing the QRH Return to HAAB
ATIS info “E” ____ Z 20010KTS 5SM 008OVC 18/16 1023
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-47
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
(Instructor sets zero/zero)
Single Engine VOR Approach RW25L
Single Engine Missed Approach
ATIS info “F” ____ Z 200010KTS 1SM 004OVC 18/17 1023 Single Engine ILS RW25L and Land
Reposition RW25L
ATIS info “G” ____ Z 36010KTS 5SM 010OVC 18/16 1023 Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Fuel Filter Bypass (one)
Maintenance request return to HAAB
ATIS info “H” ____ Z 36010KTS 5SM 008OVC 17/15 1023
LOC Approach RW25L -USE VERTICAL SPEED
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Rejected Takeoff practice and Evacuation (Engine Fire)
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-48
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.12. Lesson plan 7.12 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Instruments- LOFT and
7.12 Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Review
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. LOC Approach
6. Shutdown
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To introduce Loss of Hydraulic System
To Perform circling Approach
To Perform Engine Failure after V1
To Perform Single Engine Approach
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-49
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Give flight plan HAAB-HSSS
Review Taxi Procedures for HAAB
Review Departure Procedures
Review Routing
Review CRM Procedures
Review Normal Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “I” ____ Z 160/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 1024
IFR Approach ILS 25L Departures RW07R
ATC Clears ET472 to Khartoum, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL250 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2112
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start Malfunction
Taxi Runway 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Clear ET 472 via Flight Planned Route
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft,
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-50
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
steep turn and stall
Hydraulic Malfunction
Maintenance Requests return to HAAB
ATIS info “I” ____ Z 160/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 1024
LOC Approach RW25L circle RW07R and missed approach
Reposition 6NM final for visual approach and landing
Reposition to button RW07R (systems all restored, original aircraft weights)
ATIS info “J” ____ Z 010/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 1024
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Failure after V1
ATIS info “K ____ Z 010/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 1024
IFR Approach RNAV 07R
Single Engine RNAV Approach RW07R
Missed Approach (Truck on Runway)
Reposition 6NM final
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing with passengers Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Have crew enter Flight Plan HAAB - HSSS (same weights as first leg)
ATIS info “J” ____ Z 160/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 1024
IFR Approach ILS 25L Departures RW07R
Line Up Procedure and Checklist
Line-up Runway 07R
Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft,
steep turn and stall
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-51
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Electrical Malfunction and maintenance requests return to HAAB
LOC Approach RW25L circle RW07R and missed approach
Reposition 6NM final for visual approach and landing
Reposition to button RW07R (systems all restored, original aircraft weights)
ATIS info “J” ____ Z 010/10KTS 1200RVR 004OVC 20/19 1024
Flap 5 Takeoff Engine Failure after V1
ATIS info “K ____ Z 010/15KTS 5SM BR 010OVC 20/14 1024
IFR Approach RNAV 07R
Single Engine RNAV Approach RW07R
Missed Approach (Truck on Runway)
Reposition 6NM final
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing with passengers Evacuation
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing/Shutdown (Maintenance Clears Fault)
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-52
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
7.13. Lesson plan 7.13 – Q-400 FTD-Validation Flight
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
7.13 Validation Check Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. LOC Approach
6. Shutdown
II. Objectives
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform Steep Turns
To Perform Stall Recovery
To Perform Non Normal Procedures and Checklist
To Perform circling Approach and Missed Approach
To Perform Engine Failure on Go-around
To Perform Single Engine Approach and Missed Approach
To Perform Engine Failure After V1
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-53
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB-HDAM
Review Taxi Procedures for HAAB - Review Departure Procedures
Review Routing
Review CRM Procedures
Review Normal Procedures
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
GTOW 28.28 KGS (62.0 LBS TOL Card)
CG 29%
Sound 35%
ZFW 24200 KGS
Fuel 4000 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Sequence of events may vary as necessary
ATIS info “J” ____ Z 160/15KTS 1SM BR 015OVC 20/18 1024
IFR Approach ILS 25L Departures RW07R
ATC Clears ET306 to Djibouti, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW07R, expect FL230 10 minutes after departure, Squawk 2112
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start Malfunction
Taxi Runway 07R
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-54
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM March 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Clear ET 306 via Flight Planned Route, maintain 14,000ft for Traffic
Selected malfunction requiring QRH (Restore after QRH)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Approach to Stall Recoveries
Circling approach manual landing/ Missed Approach
Engine Failure after V1
Single Engine ILS Approach, Missed approach & Manual Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Reposition Button RW07R (original Weights)
Switch Seats and Repeat Validation
VIII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate all the applicable competencies to the standard on each of the tasks
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Satisfactorily complete steep turns and approach to stall recovery
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Satisfactorily complete circling approach and missed approach
Satisfactorily complete engine failure after v1
Satisfactorily complete single engine approach and missed approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 7 (Q-400) 7-55
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.A FLIGHT TRAINING (Q-400 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 8A
Flight Time
Lesson Total
Description Equip PF PNF
No.
FTD FTD
8.1 Multi-Crew Instruments Q-400 CPT 2.0* 2.0*
8.2 Multi-Crew Instruments Q-400 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
8.3 Multi-Crew Instruments Q-400 VPT 2.0* 2.0*
8.4 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.5 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.6 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.7 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.8 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.9 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.10 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.11 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.12 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
8.13 LOFT Validation Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
Stage 8A Total Hours (Excluding CPT and VPT) 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-8A) 316.5
Table 8-1: Summary of Training Stage 8A Summary – Q-400 Type Rating
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-1
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Overview of Stage 8 Lessons
Stage 8:
10 FTD Lessons (8A)
10 SIM Lessons (8B)
We will utilize Addis as the home airport for these lessons.
FTD 1- 3: Review of approaches and maneuvers
FTD: 5,7,10,11,12 LOFT’s Nairobi, Dire Dawa and Djibouti scenarios with malfunction, Weather issues,
thunderstorms, TCAS events.
FTD 4,6,8,9 approaches and maneuvers with more QRH work
FTD 13: LOFT Validation with a LOFT scenario events.
SIM 14,15,16,19,21: Review of maneuvers and approaches and introduction of selected advanced non-
normal events with motion.
SIM 17,18,20: LOFT scenarios
SIM 22: Prep for Validation
SIM 23: Validation
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-2
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
This stage should prepare trainees very well for Stage 9 which is the type training, and the students should
have no issues on type ratings.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-3
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.1. Lesson plan 8.1 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.1 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 CPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre flight
2. Normal Engine Start
3. Before Taxi
4. Takeoff ,Climb, Cruise
5. ILS approach
6. Missed Approach
7. RNAV approach and Land
8. Shutdown
I. Objectives
To perform Engine start from power off until Shutdown
To introduce Application of MEL/CDL items
To introduce FMS waypoint creating and route offsets
To practice DUAL ENG approach and missed approach procedures.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
6. MEL
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-4
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Flight plan HAAB-HDAM
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp with GPU available, but not supplying power to the
aircraft.
Review ILS approach
Review RNAV approach
Review Missed approach
Discuss MEL and CDL
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 23.0 KGs
Fuel 3.5 KGs
GTOW 26.5 KGs
MACTOW 28%
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “A” 180/13 4kms 009BKN –RA 20/18 QNH 1024
ATC clears ETH326 to HDAM via flight plan route SID ASOLE flight level 250 SQ 2112
Power up/Pre- flight procedures and Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L/07R
Normal Flaps 5 Takeoff
Radar advises to stop climb at FL230 and FL230 final level due to traffic
After completing cruise checklist ,Fail one of the DISPLAY UNITS and company advises to return
back to ADD
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-5
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Vectoring for an ILS Approach and missed approach(aircraft on the runway)
RNAV approach and land
Taxi to the gate
Shutdown
TAKE A BREAK THEN REPEAT WITH THE
STUDENTS SWITCHING SEATS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-6
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.2. Lesson plan 8.2 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.2 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. QRH Procedures (Engine Start; Engine Fire; Gear Malfunctions)
3. Normal Flight Procedures
4. Shutdown Procedures
I. Objectives
This scenario is primarily designed to let the student practice QRH Memory Actions and
Procedures for various systems in the aircraft.
To Discuss effect of MEL or CDL items on takeoff and landing performance
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
6. MEL
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis Ababa with APU Power supplying the aircraft.
Discuss marginal weather and the need for Takeoff alternate
Review QRH Memory items
Review of the landing gear and fire protection systems
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-7
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGs
Fuel 4.0 KGs
GTOW 28.0 KGs
MACTOW 23%
V. Lesson Plan
Flight plan HAAB-HJKJ
ATIS info “M” 300/15 Vis 3Kms BR 007BKN 19/17 QNH 1028
Have them begin the flows from the Pre Flight Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
#2 Engine Start
No Oil Pressure
(Maintenance fixes the problem after the Procedure)
Normal Engine Start
After Start
Taxi
Inboard Antiskid Inop. Caution Light (caution persists)MEL and performance should be checked if
able to take off and land with the malfunction
ATC clears ETH318 to NBO FPR SID OKNET FL240 departure Runway as requested by crew SQ__
Line Up
Takeoff
One of the Landing Gears will not retract – LANDING GEAR INOP Caution light
Climb
Return HAAB
Descent
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-8
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Approach
ILS Approach(vectors)
Land with Tailwind
-BREAK
(switch seats)
-weather info 280/15 VIS 3kms 007BKN 20/18 QNH 1026
-Pre –flight from Power ON
-#1 Engine Start Hung Start
-Line UP
- Takeoff
- Approaching Cruising Level Baggage Smoke Warning
- crew decides to return back to ADD
- Descent
-Approach
-ILS Approach
-Land With Tailwind
-Taxi to the gate
-Shutdown
Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP, MEL and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the Aircraft Systems (landing gear ) and fire protection Systems
Conduct a complete flight
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-9
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.3. Lesson plan 8.3 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.3 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 VPT 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. QRH Procedures (Air Faults; Engine Malfunctions; Flight Instrument/Display Faults)
3. Normal Flight Procedures
4. Shutdown Procedures
I. Objectives
To let the student practice Engine System, Air System, Pressurization and Flight
Instrument/Display Malfunctions, including QRH usage
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
IV. The aircraft is to be sitting on the ramp in Addis with APU Power supplying the aircraft
V. Review AFM supplements
VI. Discuss and demo more options of the FMS
VII. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per ATIS below
Motion OFF
ZFW 25.0 KGs
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-10
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Fuel 4.0 KGs
GTOW 29.0KGs
MACTOW 30%
VIII. Lesson Plan
Begin the flows from the Pre Flight Procedures.
All Normal Procedures and Checklists should then be completed at the appropriate times.
Before Start
Abnormal Engine Start - No Starter Cut Out
After Start
Taxi
Line Up
Takeoff
Climb
Cruise
Display Failure (no automatic switching) (normalize after QRH)
Left and Right Pack failure separately
Emergency Descent
(normalize when level at FL140)
Approach
RNAV Approach
Land with Crosswind
BREAK
(SWITCH SEATS)
-Repeat the session from Pre –flight
-Abnormal Engine Start (Wet Start)
-After Start
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-11
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
-Taxi
-Line up
-Takeoff
-Climb
-Cruise
-Display Failure (reset After QRH is completed)
-FAULT annunciation illuminated followed By CABIN PRESS WARNING
-EMERGENCY DESCENT
-Approach
-RNAV Approach
-Land with Crosswind
Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Follow instructions and directions from the instructor
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and QRH Checklists
Demonstrate knowledge of the Air, Engine, Pressurization and Flight Instrument/Display Systems
Demonstrate proper usage of Memory items
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-12
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.4. Lesson plan 8.4 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.4 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. ILS Approach (full procedure)
6. Missed Approach (full procedure)
7. VOR/LOC Approach
8. Missed approach
9. Shutdown
I. Objectives
To practice ILS and non-ILS Approaches
To practice ILS missed approach procedure
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-13
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
To familiarize the use of QRH
To practice the different Maneuvers of the DH8 Q400.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions.
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Have students do Weight and Balance
Review Takeoff Flap 5 & Flap 15 Procedures
Review Minimum Maneuvering Speeds
Review ILS RW 25L
Review LOC and VOR Approaches
Review Missed Approaches
Review Normal Landing Procedures
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, CAVOK
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-14
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
V. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “C” – Z 30015KTS RVR400M 010BKN 20/20 QNH1025
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 3KMS -RA 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
“ASOLE ONE” SID Departure, Maintain FL350, Squawk 1114
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Have crew do speeds 200KTS, 240KTS
Return to HAAB
One of the PITOT Tubes Blockage resulting in IAS mismatch message on PFD (do not Reset )
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 2KMS –RA 003BKN 22/20 QNH1021
ILS Approach RW25L
Missed Approach (full procedure)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 2KMS -RW 003BKN 22/18 QNH1021
Vectoring ILS Approach RW25L and Land
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1021
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
Climb to 14000 feet
STEEP TURN and Stick shaker recoveries
Return back To ADD
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1021
LOC Approach Runway 25L
Missed Approach(vehicle on the runway)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-15
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Vectors for another LOC approach
Time permitting exercise more Visual Approaches by repositioning on final
-BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 3KMS -RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE ONE SID Departure, Maintain FL350, Squawk 1114
Aircraft Reposition Threshold Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do Steep Turn and Stick Shaker Recoveries
Have crew do speeds 200KTS, 250KTS, 300KTS
ALT MISMATCH message on PFD
Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 2KMS -RA 003BKN 22/20 QNH1021
Full Procedure ILS Approach RW25L and Land
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RA 009BKN 22/18 QNH1021
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RA 012BKN 22/18 QNH1021
VOR Approach runway 25L and Land
Reposition on Final and Exercise More Visual Approaches
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-16
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-17
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.5. Lesson plan 8.5 – Q-400 FTD LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.5 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to Introduce the Trainees with LOFT
To practice TCAS event handling and proper callouts.
To practice inflight icing procedures
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Flight plan HAAB – HDAM
Discuss Fuel Planning
Discuss Takeoff, En route, Destination Alternate Airports weather Requirements
Discuss En route Procedures during Any LOFT flight
Discuss Diversion
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-18
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Review ICE PROTECTION System and ICE protection usage
Review CRM/TEM issues
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate 7
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
ATIS info “M” – Z 10015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH 1023
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1022
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L,
ASOLE 1B Sid Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 1224
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Intermediate level off at FL180, TRAFFIC ADVISORY followed by RESOLUTION ADVISORY.
CRUISE AT FL 250
The whole Cruise flight should be Flown IN ICING conditions
Approaching Lakbe Change to Djibouti and continue with Djibouti
Weather info For HDAM ILS Approach RWY 27 180/15 4KMs 006BKN 30/19 QNH 1009
Land
After landing and shutdown
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-19
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
-BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info HDAM 180/15KTS 5KMS 008BKN 28/16 QNH1010
ATC Clears ET363 to the HAAB , via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW09,
LAKBE Departure, maintain FL240, Squawk
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 09
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Level off at 24000ft
ICING conditions with ICE DETECTED Advisory On ED
Weather info ____ Z 340/15KTS Vis 3KMs BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1024
Intermediate level off at FL200 during descent, TRAFFIC ADVISORY followed by RESOLUTION
ADVISORY.
ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
After Landing Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklis
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-20
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.6. Lesson plan 8.6 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.6 Approaches & Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures Engine Start Procedures
2. Before Taxi
3. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
4. Steep Turns, Stickshaker Recoveries
5. VOR,LOC Approaches
6. Engine Failure After V1
I. Objectives
To practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the DH8 Q400.
To practice V1 cut procedure
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a
feel for the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review VOR Approach RWY 25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-21
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Review LOC Approach RWY 25L
Review Two Engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure after V1
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per below
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 100/15KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ETH362 to HDAM , via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2112
Taxi RWY25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew level off at 14000ft
45 degree bank turn in each direction 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
A/P Engaged ,Gear Up, Flaps UP ,Flight Idle
A/P Engaged ,Gear Down, Flaps 15, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged ,Gear Down , Flaps 35 ,Flight Idle (reposition 6NM on the ILS)
-Climb 14000ft
-Company requests crew to return back to ADD
-Weather info 300/15 5KMs 008BKN 20/16 QNH 1022 (instructor sets zero/zero)
-LOC Approach 25L
-Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-22
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
-allow for full procedure then return for second Approach
-VOR approach and Landing
-Reposition RWY25L (original weight)
-weather info 160/10 2KMs BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1022
-Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure After V1 , before 50ft – no relight)
-Restore Engine After QRH completed
-Same Weather info As Departure
-ILS Approach and Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 300/15KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1022
ATC Clears ETH362 to the HDAM Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RWY25L
ASOLE1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2410 Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
POWER UP /Pre-Flight Procedures and Checklist
Normal Engine Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew level off at 14000ft
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged , Gear Up, Flaps Up, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 15, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged ,Gear Down, Flaps 35, Flight Idle(Reposition 6NM final on the ILS)
Climb 14000ft
Return to HAAB(requested by company)
Weather Info 330/15KTS 5KMs 008BKN 20/16 QNH 1022(instructor sets zero/zero)
LOC Approach RWY 25L
Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-23
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
(allow full procedure ,then return for second approach)
VOR Approach RWY25L and landing
Reposition RWY25L(original aircraft weight)
Weather info 160/10KTS 2KMs 004BKN 20/16 QNH1022
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure After V1, before 50ft- no relight)
Restore Engine after QRH completed
Weather info same as Departure
ILS Approach RWY25L and Landing
After Landing Checklist
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Perform the Maneuvers with in the Standard Deviations
Demonstrate good Workload management during An engine failure after V1
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-24
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.7. Lesson plan 8.7 – Q-400 FTD-LOFT
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.7 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Shutdown
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the DH8 Q400.
To practice TCAS event proper callouts and maneuvers.
To practice weather radar usage and weather avoidance
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HDAM
Discuss Weather Avoidance and flights In to Turbulence
Discuss Suitable and Adequate Airports
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-25
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Review Navigation System(Weather Radar)
Review CRM/TEM issues
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per below
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.5 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.5 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS RVR400M 010BKN 20/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET364 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2112 Taxi RW25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ET364 to Departure 119.7
Have crew level off at FL150 due to Traffic the TCAS Event
Clear of conflict resume climb and Expedite the climb to FL250
During climb and Cruise give Weather Events and Turbulence
HDAM Weather info ____ Z 190/15KTS 6KMS 010BKN 31/20 QNH1010
ETH364 call Djibouti Approach on 121.1
VOR Approach RWY09 via UNBAD or DTI
Missed Approach
Another VOR Approach and Landing
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-26
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
(Switch seats)
Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp
HDAM Weather info ____ Z 25015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/20 QNH1012
Original Aircraft Load and Weights
ATC Clears ET365 to the Bole International Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart
RW27 LAKBE 1W Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 2323
Taxi RW27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ET365 to Departure 121.1
Intermediate level off at FL100 due to Traffic, then TCAS Event
Clear of traffic Resume climb and Expedite the climb to FL240
Add En Weather and Turbulence
minutes after level off at cruise, FUEL FILTER BYPASS light (engine still running normally)
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 320/15KTS 4KMS 009BKN 19/16 QNH1025 LOC RWY25L
Missed Approach
Vectoring Another LOC Approach RWY2L
Land
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Demonstrate good Situational Awareness during en route weather avoidance
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-27
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Should be able to complete VOR and LOC Approaches to a landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-28
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.8. Lesson plan 8.8 – Q-400 FTD-Approach and Maneuvers
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.8 Approaches and Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Inflight Engine Shutdown
5. Inflight engine start
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice the different maneuvers
To familiarize with the use of QRH
To enhance Aircraft handling skills during non-normal and emergency scenarios
To practice circling approaches
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HDAM
Review Inflight Engine shutdown procedures and inflight Air start considerations
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-29
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Review Circle to Land Approaches
Review Engine Failure/Fire after V1 Procedures
Review CRM/TEM
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per below
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 340/15KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET362 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B
Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2112
Taxi RWY25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Level off at 14000ft and Exercise Steep Turns and Stickshaker Recoveries
Resume Climb to FL250 ,One Engine Flameout During the climb
Inflight Engine Restart ,However Company requests return to ADD
Weather info 160/15 6KMs 013BKN 22/15 QNH1025 RNAV25L Circle to Land 07R
Land
Reposition Threshold RWY25L(original weight)
Engine Fire After V1(fire doesn’t extinguish)
Complete the whole approach and checklist
RNAV 25L and Land
Evacuation
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-30
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Aircraft at Threshold RWY25L (original aircraft weight)
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 340/15 5KMs 007BKN 20/16 QNH1026
ETH362 cleared to HDAM via flight plan route to climb FL230 departure RWY25L ASOLE1B sq2410
Normal Flap 5 takeoff
Level off at 14000ft , Exercise Steep Turns and Stickshaker recoveries
Resume Climb to FL230 ,One Engine Flameout during the climb
Successful inflight air restart however company requests return to HAAB
Weather info 340/15 6KMs 011BKN 20/14 QNH1025 LOC 25L Circle to land 07R
Land
Reposition RWY25L (original aircraft weight)
Engine Failure After V1 (no relight)
Vectoring ILS ,Non Extinguishable Fire After Landing
Evacuation
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Accomplish memory items for an engine Failure/Fire
Conduct a Circling Approach to a Landing
Smoothly control the aircraft for Takeoff and Landing with one engine inop
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-31
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.9. Lesson plan 8.9 – Q-400 FTD- Approaches and Maneuvers
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.9 Approaches and Maneuvers Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Inflight Engine FAILURE and simulated FORCED LANDING
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the DH8 Q400.
To demonstrate inflight engine failare and simulated forced landing
To demonstrate the use of SMOKE checklist on the QRH
To familiarize with manual pressurization and emergency descent procedures
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HDAM
Forced Landing Both Eng. Inop – QRH procedures Discuss Diversion
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-32
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
SMOKE procedure and captain’s emergency authority
CRM
II. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather below
Motion OFF
ZFW - 23.5KGS
Fuel - 3.8 KGS
GTOW - 27.3 KGS
MACTOW -27%
III. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 10015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET800 to HDAM, via Flight Plan Route, Depart 07R ASOLE1A Departure, Maintain
FL250, Squawk 2240
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ETH364 to Departure 119.7
ETH364 cleared to maintain FL250
Climbing through FL190 Instructor gradually adds turbulence to become Moderate by FL210
#1 & #2 ENG FADEC FAIL(warning light) just before reaching the cruising level
Crew decides to return to HAAB
Weather Info 160/15 CAVOK 23/15 QNH1027
ALL rwys available for FORCED LANDING
RESET simulator and slew to FL250.
FAULT ADVISORY and Manual Pressurization (initially controllable manually) then Fuselage doors
and CABIN PRESS Warning
Emergency Descent(two man in the COCKPIT)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-33
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Icing Conditions during the descent
Crew should consult the Depressurization Escape Route and return to HAAB
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 12015KTS 12KMS 110BKN 26/20 QNH1026 ILS 25L circle to land
RW07R
Maintain FL140
Cleared ILS RW25L circle RW07R
Contact Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 160 at 15KTS Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
IV. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 10015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET800 to HDAM, via Flight Plan Route, Depart 07R ASOLE1A Departure, Maintain
FL250, Squawk 2240
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ETH364 to Departure 119.7
ETH364 cleared to maintain FL250
Climbing through FL190 Instructor gradually adds turbulence to become Moderate by FL210
#1 & #2 ENG FADEC FAIL(warning light) just before reaching the cruising level
Crew decides to return to HAAB
Weather Info 160/15 CAVOK 23/15 QNH1027
ALL RWYs available for FORCED LANDING
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-34
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
RESET simulator and reposition at Take off point RW07R
Depart 07R ASOLE1A Departure
Crossing FL180, source unidentified SMOKE
The crew decides to turn back to ADD.
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 10KMS 110BKN 26/20 QNH1026 ILS 25L circle to land
RW07R
Cleared ILS RW25L circle RW07R
Contact Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 160 at 15KTS Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
V. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Demonstrate proper use of QRH FORCED LANDING procedures
Proper use of SOP procedures during manual pressurization and emergency descent
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-35
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.10. Lesson plan 8.10 – Q-400 FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.10 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Shutdown
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the DH8 Q400.
To familiarize with TCAS events proper callout and handling
To enhance the proper use of QRH on hydraulic malfunctions.
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HKJK
Review Hydraulics System
Review CRM/TEM issues
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-36
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Discuss Takeoff Alternate Requirements
Review Engine Start with Battery Procedures
Discuss Weather Avoidance Techniques
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per Weather below
Motion OFF
ZFW - 24.6KGS
Fuel - 4.2 KGS
GTOW - 28.1KGS
MACTOW – 31%
APU is differed (inop)
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 130/15KTS RVR400M 003KN 18/16 QNH1027
ATC Clears ET318 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R SHALA 1A
Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 3442
Taxi 07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ETH318 to Departure 119.7
Intermediate level off at FL150 due to Traffic, TCAS Event
Once clear of traffic resume to FL240.Climbing through FL150 Add Turbulence and Thunderstorm
Cruise
Icing condition along the route with Thunderstorm
Half way along the route HYDRAULICS #2 start leaking
Crew decides to continue to NBO
HKJK Weather info 080/10 6KMs 130FEW 28/12 QNH1018
ILS Z OR W RWY06
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-37
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Land
Shutdown Checklist on the Runway(no steering and hence get towed to the gate)
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Aircraft parked on HKJK Ramp (Maintenance fixed Hydraulics problem)
ZFW 23.4 FUEL 4.0 GTWO 27.4 MACTOW 21%
Weather info RWY06 210/15 4KMs 006BKN 30/23 QNH1022
Engine Start with Battery (APU is differed and No GPU)
ETH319 cleared to HAAB via Flight Plan Route FL250 RWY06 SID LOTAS1Z SQ6012
Reposition to Threshold RWY06
Takeoff RWY06
Radar Advises to initially Stop Climb at FL120 due to Traffic ,TCAS Event
Clear of conflict ,Resume Climb to FL50 .instructor increases turbulence during the climb
Thunderstorm along the route after Cruising
Approaching HAAB ,#1 Hydraulics starts leaking hence resulting total loss of the system during the
descent
Crew requests Holding to complete the checklist and preparation
Weather info 110/10 5KMs 009BKN 21/15 QNH1026
RNAVZ 07R
Landing with #1 HYD System loss
Shutdown checklist on the Runway(gets towed to the gate)
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-38
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Demonstrate Proper planning and Coordination to complete tasks with the encountered
malfunctions
Demonstrate Good CRM and Coordination with Company for Better Decision Making
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-39
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.11. Lesson plan 8.11: Q-400 FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.11 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
I. Objectives
To practice more Line Oriented Flight Trainings on the DH8 Q400.
To enhance the use of QRH on non normal events related to different systems
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Marginal Weather
Review VOR DME Approach RWY09/27
Review Circling Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-40
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Review Flight Control System
Review Fire Protection System
Review Missed Approach
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB ,No GPU
Day Visual, Weather as per lesson plan
Motion OFF
ZFW 23.7 KGS
Fuel 3.9 KGS
GTOW 27.6 KGS
MACTOW 28%
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 200/15KTS 2KMS –RA 006BKN 20/18 QNH1024
ATC Clears ET364 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L,
ASOLE 1B Sid Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2337
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Cruise
En route Weather and Turbulence
Approaching Position Lakbe, BAGGAGE SMOKE WARNING
Crew continues to HDAM
Weather info 300/15 4KMs 010BKN 29/18 QNH1009 VOR RWY09 Circle to Land RWY27
Missed Approach RWY27( follow full missed approach)
Vectoring ILS27
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-41
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Land
Taxi to the Gate
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Aircraft parked at the Gate
ZFW 23.5 FUEL 3.8 GTOW 27.3 MACTOW 33%
Weather info ____ Z 360/18KTS 5KMS 008BKN 30/16 QNH1011
ATC Clears ET365 to HAAB , via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW09/27, LAKBE Departure, Maintain
FL240, Squawk 4113
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Passing FL170 flight control Problem(ROLL SPLR INBD HYD AND ROLL SPLR OUTBD HYD)
(IOCC advises crew to continue to ADD)
En Route Turbulence and Weather
Landing Performance checked at ADD
Weather info HAAB 280/10 2KMs 006BKN 19/17 QNH1028 RNAV Z 25L
Missed Approach (instructor sets weather 0/0)
ILS Approach RW25L and Landing
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of memory items
Demonstrate good knowledge of the flight control and fire protection systems
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
5. Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-42
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-43
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
8.12. Lesson plan 8.12 – Q-400 FTD-Loft
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.12 LOFT Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Non normal checklist usage
6. ILS Approach (full procedure)
7. Shutdown
I. Objectives
To practice more Line Oriented Flight Training of the Q400.
To enhance the use of QRH for non-normal events related to different systems
To enhance TCAS event proper callout and handling
This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel
for the aircraft and its handling.
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Takeoff Flap 5 & Flap 15 Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-44
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Hydraulic malfunctions
Sick Passengers in Flight
Review Diversion Strategy
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion OFF
ZFW 24.2 KGS
Fuel 3.9 KGS
GTOW 28.1 KGS
MACTOW 23%
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 160/15KTS 3KMS -RA 007BKN 19/17 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET364 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B
Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2424
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft due to Traffic ,TCAS event
Resume climb to FL250 ,turbulence during the climb
Half way between ADD & JIB, cabin crew report sick pax onboard (consider diversion)
Cruise in Icing Conditions
#1 or #2 HYD pump failure during cruise(crew decides to continue to HDAM in consultation with
company)
Weather info HDAM 360/15 6KMs 010BKN 32/20 QNH10012
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-45
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
ILS Approach via DTI
Land
Taxi to the Gate
Shutdown
-BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info HDAM Z 180/15KTS 3KMS -RA 007BKN 28/19 QNH1008
ATC Clears ETH365 to HAAB via Flight Plan Route, Depart RWY27 LAKBE Departure, Maintain
FL240, Squawk 4110
Normal Engine Start
Taxi
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Intermediate Level Off at FL120 due to Traffic, TCAS event
Resume climb to FL240, turbulence and weather during the climb
Weather and Icing conditions during cruise
Halfway between JIB & ADD cabin crew report Sick passenger Onboard (consider diversion)
Approaching HAAB “RUD CTRL” caution light
Crew continues to HAAB
Weather info 340/15 LOC 25L
Land
Taxi to the gate
Shutdown
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate all the applicable pilot competencies to the standard
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-46
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Complete an Approach and Land
Demonstrate good coordination and workload management during NNC
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
8.13. Lesson plan 8.13 – Q-400 FTD-Loft Validation
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.13 LOFT Validation Q-400 FTD 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Approaches, Land
5. Non normal checklist usage.
6. Shutdown
I. Objectives
To practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the DH8 Q400.
To enhance the use of QRH for non-normal events related to different systems
To enhance TCAS event proper callout and handling
NOTE: This lesson will be operated with the full automation being used to allow the student to get a feel for
the aircraft and its handling.
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-47
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight Plan HAAB-HDAM
Review systems (air conditioning and hydraulics)
Review AFM limitations
CRM/TEM
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Engine Start with Battery only(APU is inoperative and No GPU)
Day Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Cloud Top FL250 (icing temp) over HAAB and HDAM
Motion OFF
ZFW 23.8 KGS
Fuel 4.3KGS
GTOW 28.1 KGS
MACTOW 28%
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 340/15KTS RVR400M 010BKN 18/18 QNH1024
ATC Clears ET362 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 2112
Taxi RW25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-48
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Intermediate level off at FL150 due to traffic, TCAS RA
Clear of traffic ,continue climb to FL250
Cruise ,turbulence and weather Enroute
#1 or #2 HYD FLUID HOT caution (crew decides to continue)
Weather info HDAM 330/15 6KMs 011BKN 28/20 QNH 1012
Localizer Approach RW27 and Landing
Call Tower 118.1
Land
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp
HDAM Weather info ____ Z 210/15KTS 6KMS 010BKN 26/18 QNH1012
ZFW 24.5 FUEL 4.0 GTOW 28.5 MCTOW 23%
Normal Engine Start(GPU avail)
ATC Clears ET363 to the Bole International Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW27 LAKBE 1W
Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 2323
Taxi RW27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Intermediate level off at FL150 due to traffic , TCAS RA
Clear of traffic, resume climb FL250 ,Turbulence and Thunderstorm during the climb
Cruise in Icing condition and En route weather
“RUD 1 PUSH OFF/RUD 2 PUSH OFF” (Switch light ON)
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 340/15KTS 4KMS 006BKN 19/16 QNH1026 RNAV Z 25L
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-49
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No. 4
MULTI-CREW PILOT LICENCE (MPL) TRAINING CURRICULUM April 2022
Flight Training Stage 6 (Q-400 )
Land
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Perform LOFT flights with Minimal Crew input from the instructor
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-50
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.B FLIGHT TRAINING (Q-400 TYPE TRAINING) - STAGE 8B
Flight Time
Lesson Total
Description Equip PF PNF
No.
FTD FTD
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.14 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.15 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.16 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
8.17 LOFT Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.18 LOFT Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.19 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
8.20 LOFT Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Multi-crew Maneuvers &
8.21 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
8.22 Preparation for validation Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
8.23 Validation Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Stage 8B Total Hours 20 20 40
Total Hours (Stages 1-8B) 356.5
Table 8-2: Summary of Training Stage 8B Summary – Q-400 Type Rating
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-51
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.14. Lesson plan 8.14 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.14 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Stall Recoveries
6. ILS, LOC Approach
II. Objectives
To practice Multi Crew Maneuvers and approaches of the DH8 Q400 with full motion.
To demonstrate proper use of SOP
To perform Steep Turns
To Perform Stall Recovery
To Perform Approach and Missed Approach
To Demonstrate Visual Traffic Pattern
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Steep Turns
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-52
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact not a factor)
Review ILS RW25L
Review LOC approach RW 25L
Review two engine Missed Approach
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per lesson plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL230, Squawk 2112
Aircraft on Ramp
Geographic Fault
Normal Engine Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 35, Flight Idle
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 4KMS BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH 1023
LOC Approach 25L
Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-53
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
(allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Visual traffic Pattern
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS 4KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B Departure,
Maintain FL250, Squawk 2112
Aircraft at Threshold RW25L(Original Aircraft Weights)
Engine Quick Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 35, Flight Idle
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 3KMS BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1024
LOC Approach RW25L
Missed Approach
(allow full procedure, then return for second approach)
ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Visual traffic Pattern
After Landing Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-54
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-55
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.15. Lesson plan 8.15 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.15 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Manual Pressurization
6. Rapid Decompression/Emergency Descent
7. Single Engine ILS, VOR Approaches
8. Engine Failure after V1
II. Objectives
To practice Multi Crew Maneuvers and approaches of the DH8 Q400 with full motion.
To Identify Engine Start Malfunction and Perform Aborted Engine Start
To Demonstrate Manual Pressurization Control
To perform Rapid Descent
To Perform Engine Failure After V1
To Practice Single Engine ILS Approaches and Missed Approach
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-56
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Steep Turns
Review Manual Pressurization
Review Rapid Decompression/Emergency Descent
Review Single Engine ILS RW25L
Review Single Engine VOR approach RW 25L
Review two engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure after V1
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Night Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 20015KTS 1KM 003BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 3412
Engine Start Malfunction
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Weather info ____ Z 20010KTS 4KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Auto Pressurization Inop. (manual pressurization during climb)
Normalize Pressurization and slew to FL250
Rapid Decompression
Emergency Descent
Return to HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-57
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 1KM BR 003BKN 20/19 QNH 1025
Full procedure ILS Approach 25L
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Weather info ____ Z 20010KTS 3KMS BR 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L
Missed Approach
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition 6NM RW25L Single Engine ILS Approach Practice
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 20015KTS 1KM 003BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 3412
Engine Start Malfunction
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Weather info ____ Z 20010KTS 4KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Auto Pressurization Inop. (manual pressurization during climb)
Normalize Pressurization and slew to FL250
Rapid Decompression
Emergency Descent
Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 1KM BR 003BKN 20/19 QNH 1025
Full procedure ILS Approach 25L
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Weather info ____ Z 20010KTS 3KMS BR 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Missed Approach
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-58
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Single Engine ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition 6NM RW25L Single Engine ILS Approach Practice
After Landing Checklist
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-59
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.16. Lesson plan 8.16 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.16 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Fuselage Smoke/Fire
6. VOR, RNAV Circling Approaches
7. Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
To practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the DH8 Q400.
To Perform Engine Failure On Climb
To Perform Engine In flight Air start
To Perform Circling Approach and Rejected Landing
To Perform Visual Approach
To Demonstrate Wind Shear on Departure and On arrival
To Demonstrate UPRT Identification and Recovery
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-60
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HKJK
Fuselage Smoke/Fire
Review 2 NDB RW25L Circle RW07R
Review RNAV RW25L Circle RW07R
Review Two Engine Missed Approach from Circle Approach
Review Passenger Evacuation
Review CRM/TEM on the above events
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Night Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 09015KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/16 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET800 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 2112
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Climbing through FL150, Engine Flameout (no damage)
Inflight Air start
Maintenance requests a Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/16 QNH1025
RNAV Approach RW07R Circle 25L
Rejected Landing from 50ft (truck on runway)
Weather info ____ Z 09015KTS 6KMS 190BKN 20/16 Q1025
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-61
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Visual approach and Landing
Reposition RW07R (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 09005KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/14 QNH 1025
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Wind Shear on Departure
Reposition FL250 perform UPRT
Reposition 6NM final and Wind Shear on Approach
ILS RW25L and Manual Landing
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 09015KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/16 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET800 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 2112
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Climbing through FL150, Engine Flameout (no damage)
Inflight Air start
Maintenance requests a Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/16 QNH1025
RNAV Approach RW07R Circle 25L
Rejected Landing from 50ft (truck on runway)
Weather info ____ Z 09015KTS 6KMS 190BKN 20/16 Q1025
Visual approach and Landing
Reposition RW07R (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 09005KTS 6KMS 110BKN 20/14 QNH 1025
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Wind Shear on Departure
Reposition FL250 perform UPRT
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-62
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Reposition 6NM final and Wind Shear on Approach
ILS RW25L and Manual Landing
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
8.17. Lesson plan 8.17 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.17 LOFT Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Control Malfunctions
6. Icing Procedures
7. Shutdown
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the Q-400.
To Perform Aborted Engine Start
To Perform Flight Control Malfunctions
To Demonstrate turbulence
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-63
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HKJK
Discuss Icing Procedures
Review CRM/TEM issues
Takeoff Alternate Dire Dawa
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Night Visual, Weather as per ATIS below, Tops FL190
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET800 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 4113
Engine Start Malfunction
Maintenance is called. Engine is fixed
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Roll Control Jam (Normalize after QRH)
Tower switches ET800 to Departure 119.7
ET 800 cleared to maintain FL240
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-64
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Climbing through FL190 simulator operator gradually adds turbulence and Heavy Rain (
Demonstrate Light, Moderate and Sever Turbulence)
HDAM Weather info ____ Z 18015KTS 5KMS 008BKN 32/20 QNH1010
Full Procedure VOR 09 Via UNBAD
Cleared Full Procedure VOR Approach RW09 via UNBAD and Landing
Call Tower
Cleared to Land RW09, wind 180 degrees at 15KTS
Practice manual Landing with remaining time
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Aircraft parked on HDAM Ramp
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 36015KTS 12KMS 110BKN 26/20 QNH1024
Original Aircraft Load and Weights
ATC Clears ET800 to the Addis Ababa Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW27
LAKBE 3W Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 4113
Taxi RW27
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Pitch Control Jam ( Normalize after QRH )
Tower switches ET800 to Departure Cleared to maintain FL240
Climbing through FL150 re clear ET800 to maintain FL200, expect higher in 50 miles
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 12KMS 110BKN 26/20 QNH1024 LOC 25L circle to land
RW07R
After ASOLE ET800 call Bole Approach on 119.7 Cleared LOC RW25L circle RW07R Contact
Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW07R, wind 160 at 15KTS
Practice Landing if time permits
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-65
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing Checklist
Shutdown Checklist
Last Flight Checklist
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
8.18. Lesson plan 8.18 – Q-400 FTD
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.18 LOFT Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Forced Landing Both Engines Inoperative
5. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
6. Shutdown
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the Q-400.
To Perform Emergency Descent
To Perform Rejected Takeoff
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-66
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
To Perform Passenger Evacuation
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HKJK
Discuss Diversion Incapacitation
Discuss Rejected takeoff and Passenger Evacuation
Review CRM/TEM on the above events
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Dusk Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan, Cloud Tops FL300 - Motion OFF
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET800 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 4113
Engine Start Malfunction
Maintenance is called. Engine is fixed
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ET800 to Departure 119.7
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-67
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
ET 800 cleared to maintain FL240
Loss of Pressurization and Emergency Descent
Incapacitation
The crew should decide to return to HAAB
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 12015KTS 5KMS 008BKN 26/20 QNH1025
RNAV Approach RW07R
Vector for Initial Approach Fix
Cleared RNAV Approach RW07R via ARONA and Landing
Call Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW25L, wind 120 degrees at 15KTS
Reposition RWY 07R
Normal Flaps 5 Takeoff
Rejected Takeoff With Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Aircraft parked on HAAB Ramp
Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 4KMS 009BKN 24/20 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET800 to the Nairobi Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW07R
SHALA 1A Departure, Maintain FL240, Squawk 4113
Engine Start Malfunction
Maintenance is called. Engine is fixed
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Tower switches ET800 to Departure 119.7
ET 800 cleared to maintain FL240
Loss of Pressurization and Emergency Descent
Incapacitation
The crew should decide to return to HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-68
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 12015KTS 5KMS 008BKN 26/20 QNH1025
RNAV Approach RW07R
Vector for Initial Approach Fix
Cleared RNAV Approach RW07R via ARONA and Landing
Call Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land RW25L, wind 120 degrees at 15KTS
Reposition RWY 07R
Normal Flaps 5 Takeoff
Rejected Takeoff With Passenger Evacuation
VI. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-69
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.19. Lesson plan 8.19 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.19 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Abnormal Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. RNAV Approach (full procedure)
6. Hydraulic System Loss
7. All Flaps Up Landing Procedures
8. Shutdown
I. Objectives
To practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the DH8 Q400.
To Perform Aborted Engine Start
To Perform Alternate Landing Gear Extension
To Perform Flight Control Malfunctions
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Hydraulic System Failures
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-70
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Review ILS RW 25L
Review RNAV 25L
Review Flaps Up Landing Procedures
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 3KMS -RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L ASOLE1B
Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 1114
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Engine Start Malfunction
Fix after QRH
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Steep Turns
Loss Hydraulic System 2 (Alternate Landing Gear Extension)
Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/20 QNH1024
Alternate Landing Gear Extension
Full Procedure RNAV Approach RW25L and Land
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-71
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Flap 5 Takeoff
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1024
Flap Failure FLAP POWER Caution Light – Flaps cannot be Retracted
ILS Flaps Up ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
After Landing
Shutdown
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 3KMS -RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L ASOLE1B
Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 1114
Aircraft Reposition Threshold Runway 25L
Engine Start Malfunction
Fix after QRH
Normal Engine Start
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft., do various turns, climbs/descents for practice
Steep Turns
Loss Hydraulic System 2 (Alternate Landing Gear Extension)
Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/20 QNH1023
Alternate Landing Gear extension
Full Procedure RNAV Approach RW25L and Land
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1023
Flap 5 Takeoff
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS -RW 009BKN 22/18 QNH1023
Flap Failure FLAP DRIVE Caution Light – Flaps cannot be Retracted
ILS Flaps Up ILS Approach RW25L & Landing
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-72
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-73
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Lesson plan 8.20 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.20 LOFT Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
VII. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Flight Control Malfunctions
6. Air Conditioning Malfunctions
7. Shutdown
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Oriented Flight Training of the Q-400.
To Perform Diversion
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q-400 SOP
4. Ethiopian Airlines Normal Checklist
5. Q400 QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Give flight plan HAAB – HADC
Discuss Diversion
Alternate HADR
Review CRM/TEM issues
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on gate HAAB
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-74
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Visual, Weather as per ATIS below, Tops FL190
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 30015KTS RVR2000M 003OVC 18/17 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET118 to the HADC Airport, Direct, Depart RW07R
Maintain RWY HDG crossing 12500ft left direct Hamus, Maintain FL210, Squawk 4312
Taxi RW07R
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Landing Gear Door Malfunction ( reset after QRH is completed)
Tower switches ET118 to Departure 119.7
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 7KMS 013OVC 18/17 QNH1025
Approach is RNAV RW35
Cleared RNAV Approach RW35
Call Tower 118.9
Cleared to Land, wind 300 at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing/Shutdown Checklist
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
HADC Weather info ____ Z 20015KTS 6KMS 010BKN 19/16 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET119 to the HAAB Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW17
Maintain FL220,
Taxi RW17
Normal Flap 15 Takeoff
Tower switches ET119 to Departure 119.7
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-75
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Climbing through FL150 re clear ET306 to maintain FL190 for traffic
Climbing through FL 190, L TRU Caution light illuminates
HAAB Weather info ____ Z 16015KTS 4KMS 005BKN 21/20 QNH1025 (instructor selects zero
visibility)
ET call Bole Approach on 119.7
RNAV RW07R via Awash
Cleared RNAV Approach RW07R
Call Tower 118.1
Cleared to Land, wind 160 at 15KTS
Missed Approach
Tower switches ET119 to Departure 119.7 (weather at HAAB not expected to improve)
Cleared Direct MIWAS, Maintain FL230
Climbing through FL160, CABIN PACK HOT Caution light
HADR Weather info ____ Z 20010KTS 5KMS 012BKN 18/14 QNH1018
ET call HADR Tower on 118.3
Cleared RNAV (GPS) RW15
Contact Tower 118.3
Cleared to Land RW15, wind 200 at 10KTS
Taxi to Ramp
After Landing /Shutdown Checklist
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-76
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-77
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.21. Lesson plan 8.21 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.21 Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Approaches
VII. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight procedure
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Circle Approach
6. Missed Approach (full procedure)
7. Single Engine ILS/RNAV Approaches
8. Hydraulic Faults
9. Shutdown
I. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Line Approaches and Maneuvers of the Q-400.
To Perform Circling Approach
To Perform Engine Fire/Failure On Go-Around
II. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AFM
3. Q400 Standard Operating Procedures
4. Normal Checklist
5. QRH
III. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Takeoff Flap 5 Procedures
Review Engine Fire
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-78
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Review Hydraulic Pump Low Pressure/Overheat
Review VOR 25L, Circle 07R
Review S/E ILS 25L & RNAV 07R
Review Missed Approaches
Review Normal Landing Procedures
IV. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Gate HAAB
GPU available, power OFF
Day Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
V. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 3KMS -RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 1114
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Climbing through FL150
Hydraulic Pump Fail
Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 06010KTS 8KMS 012BKN 25/20 QNH1024
VOR Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
Missed Approach (Aircraft on Runway)
Engine Fire
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-79
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 2KMS 003BKN 25/21 QNH1024
Vectored ILS Approach RW25L and Land
Flap 5 Takeoff with Engine Fire
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS 009BKN 22/18 QNH1024
S/E RNAV Approach RW07R via ARONA & Landing
After Landing (reposition button RW25L)
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 3KMS -RW 004BKN 23/19 QNH1023
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L ASOLE 1B
Departure, Maintain FL250, Squawk 1114
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Climbing through FL150
Hydraulic Pump Low Pressure Return to HAAB
Weather info ____ Z 06010KTS 8KMS 012BKN 25/20 QNH1021
VOR Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R Missed Approach (Aircraft on Runway) Engine Severe
Damage
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 2KMS 003BKN 25/21 QNH1019
Vectored ILS Approach RW25L and Land
Flap 5 Takeoff with Engine Fire
Weather info ____ Z 16005KTS 5KMS 009BKN 22/18 QNH1021
S/E RNAV Approach RW07R via ARONA & Manual Landing
After Landing/Shutdown/Last Flight Procedures and Checklists
VI. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-80
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
8.22. Lesson plan 8.22 – Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
Multi Crew Maneuvers and
8.22 Approaches (Preparation for Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
Validation)
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Stickshaker Recoveries
6. VOR, NDB, ILS, Circle Approaches
7. Engine Failure after V1
8. RTO with Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
This scenario is designed to practice Approaches and Maneuvers of the Q-400 for a Validation
Flight.
To Perform Stall Recovery
To Perform Steep Turns
To Perform Approach and Missed approach
III. References
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-81
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 SOP
4. Normal Checklist
5. Q400 QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Ask Oral Question On Aircraft System, Limitation, SOP...
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review VOR DME RW25L
Review 2 NDB approach RW25R, Circle
Review two engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure after V1
Review RTO with Passenger Evacuation
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET522 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L,
ASOLE 1B Departure, Maintain FL230, Squawk 1224
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-82
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Flight Idle
MAIN BATTERY HOT Warning Light
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
VOR DME Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
Rejected Landing (truck on runway)
ENGINE FIRE on Go Around
Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Fire after V1, before 50ft)
Non Extinguishable Fire
Weather info ____ Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
Visual Approach RW25L & Landing
Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-83
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 35, Flight Idle
≠3 HYD PUMP Caution Light
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
LOC Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
Rejected Landing (truck on runway)
ENGINE FLAMEOUT on Go Around
Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Fire after V1, before 50ft)
Non Extinguishable Fire
Weather info ____ Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
Visual Approach RW25L & Landing
Passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency criteria
The trainee should be able to:
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-84
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
8.23. Lesson plan 8.23– Q-400 SIM
Flight Time
Lesson No. Description Equip
PF PM
8.23 Validation Q-400 SIM 2.0 2.0
I. Lesson Topics
1. Pre-flight Procedures
2. Engine Start Procedures
3. Before Taxi
4. Climb, Cruise, Descend, Land
5. Steep Turns, Stick shaker Recoveries
6. VOR, LOC, ILS, Circle Approaches
7. Engine Failure after V1
8. RTO with Passenger Evacuation
II. Objectives
To Verify Proper Use of the SOP
To Verify Proficiency at Aircraft handling
To Verify Proficiency at Executing Instrument Approaches
To Verify Proficiency at Execution of Non Normal Procedures
To Verify Proficiency at aircraft handling During Engine failure after V1
To Verify Proficiency at Single Engine Approach
III. References
1. Bombardier DH8 Q400 AOM
2. Bombardier DH8 Q400 Aircraft Flight Manual
3. Q400 SOP
4. Normal Checklist
5. Q400 QRH
IV. Instructor Pre-brief (1.0 Hours)
Ask the students if they have any questions
Oral Question On Aircraft System, Limitations, SOP....
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-85
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
Give flight plan HAAB - HDAM
Review Stall Recoveries (ground contact a factor)
Review VOR DME RW25L
Review LOC approach RW25L, Circle
Review two engine Missed Approach
Review Engine Failure after V1
Review RTO with Passenger Evacuation
V. Simulator Set Up
Aircraft on Ramp HAAB
Day Visual, Weather as per Lesson Plan
Motion ON
ZFW 24.0 KGS
Fuel 4.0 KGS
GTOW 28.0 KGS
VI. Lesson Plan
Weather info ____ Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET306 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B
Departure, Maintain FL230, Squawk 1224
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
ENGINE FIRE DETECT FAULT A #1 Engine
(Normalize after QRH)
45-degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Flight Idle
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-86
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Flight Idle
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
VOR DME Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
Rejected Landing (truck on runway)
ENGINE FIRE on Go Around
Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Restore Engine after QRH completed
Weather info ____ Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
Visual Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 02010KTS 1KM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1025
Flap 5 REJECTED Takeoff/Fire/Passenger Evacuation
- BREAK -
(Switch seats)
Weather info ____ Z 30005KTS RVR 400M 002BKN 20/16 QNH1025
ATC Clears ET522 to the Djibouti Airport, via Flight Plan Route, Depart RW25L, ASOLE 1B
Departure, Maintain FL230, Squawk 1224
Power Up/Pre-flight Procedures and Checklists
Normal Engine Start
Taxi Runway 25L
Normal Flap 5 Takeoff
Have crew Level Off at 14,000ft.
DC GEN 1 Fault (Normalize after QRH)
45 degree bank turn in each direction through 360 degrees
Stall Recoveries
A/P Engaged, Gear & Flaps Up, Flight Idle
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-87
ETHIOPIAN AVIATION ACADEMY Rev. No.4
CPL/MPL THEORETICAL KNOWLEDGE TRAINING CURRICULUM June 2022
PTS/PL556- DHC 8-Q400NG Aircraft Systems
A/P Engaged, Gear Up, Flaps 5, Flight Idle
A/P Engaged, Gear Down, Flaps 30, Flight Idle
Weather info ____ Z 30010KTS 5KMS 008BKN 20/16 QNH1025
LOC Approach RW25L, Circle RW07R
Rejected Landing (truck on runway)
ENGINE FAIL on Go Around
Single Engine ILS Approach 25L and Landing
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 02010KTS 2KMS BR 004BKN 20/16 QNH1025
Flap 5 Takeoff (Engine Failure after V1, before 50ft)
Restore Engine after QRH completed
Weather info ____ Z 36010KTS 25KMS BR 030BKN 20/10 QNH1025
Visual Approach RW25L & Landing
Reposition Threshold RW25L (Original Aircraft Weight)
Weather info ____ Z 02010KTS 1KM BR 004BKN 20/19 QNH1025
Flap 5 REJECTED Takeoff/Fire/Passenger Evacuation
VII. Trainee Competency Criteria
The trainee should be able to: -
Demonstrate all the applicable pilot competencies on each phase
Demonstrate proper use of the QRH
Smoothly control the aircraft for Taxi, Takeoff, Cruise and Landing
Complete an Approach and Missed Approach
Demonstrate comprehension of how to use the SOP and Normal Checklist
Operate effectively in a Multi Crew environment
Issue No. 0 Flight Training Stage 8A (Q-400) 8-88
You might also like
- Jar-Fcl 1 - Flight Crew Licensing (Aeroplane)100% (1)Jar-Fcl 1 - Flight Crew Licensing (Aeroplane)221 pages
- A320 Full Motion Level D Simulators RequirementsNo ratings yetA320 Full Motion Level D Simulators Requirements102 pages
- Flight Synthetic Training Device (JAR FSTD A) - Audit Check List JAN 12100% (2)Flight Synthetic Training Device (JAR FSTD A) - Audit Check List JAN 1252 pages
- 1.3-5 SAFA Checklist In-Depth D Items - COLNo ratings yet1.3-5 SAFA Checklist In-Depth D Items - COL61 pages
- CPL Training Programme Gondia Flyer A4 v3No ratings yetCPL Training Programme Gondia Flyer A4 v32 pages
- PilotMovers and Wizzair Presentation MAY2023No ratings yetPilotMovers and Wizzair Presentation MAY202336 pages
- JCAB English Test and ATC Communications Speech SpeedsNo ratings yetJCAB English Test and ATC Communications Speech Speeds17 pages
- Avoid These Flight Training Nightmares: 21 Mistakes To Avoid When Studying To Become A PilotNo ratings yetAvoid These Flight Training Nightmares: 21 Mistakes To Avoid When Studying To Become A Pilot17 pages
- Aerodrome Operations Manual - GuidelinesNo ratings yetAerodrome Operations Manual - Guidelines38 pages
- About Jazeera:: Conditions of Employment For A320 First OfficersNo ratings yetAbout Jazeera:: Conditions of Employment For A320 First Officers3 pages
- Guidance For Post Covid Restart of Operations Cbta Training SolutionsNo ratings yetGuidance For Post Covid Restart of Operations Cbta Training Solutions75 pages
- Spicejet 'S Cadet Pilot Programme: For Those Who Like To Fly HighNo ratings yetSpicejet 'S Cadet Pilot Programme: For Those Who Like To Fly High15 pages
- CAGM 1009 Guidelines On Flight Instructor Training ISS01 - REV01No ratings yetCAGM 1009 Guidelines On Flight Instructor Training ISS01 - REV0130 pages
- ADP-OPS-100-001 - Flight Operations Training Manual100% (2)ADP-OPS-100-001 - Flight Operations Training Manual93 pages
- Competency Assessment and Evaluation For Pilots Instructors and Evaluators GM100% (1)Competency Assessment and Evaluation For Pilots Instructors and Evaluators GM68 pages
- Dream Job Pilot?: The Pros & Cons of Becoming a Professional AviatorFrom EverandDream Job Pilot?: The Pros & Cons of Becoming a Professional AviatorNo ratings yet
- Missed Approach to Death: A Missed Approach Aborted, and Where It LeadsFrom EverandMissed Approach to Death: A Missed Approach Aborted, and Where It LeadsNo ratings yet
- Aircraft Dispatcher Practical Test Standards (2025): FAA-S-8081-10EFrom EverandAircraft Dispatcher Practical Test Standards (2025): FAA-S-8081-10ENo ratings yet
- Procedures and Callouts For TRAFFIC PATTERNNo ratings yetProcedures and Callouts For TRAFFIC PATTERN6 pages
- Wide Band RH Circular Polarized Antenna Design and AnalysisNo ratings yetWide Band RH Circular Polarized Antenna Design and Analysis6 pages
- Introduction To Hardware: 1 Pengantar Teknologi InformasiNo ratings yetIntroduction To Hardware: 1 Pengantar Teknologi Informasi27 pages
- "Intelligent Door Bell": Final Year Project Proposal Defense PresentationNo ratings yet"Intelligent Door Bell": Final Year Project Proposal Defense Presentation13 pages
- Electrical Thumb Rule-High Rise Building (As Per NBC)No ratings yetElectrical Thumb Rule-High Rise Building (As Per NBC)7 pages
- Meca Sheet: Remove & Install PNC-A01-002-001-01 Engine100% (2)Meca Sheet: Remove & Install PNC-A01-002-001-01 Engine3 pages
- Netact Manual For Escalation of Environemental AlarmsNo ratings yetNetact Manual For Escalation of Environemental Alarms9 pages
- Analog Compendium: Circuit Design ConsiderationsNo ratings yetAnalog Compendium: Circuit Design Considerations57 pages
- Preliminary Design of Climate Roads: Major Structures/BridgesNo ratings yetPreliminary Design of Climate Roads: Major Structures/Bridges4 pages
- As 2805.14.1-2011 Electronic Funds Transfer - Requirements For Interfaces PIN Management and Security - GenerNo ratings yetAs 2805.14.1-2011 Electronic Funds Transfer - Requirements For Interfaces PIN Management and Security - Gener8 pages
- Ford Team Reduce Costs Environmental ImpactNo ratings yetFord Team Reduce Costs Environmental Impact4 pages
